\

NATIONAL
STRUCTURAL
CODE OF THE

PHILIPPINES
2001

VOLUME 1
BUILDINGS, TOWERS, AND
OTHER VERTICAL STRUCTURES

FIFTH EDITION

Telephone No. (+632) 411-8603, Tele/fax No. (+632) 411-8606

Emall: asep@surfshop.net.ph
Website: http://www.aseponline.org

 F.OREWORD

For the protection of public life and property, the design of structures and the preparation of structural plans
for their construction have to be controlled and regulated. For almost three decades now, this control has been
exercised in this country by the National Structural Code ofthe Philippines with the initial publication by the ASEP
of the National Structural Code for Buildings. The current publication of the 5th Edition of NSCP C101-01 for
buildings and other vertical structures is the affirmation of the mandate of the ASEP to continuously update the
National Structural Code of the Philippines with the latest technological developments. While attaining a legal
status in its use as a referral code of the National Building Code, NSCP CI01-01 is a publication of high technical
value in matters of structural concerns.

The NSCP CI01-01 is not only completely new in its technical substance but also in its format. It has been
a product of a sustained effort of ASEP spanning five years and the fruition of this endeavor has finally come to
reality during my incumbency. It is therefore with a deep feeling of gratitude and pride that I commend the
members of both the ASEP Codes and Publications Committees for their accomplishments.

October 200 L

ROMEO A. ESTANERO, PhD, 1<'.ASEP, .'..PICE

President

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

2001-2002

1
~1

l Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

/I
NATIONAL STRUCTURAL CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES (NSCP)
CIO-Ol
Volume 1
Buildings, Towers, and Other Vertifal Structures
Fifth Edition, 2001

Copyright @ 2001, The Association ofStructural Engineers ofthe Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

All rights reserved. This publication or any part thereof must not be reproduced in any form without the written permission

or the Association Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP).

PUBLISHER

Assodation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Ine. (ASEP)

Suite 713 Future Point Plaza Condominium

112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City,

1100 Philippines

Telephone Nos, (+632) 411-8603, (+632) 411-8606

Facsimile No. (+632) 411-8606

E~mail address : asep@surfshop.net.com

Website : http://.~,J~.~P.Qruin~,.Q[g

The Association ofStrudllral Engineers of the Philippines. Inc:. (ASEP) is a professional

Association founded in September 1961 to represent the structural engineering community

nationwide. This document is published in keeping the association's objectives;

a.) Maintenance of high ethical and professional standards in the practice of structural engineering;

b.) Advancement of structural engineering knowledge; and

c.) Promotion of good public and private clientele relationship,

Fellowship among structural engineers, and professional relations with other allied technical and scientific
organizations.

Print History

First Edition, 1992

Second Edition, 1981
Third Edition, 1986
Fourth Edition, 1992
Fifth Edition, 2001

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

III
 PREFACE TO THE FIFTH EDITION

Ten (10) years have elapsed since the Fourth Edition has been published and it was deemed
necessary to revise the Nationl Structural Code of tbe PbBippines (NSCP) to reflect the continuing
rapid technological advances in structural engineering design and the latest seismic design practice for
earthquake resistant structures.

Tbe Fifth Edition has the following significant revisions.

In Cbapter 1, General Design Requirements, major changes in this section include provisions
where building owners are required to get the services of independent recognized structural engineers to
perform design review for certain structures, and the installation of recording accelographs for every
building over six stories (with floor area of S,SOOsq.m. or more), and every building over ten stories in
height regardless offloor area.

In Cbapter 2, Minimum Design Loads, revisions of load combinations were made to adopt the
new strength-based seismic forces, and special load combinations to reflect the provisions of the 1997
Uniform Building Code (UBC). Near-source factors are specified in seismic zone 4 to recognize the
amplified ground motions that occur close to known active faults. The Philippine Institute of Volcanology
and Seismology (PHlVOLCS) is~ued the maps showing the active faults throughout the country as
reference for determining near-source factors. Also, basic wind speeds are revised based on statistical
studies and recommendations of the sub-committee on Design Loads and Lateral Forces and on the
Electronic Industries Association (EIA) I Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) 22E provisions.

Cbapter 4, Structural Concrete, includes significant changes in several aspects of reinforced

concrete design. Shear-governed concrete walls are designed for increased forces and special detailing
requirements are clarified and improved, many of which reflect changes in American Concrete Institute
(ACI318-99).

Cbapter 5, Steel, recommendations to adopt AlSC's 1997 Edition of the Seismic Provisions for
Structural Steel Buildings (AISC-Seismic '97) incorporates on-going development of seismic design and
much of the current knowledge on design and quality assurance following intensive research and testing in
the U.S. Significant issues associated with. moment frames and AlSC's Seismic Provisions are also
addressed. Likewise, important issues and cdnsiderations on braced frames, eccentric brace frames, and
truss moment frames following much research ahd development in recent years are also discussed.

This publication of the Fifth Edition of the NSCP is a collective effort of the ASEP Board of
Directors from 1997 to 2001 from ASEP's past presidents Engr. Nicanor M. Mayoralgo (1997-1998),
Dr. Benito M. Pacbeco (/998-1999), Engr. Emilio Daniel G. Tible m (1999-2000),
Engr. Alberto C. Caiiete (2000-2001), the current president Dr. Romeo A. Estaiiero, (2001-2002),
the ASEP Codes Committee, without whose cooperation this publication wouldnet..1tave.been possible.

The ASEP Codes Committee is indebted to all ASEP members and other users of the NSCP who
have suggested improvements, identified errors, and recommended items for inclusion or omission. These
suggestions have been carefully considered.

Users of this Code are urged to communicate with the ASEP Codes Committee regarding all
aspects ofthis publication for improvement.

Man 'ng Director

Co(es Committee (2001-2002)

Nationat Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

Iv
 Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc.

National Structural Code Committee

NICANOR M. MAYORALGO BENITO M. PACHECO, PhD EMILIO DANIEL G. TIBLE m

Executive Chairman Executive Chairman Executive Chairman
1997-1998 1998-1999 1999-2000

ALBERTO C. CANETE ROMEO A. ESTANERO, PhD

Executive Chairman Executive Chairman
2000-2001 2001-2002

CODES COMMITTEE (1997-2002)

Anthony Vladimir C. Pimentel Rico P. Gomez

Managing Director, 2001-2002 Assistant Managing Director, 2001-2002

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DESIGN LOADS AND LATERAL FORCES

Emilio Daniel G. nble HI Dr. Benito M. Pacheco

(Chairman) (Chairman)

Angelico D. Andamon
Silvestre M. Berso

Arman S. Rivera
Ronaldo S. bon

Norman Daniel V. TibJe

Carlos M. ViUaraza

(Members) (Members)

EXCAVATIONS & FOUNDATIONS

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
Dr. Benjamin R. Buensuceso, Jr.
Alfredo B. Juinio, Jr.
(Chairman) Ulpiano P. Ignacio, Jr.
(Co-Chairmen)
Dr. Salvador F. Reyes, Jr.

Dr. Alexis A. Acacio

Dr. Romeo A. Estaiiero

Jorge P. Genota
Jorge P. Genota

(Members) Joseph Ramil I. Manalo

Anthony Vladimir C. Pimentel

(Members)

STEEL
WOOD
MASONRY
Romer S. Montoya
Roberto P. Bernardo
Eduardo C. Arrojado
Adam C. Abinales
(Chairman) (Chairman)
(Co-Chairmen)
Dr. Joaquin Siopongco Edna P. Arrojado

Dr. Romeo A. Estaiiero

Joseph Ramil L Manalo Raynante S. Deapera

Edna Grace A. Abinales

Renato R. Aguilar Ronaldo. S. bon

Artemio C. Bautista, Jr.

(Members) Anthony Vladimir C. Pimentel

Rico P. Gomez
(Members)
Ma. Teresa M. Montes

(Members)

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

v
 ASEP

OFFICERS and DIRECTORS

2001-2002

ROMEO A ESTANERO, Ph. D

Presitknt

ADAM C. ABINALES
Vice-President

MIRIAM LUSICA-TAMAYO
Secretary

RONALDO S. ISON
Treasurer

RICO P. GOMEZ
Director

CESAR C. PABALAN
Director

JORGE P. GENOTA
Director

ROLEZA JEAN V. MARZAN

Director

JOSEPH RAMIL L MANALO

Director

ANTHONY VLADIMIR C. PIMENTEL

Director

ALBERTO C. CANETE
Immediate Past President

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

VI
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

101- Title, Pwpose and Scope ........ .... ....... 1-1 106- Specifications, Drawings, and

102 - Definitions ............................................ 1-2 Calculations ......... .............. ....... .... .....
/

1-6

103 - Classification of Buildings ................. 1-3 107- Structural Inspections and Tests ....... 1-8

104 - Design Requirements ...... ........ ..... ........ 1-4 108- Existing Structures .............. :.:............ 1-13

105 - Posting and Instrumentation ............... 1-6 109 - Grading and Earthwork ... .................... 1-14

Chapter 2
MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS AND LATERAL FORCES

20 t - General ........................................... ...... 2-1 205 - Live Loads .... ........................ ................ 2-7

202 - Definitions .... ..... ................................... 2-1 206 - Other Minimum Loads ............... ........ 2-12

203 - Combinations of Loads .... ...... ...... ....... 2-3 207 WindLoads ........................................ 2-14

204 - Dead Loads .......... ................................. 2-4 208- Earthquake Loads ............................... 2-35

Chapter 3
FOUNDATIONS AND EXCAVATIONS

301- General .................................................... 3-1 305- Footings ................................................... 3-7

302 - Excavation and Fills .... .......................... 3-1 306 - Piles - General Requirements ................. 3-10

303 - Foundation Investigation ....... ................. 3-4 307 - Specific Pile Requirements .................... 3-12

304- Allowable Foundation and Lateral 308. Foundation Construction-Seismic

Pressures ............................................... 3-6 Zone 4 .................................................... 3-14

National structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

VIII
Chapter 4

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

401- Scope ..................................................... 4-1

.415 Footings ................................................. 4-71

402 - Defmitions ............... ..... ........................... 4-1

416 - Precast Concrete ............ ............ ............ 4-73

403 - Specifications for Tests and Materials ...... 4-4

417 - Composite Concrete Flexural Members... 4-76

404 - Durability Requirements ...... ................... 4-9

418 - Prestressed Concrete .............................. 4-78

405 Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing .... 4... 11

419- Shells and Folded Plates Members .......... 4-86

406- Formwork. Embedded Pipes and

420 - Strength Evaluation of Existing

Construction Joints ................................ 4.16

Structures ............................................... 4-88

407 - Details of Reinforcement ....................... 418

421- Special Provisions for Seismic

408- Analysis and Design .............................. 4-24

Design ............... ...................................... 4-90

409 - Strength and Serviceability

422 - Structural Plain Concrete .................. ... 4-106

Requirements ......................................... 4-27

423 - Anchorage to Concrete ........................ 4-11 0

410- Flexure and Axial Loads ....................... 4-33

426 - Alternate Design Method .. ...... ............. 4-112

411- Shear and Torsion ............ ............. ......... 4-41

427 - Unified Design Provisions for

412 - Development and Splices of

Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete

Reinforcement ....................................... 4-54

Flexural and Compres.<;ion Members 4-116

413 - Two-way Slab Systems ....... .................. 4-6]

428- Alternative Load and Strength

4'4- Walls ..................................................... 4-68

Reduction Factors ................................ 4-118

Chapter 5

STRUCTURAL STEEL

501- General Provisions .................. ............... 5-1

512 - Serviceability Design

502 - Design Requirements .... ............... .......... 5-7

Considerations ..... .............. ...... ........ ...... 5-51

503 - Frames and Other Structures ................. 5-14

513 -Fabrication. Erection

504- Tension Members ................................. 5.14

and Quality Control....... ..... ................. 5-52

505 - Columns and Other Compression

514- Plastic Design ....................................... 5-55

Members ............................ .................... 5-16

515 - Seismic Provisions for Structural

506 .. Beam and Other Flexural Members ...... 5-18

Steel Buildings In Seismic

Zone 4 ................................................... 5-58

507 - Plate Girders .... ............... ................. ..... 5-23

516 - Seismic Provisions for Structural

508- Combined Stresses ............................... 5-25

Steel Buildings In Seismic

509~ Composite Construction ....................... 5-27

Zone 2 ................................................... 5-69

510- Connections, Joints and Fasteners ...... 5-31

517- Light Framed Wall Systems......... ....... 5-72

511- Special Design Considerations ...... ...... 5-43

518 Inspection...... ... ...... ...... ...... ... ... .... 5-72

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

1)(
Chapter 6

WOOD

601- General ............... ......................... .......... 6-]

612 - Mechanically Laminated

602 - Definitions ........................................... ... 6-1

Floors and Decks .......... ................... ...... 6-12

603- Minimum Quality ................................... 6-2

613 - Post-beam Connections ........................ 6-12

604 - Design and Construction

614- Wood Shear Walls and Diaphragms ..... 6-12

Requirements .. ........... .................. ........ ... 6-4

615- Stresses ................................................. 6-15

605 - Decay and Termite Protection ... ..... , ... .. 6-4

616 - Horizontal Member Design ............ ...... 6-18

606 - Wood Supporting Masomy or

617- Column Design ..................................... 6-21

Concrete ... .............................................. 6-6

618 - Flexural and Axial Loading

607 - Wall Framing .......................................... 6-7

Combined .............................................. 6-23

608 - Floor Franring .... .......... .............. ............. 6-8

619- Timber Connectors and Fasteners ....... 624

609- Exterior Wall Coverings ............ ............. 6-9

620- Conventional Light-frame

610- Interior Paneling ..................... .............. 6-11

Construction Design Provisions ............. 6-25

611- Sheathing ................................... ........... 6-11

621 Metal Plate Connected Wood

Truss Design ...... ............... ........... .......... 6-31

Chapter 7

MASONRY

701- General ..................................................... 7-1

706- General Design Requirements .............. 7-11

702- Material Standards .................................. 7-4

707 Working Stress Design of Masomy ...... 7-18

703 - Mortar and Grout ............. ........... ....... ..... 7-6

708- Strength Design ofMasomy ................. 7-25

704 - Construction ..... ...... ....... ............. ............ 7-7

709- Empirical Design ofMasomy ............... 7,35

705- Quality Assurance .................................. 7-9

710- Glass Masomy ...................................... 7-38

National Structural Code of the PhiHppines, Volume 1

 CHAPTER 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 101 - TITLE, PURPOSE, AND SCOPE ................................................................ 1-1

101.1 Title ................................................. 11 101.4 Approval of Alternative

101.2 Purpose ............................................ 1-1 Systems ......................................... 1-1

101.3 Scope ............................................... 11

SECTION 102 - DEFINTI'IONS ...................................... 1-2

SECTION 103 - CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS ........................................................ 1-3

SECTION 104 - DESIGN REQUIR.EMENTS ................................. 1-4

104.1 Strength Requirement .................... 1-4 104.4 Analysis........................... ....... .. ... .. ... 1-4

104.2 Serviceability Requirement ........... 1-4 104.5 Foundation Investigation .................. 1-5

104.3 Definitions and Other 104.6 Design Review......... .................. 1-5

Requirements ................. ............... 1-4 104.7 Erection of Structural Framing ..... 1-5

SECTION 105 - POSTING AND INSTRUMENTATION ................................................... 1-6

105.1 Posting of Live Loads ..................... 1-6 105.2 Earthquake Recording

Instrumentation ...... ....... ....... ..... ..... 1-6

SECTION 106 - SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND CALCULATIONS ......... 1~6

106.1 General ........................................... 1-6 106.4 Calculations .................................... 1-7

106.2 Specifications ............. ....... ............. 1-6 106.5 As-Built Drawings ......................... 1-8

106.3 Design Drawings ........................... 1-6

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 1-ii GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 107 - STRUCTURAL INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND

STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS ............................................................................................. 1-8

107.1 General .. ........ ........ ....... ...... ..... ....... 1-8 107.6 Approved Fabricators .................... 1-11

107.2 Definitions ...................................... 1-8 107.7 PreFabricated Construction ............ 1-12

107.3 Inspection Program ....................... 1-9 107.8 Nondestructive Testing .................. 1-12

107.4 Structural Inspector ....................... 1-9 107.9 Structural Observation ................... 1-12

lQ7.5 Types of Work for Inspection ......... 1-9

SECTION 108 - EXISTING STRUCTURES ........................................................................ 1-13

108.1 General ......................................... 1-13 108.3 Additions, Alterations or

108.2 Maintainance .............. .................. 1-13 Repairs ....................................... 1-13

108.4 Change in Use .............................. ~ 1-14

SECTION 109 - GRADING AND EARTHWO~ .. 1-14

109.1 General ......................................... 1-14 109.5 Grading Inspection ...................... 1-17

109.2 Hazards ........................................ 1-15 109.6 Completion of Work ................... 1-17

109.3 DefInitions .................................... 1-15

, 109.4 Grading Pennit Requirements ...... 1-16

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 TITLE, PURPOSE AND SCOPE
1-1

SECTION 101 - TITLE, PURPOSE Sponsors of any system of design or construction within the
scope of this code, the adequacy of which had been shown
AND SCOPE by successful use, by analysis and test, but which does not
conform to or is not covered by this code, shall have the
right to present the data on which their design is based to
101.1 TITLE the building official or to a board of examiners appointed
by the building official. This board shall be composed of
These regulations shall be known as the National competent structural engineers and shall have authority to
Structural Code of the Philippines, may be cited as investigate the data so submitted, to require tests, and to
such and will be referred to herein as "this code. n formulate rules governing design and construction of such
systems to meet the intent of this code. These rules, when
approved by the building official and promulgated shall be
101.2 PURPOSE of the same force and effect ofthis code.

The purpose of this code is to provide minimum standards

to safeguard life or limb, property and public welfare by
regulating and controlling the design, construction, quality
of materials pertaining to the structural aspects of all
buildings and structures within this jurisdiction.

101.3 SCOPE

The provisions of this code shall apply to the construction,

alteration, moving, demolition, repair, maintenance and use
of any building or structure within this jurisdiction, except
work located primarily in a public way, public utility towers
and poles, hydraulic flood control structures, and
indigenous family dwellings.

This Volume 1 of the code shall apply to buildings, towers

and other vertical structures. The. latest edition of Volume
2 ofthis code shall apply to bridges.

For additions, alterations, maintenance, and change in use

ofbuildings and structures, see Section 108.

Where, in any specific case, different sections of this code

specify different materials, methods of construction or other
requirements, the most restrictive provisions shall govern.
Where there is a contlict between a general requirement and
a specific requirement, the specific requirement sball be
applicable. Wherever in this code reference is made to the
appendix, the provisions in the appendix sball not apply
unless specifically adopted.

101.4 APPROVAL OF ALTERNATIVE

SYSTEMS

The provisions of this code are not intended to prevent the

use of any material, alternate design or method of
construction not specifically prescribed by this co:ie,
provided any alternate has been approved and its use
authorized by the building official.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

1-2 GENERALREQUREMENTS

SECTION 102 - DEFINITIONS STRUCTURE is that which is built or constructed, an

For the purpose of this code, certain terms, phrases, words
and their derivatives shall be construed as specified in this
chapter and elsewhere in this code where specific
definitions are provided. Terms, phrases and words used in
the singular include the plural and the plural, the singular.
Terms, phrases and words used in the masculine gender
include the feminine and the feminine, the masculine.
The following terms are defined for use in this chapter:
edifice or building of any kind, or any piece of work
artificially built up or composed of parts joined together in
some definite manner.
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER is a registered Civil
Engineer with special qualification in the practice of
Structural Engineering as recognized by the Board of Civil
Engineering of the Professional Regulation Commission or
the Philippine Institute of Civil Engineers through the
Association of Structural Engineers ofthe Philippines.

ADDITION is an extension or increase in floor area or

height of a building or structure.

ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN is a method of

proportioning structural elements such that computed
stresses produced in the elements by the allowable stress
load combinations do not exceed specified allowable stress
(also called working stress design).

ALTER or ALTERATION is any change, addition or

modification in construction or occupancy.
t

APPROVED as to materials and types of construction,

refers to approval by the building official as the result of
investigation and tests conducted by the building official, or
by reason of accepted principles or tests by recognized
authorities, technical or scientific organizations.

BUILDING is any structure used or intended for

supporting or sheltering any use or occupancy.

BUILDING, EXISTING, is a building erected prior to the

adoption of this'oode, or one for which a legal building
permit has been issued.

BUILDING OFFICIAL is the officer or other designated

authority charged with the administration and enforcement
of tttis code, or the building official's duly authorized
representative.

WAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN

(LRFD) METHOD is a method of proportioning structural
elements using load and resistance factors such that no
applicable limit state is reached when the structure is
subjected to all appropriate load combinations. The term
"LRFD" is used in the design of steel and wood structures.

STRENGTH DESIGN is a method of proportioning

structural elements such that the computed forces produced
in the elements by the factored load combinations do not
exceed the factored element strength. The term "strength
design" is used in the design of concrete and masonry
structures.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS

SECTION 103 - CLASSIFICATION
OF BlJILDINGS
Buildings and other structures shall be classified, based on
the nature of occupancy, according to Table 103-1 for
purposes of applying wind and earthquake provisions in
Chapter 2, and other. provisions. Each building or other
structure shall be assigned to the highest applicable
category.
III Special Mental hospitals, sanitariums, jails, prison
Occupancy and other buildings where personal liberties
Structures of inmates are similarly restrained,
(Cont.) All structures with an occupancy 5,000 or
more persoos,
Structures and equipment in power-
generating stations, and other public
utility facilities not included in Category
I or Category II above, and required for
continued operation.

For buildings or other structures having multiple

independent structural systems, each independent structural IV Standard All structures housing occupancies or
Occupancy having functioned not listed in Category
system shall be assigned to the highest applicable category
Structures I, II or III above and Category V below.
based on the occupancy or functions dependent on the
particular independent structural system.

Table 103-1 - Occupancy Category IV Miscellaneous Private garages, carports, sheds, agricultural
OCCUPANCY OCCUPANCY OR FUNCTIONS Structures buildings, and fences over 1.8 meters high.
CATEGORY OF STRUCTURE
Occupancies having surgery and emergency
treatment areas,
Fire and police stations,
Garages and shelters for emergency
vehicles and emergency aircraft,
Structures and shelters in
emergency preparedness centers,
Aviation control towers,
Structures and equipment in
I Essential
communication centers and other
Facilities
facilities required for emergency
response,
Standby power-generating equipment for
Category I facilities,
Tanks or other structures containing
housing or supporting water or other
fire-suppression material or equipment
required for the protection of Category I,
n or III structures.
Occupancies and structures therein housing
or supporting toxic or explosive
II Hazardous chemicals or substances,
Facilities Nonbuilding structures housing, supporting
or containing quantities oftoxic or
explosive substances.

III Special Buildings with an assembly room with an

Occupancy occupant capacity of 1,000 or more,
Structures Educational buildings with a capacity of
300 or more students,
Buildings used for college or adult
education with a capacity of 500 or
more students,
Institutional buildings ..ith 50 or more
incapacitated patients, but not included
in Category I,
 1-4

SECTION 104 - DESIGN Table 104-2 Value of " l" for Table 104-1
I ! I
Reinforced
REQUIREMENTS I Wood
Concrete]
Steel
J
Unseasoned Seasoned ..J
~ I
104.1 STRENGTH REQUIREMENT 1.0 0.5 ( l+SOpl) 0 I
Buildings and other structures and all portions thereof shall Seasoned lumber is lumber having a moisture content of
be designed and constructed to sustain, within the less than 16 percent at time of installation and used under
limitations specified in this code, all loads set forth in dry conditions ofuse such as in covered structures.
Chapter 2 and elsewhere in this code, combined in 2 See also Section 104.3 for definitions and other
accordance with Section 203. requirements.

Design shall be in accordance with Strength Design, Load p'Shall be the value at midspan for simple and continuous
and Resistance Factor Design, Plastic Design or Allowable spans, and at support for cantilevers. Time dependent
Stress Design methods, as permitted by the applicable factor A for sustained loads may be taken equal to:
materials chapters. 2.0 ........ five (5) years or more
1.4 ........ twelve (12) months
EXCEPTJON: 1.2 ........ six (6) months
1.0 ........ three (3) months
Unless otherwise required by the building official, bUildings
or portions thereof that are constructed in accordance with
the conventional light-:framing requirements specified in 104.3 DEFINITIONS AND OTHER
thapter 6 of this code shall be deemed to meet the REQUIREMENTS
requirements ofthis section.

I Span length of beam or one way slab, clear

104.2 SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENT
104.2.1 General. Structural systems and members
thereof shall be designed to have adequate stiffness to limit
deflections, lateral drifts, vibration, or any other
deformations that adversely affect the intended use and
performance o(~uildings and other structures. The design
shall also consider durability, resistance to exposure to
weather or aggressive environment, crack control, and other
conditions that affect the intended use and performance of
buildings and other structures.
104.2.2 Deflections. The deflection of any structural
member shall not exceed the values set forth in Table 104
1, based on the factors set forth in Table 104-2. The
deflection criteria representing the most restrictive
condition shall apply. Deflection criteria for materials not
specified shall be developed in a manner consistent with the
provisions ofthis section. For concrete, see Section 409.5.
Table 104-1 Maximum Allowable Deflection for
Structural Members1
Member Loaded Member Loaded
with Live Load with Live Load
Type of Member
projection of cantilever, mm.
~ Time dependent factor for sustained loads.
;. = Multiplier for additional long time deflection.
pr Reinforcement ratio for non-prestressed
compression reinforcement, A's/ bd
A IS = Area of compression reinforcement, mm2
b = Width of compression face of member,mm
d Distance from extreme compression fiber to
centroid oftension reiforcement, mm
D Dead loads, or related internal moments and
forces
L = Live loads, or related internal moments and
forces.
104.4 ANALYSIS
Any system or method of construction to be used shall be
based on a rational analysis in accordance with well
established principles of mechanics that take into account
equilibrium, general stability, geometric compatibility and
both short and long term material properties. Such analysis
shall result in a system that provides a complete load path

~.d 1
Only capable of transferring all loads and forces from their point
(L) I
PI. (L+KD)
WI.Dead. of origin to the load resisting elements. The analysis shall
Roof member
supporting plaster or 1/360 I
!
1/240 include, but not be limited to, the provisions of Sections
104.4.1 through 104.4.4.
floor member ------'-
Sufficient slope or camber shall be pro,ided for flat rootS to avoid ponding.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 DESIGN REQUIREMENT S
1-6

104.4.1 Distribution of Horizontal Shear. The total
lateral foree shall be distributed to the various vertical
elements of the lateral-foree-resisting system in proportion
to their rigidities considering the rigidity of the horizontal
bracing system or diaphragm. Rigid elements that are
assumed not to be part of the lateral-foree-resisting system
may be incorporated into buildings, provided that their
effect on the action of the system is considered and
provided for in the design.
Provision shall be made for the increased forces induced on
resisting elements of the structunu sys~em resulting from
torsion due to eccentricity between the center of application
of the lateral forees and the center of rigidity of the lateral
foree-resisting system. For accidental torsion requirements
for seismic design, see Section 208.5.6.
104.4.2 Stability against overturning. Every structure
shall be designed to resist the overturning effects caused by
the lateral forces specified in this chapter. See Section
206.6 for retaining walls, Section 201 for wind loading and
Section 208 for seismic loading.
104.4.3 Self Straining Forces. Provisions shall be made
for anticipated self-straining forces arising from differential
settlement of foundations and from restrained dimensional
changes due to temperature, moisture, shrinkage, creep and
similar effects.
1 or as required by the building official if the site specific
conditions make the foundation investigation necessary.
Detailed requirements for foundation investigations shall be
in accordanee with Section 303 of this code.
104.6 DESIGN REVIEW
The design calculations, drawings, specifications, and other
design related documents for buildings and structures with
Occupancy Categories I, II or III within Seismic Zone 4
shall be subject to a review by an independent recognized
structural engineer to be employed by the owner. The
structural engineer performing the review shall have
comparable qualifications and experience as the structural
engineer responsible for the design.
The design review shall verify the general compliance with
this code which shall include, but not be limited to, the
review of the design load criteria, the 'design concept,
mathematical model and techniques. The review shall also
verify that there is no major error apparent in pertinent
calculations, drawings and specifications
The engineer of record shall submit with the plans and
specifications, a statement by the structural engineer doing
the review that the above review has been performed.

104.4.4 Anchorage. Anchorage of the roof to walls and See Section 208.6.6.3.2 for design review requirements
columns, and of walls and columns to foundations shall be
. nonlinear time-history analysis is used for earthquake,
when
provided to resist the uplift and sliding forces that result deSIgn.
from the application of the prescribed forces.
The design review shall not in any way transfer or diminish
Concrete and masonry walls shall be anchored to all floors, the responsibility ofthe design structural engineer.
roofs and other structural elements that provide lateral
support for the wall. Such anchorage shall provide a
positive direct connection capable of resisting the 104.7 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL
horizontal forces specified in Chapter 2 but not less than the FRAMING
minimum forces in Section 206.4. In addition, in Seismic
Zones 4, diaphragm to wall anchorage using embedded Walls and structural framing shall be erected true and
straps shall have the straps attached to or hooked around the plumb in accordance with the design.
reinforcing steel or otherwise terminated so as to effectively
transfer forces to the reinforcing steel. Walls shall be
designed to resist bending between anchors where the
anchor spacing exceeds 1.2 meters. Required anchors in
masonry walls of hollow units or cavity walls shall be
embedded in a reinforced grouted structural element of the
wall. See Sections 208.1, 208.8.2.1 and 208.8.2.8 for
earthquake design requirements.

104.5 FOUNDATION INVESTIGATION

Soil explorations shall be required for buildings falling

under Categories I, II and III in accordance with Table 103
 1- "
SECTION 105 - POSTING AND
INSTRUMENTATION
105.1 POSTING OF LIVE LOADS
The live loads for which each floor or portion thereof of a
commercial or industrial building has been designed shall
have such design live loads conspicuously posted by the
owner in that part of each story in which they apply, using
durable metal signs, and it shall be unlawful to remove or
deface such notices. The occupant of the building shall be
responsible for keeping the actual load below the allowable
limits.
105.2 EARTHQUAKE RECORDING
INSTRUMENTATION
105.2.1 General. Unless waived by the building official,
every building in Seismic Zone 4 over six (6) stories in
height with an aggregate floor area of 5,500 square meters
or more, and every building over ten (l0) stories in height
r;gardless of floor area, shall be provided with not less than
three approved recording accelerographs. The
accelerographs shall be interconnected for common start
and common timing.
105.2.2 Location. The instruments shall be located in the
basement, midportion, and near the top of the building.
Each instrument shall be located so that access is
maintained at all times and is unobstructed by room
contents. A sign stating MAINTAIN CLEAR ACCESS TO
THIS INSTRLJ.M,ENT shall be posted in a conspicuous
location.
105.2.3 Maintenance. Maintenance and service of the
instruments shall be provided by the owner ofthe building,
subject to the approval of the building official. Data
produced by the instruments shall be made available to the
building official or the Philippine Institute of Volcanology
and Seismology on request.
105.2.4 Instrumentation of Selected Buildiugs. All
owners of existing structures selected by the jurisdiction
authorities shall provide accessible space for the installation
of appropriate earthquake-recording instruments. Location
of said Instruments shall be determined by the jurisdiction
authorities.
The jurisdiction authorities shall make arrangements to
provide, maintain and service the instruments. Data shall
be the property of the jurisdiction authorities, but copies of
individual records shall be made available to the owner of
the building and to the public on request and after the
payment of an appropriate fee.
ASSOCiation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
SECTION 106 - SPECIFICATIONS,
DRAWINGS, AND CALClTLATIONS
106.1 GENERAL
Copies of design calculations, reports, plans, specifications,
inspection program for all constructions shall bear the
signature and the seal of the civil/structural engineer
responsible for the structural design.
106.2 SPECIFICATIONS
The specifications shall contain information covering the
material and construction requirements. The materials and
construction requirements shall conform to the
specifications referred to in Chapters 3 to 7 of this Code.
106.3 DESIGN DRAWINGS
106.3.1 General. The design drawings shall be drawn to
scale upon substantial paper or cloth and shall be of
sufficient clarity to indicate the location, nature and extent
of the work proposed. The drawings shall show a complete
design with sizes, sections, relative locations and
connection details of the various members. Floor levels,
column centers and offsets shall be dimensioned.
106.3.2 Required Information. The design drawings
shall contain, but not be limited to, the general information
listed in Section 106.3.2.1 and material specific information
listed in Sections 1063.2.2 and 106.3.2.3, as applicable.
106.3.2.1 General Information.
1. Name and date of issue of building code and
supplements, if any, to which the design conforms.
2. Strengths or designations of materials to be used.
3. Design strengths of underlying soil or rock. The soil
or rock profile, when available, shall be provided.
4. Live loads and other loads used in design.
5. Seismic design basis including the total base shear
coefficient; a description of the lateral load resisting
system; and the fundamental natural period in the
design in each direction under consideration.
6. Provisions for dimensional changes resulting from
creep, shrinkage and temperature.
7. Camber oftrusses, beams and girders, if required.
8. Explanation or definition of symbols and
abbreviations used in the drawings.
 SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, CALCULATION
9. Engineer's professional license number and
expiration date of the current Professional
Regulation Commi:::sion registration.
106.3.2.2 Structural Concrete
1. Specified compressive strength of concrete at stated
ages or stages of construction for which each part of
structure is designed.
2. Amount anchorage lengths or cutoff points of steel
reinforcement; and location and length of lap splices.
3. Type and location of welded splices and mechanical
connections of reinforcement.
4. Magnitude and location of prestressing forces.
5. Minimum concrete compressive strength at time of
post-tensioning.
6. Stressing sequence for post-tensioned tendons.
7. Details and location of all contraction or isolation
joints specified for plain concrete in Section 422.
8. Statement if slab on grade is designed as a structural
diaphragm, as specified in Section 421.8.3.4.
106.3.2.3 Structural Steel
1. Type or types of construction as defined in Section
501.2.2.
2. Loads and design requirements necessary for
preparation of shop drawings including shears,
moments, and axial forces to be resisted by all
members and their connections.
3. The type of connection for joints using high strength
bolts.
4. Stiffener and bracing requirements.
5. Description or explanation of welding and inspection
symbols used on the design and shop drawings.
6. Notes for joints in which welding sequence and
technique of welding are required to be carefully
controlled to minimize distortion.
106.4 CALCULATIONS
106.4.1 General. Calculations pertinent to the structural
design of structures and its component members shall be
filed with the design drawings.
106.4.2 Basis of Design Summary. The calculations shall
include a summary of the criteria and methodologies used
in the design. This summary shall include, but need not be
limited to, the following:
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
1-7
1. Name and date of issue of building code and
supplements, if any, to which the design conforms.
2. Strengths or designations of materials to be used for
each component ofthe structure.
3. Design strengths and other design parameters of the
underlying soil or rock.
4. Live loads and other loads used in design.
5. The basis ofthe seismic and wind design forces.
6. A description of the structure's gravity and lateral
load resisting systems. A description of the roof,
floor, foundation and other component systems shall
also be provided.
7. A description of the mathematical model and
procedures used in the structural analysis. This shall
include the section and material properties used,
loading combinations considered, second-order
effects considerations, and any simplifying
assumptions made.
106.4.3 Computer Programs. Calculations may include
the results from an electronic digital computer analysis.
The following requirements apply to calculations which
include such computer output.
1. A drawing of the complete mathematical model used
to represent the structure in the computer-generated
analysis shall be provided. Design assumptions shaU
be clearly described.
2. A program description giving the program name, tqe
version number, and the company which developed
the program and its address shall be provided as part
of the computation documentation. A program
User's Guide shall also be made available, upon
request, and shall contain the information to
determine the nature and extent of the analysis,
verify the input data, interpret the result, and
determine whether the computations comply with the
requirements ofthis code.
3. Data provided. as computer input shall be clearly
distinguished from those computed in the program.
The information required in the output shall include
date of processing, program identification,
identification of structures being analyzed, all input
data, units and final results.
4. The first sheet of each computer run shall be signed
and sealed by the engineer responsible for the
structural design.
106.4.4 Model Analysis. Results from model analysis
and experimental studies shall be permitted to supplement
calculations. The results shall be accompanied by a
description of the rational basis, set-up, methodology and
other information required for the evaluation of the results.
 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
106.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
As-built drawings shall be prepared by the permit holder or
a person retained to provide such services to document the
work as actually constructed. The as-built drawings shall
be drawn to scale upon substantial paper or cloth and shall
indicate the sizes, sections, relative locations, and
connection details of the various structural members as
actually constructed. Strengths of materials, based on
required tests, shall also be indicated.
Work items which required modifications of or are
otherwise different from those shown in the design
drawings filed with the building official shall be
accordingly marked in the as-built drawings and provided
with notes indicating the basis of such modifications or
changes. The basis of modification or change shall include
reference to supplemental design drawings, construction
bulletins, or instructions from the owner, owner's
representative or structural engineer authorizing such
modifications or changes.
The signature, name and professional license number of the
structural inspector shall be included in the as-built
drawings.
Copies of the as-built drawings shall be provided to the
owner, constructor, structural engineer and the building
official.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
SECTION 107 - STRUCTURAL
INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND
STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS
107.1 GENERAL
All construction or work for which a permit is required
shall be subject to inspection throughout the various work
stages. One or more structural inspectors shall be employed
by the owner or the engineer of record acting as the owner's
agent, who shall provide inspections during construction on
the types of work listed under Section 107.5.
EXCEPTION:
The building official may waive the requirement for the
employment of a structural inspector if the construction is
ofa minor nature.
In addition to structural inspections, structural observations
shall be performed when required by Section 107.9.
107.2 DEFINITIONS
The following terms are defined for use in this section:
CONTINUOUS STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is a
structural inspection where the structural inspector is on the
site at all times observing the work requiring structural
inspection.
PERIODIC STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is a
structural inspection where the inspections are made on a
periodic basis and satisfy the requirements of continuous
inspection, provided this periodic scheduled inspection is
performed as outlined in the inspection program prepared
by the structural engineer.
STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is the visual observation
by a structural engineer of a particular type of construction
work or operation for general compliance to the approved
plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship
provisions of this code.
STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION IS the visual
observation of the structural system by the structural
engineer responsible for the design (see Section 107.9.2),
for general conformance to the approved plans and
specifications, at significant construction stages and at
completion of the structural system. Structural observation
does not include or waive the responsibility for the
structural inspections required by section 107.1 or other
.sections of this code.
 STRUCTURAL INSPECTIONS, TEST AND STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS
107.3 INSPECTION PROGRAM
The structural engineer shall prepare an appropriate testing
and inspection program that shall be submitted to the
building official. The inspection program shall designate
the portions of the work that require structural inspections
and indicate the duties ofthe structural inspectors.
When structural observation is required by Section 107.9,
the inspection program shall describe the stages of
construction at which structural observation is to occur.
The inspection program shall include samples of inspection
reports and provide time limits for submission of reports.
107.4 STRUCTURAL INSPECTOR
107.4.1 Qualifications. The structural inspector shall be
a registered civil engineer or a qualified person under the
supervision of a registered civil engineer who shall
demonstrate competence, to the satisfaction of the structural
engineer, for inspection of the particular type of
construction or operation requiring structural inspection.
107.4.2 Duties and Responsibilities. The structural
inspector shall observe the work assigned for conformance
to the approved design drawings and specifications.
The structural inspector shall also verify that the as-built
drawings (see Section 106.5) pertaining to the work
assigned reflect the condition as constructed.
The structural inspector shall furnish inspection reports to
the building official, the structural engineer, and other
designated persons. All discrepancies shall be brought to
the immediate attention of the contractor for correction,
then, if uncorrected, to the proper design authority and to
the building official.
The structural inspector shall submit a final signed report
stating whether the work requiring structural inspection
was, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in
conformance to the approved plans and specifications and
the applicable workmanship provisions of this code.
107.5 TYPES OF WORK FOR INSPECTION
Except as provided in Section 107.1, the types of work
listed below shall be inspected by a structural inspector.
107.5.1 Concrete. During the taking of test specimens and
placing of reinforced concrete. See Section 107.5.12 for
shotcrete.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
1-9
EXCEPTIONS:
I. Concrete for foundations of residential buildings
accommodating 10 or fewer persons, or buildings
falling under Category V of Table 103-1, provided
the building offiCial finds that a structural hazard
does not exist.
2. For foundation concrete, other than cast-in-place
drilled piles or caissons, where the structural design
is based on an Ie no greater than 17 MPa.
3. Nonsfruch,ral slabs on grade, including prestressed
slabs on grade when effective prestress in concrete is
less than 1.0 MPa.
4. Site work concrete flilly supported on earth and
concrete where no special hazard exists.
107.5.2. Bolts instaUed in concrete. Prior to and during
the placement of concrete around bolts when stress
increases permitted by Footnote 5 of Table 423-1 or Section
423 are utilized.
107.5.3 Special moment-resisting concrete frame. For
moment frames resisting design seismic load in structures
within Seismic Zone 4, the structural inspector shall
provide reports to the person responsible for the structural
design and shall provide continuous inspection of the
placement of the reinforcement and concrete.
107.5.4 Reinforcing steel and prestressing steel tendons.
107.5.4.1 During all stressing and grouting of tendons iQ
prestressed concrete.
107.5.4.2 During placing of reinforcing steel and
prestressing tendons for all concrete required to have
structural inspection by Section 107.5.1.
EXCEPTION:
The structural inspector need not be present continuously
during placing of reiriforcing steel and prestressing
tendons, provided the structural inspector has inspected for
conformance to the approved plans prior to the closing of
forms or the delivery ofconcrete to the jobsite.
107.5.5 Structural welding
107.5.5.1 GeneraL During the welding of any
member or connection that is designed to resist loads and
forces required by this code.
EXCEPTIONS:
1. Welding done in an approved fabricator's shop in
accordance with Section 107.6.
110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2. The structural inspector need not be continuously
present during welding of the following items,
provided the materials, qualifications of welding
procedures and welders are verified prior to the start
of work; periodic inspections are made of work in
progress; and a visual inspection of all welds is
made prior to completion or prior to shipment of
shop welding:
a. Single-pass fillet welds not exceeding 8 mm in
size.
b. Floor and roofdeck welding.
c. Welded studs when used for structural
diaphragm or composite systems.
d Welded sheet steel for cold-formed steel
framing members such as studs andjoists.
e. Welding ofstairs and railing systems.
107.5.5.2 Special moment-resisting steel frames.
During the welding of special moment-resisting steel
frames. In addition to Section 107.5.5.1 requirements,
nondestructive testing as required by Section 107.8 of this
code.
107.5.5.3 Welding of reinforcing steel. During the
welding of reinforcing steel.
EXCEPTION:
The structural inspector need not be continuously present
during the welding of ASlM A 706 reinforcing steel not
larger than 16 mm diameter bars used for embedments,
provided. the materials, qualifications of welding
procedures and welders are verified prior to the start of
work; periodic inspections are made of work in progress;
and a visual inspection oj all welds is made prior to
completion or prior to shipment ofshop welding.
107.5.6 High-strength bolting. The inspection of high
strength A 325 and A 490 bolts shall be in accordance with
approved nationally recognized standards and the
requirements of this section. While the work is in progress,
the structural inspector shall determine that the
requirements for bolts, nuts, washers and paint; bolted
parts; and installation and tightening in such standards are
met. Such inspections may be performed on a periodic
basis as defined in Section 107.2. The structural inspector
shall observe the calibration procedures when such
procedures are required by the plans or specifications and
shall monitor the installation of bolts to determine that all
plies of connected materials have been drawn together and
that the selected procedure is properly used to tighten all
bolts.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
107.5.7 Structural masonry
107.5.7.1 For masonry, other than fully grouted open
end hollow-unit masonry, during preparation and taking of
any required prisms or test specimens, placing of all
masonry units, placement of reinforcement, inspection of
grout space, immediately prior to closing of cIeanouts, and
during all grouting operations.
EXCEPTION:
For hollow-unit masonry where thefm is 110 more than 10
MPafor concrete 1mits or 18 MPafor clay units, structural
inspection may be performed as required for fully grouted
open-end hollow-unit masonry specified in Section
107.5.7.2.
107.5.7.2 For fully grouted open-end hollow-unit
masonry during preparation and taking of any required
prisms or test specimens, at the start of laying units, after
the placement of reinforcing steel, grout space prior to each
grouting operation, and during all grouting operations.
EXCEPTION:
Stmctural inspection as required ill Sections 107.5. 7.1 and
107.5.7.2 need not be provided when design stresses have
been a4justed as :.pecified ill Chapter 7 to permit
noncontinuous inspection.
107.5.8 Reinforced gypsum concrete. When cast-in
place Class B gypsum concrete is being mixed and placed.
107.5.9 Insulating concrete fill. During the application
of insulating concrete fill when used as part of a structural
system.
EXCEPT/ON:
The structural inspections may be limited to all initial
inspection to check the deck surface and placement of
reinforcing. The structural inspector shall supenise the
preparation of compression (est specimens during this
initial inspection.
107.5.10 Spray-applied fire-resistive materials. During
the application of spray-applied fire-resistive materials ..
107.5.11 Piling, drilled piers and caissons. During
driving and testing of piles and construction of cast-in-place
drilled piles or caissons. See Sections 107.5.1 and 1075.4
for concrete and reinforcing steel inspection.
107.5.12Shotcrete. During the taking of test specimens and
placing of all shotcrete.
 STRUCTURAL INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS
EXCEPTION:
Shotcrete work fUlly supported on earth, minor repairs and
when, in the opinion of the building official, no special
hazard exists.
107.5.13 Special grading, excavation and filling.
During earthwork excavations, grading and filling
operations inspection to satisfy requirements of Chapter 3
and Section 109.5.
107.5.14 Special cases. Work that, in the opinion of the
structural engineer, involves unusual hazards or conditions.
107.5.15. Non-destructive Testing. In-situ non
destructive testing program, in addition to the requirements
of Section 107.8 that in the opinion of the structural
engineer may supplement or replace conventional tests on
concrete or other materials and assemblies.
107.6 APPROVED FABRICATORS
Structural inspections required by this section and
elsewhere in this code are not required where the work is
done on the premises of a fabricator approved by the
structural engineer to perform such work without structural
inspection. The approved fabricator shall submit a
certificate of compliance that the work was performed in
accordance with the approved plans and specifications to
the building official and to the engineer or architect of
record. The approved fabricator's qualifications shall be
contingent on compliance with the following:
1. The fabricator has developed and submitted a
detailed fabrication procedural manual reflecting key
quality control procedures that will provide a basis
for inspection control of workmanship and the
fabricator plant
2. Verification of the fabricator's quality control
capabilities, plant and personnel as outlined in the
fabrication procedural manual shall be by an
approved inspection or quality control agency.
3. Periodic plant inspections shall be conducted by an
approved inspection or quality control agency to
monitor the effectiveness of the quality control
program
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
1-11
107.7 PREFABRICATED CONSTRUCTION
107.7.1 General.
107.7.1.1 Purpose. The purpose of this section is to
regulate materials and establish methods of safe
. construction where any structure or portion thereof is
wholly or partially prefabricated.
107.7.1.2 Scope. Unless otherwise specifically stated
in this section, all prefabricated construction and all
materials used therein shall conform to all the requirements
of this code. (See Section 101.4.)
107.7.1.3 Definition.
PREFABRICATED ASSEMBLY is a structural unit, the
integral parts of which have been built up or assembled
prior to incorporation in the building.
107.7.2 Tests of Materials. Every approval of a material
not specifically mentioned in this code shall incorporate as
a proviso the kind and number of tests to be made during
prefabrication.
107.7.3 Tests of Assemblies. The building official may
require special tests to be made on assemblies to determine
their durability and weather resistance.
107.7.4 Connections. Every device used to connect
prefabricated assemblies shall be designed as required by
this code and shall be capable of developing the strengtq of
the members connected, except in the case of members
forming part of a structural frame designed as specified in
Chapter 2. Connections shall be capable of withstanding
uplift forces as specified in Chapter 2.
107.7.5 Pipes and conduit. In structural design, due
allowance shall be made for any material to be removed for
the installation of pipes, conduits or other equipment.
107.7.6 Certificate and Inspection.
107.7.6.1 Materials. Materials and the assembly
thereof shall be inspected to determine compliance with this
code. Every material shall be graded, marked or labeled
where required elsewhere in this code.
107.7.6.2 Certificate. A certificate of approval shall
be furnished with every prefabricated assembly, except
where the assembly is readily accessible to inspection at the
site. The certificate of approval shall certify that the
assembly in question has been inspected and meets all the
requirements of this code.
1-12 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
107.7.6.3 Certifying agency. To be acceptable under
this code, every certificate of approval shall be made by an
approved agency.
107.7.6.4 Field erection. Placement of prefabricated
assemblies at the building site shall be inspected to
determine compliance with this code.
107.7.6.5 Continuous inspection. If continuous
inspection is required for certain materials where
construction takes place on the site, it shall also be required
where the same materials are used in prefabricated
construction.
EXCEPTION:
Continuous inspection will not be required during
prefabrication if the approved agency certifies to the
constructiOll andfumishes evidence ofcompliance.
107.8 NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING
1~7.8.1 General. In Seismic Zone 4, welded, fully
restrained connections between the primary members of
ordinary moment frames and special moment-resisting
frames shall be tested by nondestructive methods for
compliance with approved standards and job specifications.
This testing shall be a part of the structural inspection
requirements of Section 107.5. A program for this testing
shall be established by the person responsible for structural
design and as shown on plans and specifications.
107.8.2 Testing Program. As a minimum, the testing
program shall inclt,lde the following:
107.8.2.1 All complete penetration groove welds
contained in joints and splices shall be tested 100 percent
either by ultrasonic testing or by radiography.
EXCEPTIONS:
1. When approved, the nondestructive testing rate for
an individual welder or welding operator may be
reduced to 25 percent, provided the reject rate is
demonstrated to be 5 percent or less of the welds
tested for the welder or welding operator. A
sampling of at least 40 completed welds for a job
shall be made for SlIch reduction evaluation. Reject
rate is defined as the number of welds containing
rejectable defects divided by the number of welds
completed For evaluating the reject rate of
continuous welds over 900 mm in length where the
effective throat thickness is 25 mm or less, each 300
mm increment or fractioll thereof shall be considered
as one weld. For evaluating the reject rate on
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
continuous welds over 900 mm in length where the
effective throat thickness is greater than 25 mm, each
150 mm of length or fraction thereof shall be
considered one weld
2. For complete penetration groove welds on materials
less than 8 mm thick, nondestructive testing is not
required; for this welding, cOlltirmous inspection is
required.
3. When approved by the building official and outlined
in the project plans and specifications, this
nondestntctive ultrasonic testing may be performed
in the shop of ali approved fabricator utilizing
qualified test techniques in the employmem of the
fabricator.
107.8.2.2 Partial penetration groove welds when used
in column splices shall be tested either by ultrasonic testing
or radiography when required by the plans and
specifications. For partial penetration groove welds when
used in column splices, with an effective throat less than 20
mm thick, nondestructive testing is not required; for this
welding, continuous structural inspection is required.
107.8.2.3 Base metal thicker than 40 rom, when
subjected to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, shall
be ultrasonically inspected for discontinuities directly
behind such welds after joint completion.
Any material discontinuities shall be accepted or rejected
on the basis of the defect rating in accordance with the
(larger reflector) criteria of approved national standards.
107.8.3 Others. The structural engineer may accept or
require in situ non-destructive testing of concrete or other
materials and assemblies to supplement or replace
conventional tests.
107.9 STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION
107.9.1 General. Structural observation shall be
provided in Seismic Zone 4 when one of the following
conditions exists:
1. The structure is defined in Table 103-1 as
Occupancy Category I, II or III;
2. The structure is in Seismic Zone 4, No as set forth in
Table 208-4 is greater than one, and a lateral design
is required for the entire structure;
EXCEPTION:
One- alld two-story residential buildings accommodating
10 or fewer perSOIlS, or buildings falling under Category V
 EXISTING STRUCTURES
of Table 103-1, and one- and two-story buildings for
offices, for eating and drinking with an occupancy load of
50 persons or fewer, for factory and industrial occupancies,
for the display and sale of merchandise, for storage, for
open parking or repair garages, and aircraft hangars and
helistops.
3. When so designated by the structural engineer, or
4. When such observation is specifically required by
the building official.
107.9.2 Structural Observer. The owner shall employ
the engineer responsible for the structural design, or another
engineer designated by the engineer responsible for the
structural design, to perform structural observation as
defined in Section 107.2.
Observed deficiencies shall be reported in writing to the
, owner's representative, structural inspector, contractor and
the building official. The structural observer shall submit to
the building official a written statement that the site visits
have been made and identifying any reported deficiencies
that, to the best of the structural observer's knowledge, have
not been resolved.
107.9.3 Construction Stages for Observations. The
structural observations shall be performed at the
construction stages prescribed by the inspection program
prepared as required by Section 107.3.
It shall be the duty of the person doing the work authorized
by the permit to notify the structural observer that the
described construction stages have been reached, and to
provide access to and means for observing the components
of the structural system.
National structlJRll Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
1-13
SECTION lOS-EXISTING
STRUCTURES
108.1 GENERAL
Buildings in exiStence at the time of the adoption of this
code may have their existing use or occupancy continued, if
such use or occupancy was legal at the time of the adoption
of this code, provided such continued use is not dangerous
to life.
Any change in the use or occupancy of any existing
building or structure shall comply with the provisions of
Sections 108.4 ofthis code.
108.2 MAINTENANCE
All buildings and structures, both existing and new, and all
parts thereot: shall be maintained in a safe condition.- The
owner or the owner's designated agent shall be responsible
for the maintenance of buildings and structures. To
determine compliance with this subsection, the building
official may cause a structure to be re-inspected.
108.3 ADDITIONS, ALTERATIONS OR
REPAIRS
108.3.1 General. Buildings and structures to which
additions, alterations or repairs are made shall comply with
all the requirements of this code for new facilities except as
specifically provided in this section.
108.3.2 When AUowed. Additions, alterations or repairs
may be made to any building or structure without requiring
the existing building or structure to comply with all the
requirements of this code, provided the addition, alteration
or repair conforms to that required for a new building or
structure.
Additions or alterations shall not be made to an existing
building or structure that will cause the existing building or
structure to become unsafe. An unsafe condition shall be
deemed to have been created if an addition or alteration will
cause any structural element of the existing building or
structure to resist loads in excess of their capacity or cause
a reduction of their load carrying capacity.
Additions or alterations shall not be made to an existing
building or structure when such existing building or
structure is not in full compliance with the provisions of
this code except when such addition or alteration will result
in the existing building or structure being no more
hazardous based on structural safety, than before such
additions or alterations are undertaken.
 114 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
EXCEPTION:
Alterations of existing structural elements, or additions of
new structural elements, which are initiatedfor the purpose
ofincreasing the lateral-force-resisting strength or stiffness
of an existing structure, need not be designed for forces
conforming . to these regulations provided that an
engineering analysis is submitted to show that
1. The capacity of existing structural elements required
to resist forces is not reduced,
2. The lateral loading to required existing structural
elements is not increased beyond their capacity,
3. New structural elements are detailed and connected
to the existing structural elements as required by
the~ regulations,
4. New or relocated nonstructural elements are
detailed and connected to existing or new structural
elements as required by these regulations.
108.3.3 Non-structural. Alterations or repairs to an
existing building or structure that are nonstructural and do
not adversely affect any structural member or any part of
the building or structure having required fire resistance may
be made with the same materials of which the building or
structure is constructed.
108.3.4 Historic Buildings. Repairs, alterations and
additions necessary for the preservation, restoration,
rehabilitation or continued use of a building or structure
may be made without conformance to all the requirements
of this code when authorized by the building official,
provided:
1. The building or structure has been designated by
official act!on of the legally constituted authority of
this jurisdiction as having special historical or
architectural significance.
2. Any structurally unsafe conditions are corrected.
3. The restored building or structure will be no more
hazardous based on life safety than the existing
building.
108.4 CHANGE IN USE
No change shall be made in the character of occupancies or
use of any building unless the new or proposed use is less
hazardous, based on life safety than the existing use. A
change in use or occupancy of any building shall be
allowed 0!1ly when the change in use or occupancy will not
I Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
cause any structural element of the eXlstmg building to
resist loads, determined on the basis on this code and on the
proposed use or occupancy, in excess of their capacity.
Alterations to the existing building shall be permitted to
satisfy this requirement.
No change in the character of occupancy of a building shall
be made without a new certificate of occupancy regardless
of whether any alterations to the building are required.
SECTION 109 - GRADING AND
EARTHWORK
109.1 GENERAL
109.1.1 Permits Required. Except as specified in
Section 109.1.2 of this section, no person shall do any
grading without first having obtained a grading permit from
the building official.
109.1.2 Exempted Work. A grading permit is not required
for the following:
1. When approved by the building official, grading in
an isolated, self-contained area if there is no danger
to private or public property.
2. An excavation below finished grade for basements
and footings of a building, retaining wall or other
structure authorized by a valid building permit. This
shall not exempt any fill made with the material from
such excavation or exempt any excavation having an
unsupported height greater than 1.5 meters after the
completion ofsuch structure.
3. Cemetery graves.
4. Refuse disposal sites controlled by other regulations.
5. Excavations for wells or tunnels or utilities.
6. Mining, quarrying, excavating, processing or
stockpiling of rock, sand, gravel, aggregate or clay
where established and provided for by law, provided
such operations do not afIe..,"t the lateral support or
increase the stresses in or pressure upon any adjacent
or contiguous property.
7. Exploratory excavations under the direction of
geotechnical engineers or engineering geologists.
8. An excavation that (1) is less than 600 mm in depth
or (2) does not create a cut slope greater than 1.5 m
in height and steeper than 1 unit vertical in 1Y2 units
horizontal (66.7% slope).
9. A fill less than 300 mm in depth and placed on
natural terrain with a slope flatter than I unit vertical
 GRADING AND EARTHWORK
in 5 units horizontal (20% slope), or less than 900
mm in depth, not intended to support structures, that
does not exceed 40 m3 on anyone lot and does not
obstruct a drainage course.
Exemption from the permit requirements of this section
shall not be deemed to grant authorization for any work to
be done in any manner in violation of the provisions of this
section or any other laws or ordinances ofthis jurisdiction.
109.2 HAZARDS
Whenever the building official determines that any existing
excavation or embankment or fill on private property has
become a hazard to life and limb, or endangers property, or
adversely affects the safety, use or stability of a public way
or drainage channel, the owner of the property upon which
the excavation or fill is located, or other person or agent in
control of said property, upon receipt of notice in writing
from the building official, shall within the period specified
therein repair or eliminate such excavation or embankment
to eliminate the hazard and to be in conformance with the
requirements of this code.
109.3 DEFINITIONS
The following terms are defined for use in this section:
APPROVAL shall mean that the proposed work or
completed work conforms to this section in the opinion of
the building official.
AS GRADED is the extent of surface conditions on
completion of grading.
BEDROCK is in-place solid rock.
BENCH is a relatively level step excavated into earth
material on which fill is to be placed.
BORROW is earth material acquired from an off-site
location for use in grading on a site.
CIVIL ENGINEER is a professional engineer licensed to
practice in the field of civil engineering.
CIVIL ENGINEERING is the application of the
knowledge of the forces of nature, principles of mechanics
and the properties of materials to the evaluation, design and
construction of civil works.
COMPACTION is the densification of a fill by mechanical
means.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
1-15
EARTH MATERIAL is any rock, natural soil or till or
any combination thereof
ENGINEERING GEOLOGIST is a licensed geologist
experienced and knowledgeable in engineering geology.
ENGINEERING GEOLOGY is the application of
geologic knowledge and principles in the investigation and
evaluation of naturally occurring rock and soil for use in the
design of civil works.
EROSION is the wearing away of the ground surface as a
result of the movement of wind, water or ice.
EXCAVATION is the mechanical removal of earth
material.
FILL is a deposit of earth material placed by artificial
means.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER is an engineer
experienced and knowledgeable in the practice of
geotechnical engineering.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING is the application of
the principles of soil and rock mechanics in the
investigation, evaluation and design of civil works
involving the use of earth materials and the inspection or
testing of the construction thereof.
GRADE is the vertical location of the ground surface.
EXISTING GRADE is the grade prior to grading.
FINISH GRADE is the final grade of the site that
conforms to the approved plan.
ROUGH GRADE is the stage at which the grade
approximately conforms to the approved plan.
GRADING is any excavating or filling or combination
thereof.
KEY is a designed compacted fill placed in a trench
excavated in earth material beneath the toe of a proposed
fill slope.
PROFESSIONAL INSPECTION is the inspection
required by this code to be performed by the civil engineer,
geotechnical engineer or engineering geologist. Such
inspections include that performed by persons supervised
by such engineers or geologists and shall be sufficient to
form an opinion relating to the conduct of the work.
t
1-16 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SITE is any lot or parcel of land or contiguous combination
thereof, under the same ownership, where grading is
performed or permitted.
SLOPE is an inclined ground surface the inclination of
which is expressed as a ratio of vertical distance to
horizontal distance.
SOIL is naturally occurring superficial deposits overlying
bedrock
SOILS ENGINEER. See Geotechnical Engineer.
SOILS ENGINEERING. See Geotechnical Engineering.
TERRACE is a relatively level step constructed in the face
of a graded slope surface for drainage and maintenance
purposes.
109.4 GRADING PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
109.4.1 Except as exempted in Section 109.1.2 of this
code, no person shall do any grading without first obtaining
a grading permit from the building official. A separate
permit shall be obtained for each site, and may cover both
excavations and fills.
109.4.2 Grading Designation. Grading in excess of
4,000 m3 shall be performed in accordance with the
approved grading plan prepared by a civil engineer, and
shall be designated as "engineered grading." Grading
involving less than 4,000 m3 shall be designated "regular
grading" unless the permittee chooses to have the grading
performed as engineered grading, or the building official
determines that special conditions or unusual hazards exist,
in which case grading shall conform to the requirements for
engineered grading.
109.4.3 Engineered Grading Requirements. Application
tor a grading permit shall be accompanied by two sets of
plans and specifications, and supporting data consisting of a
geotechni(;al engineering report and engineering geology
report. Additionally, the application shall state the
estimated quantities of work involved. The plans and
specifications shall be prepared and signed by civil engineer
licensed to prepare such plans or specifications when
required by the building official.
Specifications shall contain information covering
construction and material requirements. Plans shall be
drawn to scale upon substantial paper or cloth and shall be
of sufficient clarity to indicate the nature and extent of the
work proposed and show in detail that they will conform to
the provisions of this code and all relevant laws,
ordinances, rules and regulations. The first sheet of each set
of plans shall give location of the work, the name and
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
address of the owner, and the person by whom they were
prepared.
The plans shall include the following information:
1. General vicinity map ofthe proposed site.
2. Property limits and accurate contours of existing
ground and details of terrain and area drainage.
3. Limiting dimensions elevations or finish contours to
be achieved by the grading, and proposed drainage
channels and related construction.
4. Detailed plans of all surface and subsurface drainage
devices, walls, cribbing, dams and other protective
devices to be constructed with, or as a part of, the
proposed work, together with a map showing the
drainage area and the estimated runoff of the area
served by any drains.
5. Location of any buildings or structures on the
property where the work is to be performed and the
location of any buildings or structures on land of
adjacent owners that are within 4.5 m of the property
or that may be affected by the proposed grading
operations.
6. Recommendations included in the geotechnical
engineering report and the engineering geology
report shall be incorporated in the grading plans or
specifications. When approved by the building
official, specific recommendations contained in the
geotechnical engineering report and the engineering
geology report, which are applicable to grading, may
be included by reference.
7. The dates of the geotechnical engineering and
engineering geology reports together with the names,
addresses and phone numbers of the fnms or
individuals who prepared the reports.
109.4.4 Geotechnical Engineering Report. The
geotechnical engineering report required by Section 109.4.3
shall include data regarding the nature, distribution and
strength of existing soil, conclusions and recommendations
for grading procedures and design criteria for corrective
measures, including buttress fills, when necessary, and
opinion on adequacy for the intended use of sites to be
developed by the proposed grading as affected by
geotechnical engineering factors, including the stability of
slopes.
109.4;5 Engineering Geology Report. The engineering
geology report required by Section 109.4.3 shall include an
adequate description of the geology of the site, conclusions
and recommendations regarding the effect of geologic
conditions on the proposed development, and opinion on
the adequacy for the intended use of sites to be developed
by the proposed grading, as affected by geologic factors.
 GRADING AND EARTHWORK
109.4.6 Regular Grading Requirements. Each
application for a grading permit shall be accompanied by a
plan in sufficient clarity to indicate the nature and extent of
the work, and state the estimated quantities of work
involved. The plans shall give the location of the work, the
name of the owner and the name of the person who
prepared the plan. The plan shall include the following
information:
1. General vicinity map of the proposed site.
2. Limiting dimensions and depth of cut and fill.
3. Location of any buildings or structures where work
is to be performed, and the location of any buildings
or structures within 4.5 m ofthe proposed grading.
109.5 GRADING INSPECTION
109.5.1 General. Grading operations for which a permit
is required shall be subject to inspection by the building
official. Professional inspection of grading operations shall
be provided by the civil engineer, geotechnical engineer
and the engineering geologist retained to provide such
services in accordance with Section 109.5.5 for engineered
grading and as required by the building official for regular
grading.
109.5.2 Civil Engineer. The civil engineer shall provide
professional inspection within such engineer's area of
technical specialty, which shall consist of observation and
review as to the establishment of line, grade and surface
drainage of the development area. If revised plans are
required during the course of the work, they shall be
prepared by the civil engineer.
109.5.3 Geotechnical Engineer. The geotechnical
engineer shall provide professional inspection within such
engineer's area of technical specialty, which shall include
observation during grading and testing for required
compaction. The geotechnical engineer shall provide
sufficient observation during the preparation of the natural
ground and placement and compaction of the fill to verify
that such work is being performed in accordance with the
conditions of the approved plan and the appropriate
requirements of this chapter.
Revised recommendations relating to conditions differing
from the approved geotechnical engineering and
engineering geology reports shall be submitted to the
permittee, the building official and the civil engineer.
109.5.4 Engineering Geologist. The engineering
geologist shall provide professional inspection within such
geologist's area of technical specialty, which shall include
professional inspection of the bedrock excavation to
determine if conditions encountered are in conformance
with the approved report. Revised recommendations
relating to conditions differing from the approved
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume '1
1-17
engineering geology report shall be submitted to the
geotechnical engineer.
109.5.5 Permittee. The permittee shall be responsible for
the work to be performed in accordance with the approved
plans and specifications and in conformance with the
provisions of this code, and the permittee shall engage
consultants, if required, to provide professional inspections
on a timely basis. The permittee shall act as a coordinator
between the consultants, the contractor and the building
official. In the event of changed conditions, the permittee
shall be responsible for informing the building official of
such change and shall provide revised plans for approvaL
109.5.6 Building Official. The building official shall
inspect the project at'the various stages of work requiring
approval to determine that adequate control is being
exercised by the professional consultants.
109.5.7 Notification of Noncompliance. If, in the course
of fulfilling their respective duties under this chapter, the
civil engineer, the geotechnical engineer. or the engineering
geologist finds that the work is not being done in
conformance with this chapter or the approved grading
plans, the discrepancies shall be reported immediately in
writing to the permittee and to the building official.
109.5.8 Transfer of Responsibility. If the civil engineer,
the geotechnical engineer, or the engineering geologist of
record is changed during grading, the work shall be stopped
until the replacement has agreed in writing to accept their
responsibility within the area of technical competence for
approval upon completion of the work. It shall be the dl.Y
of the permittee to notify the building official in writing of
such change prior to the recommencement of such grading.
109.6 COMPLETION OF WORK
109.6.1 Final Reports. Upon completion of the rough
grading work and at the final completion of the work, the
following reports and drawings and supplements thereto are
required for engineered grading or when professional
inspection is performed for regular grading, as applicable:
L An as-built grading plan prepared by the civil
engineer retained to provide such services in
accordance with Section 109.5.5 showing original
ground surface elevations, as-graded ground surface
elev2tions, lot drainage patterns, and the locations
and elevations of surface drainage facilities and of
the outlets of subsurface drains. As-constructed
locations, elevations and details of subsurface drains
shall be shown as reported by the geotechnical
engineer. Civil engineers shall state that to the best
of their knowledge the work within their area of
1-18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

responsibility was done in accordance with the final

approved grading plan.

2. A report prepared by the geotechnical engineer

retained to provide such services in accordance with
Section 109.5.3, including locations and elevations
of field density tests, summaries of field and
laboratory tests, other substantiating data, and
comments on any changes made during grading and
their effect on the recommendations made in the
approved geotechnical engineering investigation
report. Geotechnical engineers shall submit a
statement that, to the best of their knowledge, the
work within their area of responsibilities is in
accordance with the approved geotechnical
engineering report and applicable provisions of this
section.

3. A report prepared by the engineering geologist

retained to provide such services in accordance with
Section 109.5.3, including a final description of the'
geology of the site and any new information
disclosed during the grading and the effect of same
on recommendations incorporated in the approved
grading plan. Engineering geologists shall submit a
statement that, to the best of their knowledge, the
work within their area of responsibility is in
accordance with the approved engineering geologist
report and applicable provisions of this section.

4. The grading contractor shall submit in a form

prescribed by the building official a statement of
conformance to said as-built plan and the
specifications.
.,
109.6.2 Notification of Completion. The permittee shall
notify the building official when the grading operation is
ready for final inspection. Final approval shall not be given
until all work, including installation of all drainage. facilities
and their protective devices, and all erosion-control
measures have been completed in accordance with the final
approved grading plan, and the required reports have been
submitted.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 C'HAPTER 2

MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 201 - GENERAL .................................................................................... 2-1

201.1 Scope ............................................... 2-1 201.2 Recognized Standards ...................... 2-1

SECTION 202 - DEFINITIONS ........................................................................ 2-1

SECTION 203 - COMBINATIONS OF LOADS ............................................... 2-3

203.1 General ........................................... 2-3 203.4 Load Combination Using

203.2 Notations ........................................ 2-3 Allowable Stress Design .............. 2-3

203.3 Load Combinations Using 203.5 Special Seismic Load

Strength Design or Load and Combination ..................... ;............. 2-4

Resistance Factor Design ................... 2-3

SECTION 204 - DEAD LOADS .................. 2-4

204.1 General ........................................... 2-4 204.3 Partition Loads ...... ............................ 2-7

204.2 Weights of Materials and

Construction ................................. 2-4

SECTION 205 - LIVE LOADS ................................................................................................... 2-7

205.1 General ........................................... 2-7 205.4 Roof Live Loads ............................ 2-10

205.2 Critical Distribution ofLive Load 205.5 Reduction of Live Loads ............... 2-11

........................................................ 2-7 205.6 Alternative Floor Live Load

205.3 Floor Live Loads ............................. 2-7 Reduction...................................... 2-11

SECTION 206 - OTHER M'lN'"WUM LOADS ............. 2-12

206.1 General ......................................... 2-12 206.7 Water Accumulation ..................... 2-12

206.2 Other Loads ............... ............ ....... 2-12 206.8 Hydrostatic Uplift ......................... 2-13

206.3 Impact Loads ................................ 2-12 206.9 Crane Loads ................................. 2-13

206.4 Anchorage of Concrete and 206.10 Heliport and Helistop Landing

Masomy Walls ........................... 2-12 Areas ............................................ 2-13

206.5 Interior Wall Loads ...................... 2-12

206.6 Retaining Walls ........................... 2-12

SECTION 207 - W'IN'D LOAD 0 , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

207.1 General ......................................... 2-14 207.5 Velocity Pressure .......................... 2-18

207.2 Definitions ............................. ...... 2-14 207.6 Gust Effect Factors ....................... 2-20

207.3 Symbols and Notations ................. 2-15 207.7 Pressure and Force Coefficients .... 2-20

207.4 Calculation of Wind Loads ........... 2-15 207.8 FuUand Partial Loading ............... 2-20

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

2-ii Structural Concrete

SECTION 208 - EARTHQUAKE DESIGN ........................................................................... 2-35

208.1 General ......................................... 2-35

208.7 Lateral Forces on Elements of

208.2 Definitions .................................... 2-35

Structures, Nonstructural

208.3 Symbols and Notations ................. 2-37

Components and Equipment

208.4 Criteria Selection .......................... 2-38

Supported by Structures ............ .

208.5 Minimmn Design Lateral Forces

208.8 Detailed Systems Design

and Related Effects ........ ....... ..... 2-43

Requirements ............................ . 2-56

208:6 Dynamic Analysis Procedures ...... 2-49

208.9 Non-building Structures .............. . 2-59

208.10 Site Categorization Procedure ..... . 2-60

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 GENERAL AND DEFINITIONS
SECTION 201 - GENERAL
201.1 SCOPE
This chapter provides minimum design load requirements
for the design of buildings and other vertical structures.
Loads and appropriate load combinations, which have been
developed to be used together, for strength design and
allowable stress design are set forth.
201.2 RECOGNIZED STANDARDS
The standards listed below are recognized standards for
wind loads.
1. ASCE 7, Chapter 6, Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures
2. ANSI EIAITIA 222-E, Structural Standards for Steel
Antenna Towers and Antenna Supporting Structures
3. ANSIINAAMM FPIOOl, Guide Specifications for
the Design Loads of Metal Flagpoles
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
2-1
SECTION 202 - DEFINITIONS
The following terms are defined for use in this Chapter:
ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM is an assembly consisting
of panels mounted on pedestals to provide an under-floor
space for the installations of mechanical, electrical,
communications or similar systems or to serve as an air
supply or return-air plenum.
AGRIClTLTURAL BUILDING is a structure designed to
house farm implements, hay, grain, poultry, livestock or
other horticultural products. The structure shall not be a
place of human habitation or a place of employment where
agricultural products are processed, treated, or packaged,
nor shall it be a place used by the public.
ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN METHOD IS a
method of proportioning structural elements such that
computed stresses produced in the elements by the
allowable stress load combinations do not exceed specified
allowable stress (also called working stress design).
ASSEMBLY BUILDING is a building or portion of a
building for the gathering together of 50 or more persons
for such purposes as deliberation, education, instruction,
worship, entertainment, amusement, drinking or dining, or
awaiting transportation.
AWNING is a shelter supported entirely from the exterior
wall of a building.
BALCONY, EXTERIOR, is an exterior floor system
projecting from a structure and supported by that structure,
with no additional independent supports.
DEAD LOADS consist of the weight of ali materials and
fixed equipment incorporated into the building or other
structure.
DECK is an exterior floor system supported on at least two
opposing sides by an adjoining structure and/or posts, piers,
or other independent supports.
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES are buildings and other
structures that are intended to remain operational in the
event of extreme environmental loading from wind or
earthquakes.
FACTORED LOAD is the product of a load specified in
Sections 204 through 208 and a load factor. See Section
203.3 for combinations of factored loads.
GARAGE is a building or portion thereof in which motor
vehicle containing flammable or combustible liquids or gas
in its tank is stored, repaired or kept.
 2-2 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

GARAGE, PRIVATE, is a building or a portion of a EXTERIOR WALL is any wall or element of a wall,
building, not more than 90 m2 in area, in which only motor or any member or group of members. that defines the
vehicles used by the tenants of the building or buildings on exterior boundaries or courts of a building and that has a
the premises are kept or stored. slope of60 degrees or greater with the horizontal plane.

LIMIT STATE is a condition in which a structure or NONBEARING WALL is any wall that is not a
component is judged either to be no longer useful for its bearing wall.
intended function (serviceability limit state) or to be unsafe
(strength limit state). PARAPET WALL is that part of any wall entirely
above the roof line.
LIVE LOADS are those loads produced by the use and
occupancy of the building or other structure and do not RETAINING WALL is a wall designed to resist the
include dead load, construction load, or environmental lateral displacement of soil or other materials.
loads such as wind load, snow load, rain load, earthquake
load or flood load.

LOADS are forces or other actions that result from the

weight of all building materials, occupants and their
possessions, environmental effects, differential move
ments, and restrained dimensional changes. Permanent
loads are those loads in which variations over time are rare
or ofsmall magnitude. All other loads are variable loads.

LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN

(LVD) MEmOD is a method of proportioning structural
elements using load and resistance factors such that no
applicable limit state is reached when the structure is
subjected to all ,appropriate load combinations. The term
"LRFD" is used in the design of steel and wood structures.

MARQUEE is a permanent roofed structure attached to

and supported by the building and projecting over public
property.

OCCUPANCY is the purpose for that a building, or part

thereof, is used or intended to be used.

STRENGm DESIGN MEmOD is a method of

proportioning structural elements such that the computed
forces produced in the elements by the factored load
combinations do not exceed the factored element strength.
The term "strength design" is used in the design of concrete
and masonry structures.

WALLS

BEARING WALL is any wall meeting either of the

following classifications:
1. Any metal or wood stud wall that supports more than
0.5 kN per linear meter of superimposed load.
2. Any masonry or concrete waH that supports more
than 1.0 kN per lineal meter superimposed loads, or
any such wall supporting its own weight for more
than one story.

L Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 COMBINATIONS OF LOADS
2-3

SECTION 203 - COMBINATIONS OF 1.2D+1.0E+ hL (203-5)

0.9 D (1.0 E or 1.3 W) (203-6)
LOADS
Where:
203.1 GENERAL
h 1.0 for floors in places of public assembly, for live
Buildings and other structures and all portions thereof shall loads in excess of 4.8 kPa, and for garage live load.
be designed to resist the load combinations specified in 0.5 for other live loads.
Section 203.3 or 203.4 and, where required by Section 208,
or Chapters 3 through the special seismic load combinations EXCEPTIONS:
of Section 203.5.
1. Factored load combinations for structural concrete
The most critical effect can occur when one or more of the per Section 409.2.
contributing loads are not acting. All applicable loads shall 2. Factored load combinations of this section
be considered, including both earthquake and wind, in multiplied by 1. masonry where load combinations
accordance with the specified load combinations. include seismic forces.
3. Where other factored load combinations are
specifically required by the provisions ofthis code.
203.2 NOTATIONS
203.3.2 Other loads. Where F, H, P or T are to be
dead load.
considered in design, each applicable load shall be added to
earthquake load set forth in Section 208.5. L 1.
the above combinations factored as follows: 1.3F, 1.6H,
estimated maximum earthquake force that can be
1.2P and 1.2T.
developed in the structure as set forth in Section

208.5.1.1.
F load due to fluids. 203.4 LOAD COMBINATIONS USING
H load due to lateral pressure of soil and water in A\LLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN.
soil.

live load, except roof live load, including any

203.4.1 Basic load combinations. Where allowable stress
permitted live load reduction.
design (working stress design) is used, structures and all
Lr roof live load, including any permitted live load portions thereof shall resist the most critical effects
reduction. resulting from the following combinations of loads:
P ponding load.
T self-straining force and effects arising from D (203-7)
contraction or expansion resulting from
temperature change, shrinkage, moisture change, D +L +LT (203-8)
creep in component materials, movement due to
differential settlement, or combinations thereof D +(wor~) (203-9)
1.4
w load due to wind pressure.
0.9D ~ (203-10)
1.4
203.3 LOAD COMBINATIONS USING
STRENGTH DESIGN OR LOAD
RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN.
AND D +0.75 [L + LT +(worl~)J (203-11)

203.3.1 Basic load combinations. Where Load and

Resistance Factor Design is used, structures and all portions
thereof shall resist the most critical effects from the
following combinations of factored loads:
I.4D (203-1)
1.2 D + 1.6 L + 0.5 L,. (203-2)
1.2 D + 1.6 LT + (Ii L or 0.8 W) (203-3)
I.2 D + 1.3 W fl L + 0.5 L,. (203-4)
No increase in allowable stresses shall be used with these
load combinations except as specifically permitted by
Section 308.2.
203.4.2 Alternate basic load combinatioDS. In lieu of the
basic load combinations specified in Section 203.4.1,
structures and portions thereof shall be permitted to be
designed for the most critical effects resulting from the
following load combinations. wIien using these alternate
basic load combinations, a one-third increase shall be

National Structural Code of 1he Philippines, Volume 1

2-4 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

permitted in allowable stresses for all combinations,

including W or E.
SECTION 204 - DEAD LOADS

D+ L + Lr (203-12) 204.1 GENERAL

D'+L+W (203-13)
Dead loads consist of the weight of all materials and fixed
E
D +L + (203-14) , equipment incorporated into the building or other structure,
1.4
including but not limited to walls, floors, roofs, ceilings,
stairways, built-in partitions, finishes, cladding and other
EXCEPTIONS: similarly incorporated architectural and structural items,
and fixed service equipment, including the weight of
Crane hook loads need not be combined with roof live load cranes.
or with more than one halfofthe wind load

203.4.3 Other loads. Where F~ H, P or T are to be 204.2 WEIGHTS OF MATERIALS AND

considered in design, each applicable load shall be added to
the combinations specified in Sections 203.4.1 and 203.4.2.
When using the alternate load combinations specified in
Section 203.4.2, a one-third increase shall be permitted in
allowable stresses for all combinations including Wor E.
CONSTRUCTION
The actual weights of materials and constructions shaH be
used in determining dead loads for purposes of design. In
the absence of definite information, it shall be permitted to
use the minimum values in Tables 204-1 and 204-2.

203.5 SPECIAL SEISMIC LOAD

COMBINATIONS

For both Allowable Stress Design and Strength Design, the

following special load combinations for seismic design
shall be used as specifically required by Section 208, or by
Chapters 3 through 8.

I2D + flL + 10Em (203-17)

0.9D 1.0E", (203-18)

Where:

fl = 1.0for floors in places of public assembly, for live

loads in excess of 4.8 kPa, and for garage live
load.
0.5 for other live loads.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines


TABLE 204-1 Minimum Densities for Design Loads from Materials (kN/m3 )
Aluminum .............................. 26.7
BITUMINOUS PRODUCTS
Asphaltum ........................... 12.7
Graphite ..................... ......... 21.2
Paraffin ..... ......... ... ..... .......... 8.8
Petroleum, crude .................. 8.6
Petroleum, refined ................ 7.9
Petroleum, benzine ............. " 7.2
Petroleum, gasoline .............. 6.6
Pitch ................................... 10.8
Tar ...................................... 11.8
Brass ...................................... 82.6
Bronze . .......... ........... .............. 86.7
Cast-stone masonry (cement,
stone, sand) .. .... ... .. .. ... .... .. . 22.6
Cement, portland, loose .......... 14.1
Ceramic tile ............................ 23.6
Charcoal ..... ........ .. ...... ........ ... . . l. 9
Cinder fill ................................ 9.0
Cinders, dry, in bulk ... ........ ..... 7.1
COAL
Anthracite, piled ................... 8.2
Bituminous, piled . ... .... ......... 7.4
Lignite, piled ........................ 7.4
Peat, dry, piled ..................... 3.6
CONCRETE, PLAIN
Cinder ................................. 17.0
Expanded-slag aggregate ..... 15.7
Haydite (burned-clay
aggregate) ........................ 14.1
Slag ..................................... 20.7
Stone ................................... 22.6
Vermiculite and perlite
aggregate, nonload-
bearing ......................... 3.9-7.9
Other light aggregate, load
bearing ..................... 11.0-16.5
CONCRETE, REThWORCED
Cinder ................................. 17.4
Slag ..................................... 21.7
Stone, (including gravel) ..... 23.6
Copper ................................... 87.3
Cork, compressed ........ ........... 2.2
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
DEAD LOADS
EARTH (not submerged)
Clay, dry ............................. 9.9
Clay, damp ......................... 17.3
Clay and gravel, dry ........ .... 15.7
Silt, moist, loose ................. 12.3
Silt, moist, packed .............. 15.1
Silt, flowing ........................ 17.0
Sand and gravel, dry, loose .. 15.7
Sand and gravel, dry, packed. 17.3
Sand and gravel, wet............. 18.9
EARTH (submerged)
Clay .................................... 12.6
Soil ..................................... 11.0
Rivermud ........................... 14.1
Sand or gravel . ... ........ ......... 9.4
Sand or gravel and clay....... 10.2
Glass ...................................... 25.1
Gravel, dry ............................. 16.3
Gypsum, loose ....... .... ..... ....... 11.0
Gypsum, wallboard ....... ......... 7.9
Ice ......................................... 9.0
IRON
Cast .................................. 70.7
Wrought ........................... 75.4
Lead ..................................... IlLS
LIME
Hydrated, loose ................... 5.0
Hydrated, compacted ... .... .. . 7. 1
MASONRY, ASHLAR STONE
Granite . ... ........ .. .............. ... 25.9
Limestone, crystalline ......... 25.9
Limestone, oolitic ............... 21.2
Marble ................................ 27.2
Sandstone ........................... 22.6
MASONRY, BRICK
Hard (low absorption) 20.4
Medium (medium
absorption) ....... ............... 18.1
Soft (high absorption) . ........ 15.7
MASONRY, CONCRETE (solid
portion)
Lightweight units ................ 16.5
Medium weight units .......... 19.6
Normal weight units ........... 2l.2
2-5
Masonry grout ........................ 22.0
MASONRY, RUBBLE STONE
Granite ................................ 24.0
Limestone, crystalline ......... 23.1
Limestone, oolitic ................ 21.7
Marble ................................. 24.5
Sandstone .......................... " 21.5
Mortar, cement or lime .. ...... 20.4
Particleboard .......................... 7.1
Plywood ................................. 5.7
RIPRAP (not submerged)
Limestone ........................... 13.0
Sandstone ............................ 14.1
SAND
Clean and dry ...... ,.............. . 14.1
River, dry ........................... . 16.7
SLAG
Bank 1l.0
Bank screenings ................. . 17.0
Machine ............................. . 15.1
Sand ............................ :...... . 8.2
Slate ....................................... 27.0
Steel, cold-drawn .................... 77.3
STONE, QUARRIED, P~ED
Basalt, granite, gneiss .......... 15.1
Limestone, marble, quartz ... 14.9
Sandstone ... , '" ., ............ ,..... . 12.9
Shale ................................... 14.5
Greenstone, hornblende ....... 16.8
TERRA COTTA, Architectural
Voids filled ......................... 18.9
Voids unfilled ...................... 11.3
Tin .......................................... 72.1
WATER
Fresh ................................... 9.8
Sea ...................................... 10.1
Wood (see Table 6.2 for relative
densities for Philippine wood)
Zinc, rolled sheet .................... 70.5
 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

Table 204 -2 Minimum Design Dead Loads (kPa) (Use actual loads when available)
Load Component Load

CEILINGS Waterproofing membranes: FRAME PARTITIONS.

Acoustical Fiber Board ............ 0.05 Bituminous, gravel-covered 0.26 Movable steel partitions.......... 0.19
Gypsum Board (per mm Bituminous, smooth surface. 0.07 Wood or steel studs. 13 mm
thickness) ............................ 0.008
Liquid, applied .................... 0.05 gypsum board each side ....... 0.38
Mechanical duct allowance ........ 0.20
Single-ply, sheet ................ 0.03 Wood studs, 50 x 100,
Plaster on tile or concrete ........ 0.24
Wood Sheathing (per mm unplastered .......................... 0.19
Plaster on wood lath ............... 0.38
thickness) ............................ 0.0057 Wood studs 50 x 100, plastered
Suspended steel channel
Wood shingles .......................... 0.14 one side ................................... 0.57
system ................................. 0.10 Wood studs 50 x 100, plastered
Suspended metal lath and FLOOR FILL two side .................................. 0.96
cement plaster ... ....... ....... .. ... 0.72 Cinder concrete, per mm ........... 0.017
Suspended metal lath and Lightweight concrete, per mm ... 0.015 FRAME WALLS
gypsum plaster ..................... 0.48 Sand, per mm ............................ 0.015 Exterior stud walls:
Wood furring suspension Stone concrete, per mm ............. 0.023 5Oxl00 mm @ 400 mm, 15
system .................................. 0.12 mm gypsum, insulated, 10
FLOOR AND FLOOR FINISHES mm siding .......................... 0.53

COVERINGS, ROOF AND
WALL
Asphalt shingles .......................... 0.10
Cement tile .................................. O.77
Clay tile (for mortar add 0.48 kPa)
Book tile, 50 mm ................... 0.57
on 13 mm mortar bed .............. 0.77
Book tile, 75 mm .................... 0.96
Ceramic or quarry tile (20 mm)
Ludowici ................................ 0.48
on 25 mm mortar bed .............. 1.10
Roman ................................... 0.57
Concrete fill finish (per mm
Asphalt block (50 mm), 13 mm 5Ox150 mm @ 400 mm, 15
mortar ..................................... 1.44 mm gypsum, insulated, 10
Cement finish (25 mm) on mm siding .......................... 0.57
stone-concrete fill ..................... 1.53 Exterior stud wall with brick
Ceramic or quarry tile (20 mm) veneer ................................. 2.30
Windows, glass, frame and
sash ..................................... 0.38
Clay brick wythes:
100 mm ........................... 1.87

Spanish .................................. 0.91

thickness) .............................. 0.023 200mm ........................... 3.80

Composition: Hardwood flooring, 22 mm ........ 0.19 300mm ........................... 5.50

Three-ply ready roofing.......... 0.05 Linoleum or asphalt tile, 6mm ..... 0.05 400 mm ........................... 7.42
Four-ply felt and gravel... ....... 0.26 Marble and mortar on stone- Hollow Concrete Masonry units
Five-ply felt and gravel .......... 0.29 concrete fill ............................. 1.58 (Unplastered, add 0.24 kPa for each
Copper or tin ............................... 0.05 Slate (permm thickness) ........... 0.028 face lastered
Corrugated asbestos-cement Solid flat tile on 25 mm mortar
roofing ..................................... 0.19
base ......................................... 1.10
Deck, metal 20 gage .................. 0.12
Subflooring, 19 mm .................... 0.14
Deck, metal, 18 gage .................. 0.14
Terrazzo (38 mm) directly on
Fiberboard, 13 mm ..................... 0.04
slab .......................................... 0.91 I 2.01
Gypsum sheathing, 13 mm ......... 0.10
Terrazzo (25 mm) on stone- II 2.20
Insulation., roof boards (per mm thickness)
concrete fill ............................. 1.53 I 2.5i~._.
Cellular glass .................. 0.0013
Terrazzo (25 mm), 50 mm stone 13.59
Fibrous glass ................... 0.0021
concrete ................................... 1.53
Fiberboard ....................... 0.0028
Wood block (76 mm) on mastic,
Perlite ............ :................ 0.0015
no fill ....................................... 0.48
polystyrene foam ............. 0.0004
Wood block (76 mm) on 13 mm
Urethane foam with skin ." 0.0009
mortar base .............................. 0.77
Plywood (per mm thickness) .. 0 ..0060
Rigid Insulation., 13 mm ......... 0.04 FLOORS, WOOD-JOIST (no plaster)
21.2 kNlm
Skylight, metal frame, 10 mm Joist I Joist Spacing
Sizes 1 300 ! 400 i 600 ~grout
wire glass .... ........ ..... ... ......... 0.3 8

Slate, 5 mm ............................. 0.34

(nun) i nun I nun i nun 800

5Ox150 0.30 0.25 0.25 600
Slate, 6 mm ............................. 0.48

50x200 0.30 10.30 0.25 400

Full
50x250 0.35 i 0.30
50000 0.40 ! 0.35 0.30

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 DEAD LOADS & LIVE LOADS
2-7

204.3 PARTmON LOADS SECTION 205 - LIVE LOADS

Floors in office buildings and other buildings where
205.1 GENERAL
partition locations are subject to change shall be designed to
support, in addition to all other loads, a uniform1y Live loads shall be the maximum loads expected by the
distributed dead load equal to 1.0 kPa of floor area. intended use or occupancy but in no case shall be less than
the loads required by this section.
EXCEPTION:

Access floor systems shall be designed to support, in

addition to all other loads, a uniformly distributed dead
205.2 CRITICAL DISTRIBUTION OF LIVE
load not less than 0.5 kPa qffloor area. LOADS

Where structural members are arranged to create continuity,

members shall be designed using the loading conditions,
which would cause maximum shear and bending moments.
This requirement may be satisfied in accordance with the
provisions of Section 205.3.2 or 205.4.2, where applicable.

205.3 FLOOR LIVE LOADS

205.3.1 General. Floors shall be designed for the unit live

loads as set forth in Table 205-1. These loads shall be taken
as the minimum live loads in kilonewton per square meter
of horizontal projection to be used in the design of
buildings for the occupancies listed, and loads at least equal
shall be assumed for uses not listed in this section but that
create or accommodate similar loadings.

Where it can be determined. in designing floors that the

actual live load will be greater than the value shown in
Table 205-1, the actual live load shall be used in the des~n
of such buildings or portions thereof Special provisions
shall be made for machine and apparatus loads.

205.3.2 Distribution of uniform floor loads. Where

uniform floor loads are involved, consideration may be
limited to full dead load on all spans in combination with
full live load on adjacent spans and alternate spans.

205.3.3 Concentrated loads. Provision shall be made in

designing floors for a concentrated load, L, as set forth in
Table 205-1 placed upon any space 760 mm square,
wherever this load upon an otherwise unloaded floor would
produce stresses greater than those caused by the uniform
load required therefore.

Provision shall be made in areas where vehicles are used or

stored for concentrated loads, L, consisting of two or more
loads spaced 1. 5 meters nominally on center without
uniform live loads. Each load shall be 40 percent of the
gross weight of the maximum size vehicle to be
accommodated. Parking garages for the storage of private
or pleasure-type motor vehicles with no repair or refueling
shall h~ a floor system designed for a concentrated lo~
of not less than 8.9 kN acting on an area of 0.013 m

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

2-8 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

without uniform live loads. The condition of concentrated TABLE 205-1 (continued) - MINIMUM UNIFORM
or uniform live load, combined in accordance with Section AND CONCENTRATED LIVE LOADS

203.3 or 203.4 as appropriate, producing the greatest Concen

Uniform
stresses shall govern. I USE OR OCCUPANCY
1 trated
Load
Load
205.3.4 Special loads. Provision shall be made for the Category
Description kPa kN
special vertical and lateral loads as set forth in Table 205-2. 6
Basic floor area 1.9 0
I
Exterior
2.9 4
I
balconies
0
8
TABLE 205-1 MINIMUM UNIFORM AND 13. Residential
4
CONCENTRATED LIVE LOADS Decks 1.9 0

-l
'fi Concen- 1.9
USE OR OCCUPANCY U Dl orm d
Storage 0

~~.~-.--.~~---
Category Description
_kPa~a~t:::-l
kN
14. Restrooms 9 -- -- --
_. 15. Reviewing
9.0) stands, grandstands,
()fticeuse 2.4
1. Access floor
Bleachers,
folding
and
and
-- 4.8 0
systems

Computer use 4.8 9.0 2 telescoping seating

Same as area
2. Armories 7.2 0 16. Roof decks served or -- --
Occupancy
Fixed seating 2.9 0 2
17. Schools 1.9 4.5
3
,
3. Assembly areas
and auditorium
Movable
seating

4.8 0 18. Sidewalks and

Public access 12.0 -- 7
driveways
and balconies
Lobbies and !
therewith platforms 4.8 0 Light 6.0 --
19. Storage
,

Cornices and
Stag.es llreas 7.2
~ 12.0 --
i 4. . 3.6 4 0 Retail 4.8 4.5 2

t marquees
Dining rooms and
restaurants
I
- 4.8 I 0
20. Stores

21. Pedestrian
Wholesale 6.0 13.4
2

6. -.-
Exit facilities
........ ..

5
4.8 0 6 bridges
walkways
and - 4.8 --
General storage - NOTES FOR TABLE 205-1
and/or repair
4.8 --
See Section 205.5 for live load reductions.
7. Garages Prhllte or 2
See Section 205.3.3, first paragraph, for area of load
i pleasure-type
motor vehicle
2.4 -- 7

3
application.
Assembly areas include such occupancies as dance halls,
.... storage
drill rooms, gymnasiums, playgrounds, plazas, terraces and
Wards and!
1.9 4.5 .:> similar occupancies that are generally accessible to the
rooms public.
8. Hospitals 4
Laboratories & 2 For special-purpose roofs, see Section 205.4.4.
operating rooms
2.9 I 4.5 5
Exit facilities shall include such uses as corridors serving
2 an occupant load of 10 or more persons, exterior exit
i Reading rooms 2.9 4.5 balconies, stairways, fire escapes and similar uses.
9. Libraries Individual stair treads shall be designed to support a 1.3 kN
Stack rooms 7.2 6.7 2 concentrated load placed in a position that would cause
maximum stress. Stair stringers may be designed for the
2 uniform load set forth in the table.
I Light 6.0 9.0
10. Manufacturing See Section 205.3.3, second paragraph, for concentrated
Heavy 12.0 13.4) loads. See Table 205-2 for vehicle barriers.
8
Residential occupancies include private dwellings,
apartments and hotel guest rooms.
11. Offices - 2.4 9.0~ 9
Restroom loads shall not be less than the load for the
occupancy with which they are associated, but need not
Press rooms I 7.2 11.0 2 exceed 2.4 kPa.
I 12. Printing plants
Composing and
linotype rooms
4.8 9.0 2 I
i

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 UVELOADS 2-9

TABLE 205-2 - SPECIAL LOADS 1 NOTES FOR TABLE 205-2

Vertical Lateral
USE Load Load 1 The tabulated loads are minimum loads. Where other vertical by
this code or required by the design would cause greater stresses,
Category kPa kPa they shall be used. Loads are in kPa unless otherwise indicated
in the table.
L Construction, Walkway 7.2 - 2 Units is kN/m.
public access at
3 Lateral sway bracing loads of 350 N/m parallel and 145 N/m
site (live load) Canopy 7.2 - I
perpendicular to seat and footboards.
2. Grandstands, 4 Does not apply to ceilings that have sufficient total access from

reviewing, stands below, such that access is not required within the space above
the ceiling. Does not apply to ceilings if the attic areas above the
bleachers, and Seats and 1.75 See
ceiling are not provided with access. This live load need not be
folding and footboards kN/m 2 Note 3
considered as acting simultaneously with other live loads
telescoping imposed upon the ceiling framing or its supporting structure.
seating' (live load) I S The impact factors included are for cranes with steel wheels
riding on steel rails. They may be modified if substantiating
3. Stage accessories
Catwalks 11.9 - technical data acceptable to the building official is submitted. Live
loads on crane support girders and their connections shall be
(live load) Followspot, 1
taken as the maximum crane wheel loads. For pendant-operated
. projection and
; control rooms
2.4 - traveling crane support girders and their connections, the impact
factors shall be 1.10.

4. CelTmg framIng
. ~
. . stages
1.0 - 6 This applies in the direction parallel to the runway rails
(longitudinal). The factor for forces perpendicular to the rail is
(live load) All uses except 0.20 x the transverse traveling loads (troiley, cab, hooks and
0.5 4
lover stages I- lifted loads). Forces shall be applied at top of rail and may be
disturbed among rails of multiple rail cranes and shall be
5. Partitions and
interior walls, I - I 0.25 distributed with due regard for lateral stiffness of the structures
supporting these rails.
6. Elevators and 7 A load per lineal meter (kN/m) to be applied horizontally at right
2 x total
dumbwaiters( dead I loads - angles to the top rail.
and live loads) 8 Intermediate rails, panel fillers and their connections shall be

Total load 1.25 x 0.10 x capable of withstanding a load of 1.2 kPa applied horizontally at
8. Cranes (dead and including total total right angles over the entire tributary area, including openings and
live loads) impact increase load' load
6 spaces between Pails. Reactions due to this loading need not be
combined with those of Footnote 7.
Exitfacilities I 9 A horizontal load in kilo newtons applied at right angles to the
serving an 0.75
occupant load - kN/m
7
vehicle barrier at a height of 450 mm above the parking surface.
The force may be distributed over a 300-millimeter-square are1\.
9. Balcony railings
~erthan50 I I 10 The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed

Other than exit 1 0.30 handrail and supporting structure are capable of withstanding a
and guardrails
! facilities - kN/m 7 load of at least 890 N applied in any direction at any point on the
rail. These loads shall not be assumed to act cumulatively with
r- I __ Item 9.
I Components 1.2 8
11 Vertical members of storage racks shall be protected from impact

I forces of operating equipment, or racks shall be designed so that

10. Vehicle barriers - I - 27kN9 failure of one vertical member will no cause collapse of more than
I
1 the bay or bays directly supported by that member.
I
J

II. Handrails I See

. Note 10
I See
Note 10
12 The 1.1 kN load is to be applied to any single fire sprinkler

I support point but not simultaneously to all support joints..

Over 2.4 meter Total . See Table
12. Storage racks
I high loads
ll
208-12
Ll kN
plus
13. Fire sprinkler weight of See Table
structural support
- water-
i
filled
i pipeJ2
I

Nationaf Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

2-10 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

205.4 ROOF LIVE LOADS
205.4.1 General Roofs shall be designed for the unit
live loads, L r, set forth in Table 205-3. The live loads shall
be assumed to act vertically upon the area projected on a
horizontal plane.
205.4.2 Distribution of loads. Where uniform roof loads
are involved in the design of structural members arranged
to create continuity, consideration may be limited to full
dead loads on all spans in combination with full roof live
loads on adjacent spans and on alternate spans.
EXCEPTION:
Alternate span loading need not be considered where the
uniform rooflive load is 1 kPa or more.
For those conditions where light-gage metal preformed
structural sheets serve as the support and finish of roofs,
roof structural members arranged to create continuity shall
be considered adequate if designed for full dead loads on all
spans in combination with the most critical one of the
following superimposed loads:
1. The uniform roof live load, L r, set forth in Table
205-3 on all spans.
2. A concentrated gravity load, L r, of 9 kN placed on
an:! span supporting a tributary area greater than 18.5
m to create maximum stresses in the member,
whenever this loading creates greater stresses than
those caused by the uniform live load. The
concentrated load shall be placed on the member
over a length of 750 mm along the span. The
concentrated load need not be applied to more than
one span simultaneously.
3. Water accumulation as prescribed in Section 206.7.
205.4.3 Unbalanced loading. Unbalanced loads shall be
used where such loading will result in larger members or
connections. Trusses and arches shall be designed to resist
the stresses caused by unit live loads on one half of the span
if such loading results in reverse stresses, or stresses greater
in any portion than the stresses produced by the required
unit live load on the entire span. For roofs whose structures
are composed of a stressed shell, framed or solid, wherein
stresses caused by any point loading are distributed
throughout the area of the shell, the requirements for
unbalanced unit live load design may be reduced 50
percent.
205.4.4 Special roof loads. Roofs to be used for special
purposes shall be designed for appropriate loads as
approved by the building official.
Greenhouse roof bars, purlins and rafters shall be designed
to carry a 0.45 kN concentrated load, L,., in addition to the
uniform live load.

Table 205-3 Minimum Roof Live Loads 1

METHOD 1 METHOD 2
Tributary Area (mZ) Rate of Maximum
ROOF SLOPE Uniform
o to 18.5 18.5 to 56 Over 56 Reduction, Reduction
I Load}
r R
Uniform Load (kPa) . (kPa) (percenfaJ1;e) (percentage)
1. Flaf or rise less than 4 units vertical in 12
units horizontal (33.3% slope). Arch and 1.00 0.75 0.60 1.00 0.08 40
dome with rise less than one-eicllt of span.
2. Rise 4 units vertical to less than 12 units
vertical in 12 units horizontal (33% to less
than 100% slope). Arch and domes with rise 0.75 0.70 0.60 0.75 .0.06 25
one-eight of span to less than three-.eights of
span.
3. Rise 12 units vertical in 12 units horizontal
(100% slope) and greater. Arch or dome 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
with rise three eights ofspan or greater

4. Awnings except cloth covered. 4 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 No reduction permitted

5. Green1iouses, lath houses and Agricultural

050
buildings. 5
1 For special-purpose roofs, see Section 205.4.4
2 See Sections 205.5 and 205.6 for live-load reductions. The
rate of reduction r in Equation 205-1 shall be as indicated in
the table. The maximum reduction, R, shall not exceed the
value indicated in the table.
0.50 0.50 0.50
3 A flat roof is any roof with a slope less than 1/4 unit vertical
in 12 units horizontal (2% slope). The live load for flat roofs
is in addition to the ponding load required by Section 206.7.
4 See definition in Section 202.
S See Section 205.4.4 for concentrated load requirements for
greenhouse roof members.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 LNELOADS 2-11

205.5 REDUCTION OF LIVE LOADS
The design live load deteffilined using the unit live loads as
set forth in Table 205-1 for floors and Table 205-3, Method
2, for roofs mar be reduced on any member supporting
more than 14 m , including flat slabs, except for floors in
places of public assembly and for live loads greater than 4.8
kPa, in accordance with the following Equation:
R = r (A - 14) (205-1)
The reduction shall not exceed 40 percent for members
receiving load from one level only, 60 percent for other
members or R, as determined by the following Equation:
product of the span and the full flange width for a
precast T -beam.
L reduced design live load per square meter of area
supported by the member.
Lo unreduced design live load per square meter of
area supported by the member (Table 205-1).
The reduced live load shall not be less than 50 percent of
the unit live load Lo for members receiving load from one
level only, nor less than 40 percent of the unit live load Lo
for other members.

R = 23.1 (1 + DIL) (205-2)

Where:
A = area of floor or roof supported by the member,
square meter.
D dead load per square meter of area supported by
the member.
L = unit live load per square meter of area supported
by the member.
R == reduction in percentage. 0,8'"
r rate of reduction equal to~ percent for floors.
See Table 205-3 for roofs.

For storage loads exceeding 4.8 kPa, no reduction shall be

made, except that design live loads on columns may be
reduced 20 percent.

The live load reduction shall not exceed 40 percent in

garages for the storage of private pleasure cars having a
capacity ofnot more than nine passengers per vehicle.

205.6 ALTERNATE FLOOR LIVE LOAD

REDUCTION

As an alternate to Equation (205-1), the unit live loads set

forth in Table 205-1 may be reduced in accordance with
Equation 205-3 on any member, including flat slabs, having
an influence area of 37.2 m2 or more.

(205-3)

Where:

AI influence 1P"ea, in square meter. The influence area

AI is four times the tributary area for a column, two
times the tributary area for a beam, equal to the
panel area for a two-way slab, and equal to the

National structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

212 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
SECTION 206 - OTHER MINlMUM
LOADS
206.1 GENERAL
In addition to the other design loads specified in this
chapter, structures shall be designed to resist the loads
specified in this section and the special loads set forth in
Table 205-2. See Section 207 for design wind loads, and
Section 208 for design earthquake loads.
206.2 OrnER LOADS
Buildings and other structures and portions thereof shall be
designed to resist all loads due to applicable fluid pressures,
F, lateral soil pressures, H, ponding loads, P, and self
straining forces, T. See Section 206.7 for ponding loads for
roofs.
206.3 IMPACT LOADS
code.
The live loads specified in Sections 205.3 shall be assumed
to include allowance for ordinary impact conditions.
Provisions shall be made in the structural design for uses
and loads that involve unusual vibration and impact forces.
See Section 206.9.3 for impact loads for cranes, and
Section 206.10 for heliport and helistop landing areas.
206.3.1 Elevators. All elevator loads shall be increased
by 100% for impact.
206.3.2 Machi~ery. For the purpose of design, the
weight of machinery and moving loads shall be increased as
follows to allow for impact:
1. Elevator machinery .... ..... .. .. .. ... .... 100%
2. Light machinery, shaft- or
motor-driven ................. ,.... ... 20010
3. Reciprocating machinery or
power-driven units ................ 50%
4. Hangers for floors and
balconies ..... ......... ............. .... 33%
All percentages shall be increased where specified by the
manufacturer.
206.4 ANCHORAGE OF CONCRETE AND
MASONRY WALLS
Concrete and masonry walls shall be anchored as required
by Section 104.3.4. Such anchor:age shall be capable of
resisting the load combinations of Section 203.3 or 203.4
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
using the greater of the wind or earthquake loads required
'by this chapter or a minimum horizontal force of 4.0 kN/m
of wall, substituted for E.
206.5 INTERIOR WALL LOADS
Interior walls, permanent partitions and temporary
partitions that exceed 1.8 meters in height shall be designed
to resist all loads to which they are subjected but not less
than a load, L, of 0.25 kPa applied perpendicular to the
walls. The 0.25 kPa load need not be applied simul
taneously with wind or seismic loads. The deflection of
such walls under a load of 0.25 kPa shall not exceed ]/240
of the span for walls with brittle finishes and ]/120 of the
span for walls with flexible finishes. See Table 208-12 for
earthquake design requirements where such requirements
are more restrictive.
EXC'EPTION:
Flexible, folding or portable partitions are not required to
meet the load and deflection criteria but must be anchored
to the supporting structure to meet the provisions (?f this
206.6 RETAINING WALLS
Retaining walls shall be designed to resist loads due to the
lateral pressure of retained material in accordance with
accepted engineering practice. Walls retaining drained soil,
where the surface of the retained soil is level, shall be
designed for a load, H, equivalent to that exerted by a fluid
weighing not less than 4.7 kPa per meter of depth and
having a depth equal to that of the retained soil. Any
surcharge shall be in addition to the equivalent fluid
pressure.
Retaining walls shall be designed to resist sliding by at least
1.5 times the lateral force and overturning by at least 1.5
times the overturning moment, using allowable stress
design loads.
206.7 WATER ACCUMULATION
All roofs shall be designed with sufficient slope or camber
to ensure adequate drainage after the long-term deflection
from dead load or shall be designed to resist ponding load,
P, combined in accordance with Section 203.3 or 203.4.
Ponding load shall include water accumulation from any
source due to deflection.
 OTHER MINIMUM LOADS 2-13

206.8 HYDROSTATIC UPLIFT 206.10 HELIPORT AND HELISTOP

All foundations, slabs and other footings subjected to water
pressure shall be designed to resist a uniformly distributed
uplift load, F, equal to the full hydrostatic pressure.
206.9' CRANE LOADS
206.9.1 General. The crane load shall be the rated
capacity of the crane. Design loads for the runway beams,
including connections and support brackets, of moving
bridge cranes and monorail cranes shall include the
maximum wheel loads of the crane and the vertical impact,
lateral, and longitudinal forces induced by the moving
crane.
LANDING AREAS
In addition to other design requirements of this chapter,
heliport and helistop landing or touchdown areas shall be
designed for the following loads, combined in accordance
with Section 203.3 or 203.4:
1. Dead load plus actual weight ofthe helicopter.
2. Dead load plus a single concentrated impact load, L,
covering 0.093 m2 of 0.75 times the fully loaded
weight of the helicopter if it is equipped with
hydraulic-type shock absorbers, or 1.5 times the_fully
loaded weight of the helicopter if it is equipped' with
a rigid or skid-type landing gear.

206.9.2 Maximum wheel load. The maximum wheel
loads shall be the wheel loads produced by the weight of
the bridge, as applicable, plus the sum of the rated capacity
and the weight of the trolley with the trolley positioned on
its runway where the resulting load effect is maximum.
The dead load plus a uniform live load, L, of 4.8 kPa.
The required live load may be reduced in accordance
with Section 205.5 or 205.6.

206.9.3 Vertical Impact force. The maximum wheel

loads of the crane shall be increased by the percentages
shown below to determine the induced vertical impact or
vibration force:
1. Monorail cranes (powered) ............. 25%
2. Cab-operated or remotely
operated bridge cranes
(powered) ., ....... ... ....................... 25%
3. Pendant-operated bridge cranes
(powered) .................................. 10%
4. Bridge cranes or monorail cranes
with hand-geared bridge,
trolley and hoist.......................... 0010

206.9.4 Lateral force. The lateral force on crane runway

beams with electrically powered trolleys shall be calculated
as 20% of the sum of the rated capacity of the crane and the
weight of the hoist and troBey. The lateral force shall be
assumed to act horizontally at the traction surface of a
runway beam, in either direction perpendicular to the beam,
and. sha11 be distributed with due regard to the lateral
stiffness ofthe runway beam and supporting structure.

206.9.5 Longitudinal forces. The longitudinal forces on

crane runway beams, except for bridge cranes with hand
geared bridges, shall be calculated as 100/0 of the maximum
wheel loads of the crane. The longitudinal force shall be
assumed to act horizontally at the traction surface of a
runway beam, in either direction parallel to the beam.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

2-14 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
SECTION 207 - WIND LOAD
207.1 GENERAL
Every building or structure and every portion thereof shall
be designed and constructed to resist the wind effects
determined in accordance with the requirements of this
section. These provisions apply to the calculation of wind
loads for main wind-force resisting systems and for
individual structural components and cladding of buildings
and other structures.
Specific requirements are given for using wind-tunnel
investigations to determine wind loading and structural
response for buildings or other structures having irregular
geometric shapes, response characteristics, or site locations
with shielding or channeling effects that warrant specific
investigation, or to establish more accurate wind loading.
The provisions of this section do not apply to building and
foundation systems in those areas subject to scour and
water pressure by wind and wave action.
207.2 DEFINITIONS
The following definitions apply to the provisions of
Section 207.
BASIC WIND SPEED, V is a 3-second gust speed at 10
meters above the ground in Exposure C (see Section
207.5.3.1) and associated with an annual probability of 0.02
of being equaled or exceeded (50-year mean recurrence
interval).
Bun.DING, ENCLOSED is a building that does not
comply with the requirements for open or partially enclosed
buildings.
Bun.DING, OPEN is a structure having all walls at least
80% open.
BUILDING, PARTIALLY ENCLOSED is a building
that complies with both ofthe following conditions:
1. the total area of openings in a wall that receives
positive external pressure exceeds the sum of the
areas of openings in the balance of the building
envelope (walls and root) by more than 10%; and
2. the total area of openings in a wall that receives
positive external pressure exceeds 0.5 m2 or 1% of
the area of that wall, whichever is smaller, and the
percentage of openings in the balance of the building
envelope does not exceed 20%.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
These conditions are expressed by the following equations:
1. Ao > 1.lOAoi
2. Ao > smaller of (0.5 m2 or O.OIAg),
and Ao;lAg;:<; 0.20
where:
Ao = the total area of openings in a wall that receives
positive external pressure, in square meters
Ag = the gross area ofthat wall in which Ao is identified,
in square meters
Ao! = the sum of the areas of openings in the building
envelope (walls and root) not including Ao, in
square meters
Agi the sum of the gross surface areas of the building
envelope (walls and root) not including Ago in
square meters
BUILDING, LOW RISE is an enclosed or partially
enclosed building which complies with the following
conditions:
1. mean roof height, h, less than or equal to 18 meters.
2. mean roof height, h, does not exceed least horizontal
dimension.
COMPONENTS AND CLADDING are elements that
do not qualify as part of the main wind-force resisting
system.
DESIGN FORCE, F, is the equivalent static force to be
used in the determination of wind loads for open buildings
and other structures.
DESIGN PRESSURE, p, is the equivalent static pressure
to be used in the determination of wind loads for buildings.
The pressure is denoted as:
pz pressure that varies with height in accordance
with the velocity pressure qz evaluated at height
Z, or
pressure that is uniform with respect to height as
determined by the velocity pressure qh evaluated
at mean roof height h.
EFFECTIVE WIND AREA is the area used to
determined GCp For components and cladding panels, the
effective wind area in Figures 207-5 through 207-8 is the
span length multiplied by an effective width that need not
be less than one-third the span length. For cladding
fasteners, the effective wind area shall not be greater than
the area that is tributary to an individual fastener.
FLEXmLE Bun.DINGS AND OTHER STRUC
TURES are slender buildings and other structures that
have a fundamental natural frequency less than 1 Hz.
Included are buildings and other structures that have a
height, h, exceeding four times the least horizontal
dimension.
 WIND LOAD 2-15
IMPORTANCE FACTOR, I,,~ is a factor that accounts
for the degree of hazard to human life and damage to
property.
MAIN WIND-FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM is an
assemblage of structural elements assigned to provide
support and stability for the overall structure. The system
generally receives wind loading from more than one
surface.
RECOGNIZED LITERATURE are published research
findings and technical papers that are approved by the
authority having jurisdiction.
207.3 SYMBOLS AND NOTATION
A effective wind area, in square meters.
a width of pressure coefficient zone, in meters
Ar area of open buildings and other structures either
normal to the surface or projected on a plane
normal to the wind direction, in square meters.
B horizontal dimension of a building measured
normal to wind direction, in meters.
force coefficients to be used in the determination
of wind loads for other structures.
cp external pressure coefficient to be used in the
r rise-to-span ratio for arched roofs.
determination of wind loads for buildings.
V basic wind speed obtained trom Figure 207-1, in
1) diameter of a circular structure or member, in
kilometers per hour. The basic \vind speed
meters.
J)' depth of protruding elements such as ribs and
spoilers, in meters.
G gust effect factor.
Gr gust effect factor for main wind-force reslstmg
systems of flexible buildings and other structures.
product of external pressure coefficient and gust
effect factor to be used in the determination of
wind loads for buildings.
product of equivalent external pressure coefficient
and 'gust effect factor to be used in the
determination of wind loads for main wind-force
resisting system oflow-rise buildings.
product of internal pressure coefficient and gust
effect factor to be used in the determination of
wind loads for buildings.
H height of hill or escarpment in Fig 207-2, in
meters.
h mean roof height of a building or height of other
structure, except that eave height shall be used for
roof angle 0 ofless than or equal to 10, in meters.
importance factor.
Kj, K2,
multipliers in Figure 207-2 to obtain K:,.
loads for buildings and other structures as a whole or for
velocity pressure exposure coefficient evaluated at
individual components and cladding thereof shall be
height z = h.
determined using one of the following procedures:
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
velocity pressure exposure coefficient evaluated at
height z.
topographic factor.
horizontal dimension of a building measured
parallel to the wind direction, in meters.
distance upwind of crest of hill or escarpment in
Fig 207-2 to where the difference in ground
elevation is half the height of hill or escarpment, in
meters.
M larger dimension of sign, in meters.
N smaller dimension of sign, in meters.
p design pressure to be used in the determination of
wind loads for buildings, in kilo newtons per
square meters (kilopascals).
design pressure evaluated at height z h, in
kilopascals.
wind pressure acting on leeward face in Figure
207-9.
PI[' wind pressure acting on windward face in Figure
207-9.
design pressure evaluated at height z above
ground, in kilopascals.
velocity pressure, in kilopascals.
velocity pressure evaluated at height z h, in
kilopascals.
velocity pressure evaluated at height z above
ground, in kilopascals.
corresponds to a 3-sec. gust speed at 10 meters
above ground in exposure category C and is
associated with an annual probability of 0.02 of
being equaled or exceeded.
w width of a building in Figures 207-5C and 207-7 A
and width of span in Figures 207-6 and 207-7B, in
meters.
x distance to center of pressure from windward edge
in Table 207-6, in meters.
x distance upwind or downwind of crest in Figure
207-2 in meters.
height above ground level, in meters.
ratio of solid area to gross area for open sign, face
or a trussed tower, or lattice structure.
o angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees
v height-ta-width ratio for solid sign
207.4 CALCULATION OF WIND LOADS
20'7.4.1 GENERAL
207.4.1.1 Allowed procedures. The design wind
 2-16 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
1. Analytical procedure in accordance with Section
207.4.2; or
2. Wind-tunnel procedure in accordance with Section
207.4.3.
207.4.1.2 Minimum design wind loading. The wind
load used in the design of the main wind-force resisting
system shall be not less than 0.5 kPa multiplied by the area
of the building or structure projected on a vertical plane
normal to the wind direction.
In the calculation of design wind loads for components and
cladding for buildings, the algebraic sum of the pressures
acting on opposite faces shall be taken into account. The
design pressure for components and cladding of buildings
shall be not less than 0.5 kPa acting in either direction
normal to the surface.
The design force for open buildings and other structures
shall be not less than 0.5 kPa multiplied by the areaAf
207.4.2 ANALYTICAL PROCEDURE
Design wind pressures and design wind forces shall be
determined in accordance with the appropriate equations
t given in Table 207-1 using the following procedure:
1. A velocity pressure q (q~ or qh) is determined in
accordance with the provisions of Section 207.5.
2 A gust effect factor G is determined in accordance
with the provisions of Section 207.6.
3. Appropriate pressure or force coefficients are
selected from the provisions of Section 207.7.
The equations given in Table 207-1 are for determination
of: 0) Wind loading on main wind-force resisting systems;
and (2) wind. loading on individual components and
cladding.' .
207.4.2.1 Limitations of analytical procedure. The
provisions of Section 207.4.2 take into consideration the
load magnification effect caused by gusts in resonance with
along-wind vibrations of flexible buildings and other
structures but do not include allowances for across-wind
loading, vortex shedding, or instability due to galloping or
flutter. The designer shall refer to recognized literature or
documentation pertaining to wind load effects, or use the
wind-tunnel procedure of Section 207.4.3, for site locations
for which channeling effects or buffeting in the wake of
upwind obstructions warrant special consideration, or for
those buildings and other structures having unusual
geometric shapes or response characteristics.
207.4.2.2 Air-permeable cladding. Design pressures
determined from Section 207.4.2 shall be used, unless
approved test data or recognized literature demonstrate
lower loads for the type of air-permeable cladding being
considered.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
207.4.2.3 Application of pressures and forces.
Design pressures, p, shall be assumed to act in a direction
normal to the surface considered. Design forces, F, shall be
assumed to act on the gross structure or components and
cladding in accordance with Tables 207-6 through 207-10
and shall be considered to vary with respect to height in
accordance with the velocity pressure qz.
207.4.3 WIND-TUNNEL PROCEDURE
Wind-tunnel tests or similar tests employing fluids other
than air shall be used for the determination of design wind
loads in accordance with Section 207.4.3.1.
207.4.3.1 Test conditions. Tests for the determination
of mean and fluctuating forces and pressures shall be
considered to be properly conducted only if all of the
following conditions are satisfied:
I. The natural atmospheric boundary layer has been
modeled to account for the variation of wind speed
with height;
2. The relevant macro (integral) length and micro
length scales of the longitudinal component of
atmospheric turbulence are modeled to appro
ximately the same scale as that used to model the
building or other structure;
3. The modeled building or other structure and
surrounding structures and topography are geome
trically similar to their full-scale counterparts;
4. The projected area of the modeled building or other
structure and surroundings is less than 8% of the test
section cross-sectional area unless correction is made
for blockage;
5. The longitudinal pressure gradient in the wind tunnel
test section is accounted for;
6. Reynolds number effects on pressures and forces are
minimized; and
7. Response characteristics of the wind tunnel
instrumentation are consistent with the required
measurements.
207.4.3.2 Dynamic response. Tests for the purpose
of determining the dynamic response of a building or other
structure shall be in accordance with Section 207.4.3.1.
The structural model and associated analysis shall account
for mass distribution, stiffhess, and damping.
 WIND LOAD 2-17

TABLE 207-1 Design Wind Pressure, p (kPa), and Forces, F (kN)

I Low-rise buildings Buildings of all heights
Open buildings and
II
I other structures
1.::,5
P = q'II(G(~.rl - iCpj )! p = q GCp - qll (GCp ;) 1.2 F = q:GC"A f

iJ,,: at mean roof height q: q= for windward wall at q,: at height :: ubove

Main wind-force height z above ground., ground

resisting systems using Exposure C

for all terrain qh for leeward ,YalI, side G: given in Sec. 207.6. I

GCpi given in Fig. 207-4

wulls and roof at mean Ci given in Tubles 207-6

GCp ;: given in Table 207-4

roof height through 207-10

G: given in Sec. 207.6.1 Aj projected area normal

(~: given in Fig. 207-3

to ",ind-'

GCf)j: giyen in Table 207-4

Buildings iI Open buildings and I

other structures I
h s 18 meters h> 18meters 1
I
p = qh [(GCp ) - (GCp ;)1 i P q 1iL~) - (GCpi)) 1.6 I F = q:GCfAf I
Components iJ h: at mean roof height q: q= for positive pressure at I q,' at height z above I
II
and cladding 4 using Exposure C height z above ground.. ground
[or all terrain tfh for negative pressure at G: given in Sec. 207.6.1
C.tp: given in Fig. 207-5, mean roof height Lj. given in Tables 207-6
207-6 and 207-7 Gel" given in Fig. 207-8 through 207-10
GCpt: given in Table 207--1, GLp,: given in Table 207-4 Ai projected area normal
to "ind 3
Flexible Buildings and Other Structures

-I
(f< 1 Hz. Includes buildings and structures with heightlleast horizontal dimension> 4)
J

Buildings Other Structures

----~
!
p qG~~l.::

q: q= for wind"ard waU at q,: at height z above ground

Main wind..force height z above ground. Gj obtaincd by rational
resisting systems tf if for leeward" all at analYSIS

menn roof height.

Cf givcn in Table 207-6
obtained by rationnl 207-10
normal to

(f q, for positiV'c pressurc at nt height z abmc ground

Components and
height z above ground. gi\-en in Sec. 207.6.1
cladding 4
qh for negative pressure giYen in Table 207-6
al menn roofheighL through 207-10
gl\,-~n in Fig 207-8 Ai pr~iecled area normnllo
I_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.L-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- L_ _ en in Tnbie 207-4_ _ _ _ _ _ _. _ _ ___________ _
~
~
_
~
_
_
_
_
_
_
~
~
~
1 Positive pressure acts toward surface and negative pressure acts 5 Low-rise buildings shaH be pernlitted to be designed in
away from surface; values of extemal and internal pressures accordance with the provisions for buildings in Section
shall be combined algebraically to determine most critical load. 207.5.3.2.2.
2 Pressure shall be applied simultaneously on windward and In the design of components and cladding for buildings having a
leeward walls and on roof surfaces as shown in Figures 2073 mean roof height h, 18 meters < h < 27 meters, GCp values of
and 207-4. Figures 207-5, 207-6 and 207-7 shall be used only if the height
3 AI is the projected area normal to the wind except where Ci is to-width ratio is 1 or less and '1 is taken as tJ.:; and Exposure C
given for the surface area. (see Section 207.5.3.3.1) is used for all terrain.
4 Major structural components supporting tributary area greater
than 65 m2 shall be permitted to be designed using the provisions
for main wind-force resisting systems.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

I
"-$~?ff!W@W&'-'Pf_" Ai
2-18 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

207.5 VELOCITY PRESSURE 207-1 when: (l) approved extreme-value statistical-analysis

procedures have been employed in reducing the data; and
207.5.1 Procedure For Calculating Velocity Pressure. (2) the length of record, sampling error, averaging time,
The velocity pressure qt, in kilopascals, shall be calculated anemometer height, data quality, and terrain exposure have
from the equation: been taken into account.

(207-1) 207.5.2.3 Limitation. Extreme typhoons have not

been considered. in developing the basic wind-speed
where the basic wind speed V, in kmlhr, is selected in distributions. .
accordance with the provisions of Section 207.5.2, the
importance factor I".. is set forth in Table 207-2, and the
velocity pressure exposure coefficient K= is given in Table Table 207-3 Velocity Pressure Exposure
207-3 in accordance with the provisions of Section 207.5.3. Coefficients 1, Kh and Kz
Provisions of Section 207.5.5 shall be used to determine Kzt Height
where applicable, but K=t shall not be less than 1.0. The above
Ground
Exposure Category 2 r
numerical coefficient, 47.3xlO.o, shall be used except where
sufficient climatic data are available to justify the selection i
level, Z
(m) A B C ! D
of a different value of this factor for a specific design
application. 0-4.5 0.32 0.57 0.85 1.03

Table 207-2 Importance Factor, 1'1' (Wind L01,lds)

~~"---~

6
7.5
0.36
0.39
0.62
0.66
------'-
0.90 .
0,94
r--1?l
1.12 .
I Occupancy
I Category "I.
I ..
DescriptIOn.
I Iw f--.
9 0.42 0.70 0,98 1.16
I I Essential
12
r-------...
0.47 0,76 1.04..-.- 1.22
1.15 15
1---- 1-.---.
18
0.51
0.55
0.81
0.85
1.09
1.13
1.27
1.31
II Hazardous us 21 0.59 0.89 1.17 1.34
--- i---- -
III Spccial \' 1.15 24 0,62 0.92 1.20 1.37
. --..... ......-... - Occupancy
- - - '-.- r --- - -- -- -
-
~
27 0,65 0,95 1.23 lAO

-~;-l-~t::~I- ,;-- ~

-------
30 0.68 0.98 1.26 1.43
I- 36
42
0.73
0.77
1.04
1.08
1.31
1.35
1,48
1.52 f
i
1 seeTable 103-1 for types of occupancy under each 48 0.82 1.12 1.39 1.55
category. .----
i
54 0.86 1.16 1.43 1.58
207.5.2 Select.n of Basic Wind Speed. The basic 60 0,89 1.20 1.46 1.61 i

wind speed ~. used in the determination of design wind 75 0.98 1.28 1.53 1.68
loads on buildings and other structures shall be as given in 90 LOS 1.35 1.59 1.73
Figure 207-1 except as provided in Sections 207.5.2.1 and 105 1.12 1.41 1.64 1.78
207.5.2,2. --- - - - - - - _ . - f--
120 Ll8 1.46 1.69 1.82
-- --~---

135 1.23 ..- 1.51 1.73 1.86

207.5.2.1 Special wind regions. The basic wind ----~
- - - - - - f--
speed shall be increased where records or experience ISO 1.29 1.56 1.77 1.89
1 Unearinterpolation for intermediate values of height Z is

indicate that the wind speeds are higher than those reflected
permissible. Alternatively. for values of height Z between 4.5

in Figure 207-1, Mountainous terrain, gorges and special

meters and the gradient height Zg. Kz may be calculated from

regions shall be examined for unusual wind conditions.

The authority having jurisdiction shall, if necessary, adjust
the values given in Figure 207-1 to account for higher local
K: = 2.01(Yzg fia where. a and Zg are given in the following

wind speeds. Such adjustment shall be based on table.

,-----r-----,-----.-----,-----~

meteorological information and an estimate of the basic

wind speed obtained in accordance with the provisions of
Section 207.5.2.2.
2 Exposure categories aie defined in Section 207.5.3.
207.5.2.2 Estimation of basic wind speeds from
regional climatic data. Regional climatic data shall only
be used in lieu of the basic wind speeds given in Figure

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WIND LOAD 219
207.5.3 EXPOSURE CATEGORIES
207.5.3.1 General. An exposure category that
adequately reflects the characteristics of ground surface
irregularities shall be detennined for the site at which the
building or structure is to be constructed. Account shall be
taken of variations in ground surface roughness that arise
from natural topography and vegetation as well as from
constructed features. The exposure in which a specific
building or other structure is sited shall be assessed as being
one of the following categories:
Exposure A. Large city centers with at least 50% of
the buildings having a height in excess of 21 meters. Use
of this exposure category shall be limited to those areas for
which terrain representative of Exposure A prevails in the
upwind direction for a distance of at least I km or 10 times
the height of the building or other structure, whichever is
greater. Possible channeling effects or increased velocity
pressures due to the building or structure being located in
the wake ofadjacent buildings shall be taken into account.
Exposure B. Urban and suburban areas, wooded
areas, or other terrain with numerous closely spaced
obstructions having the size of single-family dwellings or
larger. Use of this exposure category shall be limited to
those areas for which terrain representative of Exposure B
prevails in the upwind direction for a distance of at least
0.5 km or 10 times the height of the building or other
structure, whichever is greater.
Exposure C. Open terrain with scattered
obstructions having heights generally less than 9 meters.
This category includes flat open country and grasslands
Exposure D. Flat, unobstructed areas exposed to
wind flowing over open water for a distance of at least
2 km. This exposure shall apply only to those buildings and
other structures exposed to the wind coming from over the
water. Exposure D extends inland from the shoreline a
distance of 0.5 km or 10 times the height of the building or
structure, whichever is greater.
207.5.3.2 Exposure category for desigu of main
wind-force resisting systems.
207.5.3.2.1 Buildings and other structures. Wind
loads for the design of the main wind-force resisting
system, except as specified in Section 207.5.3.2.2, shall be
based on the exposure categories defined in Section
207.5.3.1 for any given wind direction.
207.5.3.2.2 Low-rise buildings. Wind loads for the
design of the main wind-force resisting systems for low-rise
buildings shall use a velocity pressure qh based on Exposure
C when external pressure coefficients GCpf given in Figure
207-4 are used. However, if the building is sited in
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
Exposure B for all wind directions, the appropriate
multipliers as noted in Figure 207-4 and in Table 207-4
shall be used. .
207.5.3.3 Exposure category for design of
components and cladding.
207.5.3.3.1 Buildings with height h less than or equal to
18 meters. Components and cladding for buildings with a
mean roof height of 18 meters or less shall be designed
using a velocity pressure qh based on Exposure C.
However, if the building is sited in Exposure B for all wind
directions, the appropriate multipliers as noted in Figures
207-5 through 207-7, and in Table 207-4 shall be used.
207.5.3.3.2 Buildings with height h greater than 18
meters and other structures. Components and cladding
for buildings with a mean roof height in excess of 18 meters
and for other structures shall be designed on the basis of the
most critical exposure category representative of the site as
defined in Section 207.5.3.1, except that Exposure B shall
be used for buildings and other structures sited in terrain
representative of Exposure A, and Exposure C for terrain
roofs indicated in Figure 207-8.
Table 207-4 Internal Pressure Coefficients for
Buildings, GC
'0/
- Condition
I GCpi I
Open Buildings 0.00
I 4
i
+0.80
Partially enclosed buildings
_ -0.30
-~-"
.. ...
Buildings satisfying the following
conditions:
I. sited in typhoon-prone regions having a
basic wind speed greater than or equal to +0.80
175 kmIhr, and
2. having glazed openings in the lower 18 -0.30
meters which are not designed to resist
wind-borne debris or are not specifically
__ ._.~cted from.\'Iind-bo~ deb~~
+0.18
All buildings except thos listed above
-0.18
NOTES:
1. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away
from the internal surfaces.
2. Values of GCpi shall be used with qz or qh as specified in Table
207-1.
3. Two cases shall be considered to determine the critical load
requirements for the appropriate condition: a positive value of
GCP1 applied to all internal surfaces, and a negative value of
GCp ; applied to all internal surfaces.
4. For buildings with mean roof height h :s; 18 meters and sited
within Exposure S, calculated internal pressures shall be
multiplied by 0.85.
5. If a building by definition complies with both the "Open" and
'Partially Enclosed" defintions, it shall be treated as an "Open"
building.
220 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

207.5.4 Shielding. 207.7 PRESSURE AND FORCE

Where the provisions of Section 207.4.2 are used there shall
be no reductions in velocity pressures due to apparent direct
shielding afforded by buildings and other structures or
terrain features.
207.5.5 Wind Speed-up over Hills and Escarpments.
The provisions of this section shall apply to isolated hills or
escarpments located in Exposure B, C, or D where the
upwind terrain is free of such topographic features for a
distance equal to 50H or lkm, whichever is smaller, as
measured from the point at which H is determined. Wind
speed-up over isolated hills and escarpments that constitute
abrupt changes in the general topography shall be
considered for buildings and other structures sited on the
upper half of hills and ridges or near the edges of
escarpments, illustrated in Figure 207-2, by using factor Kzt :
(207-2)
where K], K2 and K3 are given in Figure 207-2. The effect
of wind speed-up shall not be required to be considered
when HILh < 0.2, or when H < 4.5 meters for Exposure D,
or H < 9 meters for Exposure C, or H < 18 meters for aU
'other exposures. '
207.6 GUST EFFECT FACTORS.
207.6.1 Values of Gust Effect Factors.
For main wind-force resisting systems of buildings and
other structures, and for components and cladding of open
buildings and other structures, the value of the gust effect
factor G shall be 0.8 for exposures A and B, and 0.85 for
exposures C and D.
COEFFICIENTS.
207.7.1 General.
Pressure and force coefficients are given in Figures 207-3
through 207-8 and Table 207-4 through 207-10. The
values of the coefficients for buildings in Figures 207-4
through 207-8 and Table 207-4 include the gust effect
factor; in these cases the pressure coefficient values and
gust effect factor shall not be separated.
207.7.2 Roof Overhangs
207.7.2.1 Main wind-force resisting system. Roof
overhangs shall be designed for a positive pressure on the
bottom surface of windward roof overhangs corresponding
to Cp = 0.8 in combination with the pressures indicated in
Figures 207-3 and 207-4.
207.7.2.2 Components and cladding. For all
buildings, roof overhangs shall be designed for pressures
determined from pressure coefficients given in Figure 207
5B.
207.8 FULL AND PARTIAL LOADING
The main wind-force resisting system of buildings with
mean roof height greater than 18 meters shall be designed
for the torsional moments resulting from design wind
pressures in Table 207-1 acting in the combinations
indicated in Figure 207-9.

207.6.2 Flexible Buildings and Other Structures.

Gust effect factor Gf for main wind-force resisting systems
of flexible buildings and other structures shall be calculated
by a rational analysis that incorporates the dynamic
properties ofthe main wind-force resisting system.

207.6.3 Limitations.
Where combined gust effect factors and pressure
coefficients (GCp, GCpi and GCptJ are given in the figures
and tables, gust effect factors shall not be determined
separately.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WIND LOAD 2-21

Table 207-5 External Pressure Coefficients for Arched Roofs, C

Cp
Rise-to-span
Condition
ratio, r Windward Center half
quarter
0 < r < 0.2 -0.9 -0.7 - r
1.5r - 0.3
Roof on elevated structure 0.2 ~ r < 0.3 -0.7 - r -0.5
._---- - - - - ' " - "
or 6r - 2.1
0.3 ~ r ~ 0.6 2.75r - 0.7

Roof springing from ground level 0 < r ~ 0.6 lAr

NOTES
1. Values listed are for the determination of average loads on main 4. For components and cladding:
windforce resisting systems. (1) At roof perimeter, use the external pressure coefficients in
2. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away Figure 207-58 with 0 based on spring-line slope an~ 'ih
from the surfaces, respectively. based on Exposure C; and
3. For wind direyted parallel to the axis of the arch, use pressure (2) for remaining roof areas, use external presure coefficients of
coefficients from Figure 207-3 with wind directed parallel to this table multiplied by 0.87 and IJh based on Exposure C.
ridge.

Table 207-6 Force Coefficients for Monoslope Roofs over Open Buildings, Cf
I
Roof angle, I
Cf for L B values of:
()
.-~--- .. r------' . -- l----r- --T' ''T' - -_.. - I
degrees 5 I
3 2 1/2 li3 115
10 0.2 I 0.25 0.3 OA5 0.55 -_.--...... 0.7 0.75
.
- +-- ''---'-

15 0.35 i OA5 0.5 0.7 0.85 0.9 0.85 ....

20 0.5 0.6 0.75 0.9 1.0 0.95 ...... 0.9
25
30
0.7
0.9
0.8
1.0
0.95
1.2
LIS
1.3
I l.l
1.2
--L-.- 1.11.05 - ......-.---- ....
0.95
1.0
i i i

Roof angle, () Location ~!rc{~e~a~!~r~~sure, XL'J I

!
degrees 2 to 5 1 ! lf5 to lI2
10 to 20 0.35 03 0.3 .., .. -~-~ _
.. ..... _.. _._._.. ------.--.-~, ..-.-.

25 0.35 0.35 0.4

"~---""-'-~---'-----' -----.-~.

30 0.35 OA OA5 !
NOTES:
1. Wind forces act normal to the surface. Two cases shall 3. Notation:
be considered: (1) wind forces directed inward; and (2) =
B Dimension of roof measured normal to wind
wind forces directed outward. direction, in meters.
2. Wind shall be assumed to deviate by 10 degrees from L =Dimension of roof measured parallel to wind
horizontal. direction, in meters.
X = Distance to center of pressure from windward
edge of roof, in meters, and
B = Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 2-22 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

Table 207-7 Force Coefficients for Chimneys, Table 207-9 Force Coefficients for Open Signs
Tanks, and Similar Struct es C-( u" and Lattice Frameworks, Cf,

r- Cross-Section Type of
Surface
C, for hID Values of Ratio of solid Cr I
~(D~~:~~~I.~~mJ:~~~o.~;-J
... ... I 7 25 area to gross
~--

Flat-Sided
Square area, Ii
(wind normal to mee)

All 1.3 1.4 2.0 Members

Square
i
< 0.1 2.0 1.2 0.8
('wind alonll. diall.onal)

All 1.0 1.1 1.5

Hexagonal or
0.1 to 0.29 1.8 1.3 0.9 i

octagonal
All 1.0 1.2 1.4 !
0.3 to 0.7 1.6 1.5 1.1
! Moderately NOTES:
I smooth 0.5 0.6 0.7
Round .... RouSh~
1. Signs with openings comprising 30% or more of the gross area

(D[ti; >0.17) (D'ID",0.02'

0.7 0.8 I O.~",
...- r------
shall be considered as open signs.
2. The calculation of tbe design wind forces shall be based on the
Very Rough area of all exposed members and elements projected on a plane
fD 'ID '" 0.0&)
0.8 1.0 1.2
normal to the wind direction. Forces shall be assumed to act
Round parallel to the wind direction.
i (D[ti; ~0.17) All I 0.7 0.8 1.2 3. The area Ajconsistent with these force coefficients is the solid
area projected normal to the wind direction.
NOTES:
4. Notation:
1. The design wind force shall be calculated based on the area of
the structure projected on a plane normal to the wind direction. c = ratio of solid area to gross area;
The force shall be assumed to act parallel to the wind direction. D = diameter of a typical round member, in meters; and
2. Linear interpolation is permitted for hID values other than shown. =
qz velocity pressure evaluated at heightz above ground, in
3. Notation: kilopascals.
D :: diameter of circular cross-sections and least horizontal
dimension of square, hexagonal or octagonal cross
sections at elevation under consideration, in meters;
D' :: depth of protruding elements such as ribs and spoilers, in Table 207-10 Foree Coefficients for Trussed
meters;
h height of structure, in meters; and Towers, Cf
qz = velocity pressure evaluated at height z above ground, in Tower Cross Section
kPa.
4.0;' - 5.9 Ii + 4.0
3.4 ;. - 4.7 Ii + 3.4
-
Table 2078 Force Coeffic'e
I I n ts for Solid Signsf C'f
At Ground Level Above Ground Level
.. ~~- .. 1. For all wind directions considered, the area At consistent
V Cr MIN Cf with the specified force coefficients shall be the solid area of
a tower face projected on the pia ne of that face for the tower
3 ~ 1.2 ~ 6 1.2 segment under consideration.
5 1.3 10... 1.3.. 2. The specified force coefficients are for towers with structural
--'-"'-"-' -~---

angles or similar flat-sided members .

8 .__ ...-
1.4
---._._,----_. 16 1.4 3. For towers containing rounded members, it is acceptable to
10 1.5 20 1.5 multiply the specified force coefficients by the following
.... I--.-----~ factor when determining wind forces on such members:
20 1.75 40 1.75 (0.51 c 2 + 0.57), but not greater than 1.0
30 1.85 60 4. Wind forces shall be applied in the directions resulting in
..
-~--
._-_1.85 ..
maximum member forces and reactions. For towers with
, - - -..
~40 2.0 ~ 80 2.0 square cross-sections, wind forces shall be multiplied by the
NOTES: following factor when the wind is directed along a tower
1. Signs with openings comprising less than 30% of the gross area diagonal:
shall be considered as solid signs. (1 + 0.75 c). but not greater than 1.2
2. Signs for which the distance from the ground to the bottom edge 5. Wind forces on tower appurtenances such as ladders,
is less than 0.25 times the vertical dimension shall be considered conduits, lights, elevators, etc., shall be calculated using
to be at ground level. appropriate force coefficients for these elements.
3. To allow for both normal and oblique wind directions, two cases 6. Notation:
shall be considered:
c = ratio of solid area to gross area of one tower face for
a. resultant force acts normal to the face of the sign on a the segment under consideration.
vertical line passing through the geometric center and
b. resultant force acts normal to the face of the sign on a
distance from a vertical line passing through the geometric
centre equal to 0.2 times the average width ofthe sign.
4. Notation:
v :: ratio of height to width;

M = larger dimension of sign, in meters; and

N =. smaller dimension of sign, in meters.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WIND LOAD 2-23

118 120 122 124 0

126E

N
20

18

16' ZONE II
v = SSm/s (200kph) ZONE 1
v =70m/s (2S0kph

14

12'

10'

ZONE III
v = 3Sm/s (12Skph)

Wind Zone Map

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

2-24 WIND LOAD

Kl MULTIPLIER
2-D 3-D
HILh
Ridge Axisym. HiD
0.10 0.14 0.11
Speed-up
0.15
_._._..__
._. __
.
0.22 0.16
0.20 0.29 0.17 0.21
0.25 0.36 0.21 0.26
0.30 0.43
_._-- 0.26 0.32
~----

0.35 0.51 0.30 0.37

._-- -
0040 0.58
._._------_...----_. _._<- - -0.34
- -.. ,--_.....0.42
-~-
_
0.45 0.65 0.38 0.47
f-...,----t------- - ..- - - / - . - - - - - - 1
0.50 0.72 0.43 0.53 2-D Ridge or 3-D Axisymmetrical Hill

z
K: MULTIPLIER
2-D escarpment ,- Speed-up
x/LJr Downwind of
All others /
Cases
Crest
0.00 1.00 1.00
---_._+--------_.-+---
0.50 0.88 0.67
1.00 0.75 0.33
0.00
0.00
~__~~------l-.---~~--_+-__
O.~--~ Escarpment
3.00 0.25 0.00
3.50 0.13 0.00
1-------+----_-4--- NOTES:
4.00 0.00 0.00 1. For values of HIL", xiL" and zlL" other than those shown,
linear interpolation is permitted.
2. For HIL" > 0.5, assume HILh :: 0.5, and substitute 2H for Lh
Kg MULTIPLIER in xiLh and zfLh.
2-D 3-D Axisym. 3. Multipliers are based on the assumption that wind
2-D Ridge Escarpment approaches the hill or escarpment along the direction of
Hill
maximum slope.
0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 4. Effect of Wind speed--up shall not be required to be
accounted for when HIL" < 0.2 or when H < 4.5 meters for
0.10 0.74 0.78 0.67 Exposure 0, or H < 9 meters for Exposure C, or H <18
+._------!------
0.20 0.55 0.61 0.45 meters for all other exposures.
5. Notation:
0.30 0.41 0.47 0.30 H :: Height of hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain,
0.40 0.20 in meters.
---t-- ~ :: Distance upwind of crest to where the difference in
0.50 0.14 ground elevation is half the height of hill or escarpment,
in meters.
0.60 0.09 K, :: Factor to account for shape of topographic feature and
0.70 7 0.06 maximum speed-up effect.
K:; :: Factor to account for reduction in speed-up with distance
0.80 0.09 0.14 0.04 upwind or downwind of crest.
0.03 KJ = Factor to account for reduction in speed-up with height
0.90 0.07 0.11 above local terrain.
1.00 0.05 0.08 0.02 X = Distance (upwind or downwind) from the crest to the
building site, in meters.
1.50 0.01 0.02 0.00 Z :: Height above local ground level, in meters.
2.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

FIGURE 207-2 Multipliers for Obtaining Topographic Factor, KrJ

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS 2-26

Wall Pressure Coefficients, CD

Surface LIB Cp Use with
Windward Wall All values 0.8
-"~------+------t-----,- --'------.. .
Wind 0-1 -0.5
Leeward wall 2 -0.3
~4 -0.2
. - - - - -..~-+---,--+---.,-- --,,--------
Side walls All values -0.7 L qh
PLAN ELEVATION

Roof Pressure Coefficients, Cp , for Use with q"

Leeward
Wind Windward Angle, () (degrees)
Angle, () (degrees)
Direction
----
hlL
10 15 20 25 30 35 45 10 15 ~20
-0.7 -0.5 -0.3 -0.2 -0.2 0.0"
~0.25 -0.3 -0.5 ..0.6
0.0" 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 om ()
+-----4-----4------4-----4-----~----4_
Nonnal to -0.9 -0.7 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.2 0.0*
ridge for 0.5 -0.5 -0.5 -0.6
() ;;:: 10 0.0" 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 om ()
---r----+-----+----+----l-
-1.3** -1.0 -0.7 -0.5 -0.3 -0.2 0.0*
~ LO -0.7 -0.6 -0.6
0.0* 0.2 0.2 0.3 om ()
Horiz distance " For slopes greater than 80, use Cp =0.8.

from windward * Value is provided for interpolation purposes.

Normal to
edge *" Value can be reduced linearly with area over

ridge for :::;0.5 o to hI2 -0.9

which it is applicable as follows:
() < 10 and hI2 to h -0.9
Parallel to Area Reduction
h to 2h -0.5 (sq.m) Factor
ridge for > 2h -0.3
all () :::;10 LO
o to hI2 -1.3** 25 0.9
;;:: LO
>h12 -0.7 ;;:: 100 0.8

NOTES:
1. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and
away from the surfaces, respectively.
2. Unear Interpolation Is permitted for values of liB, hlL and 8
other than shown. Interpolation shall only be carried out
between values of the same sign. Where no value of the
same sign is given, assume 0.0 for interpolation purposes.
3. Where two values of Cp are listed, this indicates that the
windward roof slope is subjected to either positive or
negative pressures and the roof structure shall be designed
for both conditions. Interpolation for intermediate ratios of
5_ For flexible bundings use appropriate Gfas determined by
rational analysis.
6. Refer to Table 207-5 for arched roofs.
7. Notation:
B :; Horizontal dimension of building, in meter, measured
normal to wind direction.
L :; Horizontal dimension of building, in meter, measured
parallel to wind direction.
h :: Mean roof height in meter, except that eave height
shall be used for O~ 10 degrees.

hlL In this case shall only be carried out between Cp values z :: Height above ground, inmeters.

of like sign. G '" Gust effect factor.

4. For monoslope roofs, entire roof surface is either a q" qh :: Velocity pressure, in kilopascals, evaluated at

windward or leeward surface. re$pective height.

o :; Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.

FIGURE 207-3. External Pressure CoeffiCients, Cpt for Loads on Main Wind~ Force Resisting

Systems for Enclosed or Partially Enclosed Buildings of All Heights.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

2-26 WIND LOAD

4E 6E

:.l IE
rZa 5E "i~k ~

~~ Range ~ Range

CASE A CASE A CASE B

Roof
BUILDING SURFACE ZONE
Angle ()
(degrees) 1 2 3 4 1E 2E 3E 4E
0 5 0.40 -0.69 -0.37 -0.29 0.61 -1.07 -053 -0.43
20 0.53 -0.69 -0.48 -0.43 0.80 -1.07 -0.69 -0.64
30- 45 0.56 0.21 -0.43 -0.37 0.69 0.27 -0.53 -0.48
90 0.56 0.56 -0.37 -0.37 0.69 0.69 -0.48 -0.48

CASEB

Roof
BUILDING SURFACE ZONE
Angle ()
(degrees) 2 3 4 5 6 1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E
0-90 -0.45 -0.69 -0.37 -0.45 0.4 -0.29 -0.48 -1.07 -0.53 -0.48 0.61 -0.43

NOTES:
1. Case A and Case B are required as two separate loading
conditions to generate the wind actions, including torsion, to
be resisted by the main wind-force resisting system.
2. To obtain the critical wind actions, the bunding shall be
rotated in 90" increments so that each comer in tum
becomes the wind-ward comer while the loading patterns in
the sketches remain fIXed. For the design of structural
systems providiny lateral resistance in the direction parallel
to the ridge line, Load Case A shall be based on 0= C!'.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and
away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. For case A loading the following restrictions apply:
a. The roof pressure coefficient GCp" when negative in
zone 2, shall be applied in zone 2 for a distance from
the edge of roof equal to 0.5 times the horizontal
dimension of the building measured perpendicular to the
eave line or 2.5h, whichever is less; the remainder of
one 2 extending to the ridge line shall use the pressure
coefficient GCp, for zone 3.
b. Except for moment-resisting frames, the total horizontal
shear shall not be less than that detemlined by neglecting
wind forces on roof surfaces.
5. Combinations of external and internal pressures (see
Tables 2074) shaH be evaluated as required to obtain the
most severe loadings.
6. For buildings sited within Exposure B, calculated pressures
shall be multiplied by 0.85.
7. For values of 0 other than those shown, linear interpolation
is pemlitted.
8. Notation:
a = 10 percent of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h,
whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of
least horizontal dimension or 1 m.
h = Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave
height shall be used for e:!> 10".
() ::: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.

FIGURE 207-4 External Pressure CoeffiCients, GCp/, for Loads on Main

Wind-Force Resisting Systems for Enclosed or Partially Enclosed Low-Rise
Buildings with Mean Roof Height, h, Less than or Equal to 18 m.

Association of Structural En~lineers of the Philippines

 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS 2-27

I I I
!
-2.0 I- -

1.4 1-. 'CD -

(4)!~
l' -1.1 -
-0.8
-0.5 I- -
GCp
0.0 :,

0.5 , -
0.1
1.0
@ &G)I -

1.5 -
I L
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.592.9
Eft'ective Wind Area
(square meters)

NOTES:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh based on
ExposureC.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area. in square
meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and
away from the surfaces. respectively.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive
and negative pressures.
5. Values of GCp for walls shall be reduced by 10% when
8'5. 10"
6. For buildings sited within Exposure B, calculated
Wi:: W, or W.:;>or W3in Figure207-5C' W= Wl + W2
pressures shall be multiplied by 0.85
or W,+ W2+ W3; WiIW=O.25toO.75.
7. Notation:
a .: 10 percent of least horiZontal dimension or OAh,
whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of
least horiZontal dimension or 1m
b = 1.51'11 Fig 207-5C. but not greater than 3J m
h '" Mean roof height. in meters. except that eave height
shall be used for a s; 10"
hi = h, or ha in Fig 207-5C; h= hI + ha; hI?3
meters; hilh= 0.3 to 0.7.
W = Building width in Figure 207-5C.
8 :: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.

FIGURE 207-5A External Pressure Coefficients, GC" for Load$ on Building Components and
Cladding for Enclosed or Partially Enclosed Buildings with Mean Roof Height h Less than or
Equal to 18 m. Walls.

National Structural' Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

228 WIND LOAD

-3.7
- .....---. Roof Overhang
-3.0
-2.5 -2.5
-2.1 2.2
-1.!
GCp 1.5
--------\-1.4
-0.9
CD
F--":;;~--t-----';'---4-0.! P~===t===::::::==~1.0
-O.!
-0.5

0.0 I-------c-,-=~-----;-----I
1-
k=g~~l~&~b~,;;;::=;::i;;::::;t;:==::;;j
05 _~~~&~il~~~)__----_T--~03 .
a.!
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 41.5 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 46.5
Effective Wind Area Effective Wind Area
(square meters) (square meters)

(a) ROOF SLOPE, 10 < (J .5 30 (b) ROOF SLOPE, 30< (J.5 45

-2.!

-2.5
.1.8
1.7 "~-M-0 .. -t-..
\..1) & ~ , ..... -1.1
GCp 1.0 -0.9
(i)
-0.5 -0.8
0.0
0.3 0.2

0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 41.5

Effective Wind Area
(square meters)
(c) ROOF SLOPE, e .5 10
NOTES:
1. If a parapet equal to or higher than 1 meter is 3. For hipped roofs wittl10 < 9 S 3:1", edge/ridge strips
provided around the perimeter of the roof with 9 S; and pressure coefficients for ridges of gabled roofs
1(1', Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2. shall apply on each hip.
2. Values of GCp for roof overhangs inolude pressure

contributions from both upper and lower surfaces

FIGURE 207-56. Gabled and Hipped Roofs (also see Notes on Figure 207-SA)

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WIND LOAD 2-29

hI .::: 3 meters
b = 1.5 hI
b < 30m
h,lh = 0.3 to 0.7
W;lW = 0.25 to 0.75

,
h
I

~ _____________ Lj.I h2

NOTE:
1. On the lower level of flat, stepped roofs shown in Figure 2. Positive values of GCp equal to those for walls in Figure
207-5C, the zone designations and pressure 207-5A shall apply on the cross-hatched areas shown in
coefficients shown in Figure 207-58 (e $10") shall Figure 207-5C.
apply, except that at the roof-upper wall intersection(s).
Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2 and Zone 2 shall be
treated as Zone 1.

FIGURE 207-5C Stepped Roofs (also see Notes on Figure 207-5A)

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

2-30 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

I I --t
-1"- -t--T- -+a
I I I
I I I
I I I
.F:::--+---!-----L I
I ....-Y.
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
-t'--r--
I I
I
1a
__

Multispan Gabled Roof Plan Elevation

SINGLE-SPAN MODULE

-2.7

-2.2

-.;....---1-1.7 "'-_ _ _-1-1.7

.1.15

- - - i - - - - l -1.4

-1.0 " - - - - - 1 -1.1

GCp
-0.5

0.0

~_-i-----1 0.4
0.6

1.0
W~~~ __--t---:j8
1.5

0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 46.S 0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 46.5
Effective Wind Area
Effective Wind Area
(square meters)
(square meters)

(a) ROOF SLOPE, 10 < (J ~ 30 (b) ROOF SLOPE, 30 < (J ~ 45

NOTES:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh based on 6. For buildings sited within Exposure S, calculated

ExposureC. pressures shall be multiplied by 0.85.

2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, in square 7. Notation:

meters. a = 10% of least horizontal dimension of a single-span

3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and module or 0.411, whichever is smaller, but not less than
away from the surfaces, respectively. either 4 percent of least horizontal dimension of a
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive single-span module or 1 meter.

and negative pressures. h = Mean roof height, in meters.

5. For ()s10", values of GCp from Figure 207-58 shall be W = Building width, in meters.

used. () = Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, In degrees.

FIGURE 207...c; External Pressure Coefficients, GCp , for Loads on Building Components
and Cladding for Multispan Gabled Roofs (with Two or More Spans) on Enclosed or
Partially Enclosed Buildings with Mean Roof Height, h, Less than or Equal to 18 m.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WIND LOAD 2-31

-2.6 (3:>

G)
-1.8
-1.6
i 2')
(2 ')
-...... -1.6
-1.5
-1.3 ~ 1 -1.2
-1.1 -1.1
\J)
GCp
-0.5

0.0 i
i 0.2
0.3
All Zones

1.0
i
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 46.5
Effective Wmd Area
(square meters)

(a) ROOF SLOPE, 3 < (J :5 10

-+j 23 l+
t '":_____________ -*
a
48 \Vi :
~ --~j ,

i
I
I
I I
I I

01, I
,
CD Iz
~
,,
I
-2.0

,,
, ,, -1.2
----I, I
'
-1.1

t3'1
\:.),: ...
1
,
_________ I -0.5 -
_
.
~
,
0.0 1 - - - - - - - + - - - - - - + - - - - 1
0.41----.+----j---1- 0.3
All Zones

1.0
~-----~--~-~~----~
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 46.5
Effective Wind Area
(square meters)

(b) ROOF SLOPE, 10 < (J S 300

Figure 207-7A External Pressure Coefficients, GCp for Loads on Building

Components and Cladding for Monoslope Roofs and Sawtooth Roofs with Two or
More Spans on Enclosed or Partially Enclosed Buildings with Mean Roof Height, h.
Less than or Equal to 18 meters. Monoslope. Roofs (refer to notes on Figure 207-7B)

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

2~2 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

-4.5
(i)(spanA)
-4.1

-3.5
G)
3.2

(i) (span BCD)! 2a,

-2.6

-2.1 CD '1----/ -2.1

'j
GCp "i----i 1.9
ieD
-1.5
'i--.......j1.6
i
"'!-_.......j1.1
-1.0

-0.5

0.0

---w
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 46.S
Effective Wind Area
(square meters)
ROOF SLOPE, 10 < (J ~ 30

NOTES for Figures 207-7A and 2077B:

1. Vertical scale denotes Gel' to be used with qh based on 6. For buildings sited within Exposure B, calculated pressures
Exposure C. shall be multiplied by 0.85.
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, in square 7. Notation:
meters. a .. 10'lb of least horizontal dimension or 0.411, whichever Is
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and smaller, but not less than either 4 percent of least
away from the surfaces, respectively. horizontal dimension or 1 meter.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive h = Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave height
and negative pressures. shall be used for B 51cf.
5. For (J~~ (Figure 207.7A) and 9 ~ 10" (Figure 20778), W ::: Building width, in meters.
values of Gel' from Figure 207-5B shall be used. (J = Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.

Figure 207-78 Sawtooth Roofs - Two or More Spans

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WIND LOAD 2-33

a r--
f 1

i,
!
a

Roof Plan Wall Elevation

-1.&
G)
-1.5

4 -1.0
-2.3
-0.9
GC
i-----j----.LJ..(J.7
fo.s
-us
CD
-1.4 I--=----i-__
0.0

-1.0 0.5 _-.--,0.

-0.9
0.9
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 46.5 0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 46.5
Effective Wind Area Effective Wind Area
(square meters) (square meters)

(a) ROOFS e S 10 (b) WALLS (all 9)

NOTES:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with appropriate qz
orqh
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind areaA, in square
meters.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and
away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Use q with positive valUes of GCp and qh with negative
values of GCp
5. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive
and negative pressures.
6. -Coefficients are for roofs with angle 15.10". For other
roof angles and geometry, use GCp values from Figure
207-58 and attendant qh based on Exposure C.
7. If a parapet equal to or higher than 1meter is provided
around the perimeter of the roof, Zone 3 shall be treated
as Zone 2.
B. Notation:
a = 10% of least horizontal dimension, but not less than
1 m.
h '" Mean roof height, in meters.
z = height above ground, in meters.
(J = Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.

FIGURE 207...s External Pressure Coefficients, GCp , for Loads on Building Components
and Cladding for Enclosed or Partially Enclosed Buildings with Mean Roof Height, h,
Greater than 18 m.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volwne 1

 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

pw

PL

Case 1 : Full design wind pressures acting on the Case 3. Wind pressure as defined in Case 1, but
projected area perpendicular to each principal axis considered to act simultaneously at 75% of the
of the structure considered separately. specified values.

0.75p,.
O.25pw
f

J.....- PL
0.25pw ..:r-_ _
O.25PL
t

Case 2. Wind pressure as defined in Case 1. but Case 4. Wind pressure as defined in Case 2, but
with a 25% reduction in pressure acting on 50% of considered to act simultaneously at 75% of the
the projected area bounded by the extreme specified values in Case 2.
projected edge of the building.

NOTES:
1. Design wind pressures for windward and 3. Notation:
leeward faces obtained in accordance with p",= Windward face design pressure
the provisions of Table '207-1 for main wind PL '" Leeward face design pressure.
force resisting systems for buildings with
mean roof height h greater than 18 meters.
2. Diagrams show plan view of building.

FIGURE 207-9 Wind Pressure Combinations for Full and Partial Loading of Main Wind
Force Resisting Systems for Buildings with Mean Roof Height h Greater than 18 m.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc.

 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN
SECTION 208 - EARTHQUAKE
DESIGN
208.1 GENERAL
208.1.1 Purpose. The purpose of the earthquake
provisions herein is primarily to safeguard against major
structural failures and loss of life, not to limit damage or
maintain function.
208.1.2 Minimum Seismic Design. Structures and
portions thereof shall, as a minimum, be designed and
constructed to resist the effects of seismic ground motions
as provided in this section.
208.1.3 Seismic and Wind Design. When the code
I
prescribed wind design produces greater effects, the wind
design shall govern, but detailing requirements and
limitations prescribed in this section and referenced
sections shall be followed.
1
i
~
!
1
108.2 DEFINITIONS
BASE is the level at which the earthquake motions are
considered to be imparted to the structure or the level at
which the structure as a dynamic vibrator is supported.
1 DESIGN RESPONSE SPECTRUM is an elastic response
j BASE SHEAR, V, is the total design lateral force or shear
1 at the base of a structure.
I
j Motion for the design of structures in accordance with
BEARING WALL SYSTEM is a structural system with
out a complete vertical load-carrying space frame. See
Section 208.4.6.1.
BOUNDARY ELEMENT is an element at edges of
I
i
openings or at perimeters of shear walls or diaphragms.
BRACED FRAME is an essentially vertical truss system
of the concentric or eccentric type that is provided to resist
lateral forces.
BUILDING FRAME SYSTEM is an essentially com
plete space frame that provides support for gravity loads.
See Section 208.4.6.2.
CANTILEVERED COLUMN ELEMENT is a column
element in a lateral-force-resisting system that cantilevers
from a fixed base and has minimal moment capacity at the
top, with lateral forces applied essentially at the top.
COLLECTOR is a member or element provided to
transfer lateral forces from a portion of a structure to
vertical elements of the lateral-force-resisting system.
National Struc1luaJ Code of the Philippines, Vokne 1
2-35
COMPONENT is a part or element of an architectural,
electrical, mechanical or structural system.
COMPONENT, EQUIPMENT, is a mechanical or
electrical component or element that is part of a mechanical
and/or electrical system.
COMPONENT, FLEXIBLE, is a component, including
its attachments, having a fundamental period greater than
0.06 second.
COMPONENT, RIGID, is a component, including its
attachments, having a fundamental period less than or equal
to 0.06 second.
CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME is a braced
frame in which the members are subjected primarily to
axial forces.
DESIGN BASIS GROUND MOTION is that ground
motion that has a 10 percent chance of being exceeded in
50 years as determined by a site-specific hazard analysis or
may be determined from a hazard map. A suite of ground
motion time histories with dynamic properties
representative of the site characteristics shall be used to
represent this ground motion. The dynamic effects of the
Design Basis Ground Motion may be represented by the
Design Response Spectrum. See Section 208.6.2.
spectrum for 5 percent equivalent viscous damping used to
represent the dynamic effects of the Design Basis Ground
Sections 208.5 and 208.6. This response spectrum may be
either a site-specific spectrum based on geologic, tectonic,
seismological and soil characteristics associated with a
specific site or may be a spectrum constructed in
accordance with the spectral shape in Figure 208-3 using
the site-specific values of Ca and C" and multiplied by the
acceleration of gravity, 9.815 m/sec2 . See Section 208.6.2.
DESIGN SEISMIC FORCE is the minimum total
strength design base shear, factored and distributed in
accordance with Section 208.5.
DIAPHRAGM is a horizontal or nearly horizontal system
acting to transmit lateral forces to the vertical-resisting
elements. The term "diaphragm" includes horizontal
bracing systems.
DIAPHRAGM or SHEAR WALL CHORD is the
boundary element of a diaphragm or shear wall that is
assumed to take axial stresses analogous to the flanges of a
beam.
 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
DIAPHRAGM STRUT (drag strut, tie, collector) is the
element of a diaphragm parallel to the applied load that
collects and transfers diaphragm shear to the vertical
resisting elements or distributes loads within the diaphragm.
Such members may take axial tension or compression.
DRIFT. See "story drift."
DUAL SYSTEM is a combination of moment-resisting
frames and shear walls or braced frames designed
accordance with the (;riteria of Section 208.4. 6.4.
ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) is a
steel-braced frame designed in conformance with Section
515.9.
ELASTIC RESPONSE PARAMETERS are forces and
deformations determined from an elastic dynamic analysis
using an unreduced ground motion representation, iIi
accordance with Section 208.5.
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES are those structures that are
necessary for emergency operations subsequent to a natural
disaster.
FLEXffiLE ELEMENT or system is one whose
deformation under lateral load is significantly larger than
adjoining parts of the system. Limiting ratios for defining
specific flexible elements are set forth in Section 208.5.6.
HORIZONTAL BRACING SYSTEM is a horizontal
truss system that serves the same function as a diaphragm.
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT - RESISTING FRAME
(IMRF) is a concrete frame designed in accordance with
Section 421.10.
LATERAL-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM is that part
of the structural system designed to resist the Design
Seismic Forces.
MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME is a frame in which
members and joints are capable of resisting forces primarily
by flexure.
MOMENT-RESISTING WALL FRAME (MRWF) is
a masonry wall frame especially detailed to provide ductile
behavior and designed in conformance with Section
708.2.6.
ORDINARY BRACED FRAME (OBF) is a steel-braced
frame designed in accordance with the provisions of
Section 515.7 or 516.5 or concrete-braced frame designed
in accordance with Section 421.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
ORDINARY MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME (OMRF)
is a moment-resisting frame not meeting special detailing
requirements for ductile behavior.
ORTHOGONAL EFFECTS are the earthquake load
effects on structural elements common to the lateral-force
resisting systems along two orthogonal axes.
OVERSTRENGTH is a characteristic of structures where
In the actual strength is larger than the design strength. The
degree of overstrength is material-and system-dependent.
PI).EFFECT is the secondary effect on shears, axial forces
and moments of frame members induced by the vertical
loads acting on the laterally displaced building system.
SHEAR WALL is a wall designed to resist lateral forces
parallel to the plane of the wall (sometimes referred to as
vertical diaphragm or structural wall).
SHEAR WALL-FRAME INTERACTIVE SYSTEM
uses combinations of shear walls and frames designed to
resist lateral forces in proportion to their relative rigidities,
considering interaction between shear walls and frames on
all levels.
SOFT STORY is one in which the lateral stiffness is less
than 70 percent of the stiffness of the story above. See
Table 208-9.
SPACE FRAME is a three-dimensional structural system,
without bearing walls, composed of members
interconnected so as to function as a complete self
contained unit with or without the aid of horizontal
diaphragms or floor-bracing systems.
SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME
(SCBF) is a steel-braced frame designed in conformance
with the provisions of Section 515.8.
SPECIAL MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME (SMRF) is
a moment-resisting frame specially detailed to provide
ductile behavior and comply with the requirements given in
Chapter 4 or 5.
SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAME (STMF) is a
moment-resisting frame specially detailed to provide ductile
behavior and comply with the provisions of Section 515.10.
STORY is the space between levels. Story x is the story
below Level x.
STORY DRIFT is the lateral displacement of one level
relative to the level above or below.
STORY DRIFT RATIO is the story drift divided by the
story height.
 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN
STORY SHEAR, V,u is the summation of design lateral
forces above the story under consideration.
STRENGTH is the capacity of an element or a member to
resist factored load as specified in Chapters 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7.
STRUCTURE is an assemblage of framing members
designed to support gravity loads and resist lateral forces.
Structures may be categorized as building structures or
nonbuilding structures.
SUBDIAPHRAGM is a portion of a larger wood
diaphragm designed to anchor and transfer local forces to
primary diaphragm struts and the main diaphragm.
VERTICAL LOAD-CARRYING FRAME is a space
frame designed to carry vertical gravity loads.
WALL ANCHORAGE SYSTEM is the system of
elements anchoring the wall to the diaphragm and those
elements within the diaphragm required to develop the
anchorage forces, including subdiaphragms and continuous
ties, as specified in Sections 208.8.2.7 and 208.8.2.8.
f Level x
WEAK STORY is one in which the story strength is less
than 80 percent of the story above. See Table 208-9.
208.3 SYMBOLS AND NOTATIONS
AB =ground flnor area of structure in square meter
to include area covered by all overhangs and
projections.
=the combined effective area, in square meter,
of the shear walls in the first story of the
structure.
= the minimum cross-sectional area in any
horizontal plane in the first story, in square
meter of a shear wall.
the torsional amplification factor at Level x.
= numerical coefficient specified in Section
208.7 and set forth in Table 208-12.
seismic coefficient, as set forth in Table 208
7.
= numerical coefficient given in Section
208.5.2.2.
= seismic coefficient, as set forth in Table 208
8.
= dead load on a structural element.
= the length, in meter, of a shear wall in the first
.story in the direction parallel to the applied
forces.
E,EIf,
Ef/I> E" earthquake loads set forth in Section 208.5.1.
Vx =the design story shear in Story x.
F;, F""
1 National Structq.ral Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
2-37
F" =Design Seismic Force applied to Level i, 11 or
x, respectively.
=Design Seismic Forces on a part of the
structure.
=Design Seismic Force on a diaphragm.
=that portion of the base shear, J'~ considered
concentrated at the top of the structure in
addition to F..,.
= lateral force at Level i for use in Equation
(208-10).
g =acceleration due to gravity.
=9.815 m/sec"
=height in meter above the base to Level i, 11 or
x, respectively.
f =importance factor given in Table 208-1.
=importance factor specified in Table 208-1
=Iive load on a structural element.
Levell level of the structure referred to by the
subscript i. "i =]" designates the first level
above the base.
Leveln =that level that is uppermost in the main portion
of the structure.
=that level that is under design consideration.
"x 1" designates the first level above the
base.
M =maximum moment magnitude.
=near-source factor used in the determination of
Ca in Seismic Zone 4 related to both the
proximity of the building or structure to
known faults with magnitudes as set forth in
Tables 208-4 and 208-6.
Nv =near-source factor used in the determination of
c., in Seismic Zone 4 related to both the
proximity of the building or structure to
known faults with magnitudes as set forth in
Tables 208-5 and 208-6.
PI =plasticity index of soil determined in
accordance with approved national standards.
R =numerical coefficient representative of the
inherent overstrength and global ductility
capacity of lateral- force-resisting systems, as
set forth in Table 208-11 or 208-13.
r =a ratio used in determining p. See Section
208.5.1.
SA. SB, Se. Sf),
SE, SF = soil profile types as set forth in Table 208-2.
T =elastic fundamental period of vibration, in
seconds, of the structure in the direction under
consideration.
V =the total design lateral force or shear at the
base given by Equation (208-4), (208-5),
(208-6), (208-7) or (208-11).
W =the total seismic dead load defined in Section
208.5.1.1.
2-38 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

= that portion of W located at or assigned to 2'()8.4.2 OCCUPANCY CATEGORIES

Level i or x, respectively. For purposes of earthquake-resistant design, each structure
= the weight of an element or component. shaH be placed in one of the occupancy categories listed in
= the weight of the diaphragm and the element Table 103-1. Table 208-1 assigns importance factors, I and
tributary thereto at Level x, including I". and structural observation requirements for each
applicable portions of other loads defined in category.
Section 208.5.1.1.
z "" seismic zone factor as given in Table 208-3.
Ap.f = Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement, Table 208-1 - Seismic Importance Factors
which is the total drift or total story drift that I Seismic Seismic
Occupancy Importance
! Importance 2
occurs when the structure is subjected to the Category
Design Basis Ground Motion, including Factor, I Factor, Ip
estimated elastic and inelastic contributions to I. Essential
3 1.25 1.50
Facilities
the total deformation defined in Section
208.5.9. II. Hazardous
1.25 1.50
I
Facilities
= Design Level Response Displacement, which
III. Special
!
is the total drift or total story drift that occurs Occupancy
1.00 1.00
when the structure is subjected to the design Structures"4
seismic forces. IV. standard
= horizontal displacement at Level i relative to Occupancy 1.00 1.00
the base due to applied lateral forces,/. for use Structures"4 I -
in Equation (208-10). V. Miscellaneous 1.00 1.00
structures
= RedundancylReliability Factor given by
1 See Table 103-1 for occupancy category listing.
Equation (208-3).
2 The limitation of Ip for panel connections in Section 208.8.2.3
= Seismic Force Amplification Factor, which is shall be 1.0 for the entire connector.
required to account for structural overstrength 3 Structural observation requirements are given in Section
and set forth in Table 208-11. 107.9.
4 For anchorage of machinery and equipment required for life
safety systems, the value of I p shall be taken as 1.5.
208.4 CRITERIA SELECTION

208.4.1 BASIS FOR DESIGN
The procedures and the limitations for the design of
structures shall be determined considering seismic zoning,
site characteristics, occupancy, configuration, structural
system and height in accordance with this section.
Structures shall be designed with adequate strength to
withstand the lateral displacements induced by the Design
Basis Ground Motion, considering the inelastic response of
the structure and the inherent redundancy, overstrength and
ductility of the lateral-force- resisting system.
The minimum design strength shall be based on the Design
Seismic Forces determined in accordance with the static
lateral forceprocedure of Section 208.5, except as modified
by Section 208.6.5.4.
Where strength design is used, the .load combinations of
Section 203.3 shall apply. Where Allowable Stress Design
is used, the load combinations of Section 203.4 shall apply.
Allowable Stress Design may be used to evaluate sliding or
overturning at the soil-structure interface regardless of the
design approach used in the design of the structure,
provided load combinations of Section 203.4 are utilized.
208.4.3 SITE GEOLOGY AND SOIL CHARAC
TERISTICS. Each site shall be assigned a soil profile
type based on properly substantiated geotechnical data
using the site categorization procedure set forth in Section
208.10 and Table 208-2.
EXCEPTION:
When the soil properties are 1I0t known in Sl(f(icient detail
to determine the soil profile type, Type SD shall be used
Soil Profile Type SE or SF need not he assumed unless the
building qf(iciai determines that Type SE or SF may be
present at the site or in the event that T}pe SE or SF is
established by geotechnical data.
208.4.3.1 Soil profile type. Soil Profile Types Sl. SB. Se, So
and SE are defined in Table 208-2 and Soil Profile Type SF
is defined as soils requiring site-specific evaluation as
follows:
1. Soils vulnerable to potential failure or collapse under
seismic loading, such as liquefiable soils, quick and
highly sensitive clays, and collapsible weakly
cemented soils,

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN 2-39

2. Peats and/or highly organic clays, where the 208.4.4.2 Seismic Zone 4 near-sonrce factor. In
thickness of peat or highly organic clay exceeds 3.0 Seismic Zone 4, each site shall be assigned near-source
meters. factors in accordance with Table 208-4 and 208-5 based on
3. Very high plasticity clays with a plasticity index, the Seismic Source Type as set forth in Section 208.4.4.4.
PI> 75, where the depth of clay exceeds 7.6 meters.
The value of Na used to determine Ca need not exceed 1.1
4. Very thick soft/medium stiff clays, where the depth
for structures complying with all the following conditions:
of clay exceeds 36 meters.
1. The soil profile type is SA" Ss, Sc or Sf>
2. p = 1.0.
The criteria set forth in the definition for Soil Profile Type 3. Except in single-story structures, residential building
SF requiring site-specific evaluation shall be considered. If accommodating 10 or fewer persons, private garages,
the site corresponds to this criteria, the site shall be carports, sheds and agricultural buildings, moment
classified as Soil Profile Type SF and a site-specific frame systems designated as part of the lateral-force
evaluation shall be conducted. resisting system shall be special moment-resisting
frames,
Table 208-2 - Soil Profile Types 4. The exceptions to Section 515.6.5 shall not apply,
except for columns in one-story buildings or columns
Average Soil Properties For Top
Soil at the top story of multistory buildings.
30 m Of Soil Profile
Soil Profile
Undrained 5, None of the following structural irregularities is
Profile Name' Shear Wave SPT, N
Shear present: Type 1,4 or 5 of Table 208-9, and Type 1
Type Generic j Velocity, V. (blows'
Strength,
Description (m/s) 300mm) or 4 of Table 208-10,
(kPa)

~ S4 '
,
Hard Rock ! > 1,500
208.4.4.3 Seismic response coefficients. Each
I -r-' Rock I 760 to structure shall be assigned a seismic coefficient, Ca. in
SBC. 1,500

! I
accordance with Table 208-7 and a seismic coefficient, C",
Vel}' Dense I

S c:c. Soil ad Soft . 360 to 760 > 50 > 100 in accordance with Table 208-8.
I

.
Rock

I SD'
I

.
StitrSoil
_ Profil, -BID II "ID-
!

360 ,0
50 to

~
208.4.4.4 Seismic source types. Table 208-6
defines the types of seismic sources. The location and type

MFtI
IS.
~ F .
E
Y 1--:- /'
Soft Soil
Profile

!.
< 180 < 15
Soil Requiring Site-specific Evaluation.
See Section 208.43, I
.
I ~J
of seismic sources to be used for design shall be established
based on approved geological data; see Figure 208-2A.
Type A sources shall be determined from Figures 208
1 Soil Profile Type SE also includes any soil profile with more than 2B,C,D,E or the most recent mapping of active faults by the
3.0 meters of soft clay defined as a soil with plasticity index, Philippine Institute of Volcanology and Seismology.
P1>20, Wmc ~ 40 percent and Su < 24 kPa. The Plasticity Index,
PI, and the moisture content, wmc , shall be determined in Table 208-4 Near-Source Factor N/
accordance with approved national standards,
Seismic Closest Distance To
Source ~~wn Sei!!!!Ilc~~u~~~_
Type ::;;; 5 km .. ~ 10 _k_m_-l
208.4.4 SITE SEISMIC HAZARD CHARACTER

F
ISTICS. Seismic hazard characteristics for the site shall A 1.2 1.0
~-.----.-.- ..--- . - - - , - - -.. -----.-~--

be established based on the seismic zone and proximity of B 1.0 1.0

the site to active seismic sources, site soil profile .-~--.----.---.-.--~ .. --'-~--.-.--------

characteristics and the structure's importance factor. I c.. I. 1.0 L 1.0

208.4.4.1 Seismic zone. Each site shall be assigned a Table 208-5 Near-Source Factor, N/
seismic zone in accordance with Figure 208-1. Each
structure shall be assigned a seismic zone factor Z. in
I Seismic I Closest Distance To

I Source ._._ _ Known Seismic Source2

accordance with Table 208-3, Type ::;;; 5 km 10 km

Table 208-3 Seismic Zone Factor Z

j-iOijE .
I Z
2
0.20
t-.
L -_ _ ~~ ____ ~
---.:.,4_-----.J
__0.40

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

2-40 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

Notes for Tables 208.4 and 208.5: Table 208-8 - Seismic Coefficient, Cv
The Near-Source Factor may be based on the linear
Soil Profile type
_. __ ~ei!!mic Zo~_e_Fa~!1.,z~__ j
interpolation of values for distances other than those shown in Z=O.2 Z=O.4'
the table.
2
The closest distance to seismic source shall be taken as the SA 0,16 O.32Nv
minimum distance between the site and the area described by
the vertical projection of the source on the surface (i.e., SB 0,20 0.40Nv
surface projection of fault plane). The surface projection need
not include portions of the source at depths of 10 km or Sc 0.32 0,56N1 T

..... ~-"--. , ,,----~-

greater. The largest value of the Near-Source Factor

considering all sources shall be used for design. SD 0.40 0,64Nv

Table 208-6 - Seismic Source Types

1 SE I
,-'- -' ----------
0,64 0,96Nv
~.-~-.,--., ..
See Footnote I
Seismic Source
Seismic
Seismic Source Definition 1 Site-specific geotechnical investigation and dynamic site
Source
Description Maximum Moment response analysis shall be performed to determine seismic
Type Magnitude, M coefficients.
I
I Faults that are
! capable of producing
large magnitude 208.4.5 CONFIGURAnON REQUIREMENTS
A events and that have
M'C. 7.0 Each structure shall be designated as being structurally
a high rate of seismic regular or irregular in accordance with Sections 208,4,5.1
activity and 208.4.5.2.
All faults other than
B 6.5:SM < 7.0 I
TypesAandC 208.4.5.1 Regular structures. Regular structures have
Faults that are not no significant physical discontinuities in plan or vertical
capable of producing
I f
large magnitude
configuration or in their lateral-foree-resisting systems such
as the irregular features described in Section 208.4.5.2,
C
earthquakes and that A,! < 6.5
have a relatively low
rate of seismic 208.4.5.2 Irregular structures.
activity 1, Irregular structures have significant physical
1 Subduction sources shall be evaluated on a site-specific basis. discontinuities in configuration or in their lateral
force-resisting systems, Irregular features include,
but are not limited to, those described in Tables 208
Table 208-7 - Seismic Coefficient, Cll 9 and 208-10. All structures in occupancy Categories
Soil Profile e Seismic Zone Factor, Z 4 and 5 in Seismic Zone 2 need to be evaluated only
f---==~":'==-"L.[:":::--f---z= ~i-z""o.- .. -
for vertical irregularities of Type 5 (Table 208-9) and
SA 0.16 0.32N" horizontal irregularities of Type 1 (Table 208-10),
0.20 2, Structures having any of the features listed in Table
SB 0.40N"
208-9 shall be designated as if having a vertical
Sc irregularity.
SD EXCEPTION:
SE
Where 110 story dr(ft ratio under de5ign lateral forces is
SF
greater thcUl 1.3 times the story drift raUo q{ the story
above, the structure may be deemed to not have the
stnlctllral irregularities of T)'1Je J or 2 ill Table 208-9. The
story drift ratio for the top two stories need not be
considered The slory drifts for this determination may be
calculated neglecting torsional effects.

3. Structures having any of the features listed in Table

208-10 shall be designated as having a plan
irregularity.

208.4.6 STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 OK JJ4S"J:').
EARTHQUAKE DESIGN 2-41

Structural systems shall be classified as one of the types
listed in Table 208-11 and defined in this section.
208.4.6.1 Bearing wall system. A structural system
without a complete vertical load-carrying space frame.
Bearing walls or bracing systems provide support for all or
most gravity loads. Resistance to lateral load is provided by
shear walls or braced frames.
208.4.6.2 Building frame system. A structural
system with an essentially complete space frame providin.g
support for gravity loads. Resistance to lateral load IS
provided by shear walls or braced frames.
208.4.6.3 Moment-resisting frame system. A
structural system with an essentially complete space frame
providing support for gravity loads. Moment-resisting
frames provide resistance to lateral load primarily by
flexural action of members.
Table 208-9 Vertical Structural Irregularities
Irregularity Type and Definition Refefence
, Section
1. Stiffness Irregularity - Soft Story
A soft story is one in which the lateral stiffuess 208.4.8.
is less than 70 percent of that in the story above
Item 2
or less than 80 percent of the average stiffuess
of the three stories above.
2. Weight (J1\ass) Irregulari.ty
2. Resistance to lateral load is provided by shear walls
or braced frames and moment-resisting frames
(SMRF, IMRF, MMRWF or steel OMRF). The
moment-resisting frames shall be designed to
independently resist at least 2S percent of the design
base shear.
3. The two systems shall be designed to resist the total
design base shear in proportion to their relative
rigidities considering the interaction of the dual
system at all levels.
208.4.6.5 Cantilevered column system. A structural
system relying on cantilevered column elements for lateral
resistance.
208.4.6.6 Undefined structural system. A structural
system not listed in Table 208-11.
208.4.6.7 Nonbuilding structural system. A structural
system conforming to Section 208.9.
I Table 208-10 Plan Structural Irregularities
Irregularity Type and Definition
: ReferenCe~1
. Section i
3
1. Torsional Irregularity - To Be Considered
When Diaphragms Are Not Flexible
Torsional irregularly shall be considered to
208-8.2.8
exist when the maximum story drift, computed
Item 6
including accidental torsion, at one end of the

Mass irregularity shall be considered to exist

20M.8.
structure transverse to an axis is more than 1.2

where the effective mass of any story is more

3
times the average of the story drifts of the two

than 150 percent of the effective mass of an

Item 2
ends of the structure.

adjacent story. A roof that is lighter than the

2. Re-Entrant Corners
floor below need not be considered. - - - - - + - - - - - 1 Plan configurations of a structure and its lateral
3. Vertical Geometric Irregularity
208.8.2.8
force-resisting system contain re-cntrant
Vertical geometric irregularity
shall be Items 6
corners, where both projections of the structure and 7
considered to exist where the
horizontal 208.4.8.
beyond a re-entrant comer are greater than 15

dimension of the lateral-force-resisting system

3
percent of thc plan dimension of the structurc in

in any story is more than l30 percent .of that in

Item 2
the given direction.

an adjacent story. One-story penthouses need

3. Diaphragm Discontinuity
not be considered.

Diaphragms with abrupt discontinuities or

4.In-Plane Discontinuity In Vertical Lateral
variations in stiffuess, including those haying
Force-Resisting Element.
An in-plane offset 208.5.8.
cutout or open areas greater than 50 percent of 208.8.2.iI

of the lateral-load-resisting elements

greater I
the gross enclosed area of the diaphragm, or
Ilem6

. than the length of those elements. .

changes in effective diaphragm stiffuess of

5. Discontinuity In Capacity Weak Story

A weak story is one in which the story strength

more than 50 percent from one storv to the

1
1 is less than 80 percent of that in the story above.
208.4.9.
The story strength is the total strength of all

seismic-resisting elements sharing the story for

~ direction under~co~ns~id~er~a~ti~o~n::...._ _ _ _ _~___ .~

I
next.
4.0ut-Of-Plane Offsets
Discontinuities in a lateral force path, such as
out-of-plane offsets of the vertical clements
5. Nonparallel Systems-----~------+-~-~
208.5.8.1
208.82.11
Item (,:
515.7 i~

The vertical lateral-load-rcsisting clements are 80 I

20 3'.
208.4.6.4 Dual system. A structural system with the not parallel to or symmetric about the major I
following features: orthogonal axes of the lateral-force~~_

1. An essentially complete space frame that provides

support for gravity loads.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume"

2-42 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
208.4.7 HEIGHT LIMITS. Height limits for the various
structural systems in Seismic Zone 4 are given in Table
208-11.
EXCEPTION:
Regular structures may exceed these limits by not more
than 50 percent for unoccupied structures, li'hich are not
accessible to the general public.
208.4.8 SELECTION OF LATERAL-FORCE
PROCEDURE Any structure may be, and certain
structures defined below shall be, designed using the
dynamic lateral-force procedures of Section 208.6.
208.4.8.1 SIMPLIFIED STATIC. The simplified
static lateral-force procedure set forth in Section 208.5.2.3
may be used for the following structures of Occupancy
Category IV or V:
1. Buildings of any occupancy (including single-family
dwellings) t not more than three stories in height
excluding basements, that use light-frame construction.
2. Other buildings not more than two stories in height
excluding basements.
208.4.8.2 STATIC. The static lateral force procedure
of Section 208.5 may be used for the following structures:
1. All structures, regular or irregular in Occupancy
Categories IV and V in Seismic Zone 2.
2. Regular structures under 75 meters in height with
lateral force resistance provided by systems listed in
Table 208-11, except where Section 208.4.8.3, Item
4, applies.
3. Irregular structures not more than five stories or 20
meters in height.
4. Structures having a flexible upper portion supported
on a rigid lower portion where both portions of the
structure considered separately can be classified as
being regular, the average story stifIhess of the lower
portion is at least 10 times the average story stifIhess
of the upper portion and the period of the entire
structure is not greater than 1.1 times the period of
the upper portion considered as a separate structure
fixed at the base.
208.4.8.3 DYNAMIC. The dynamic lateral-force
procedure of Section 208.6 shall be used for all other
structures, including the following:
L Structures 75 meters or more in height, except as
permitted by Section 208.4.8.2, Item L
2. Structures having a stifIhess, weight or geometric
vertical irregularity of Type 1, 2 or 3, as defined in
Table 208-9, or structures having irregular features
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
not described in Table 208-9 or 208-10, except as
permitted by Section 208.5.4.1.
3. Structures over five stories or 20 meters in height in
Seismic Zones 4 not having the same structural
system throughout their height except as permitted
by Section 208.6.2.
4. Structures, regular or irregular, located on Soil
Profile Type Sf; that have a period greater than 0.7
second. The analysis shall include the effects of the
soils at the site and shall conform to Section 208.6.2,
Item 4.
208.4.9 SYSTEM LIM ITA TIONS
208.4.9.1 Discontinuity. Structures with a
discontinuity in capacity, vertical irregularity Type 5 as
defined in Table 208-9, shall not be over two stories or 9
meters in height where the weak story has a calculated
strength ofless than 65 percent of the story above.
EXCEPTION:
Where the weak story is capable of resisting a tolal lateral
seismic force of .Q, times the design force prescribed in
Section 208.5.
208.4.9.2 Undefined structural systems. For
undefined structural systems not listed in Table 208-11, the
coefficient R shall be substantiated by approved cyclic test
data and analyses. The following items shall be addressed
when establishing R:
1. Dynamic response characteristics,
2. Lateral force resistance,
3. Overstrength and strain hardening or softening,
4. Strength and stiffness degradation,
5. Energy dissipation characteristics,
6. System ductility, and
7. Redundancy.
208.4.9.3 Irregular features. All structures having
irregular features described in Table 208-9 or 208-10 shall
be designed to meet the additional requirements of those
sections referenced in the tables.
208.4.10 ALTERNATIVE PROCEDURES
Alternative lateral-force procedures using rational analyses
based on well-established principles of mechanics may be
used in lieu ofthose prescribed in these provisions.
208.4.10.1" Seismic Isolation. Seismic isolation,
energy dissipation and damping systems may be used in the
design of structures when approved by the building official
and when special detailing is used to provide results
 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN
equivalent to those obtained by the use of conventional
structural systems.
208.5 MINIMUM DESIGN LATERAL
FORCES AND RELATED EFFECTS
208.5.1 EARTHQUAKE LOADS AND MODELING
REQUIREMENTS
208.5.1.1 Earthquake Loads. Structures shall be
designed for ground motion producing structural response
and seismic forces in any horizontal direction. The
following earthquake loads shall be used in the load
combinations set forth in Section 203:
(208-1)
(208-2)
Where:
E = the earthquake load on an element of the structure
resulting from the combination of the horizontal
component, E", and the vertical component, E".
Eh! the earthquake load due to the base shear, v~ as set
forth in Section 208.5.2 or the design lateral force,
Fp. as set forth in Section 208.7.
Em = the estimated maximum earthquake force that can
be developed in the structure as set forth in Section
208.5.l.1, and used in the design of specific
elements of the structure, as specifically identified in
this code.
Ev = the load effect resulting from the vertical component
of the earthquake ground motion and is equal to an
addition of 0.5Ca I D to the dead load effect, D, for
Strength Design, and may be taken as zero for
Allowable Stress Design.
no the seismic force amplification factor that is required
to account for structural overstrength, as set forth in
Section 208.5.3.1.
p = ReliabilitylRedundancy Factor as given by the
following equation:
6.1
P 2 (208-3)
r max the maximum element-story shear ratio. For a given
direction of loading, the element-story shear ratio is
the ratio of the design story shear in the most heavily
loaded single element divided by the total design
story shear.
AB= .t,be ground floor area of the structure in square meter
For any given Story Level i, the element-story shear ratio is
denoted as rio The maximum element-story shear ratio r,>IOX
is defined as the largest of the element story shear ratios, rj,
National structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
2-43
which occurs in any of the story levels at or below the two
thirds height level of the building.
For braced frames, the value of rj is equal to the maximum
horizontal force component in a single brace element
divided by the total story shear.
For moment frames, rj shall be taken as the maximum of the
sum of the shears in any two adjacent columns in a moment
frame bay divided by the story shear. For columns common
to two bays with moment-resisting connections on opposite
sides at Level i in the direction under consideration, 70
percent of the shear in that column may be used in the
column shear summation.
For shear walls, rj shall be taken as the maximum value of
the product of the wall shear multiplied by 3.01lw and
divided by the total story shear, where lw is the length of the
wall in meter.
For dual systems, rj shall be taken as the maximum value of
rj as defined above considering all lateral-load-resisting
elements. The lateral loads shall be distributed to elements
based on relative rigidities considering the interaction of the
dual system. For dual systems, the value of p need not
exceed 80 percent of the value calculated above.
p shall not be taken less than 1.0 and need not be greater
than 1.5. For special moment-resisting frames, except when
used in dual systems, p shall not exceed 1.25. The number
of bays of special moment-resisting frames shall be
increased to reduce r. such that p is less than or equal to
1.25.
EXCEPTION:
AB may be taken as the average floor area in the upper
setback portion of the building where a larger base area
exists at the groundfloor.
When calculating drift, or when the structure is located in
Seismic Zone 2, p shall be taken equal to 1.
The ground motion producing lateral response and design
seismic forces may be assumed to act nonconcurrentIy in
the direction of each principal axis of the structure, except
as required by Section 208.8.1.
Seismic dead load, W; is the total dead load and applicable
portions of other loads listed below.
1. In storage and warehouse occupancies, a minimum
of 25 percent of the floor live load shall be
applicable.
2. Where a partition load is used in the floor design, a
load of not less than 0.5 kN/m2 shall be included.
2-44 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
Total weight of permanent equipment shall be
included.
208.5.1.2 Modeling Requirements. The mathema
tical model of the physical structure shall include all
elements of the lateral-force-resisting system. The model
shall also include the stiffness and strength of elements,
which are significant to the distribution of forces, and shall
represent the spatial distribution of the mass and stiffhess of
the structure. In addition, the model shall comply with the
following:
L Stiffness properties of reinforced concrete and
masonry elements shall consider the effects of
cracked sections.
2. For steel moment frame systems, the contribution of
panel zone deformations to overall story drift shall
be included.
208.5.1.3 PA Effects. The resulting member forces
and moments and the story drifts induced by PA effects
shall be considered in the evaluation of overall structural
frame stability and shall be evaluated using the forces
producing the displacements of As. PA need not be
considered when the ratio of secondary moment to primary
moment does not exceed 0.10; the ratio may be evaluated
for any story as the product of the total dead, and floor live
loads, as required in Section 203, above the story times the
seismic drift in that story divided by the product of the
seismic shear in that story times the height of that story. In
Seismic Zone 4, P L1 need not be considered when the story
drift ratio does not exceed 0.02IR.
208.5.2 STATIC FORCE PROCEDURE
208.5.2.1 Design Base Shear. The total design base
shear in a given direction shall be determined from the
following equation:
V CvI W (208-4)
RT
The tot<\1 design base shear need not exceed the following:
v = 2.5 ttl I W (208-5)
R
The total design base shear shall not be less than the
following:
(208-6)
V 0.// Cal W
In addition, for Seismic Zone 4, the total base shear shall
also not be less than the following:
0.8Z N"l W (208-7)
R
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
208.5.2.2 Structure Period. The value of T shall be
determined from one ofthe following methods:
1. Method A: For all buildings, the value T may be
approximated from the following equation:
#' ~
T = Ct (hnJ314 (208-8)
Where:
Ct 0.0853 for steel moment-resisting frames.
Ct 0.0731 for reinforced concrete moment
resisting frames and eccentrically braced
frames.
C1 0.0488 for all other buildings.
Alternatively, the value of C1 for structures with concrete or
masonry shear walls may be taken as 0.0743 /..[A: with
Ac in square meter.
The value of Ac shall be determined from the following
equation:
(208-9)
The value of D./hn used in Equation (208-9) shall not
exceed 0.9.
2. Method B: The fundamental period T may be
calculated using the structural properties and
deformational characteristics of the resisting
elements in a properly substantiated analysis. The
analysis shall be in accordance with the requirements
of Section 2085. 1.2. The value of T from Method B
shall not exceed a value 30 percent greater than the
value of T obtained from Method A in Seismic Zone
4, and 40 percent in Seismic Zone 2.
The fundamental period T may be computed by using the
following equation:
(208-10)
The values of j; represent any lateral force distributed
approximately in accordance with the principles of
Equations (208-13), (208-14) and (208-15) or any other
rational distribution. The elastic deflections, 5;, shall be
calculated using the applied lateral forces,};.
 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN 2-45

208.5.2.3 Simplified Design Base Shear. Structures
conforming to the requirements of Section 208.4.8.1 may
be designed using this procedure.
208.5.2.3.1 Base shear. The total design base shear in a
given direction shaH be determined from the foHowing
equation:
seismic forces set forth in Section 20S.5. For both
Allowable Stress Design and Strength Design, the Seismic
Force Overstrength Factor, Q o, shall be taken from Table
208-1 L
208.5.3.2 Determination of R. The value for R shall
be taken from Table 208-11.

3.0Ca W
v (208-11)
R

where the value of Ca shall be based on Table 208-7 for the

soil profile type. When the soil properties are not known in
sufficient detail to determine the soil profile type, Type SD
shall be used in Seismic Zone 4, and Type SE shall be used
in Seismic Zones 2. In Seismic Zone 4, the Near-Source
Factor, Na , need not be greater than 1.3 if none of the
following structural irregularities are present: Type 1,4 or 5
of Table 208-9, or Type 1 or 4 of Table 208-10.

208.5.2.3.2 Vertical distribution. The forces at each level

shall be calculated using the following equation: ,

3.0
(208-12)
R

where the value of Ca shall be determined as in Section

208.5.2.3.1.

208.5.2.3.3 Applicability. Sections 208.5.1.2, 208.5.1.3,

208.5.2.1, 208.5.2.2, 208.5.5, 208.5.9, 208.5.10 and 20S.6
shall not apply when using the simplified procedure.

EXCEPTION:

For bUildings with relatively flexible stntclural systems.

the building official may require consideration of PO
effects and drift ill accordance with Sections 208.5.1.3,
208.5.9 and 208.5.10. Os shall be determined using design
seismic forces from Section 208.5.2.3.1.

Where used, /),M shall be taken equal to 0.01 times the story
height of all stories. In Section 208.8.2.8, Equation (208

20) shall read Fpx 3.0Ca w and need not exceed 1.0
R px
CWpx, but shall not be less than 0.5 Ca wpx. Rand Q" shall
be taken from Table 208-11.

208.5.3 DETERMINATION OF SEISMIC

FACTORS

208.5.3.1 Determination of QO" For specific

elements of the structure, as specifically identified in this
code, the minimum design strength shall be the product of
the seismic force overstrength factor Oa and the design

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 2-46 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

Table 208-11 Structural Systems 1

'~~~~~~--------------------------------~-------r------'--=~--~
Height I
Basic Structural Lateral-Force-Resistiug
System2 System Description R ! n.,
I L~!f:r
i (m)
i

1. Light-Framed Walls with Shear Panels I

a. Woo... . . rural panel walls for structures three stories. or less +-5~-Tl:~L.~_]==- 20~=
. d. . struc
b. All o~ght-framed w a l l s _ 4.5 . . ~ _ 20 i

~~~e~o::~~ ........
... ~.~E-....-H=F.8-~50'~--
1. Bearing Wall f-=---...,b:;:.:;._:Masoruy 4..5 2,lf"- --50-
System 3. Light Steel-Fram~ Bearing Walls. with tellSion-onlybracing -2~8 .. 2.2 20 ..
4. Braced Frames where Bracin ..J:arries (Jr-'a::..;v-'in:.l-.'. . :Loa=.::..::c=:d_____.__...-____---,..._____- .__
a. Steel
b. Concr~te3 .---~- . . .
r------"---::=:==~-::-------------- ..... - - . - . - -
c. Heavy timber
I. Steel Eccentrit,:ially Braced Frame (EBf}_ _ _ _ __

~_~ight-Frame(I}Valis with Shear Panels

..'1.. Wood struc1:tJ!a.lpa.nel Willis fOI"~1!:Uc!UI'~J!lree~t<:!ties ().I"l~~ 6.5 2.8 20

b. All other Ii t-framed walls 5.0 2.8 20
....
3. Shear Walls
----.-~ ......
-.-~--- .....- -
2. Building Frame __
..... a. ._-_
Concrete ..... 5.5 2.8 --.
75
Systems _ . . . b. Masoruy. ____ .._ ...... ____.... ___ .____ 5.5
2.8 50
4. _9!:.<!tn ary Brac"c:cl_F'!3J!l~_ ..' _ _ .. -- _._.

a. Steel 5.6 2.2 50

--.. ii..... ConCrcte3 5.6 2.2
. _--c:~Hea':itlID~-===--- ..__ .___ 2.2
._~ __~~ial9>nce[ltrica1ly_Braced.ram~_._
a. Steel 6.4 75

3. Moment-Resisting
Frame Systems
IL~ial MOIIlent~B-e.i~~Er....m:n:~{SMNL .

~Masoruy
a. Steel
~=b~_ ~onqe~~=-___ _.. _-=~=~~_~
Moment-Resisting Wall Frame (MMRWF)
s
i 3. Concrete Intermediate Moment-Resistin Frame (lMR.Ji)L.._ _
_____ N.L.
N.L.
50

_4Jr~~_oIIlent:R~is~g~Fram~(QMREL
a. Steel 4.5
--b~ Concrete7- -..-- ..------ -
3.5
-----,
-5.S -i!iI-TrusSMOmentFrames"Qrstet;f[stMFy-- 6.5
1. Shear Walls
-a.concrete\Vith'-SMRF----- -- .-~-~.--. -~.
8.5 2.8 N.L.
.'_
-'1). Concrete-With steel oMRF .. .- -----.~~~
4.2 2.8
.... _ -
50
--.. -"c: "-concrete
-
-Wifuc-oncrete-WRFs- -
~ - .~-- .---.. -.-~-------
6.5 2.8
'-~-"--~-- -- ----
50.~'"~,-

_~~lIs~[llY ~!!t_SRF .... ____._ 5.5 2.8.._-,

---~
50
L.._~...MasOIIlY.~tl1s~e! o~_ -3-" 4.2 2.8 50
~........L_ M!lSOI1l}'_~1th concrete IMRf_ _ ... ___ ... 4.2 2.8
""g. Masonry with masonry MMRWF . 6.0 2.8
~. .t~LEcentrt~~ly~r!..ced Fra!!l~ (BBn_ - 1
4. Dual Systems
---~~-~~-:~t~~-- . -.. . -----.. _._.-_-.______._.~_-...J.
..3..: ... OrdinJl!Y..B..!.lIce(L.fr~J1l~_ ___ _

~.~~_}t_
a. Steel with steel SMRF 6.5 2.8
---b:- sieeT"witli -steelOMRF ... " 4.2 2.8
----c-:- t-oncrete With concrcte'sMR:F3 6.5 2.8 ,
- -"-- ._.
- d. Concrete with- coIlcretcIMR.FJ 4.2 2.8 .. - - -
4. -~~lal--:-<2~l!....CC[l~~i1!Y~j:!rac~{fr~es_"
a. Steel with steel SMRF
----'b--:--SteefWlth steeCOMRF- .
2.8
2.8
or N.L
50
-------
i Cantilevered column elements 2.0 106

Concrete7 50

l Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN
Notes for Table 20811
N.L - no limit
1 See Section 208.5.4 for combination of structural systems. For
Undefined Systems see Sections 208.4.6.6 and 208.4.9.2
2 Basic structural systems are defined in Section 208.4.6.
~ Prohibited in Seismic Zone 4.
4 Includes precast concrete conforming to Section 421.2.7.
5 Prohibited in Seismic Zone 4, except as permitted in Section
208.9.2.
6 Total height of the building including cantilevered columns.
7 Prohibited in Seismic Zones 2 and 4, See Section 208.8.2.6.
208.5.4 COMBINATIONS OF STRUCTURAL
SYSTEMS. Where combinations of structural systems are
incorporated into the same structure, the requirements of
this section shall be satisfied.
208.5.4.1 Vertical combinations. The value of R
used in the design of any story shall be less than or equal to
the value of R used in the given direction for the story
above.
EXCEPTION:
This requirement need not be applied to a story where the
dead weight above that story is less than 10 percent of the
total dead weight ofthe structure.
Structufes may be designed using the procedures of this
section under the following conditions:
1. The entire structure is designed using the lowest R of
the lateral-force-resisting systems used, or
2. The following two-stage static analysis procedures
may be used for structures conforming to Section
208.4.8.2, Item 4.
2.1 The flexible upper portion shall be designed as a
separate structure, supported laterally by the rigid
lower portion, using the appropriate values of R and
p.
2.2 The rigid lower portion shall be designed as a
separate structure using the appropriate values of R
and p. The reactions from the upper portion shall be
those determined from the analysis of the upper
portion amplified by the ratio of the (RIp) of the
upper portion over (RIp) of the lower portion.
208.5.4.2 Combinations along different axes. In
Seismic Zone 4 where a structure has a bearing wall system
in only one direction, the value of R used for design in the
orthogonal direction shall not be greater than that used for
the bearing wall system.
Any combinati6n of bearing wall systems, building frame
systems, dual systems or moment-resisting frame systems
may be used to resist seismic forces in structures less than
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
2-47
50 ~eters in height. Only combinations of dual systems and
speCial moment-resisting frames shall be used to resist
seismic forces in structures exceeding 50 meters in height
in Seismic Zone 4.
208.5.4.3 Combinations along the same axis. Where
a combination of different structural systems is utilized to
resist lateral forces in the same direction, the value of R
used for design in that direction shall not be greater than the
least value for any of the systems utilized in that same
direction.
208.5.5 VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION OF FORCE
The total force shall be distributed over the height of the
structure in conformance with Equations (208-13), (208-14)
and (208-15) in the absence ofa more rigorous procedure.
n
V = Fe + I.E; (208-13)
i~l
The concentrated force Ft at the top, which is in addition to
Fn, shall be determined from the equation:
Fe = 0.07 TV (208-14)
The value of T used for the purpose of calculating Fe shall
be the period that corresponds with the design base shear as
computed using Equation (208-4). Fe need not exceed
0.25Vand may be considered as zero where Tis 0.7 second
or less. The remaining portion of the base shear shall be
distributed over the height of the structure, including Level
n, according to the following equation:
(v -E;}w;ch;c (208-15~
n
I.w;};
i=l
At each level designated as x, the force shall be applied
over the area of the building in accordance with the mass
distribution at that level. Structural displacements and
design seismic forces shall be calculated as the effect of
forces and F t applied at the appropriate levels above the
base.
208.5.6 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION OF SHEAR
The design story shear, V.r, in any story is the sum of the
forces Ft and Fx above that story. V:r shall be distributed to
the various elements of the vertical lateral-foree-resisting
system in proportion to their rigidities, considering the
rigidity of the diaphragm. See Section 208.8.2.3 for rigid
elements that are not intended to be part of the lateral-force
resisting systems.
Where diaphragms are not flexible, the mass at each level
shall be 1lssumed to be displaced from the calculated center
of mass in each direction a distance equal to 5 percent of
the building dimension at that level perpendicular to the
direction of the force under consideration. The effect of
 2-48 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
this displacement on the story shear distribution shall be
considered.
Diaphragms shall be considered flexible for the purposes of
distribution of story shear and torsional moment when the
maximum lateral deformation of the diaphragm is more
than two times the average story drift of the associated
story. This may be determined by comparing the computed
midpoint in-plane deflection of the diaphragm itself under
lateral load with the story drift of adjoining vertical
resisting elements under equivalent tributary lateral load.
20S.S.7 HORIZONTAL TORSIONAL MOMENTS
Provisions shall be made for the increased shears resulting
from horizontal torsion where diaphragms are not flexible.
The most severe load combination for each element shall be
considered for design.
The torsional design moment at a given story shall be the
moment resulting from eccentricities between applied
design lateral forces at levels above that story and the
vertical-resisting elements in that story plus an accidental
torsion.
f The accidental torsional moment shall be determined by
assuming the mass is displaced as required by Section
208.5.6.
Where torsional irregularity exists, as defined in Table
208-10, the effects shall be accounted for by increasing the
accidental torsion at each level by an amplification factor,
Ax, determined from the following equation: 1.
2 designed primarily as axial-load members shall comply
A = Dmax (208-16)
x [ 1.2 Davg ]
Where:
Davg = the average of the displacements at the extreme
points of the structure at Level x.
Dmax = the maximum displacement at Level x.
The value of A x need not exceed 3.0.
20S.S.S OVERTURNING
Every structure shall be designed to resist the overturning
effects caused by earthquake forces specified in Section
208.5.5. At any level, the overturning moments to be4.
resisted shall be determined using those seismic forces (Ft
and Fx) that act on levels above the level under5.
consideration. At any level, the incremental changes of the
design overturning moment shall be distributed to the
various resisting elements in the manner prescribed in
Section 208.5.6. Overturning effects on every element shall
be carried down to the foundation. See Sections 207.1 and
208.8 for combining gravity and seismic forces.
L Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
20S.S.S.1 Elements Supporting Discontinuous
Systems-.
20S.S.S.L1 General. Where any portion of the lateral
load-resisting system is discontinuous, such as for vertical
irregularity Type 4 in Table 208-9 or plan irregularity Type
4 in Table 208-10, concrete, masonry, steel and wood
elements supporting such discontinuous systems shall have
the design strength to resist the combination loads resulting
from the special .seismic load combinations of Section
203.5.
EXCEPTIONS:
I. The quantity Em in Section 203.5 need not exceed the
maximum force that can be transferred to the
element by the lateral-force-resisting system.
2. Concrete slabs supporting light-frame wood shear
wall systems or light-frame steel and wood structural
panel shear wall systems.
For Allowable Stress Design, the design strength may be
determined using an allowable stress increase of 1.7 and a
resistance factor, , of 1.0. This increase shall not be
combined with the one- third stress increase permitted by
Section 203.4, but may be combined with the duration of
load increase permitted in Section 615.3.4.
20S.S.S.1.2 Detailing requirements in Seismic
Zone 4. In Seismic Zone 4, elements supporting
discontinuous systems shall meet the following detailing or
member limitations:
Reinforced concrete or reinforced masonry elements
with Section 421.4.4.5.
2. Reinforced concrete elements designed primarily as flexural
members and supporting other than light-frame wood shear
wall system or light-frame steel and wood structural panel
shear wall systems shall comply with Sections 421.3.2 and
421.3.3. Strength computations for portions of slabs
designed as supporting elements shall include only those
portions of the slab that comply with the requirements of
these sections.
3. Masonry elements designed primarily as axial-load carrying
members shall comply with Sections 706.1.12.4, Item 1,
and 708.2.6.2.6.
Masonry elements designed primarily as flexural members
shall comply with Section 708.2.6.2.5.
Steel elements designed primarily as axial-load members
shall comply with Sections 515.4.2 and 515.4.3.
6. Steel elements designed primarily as flexural
members or trusses shall have bracing for both top
and bottom beam flanges or chords at the location of
the support of the discontinuous system and shall
comply with the requirements of Section 515.6.1.3.
 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN
7. Wood elements designed primarily as flexural
members shall be provided with lateral bracing or
solid blocking at each end of the element and at the
connection location(s) of the discontinuous system.
208.5.8.2 At Foundation. See Sections 208.4.1 and
308.4 for overturning moments to be resisted at the
foundation soil interface.
208.5.9 DRIFT
Drift or horizontal displacements of the structure shall be
computed where required by this code. For both Allowable
Stress Design and Strength Design, the Maximum Inelastic
Response Displacement, 6.u , of the structure caused by the
Design Basis Ground Motion shall be determined in
accordance with this section. The drifts corresponding to
the design seismic forces of Section 208.5.2.1, 6.s, shall be
determined in accordance with Section 208.5.9. L To
determine 6..\f, these drifts shall be amplified in accordance
with Section 208.5.9.2.
208.5.9.1 Determination of 6.s- A static, elastic analysis of
the lateral force-resisting system shall be prepared using the
design seismic forces from Section 208.5.2.1. Alternatively,
dynamic analysis may be performed in accordance with
Section 208.6. Where Allowable Stress Design is used and
where drift is being computed, the load combinations of
Section 203.3 shall be used. The mathematical model shall
comply with Section 208.5.1.2. The resulting deformations,
denoted as 1\" shall be determined at all critical locations in
the structure. Calculated drift shall include translational and
torsional deflections.
208.5.9.2 Determination of 6..v The Maximum Inelastic
Response Displacement, 6.jf, shall be computed as follows:
6..1/ = 07 R 6.8 (208-17)
EXCEPTION:
Alternatively, LiM may he computed by nonlinear time
history analysis in accordance with Section 208.6.6.
The analysis used to determine the Maximum Inelastic
Response Displacement 6.", shall consider P6. effects.
208.5.10 STORY DRIFT LIMITATION
Story drifts shall be computed using the Maximum Inelastic
Response Displacement, 6.,11'
208.5.10.1 Calculated. Calculated story drift using I\w
shall not exceed 0.025 times the story height for structures
having a fundamental period of less than 0.7 second. For
structures having a fundamental period of 0.7 second or
greater, the calculated story drift shall not exceed 0.020
times the story height.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
2-49
EXCEPTIONS:
1. These drift limits may be exceeded when it is
demonstrated that greater drift can be tolerated by
both structural elements and nonstructural elements
that could affect life sqfety. The drift used in this
assessment shall be based upon the Maximum
Inelastic Response Displacement, LiM
2. There shall be no drift limit in single-story steel
framed structures whose primary use is limited to
storage, factories or workshops. Minor accessory
uses shall be allowed. Stnlctures on which this
exception is used shall not have equipment attached
to the structural frame or shall have such equipment
detailed to accommodate the additional drift. Walls
that are laterally supported by the steel frame shall
be designed to accommodate the drift in accordance
with Section 208.8.2.3.
208.5.10.2 Limitations. The design lateral forces
used to determine the calculated drift may disregard the
limitations of Equation (208-6) and (208-7) and may be
based on the period determined from Equation (208-10)
neglecting the 30 or 40 percent limitations of Section
208.5.2.2, Item 2.
208.5.11 VERTICAL COMPONENT.
The following requirements apply in Seismic Zone 4 only.
Horizontal cantilever components shall be designed for a
net upward force of 0.7 Cal Wp-
In addition to all other applicable load combination;,
horizontal prestressed components shall be designed using
not more than 50 percent of the dead load for the gravity
load, alone or in combination with the lateral force effects.
208.6 DYNAMIC ANALYSIS PROCEDURES
208.6.1 GENERAL
Dynamic analyses procedures, when used, shall conform to
the criteria established in this section. The analysis shall be
based on an appropriate ground motion representation and
shall be performed using accepted principles of dynamics.
Structures that are designed in accordance with this section
shall comply with all other applicable requirements of these
provisions.
208.6.2 GROUND MOTION
The ground motion representation shall, as a minimum, be
one having a lO-percent probability of being exceeded in 50
years, shall not be reduced by the quantity R and may be
one of the following:
2-50 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
I. An elastic design response spectrum constructed in
accordance with Figure 208-3, using the values of Ca
and C" consistent with the specific site. The design
acceleration ordinates shall be multiplied by the
acceleration of gravity, 9.815 mlsec2 .
2. A site-specific elastic design response spectrum
based on the geologic, tectonic, seismologic and soil
characteristics associated with the specific site. The
spectrum shall be developed for a damping ratio of
0.05, unless a different value is shown to be
consistent with the anticipated structural behavior at
the intensity of shaking established for the site.
3. Ground motion time histories developed for the
specific site shall be representative of actual
earthquake motions. Response spectra from time
histories, either individually or in combination, shall
approximate the site design spectrum conforming to
Section 208.6.2, Item 2.
4. For structures on Soil Profile Type SF, the following
requirements shall apply when required by Section
208.4.8.3, Item 4:
4.1 The ground motion representation shall be developed
in accordance with Items 2 and 3.
4.2 Possible amplification of building response due to
the effects of soil-structure interaction and
lengthening of building period caused by inelastic
behavior shall be considered.
5. The vertical component of ground motion may be
defined by scaling corresponding horizontal
accelerations by a factor of two- thirds. Alternative
factors may be used when substantiated by site
specific data. Where the Near Source Factor, N,,, is
greater than 1.0, site-specific vertical response
spectra shall be used in lieu of the factor of two
thirds.
208.6.3 MATHEMATICAL MODEL
A mathematical model of the physical structure shall
represent the spatial distribution of the mass and stiffness of
the structure to an extent that is adequate for the calculation
ofthe significant features of its dynamic response. A three
dimensional model shall be used for the dynamic analysis
of structures with highly irregular plan configurations such
as those having a plan irregularity defined in Table 208-10
and having a rigid or semirigid diaphragm. The stiffuess
properties used in the analysis and general mathematical
modeling shall be in accordance with Section 208.5. 1.2.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
208.6.4 DESCRIPTION OF ANALYSIS
PROCEDURES.
208.6.4.1 Response spectrum analysis. An elastic
dynamic analysis of a structure utilizing the peak dynamic
response of all modes having a significant contribution to
total structural response. Peak modal responses are
calculated using the ordinates of the appropriate response
spectrum curve which correspond to the modal periods.
Maximum modal contributions are combined in a statistical
manner to obtain an approximate total structural response.
208.6.4.2 Time-history analysis. An analysis of the
dynamic response of a structure at each increment of time
when the base is subjected to a specific ground motion time
history.
208.6.5 RESPONSE SPECTRUM ANALYSIS.
208.6.5.1 Response spectrum representation and
interpretation of results. The ground motion
representation shall be in accordance with Section 208.6.2.
The corresponding response parameters, including forces,
moments and displacements, shall be denoted as Elastic
Response Parameters. Elastic Response Parameters may be
reduced in accordance with Section 208.6.5.4.
208.6.5.2 Number of modes. The requirement of
Section 208.6.4.1 that all significant modes be included
may be satisfied by demonstrating that for the modes
considered, at least 90 percent of the participating mass of
the structure is included in the calculation of response for
each principal horizontal direction.
208.6.5.3 Combining modes. The peak member
forces, displacements, story forces, story shears and base
reactions for each mode shall be combined by recognized
methods. When three- dimensional models are used for
analysis, modal interaction effects shall be considered when
combining modal maxima.
208.6.5.4 Reduction of Elastic Response
Parameters for design. Elastic Response Parameters may
be reduced for purposes of design in accordance with the
following items, with the limitation that in no case shall the
Elastic Response Parameters be reduced such that the
corresponding design base shear is less than the Elastic
Response Base Shear divided by the value of R
1. For all regular structures where the ground motion
representation complies with Section 208.6.2, Item I,
Elastic Response Parameters may be reduced such
that the corresponding design base shear is not less
than 90 percent of the base shear determined in
accordance with Section 208.5.2.
 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN
2. For all regular structures where the ground motion
representation complies with Section 208.6.2, Item 2,
Elastic Response Parameters may be reduced such
that the corresponding design base shear is not less
than 80 percent of the base shear determined in
accordance with Section 208.5.2.
3. For al1 irregular structures, regardless of the ground
motion representation, Elastic Response Parameters
may be reduced such that the corresponding design
base shear is not less than 100 percent of the base
shear determined in accordance with Section 208.5.2.
The corresponding reduced design seismic forces shall be
used for design in accordance with Section 203.
208.6.5.5 Directional effects. Directional effects for
horizontal ground motion shall conform to the requirements
of Section 208.5.1. The effects of vertical ground motions
on horizontal cantilevers and prestressed elements shall be
considered in accordance with Section 208.5.1l.
Alternately, vertical seismic response may be determined
by dynamic response methods; in no case shall the response
used for design be less than that obtained by the static
method.
208.6.5.6 Torsion. The analysis shall account for
torsional effects, including accidental torsional effects as
prescribed in Section 208.5.7. Where three-dimensional
models are used for analysis, effects of accidental torsion
shall be accounted for by appropriate adjustments in the
model such as adjustment of mass locations, or by
equivalent static procedures such as provided in Section
208.5.6.
208.6.5.7 Dnal systems. Where the lateral forces are
resisted by a dual system as defined in Section 208.4.6.4,
the combined system shall be capable of resisting the base
shear determined in accordance with this section. The
moment-resisting frame shall conform to Section 208.4.6.4,
Item 2, and may be analyzed using either the procedures of
Section 208.5.5 or those of Section 208.6.5.
208.6.6 TIME-HISTORY ANALYSIS.
208.6.6.1 Time history. Time-history analysis shall
be performed with pairs of appropriate horizontal ground
motion time- history components that shall be selected and
scaled from not less than three recorded events. Appropriate
time histories shall have magnitudes, fault distances and
source mechanisms that are consistent with those that
control the design-basis earthquake (or maximum capable
earthquake). Where three appropriate recorded ground
motion time-history pairs are not available, appropriate
simulated ground-motion time-history pairs may be used to
make up the total number required. For each pair of
horizontal ground- motion components, the square root of
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
2-51
the sum of the squares (SRSS) of the 5 percent-damped
site-specific spectrum of the scaled horizontal components
shall be constructed. The motions shall be scaled such that
the average value of the SRSS spectra does not fall below
1.4 times the 5 percent-damped spectrum of the design
basis earthquake for periods from O.2T second to 1.51'
seconds. Each pair of time histories shall be applied
simultaneously to the model considering torsional effects.
The parameter of interest shall be calculated for each time
history analysis. If three time-history analyses are
performed, then the maximum response ofthe parameter of
interest shall be used for design. If seven or more time
history analyses are performed, then the average value of
the response parameter of interest may be used for design.
208.6.6.2 Elastic time-history analysis. Elastic time
history shall conform to Sections 208.6.1, 208.6.2, 208.6.3,
208.6.5.2, 208.6.5.4, 208.6.5.5, 208.6.5.6, 208.6.5.7 and
208.6.6.1. Response parameters from elastic time-history
analysis shall be denoted as Elastic Response Parameters.
All elements shall be designed using Strength Design.
Elastic Response Parameters may be scaled in accordance
with Section 208.6.5.4.
208.6.6.3 Nonlinear time-history analysis.
208.6.6.3.1 Nonlinear time history. Nonlinear
time-history analysis shall meet the requirements of Section
208.4.10, and time histories shall be developed and results
determined in accordance with the requirements of Section
208.6.6.1. Capacities and characteristics of nonlinear
elements shall be modeled consistent with test datal or
substantiated analysis, considering the Importance Factor.
The maximum inelastic response displacement shall not be
reduced and shall comply with Section 208.5.1 O.
208.6.6.3.2 Design review. When nonlinear time
history analysis is used to justifY a structural design. a
design review of the lateral- force-resisting system shall be
performed by an independent engineering team, including
persons licensed in the appropriate disciplines and
experienced in seismic analysis methods. The lateral~force
resisting system design review shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
1. Reviewing the development of site-specific spectra
and ground-motion time histories.
2. Reviewing the preliminary design of the lateral
force-resisting system.
3. Reviewing the final design of the lateral-force
resisting system and all supporting analyses.
The engineer of record shall submit with the plans and
calculations a statement by all members of the engineering
 2-52 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
team doing the review stating that the above review has
been performed.
208.7 LATERAL FORCE ON ELEMENTS
OF STRUCTURES, NON STRUCTURAL
COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT
SUPPORTED BY STRUCTURES
208.7.1 GENERAL
Elements of structures and their attachments, permanent
nonstructural components and their attachments, and the
attachments for permanent equipment supported by a
structure shall be designed to resist the total design seismic
forces prescribed in Section 208.7.2.
Attachments for 1oor- or roof-mounted equipment
weighing less than 1.8 kN, and furniture need not be
designed.
Attachments shall include anchorages and required bracing.
Friction resulting from gravity loads shall not be considered
to provide resistance to seismic forces.
When the structural failure of the lateral-force-resisting
systems of nomigid equipment would cause a life hazard,
such systems shall be designed to resist the seismic forces
prescribed in Section 208.7.2.
When permissible design strengths and other acceptance
criteria are not contained in or referenced by this code, such
criteria shall be obtained from approved national standards
subject to the approval of the building official.
208.7.2 DESIGN FOR TOTAL LATERAL FORCE
The total design lateral seismic force, Fl" shall be
determined from the following equation:
(208-18)
Alternatively, may be calculated using the following
equation:
F =QpCaIp (1+3 hx \.;:
(208-19)
p Rp h,.)"P
Except that Fp shall not be less than 0.7CJpWp and need
not be more than 4CJpWp
Where:
hx is the element or component attachment elevation
with respect to grade. hx shall not be taken less than
0.0.
h, is the structure-roof elevation with respect to grade.
is the in-structure Component Amplification Factor
that varies from l.0 to 2.5.
l Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
A value for Qp shall be selected from Table 208-12.
Alternatively, this factor may be determined based on the
dynamic properties or empirical data of the component and
the structure that supports it. The value shall not be taken
less than 1.O.
Rp is the Component Response Modification Factor that
shall be taken from Table 208-12, except that Rp for
anchorages shall equal 1.5 for shallow expansion anchor
bolts, shallow chemical anchors or shallow cast-in-place
anchors. Shallow anchors are those with an embedment
length-to-diameter ratio of less than 8. When anchorage is
constructed of nonductile materials, or by use of adhesive,
Rp shall equal 1.0.
The design lateral forces determined using Equation (208
18) or (208-19) shall be distributed in proportion to the
mass distribution of the element or component.
Forces determined using Equation (208-18) or (208-19)
shall be used to design members and connections that
transfer these forces to the seismic-resisting systems.
Members and connection design shall use the load
combinations and factors specified in Section 203.3 or
203.4. The ReliabilitylRedundancy Factor, p, may be taken
equal to 1.0.
For applicable forces and Component Response
Modification Factors in connectors for exterior panels and
diaphragms, refer to Sections 208.8.2.3, 208.8.2.7, and
208.8.2.8.
Forces shall be applied in the horizontal directions, which
result in the most critical loadings for design.
208.7.3 SPECIFYING LATERAL FORCES
Design specifications for equipment shall either specify the
design lateral forces prescribed herein or reference these
provisions.
208.7.4 RELATIVE MOTION OF EQUIPMENT
ATTACHMENTS. For equipment in Categories I and IT
buildings as defined in Table 103-1, the lateral-force design
shall consider the effects of relative motion of the points of
attachment to the structure, using the drift based upon /),M.
208.7.5 ALTERNATIVE DESIGNS
Where an approved national standard or approved physical
test data provide a basis for the earthquake-resistant design
of a particular type of equipment or other nonstructural
component, such a standard or data may be accepted as a
basis for design ofthe items with the following limitations:
l. These provisions shall provide minimum values for
the design of the anchorage and the members and
 EARTHQUAKj: DESIGN 2-53

connections that transfer the forces to the seismic

resisting system.

2. The force, Fp, and the overturning moment used in

the design of the nonstructural component shall not
be less than 80 percent of the values that would be
obtained using these provisions.

National structural Code of the Philippines. Voll.Dhe 1

 2-54 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

T;tble 208-12 Horizontal Force Factors, Bp and Rp for

Elements of Structures and Nonstructural Components and Equipment
Category Element or Component IJp Rp Footnote

L Walls including the following:

-~ ----------~.~ ... - . -.... --.--,.~.- .. > ---- --
a. Unbraced (cantilevered) parapets 2.5 3.0
I
-.-----~------- ~--
_..... -. --_. ------- -
b. Exterior walls at or above ground floor and parapets
1.0 3.0 2
1. Elements of braced above their centers of gravity
Structures c. All interior-bearing and non-bearing walls 2
1.0 3.0
2. Penthouse (except when framed by an extension of the
structural frame) 4.0
3. Connections for prefabricated structural elements other walls.
See also Section 208.7.2 3.0 3

1. Exterior and interior ornamentations and appendages.

2. Chimneys, stacks and trussed towers supported on or
2.5
J 3.0

__projectingabove tl1<:.~~~._.>_._ --~- - .

a. Laterally braced or anchored to the structural frame at a
2.5 3.0
point h<:~!! their ~~ of mass .. >.>.
b. Laterally braced or anchored to the structural frame at m . 1.0
'-"

3.0
- - .--. -

above their
-> - ....-_..'- ... centers
_. - of mass
.__ ._------
~

-- ..
2. Nonstructural 3. Signs and billboards 2.5 3.0
1-" .
-~-- - ------ . _- .- . .
Components 4. Storage racks (include contents) over 1.8 meters talL 2.5 4.0 4
1---5. Permanent floor-supported cabinets and book stacks more than
1.0 3.0 5
1.8 meters in height (include contents)
6. Anchorage and lateral bracing for suspended ceilings and light 3,6,7,8
fi:,,:tures 1.0 3.0

7. Access floor systems 1.0 3.0 4,5,9

I
8. Masonry or concrete fences over 1.8 meters high 1.0 3.0
_ _-_
...... ........ _- I
9. Partitions. 1.0 3.0
1. Tanks and vessels (include contents), including support
systems.
2. Elec~cal, mechanical and
oondwl ,nd doctwmk md p'pm,.
t:'um
bing equipment and associated- -
~
1.0
I0
. I
3.0
3.0
iT
!
10, 11,12:"
13, 14, 15, 16
3. Any fle~ble equipmen~ laterally bra~ed or anchored t~ the !

I--':-r;
25 30 5, 10, 14,
3. Equipment structural frame at a pomt below theIr center of mass . . 15,16
TAnchorage of emergency power supply systems and-esscntial
communications equipment. Anchorage and support systems . I0 30 17,18
for battery racks and fuel tanks necessary for operation of . ~
emergen~ equi~ment. See also Section 208.7.2 ._.
5. Temporary containers with flammable or hazardous materials. 1.0 3.0 19
I

4. Other
1. Rigid components with ductile material and attachments.
-- --- ~- ~----.
I
I
I. oJ. -
3.0
..... ~.
1

2. Rigid components with nonductile material or attachments 1.0 1.5 1

I 2.5..~-F--
Components I 2.5
3. Flexible components with ductile material and attachments.

4. Flexible components with nonductile material or attachments.

3.0
-_.
1.5
-----1
1

1 i

L Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN

FOOTNOTES FOR TABLE 208.12

13
See Section 208.2 for definitions of flexible components and Piping, ducts and electrical raceways, which must be
rigid components. functional foHowing an earthquake, spanning between
2
See Section 208.8.2.3 and 208.8.2.7 for concrete and diff~rent buildings or structural systems shall be sufficiently
masonry walls and Section 208.7.2 for connections for panel fleXIble to withstand relative motion of support points
connectors for panels. assuming out-ofphase motions.
14
3
Applies to Seismic Zones 2 and 4 only. Vibration isolators supporting equipment shall be designed
4
Ground supported steel storage racks may be designed for lateral loads or restrained from displacing laterally by
using the provisions of Sections 208.9. Load and resistance other means. Restraint shall also be provided which limits
factor design may be used for the design of cold-formed vertical displacement, such that lateral restr'aints do not
steel members, provided seismic design forces are equal to become disengaged. ap and Rp for equipment supported on
or greater than those specified in Section 208.7.2 or 208.9.2 vibration isolators shall be taken as 2.5 and 1.5,
as appropriate. respectively. except that if the isolation mounting frame is
5 supported by shallow or expansion anchors, the design
Only anchorage or restraints need be designed.
forces for the anchors calculated by Equation (208-18),or
Ceiling weight shall include all light fixtures and other (208-19) (including limits), shall be additionally multiplied by
equipment or partitions that are laterally supported by the factor of 2.0.
ceiling. For purposes of determining the seismic force, a 15
Equipment anchorage shall not be designed such that loads
ceiling weight of not less than 0.2 kPa shall be used.
are resisted by gravity friction (e.g., friction clips).
Ceilings constructed of lath and plaster or gypsum board 16
Expansion anchors, which are required to resist seismic
screw or nail attached to suspended members that support
loads in tension. shall not be used where operational
a ceiling at one level extending from wall to wall need not be
vibrating loads are present.
analyzed, provided the walls are not over 15 meters apart. 17
Movement of components within electrical cabinets, rack
Light fixtures and mechanical services installed in metal
and skid-mounted equipment and portions of skid-mounted
suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay-in panel
electromechanical equipment that may cause damage to
ceilings shall be independently supported from the structure
other components by displacing. shall be restricted by
above as specified in UBC Standard 25-2, Part III.
attachment to anchored equipment or support frames.
Wp for access floor systems shall be the dead load of the 18
Batteries on racks shall be restrained against movement in
access floor system plus 25 percent of the floor live load
all direction due to earthquake forces.
plus a 0.5 kPa partition load allowance. 19
10 Seismic restraints may include straps, chains, bolts, barriers
Equipment includes, but is not limited to, boilers, chillers,
or other mechanisms that prevent sliding, falling and breach
heat exchangers, pumps, air-handling units, cooling towers,
of containment of flammable and toxic materials. Friction
control panels, motors, switchgear, transformers and life
forces may not be used to resist lateral loads in the
safety equipment. It shall include major conduit, ducting and
restraints unless positive uplift restraint is provided which
piping, which services such machinery and equipment and
ensures that the friction forces act continuously.
fire sprinkler systems. See Section 208.7.2 for additional
requirements for determining ap for nonrigid or flexibly
mounted equipment.
11
Seismic restraints may be omitted from piping and duct
supports if all the following conditions are satisfied:
1U
Lateral motion of the piping or duct will not cause damaging
impact with other systems.
11.2
The piping or duct is made of ductile material with ductile
connections.
11.3
Lateral. motion of the piping or duct does not cause impact
of fragile appurtenances (e.g., sprinkler heads) with any
other equipment, piping or structural member.
11.4
Lateral motion of the piping or duct does not cause loss of
system vertical support.
11.5
Rod-hung supports of less than 300 mm in length have top
connections that cannot develop moments.
11.6
Support members cantilevered up from the floor are
checked for stability.
12
Seismic restraints may be omitted from electrical raceways,
such as cable trays, conduit and bus ducts, if all the
following conditions are satisfied:
12.1
Lateral motion of the raceway will not cause damaging
impact with other systems.
12.2
Lateral motion of the raceway does not cause loss of
system vertical support.
12.3
Rod-hung supports of less than 300 mm in length have top
connections that cannot develop moments.
12.4
Support members cantilevered up from the floor are
checked for stability.

National S1ructural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

256 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
208.8 DETAll..ED SYSTEMS DESIGN
shown in Table 208-11. Each type is subdivided by the
REQUIREMENTS
types of vertical elements used to resist lateral seismic
208.8.1 GENERAL
All structural framing systems shall comply with the
requirements of Section 208.4. Only the elements of the
designated seismic-force-resisting system shall be used to
resist design forces. The individual components shall be
designed to resist the prescribed design seismic forces
acting on them. The components shall also comply with the
specific requirements for the material contained in Chapters
4 through 7. In addition, such framing systems and
components shall comply with the detailed system design
requirements contained in Section 208.8.
All building components in Seismic Zones 2 and 4 shall be
designed to resist the effects of the seismic forces
prescribed herein and the effects of gravity loadings from
dead and floor live loads.
Consideration shall be given to design for uplift effects
caused by seismic loads.
'In Seismic Zones 2 and 4, provision shall be made for the
effects of earthquake forces acting in a direction other than
the principal axes in each of the following circumstances:
1. The structure has plan irregularity Type 5 as given in
Table 208-10.
2. The structure has plan irregularity Type I as given in
Table 208-10 for both major axes.
3. A column of a structure forms part of two or more
intersecting lateral-force-resisting systems.
EXCEPTION:
If the axial load in the column due to seismic forces acting
ill either direction is less than 20 percent of the column
axial load capacity.
The requirement that orthogonal effects be considered may
be satisfied by designing such elements for 100 percent of
the prescribed design seismic forces in one direction plus
30 percent of the prescribed design seismic forces in the
perpendicular direction. The combination requiring the
greater component strength shall be used for design.
Alternatively, the effects of the two orthogonal directions
may be combined on a square root of the sum of the squares
(SRSS) basis. When the SRSS method of combining
directional effects is used, each term computed shall be
assigned the sign that will result in the most conservative
result.
208.8.2 STRUCTURAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
Four types of general building framing systems defined in
Section 208.4.6 are recognized in these provisions and
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
forces. Special framing requirements are given in this
section and in Chapters 4 through 7.
208.8.2.1 Detailing for combinations of systems.
For components common to different structural systems, the
more restrictive detailing requirements shall be used.
208.8.2.2 Connections. Connections that resist design
seismic forces shall be designed and detailed on the
drawings.
208.8.2.3 Deformation compatibility. All structural
framing elements and their connections, not required by
design to be part of the lateral-foree-resisting system, shall
be designed and/or detailed to be adequate to maintain
support of design dead plus live loads when subjected to the
expected deformations caused by seismic forces. Pl! effects
on such elements shall be considered. Expected
deformations shall be determined as the greater of the
Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement, l!M,
considering Pl! effects determined in accordance with
Section 208.5.9.2 or the deformation induced by a story
drift of 0.0025 times the story height. When computing
expected deformations, the stiffening effect of those
elements not part of the lateral-force-resisting system shall
be neglected.
For elements not part of the lateral-force-resisting system,
the forces inducted by the expected deformation may be
considered as ultimate or factored forces. When computing
the forces induced by expected deformations, the
restraining effect of adjoining rigid structures and
nonstructural elements shall be considered and a rational
value of member and restraint stiffness shall be used.
Inelastic deformations of members and connections may be
considered in the evaluation, provided the assumed
calculated capacities are consistent with member and
connection design and detailing.
For concrete and masonry elements that are part of the
lateral- force-resisting system, the assumed flexural and
shear stiffness properties shall not exceed one half of the
gross section properties unless a rational cracked-section
analysis is performed. Additional deformations that may
result from foundation flexibility and diaphragm deflections
shall be considered. For concrete elements not part of the
lateral-force-resisting system, see Section 421.9.
208.8.2.3.1 Adjoining rigid elements. Moment
resisting frames and shear walls may be enclosed by or
adjoined by more rigid elements, provided it can be shown
that the participation or failure of the more rigid elements
will not impair the vertical and lateral- load-resisting ability
of the gravity load and lateral-force-resisting systems. The
 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN
effects of adjoining rigid elements shall be considered when
assessing whether a structure shall be designated regular or
irregular in Section 208.4.5.
208.8.2.3.2 Exterior elements. Exterior non
bearing, nonshear wall panels or elements that are attached
to or enclose the exterior shall be designed to resist the
forces per Equation (208-18) or (208-19) and shall
accommodate movements of the structure based on AM and
temperature changes. Such elements shall be supported by
means of cast-in-place concrete or by mechanical
connections and fasteners in accordance with the following
provisions:
1. Connections and panel joints shall allow for a
relative movement between stories of not less than
two times story drift caused by wind, the calculated
story drift based on AM or 12.7 mm, whichever is
greater.
2. Connections to permit movement in the plane of the
panel for story drift shall be sliding connections
using slotted or oversize holes, connections that
permit movement by bending of steel, or other
connections providing equivalent sliding and
ductility capacity.
3. Bodies of connections shall have sufficient ductility
and rotation capacity to preclude fracture of the
concrete or brittle failures at or near welds.
4. The body of the connection shall be designed for the
force determined by Equation (208-19), where Rp =
3.0 and ap = 1.0.
5. All fasteners in the connecting system, such as bolts,
inserts, welds .:md dowels, shall be designed for the
forces determined by Equation (208-19), where Rp =
1.0 and ap = 1.0.
6. Fasteners embedded in concrete shall be attached to,
or hooked around, reinforcing steel or otherwise
terminated to effectively transfer forces to the
reinforcing steel.
208.8.2.4 Ties and continuity. All parts of a structure
shall be interconnected and the connections shall be capable
of transmitting the seismic force induced by the parts being
connected. As a minimum, any smaller portion of the
building shall be tied to the remainder of the building with
elements having at least a strength to resist 0.5 Cel times the
weight of the smaller portion.
A positive connection for resisting a horizontal force acting
parallel to the member shall be provided for each beam,
girder or truss. This force shall not be less than 0.3 Cel
times the dead plus live load.
208.8.2.5 Collector elements. Collector elements
shall be provided that are capable of transferring the
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
2-57
seismic forces originating in other portions of the structure
to the element providing the resistance to those forces.
Collector elements, splices and their connections to
resisting elements shall resist the forces determined in
accordance with Equation (208-20). In addition, collector
elements, splices, and their connections to resisting
elements shall have the design strength to resist the
combined loads resulting from the special seismic load of
Section 203.5.
EXCEPTION:
[n stntctures, or portions thereC?f. braced entirely by light
frame wood shear walls or light-frame steel and wood
stntctural panel shear wall systems, collector elements,
splices and connections to resisting elements need ollly be
designed to resist forces in accordance with Equation
(208-20).
The quantity EM need not exceed the maximum force that
can be transferred to the collector by the diaphragm and
other elements of the lateral-force-resisting system. For
Allowable Stress Design, the design strength may be
determined using an allowable stress increase of 1.7 and a
resistance factor, <, of 1.0. This increase shall not be
combined with the one-third stress increase permitted by
Section 203.4, but may be combined with the duration of
load increase permitted in Section 615.3.4.
208.8.2.6 Concrete frames. Concrete frames required
by design to be part of the lateral-force-resisting system
shall conform to the following:
1. In Seismic Zone 4 they shall be special moment-
resisting frames.
2. In Seismic Zone 2 they shall, as a minimum, be
intermediate moment-resisting frames.
208.8.2.7 Anchorage of concrete or masonry walls.
Concrete or masonry walls shall be anchored to all floors
and roofs that provide out-of-plane lateral support of the
wall. The anchorage shall provide a positive direct
connection between the wall and floor or roof construction
capable of resisting the larger of the horizontal forces
specified in this section and Sections 206.4 and 208.7. In
addition, in Seismic Zone 4, diaphragm to wall anchorage
using embedded straps shall have the straps attached to or
hooked around the reinforcing steel or otherwise terminated
to effectively transfer forces to the reinforcing steel.
Requirements for developing anchorage forces in
diaphragms are given in Section 208.8.2.8. Diaphragm
deformation shall be considered in the design of the
supported walls.
208.8.2.7.1 Out-of-plane wall anchorage to
flexible diaphragms. This section shall apply in Seismic
 2-58 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS
Zone 4 where flexible diaphragms, as defined in Section
208.5.6, provide lateral support for walls.
1. Elements of the wall anchorage system shall be
designed for the forces specified in Section 208.7
where Rp = 3.0 and ap = 1.5.
In Seismic Zone 4, the value of Fp used for the
design of the elements of the wall anchorage system
shall not be less than 6.1 kN per lineal meter of wall
substituted for E.
See Section 206.4 for minimum design forces in other
seismic zones.
2. When elements of the wall anchorage system are not
loaded concentrically or are not perpendicular to the
wall, the system shall be designed to resist all
components ofthe forces induced by the eccentricity.
3. When pilasters are present in the wall, the anchorage
force at the pilasters shall be calculated considering
the additional load transferred from the wall panels
to the pilasters. However, the minimum anchorage
force at a floor or roof shall be that specified in
Section 208.8.2.7.1, Item l.
t 4. The strength design forces for steel elements of the
wall anchorage system shall be 1.4 times the forces
otherwise required by this section.
5. The strength design forces for wood elements of the
wall anchorage system shall be 0.85 times the force
otherwise required by this section and these wood
elements shall have a minimum actual net thickness
of63.5 mm.
208.8.2.8 Diaphragms.
l. The deflection in the plane of the diaphragm shall
not exceed the permissible deflection of the attached
elements. Permissible deflection shall be that
deflection that will permit the attached element to
maintain its structural integrity under the individual
loading and continue to support the prescribed loads.
2. Floor and roof diaphragms shall be designed to resist
the forces determined in accordance with the
following equation:
Fpx =
_-lI--,-i:::o=X=-- W px (208-20)
LW i
i=x
The force Fpx determined from Equation (208-20) need not
exceed 1.0C)Wpx> but shall not be less than 0.5C)Wpr
When the diaphragm is required to transfer design seismic
forces from the vertical-resisting elements above the
diaphragm to other vertical-resisting elements below the
diaphragm due to offset in the placement of the elements or
to changes in stiffuess in the vertical elements, these forces
shall be added to those determined from Equation (208-20).
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
3. Design seismic forces for flexible diaphragms
providing lateral supports for walls or frames of
masonry or concrete shall be determined using
Equation (208-20) based on the load determined in
accordance with Section 208.5.2 using a R not
exceeding 4.
4. Diaphragms supporting concrete or masonry walls
shall have continuous ties or struts between
diaphragm chords to distribute the anchorage forces
specified in Section 208.8.2.7. Added chords of
subdiaphragms may be used to form subdiaphragms
to transmit the anchorage forces to the main
continuous crossties. The maximum length-to-width
ratio of the wood structural subdiaphragm shall be
2Y2: l.
5. Where wood diaphragms are used to laterally
support concrete or masonry walls, the anchorage
shall conform to Section 208.8.2.7. In Seismic
Zone 2 and 4, anchorage shall not be accomplished
by use of toenails or nails subject to withdrawal,
wood ledgers or framing shall not be used in cross
grain bending or cross-grain tension, and the
continuous ties required by Item 4 shall be in
addition to the diaphragm sheathing.
6. Connections of diaphragms to the vertical elements
in structures in Seismic Zone 4, having a plan
irregularity of Type 1, 2, 3 or 4 in Table 208-10,
shall be designed without considering either the one
third increase or the duration of load increase
considered in allowable stresses for elements
resisting earthquake forces.
7. In structures in Seismic Zone 4 having a plan
irregularity of Type 2 in Table 20810, diaphragm
chords and drag members shall be designed
considering independent movement of the projecting
wings of the structure. Each of these diaphragm
elements shall be designed for the more severe ofthe
following two assumptions:
a. Motion of the projecting wings in the same direction.
b. Motion of the projecting wings in opposing
directions.
EXCEPTION:
This requirement may be deemed satisfied if the procedures
of Section 208.6 in conjunction with a three-dimensional
model have been used to determine the lateral seismic
forces for design..
208.8.2.9 Framing below the base. The strength and
stiffness of the framing between the base and the
foundation shall not be less than that of the superstructure.
The special detailing requirements of Chapters 4, 5 and 7,
as appropriate, shall apply to columns supporting
 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN
discontinuous lateral-force-resisting elements and to SMRF,
IMRF, EBF, STMF and MMRWF system elements below
the base, which are required to transmit the forces resulting
from lateral loads to the foundation.
208.8.2.10 Buildiug separations. All structures shall
be separated from adjoining structures. Separations shall
allow for the displacement D.M. Adjacent buildings on the
same property shall be separated by at least P-''MT where
(208-21 )
and AMI and AMl are the displacements of the adjacent
buildings.
When a structure adjoins a property line not common to a
public way, that structure shall also be set back from the
property line by at least the displacement AM of that
structure.
EXCEPTION:
Smaller separations or property line setbacks may be
permitted when justified by rational analyses based 011
maximum expected ground motions.
208.9 NONBUILDING STRUCTURES
208.9.1 GENERAL.
208.9.1.1 Scope. Nonbuilding structures include all
self- supporting structures other than buildings that carry
gravity loads and resist the effects of earthquakes.
Nonbuilding structures shall be designed to provide the
strength required to resist the displacements induced by the
minimum lateral forces specified in this section. Design
shall conform to the applicable provisions of other sections
as modified by the provisions contained in Section 208.9.
208.9.1.2 Criteria. The minimum design seismic
forces prescribed in this section are at a level that produce
displacements in a fixed base, elastic model of the structure,
comparable to those expected of the real structure when
responding to the Design Basis Ground Motion. Reductions
in these forces using the coefficient R is permitted where
the design of nonbuilding structures provides sufficient
strength and ductility, consistent with the provisions
specified herein for buildings, to resist the effects of seismic
ground motions as represented by these design forces.
. When applicable, design strengths and other detailed design
criteria shall be obtained from other sections or their
referenced standards. The design of nonbuilding structures
shall use the load combinations or factors specified in
Nationaf Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
2-59
Section 203.3 or 203.4. For nonbuilding structures designed
using Section 208.9.3, 208.9.4 or 208.9.5, the
1
I
ReliabilityfRedundancy Factor, p, may be taken as 1.0.
I
When applicable design strengths and other design criteria
are not contained in or referenced by this code, such criteria
shall be obtained from approved national standards.
208.9.1.3 Weight W. The weight, W. for nonbuilding
structures shaH include all dead loads as defined for
buildings in Section 208.5.1.1. For purposes of calculating
design seismic forces in non building structures, W shall
also include all normal operating contents for items such as
tanks, vessels, bins and piping.
208.9.1.4 Period. The fundamental period of the
structure shall be determined by rational methods such as
by using Method B in Section 208.5.2.2.
208.9.1.5 Drift. The drift limitations of Section
208.5.1 0 need not apply to nonbuilding structures. Drift
limitations shall be established for structural or
nonstructural elements whose failure would cause life
hazards. PA effects shall be considered for structures
whose calculated drifts exceed the values in Section
208.5.1.3.
208.9.1.6 Interaction effects. In Seismic Zone 4,
structures that support flexible nonstructural elements
whose combined weight exceeds 25 percent of the weight
of the structure shall be designed considering interaction
effects between the structure and the supported elements.
,
208.9.2 LATERAL FORCE. Lateral-force procedures
for nonbuilding structures with structural systems similar to
buildings (those with structural systems which are listed in
Table 208-11) shall be selected in accordance with the
provisions of Section 208.4.
EXCEPTION:
Intermediate moment-resisting frames (IMRF) may be used
in Seismic Zone 4 for nonbuilding stnlctures in Occupancy
Categories III and IV if (1) the structure is less than 15
meterd in height and (2) the value R used in reducing
calculated member forces and moments does not exceed
2.8.
208.9.3 RIGID STRUCTURES
Rigid structures (those with period Tless than 0.06 second)
and their anchorages shall be designed for the lateral force
obtained from Equation (208-22) .
V 0.7CJW (208-22)
 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

The force V shall be distributed according to the particular type of nonbuilding structure covered by
distribution of mass and shall be assumed to act in any this section, such a standard may be used, subject to
horizontal direction. the limitations in this section:

208.9.4 TANKS WITH SUPPORTED BOTTOMS
Flat bottom tanks or other tanks with supported bottoms,
founded at or below grade, shall be designed to resist the
seismic forces calculated using the procedures in Section
208.7 for rigid structures considering the entire weight of
the tank and its contents. Alternatively, such tanks may be
designed using one of the two procedures described below:
The seismic zones and occupancy categories shall be in
conformance with the provisions of Sections 208.4.4 and
208.4.2, respectively,
The values for total lateral force and total base overturning
moment used in design shall not be less than 80 percent of
the values that would be obtained using these provisions.

1. A response spectrum analysis that includes

consideration of the actual ground motion anticipated Table 208-13 Rand n." Factors For
at the site and the inertial effects of the contained Nonbuilding Structures
fluid.
I STRUCTURE TYPE R n."

2. A design basis prescribed for the particular type of 1. Vessels, including tanks and
tank by an approved national standard, provided that
pressurized spheres, on braced or 2.2 2,0
the seismic zones and occupancy categories shall be unbraced legs.
in conformance with the provisions of Sections 2, Cast-in-place concrete silos and
208.4.4 and 208.4.2, respectively. chimneys having walls continuous 3,6 2,0
to the foundations
~, Distributed mass cantilever
structures such as stacks,
1.08.9.5 OTHER NONBUILDING STRUCTURES chimneys, silos and skirt-

2.9 2.0
Nonbuilding structures that are not covered by Sections supported vertical vessels.

208.9.3 and 208.9.4 shall be designed to resist design 4. Trussed towers (freestanding or

seismic forces not less than those determined in accordance guyed stacks and
2.9 2.0
.1..
with the provisions in Section 208.5 with the following
additions and exceptions: 5. Cantilevered column-type
structures.
2.2 2.0
1. The factors Rand n." shall be as set forth in Table 6. Cooling towers. 3.6 2.0
208-13. The total design base shear determined in
accordance with Section 208.5.2 shall not be less 7. Bins and hop ~.
2.0
than the following: unbraced legs.
8. Storage racks. 3.6 2.0
V=0.56C"lW (208-23)
9. Signs and billboards. 3.6 2.0
Additionally, for Seismic Zone 4, the total base shear shall
10. Amusement structures and
also not be less than the following: 2.2 2.0
_ - _...__.._._.._..
- _ .monuments. --
1.6ZNJ II. All other self-supporting structures
T

f' = W (208-24) 2.9 2.0

not otherwise covered. I
R
2, The vertical distribution of the design seismic forces
in structures covered by this section may be 208.10 SITE CATEGORIZATION
determined by using the provisions of Section
PROCEDURE
208.5.5 or by using the procedures of Section 208,6,
208.10.1 SCOPE
EXCEPTION: This section describes the procedure for determining Soil
For irregular sln/cfures aSSigned fo Occupancy Categories
5:
Profile Types 4 through 5Fas defined in Table 208-2.
J and II that cannot be modeled as a Single mass, the
208.10.2 DEFINITIONS
procedures ofSection 208.6 shall be used
Soil profile types are defined as follows:
3. Where an approved national standard provides a Hard rock with measured shear wave velocity,
basis foc the earth(juake-resistant design of a Vs > 1500 mls.

l Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN 2~1

SB Rock with 760 mls < Vs ~ 1500 mls. 208.10.2.2 N, Average Field Standard Penetration
Resistance and Net" Average Standard Penetration
Sc Very dense soil and soft rock with Resistance For Cobesionless Soil Layers. N and NCH
360 mls < Vs ~ 760 mls or with shall be determined in accordance with the following
either N > 50 or s" ~ 100 kPa. equation:
SD Stiff soil with 180 mls ~ Vs ~ 360 mls or
with 15 ~ N ~ 50 or 50 kPa ~ su ~ 100 kPa.
(208-26)
SE A soil profile with Vs < 80 mls or
any profile with more than 3 meters of soft clay
defined as soil with PI> 20, W me ~ 40 percent and
d
Su < 25 kPa. N eH - -s-
- " d.
(208-27)
SF Soils requiring site-specific evaluation: '
2:-
N
i=l i
1. Soils vulnerable to potential failure or collapse under
seismic loading such as liquefiable soils, quick and Where:
highly sensitive clays, collapsible weakly cemented d; thickness ofLayer i in millimeter
soils. do = the total thickness of cohesionless soil layers in

2. Peats andlor highly organic clays the top 30 meters.

(H > 3 meters of peat and/or highly organic clay

the standard penetration resistance of soil layer in

where H thickness of soil). accordance with approved nationally recognized

3. Very high plasticity clays standards.

(H> 7.5 meters with PI> 75).

4. Very thick soft/medium stiff clays 208.10.2.3 su, Average Undrained Shear Strength.
(H> 36 meters). SItshall be determined in accordance with the following
equation:
EXCEPTION:
de
S" =--d- (208-28)
When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail n .

to determine the soil profile type, T:;pe SD shall be used 2:-'

5,'0;,' r,,'.!~le Type SE need not be aSSloned unless the
huilding offiCial determines that Soil Profile Type SE may
be present at the site or ill the event that Type SE is
established by geotechnical data.
The criteria set forth in the definition for Soil Profile Type
SF requiring site-specific evaluation shall be considered. If
the site corresponds to this criteria, the site shall be
classified as Soil Profile Type SF and a site-specific
evaluation shall be conducted.
208.10.2.1 v., Average Shear Wave Velocity
vs shall be determined in accordance with the following
equation:
vs
Where:
~ thickness ofLayer i in mcter.
115i shear wave velocity in Layer i in mlsec.
1=1 SUi
Where: I
de the total thickness (100 - ds) of cohesive soil
layers in the top 30 meters.
the undrained shear strength in accordance with
approved nationally recognized standards, not to
exceed 250 kPa.
208.10.2.4 Soft Clay Profile, SEe The existence of a
total thickness of soft clay greater than 3 meters shall be
investigated where a soft clay layer is defined by SIt 24
kPa, WI/Ie.::: 40 percent and PI > 20. If these criteria are met,
the site shall be classified as Soil Profile Type SE.
208.10.2.5 Soil Profiles So SD and SEe Sites with
Soil Profile Types Sc, SD and SF; shall be classified by using
(208-25)
one of the following three methods with vs , N and Su
computed in all cases as specified in Section 20810.2.
1. v, for the top 30 meters (v, method).
2. N for the top 30 meters (N method).
3. NCl! for cohesionless soH layers (PI < 20) in the top
30 meters and average s" for cohesive soil layers (PI
> 20) in the top 30 meters (s" method).

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 2-62 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

208.10.2.6 Rock Profiles, SA and SB' The shear

wave velocity for rock, Soil Profile Type Ss, shall be either

measured on site or estimated by a geotechnical engineer,

engineering geologist or seismologist for competent rock

with moderate fracturing and weathering. Softer and more

highly fractured and weathered rock shall either be

measured on site for shear wave velocity or classified as

Soil Profile Type Sc.

The hard rock, Soil Profile Type SA, category shall be

supported by shear wave velocity measurement either on

site or on profiles of the same rock type in the same

formation with an equal or greater degree of weathering and

fracturing. Where hard rock conditions are known to be

continuous to a depth of 30 meters, surficial shear wave

velocity measurements may be extrapolated to assess Vs.

The rock categories, Soil Profile Types 5.4 and Ss, shall not

be used if there is more than 3 meters of soil between the

rock surface and the bottom of the spread footing or mat

foundation.

The definitions presented herein shall apply to the upper 30

meters of the site profile. Profiles containing distinctly

different soil layers shall be subdivided into those layers

t designated by a number from 1 to 11 at the bottom, where

there are a total of 11 distinct layers in the upper 30 meters.

The symbol i then refers to anyone of the layers between 1

and ll.

L Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS 2-63

118 120 122 124 126E

N
20

-
o

18

16

ZONE 4
14

12

10'

ZONE 2

6'
",-.

Figure 208-1 Seismic Zone Map of the Philippines

National Structural Code of the Philippines. Volume 1

2-64 MINIMlIM DESIGN LOADS

2000'

Distribution 9f~c~ive Faults in the Philippines

PFZ: Bangui Fa~Sy$tam "
t.~ P 1,1 , , ' Dummon River Faun SysIem
f , ", "
I'

Legend
1600' Active Fault: Solid line- tmce certain;
dashed line- InIce approximate;
IIpJlrOlCimaIe offshofe projection

1800' , , Faun Zone(PFZ): Oigdig Faun o 100 200

lila Fault
Kilometers
'1Ir+------lPFZ: Gabaldon Faull

PFZ: Guinyangan Fault

Valley Fault sr.-n-----Hi-:
Central MaOnduqe Faull

Lake Bato Uneament

1400'

Southern Mindoro Faull--:;----;--~iI1r"j._~~

1200'
TablasFault

west Panay Faull ~

1000'

/r East Sohal Fau,It-----t--=:,,~rl__#:J'f_~~1'"

t
/ Central Mindanao Fault System

MF: Western Mindanao Ext~ion

-------..:~~--tC~
800'

Zamboanga Peninsula Faull System_ _-J......"

PFl: Mati Fault

600'
Davaa River Faull

Tangbulan Faull
Mindanao Fault(MF): Oagurna Ext
123 00' 12500' 12700'

Figure 208-2A - Type A Seismic Sources

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN 2-65

1800'

1700'

1600'

Legend
- ' Active Fault: solid line- onlMd;
dashed line- offshore

@ Capital CityfTown

2S 50
Kilometers
1500'

Figure 208-28 - Type A Seismic Sources

National 8tn.Jct9ra1 Code of 1he Philippines, VohDne 1

2-66 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

12400' 12500' 12600'

Figure 208-2C - Type A Seismic Sources

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 EARTHQUAKE DESIGN
2-67

"?~:'
Dasi)

\.

!~
-~,-- Active Fault: solid line- onland;
lOW dashed line- offshore

(';) Capital City/Town

50
e _ .. ;
Kjl0meters

Active Faults in West Central Phili \

11000' ).:100' J:200

Figure 208-20- Type A Seismic Sources

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

2-68 MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS

(\ 1000'

.d ~
~-/.
~J . ,I

F
~~
SiqUi~ ,
I

~g

~.
)
'"'
Pro~~ ""'~'~-.o

')
~

(
1!)."alaybelay

800'

{
/
~. @Mag.noy /
I ""l, .
U'-J
\
1,
Ma:~'.i.
"\:a 700'

V'(\ \..... ~lI.ulan T\ Dig 'l ( /'

~ ~ ~

- - , Active Fault: solid line- onland;

.

~
'I."
~\ .-~.
U

\\ \{
\

dashed line- offshore ~ ~ ~

//l
GeneraLSantos

1!iJ Capital CityfTown "",,_ '6, ),..{t~Alabel J

600'
~, ' I
o__ .~'H -,
15
,. _ _ _
50
._5
~_.~j
C~
wlorrw:tters-

Active Faults inSouthern.cPhilippines

12500' 12~ 00'

Figure 208-2E- Type A Seismic Sources

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

--------------------------------............
r

EARTHQUAKE DESIGN 2-69

Control Periods
2.5Ga
~ Ts = Cv12.5Ca

I To =0.2Ts

I Gill

1 2 3 4 5
Period (TIT s )

F~gure 208-3 - Design Response Spectra

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Vol\ime 1

 1
I

CHAPTER 3

EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 301 - GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 3-1

30l.1 - Scope ........................................................... 3-1 301.3 - Al1owab1e Bearing Pressures ....................... 3-1

301.2 - Quality and Design ..................................... 3-1

SECTION 302 - EXCAVATIONS AND FaLS ........ ao 3-1

302.1 - General... ......................................................... 3-1 302.4 - Setbacks ......... .......... ......... .................. ........ 3-3

302.2 - Cuts ................................................................. 3-1 302.5 - Drainage and Terracing .............................. 3-3

302.3 - Fi1ls .. ........ ..... ...................... ..... ................... 3-2 302.6 - Erosion Control ....... ......... ............... ........... 3-4

SECTION 303 - FOUNDATION mvESTIGATION ................................................................ 3-4

303.1 - Genera1 ............................................................ 3-4 303.6 - Liquefaction Potential and Soil Strength

303.2 - Soil Classification ........................................... 3-4 Loss................................................. .............. 3-5

303.3 - Liquefaction Study..................................... 3-4 303.7 - Adjacent Loads ..................................... ,....... 3-5

303.4 - Expansive Soil ............................................ 3-4 303.8 - Drainage .................. ............ .......... ........ ...... 3-5

303.5 - Reports ....................................................... 3-5

SECTION 304 - ALWWABLE FOUNDATION AND LATERAL PRESSURES............... 3-6

SECTION 305 - FOOTINGS ................................................................................................... 3-7

305.1 - General ....................................................... 3-7 305.6 - Foundation Plates or Sills ........................ 3-8

305.2 - Footing Design .......................................... 3-7 306.7 - Designs Employing Lateral Bearing ......... 3-8

305.3 - Bearing Walls ............................................ 3-7 305-8 - Grillage Footings ....... ............... ............ ..... 3-9

305.4 ~ Stepped Foundations .......~.. .......... .............. 3-7 305.9 - Bleacher Footings ...................................... 3-9

305.5 - Footings On Or Adjacent to Slopes ........ 3-7

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 3-ij EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS

SECTION 306 - PILES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .............................................. 3-10

306.1 - General... ................. .......... .......... ........ ..... 3-10 306.8 - Piles in Subsiding Areas ...................... 3-11

306.2 - Interconnection ......................................... 3-10 306.9 - Jetting ..................................................... 3-11

306.3 - Determination of Allowable Loads ........ 3-10 306.10 - Protection of Pile Materials .................. 3-11

306.4 - Static Load Test ..... .... ................ ....... ...... 3-10 3U6.11 - Allowable Loads .................................... 3-11

306.5 - Dynamic Load Test .... ..... ....... ... ............. 3-10 306.12 - Use of Higher Allowable Pile

306.6 - Column Action ........................................ 3-10 Stresses ................................................... 3-11

306.7 - Group Action ........................................... 3-10

SECTION 307 - PILES - SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS ................................................ 3-12

307.1 - Round Wood Piles .................................. 3-12 307.5 - Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles

307.2 - Uncased Cast-i'n-Place Concrete Piles .... 3-12 (Pretensioned) .......................................... 3-13

307.3 - Metal-Cased Concrete Piles .................... 3-12 307.6 - Structural Steel Piles ............................... 3-13

307.4 - Precast Concrete Piles ...... ........... ..... ....... 3-12 307.7 - Concrete-Filled Steel Pipe Piles .............. 3-13

SECTION 308 - FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION FOR

SEISMIC ZONE 4 ...................................................................................... 3-14

308.1 - General ..................................................... 3-14 308.4 - Foundation-Soil Interface ........................ 3-14

308.2 - Soil Capacity ........... ..... .... ............ ........... 3-14 308.5 - Special Requirements for Piles and

308.3 - Superstructure to Foundation Caissons ................................................... 3-14

Connection ......................................... ...... 3-14

'<, i

l Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippine~

 GENERAL & EXCAVATION AND FILLS
3-1

SECTION 301 - GENERAL SECTION 302 - EXCAVATION AND

FILLS
301.1 SCOPE

This chapter sets forth requirements for excavations, fills, 302.1 GENERAL
footings and foundations for any building or structure.
Excavation or fills for bui!~jngs or structures shall be
constructed or protected that they do not endanger life or
property. Reference is made to Section 109 of this code for
301.2 QUALITY AND DESIGN
requirements governing excavation, grading and earthwork
construction, including fills and embankments.
The quality and design of materials used structurally in
excavations, fills, footings and foundations shall conform to
the requirements specified in Chapters 4,5,6 and 7.
302.2 CUTS

302.2.1 General. Unless otherwise recommended in the

301.3 ALLOWABLE BEARING PRESSURES
approved geotechnical engineering or engineering geology
report, cuts shall conform to the provisions of this section.
Allowable stresses and design formulas provided in this
In the absence of an approved geotechnical engineering
chapter shall be used with the allowable stress design load
report, these provisions may be waived (or minor cuts not
combinations specified in Section 203.4.
intended to support structures.

302.2.2 Slope. The slope of cut surfaces shall be no

steeper than is safe for the intended use and shall be no
steeper than 1 Wlit vertical in 2 units horizontal (50% slope)
unless a geotechnical engineering or an engineering
geology report, or both, stating that the site has been
investigated and giving an opinion that a cut at a steeper
slope will be stable and not create a hazard to public or
private property, is submitted and approved.
,
302.2.3 Existing footings or foundations which may be
affected by any excavation shall be underpinned adequately
or otherwise protected against settlement and shall be
protected against lateral movement.

302.2.4 Protection of adjoining property. The

requirement for protection of adjacent property and the
depth to which protection is required shall be defined by
prevailing law. Where not defined by law, the following
shall apply:

1. Any person making or causing an excavation to be

made to a depth of3.5 meters or less below the grade
shall protect the excavation so that the soil of
adjoining property will not cave in or settle, but shall
not be liable for the expense of underpinning or
extending the foundation of buildings on adjoining
properties where his excavation is not in excess of
3.5 meters in depth.

2. Before commencing the excavation, the person

making or causing the excavation to be made shall
notify in writing the owners of adjoining building not
less than 10 days before such excavation is to be

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

32 EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS
PA*
Toe of i 3 m max. : 7
Slipe
!< HI~ but O.6m ~
Cut or Fill
Slope
i =~=~ I
Natural or Finish
Grade
* Permit Area Boundary
FIGURE 302-1 SETBACK DIMENSIONS FOR CUT AND FILL SLOPES
made and that the adjoining building should be
protected.
3. The owners of the adjoining property shall be given
access to the excavation for the purpose of protecting
such adjoining buildings.
4. Any person making or causing an excavation to be
made exceeding 3.5 meters in depth below the grade
shall protect the excavation so that the adjoining soil
will not cave in or settle and shall extend the
foundation of any adjoining buildings below the
depth of 3.5meters below grade at his own expense.
The owner of adjoining buildings shall extend the
foundation of these buildings to a depth of3.5 meters
below grade at his own expense, as provided in the
preceding paragraph.
302.3 FILLS
302.3.1 General. Unless otherwise recommended in the
approved geotechnical engineering report, fills shall
conform to the provisions of this section. In the absence of
an approved geotechnical engineering report, these
provisions may be waived for minor fills not intended to
support structures.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
Top of
Slope P~*
i Hl5 but i
~ 0.60m !
. min. ant . 1 '/
1 1 ;
I
Natu\ral or Flms
.. h
Grade
B
Fills to be used to support the foundations of any building
or structure shall be placed in accordance with accepted
engineering practice. A geotechnical investigation report
and a report of satisfactory placement of fill, both
acceptable to the building official, shall be submitted when
required by the building official.
No fill or other surcharge loads shall be placed adjacent to
any building or structure unless such building or structure is
capable of withstanding the additional vertical and
horizontal loads caused by the fill or surcharge.
Fill slopes shall not be constructed on natural slopes steeper
than 1 unit vertical in 2 units horizontal (50% slope)
302.3.2 Preparation of Ground. The ground surface
shall be prepared to receive fill by removing vegetation,
non-complying fill, topsoil and other unsuitable materials,
and by scarifying to provide a bond with the new filL.
Where the natural slopes are steeper than 1 unit vertical in 5
units horizontal (20% slope) and the height is greater than
1.5 meters, the ground surface shall be prepared by
benching into sound bedrock or other competent material as
determined by the geotechnical engineer. The bench under
the toe of a fill on a slope steeper than 1 unit vertical in 5
units horizontal (20% slope) shall be at least 3 meters wide.
 EXCAVATION AND FILLS
The area beyond the toe of fill shall be sloped for sheet
overflow or a paved drain shall be provided. When fill is to
be placed over a cut, the bench under the toe of fill shall be
at least 3 meters wide but the cut shall be made before
placing the fill and acceptance by the geotechnical engineer
as a suitable foundation for filL
302.3.3 FiJI Material. Detrimental amounts of organic
material shall not be permitted in fills. Except as ~itted
by the geotechnical engineer, no rock or similar irreducible
material with a maximum dimension greater than 300 mm
shall be buried or placed in fills.
EXCEPTION:
The placement qf larger rock may be permitted when the
geotechnical engineer properly devises a method of
placement, and continuously inspects its placement and
approves the fill stability. The follOWing conditions shall
also apply:
1. Prior to issuance of the grading permit, potential
rock disposal areas shall be delineated on the
grading plan
2. Rock sizes greater than 300 mm ill maximum
dimension shall be 3 meters or more ,below grade,
measured vertically.
3. Rocks shall he placed so as to assure filling of all
voids with well-graded soil.
302.3.4 Compaction. All fills shall be compacted to a
minimum of 90 percent of maximum density as determined
by ASTM Standard D-698, or D-1551. In-place density
shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D-1556, D
2161, D-2922, D-3011 or equivalent.
302.3.5 Slope. The slope of fill surfaces shall be no
steeper than is safe for the intended use. Fill slopes shall be
no steeper than 1 unit vertical in 2 units horizontal (50%
slope) unless substantiating data justifying steeper slopes
are submitted and approved.
302.4 SETBACKS
302.4.1 General. Cut and fill slopes shall be set back
from site boundaries in accordance with this section unless
an alternate setback is approved by the building official (see
Section 302.4.4). Setback dimensions shall be horizontal
distances measured perpendicular to the site boundary.
Setback dimensions shall be as shown in Figure 302-1
302.4.2 Top of Cut Slope. The top of cut slopes shall not
be made nearer to a site boundary line than one fifth of the
vertical height of cut with a minimum of 0.6 meter and a
maximum of 3 meters. The setback may need to be
increased for any required interceptor drains.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
302.4.3 Toe of FiU Slope. The toe of fill slope shall be.
made not nearer to the site boundary line than one ~ the
height of the slope with a minimum of 0.6 meter and a
maximum of 6 meters. Where a fill slope is to blil localQd
near the site boundary and the adjacent off-site propertY is
developed, special precautions shall be incorporated in the
work as the building official deems necessary to protect the
adjoining property from damage as a result of such grading.
These precautions may include but are not limited to:
1. Additional setbacks.
2. Provision for retaining or slough walls.
3. Mechanical or chemical treatment of the fill slope
surface to minimize erosion.
4. Provisions for the control of surface waters.
302.4.4 Modification of Slope Location. The building
official may approve ,alternate setbacks.' The build~
official may require an investigation and recommendation
by a qualified geotechnical engineer to demonstrate that the
intent ofthis section has been satisfied. '
302.5 DRAINAGE AND TERRACING
301.7.1 General. Unless otherwise indicated on the
approved grading plan, drainage facilities and terracing
shall conform to the provisions of this section for (11t or fill
slopes steeper than 1 unit vertical in 3 units horizontal
(33.3% slope).
302.3.2 Terrace. Terraces at least 2 meters in width sha'J.I
be established at not more than 10 meters vertical intervals
on all cut or fill slopes to control surface drainage and
debris except that where only one terrace is required, it
shall be at midheight. For cut or fill slopes greater than 20
meters and up to 40 meters in vertical height, one terrace at
approximately midheight shall be 4 meters in width.
Terrace widths and spacing for cut and fill slopes greater
than 40 meters in height shall be designed by the civil
engineer and approved by the building official. Suitable
access shall be provided to permit proper cleaning and
maintenance.
Swales or ditches on terraces shall have a minimum
gradient of 5 percent and must be paved with reinforced
concrete not less than 75 mm in thickness or an approved
equal paving. They shall have a minimum depth at the
deepest point of 0.3 meter and a minimum paved width of
1.5 meters.
A single run of swale or ditch shall not collect runoff from a
tributary area exceeding 1,000 m2 (projected area) without
discharging into a down drain.
3-4 EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS
302.5.3 Subsurface Drainage. Cut and fill slopes shall
be provided with subsurface drainage as necessary for
stability.
302.5.4 Disposal. All drainage facilities shall be
designed to carry waters to the nearest practicable drainage
way approved by the building official or other appropriate
jurisdiction as a safe place to deposit such waters. Erosion
of ground in the area of discharge shall be prevented by
installatio~ of non-erosive down drains or other devices.
Building pads shall have a drainage gradient of 2 percent
toward approved drainage facilities, unless waived by the
building official.
EXCEPTION:
The gradient from the building pad may be 1 percent if all
For the purposes of this chapter, the definition and
of the following conditions exist throughout the permit
classification of soil materials for use in Table 304-1 shall
area:
be according to ASTM D-2487.
1. No proposed fills are greater thall 3 meters in
maximum depth.
2. No proposed finish cut or fill slope faces have a
vertical height in excess of 3 meters.
3. No existing slope faces steeper than 1 unit vertical in
10 units horizontal (10% slope) have a vertical
height in excess of 3 meters.
302.5.5 Interceptor Drains. Paved interceptor drains
shall be installed along the top of all cut slopes where the
tributary drainage area above slopes toward the cut and has
a drainage path greater than 12 meters measured
horizontally. Interceptor drains shall be paved with. a
minimum of 7';>, mm of concrete or gunite and reinforced.
They shall have a minimum depth of 300 mm and a
minimum paved width of 750 mm measured horizontally
across the drain. The slope of drain shall be approved by
the building official.
302.6 EROSION CONTROL
302.6.1 Slopes. The faces of cut and fill slopes shall be
prepared and maintained to control against erosion. This
control may consist of effective planting. The protection for
the slopes shall be installed as soon as practicable and prior
to calling for final approval. Where cut slopes are not
subject to erosion due to the erosion-resistant character of
the materials. such protection may be omitted.
302.6.2 Other Devices. Where necessary, chec\<: dams,
cribbing, riprap or other devices or methods shall be
employed to control erosion and provide safety.
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
SECTION 303 - FOUNDATION
INVESTIGATION
303.1 GENERAL
Foundation investigation shall be conducted at each
huilding site when required by the building official.
The building official may require that the interpretation and
evaluation of the results of the foundation investigation be
made by a registered civil engineer experienced and
knowledgeable in the field ofgeotechnical engineering.
303.2 SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Soil classification shall be based on observation and any
necessary tests of the materials disclosed by borings or
excavations made in appropriate locations. Additional
studies may be necessary to evaluate soil strength, the effect
of moisture vanatlon on soil-bearing capacity,
compressibility, liquefaction and expansiveness.
303.3 LIQUEFACTION STUDY
The building official may require a geotechnical evaluation
in accordance with Section 303.6 when, during the course
of the foundation investigation, all of the following
conditions are discovered:
1. Shallow ground water, 15 meters or less.
2. Unconsolidated saturated sandy alluvium.
3. Seismic Zone 4.
EXCEPTION:
The bUilding official may waive this evaluation upon receipt
ofwritten opi11ion ofa qualified geotechnical engineer that
liquefaction is llOt probable.
303.4 EXPANSIVE SOIL
When the expansive characteristics of a soil are to be
determined, the procedures shall be in' accordance with
ASTM D-4546 or D-4829 and the soil shall be classified
according to Table 303-1. Foundations for structures resting
on soils with an expansion index greater than 20 shall
require special design consideration. If the soil expansion
index varies with depth, the variation is to be included in
 FOUNDATION fNVESTIOATION

the engineering analysis of the expansive soil effect upon estimation of differential settlement, lateral movement or
the structure. reduction in foundation soil-bearing capacity, and discuss
mitigating measures. Such measures shall be given
Table 303-1 Classification of Expansive s oil consideration in the design of the building and may include,
Expansion Index Potential Expansion but are not limited to, ground stabilization, selection of
appropriate foundation type and depths, selection of
0- 20 Very Low appropriate structural systems to accommodate anticipated
displacements, or any combination of these measures.
21 - 50
.....- - 1 -____..
Low
f--
51 - 90 Medium The potential for liquefaction and soil strength loss shall be
I
.. evaluated for a site peak ground acceleration that, as a
91 - 130 High minimum, conforms to the probability of exceedance
specified in Section 208.6.2. Peak ground acceleration may
Above 130 Very High
be determined based on a site-specific study taking into
account soil amplification effects.

303.5 REPORTS In the absence of such a study, peak ground acceleration

may be assumed equal to the seismic zone factor in Table
The soil classification and design-bearing capacity shall be 208-3.
shown on the plans, unless the foundation conforms to
Table 305-1. The building official may require submission
of a written report of the investigation, which shall include, 303.7 ADJACENT LOADS
but need not be limited to, the following information:
Where footings are placed at varying elevations, the effect
1. A plot is showing the location of all test borings of adjacent loads shall be included in the foundation design.
and/or excavations.

2. Descriptions and classifications of the materials 303.8 DRAINAGE

encountered.
Provisions shall be made for the control and drainage of
3. Elevation ofthe water table, if encountered. surface water around buildings. (See also Section 305.5.5.)

4. Recommendations for foundation type and design

criteria, including bearing capacity, provisions to
mitigate the effects of expansive soils, provisions to
mitigate the effects of liquefaction and soil strength,
and the effects of adjacent loads.

5. Expected total and differential settlement.

When expansive soils are present, the building official may

require that special provisions be made in the foundation
design and construction to safeguard against damage due to
this expansiveness. The building official may require a
special investigation and report to provide these design and
construction criteria.

303.6 LIQUEFACTION POTENTIAL AND

SOIL STRENGTH LOSS

When required by Section 303.3, the potential for soil

liquefaction and soil strength loss during earthquakes shall
be evaluated during the geotechnical investigation. The
geotechnical evaluation shall assess potential consequences
of any liquefaction and soil strength loss, including

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

3-6 EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS

SECTION 304 - ALLOWABLE

FOUNDATION AND LATERAL
PRESSIJRES

The allowable foundation and lateral pressures shall not

exceed the values let forth in Table 304-1 unless data to
substantiate the use of higher values are submitted. Table
304-1 may be used for design of foundations on rock or
non-expansive soil for buildings that do not exceed three
stories in height or for structures that have continuous
footings having a load of less than 30 kN/m and isolated
footings with loads ofless than 250 kN.

Allowable bearing pressures provided in Table 304-1 shall

be used with the allowable stress design load combinations
specified in Section 203.4.

Table 304-1 Allowable Foundation and Lateral Pressure

t Lateral
AUowable Bearing Lateral Sliding 1
2 Foundation Below Natural
Class of Materials
Pressure3 Grade4
6
(kPa) (kPalm of CoefficientS Resistance
depth) (kPa)

1. Massive Crystalline Bedrock 200 200 0.70 -

. ._..._

2. Sedimentary and Foliated Rock 100 60 0.35 - I

--_._.._.......

3. Sandy Graver and lor Gravel(GW & GP) 100 30 0.35 -

---- ----"--'-'~'-'-'----'-

4. Well-graded Sand, Poorly-graded Sand, Silty Sand,

Clayey Sand, Silty Gravel 'and Clayey Gravel (SW, 75 25 0.25 -
SP, SM, SC, GM and GC) - - - - - - - - - - 1-
5. Clay, Sandy Clay, Silty Clay and Clayey Silt (CL, ML, 7
MH, andCH)
50 15 - 7

1 Lateral bearing and lateral sliding resistance may be combined.
2 For soil classification OL, OH and PT (i.e., organic clays and
peat), a foundation investigation shall be required.
3 All values of allowable foundation pressure are for footings
having a minimum width of 300 mm and a minimum depth of 300
mm into natural grade. Except as in Footnote 7 below, increase
of 20 perce~ is allowed for each additional 300 mm of width
and/or depth to a maximum value of three times the designated
value.
4 The amount of the designated value may be increased for
each additional 300 mm of depth to a maximum of 15 times
the designated value. Isolated poles for uses such as
flagpoles or signs and poles used to support buildings
which are not adversely affected by a 12 mm motion at
ground surface due to short term lateral bearing values
equal to two times the tabulated values.
S Coefficient to be multiplied by the dead load.
6 Lateral sliding resistance value to be multiplied by the
contact area. In no case shall the lateral sliding resistance
exceed one half the dead load.
7 No increase for width is allowed.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 FOOTINGS 37

SECTION 305 - FOOTINGS 305.3 BEARING WALLS

Bearing walls shall be supported on masonry or concrete

foundations or piles or other approved foundation system
305.1 GENERAL that shall be of sufficient size to support all loads.
Footings and foundations shall be constructed of masonry, Where a design is not provided, the minimum foundation
concrete or treated wood in conformance with Chapter 4,6 requirements for stud bearing walls shall be as set forth in
and 7. Footings of concrete and masonry shall be of solid Table 305-1, unless ~xpansive soils of a severity to cause
material. Foundations supporting wood shall extend at least differential movement are known to exist.
150 mm above the adjacent finish grade. Footings shall
have a minimum depth as indicated in Table 305-1, unless EXCEPTIONS:
another depth is recommended by a foundation
investigation. 1. A one-story wood or metal-frame bUilding not used
for human occupancy and not over -10 m:' il1 floor
The provisions of this section do not apply to building and area may be cOllstmcted with walls supported all a
foundation systems in those areas subject to scour and wood foundation plate when approved by the
water pressure by wind and wave action. Buildings and bUilding official.
foundations subject to such loads shall be designed in
accordance with approved national standards. 2. The support ofbuildings by posts embedded in earth
shall be designed as specified in Section 305.7.
Wood posts or poles embedded in earth ,shall be
TABLE 305-1 - Foundations for Stud Bearing pressure treated with an approved presenJative. Steel
Walls - Minimum Requirements 1,2,3 posts or poles shall be protected as specified ;n
Number of Thickness of Depth Sectioll 306.10.
Width Thickness DeID,,'
Floors Foundation Wall
Supported of of Undisturbed
(mm) Ground
by'be Footing Footing
Foundations Concrete Unit (mm) (mm) Surface 305.4 STEPPED FOUNDATIONS
Masonry <mm)

1 150 150 300 150 300 Foundations for all buildings where the surface of the
ground slopes more than 1 unit vertical in 10 units
2 200 200 375 175 450 horizontal (10010 slope) shall be level or shall be stepped so
_._._... that both top and bottom of such foundation are level.
3 250 250 450 200 600
1 Where unusual conditions are found, footings and foundations
shall be as required in Section 305.1. 305.5 FOOTINGS ON OR ADJACENT TO
2 The ground under the floor may be excavated to the elevation of SLOPES
the top of the footing.
S Foundation may support a roof in addition to the stipulated
number of floors. Foundations supporting roofs only shall be as 305.5.1 Scope. The placement ofbuildings and structures
required for supporting one floor. on or adjacent to slopes steeper than 1 unit vertical in 3
units horizontal (33.3% slope) shall be in accordance with
this section.
305.2 FOOTING DESIGN
305.5.1 Building clearance from ascending slopes. In
Except for special provisions of Section 307 covering the general, buildings below slopes shall be set a sufficient
design of piles, all portions of footings shall be designed in distance from the slope to provide protection from slope
accordance with the structural provisions of this code and drainage, erosion and shallow failures. Except as provided
shall be designed to minimize differential settlement when for in Section 305.5.6 and Figure 305-1, the following
necessary and.the effects of expansive soils when present criteria will be assumed to provide this protection. Where
the existing slope is steeper than 1 unit vertical in 1 unit
Slab:-an-grade and mat-type footings for buildings located horizontal (100% slope), the toe of the slope shall be
on expansive soils may b~ designed in accordance with the assumed to be at the intersection of a horizontal plane
geotechnical recorrunendation as approved by the building drawn from the top of the foundation and a plane drawn
officiaL tangent to the slope at an angle of 45 degrees to the
horizontal. Where a retaining wall is constructed at the toe

Nationai Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

3-8 EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS

Face of Fooling ~ ...->:

I

: /'><....",
T('P of Slope .Y '-.''
Face of Structure
i IIi:! but
:< nct"d not -,
~i

~: C',.Cl'l'U

~ ~ 4.')11l ma\. I IF, hut nl'.:d n.)[

e:w.:eu I~ m

FIGURE 305-1 SETBACK DIMENSIONS FOR BUILDING CLEARANCE FROM SLOPES

of the slope, the height of the slope shall be measured from of slope. slope gradient load intensifY and erosion
the top of the wall to the top of the slope. characteristics of slope material.

305.5.3 Footing setb2ck from descending slope surface.
Footings on or adjacent to slope surfaces shall be founded
intfinn material with an embedment and setback from the
slope surface sufficient to provide vertical and lateral
support for the footing without detrimental settlement.
Except as provided for in Section 305S6 and Figure 305-1,
the following setback is deemed adequate to meet the
criteria, Where the slope is steeper than ! unit vertical in I
unit horizontal (100% slope), the required setback shall be
measured from an imaginary plane 45 degrees to the
horizontal, projected upward from the toe of the slope.
305.5.4 Pools. The setback between pools rebrulated by
this code and slopes shall be equal to one half the building
footing setback distance required by this section. That
portio~ of the pool wall within a horizontal distance of 2
meters from the top of the slope shall be capable of
supporting the water in the pool without soil support.
305.6 FOV~DATION PLATES OR SILLS
Wood plates or sills shall be bolted to the toundatlOll or
tounda.ion wall Steel holts with a minimum nominai
diameter l,f 11 mm shall be USt'd in Sci'>mic Zone 1 Stet;
bolts with a minimum nomma! diameter of If, mm shall h,
used in Se!!'.mic lone 4. Bolts shaH be embedded at lea< i
180 mm into the concrete or masonry and shaH he ;,pacc:l
not more than 2 meters aparr. There ~hall hi:' a minimum \,'
t\110 bolts per piece with one bolt located Pot more than" Ii:
mm or less than "even bolt diameters from each end of tlw
piece A properly sized nut and ~\asher "hall be tightened
on each holt 10 the plate. Foundation plates and sills shall bt~
the kind of wood specified in Cbapt~r 6
305.7 DESIGNS l~!\1PL()\'ING LATERAL
BEARP\G

305.5.5 Foundation elevation. On graded sires. the top
of any exterior foundation shaH extend above the elevation
of the street gutter at point of discharge or the inlet of an
approved drainage device a minimum of 300 mm plus 2
percent. The building official may approve aliernate
elevations, provided it can be demonstrated that required
drainage to the point of discharge and away from the
stmcture is provided at all locations on the site
305.5.6 Alternate setback and clearance. The building
official may approve alternate setbacks and clearances. The
building official may require an investigation and
recommendation of a qualified engineer to demonstrate that
the intent of this section has been satisfied Such an
investigation shall include consideration of materiaL heigh:
305.7.1 General Construc1ion employing posts or poles
as columns embedded in earth or embedded in concrel":
footings in the earth rna\' be used In resist both axial and
lateral loads. The depth to resist lateral load~ shall be
determined by means of the design criteria e~tahli:"hed
herein or other methods approved by the building otTicial.
305.7.2 Oesign C"iteria
305.7.2.1 l'onconstrained. The following f,1nTlllia
may be used in determining the depth \)f embedment
required to resist later,,! loads where no constraint i"
provided at the ground surface. such a~ rigid Hoor or ngid
ground surface pavement

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 FOOTINGS 3-9

305_7.4.1 The frictional resistance for retaining walls

(305-1) and slabs on silts and clays shall be limited to one half of
the normal force imposed on the soil by the weight of the
footing or slab.

305.7.4.1 Posts embedded in earth shall not be used to

Where:
provide lateral support for structural or nonstructural
2.3 P materials such as plaster, masonry or concrete unless
.t4 = bracing is provided that develops the limited deflection
SIb
required.
h diameter of round post or footing or diagonal
dimension of square post or footing, meters.
d depth of embedment in earth in meters but not
over 3.5 meters for purpose of computing 305.8 GRILLAGE FOOTINGS
lateral pressure.
h distance in meters from ground surface to point When grillage footings of structural steel shapes are used
of application of"P." on soils, they shall be completely embedded in concrete.
p applied lateral force in kilonewtons . Concrete cover shall be at least 150 mm on the bottom and
allowable lateral soil-bearing pressure as set at least 100 mm at all other points.
forth in Table 304-1 based on a depth of one
third the depth of embedment (kPa),
allowable lateral soil-bearing pressure as set 305.9 BLEACHER FOOTINGS
forth in Table 304-1 based on a depth equal to
the depth of embedment (kPa). Footings for open-air seating facilities shall comply with
Chapter 3.
305.7.2.2 Constrained. The following formula may
be used to determine the depth of embedment required to EXCEPTIONS:
resist lateral loads where constraint is provided at the
ground surface, such as a rigid floor or pavement Temporary open-air portable bleachers may be supported
upon wood sills or steel plates placed directly upon the
ground suiface, provided soil pres:'1.l1'e does not exceed 50
(305-2) kPa.

305.7.2.3 Vertical load. The resistance to vertical

loads is determined by the allowable soil-bearing pressure
set forth in Table 304-1.

305.7.3 Backfill. The backfill in the annular space

around column not embedded in poured footings shall be by
one of the following methods:

I. Backfill shall be of concrete with an ultimate

strenhrth of 15 MPa at 28 days. The hole shall not be
less than 100 mm larger than the diameter of the
column at its bottom or 100 mm larger than the
diagonal dimension of a square or rectangular
column.

2. Backfill shall be of clean sand. The sand shall be

thoroughly compacted by tamping in layers not more
than 200 mm in depth.

305.7.4 Limitations. The design procedure outlined in

this section shall be subject to the following limitations:

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

310 EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS
SECTION 306 - PILES - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
306.1 GENERAL
Pile foundations shall be designed and installed on the basis
of a foundation investigation as defined in Section 303
where required by the building official.
The investigation and report provisions of Section 303 shall
be expanded to include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Recommended pile types and installed capacities.
2. Driving criteria.
3. Installation procedures.
4. Field inspection and reporting procedures (to include
procedures for verification of the installed bearing
capacity where required).
5. Pile load test requirements.
The use of piles not specifically mentioned in this chapter
shall be permitted, subject to the approval of the building
~fficial upon submission of acceptable test data,
calculations or other information relating to the properties
and load-carrying capacities of such piles.
306.2 INTERCONNECTION
Individual pile caps and caissons of every structure
subjected to seismic forces shall be interconnected by ties.
Such ties shall be capable of resisting, in tension or
compression, a,minimum horizontal force equal to 10
percent of the largest column vertical load.
EXCEPTION:
Other approved methods may be used where it can be
demonstrated that eqUivalent restraint can be provided
306.3 DETERMINATION OF ALLOWABLE
LOADS
The allowable axial and lateral loads on piles shall be
determined by an approved formula, by a foundation
investigation or by load tests. Static axial compressive pile
load test shall be in accordance with ASTM Standard D
1143, and lateral load testing of piles shall conform with
ASTM Standard D3966. Dynamic pile tests shall be in
accordance with ASTM Standard D-4945. Static axial
tensile load testing to determine the uplift capacity of pile
soil systems shall be in accordance with ASTM Standard
D-3689.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
306.4 STATIC LOAD TEST
Static axial compressive pile load test shall be in
accordance with ASTM Standard D-1143. The building
official may require that the test be conducted under the
supervision of a registered civil engineer experienced and
knowledgeable in the practice of static pile load testing
When the allowable axial compressive load of a single pile
is determined by a static load test, one of the following
methods shall be used:
Method 1. It shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield point
under test load. The yield point shall be defined as that
point at which an increase in load produces a
disproportionate increase in settlement.
Method 2. It shall not exceed one half of the load, which
causes a net settlement, after deducting rebound, of
0.03mm/kN of test load, which has been applied for a
period of at least 24 hours.
Method 3. It shall not exceed one half of that load under
which, during a 40-hour period of continuous load
application, no additional settlement takes place.
306.5 DYNAMIC LOAD TEST
High-strain dynamic load test may be used to determine the
bearing capacity of piles, in accordance with ASTM
Standard D-4945. The building official may require that
the test be conducted by a registered civil engineer
experienced and knowledgeable in the practice of dynamic
load testing.
306.6 COLUMN ACTION
All piles standing unbraced in air, water or material not
capable of lateral support shall conform with the applicable
column formula as specified in this code. Such piles driven
into firm ground may be considered fixed and laterally
supported at 1.5 meters below the ground surface and in
soft material at 3 meters the ground surface unless
otherwise prescribed by the building official after a
foundation investigation by an approved agency.
306.7 GROUP ACTION
Consideration shall be given to the reduction of allowable
pile load when piles are placed in groups.
Where soil conditions make such load reductions advisable
or necessary, the allowable axial load determined for a
single pile shall be reduced by any rational method or
formula approv\d by the building official.
 PILES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3-11

306.8 PILES IN SUBSIDING AREAS 306.12 USE OF HIGHER ALLOWABLE PILE

Where piles are driven through subsiding fills or other
subsiding strata and derive support from underlying firmer
materials., consideration shall be given to the downward
frictional forces, which may be imposed on the piles by the
subsiding upper strata.
Where the influence of subsiding fills is considered as
imposing loads on the pile, the allowable stresses specified
in this chapter may be increased if satisfactory
substantiating data are submitted.
STRESSES
Allowable compressive stresses greater than those specified
in Section 307 shall be permitted when substantiating data
justifying such higher stresses ,are submitted to and
approved by the building official. Such substantiating data
shall be included in the foundation investigation report in
accordance with Section 306.1.

306.9 JETTING

Jetting shall not be used except where and as specifically

permitted by the building officiaL When used, jetting shall
be carried out in such a manner that the carrying capacity of
existing piles and structures shall not be impaired. After
withdrawal of the jet, piles shall be driven down until the
required resistance is obtained.

306.10 PROTECTION OF PILE MATERIALS

Where the boring records of site conditions indicate

possible deleterious action on pile materials because of soil
constituents, changing water levels or other factors, such
materials shall be adequately protected by methods or
processes approved by the geotechnical engineer.

The effectiveness of such methods or processes for the

particular purpose shall have been thoroughly established
by satisfactory service records or other evidence, which
demonstrates the effectiveness of such protective measures.

306.11 ALLOWABLE LOADS

The allowable loads based on soil conditions shall be

established in accordance with Section 306.

EXCEPTION:

Any uncased cast-in-place pile may be assumed to develop

a frictional resistance equal to one sixth of the bearing
value of the soil material at minimum depth as set forth in
Table 305-1 but not to exceed 25 kPa unless a greater value
is allowed by the building official qfter a foundation
investigation as specified in Section 303 is submitted
Frictional resistance and bearing resistance shall not be
assumed to act Simultaneously unless recommended after a
foundation investigation as specified in Section 303.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

312 EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS
SECTION 307 - PILES - SPECIFIC
REQUIREMENTS
307.1 ROUND WOOD PILES
307.1.1 Material. Except where untreated piles are
permitted, wood piles shall be pressure treated. Untreated
piles may be used only when it has been established that the
cutoff will be below lowest groundwater level assumed to
exist during the life ofthe structure.
307.1.2 Allowable stresses. The allowable unit stresses
for round woodpiles shall not exceed those set forth in
Chapter 6.
The allowable values listed in, for compression parallel to
the grain at extr~e fiber in bending are based on load
sharing as oc~urs an a pile cluster. For piles which support
their own specific load, a safety factor of 1.25 shall be
applied to compression parallel to the grain values and 1.30
to extreme fiber in bending values.
307.2 UNCASED CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE PILES
307.2.1 Material. Concrete piles cast in place against
earth in drilled or bored holes shall be made in such a
manner as to ensure the exclusion of any foreign matter and
to secure a full-sized shaft.
The length of such pile shall be limited to not more than 30
times the average .diameter. Concrete shall have a specified
compressive strengthf'c of not less than 17.5 MFa.
EXCEPTION:
The length of pile may exceed 30 times the diameter
provided the design and installation of the pile foundation
is in accordance with an approved foundation investigation
report.
307.2.2 Allowable stresses. The allowable compressive
stress in the concrete shall not exceed 0.33f'c. The
allowable compressive stress of reinforcement shall not
exceed 34 percent of the yield strength of the steel or 175
MFa.
307.3 METAL-CASED CONCRETE PILES
307.3.1 Material Concrete used in metal-cased concrete
piles shall have a specified compressive strength f'c of not
less than 17.5 MFa.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
307.3.2 Installation. Every metal casing for a concrete
pile shall have a sealed tip with a diameter of not less than
200 mm.
Concrete piles cast in place in metal shells shall have shells
driven for their full length in contact with the surrounding
soil and left permanently in place. The shells shall be
sufficiently strong to resist collapSe and sufficiently
watertight to exclude water and foreign material during the
placing of concrete.
Piles shall be driven in such order and with such spacing as
to ensure against distortion of or injury to piles already in
place. No pile shall be driven within tour and one-half
average pile diameters of a pile filled with concrete less
than 24 hours old unless approved by the geotechnical
engineer.
307.3.3 Allowable stresses. Allowable stresses shall not
exceed the values specified in Section 307.2.2, except that
the allowable concrete stress may be increased to a
maximum value of O.4Q{'c for that portion of the pile
meeting the following conditions:
1. The thickness of the metal casing is not less than 1.7
mm (No. 14 carbon sheet steel gage).
2. The casing is seamless or is provided with seams of
equal strength and is of a configuration that will
provide confinement to the cast-in-place concrete.
3. The specified compressive strength f'c shall not
exceed 35 MFa and the ratio of steel minimum
specified yield strength Fy to concrete specified
compressive strengthf'c shall not be less than 6.
4 The pile diameter is not greater than 400 mm.
307.4 PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
307.4.1 Materials. Precast concrete piles shall have a
specified c~mpressive strengthf'c of not less than 20 MFa,
and shall develop a compressive strength of not less than 20
MFa before driving.
307.4.2 Reinforcement ties. The longitudinal
reinforcement in driven precast concrete piles shall be
laterally tied with steel ties or wire spirals. Ties and spirals
shall not be spaced more than 75 mm apart, center to center,
for a distance of 600 mm from the ends and not more than
200 mm elsewhere. The gage of ties and spirals shall be as
follows:
1. For piles having a diameter of 400 mm or less, wire
shall not be smaller than 5.5 mm (No.5 B.W.gage).
 PILES SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
2. For piles, having a diameter of more than 400 mm
and less than 500 mm, wire shall not be smaller than
6 mm (No.4 B.W.gage).
3. For piles having a diameter of 500 mm and larger,
wire shall not be smaller than 6.5 mm
(No.3 B.W. gage).
307.4.3 Allowable stresses. Precast concrete piling shall
be designed to resist stresses induced by handling and
driving as well as by loads. The allowable stresses shall not
exceed the values specified in Section 307.2.2.
307.5 PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
PILES (PRETENSIONED)
307.5.1 Materials. Precast prestressed concrete piles
shall have a specified compressive strength Fe of not less
than 35 MPa and shall develop a compressive strength of
not less than 27 MPa before driving.
307.5.2 Reinforcement
307.5.2.1 Longitudinal reinforcement. The
longitudinal reinforcement shall be high-tensile seven-wire
strand conforming to ASTM Standards. Longitudinal
reinforcement shall be laterally tied with steel ties or wire
spirals. . When just!fied ill accordance with Section 306.12, the
307.5.2.2 Transverse reinforcement. Ties or spiral
. reinforcement shall not be spaced more than 75 mm apart,
center to center, for a distance of 600 mm from the ends
and not more than 200 mm elsewhere.
At each end of the pile, the first five ties or spirals shall be
spaced 25 mm center to center.
For piles having a diameter of 600 mm or less, wire shan
not be smaller than 5.5 mm (No.5 B. W. gage).
For piles having a diameter greater than 600 mm but less
than 900 mm, wire shall not be smaller than 6 mm
(No.4 B.W.gage).
For piles having a diameter greater than 900 mm, wire shall
not be smaller than 6 mm (No.3 B.W.gauge).
307.5.3 Allowable stresses. Precast prestressed piling
shall be designed to resist stresses induced by handling and
driving as well as by loads. The effective prestress in the
pile shall not be less than 2.5 MPa for piles up to 10 meters
in length, 4 MPa for piles up to 15 meters in length. and 5
MPa for piles greater than 15 meters in length.
Nationai Struct.ural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
313
The compressive stress in the concrete due to externallv
applied load shall not exceed: .
.fc = O.3~f'c - 0.27fpc (307-1 )
Where:
hc = effective prestress stress on the gross section.
Effective prestress shall be based on an assumed loss of200
MPa in the prestressing steeL The allowable stress in the
prestressing steel shall not e.xceed the values specified in
Section 418 5
307.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL PILES
307.6.1 Material. Structural steel piles, steel pipe piles
and fully welded steel piles fabricated from plates shall
conform to one of the material specifications listed in
Section 501.3.
307.6.2 Allowable stresses. The allowable axial stresses
shall not exceed 0.35 of the minimum specified yield
strength f~, or 85 MPa, whichever is less.
EXCEPTION:
allowable axial stress may be increased above 85 MPa and
O.35F>, but shall/WI exceed O.5F;.
307.6.3 Minimum dimensions. Sections of driven. H
piles shall comply with the following:
1. The flange projection shall not exceed 14 times the
minimum thickness of metal in either the tlange or
the web, and the flange widths shall not be less than
80 percent of the depth of the section.
2. The nominal depth in the direction of the web shall
not be less than 200 mm.
3. Flanges and webs shall have a minimum nominal
thickness oflO mm.
Sections of driven pipe piles shall have an outside diameter
of not less than 250 mm and a minimum thickness of not
less than 6 mm.
307.7 CONCRETE-FrLLED STEEL PIPE
PILES
307.7.1 Material The steel pipe of concrete-filled steel
pipe piles shall conform to one of the material
specifications listed in Section 501.3. The concrete in
 3-14 EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS
concrete-filled steel pipe piles shall have a specified
compressive strengthf'c of not less than 17.5 MPa.
307.7.2 Allowable stresses. The allowable axial stresses
shall not exceed 0.35 of the minimum specified yield
strength ~. of the steel plus 0.33 of the specified
compressive strength f'c of concrete, provided Fy shall not
be assumed greater than 250 MPa for computational
purposes.
EXCEPTION:
When justified in accordance with Section 306.12. the
allowable stresses may be increased to 0.50 Fy
307.7.3 Minimum dimensions. Driven piles of unifurm
section shall have a nominal outside diameter of not less
than 200 mm.
II
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
SECTION 308 - FOUNDATION
CONSTRUCTION-SEISMIC ZONE 4
308.1 GENERAL
In Seismic Zones 4, the further requirements of this section
shall apply to the design and construction of foundations,
foundation components and the connection of
superstructure elements thereto. See Section 421.9 for
additional requirements for structural concrete foundations
resisting seismic forces.
308.2 SOIL CAPACITY
The foundation shall be capable of transmitting the design
base shear and overturning forces prescribed in Chapter 2
from the structure into the supporting soil. The short term
dynamic nature of the loads may be taken into account in
establishing the soil properties.
308.3 SUPERSTRUCTURE TO FOUNDATION
CONNECTION.
The connection of superstructure elements to the foundation
shall be adequate to transmit to the foundation the forces for
which the elements were required to be designed.
308.4 FOUNDATION-SOIL INTERFACE.
For regular buildings, the force F t as provided in Section
208.5.5 may be omitted when determining the overturning
moment to be resisted at the foundation-soil interface.
308.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PILES
AND CAISSONS.
30S.S.1 General. Piles. caissons and caps shall be
designed according to the provisions of Chapter 2,
including the effects of lateral displacements. Special
detailing requirements as described in Section 308.5.2 shall
apply for a length of piles equal to 120 percent of the
flexural length. Flexural length shall be considered as a
length of pile from the first point of zero lateral deflection
to the underside of the pile cap or grade beam.
30S.S.2 Steel Piles, Nonprestressed Concrete Piles and
Prestressed Concrete Piles.
30S.S.2.1 Steel piles. Piles shall conform to width
thickness ratios of stiffened, unstiffened and tubular
compression elements as specified in Chapter 5.
d
 FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION - SEISMIC ZONE 4
3-15

308.5.2.2 Nonprestressed concrete piles. Piles shall

have transverse reinforcement meeting the requirements of
Section 421.5

EXCEPTION:

Transverse reinforcement need not exceed the amount

determined by Equation 421-2 for spiral and circular hoop
reinforcement, or by Equation 421-4 for rectangular hoop
reinforcement.

308.5.2.3 Prestressed concrete piles. Piles shall

have a minimum volumetric ratio of spiral reinforcement no
less than 0.021 for 350 mm square and smaller piles, and
0.012 for 600 mm square and larger piles unless a smaller
value can be justified by rational analysis. lnterpolation
may be used between the specified ratios for intermediate
sizes.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 CHAPTER 4

CONCRETE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 401 - GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 4-1

401. 1 Scope ............................................... 2-1

SECTION 402 - DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................. 4-1

SECTION 403 - SPECIFICATIONS FOR TESTS AND MATERIALS ................................ 4-4

403.1 Notation .......................................... 4-4 403.5 Water .................................................. 4-5

403.2 Tests of Materials ........................... 4-4 403.6 Steel Reinforcement ........................... 4-5

403.3 Cement ................................................. 4-4 403.7 Adnrixtures ......................................... 4-7

403.4 Aggregates ...................................... 4-4 403.8 Storage of Materials ............................ 4-7

SECTION 404 - DURABILITY REQlllREMENTS .................................................................. 4-9

404.1 Notation .......................................... 4-9 404.4 Sulfate Exposure................................ 4-9

404.2 Water-Cementitious Materials 404.5 Corrosion Protection of

Ratio ............................................... 4-9 Reinforcement... ...... ........................ 4-9

404.3 Special Exposure Conditions............. 4-9

SECTION 405 - CONCRETE, QUALITY, MIXING AND PLACING ................................ 4-11

405.1 Notations ... ...... ... .....................

~ ~ ~ ~~. 4-11 405.7 Evaluation and Acceptance of

405.2 General ..... ... ............ . .....................

~ 4-11 Concrete ........................................ 4-13

405.3 Selection of Concrete 405.8 Preparation of Equipment and

Proportions ................................. 4-11 P1ace ofDeposiL.......................... 4-14

405.4 Proportioning on the Basis of 405.9 Mixing ......... .,. .......... ....................
~ ~ 4-14

Field Experience and Trial 405.10 Conveying ............ " ................ "' ........
~ ~ 4-15

Mixtures, or both ........................ 4-11 405.11 Depositing .... ...............................

~ 4-15

405.5 Proportioning without field 405.12 Curing ............. _.. . ............... , ..........
~ ~ 4-15

experience or trial mixtures ........... 4-13 405.13 Hot Weather Requirements ........... 4-15

405.6 Average Strength Reduction ............ 4-13

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4-ii

SECTION 406 - FORMWORK, EMBEDDED PIPES AND CONSTRUCTION

JOINTS ............................................................................................................ 4-16

406.1 Design of Formwork .................... 4-16 406.3 Conduits and Pipes Embedded ........ 4-16

406.2 Removal of Forms, Shores and 406.4 Construction Joints .......... ................ 4- I 7

Reshoring...................................... 4-16

SECTION 407 - DETAILS OF REINFORCEMENT ............................................................. 4-18

407. I Notations ........... .. .....................

~ ~ ~. ~ 4-18 407.9 Special Reinforcement Details for

407.2 Standard Hooks ...... ....................

~ ~ ~ 4-18 Colulnns........... ............................. 4~21

407.3 Minimum Bend Diameters .............. 4-18 407.10 Connections..................................... 4~21

407.4 Bending of Reinforcement... ............ 4-18 407.11 Lateral Reinforcement for

407.5 Surface Conditions of Compression Members ................. 4-21

Reinforcement. .............................. 4-18 407.12 Lateral Reinforcement foe

407.6 Placing Reinforcement .................... 4-18 Flexural Members. ........................ 4-22

407.7 Spacing Limits for

Reinforcement. .............................. 4-19 407.13 Shrinkage and Temperature

,407.8 Concrete Protection for ReinforcemenL............................. 4-22

Reinforcement * 4-20 407.14 Requirements for Structural

Integrity......................................... 4-23

<'Ii SECTION 408 - ANALYSIS AND DESIGN ........................................................................... 4-24

408.1 Notations .................................. ....... 4-24 408.6 Modulus of Elasticity....................... 4-25

408.2 Design Methods............................... 4-24 408.7 Stiffness........................................... 4-25

408.3 Loading ........................................... 4-24 408.8 Span Length .............................. ...... 4-25

iii
408.4 Methods of Analysis ... .... ...... ........ 4-24 408.9 Columns .... ..... ......... ..... ........... ........ 4-26

408.5 Redistribution of Negative 408.10 Arrangement of Live Load .............. 4-26

Moments in Continuous 408.11 T-Beam Construction ...................... 4-26

NonPrestressed Flexural 408.12 Joist Construction ............................ 4-26

Members ........ ....... ... ..... ............ .... 4-25 408.13 Separate Floor Finish....................... 4-27

SECTION 409 - STRENGTH AND SERVICEABILITY REQlJIREMENTS....................... 4-27

409.1 Notations ........... ... .... ............... ........ 4-27 409.5 Design Strength for

409.2 General............................................ 4-28 Reinforcement... . .. ... .. . ... ... ... ... 4-29

409.3 Required Strength............................ 4-28 409.6 Control of Deflections ..................... 4-30

409.4 Design Strength ............................... 4-29

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 Iii

SECTION 410 - FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOADS................................................................... 4-33

410.1 Notations ......................................... 4-33 410.10 Limits for reinforcement of

410.2 Scope ............................................... 4-34 Compression Members ................. 4-36
410.3 Design Assumptions ........................ 4-34 410. J 1 Slenderness Effects in
410.4 General Principles and Compression Members ................. 4-37
Requirements ................................ 4-34
410.5 Distance between Lateral
Supports of Flexural Members ...... 4-35 410.12 Magnified Moments-General ........... 4-37
410.13 Magnified Moments-Non-sway
Frames .......................................... 4-37
410.6 Minimum Reinforcement of 410.14 Magnified Moments-Sway
Flexural Members ......................... 4-35 Frmnes .......................................... 4-38
410.7 Distribution of Flexural 410.15 Axially Loaded Members
Reinforcement in Beams and Supporting Slab System ................ 4-39
One-way Slabs .............................. 4-35 410.16 Transmission of Column Loads
410.8 Deep Flexural Members .................. 4-36 through Floor System .................... 4-39
410.9 Design Dimensions for 410.17 Composite Compression
Compression Members ................. 4-36 Melnbers ....................................... 4-39
410.18 Bearing Strength .............................. 4-40

SECTION 411 - SHEAR AND TORSION ................................................................................. 4-41

411.1 Notations ......................................... 4-41 411.7 Design for Torsion ........................... 4-46
411.2 Shear Strength ................................. 4-42 411.8 Shear Friction .................................. 4-48
411.3 Lightweight Concrete ...................... 4-43 411.9 Special Provisions for Deep
411.4 Shear Strength Provided by Flexural Members ......................... 4-49
Concrete for Nonstressed 411.10 Special Provisions for Brackets
Members ....................................... 4-43 and Corbels ................................... 4-49
411.5 Shear Strength Provided by 411.11 Special Provisions for Walls ............ 4-50
Concrete for Prestressed 411.12 Transfer of Moments to Columns .... 4-51
Members ....................................... 4-44 411.13 Special Provisions for Slabs and
411.6 Shear Strength provided by Shear Footings ........................................ 4-51
Reinforcement. .............................. 4-44

SECTION 412 - DEVELOPMENT AND SPLICES OF REINFORCEMENT ...................... 4-54

412.1 Notations ......................................... 4-54 412.6 Development of Standard Hooks

412.2 Development of Reinforcement - in Tension ..................................... 4-56

General ......................................... 4-54 412.7 Mechanical Anchorage.................... 4-56

412.3 Development of Deformed Bars 412.8 Development of Welded

and Deformed Wire in Tension ..... 4-54 Deformed Wire Fabric in
412.4 Development of Deformed Bars Tension ......................................... 4-56

in Compression ............................. 4-55 412.9 Development of Welded Plain

412.5 Development ofBundled Bars......... 4-56 Wire Fabric in Tension ................. 4-57

412.10 Development of Prestressing

Strand.... ....... ..... ...... ......... ............. 4-57

NatIOnal Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4-iv

SECTION 413 -TWO-WAY SLAB SYSTEM ................................................. 4-61

413.1 Notation........................................... 4-61 413.5 Openings in Slab System ......... ........ 4-63

413.2 Scope.............. ................................. 4-62 413.6 Design Procedures........................... 4-63

413.3 Definitions....................................... 4-62 413.7 Direct Design Method ..................... 4-64

413.4 Slab Reinforcement ......................... 4-62 413.8 Equivalent Frame Method ..... ......... 4-66

SECTION .414- WALLS................................................................................................................. 4-68

414.1 NotatioIl ........................................... 4-68 414.6 Empirical design Method................. 4-69

414.2 Scope ............................................... 4-68 414.7 Non-Bearing Walls.......................... 4-69

414.3 General ............................................ 4-68 414.8 Wa11s as Grade Beams ..................... 4-69

414.4 Minimum Reinforcement ................ 4-68 414.9 Alternate Design of Slender Walls.. 4-69

414.5 Walls Designed as Compression

Members ........ ...... ..................... .... 4-68

SECTION 415- FOOTmGS .......................................................................................................... 4-71

415.1 Notation ........................................... 4-71 415.7 Development of Reinforcement in

415.2 Scope ............................................... 4-71 Footings ................................... ..... 4-72

415.3 Loads and Reactions........................ 4-71 415.8 Minimum Footing Depth ......... ........ 4-72

415.4 Footings Supporting Circular or 415.9 Transfer of Force at base of

Regular Polygon-Shaped Column, Wall or Reinforced

Columns or Pedestals.................... 4-71 Pedestal......................................... 4-72

415.5 Moment in Footings ........................ 4-71 4 I 5. to Sloped or Stepped Footings............. 4-73

415.6 Shearin Footings ............................. 4-71 415.11 Combined Footings and Mats .......... 4-73

415.12 Plain Concrete Pedestals and

Footings ................... ......... ......... 4-73

SECTION 416- PRECAST CONCRETE..................................................................................... 4-73

416.1 Notation ........................................... 4-73 416.7 Connection and Bearing Design ...... 4-74

416.2 Scope............................................... 4-73 416.8 Items Embedded After Concrete

416.3 General ............................................ 4-73 Placelnent ..................................... 4-75

416.4 Distribution of Forces Among 416.9 Marking and Identification .............. 4-72

Members ....................................... 4-73 416.10 Handling .......................................... 4-75

416.5 Member Design ............................... 4-74 416.11 Strength Evaluation of Precast

416.6 Structural Integrity .......................... 4-74 Construction ................................ -t.-75

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4-v

SECTION 417- COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS .................................. 4-76

417.1 Notation........................................... 4-76 417.5 Vertical Shear Strength .................... 4-76

4J 7.2 Scope............................................... 4-76 417.6 Horizontal Shear Strength ................ 4-76

417.3 General............................................ 4-76 417.7 Ties for Horizontal Shear................. 4-77

417.4 Shoring ............................................ 4-76

SECTION 418 - PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ........................................................................ 4-78

418.1 Notations ......................................... 4-78 418.12 Compression Members-Combined

418.2 Scope ............................................... 4-78 Flexure and Axial Loads ............... 4-82

418.3 General ............................................ 4-78 418.13 Slab Systems.................................... .4-82

418.4 Design Asswnptions ........................ 4-79 418.14 Post-tensioned Tendon Anchorage

418.5 Permissible Stresses in Concrete Zones ............................................ 4-82

Flexural Members ......................... 4-79 418.15 Design of Anchorage Zones for

418.6 Permissible Stress in Prestressing Mono-Strand or Single 16 mm

Tendons ........................................ 4-79 Diameter Bar Tendons .... :............. 4-84

418.7 Loss of Prestress .............................. 4-79 418.16 Design of Anchorage Zones for

418.8 Flexural Strength ............................. 4-80 Multi-Strand Tendons ................... 4-84

418.9 Limits for Reinforcement of 418.17 Corrosion protection for

Flexural Members ......................... 4-80 Unbonded Prestressing Tendons ... 4-84

418.10 Minimum Bonded Reinforcement ... 4-80 418.18 Post-tensioning Ducts ...................... 4-85

418.11 Statically Indeterminate 418.19 Grout for Bonded Prestressing

Structures ...................................... 4-81 Tendons ........................................ 4-85

418.20 Protection for Prestressing 418.22 Post-tensioning Anchorages and

Tendons ........................................ 4-85 Couplers ........................................ 4-86

418.21 Application and Measurement of 418.23 External Post-Tensioning................. 4-86

Prestressing Forces ....................... 4-85

SECTION 419- SHELLS AND FOLDED PLATE MEMBERS ................................................ 4-86

419.1 Notation............................... ............ 4-86 419.4 Design Strength of materials............ 4-87

419.2 Scope and DefInitions...................... 4-86 419.5 Shell Reinforcement ........................ 4-86

419.3 Analysis and Design .................... .... 4-86 419.6 Construction .................................... 4-86

SECTION 420- STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES ...................... 4-88

420.1 Notation........................................... 4-88 420.5 Loading Criteria......................... ..... 4-89

420.2 Strength Evaluation - General......... 4-88 420.6 Acceptance Criteria......................... 4-89

420.3 Determination of Required 420.7 Provisions for Lower Load

Dimensions and Material Rating........................................... 4-90

Properties...................................... 4-89 420.8 Safety ..................... ............... .......... 4-90

420.4 Load Test Procedure........................ 4-89

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4vl

SECTION 421- SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN ........................................ 4-90

421.1 Notation........................................... 4-90 421.8 Structural Diaphragms and

421.2 Definitions....................................... 4-91 Trusses ....................................... 4-101

421.3 General Requirements ...... ....... ........ 4-92 421.9 Foundations................................... 4-103

421.4 Flexural Members of Frames........... 4-95 421.10 Frame Members not

421.5 Special Moment Frame Proportioned to Resist Forces

Members Subjected to induced by Earthquake

Bending and Axial Load... ............ 4-96 Motions ...................................... 4-104

421.6 Joints of Special Moment 421.11 Requirements for Intennediate Moment

Frames................... ..... .................. 4-98 Frames, Seismic Zone 2 .. ....... .... 4-104

421.7 Special Reinforced Concrete

Structural Walls and Coupling

Beams ........................................... 4-99

SECTION 422- STRUCTURAL PLAIN CONCRETE............................................................. 4-106

f 422.1 Notation......................................... 4-106 422.7 Walls ............................................. 4-108

422.2 Scope............................................. 4-106 422.8 Footings......................................... 4-108

422.3 Limitations .................................... 4-106 422.9 Pedestals........... ............. ................ 4-109

422.4 Joints ............................................. 4-106 422.10 Precast Members ........................... 4-109

422.5 Design Method.............................. 4-107 422.11 Plain Concrete in Earthquake

422.6 Strength Design............................. 4-107 Resisting Structures .................... 4-109

'!i ~: SECTION 423- ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE .................................................................... 4-110

423.1 Service Load Design...................... 4-110

423.2 Strength Design ............................. 4-110

423.3 Strength of Anchors....................... 4-110

SECTION 424- ALTERN'ATE DESIGN METHOD................................................................. 4-112

424.1 Notation......................................... 4-112 424.6 Flexure........................................... 4-113

424.2 Scope............................................. 4-112 424.7 Compression Members with or

424.3 General .......................................... 4-112 without Flexure........................... 4-113

424.4 Permissible Service Load Stresses. 4-112

424.5 Development and Splices of 424.8 Shear and Torsion.......................... 4-114

Reinforcement...... .................... ... 4-112

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2-vii

SECTION 425- UNIFIED DESIGN PROVISIONS FOR REINFORCED AND

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE FLEXURAL AND
COMPRESSION MEMBERS.......................................................................... 4-116

425.1 Scope ...................................... 4-116 425.418.9 Limits for Reinforcement

425.408.5 Redistribution of Negative of Flexural Members ..... 4-117

Moments in Continuous 425.418.11.4 Redistribution of Negative

Flexural Members ................... 4-116 Moments in Continuous

425.409.4 Design Strength ....................... 4- 116 Prestressed Flexural

Members...... ........... ........... 4-117

SECTION 426- ALTERNATIVE LOAD AND STRENGTH REDlJCTION

FA(~TORS ...................................................................... 4~lt8
426. , General.......................................... 4-118

National Structural Code of the Philippines. Vok.une 1

 CONCRETE
SECTION 401 - GENERAL
401.1 SCOPE
401.1.1 This chapter provides minimum requirements for
the design and construction of structural concrete elements
of any buil ding or other structure.
401.1.2 This chapter shall govern in all matters pertaining
to the design, construction, and material properties of
structural concrete elements wherever this chapter is in
conflict with requirements contained in other standards
referenced in this chapter.
401.1.3 For special structures, such as arches, tanks,
reservoirs, bins and silos, blast-resistant structures, and
chimneys, provisions of this chapter shall govern where
applicable.
401.1.4 This chapter does not govern design and
installation of portions of concrete piles' and drilled piers
embedded in ground except tor structures in regions of high
. seismic risk or assigned to high seismic performance or
design categories. See Section 421.9.4 for requirements for
concrete piles, drilled piers, and caissons in structures ill
regions of high seismic risk or assigned to high seismic
performance or design categories ..
401.1.5 This chapter does not govern design and
construction of soil-supported slabs, unless the slab
transmits vertical loads from other portions of the structure
to the soil.
401.1.6 Concrete On Steel Form Deck
401.1.6.1 Design and construction of structural
concrete slabs cast on stay-in-place, noncomposite steel
form deck are governed by this chapter.
401.1.6.2 This chapter does not govern the design of
structural concrete slabs cast on stay-in-place, composite
steel form deck Concrete used in the construction of such
slabs shall be governed by Sections 401 to 407 of this
chapter, where applicable.
401.1.7 Special Provisions For Earthquake Resistance
401.1.7.1 In regions of moderate (seismic zone 2) or high
seismic risk (seismic zone 4), provisions of Section 421
shall be satistied. See Section 421.3.].
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-1
SECTION 402 - DEFINIT10NS
The following terms are defined for general use in this
chapter. Specialized definitions appear in individual
sections.
ADMIXTURE is material other than water, .aggregate, or
hydraulic cement used as an ingredient of concrete and
added to concrete before or during its mixing to modify its
properties.
AGGREGATE is granular material, such as sand, gravel,
crushed stone and iron blast-furnace slag, and when used
with a cementing medium forms a hydraulic cement
concrete or mortar.
AGGREGATE, LIGHTWEIGHT, is aggregate with a
dry, loose weight of 1120 kg/m3 or less.
AIR-DRY WEIGHT is the unit weight of a lightweight
concrete specimen cured for seven days with neither loss
nor gain of moisture at 15C to 2~C and dried for 21 days
in 50 7 percent relative humidity at 23C 1. 1C.
ANCHORAGE DEVICE in post-tensioning is a device
used to anchor tendons to concrete member; in
pretensioning, a device used to anchor tendons during
hardening of concrete.
ANCHORAGE ZONE in post-tensioned members is the
portion of the member through wr..ich the concentra\ed
prestressing force is transferred to the concrete and
distributed more uniformly across the section. Its extent is
equal to the largest dimension of the cross section. For
intermediate anchorage devices, the anchorage zone
includes the disturbed regions ahead of and behind the
anchorage devices.
BASIC MONOSTRAND ANCHORAGE DEVICE is
an anchorage device used with any single strand or a single
16 mm or smalley diameter bar that satisfies section
418.22.1 and the anchorage device requirements of the
Post-Tensioning Institute'S "Specification for Unbonded
Single Strand Tendons".
BASIC MULTISTRAND ANCHORAGE DEVICE is
an anchorage device used with multiple strands, bars or
wires, or single bars larger than 16 mm diameter, that
satisfies Section 418.22.1 and the bearing stress and
minimum plate stiffness requirements of AASHTO Bridge
Specifications, Division I, Sections 9.21.7.2.2 through
9.21.7.2.4.
BONDED TENDON is a prestressing tendon that IS
bonded to concrete either directly or through grouting.
4-2
CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS are materials as
specified in Section 403 which have cementing value when
used in concrete either by themselves, such as portland
cement, blended hydraulic cements and expansive cement,
or such materials in combination with fly ash, raw or other
calcined natural pozzolans, silica fume, or ground
granulated blast-furnace slag.
COLUMN is a member with a ratio of height-to-Ieast
lateral dimension of 3 or greater used primarily to support
axial compressive load.
COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS
are concrete flexural members of precast and cast-in-place
concrete elements, or both, constructed in separate place
ments but so interconnected that all elements respond to
loads as a unit.
COMPRESSION-CONTROLLED SECTION is a cross
section in which the net tensile strain in the extreme tension
steel at nominal strength is less than or equal to the
,compression-controlled strain limit.
COMPRESSION-CONTROLLED STRAIN LIMIT is
the net tensile strain at balanced strain conditions. See
Section 410A.2.
CONCRETE is a mixture of portland cement or any other
hydraulic cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and
water, with or without admixtures.
CONCRETE, SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH OF (f'e), is the compressive strength of
concrete used in design and evaluated in accordance with
provisions of Section 405, expressed in megapascals (MPa).
Whenever the quantity Pc is under a radical sign, square
root of numerical value only is intended, and result has
units of megapascaIs.
CONCRETE, STRUCTURAL LIGHTWEIGHT, is
concrete containing lightweight aggregate that conforms to
Section 403.4 and has an air-dry unit weight as determined
by "Test Method for Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight
Concrete" (ASTM C 567) not exceeding 1840 kg/m3 . In
this code, a lightweight concrete without natural sand is
termed "all-lightweight concrete" and lightweight concrete
in which all fine aggregate consists of normal-weight sand
is termed "sand-lightweight concrete."
CONTRACTION JOINT is a formed, sawed, or tooled
groove in a concrete structure to create a weakened plane
and regulate the location of cracking resulting from the
dimensional change ofdifferent parts ofthe structure.
CURVATURE FRICTION is friction resulting from
bends or curves in the specified prestressing tendon profile.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
DEFINITIONS
DEFORMED REINFORCEMENT is deformed
reinforcing bars, bar and rod mats, deformed wire, welded
smooth wire fabric and welded deformed wire fabric.
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH is the length of embedded
reinforcement required to develop the design strength of
reinforcement at a critical section. See Section 409.4.3.
EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF SECTION (d) is the
distance measured from extreme compression fiber to
centroid oftension reinforcement.
EFFECTIVE PRESTRESS is the stress remammg in
prestressing tendons after all losses have occwred,
excluding effects of dead load and superimposed load.
EMBEDMENT LENGTH is the length of embedded
reinforcement provided beyond a critical section.
EXTREME TENSION STEEL js the reinforcement
(prestressed or nonprestressed) that is the farthest from the
extreme compression fiber.
ISOLATION JOINT is a separation between adjoining
parts of a concrete structure, usually a vertical plane, at a
designed location such as to interfere least with
performance of the structure, yet such as to allow relative
movement in three directions and avoid formation of cracks
elsewhere in the concrete and through which all or part of
the bonded reinforcement is interrupted.
JACKING FORCE is the temporary force exerted by
device that introduces tension into prestressing tendons in
prestressed concrete.
WAD, DEAD, is the dead weight supported by a
member, as defined by Section 204 (without load factors).
LOAD, FACTORED, is the load, multiplied by
appropriate load factors, usedto proportion members by the
strength design method of this chapter. See Sections
408.2.1 and 409.3.
WAD, LIVE, is the live load specified by Section 205
(without load factors).
LOAD, SERVICE, is the load specified by Sections 204
to 207 (without load factors).
MODULUS OF ELASTICITY is the ratio of normal
stress to corresponding strain for tensile or compressive
stresses below proportional limit of material. See Section
408.6.
 CONCRETE
NET TENSILE STRAIN is the tensile strain at nominal
strength exclusive of strains due to effective prestress,
creep, shrinkage and temperature.
PEDESTAL is an upright compression member with a
ratio of unsupported height to average least lateral
dimension not exceeding of 3.
PLAIN CONCRETE is structural concrete with no
reinforcement or with less reinforcement than the minimum
amount specified for reinforced concrete.
PLAIN REINFORCEMENT is reinforcement that does
not conform to definition of deformed reinforcement.
POST-TENSIONING is a method of prestressing in which
tendons are tensioned after concrete has hardened.
PRECAST CONCRETE is a structural concrete element
cast in other than its final position in the structure.
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE is structural concrete in
which internal stresses have been introduced to reduce
potential tensile stresses in concrete resulting from loads.
PRETENSIONING is a method of prestressing in which
tendons are tensioned before concrete is placed.
REINFORCED CONCRETE is structural concrete
reinforced with no less than the minimum amounts of
prestressing tendons or nonprestressed reinforcement
specified in this chapter.
REINFORCEMENT is material that conforms to Section
403.5.1, excluding prestressing tendons unless specifically
included.
RESHORES are shores placed snugly under a concrete
slab or other structural member after the original forms and
shores have been removed from a larger area., thus requiring
the new slab or structural member to deflect and support its
own weight and existing construction loads applied prior to
the installation of the reshores.
SHEATHING is a material encasing a prestressing tendon
to prevent bonding the tendon with the surrounding
concrete, to provide corrosion protection, and to contain the
corrosion inhibiting coating.
SHORES are vertical or inclined support members
designed to carry the weight of the formwork, concrete and
construction loads above.
SPAN LENGTH. See Section 408.8.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
........
SPECIAL ANCHORAGE DEVICE is an anchorage
device that satisfies Section 418.20.1 an.d the standardized
acceptance tests of AASHTO "Standard Specifications for
Highway Bridges", Division n, Section 10.3.2.3.
SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT is continuously wound
reinforcement in the form of a cylindrical helix.
SPLITTING TENSILE STRENGTH (fcJ is the tensile
strength of concrete determined in accordance with ASTM
C 496 as described in "Specifications for Lightweight
Aggregate for Structural Concrete" (ASTM C 330). See
Section 405.2.4.
STIRRUP is reinforcement used to resist shear and torsion
stresses in a structural member; typically bars, wires, or
welded wire fabric (plain or deformed) bent into L, U or
rectangular shapes and located perpendicular to or at an
angle to longitudinal reinforcement. (The term "stirrups" is
usually applied to lateral reinforcement in flexural members
and the term "ties" to those in compression members.) See
also "tie."
STRENGTH, DESIGN, is the nominal strength
multiplied by a strength-reduction factor, fj). See Section
409.4.
STRENGTH, NOMINAL, is the strength of a member or
cross section calculated in accordance with provisions and
assumptions of the strength design method of this chapter
before application of any strength-reduction factors. See
Section 409. 4 .1.
STRENGTH, REQUIRED, is the strength of a member
or cross section required to resist factored loads or related
internal moments and forces in such combinations as are
stipulated in this chapter. See Section 409.2.1.
STRESS is the intensity of force per unit area.
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE is all concrete used for
structural purposes, including plain and reinforced concrete.
TENDON is a steel element such as wire, cable, bar, rod or
strand, or a bundle of such elements, used to impart
prestress forces to concrete.
TENSION-CONTROLLED SECTION is a cross section
in which the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel at
nominal strength is greater than or equal to 0.005.
TIE is a loop of reinforcing bar or wire enclosing longi
tudinal reinforcement. A continuously wound bar or wire in
the form of a circle, rectangle or other polygon shape
without re-entrant comers is acceptable. See "stirrup. "


4-4 SPECIFICATIONS FOR TESTS AND MATERIALS &
DEFINITIONS
TRANSFER is the act of transferring stress in prestressing
tendons from jacks or pretensioning bed to concrete
member.
UNBONDED TENDON is a tendon that is permanently
prevented from bonding to the concrete after stressing.
WALL is a member, usually vertical, used to enclose or
separate spaces.
WOBBLE FRICTION in prestressed concrete, is friction
caused by unintended deviation of prestressing sheath or
duct from its specified profile.
YIELD STRENGTH is the specified rmmmum yield
strength or yield point of reinforcement in megapascals
(MFa). Yield strength or yield point shall be determined in
tension according to applicable ASTM standards as
modified by Section 403.6 of this code.
l Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
1
SECTION 403 - SPECIFICATIONS
FOR TESTS AND MATERIALS
403.1 NOTATION
specified yield strength of nonprestressed
reinforcement in megapascals (MPa).
403.2 TESTS OF MATERIALS
403.2.1 The engineer may require the testing of any
materials used in concrete construction to determine if
materials are of quality specified.
403.2.2 Tests of materials and of concrete shall be made
in accordance with the standards listed in Section 403.9.
403.3.3 A complete record of tests of materials and of
concrete shall be available for inspection during progress of
work and for two (2) years after completion of the project,
and shall be preserved by the inspecting engineer or
architect for that purpose.
403.3 CEMENT
403.3.1 Cement shall conform to one of the following
specifications:
1. "Specifications for Portland Cement" (ASTM
C150).
2. "Specifications for Blended Hydraulic Cements"
(ASTM C 595M), excluding Types S and SA
which are not intended as principal cementing
constituents of structural concrete.
3. "Specifications for Expansive Hydraulic Cement"
(ASTM C 845).
403.3.2 Cement used in the work shall correspond to that
on which selection of concrete proportions waS" based. See
Section 405.3.
403.4 AGGREGATES
403.4.1 Concrete aggregates shall conform to one of the
fullowing specifications:
1. "Specifications for Concrete Aggregates"
(ASTMC 33),
 CONCRETE
2. "Specifications for Lightweigl Aggregates for
StructuratConcrete" (ASTM C 330)
Aggregates failing to meet the above specifications but
which have been shown by special test or actual service to
produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may
be used where authorized by the engineer.
403.4.2 The nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate
shall not be larger than:
L One fifth (l/5) the narrowest dimension between
sides of forms, or
2. One third (1/3) the depth of slabs, or
3. Three fourths (3/4) the minimum clear spacing
between individual reinforcing bars or wires, bundles
ofbars, or prestressing tendons or ducts.
These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the
engineer, workability and methods of consolidation are
such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or
voids.
403.5 WATER.
403.5.1 Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and
free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts,
organic materials or other substances deleterious to
concrete or reinforcement.
403.5.2 Mixing water for prestressed concrete or for
concrete that will contain aluminum embedments, including
that portion of mixing water contributed in the form of free
moisture on aggregates, shall not contain deleterious
amounts ofchloride ions. See Section 404.5.1.
403.5.3 Non-potable water shall not be 1Jsed in concrete
unless the following are satisfied:
403.5.3.1 Selection of concrete proportions shall be
based on concrete mixes using water from the same source.
403.5.3.2 Mortar test cubes made with nonpotable
mixing water shall have 7-day and 28-day strengths equal
to at least 90 percent of strengths of similar specimens
made with potable water. Strength test comparison shall be
made on mortars, identical except for the mixing water,
prepared and tested in accordance with "Test Method for
Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (using
50-mm Cube Specimens)" (ASTM C 109).
403.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
403.6.1 Reinforcement shall be deformed reinforcement,
except that plain reinforcement may be used for spirals or
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
k........
4-5
tendo~, and reinforcement consisting of structural steel,
steel pIpe or steel tubing may be used as specified in this
chapter.
403.6.2 Welding of reinforcing bars shall conform to
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel",
ANSIIAWS D1.4 ofthe American Welding Society. Type
and location of welded splices and other required welding
of reinforcing bars shall be indicated on the design
drawings or in the project specifications. ASTM reinforcing
bar' specifications, except for ASTM A 706, shall be
supplemented to require a report of material properties
necessary to conform to requirements in ANSIIAWS DL4.
403.6.3 Deformed Reinforcements
403.6.3.1 Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to
one ofthe following specifications:
L "Specifications for Deformed and Plain Billet
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM
A 61 SM).
2. "Specifications for Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" including
Supplementary Requirement SI (ASTM A 616M
including S1).
3. "Specifications for Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A
617M).
4. "Specifications for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A
706M).
4u3.6.3.2 Deformed reinforcing bars with a specified
yield. strength.l;. exceeding 415 MPa shall be permitted,
proVided h shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of
0.35 percent and the bars otherwise conform to one of the
ASTM specifications listed in 403.6.3.1. See Section
409.5.
403.6.3.3 Bar mats for concrete reinforcement shall
conform to "Specifications for Fabricated Deformed Steel
Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 184).
Reinforcing bars used in bar mats shall conform to one of
the specifications listed in 403.6.3.1.
403.6.3.4 Deformed wire for concrete reinforcement
shall conform to "Specifications for Steel Wire, Deformed,
for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 496). except that
wire shall not be smaller than size D4, and for wire with a
specified yield strength h exceeding 415 MPa,1, shall be
the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 perc:nt, if the
yield strength specified in design exceeds 415 MPa.
403.6.3.5 Welded plain wire fabric for concrete
reinforcement shall conform to "Specifications for Steel
Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement"
 4-6 SPECIFICATIONS FOR TESTS AND MATERIALS
(ASTM A 185), except that for wire with a specified yield
strength h exceeding 415 MPa, h shall be the stress
corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent, if the yield
strength specified in design exceeds 415 MPa. Welded
intersections shall not be spaced farther apart than 300 mm
in direction of calculated stress, except for wire fabric used
as stirrups in accordance with Section 412.14.2.
403.6.3.6 Welded deformed wire fabric for concrete
reinforcement shall conform to "Specifications for Steel
Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement" (ASTM A 497), except that for wire with
a specified yield strength/y exceeding 415 MPa,/y shall be
the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent, if the
yield strength specified in design exceeds 415 MPa.
Welded intersections shall not be spaced farther apart than
400 mm in direction of calculated stress, except for wire
fabric used as stirrups in accordance with Section 412.14.2
403.6.3.7 Galvanized reinforcing bars shaH comply
with "Specifications for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 767M).
Epoxy-coated reinforcing bars shall comply with
"Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars"
(ASTM A 175M) or with "Specifications for Epoxy-Coated
Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars" (ASTM A 934M).
Galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement shall conform to
one of the specifications listed in 403.6.3.1.
403.6.3.8 Epoxy-coated wires and welded wire fabric
"
shall comply with "Standard Specification for Epoxy
Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Fabric for
Reinforcement" (ASTM A 884M). Epoxy-coated wires
shall conform to Section 403.6.3.4 and epoxy-coated
welded wire fabric shall conform to Section 403.6.3.5 or
403.6.3.6.
403.6.4 Plain Reinforcement
403.6.4.1 Plain bars for spiral reinforcement shall
conform to one of the following specification: ASTM
A615, A 616 and A 617.
403.6.4.2 Plain wire for spiral reinforcement shall
tonform to "Specifications for Steel Wire, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement" (ASTM A 82), except that for
wire with a specified yield strength h exceeding 415 MPa,
{" shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35
.~ercent, if the yield strength specified in design exceeds
415 MPa.
403.6.5 Prestressing Tendons
403.6.5.1 Tendons for prestressed reinforcement shall
conform to one of the following specifications:
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
1. Wire conforming to "Specifications for Uncoated
Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete"
(ASTM A 421).
2. Low-relaxation wire conforming to "Specifications
for Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for
Prestressed Concrete" including Supplement "Low
Relaxation Wire" (ASTM A 421)
3. Strand conforming to "Specifications fel Steel
Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed
Concrete" (ASTM A 416M).
4. Bar conforming to "Specifications for Uncoated
High-Strength Steel Bar for Prestressing Concrete"
(ASTMA 722)
403.6.5.2 Wire, strands, and bars not specifically
listed in ASTM A 416, A 421 and A 722 are allowed,
provided they conform to minimum requirements of these
specifications and do not have properties that make them
less satisfactory than those listed in these specifications.
403.6.6 Structural Steel, Steel Pipe or Tubing
403.6.6.1 Structural steel used with reinforcing bars in
composite compression members meeting requirements of
Section 410.17.7 or 410.17.8, shall conform to one of the
following specifications:
1. "Specifications for Structural Steel" (ASTM A 36M).
2. "Specifications for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel" (ASTM A 242M).
3. "Specifications for High-Strength Low-Alloy
i
Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality"
(ASTM A 572M).
4. "Specifications for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel with 345 MPa minimum yield point
to 100mm thick" (ASTM A 588M).
403.6.6.2 Steel pipe or tubing for composite
compression members composed of a steel-encased
concrete core meeting requirements of Section 410.17.6
shall conform to one of the following specifications:
1. Grade B of "Specifications for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless"
(ASTM A 53).
2. "Specifications for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds
and Shapes" (ASTM A 500).
3. "Specifications for Hot-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Tubing" (ASTM A 501)
 CONCRETE
4-7

403.7 ADMIXTURES 403.8.2 Any material that has deteriorated or has been
contaminated shall not be used for concrete
403.7.1 Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be
subject to prior approval by the engineer.
403.9 STANDARDS CITED IN TmS
403.7.2 An admixture shall be shown capable of CHAPTER
maintaining essentially the same composition and
performance throughout the work as the product used in 403.9.1 Standards of the American Society for Testing
establishing concrete proportions in accordance with and Materials (ASTM) referred to in this chapter are listed
Section 405.3. below with their serial designations, including year of
adoption or revision, and are declared to be part of this code
403.7.3 Calcium chloride or admixtures containing as iffully set forth herein:
chloride from other than impurities from admixture
ingredients shall not be used in prestressed concrete, in A 36M-96 Standard Specifications for Carbon
concrete containing embedded aluminum, or in concrete Structural Stee.!
cast against stay-in-place galvanized steel forms. See A 53-97 Standard Specifications for Pipe, Steel,
Sections 404.4.2 and 404.5.1. Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated
Welded and Seamless
403.7.4 Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to A 82-97 Standard Specifications for Steel Wire,
"Specifications for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
Concrete" (ASTM C 260). A 184-96 Standard Specifications for Fabricated
Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete
403.7.5 Water-reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, Reinforcement
accelerating admixtures, water-reducing and retarding A 185-97 Standard Specifications for Steel Welded
admixtures, and water-reducing and accelerating Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
admixtures shall conform to "Specifications for Chemical Reinforcement
Admixtures for Concrete" (ASTM C 494) or A 242M-93a Standard Specifications for High-Strength
"Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Low-Alloy Structural Steel
Producing Flowing Concrete" (ASTM C 1017). A 416M-96 Standard Specifications for Steel Strand,
Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed
403.7.6 Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures Concrete
shall conform to "Specifications for Fly Ash and Raw or A 421-91 Standard Specifications for Uncoated
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for Prestressed
in Portland Cement Concrete" (ASTM C 618). Concrete
A 496-97 Standard Specifications for Steel Wire,
403.7.7 Ground granulated blast-furnace slag used as an Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
admixture shall conform to "Specifications for Ground A 497-97 Standard Specifications for Steel Welded
Granulated Blast-furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete
Mortars" (ASTM C 989). Reinforcement
A 500-96 Standard Specifications for Cold-Formed
403.7.8 Admixtures used in concrete containing ASTM Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
C845 expansive cements shall be compatible with the Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
cement and produce no deleterious effects. A 501-96 Standard Specifications for Hot-Formed
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
403.7.9 Silica fume used as an admixture shall conform to Structural Tubing
"Specification for Silica Fume for Use in Hydraulic-Cement A 572-97 Standard Specifications for High-Strength
Concrete and Mortar" (ASTM C 1240). bew--AHoy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steels
A 588M-97 Standard Specifications for High-Strength
403.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa
minimum yield point to 100 mm thic'!<
403.8.1 Cementitious materials and aggregate shall be A 615M-96a Standar(i Sp~cifications for Deformed and
stored in such manner as to prevent deterioration or Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
intrusion of foreign matter. Reinforcement
A 616M-96a Standard Specifications tor Rail-Steel
Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 4-8 SPECIFICATIONS FOR TESTS AND MATERIALS

Reinforcement, including Supplementary C 595M-97 Standard Specifications for Blended

Requirement S 1 Hydraulic Cements
A 617M-96a Standard Specifications for Axle-Steel C 618-97 Standard Specifications for Fly Ash and
Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use
Reinforcement as a Mineral Admixture on Portland Cement
A 706M-96b Standard Specifications for Low-Alloy Concrete
Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete C 685-95a Standard Specifications for Concrete Made
Reinforcement by Volumetric Batching and Continuous
A 722-97 Standard Specifications for Uncoated Mixing
High-Strength Steel Bar for Prestressing C 845-96 Standard Specifications for Expansive
Concrete Hydraulic Cement
A 767M-97 Standard Specifications for Zinc-Coated C 989-95 Standard Specifications for Ground
(Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in
Reinforcement Concrete and Mortars
A 775M-97 Standard Specifications for Epoxy-Coated C 1017-92 Standard Specifications for Chemical
Reinforcing Steel Bars Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing
A 884M-96a Standard Specifications for Epoxy-Coated Concrete
Steel Wire and Welded Wire Fabric for C 1218M-97 Standard Test Method for Water Soluble
Reinforcement Chloride in Mortar and Concrete
A 934M-97 Standard Specifications for Epoxy-Coated C1240-97 Standard Specifications for Silica Fume for
Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars Use in Hydraulic-Cement Concrete and
C 31-96M Standard Practice for Making and Curing Mortar
Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
C 33-93 Standard Specifications for Concrete
Aggregate 403.9.2. "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel"
C 39-96 Standard Test Method for Compressive (ANSIIAWS D1.4-98) of the American Welding Society is
Strength of Cylindrical Concrete declared part of this code as if fully set forth herein.
Specimens
C 42-94 Standard Method of Obtaining and 403.9.3 Section 2.3 Combining Loads Using Strength
~.'
i
Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams Design 'of "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
of Concrete Other Structures" (ASCE 7-95) is declared part of this code
\11:
'Ii
r" C 94-96 Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed as if fully set forth herein, for the purposes cited in
'I
Concrete Sections 409.4.1.1 and 426.
"11' C109M-95 Standard Test Method for Compressive
Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars 403.9.4 "Specification for Unbonded Single Strand
(Using 50-mm Cube Specimens) Tendons", July 1993, of the Post-Tensioning Institute is
"
C 144-93 Standard Specifications for Aggregate for declared part of this code as iffully set forth herein.
,.:::
Masomy Mortar
'I
:1 1 C 150-97 Standard Specifications for Portland 403.9.5 Sections 9,21.7.2 and 9.21.7.3 of Division I and
l Cement Section 10.3.2.3 of Division II of AASHTO "Standard
C 172-90 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Specification for Highway Bridges" (AASHTO 16th
1, ~i! Mixed Concrete Edition, 1996) are declared to be part of this code as if fully
C 192M-95 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly set forth herein.
Mixed Concrete
C 260-95 Standard Specifications for Air-
Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
C 330-89 Standard Specifications for Lightweight
Aggregates for Structural Concrete
C 494-92 Standard Specifications for Chemical
Admixtures for Concrete
C496-96 Standard Test Method for Splitting
Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
C 567-91 Standard Test Method for Unit Weight of
Structural Lightweight Concrete

l Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
4-9

SECTION 404 - DURABILITY 404.4 SULFATE EXPOSURE

REQUIREMENTS 404.4.1 Concrete to be exposed to sulfate-containing
solutions or soils shall conform to the requirements of
Table 404-2 or shall be concrete made with a cement that
404.1 NOTATION provides sulfate resistance and that has a maximum water
cementitious materials ratio and minimum compressive
fc = specified compressive strength of concrete, (MFa). strength set forth in Table 404-2.

404.4.2 Calcium chloride as an admixture shall not be

404.2 WATER-CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS used in concrete to be exposed to severe or very severe
RATIO sulfate-containing solutions, as defined in Table 404-2.

The water-cementitious materials ratios specified in Tables

404-1 and 404-2 shall be calculated using the weight of 404.5 CORROSION PROTECTION OF
cement meeting ASTM C 150, C 595M or C 845 plus the REINFORCEMENT
weight offly ash and other pozzolans meeting ASTM
C 618, slag meeting ASTM C 989, and silica fume meeting 404.5.1 For corrosion protection of reinforcement in
ASTM C 1240, if any. concrete, maximum water soluble chloride ion
concentrations in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to 42
days contributed from the ingredients, including water,
404.3 SPECIAL EXPOSURE CONDmONS aggregates, cementitious materials and admixtures shall not
exceed the limits of Table 404-3. When testing is performed
Concrete that will be subject to the exposure given in Table to determine water soluble chloride ion content, test
404-1 shall conform to the corresponding maximum water procedures shall conform to ASTM C 1218.
cementitious materials ratios and minimum specified
concrete compressive strength requirements of that table. 404.5.2 If concrete with reinforcement will be exposed to
chlorides from salt, salt water, brackish water, sea water or
spray from these sources, requirements of Table 404-1 for
Table 404-1 Requirements for Special water-cementitious materials ratio and concrete strength
Extposure emf'
0 ItlOns and the minimum concrete cover requirements of Section
Maximum 407.8 shall be satisfied. In addition, see Section 418.15 {or
Water- unbonded prestressed tendons.
Minimum I'"
Cementitious
Normal-
Materials
Weight and
Exposure Condition Ratio,
by weight,
Lightweight
Normal Aggregate
Weight Concrete,
Aggregate MPa
Concrete
Concrete intended to have low
permeability when exposed to 0.50 28
water

For corrosion protection for

reinforced concrete exposed to
chlorides from salts, saltwater, 0.40 35
brackish water, seawater or
i
smav from these sources

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 4-10

Table 404-2 R uirements for Concrete Exposed to

Water-Soluble Minimumf'c,
Sulfate (S04) Nom1al-Weight and
Sulfate (S04)
Sulfate Exposure in Watel', Cement Type i .1i!-hl\\eigbt Aggregate
in Soil,
ppm Concrete,
Percent by Weight
Mpa
~~--------~~----------~-----~------+-------------i~~~~~:~~~'~_~L_------ __----~
Negligible 0.00 - 0.10 0- 150

II, IP(MS), rS(MS),

Moderate1 0.10-0.20 150 1,500 P(MS), ItPM)(MS), oso
I(SM)(MS)

0.20 - 2.00 1,500 - 10,000 OA5

Very Severe over 10,000 0.45

1 A lower water-cementitious materials ratio or higher strength Pozzolan that has been determined by test or service record to
may be required for low permeability or for protection against improve sulfate resistance when used in concrete containing Type
corrosion of embedded items (Table 404-1). V cement.
2 Seawater

Table 404-3 - Maximum Chloride Ion Content

for Corrosion Protection Reinforcement

Maximum

Water-Soluble

Chloride Jon

(CI) in
TYPE OF MEMBER Concrete,
Percentage by
weight of
ccmcnlitious
matcr.~~L-j
I
0.06
" ~::

I
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
405 - CONCRETE
ALITY, MIXING AND PLACING
NOTATIONS
= specified compressive strength of concrete, MFa.
= required average compressive strength of oncrete
used as the basis for selection of concrete
proportions, MFa.
average splitting tensile strength of lightweight
aggregate concrete. MFa.
standard deviation, MFa.
405.2 GENERAL
405.2.1 Concrete shall be proportioned to provide an
average compressive strength as prescribed in Section
405.4.2, as well as satisfY the durability criteria of Section
404. Concrete shall be produced to minimize frequency of
strengths belowf'c as prescribed in Section 405.7.3.3.
405.2.2 Requirements for f'e shall be based on tests of
cylinders made and tested as prescribed in Section 405.7.3.
405.2.3 Unless otherwise specified, f'e shall be based on
28-day tests. If other than 28 days, test age for f'e shall be
as indicated in design drawings or specifications.
405.2.4 Where design criteria in Sections 409.6.2.3,
411.3; and 412.3.4, provide for use of a splitting tensile
strength value of concrete, laboratory tests shall be made in
accordance with "Specification for Lightweight Aggregates
for Strucutural Concrete (ASTM C 330) to establish value
ofiel corresponding to specified values off'c.
405.2.5 Splitting tensile strength tests shall not be used as
a basis for field acceptance of concrete.
405.3 SELECTION OF CONCRETE
PROPORTIONS
405.3.1 Proportions of materials for concrete shall be
established to provide:
1. Workability and consistency to permit concrete to be
worked readily into forms and around reinforcement
under conditions of placement to be employed
without segregation or excessive bleeding.
2. Resistance to special exposures as required by
Section 404.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
411
3. Conformance with strength test requirements of
Section 405.7.
405.3.2 Where different materials are to be used for
different portions of proposed work, each combination shall
be evaluated.
405.3.3 Concrete proportions, including water
cementitious materials ratio, shall be established on the
basis of field experience and/or trial mixtures with materials
to be employed (see Section 405.4), except as permitted in
Section 405.5 or required by Section 404.
405.4 PROPORTIONING ON THE BASIS OF
FIELD EXPERIENCE AND TRIAL
MIXTURES, OR BOTH
405.4.1 Standard Deviation
405.4.1.1 Where a concrete production facility has
test records, a standard deviation shall be established. Test
records from which a standard deviation is calculated:
1. Must represent materials, quality control procedures
and conditions similar to those expected, and
changes in materials and proportions within the test
records shall not have been more restricted than
those for proposed work.
2. Must represent concrete produced to meet a specified
strength or strengths f'e within 7 MFa of that
3.
specified for proposed work.
.
Must consist of at least 30 consecutive tests or two
.
groups of consecutive tests totaling at least 30 tests
as defined in Section 405.7.2.4, except as provided in
Section 405.4.1.2.
405.4.1.2 Where a concrete production facility does
not have test records meeting requirements of Section
405.4.1.1, but does have a record based on 15 to 29
consecutive tests, a standard deviation may be established
as the product of the calculated standard deviation and the
modification factor of Table 405-1. To be acceptable, the
test record must meet the requirements of Section
405.4.1.1, Items 1 and 2, and represent only a single
record of consecutive tests that span a period of not less
than 45 calendar days.
 4-12 CONCRETE, QUALITY, MIXING AND PLACING

Table 405-1 Modification Factor for Standard 405.4.3.1 When test records are used to demonstrate
Deviation When Less Than 30 Tests are that proposed co.ncrete proportions will produce the
Available required average strength 1'er (see Section 405.4.2), such
Number of Tests I
Modification Factor for I
!
records shall represent materials and cor,ditions similar to
Standard Deviation] i those expected. Changes in materials, conditions and
proportions within the test records shall not have been
Less than 15 Use Table 405-2 i more restricted than those for proposed work. For the
i i
15 1.16 purpose of documenting average strength potential, lest
I
I i records consisting of less than 30 but not less than 10
20 I 1.08 !
consecutive tests may be used, provided test records
25 1.03 encompass a period of time not less than 45 days.
Required concrete proportions may be established by
30 or more 1.00 interpolation between the strengths and proportions of two
'Interpolate for intermediate number of tests. or more test records each of which meets other
2 Modified standard deviation to be used to determine required requirements of this section.
average strength!,,, from Section 405.4.2.1
405.4.3.2 When an acceptable record of field test
405.4.2 Required Average Strength results is not available, concrete propOltions established
from trial mixtures meeting the following restrictions shall
405.4.2.1 Required average compressive strength 1'cr be permitted:
used as the basis for selection of con..:rete proportions shall
be the larger of Equation (405-1) or (405-2) using a 1. Combination of materials shall be those for proposed
standard deviation calculated in accordance with Section work.
,405.4.1.1 or 405.4.1.2. 2. Trial mixtures having proportions and consistencies
required for proposed work shall be made using at
1'er = 1'c + 1.34 s (405-1) least three different water-cementitious materials
or ratios or cementitious materials contents that will
1'er = 1'e + 2.33 s - 3.5 (405-2) produce a range of strengths encompassing the
required average strengthf'er.
405.4.2.2 When a concrete production facility does 3. Trial mixture shall be designed to produce a slump
not have field strength test records for calculation of within 20 mm of maximum permitted, and for air
standard deviation meeting requirements of Section entrained concrete, within 0.5 percent of maximum
405.4.l.l or 405.4.1.2, required average strength 1'er shall allowable air content.
be determined from Table 405-2 and documentation of 4. For each water-cementitious materials ratio or
average strength shall be in accordance with requirements cementitious materials content, at least three test
of Section 405.4.3. cylinders for each test age shall be made and cured in
.::;::
accordance with "Method of Making and Curing
Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory" (ASTM
Table 405-2 Required Average Compressive C 192). Cylinders shall be tested at 28 days or at test
Strength When Data are not Available to age designated for determination of1'c
Establish a Standard Deviation
Specified Compressive Required Average 5. From results of cylinder tests, a curve shall be
Strength, /,,,, Compressive Strength, /,,,,, plotted showing relationship between water
MPa MPa
I cementttlOus materials ratio or cementItlOus
materials content and compressive strength at
Less than 21 MPa i f'c + 7.0 designated test age.
21 to 35 f'c + 8.5 6. Maximum water-cementitious materials ratio or
II minimum cementitious materials coritent for concrete
OYer 35 f'c + 10.0 to be used in proposed work shall be that shown by
I
the curve to produce the average strength required by
Section '405.4.2, unless a lower water-cementitious
405.4.3 Documentation of average strength. materials ratio or higher strength is required by
Documentation that proposed concrete proportions will Section 404.
produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater
than required average compressive strength (see Section
405.4.2) shall consist of a field strength test record, several
strength test records, or trial mixtures.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines


405.5 PROPORTIONING WITHOUT FIELD
EXPERIENCE OR TRIAL MIXTURES
If data required by Section 405.4 are not
available, concrete proportions shall be based upon other
experience or infonnation, if approved by the engineer. The
required average compressive strength 1'er of concrete
produced with materials similar to those proposed for use
shall be at least 8.5 MPa greater than the specified
.. compressive strength,1'e. This alternative shall not be used
for specified compressive strength greater than 28 MPa.
405.5.2 Concrete proportioned by Section 405.5 shall
confonn to the durabilit~1 requirements of Section 404 and
to compressive strength test criteria of Section 405.7
405.6 AVERAGE STRENGTH REDUCTION
As data become available during construction, it shall be
permitted to reduce the amount by which 1'er must exceed
the specified value oU~, provided:
1. Thirty or more test results are available and average
of test results exceeds that required by Section
405.4.2.1, using a standard deviation calculated in
accordance with Section 405.4.1.1, or
2. Fifteen to 29 test results are available and average of
test results exceeds that required by Section
405.4.2.1, using a standard deviation calculated in
accordance with Section 405.4.1.2, and
3. Special exposure requirements of Section 404 are
met.
405.7 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE
2. No individual strength test (average of two
OF CONCRETE
cylinders) falls below1'c by more than 3.5 MPa.
405.7.1 Concrete shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements of Section 405.7.2 through 405.7.5. Qualified
field testing technicians shall perform tests on fresh
concrete at the job site, prepare specimens required for
curing under field conditions, prepare specimens required
for testing in the laboratory, and record the temperature of
the fresh concrete when preparing specimens for strength
tests. Qualified laboratory technicians shall perfonn all
required laboratory tests.
405.7.2 Frequency of Testing
405.7.2.1 Samplf.')s for strength tests of each class of
concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a
day, or not less than once for each 120 m3 of concrete, or
not less than once for each 500 m2 of surface area for slabs
or walls.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-13
405.7.2.2 On a given project, if the total volume of
concrete is such that the frequency of testing required by
Section 405.7.2.1 would provide less than five strength tests
for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at
least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if
fewer than five batches are used.
405.7.2.3 When total quantity of a given class of
concrete is less than 40 m3, strength tests are not required
when evidence of satisfactory strength is submitted to and
approved by the engineer.
405.7.2.4 A strength test shall be the average of the
strengths of two cylinders made from the same sample of
concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for
detennination of1'e.
405.7.3 Laboratory-Cured Specimens
405.7.3.1 Samples for strength tests shall be taken in
accordance with "Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed
Concrete" (ASTM C 172).
405.7.3.2 Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded
and laboratory cured in accordance with "Practice for
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field"
(ASTM C 31) and tested in accordance with "Test Method
for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens" (ASTM C 39).
405.7.3.3 Strength level of an individual class of
concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both the
following requirements are met:
1. Every arithmetic average of any three consecutive
strength tests equals or exceeds 1'C'
405.7.3.4 If either of the requirements of Section
405.7.3.3 are not met, steps shall be taken to increase the
average of subsequent strength test results. Requirements of
Section 405.7.5 shall be observed if the requirement of Item
2 of Section 405.7.3.3 is not met.
405.7.4 Field-Cured Specimens
405.7.4.1 If required by the building official, results
of strength tests of cylinders cured under field conditions
shall be provided.
405.7.4.2 Field-cured cylinders shall be cured under
field conditions, in accordance with "Practice for Making
and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM
C 31).
 4-14 CONCRETE, QUALITY, MIXING AND PLACING
405.7.4.3 Field-cured test cylinders shall be molded at
the same time and from the same samples as laboratory
cured test cylinders.
405.7.4.4 Procedures for protecting and curing
concrete shall be improved when strength of field-cured
cylinders at test age designated for determination of 1'c is
less than 85 percent of that of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders. The 85 percent limitation shall not apply if field
cured strength exceeds1'c by more than 3.5 MPa.
405.7.5 Investigation of Low-Strength Test Results
405.7.5.1 If any strength test (see Section 405.7.2.4)
of laboratory cured cylinders falls below specified values of
1'c by more than 3.5 MPa (see Section 405.7.3.3, Item 2) or
if tests of field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in
protection and curing (see Section 405.7.4.4), steps shall be
taken to ensure that load-carrying capacity of the structure
is not jeopardized.
405.7.5.2 lfthe likelihood of low-strength concrete is
confirmed and calculatiOns indicate that load-carrying
capacity is significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled from
f the area in question in accordance with "Method of
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete" (ASTM C 42) shall be permitted. In such case,
three cores shall be taken for each strength test more than
3.5 MPa below specified value of1'c.
405.7.5.3 If concrete in the structure will be dry under
,.11'
service conditions, cores shall be air dried (temperatures
15C to 25C, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for
seven days before test and shall be teste.d dry. If concrete in
'II ~ :; the structure will be more than superficially wet under
service conditions, cores shall be immersed in water for at
least 40 hours and be tested wet.
;: :: ~:
405.7.5.4 Concrete in an area represented by core
tests shall be considered structurally adequate if the average
ofthree cores is equal to at least 85 percent of1'o and if no
single core is less than 75 percent of1'o. Additional testing
of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core
strength results shall be permitted.
405.7.5.5 If criteria of Section 405.7.5.4 are not met,
and if structural adequacy remains in doubt, the responsible
authority shall be permitted to order a strength evaluation in
accordance with Section 420 for the questionable portion of
the structure, or take other appropriate action.
Association Of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
405.8 PREPARATION OF EQUIPMENT AND
PLACE OF DEPOSIT
405.8.1 Preparation before concrete placement shall
include the following:
1. All equipment for mixing and tran~porting concrete
shall be clean.
2. All debris shall be removed from spaces to be
occupied by concrete.
3. Forms shall be properly coated.
4. Masonry filler units that will be in contact with
concrete shall be well drenched.
5. Reinforcement shall be thoroUghly clean of dele
terious coatings.
6. Water shall be removed from place of deposit before
concrete is placed unless a tremie is to be used or
unless otherwise permitted by the engineer.
7. All laitance and other unsound material shall be
removed before additional concrete is placed against
hardened concrete.
405.9 MIXING
405.9.1 All concrete shall be mixed until there is a
uniform distribution of materials and shall be discharged
completely before mixer is recharged.
405.9.2 Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and
delivered in accordance with requirements of
"Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C 94)
or "Specifications for Concrete Made by Volumetric
Batching and Continuous Mixing" (ASTM C 685).
405.9.3 Job-mixed concrete shall be mixed in accordance
with the following:
1. Mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of an
approved type.
2. Mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by
the manufacturer.
3. Mixing shall be continued for at least 1-1/2 minutes
after all materials are in the drum, unless a shorter
time is shown to be satisfactory by the mixing,
uniformity tests of "Specifications for Ready-Mixed,
Concrete" (ASTM C 94).
4. Matedals handling, bat ching and mixing
conform to applicable provisions of "SJ)eciflc:atioll!I,'
for Ready-Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C 94).
 CONCRETE
Number of batches produced;
Proportions of materials used;
Approximate location of final deposit in
structure;
.4 Time and date of mixing and placing.
CONVEYING
1 Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to place
deposit by methods that will prevent separation or
materials.
0.2 Conveying equipment shall be capable of
a supply of concrete at site of placement without
of ingredients and without interruptions
to permit loss of plasticity between successive
DEPOSITING
Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as
racllcable in its final position to avoid segregation due to
HUlD(lImg or flowing.
Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that
conCI'ete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces
.bl::tw4llen reinforcement.
405.11.3 Concrete that has partially hardened or been
cointamlllatld by foreign materials shall not be deposited in
1.4 Re-tempered concrete or concrete that has been
re-mixed after initial set shall not be used unless approved
by the engineer.
405.11.5 After concreting is started, it shail be carried on
as a continuous operation until placing of a panel or section,
as defined by its boundaries or predetermined joints, is
completed, except as permitted or prohibited by Section
406.4.
405.11.6 Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be
generally level.
405.11.7 When construction Jomts are required, joints
shall be made in accordance with Section 406.4.
405.11.8 All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by
suitable means during placement and shall be thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and
into corners offorms.
National S1ructuraI Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-15
405.12 CURING
405.12.1 Concrete (other than high-early-strength) shall
be maintained above 10C and in a moist condition for at
least the first seven days after placement, except when
cured in accordance with Section 405.12.3.
405.12.2 High-early-strength concrete shall be maintained
above 10C and in a moist condition for at least the first
three days, except when cured in accordance with Section
405.12.3.
405.12.3 Accelerated Curing
405.12.3.1 Curing by high-pressure stearn, steam at
atmospheric pressure, heat and moisture or other accepted
processes, may be employed to accelerate strength gain and
reduce time of curing.
405.12.3.2 Accelerated curing shall provide a
compressive strength of the concrete at the load stage
considered at least equal to required design strength at that
load stage.
405.12.3.3 Curing process shall be such as to produce
concrete with a durability at least equivalent to the curing
method of Section 405.12.1 or 405.12.2.
405.12.4 When required by the engineer, supplementary
strength tests in accordance with Section 405.7.4 shall be
performed to assure that curing is satisfactory.
405.13 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to
ingredients, production methods, handling, placing,
protection and curing to prevent excessive concrete
temperatures or water evaporation that may impair required
strength or serviceability ofthe member or structure.
 r"" ..
_~"_'_M_~-~-.--~-~ .. ----~.-.---'-
4-16 FORMWORK. EMBEDDED PIPES AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
SECTION 406 - FORMWORK,
EMBEDDED PIPES AND
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
406.1 DESIGN OF FORMWORK
406.1.1 Forms shall result in a final structure that
conforms to shapes, lines and dimensions of the members
as required by the design drawings and specifications.
406.1.2 Forms shall be substantial and sufficiently tight to
prevent leakage of mortar.
406.1.3 Forms shall be properly braced or tied together to
maintain position and shape.
406.1.4 Forms and their supports shall be designed so as
not to damage previously placed structure.
406.1.5 Design of formwork shall include consideration
of the following factors:
1. Rate and method of placing concrete.
2. Construction loads, including vertical, horizontal and
impact loads.
3. Special form requirements for construction of shells,
~" folded plates, domes, architectural concrete or
similar types of elements.
406.1.6 Forms for prestressed concrete members shall be
designed and constructed to permit movement of the
member without damage during application of prestressing
force.
406.2 REMOVAL OF FORMS, SHORES AND
RESHORING
406.2.1 Removal of forms. Forms shall be removed in
such a manner as not to impair safety and serviceability of
the structure. Concrete to be exposed by form removal
shall have sufficient strength not to be damaged by removal
operation.
406.2.2 Removal of shores and reshoring. The
provisions of Section 406.2.2.1 through 406.2.2.3 shall
apply to slabs and beams except where cast on the ground.
406.2.2.1 Before starting construction, the contractor
shall develop a procedure and schedule for removal of
shores and installation of reshores and for calculating the
loads transferred to the structure during the process.
As$ociation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
l
1. The structural analysis and concrete strength data
used in planning and implementing form removal
and shoring shall be furnished by the contractor to
the building official when so requested.
2. No construction loads shall be supported on, or any
shoring removed from, any part of the structure
under construction except when that portion of the
structure in combination with remaining forming and
shoring system has sufficient strength to support
safely its weight and loads placed thereon.
3. Sufficient strength shall be demonstrated by
structural analysis considering proposed loads,
strength of forming and shoring system and concrete
strength data. Concrete strength data may be based
on tests of field-cured cylinders or, when approved
by the engineer, on other procedures to evaluate
concrete strength.
406.2.2.2 No construction loads exceeding the combi
nation of superimposed dead load plus specified live load
shall be supported on any unshored ponion of the structure
under construction, unless analysis' indicates adequate
strength to support such additional loads.
406.2.2.3 Form supports for prestressed concrete
members shall not be removed until sufficient prestressing
has been applied to enable prestressed members to carry
their dead load and anticipated construction loads.
406.3 CONDUITS AND PIPES EMBEDDED
IN CONCRETE
406.3.1 Conduits, pipes and sleeves of any material not
harmful to concrete and within limitations ofthis subsection
may be embedded in concrete with approval of the
engineer. provided they are not considered to replace
structurally the displaced concrete.
406.3.2 Conduits and pipes of aluminum shall not be
embedded in structural concrete unless effectively coated or
covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction or
electrolytic action between aluminum and steel.
406.3.3 Conduits, pipes and sleeves passing through a
slab, wall or beam shall not impair significantly the strength
of the construction.
406.3.4 Conduits and pipes, with their fittings, embedded
within a column shall not displace more than 4 percent of
the area of cross section on which strength is calculated or
which is required for fire protection.
406.3.5 Except when plans for conduits and pipes are
approved by the structural engineer, conduits and pipes
 CONCRETE 4-17

;Y;emb1edc1ed within a slab, wall or beam (other than those
. merely passing through) shall satisfy the following:
406.3.5.1 They shall not be larger in outside
dimension than one third the overall thickness of slab, wall
or beam in which they are embedded.
They shall be spaced not closer than three
diameters or widths on center.
406.3.5.3 They shall not impair significantly the
strength ofthe construction.
406.3.6 Conduits, pipes and sleeves may be c;onsidered as
replacing structurally in compression the displaced
concrete, provided:
406.3.6.1 They are not exposed to rusting or other
deterioration.
406.3.6.2 They are of uncoated or galvaniZed iron or
steel not thinner than standard Schedule 40 steel pipe..
406.4 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
406.4.1 Surface of concrete construction joints shall be
cleaned and laitance removed.
406.4.2 Immediately before new concrete is placed, all
construction joints shall be wetted and standing water
removed..
406.4.3 Construction joints shall be so made and located
as not to impair the strength of the structure. Provision shall
be made for transfer of shear and other forces through
construction joints. See Section 411.8.9.
406.4.4 Construction joints in floors shall be located
within the middle third of spans ofslabs, beams and girders.
Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum distance of two
times the width of intersecting beams.
406.4.5 Beams, girders or slabs supported by columns or
walls shall not be cast or erected until concrete in the
vertical support members is no longer plastic.

406.3.6.3 They have a nominal inside diameter not 406.4.6 Beams, girders, haunches, drop panels and
over 50 mm and are spaced not less than three diameters on capitals shall be placed monolithically as part of a slab
centers. system, unless otherwise shown in design drawings or
specifications.
406.3.7 Pipes and fittings shall be designed to resist
effects of the material, pressure and temperature to which.
they will be subjected.

406.3.8 No liquid, gas or vapor, except water not

exceeding 30. oC or 0.3 MPa pressure, shall be placed in the
pipes until the concrete has attained its design strength.

406.3.9 In solid slabs, piping, unless it is used for radiant

heating or snow melting, shall be placed between top and
bottom reinforcement. .

406.3.10 Concrete cover for pipes, conduit and fittings

shall not be less than 40 mm for concrete exposed to earth
or weather, or less than 20 mm for concrete not exposed to
weather or in contact with ground.

406.3.11 Reinforcement with an area not less than 0.002

times the area of concrete section shall be provided normal
to the piping.

406.3.12 Piping and conduit shall be so fabricated and

installed that cutting, bending or displacement of
reinforcement from its proper location will not be required.

National Structqral Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 4-18
DETAILS OF REINFORCEMENT
SECTION 407 - DETAILS OF
REINFORCEMENT
407.1 NOTATIONS
d distance from extreme compression fiber to
centroid of tension reinforcement, mm.
db nominal diameter of bar, wire or prestressing
strand, mm.
lei compressve strength of concrete at time of initial
prestress, MPa.
1;. specified yield strength of non-prestressed
reinforcement, MPa.
Ld development length, mm. See Section 412.
407.2 STANDARD HOOKS
"Standard hook" as used in this code is one of the
following:
, 407.2.1 180-degree bend plus 4db extension, but not less
than 60 mm at free end of bar.
407.2.2 90-degree bend plus 12db extension at free end of
bar.
407.2.3 For stirrup and tie hooks:
1. 16 mm diameter bar and smaller, 90-degree bend
plus 6db extension at free end of bar, or
2. 20 and 25 mm diameter bar, 90-degree bend, plus
12db extension at free end of bar, or
3. 25 mm diameter bar and smaller, 13 5-degree bend
plus 6db extension at free end of bar.
::::::::
407.2.4 Seismic hooks as defined in Section 421.2
407.3 MINIMUM BEND DIAMETERS
407.3.1 Diameter of bend measured on the inside of the
bar, other than for stirrups and ties in sizes 10 mm diameter
through 16 mm diameter, shall not be less than the values
in Table 407-1.
407.3.2 Inside diameter of bends for stirrups and ties shall
not be less than 4db for 16 mm diameter bar and smaller.
For bars larger than No. 16, diameter of bend shall be in
accordance with Table 407-1.
407.3.3 Inside diameter of bends in welded wire fabric
(plain or deformed) for stirrups and ties shall not be less
than 4db for deformed wire larger than D6 and 2db for all
L Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
other wires. Bends with inside diameter of less than 8db
shall not be less than 4db from nearest welded intersection.
Table 407-1 - Minimum Diameters of Bend
Bar Size Minimum Diameter
No. 10 through No 25 6db
No 28, 32 and 36 mm
8db
diameter
407.4 BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT
407.4.1 All reinforcement shall be bent cold, unless
otherwise permitted by the engineer.
407.4.2 Reinforcement partially embedded in concrete
shall not be field bent, except as shown on the design
drawings or permitted by the engineer.
407.5 SURFACE CONDITIONS OF
REINFORCEMENT
407.5.1 At the time concrete is placed, reinforcement
shall be free from mud, oil or other nonmetallic coatings
that decrease bond. Epoxy coatings of steel reinforcement
in accordance with Section 403.6.3.7 and 403.6.3.8 shall be
permitted.
407.5.2 Reinforcement, except prestressing tendons, with
rust, mill scale or a combination of both, shall be
considered satisfactory, provided the minimum dimensions
(including height of deformations) and weight of a hand
wire-brushed test specimen comply with applicable ASTM
specifications referenced in Section 403.6.
407.5.3 Prestressing tendons shall be clean and free of oiL
dirt, scale, pitting and excessive rust. A light coating of rust
shall be permitted.
407.6 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
407.6.1 Reinforcement, prestressing tendons and ducts
shall be accurately placed and adequately supported before
concrete is placed, and shall be secured against
displacement within tolerances of this section.
407.6.2 Unless otherwise specified by the engineer,
reinforcement, prestressing tendons and prestressing ducts
shall be placed within the following tolerances:
 CONCRETE
Tolerance for depth d. and mlfllmum
cover in flexural members, walls and compression
shall be as follows:
Tolerance on
Tolerance on
d
I Minimum Concrete
Cover
::;; 200 mm 10mm -lOmm
> 200 mm mm -12mm
that tolerance for the clear distance to formed soffits
be minus 6 mm and tolerance for cover shall not
minus one third (1/3) the minimum concrete cover
~~~n.r<>r1 by the approved plans or specifications.
Tolerance for longitudinal location of bends
and ends of reinforcement shall be 50 mm except at
discontinuous ends of members where tolerance shall be
12 mm.
Welded wire fabric (with wire size not greater
than W5 or D5) used in slabs not exceeding 3 meters in
span shall be permitted to be curved from a point near the
top of slab over the support to a point near the bottom of
slab at midspan, provided such reinforcement is either
continuous over, or securely anchored at, support.
407.6.4 Welding of crossing bars shall not be permitted
for assembly of reinforcement.
Ey:ceptions:
1. Reinforcing steel bars are not required by design.
2. When specifically approved by the engineer, welding
of crossing bars for assembly purposes in Seismic
Zone 2 may be permitted, prov;ded that data are
submitted to the engineer to show that there is no
detrimental effect on the action qf the structural
member as a result ofwelding ofthe crossing bars.
407.7 SPACING LJMITS FOR
REINFORCEMENT
407.7.1 The minimum clear spacing between parallel bars
in a layer shall be db but not less than 25 mm. See also
Section 403.4.2.
407.7.2 Where parallel reinforcement is placed in two or
more layers, bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly
above bars in the bottom layer with clear distance between
layers not less than 25 mm.
National structural Code of the Philippines. Volume 1
4-19
407.7.3 In spirally reinforced or tied reinforced
compression members, clear distance between longitudinal
bars shall not be less than 1.5dh or less than 40 mm. See
also Section 403.4.2.
I
I 407.7.4 Clear distance limitation between bars shall apply
also to the clear distance between a contact lap splice and
adjacent splices or bars.
407.7.5 In walls and slabs other than concrete joist
construction, primary flexural reinforcement shaH not be
spaced farther apart than three times the wall or slab
thickness, nor farther than 450 mm.
407.7.6 Bundled Bars
407.7.6.1 Groups of parallel reinforcing bars bundled
in contact to act as a unit shall be limited to four bars in onl'
bundle.
407.7.6.2 Bundled bars shall be enclosed within
stirrups or ties.
407.7.6.3 Bars larger than 36 mm diameter shall not
be bundled in beams.
407.7.6.4 Individual bars within a bundle terminated
within the span of flexural members shall terminate at
different points with at least 40db stagger.
407.7.6.5 Where spacing limitations and minimum
concrete cover are based on bar diameter d". a unit of
bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar of a diamet~r
derived from the equivalent total area.
407.7.7 Prestressing tendons and ducts
407.7.7.1 Center-to-center spacing of pretensioning
tendons at each end of a member shall not be less than 5dh
for wire, nor 4db for strands, except that if concrete strength
at transfer of prestress,!,e; is 30 MPa or more, minimum
center to center spacing of strands shall be 45 mm for
strands of 12 mm nominal diameter or smaller and 50 mm
for strands of 15 mm nominal diameter. See also Section
403.4.2. Closer vertical spacing and bundling of tendons
shall be permitted in the middle portion of a span.
407.6.7.2 Bundling of post-tensioning ducts shall be
permitted if it is shown that concrete can be satisfactorily
placed and if provision is made to prevent the tendons,
when tensioned, from breaking through the duct.
 4-20 DETAILS OF REINFORCEMENT

407.8.1 Cast-in-place concrete _ (nonprestressed). The

following minimum concrete cover shall be provided for 407.8.3 Prestressed conrrete.
reinforcement:
Minimum 407.8.3.1 The following minimum concrete cover shall
Cover be provided for prestressed and nonprestressed
1. Concrete cast against and permanently reinforcement, ducts and end fittings, except as provided in
exposed to earth ..................................... 75 mm Sections 407.8.3.2 and 407.8.3.3.
Minimum
2. Concrete exposed to earth or weather:
Cover
20 mm through 36 rom diameter bar ....... . 50 rom 1. Concrete cast against and
16 rom diameter bar, W31 or D31
permanently exposed to earth 75mm
wire, and smaller ................................. . 40 rom
2. Concrete exposed to earth or weather:
3. Concrete not exposed to weather or in
Wall panels, slabs, joists ......................... 25 mm
contact with ground:
Other members ....................................... 40 mm
a. Slabs, walls, joists:
45 and 60 mm diameter bars ... ........ ..... 40 mm 3. Concrete not exposed to weather or in
36 mm diameter bar and smaller 20 mm contact with ground:
a. Slabs, walls, joists ............................. 20 mm

b. Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement, ties, b. Beams, columns:
stirrups, spirals ................................... 40 mm Primary reinforcement 40 rom
Ties, stirrups, spirals 25mm
c. Shells, folded plate members:
20 mm diameter bar and larger 20 rom c. Shells, folded plate members:
16 mm diameter bar, W31 or D31 16 mm diameter bars, W31 or
wire, and smaller ................................ 12 mm D31 wire, and smaller .................. 10 mm
Other reinforcement ......... .. ........... db but not
407.8.2 Precast concrete (manufactured under plant less than 20 mm
control conditions). The following minimum concrete cover
~ IIIIII~I
III
shall be provided for reinforcement: 407.8.3.2 For prestressed concrete members exposed
Minimum to earth, weather or corrosive environments, and in which
Cover permissible tensile stress of Section 418.5.2, Item 3, is
1. Concrete exposed to earth or weather: exceeded, minimum cover shall be increased 50 percent.
a. Wall panels:
45 mm and 60 mm diameter bars 40mm 407.8.3.3 For prestressed concrete members
36 mm diameter bar and smaller 20mm manufactured under plant control conditions, mlmmum
concrete cover for nonprestressed reinforcement shall be as
b. Other members: required in Section 407.8.2.
45 mm and 60 rom diameter bars ...... 50 mm
20 rom through 36 mm diameter bar 40 mm
407.8.4 Bundled bars. For bundled bars, mIDImum
16 mm diameter bar W31 or D31 wire, and concrete cover shall be equal to the equivalent diameter of
smaller ........................................... 30 rom

the bundle, but need not be greater than 50 mm; except for
2. Concrete not exposed to weather or in concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth,
contact with ground: minimum cover shall be 75 mm.
a. Slabs, walls, joists:
45 rom and 60 rom diameter bars ........ 30 mm 407.8.5 Corrosive environments. In corrosive
36 rom diameter bar and smaller ...... 15 mm environments or other severe exposure conditions, amount
b. Beams, columns: of concrete protection shall be suitably increased, and
Primary reinforcement ................. db but not denseness and nonporosity of protecting concrete shall be
less than 15 mm and considered, or other protection shall be provided.
need not exceed 40 mm
Ties, stirrups, spirals ......................... 10 rom 407.8.6 Future extensions. Exposed reinforcement,
inserts and plates intended for bonding with future
c. Shells, folded plate members: extensions shall be protected from corrosion.
20 mm diameter bar and larger 15 mm
16 mm diameter bar, W31 or D31 407.8.7 Fire protection. When a thickness of cover for
wire, and smaller ........................... 10 mm fire protection greater than the minimum concrete

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
in Section 407.8 is required, such greater
shall be used.
SPECIAL REINFORCEMENT
AILS FOR COLUMNS
Offset bars. Offset bent longitudinal bars shall
to the following:
1.1 Slope of inclined portion of an offset bar
axis ofcolumn shall not exceed 1 in 6.
. 1.2 Portions of bar above and below an offset
be parallel to axis ofcolumn.
Horizontal support at offset bends shall be
by lateral ties, spirals or parts of the floor
Horizontal support provided shall be designed
resist one and one-half times the horizontal component of
computed force in the inclined portion of an offset bar.
ties or spirals, if used, shall be placed not more than
50 mm from points of bend.
.9.1.4 Offset bars shall be bent before placement
the forms. See Section 407.4.
9.1.5 Where a column face is offset 75 mm or
longitudinal bars shall not be offset bent. Separate
lap spliced with the longitudinal bars adjacent to
offset column faces, shall be provided. Lap splices shall
conform to Section 412.18.
....;,; ~
407.9.2 Steel cores. Load transfer ill structural steel cores
. of composite compression members. ~ha.ll be provided by
the following:
.9.2.1 Ends of structural steel cores shall be
.;tCcurately finished to bear at end-bearing splices, with
positive provision for alignment of one core above the other
in concentric contact.
407.9.2.2 At end-bearing splices, bearing shall be
considered effective to transfer not more than 50 percent of
the total compressive stress in the steel core.
407.9.2.3 Transfer of stress between column base and
footing shall be designed in accordance with Section 415.9.
407.9.2.4 Base of structural steel section shall be
designed to transfer the total load from the entire composite
member to the footing; or, the base may be designed to
transfer the load from the steel core only, provided ample
concrete section is available for transfer of the portion of
the total load carried by the reinforced concrete section to
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-21
the footing by compression in the concrete and by
reinforcement.
407.10 CONNECTIONS
407.10.1 At connections of principal framing. elements
(such as beams and columns), enclosure shall be provided
for splices of continuing reinforcement and for anchorage
of reinforcement terminating in such connections .
407.10.2 Enclosure at connections may consist of external
concrete or internal closed ties, spirals or stirrups .
407.11 LATERAL REINFORCEMENT FOR
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
407.11.1 Lateral reinforcement for compression members
shall conform to the provisions of Sections 407.11.4 and
407.11.5 and, where shear or torsion reinforcement is
required, .shall also conform to provisions of Section 411.
407.11.2 Lateral reinforcement requirements for
composite compression members shall conform to Section
410.17. Lateral reinforcement requirements for prestressing
tendons shall conform to Section 418.12.
407.11.3 It shall be permitted to waive the lateral
reinforcement requirements of Sections 407.11, 410.17 and
418.12 where tests andstructural analyses show adequate
strength and feasibility ofconstruction.
407.11.4 Spirals. Spiral reinfprcement for compression
membersshal~.confOrn1"'to Bection 410.10.3 and to the
following:
407.11.4.1 Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced
continuous bar or wire of such size and so assembled as to
permit handling and placing without distortion from
designed dimensions.
407.11.4.2 For cast-in-place construction, size of
spirals shall not be less 10 mm diameter.
407.11.4.3 Clear spacing between spirals shall not
exceed 75 mm or be less than 25 mm. See also Section
403.4.2.
407.11.4.4 Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall be
provided by one and one-half extra turns of spiral bar or
"vire at each end ofa spiral unit. .
407.11.4.5 Spiral reinforcement shall be spliced, if
needed, by anyone ofthe following methods:
4-22 DETAilS OF REINFORCEMENT

a) Lap splices not less than the larger of 300 mm and angle of not more than 135 degrees and a bar shall be not
the length indicated in one of (1) through (5) below: farther than 150 mm clear on each side along the tie from
(I) deformed uncoated bar or wire ........ 48 db
such a laterally supported bar. Where longitudinal bars are
(2) plain uncoated bar or wire ............. ... 72 db
located around the perimeter of a circle, a complete circular
tie shall be permitted.
(3) epoxy-coated deformed bar or wire... 72 dh
(4) plain uncoated bar or wire with a 407.11.5.4 Ties shall be located vertically not more
standard stirrup or tie hook in than one half a tie spacing above the top of footing or slab
accordance with Section 407.2.3 in any story and shall be spaced as provided herein to not
at ends of lapped spiral more than one half a tie spacing below the lowest horizontal
reinforcement. The hooks shall be reinforcement in slab or drop panel above.
embedded within the core
confined by the spiral 407.11.5.5 Where beams or brackets frame from four
reinforcement ............................... 48 db directions into a column, termination of ties not more than
(5) epoxy-coated deformed bar or 75 mm below reinforcement in shallowest of such beams or
wire with a standard stirrup or tie brackets shall be permitted.
hook in accordance with Section
407.2.3 at ends of lapped spiral 407.11.5.6 Column ties shall have hooks as specified
reinforcement. The hooks shall be in Section 407.2.3.
embedded within the core
confined by the spiral
reinforcement ................................. 48 db 407.12 LATERAL REINFORCEMENT FOR
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
b) Full mechanical or welded splices in accordance
with Section 412.15.3. 407.12.1 Compression reinforcement in beams shall be

enclosed by ties or stirrups satisfying the size and spacing

407.11.4.6 Spirals shall extend from top of footing or limitations in Section 407.11.5 or by welded wire fabric of

slab in any story to level of lowest horizontal reinforcement equivalent area. Such ties or stirrups shall be provided

in members supported above. throughout the distance where compression reinforcement

is required.

407.11.4.7 Where beams or brackets do not frame into

all sides of a column, ties shall extend above termination of 407.12.2 Lateral reinforcement for flexural
spiral to bottom of slab or drop panel. members subject to stress reversals or to torsion at supports

shall consist of closed ties, closed stirrups,

or spiral
407.11.4.8 In columns with capitals, spirals shall extending around the flexural reinforcement.

extend to a level at which the diameter or width of capital is

two times that of the column. 407.12.3 Closed ties or stirrups may be formed in

piece by overlapping standard stirrup or tie

end
407.11.4.9 Spirals shall be held firmly in place and around a longitudinal bar, or formed in one or two

true to line. lap spliced with a Class B splice (lap of 131J ), or <>nrhrofP.I

in accordance with Section 412.14.

407.11.5 Ties. Tie reinforcement for compresslon

members shall conform to the following: 407.13 SHRINKAGE AND TEMPERATURE
407.11.5.1 All nonprestressed bars shall be enclosed
REINFORCEMENT
bv lateral ties, at least 10 mm diameter in size for
407.13.1 Reinforcement for shrinkage and +"'n'npr~T1l

l~ngitudinal bars 32 mm diameter or smaller, and at least 12

stresses normal to flexural reinforcement shall be
m; diameter in size for 36 diameter bars and bundled
in structural slabs where the flexural reinforcement
longitudinal bars. Deformed wire or welded wire fabric of
in one direction only.
equivalent area shall be permitted.
407.11.5.2 Vertical spacing ofties shall not exceed 16
407.13.1. 1 Shrinkage and temperature rei
longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar or wire diameters, or
shall be provided in accordance with either
least dimension ofthe compression member.
407.l3.2 or 407.13.3 below.
407.11.5.3 Ties shall be arranged such that every
comer and alternate longitudinal bar shall have lateral
support provided by the comer of a tie with an included

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
407.13.1.2 Where shrinkage and temperature
movements are significantly restrained, the requirements of
Sections 408.3.4 and 409.3.7 shall be considered.
407.13.2 Deformed reinforcement conforming to Section
403.6.3 used for shrinkage and temperature reinforcem~nt
shall be provided in accordance with the following:
407.13.2.1 Area of shrinkage and temperature
reinforcement shall provide at least the following ratios of
reinforcement area to gross concrete area, but not less than
0.0014:
1. Slabs where Grade 275 or 345
deformed bars are used .......................... 0.0020
2. Slabs where Grade 415 deformed
bars or welded wire fabric (smooth or
deformed) are used ................................ 0.0018
3. Slabs where reinforcement with yield
stress exceeding 415 MPa measured
at a yield strain of 0.35 percent is
used ................................................ .0.0018 x415
h of at least 135 degrees. Stirrups need not be extended
407.13.2.2 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement
shall be spaced not farther apart than five times the slab
thickness, or 450 mm.
407.13.2.3 At all sections where required,
reinforcement for shrinkage and temperature stresses shall
develop the specified yield strength h in tension in
accordance with Section 412.
407.13.3 Prestressing tendons conforming to Section
403.6.5 used for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement
shall be provided in accordance with the following:
407.13.3.1 Tendons shall be proportioned to provide a
minimum average compressive stress of 1 MPa ori gross
concrete area using effective prestress, after losses, in
accordance with Section 418.7.
407.13.3.2 Spacing of prestressed tendons shall not
exceed 1.8 meters.
407.13.3.3 When the spacing of prestressed tendons
exceeds 1.4 meters, additional bonded shrinkage and
temperature reinforcement conforming with Section
407.13.2 shall be provided between the tendons at slab
edges extending from the slab edge for a distance equal to
the tendon spacing.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-23
407.14 REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL
INTEGRITY
407.14.1 In the detailing of reinforcement and
connections, members of a structure shall be effectively tied
together to improve integrity ofthe overall structure.
407.14.2 For cast-in-place construction, the following
shall constitute minimum requirements:
407.14.2.1 In joist construction, at least one bottom
bar shall be continuous or shall be spliced over the support
with a Class A tension splice and at non-continuous
supports be terminated with a standard hook.
407.14.2.2 Beams at the perimeter of the structure
shall have at least one sixth of the tension reinforcement
required for negative moment at the support and one
quarter of the positive moment reinforcement required at
midspan made continuous around the perimeter and tied
with closed stirrups or stirrups anchored around the
negative moment reinforcement with a hook having a bend
through any joints. When splices are needed, the required
continuity shall be provided with top reinforcement spliced
at midspan and bottom reinforcement spliced at or near the
support with Class A tension splices.
407.14.2.3 In other than perimeter beams, when
closed stirrups are not provided, at least one-quarter of the
positive moment reinforcement required at midspan shaIl be
continuous or shall be spliced over the support with a Class
A tension splice and at non continuous supports be
terminated with a standard hook.
407.14.2.4 For two-way slab construction, see Section
413.4.8.5.
407.14.3 For precast concrete construction, tension ties
shall be provided in the transverse, longitudinal, nori
vertical directions and around the perimeter of the stt1lcturt
to effectively tie elements together. The provisions 0['
Section 416.6 shall apply.
407.14.4 For lift-slab copstruction, see Sections 413.4 /S.U
and 418.13.6.
 A.NAL YSIS AND DESIGN
4-24

SECTION 408 - ANALYSIS AND 408.3 LOADING

DESIGN 408.3.1 Design provisions of this code are based on the
assumption that structures shall be designed to resist all
applicable loads.
408.1 NOTATIONS

408.3.2 Service loads shall be in accordance with Chapter

As area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, mm.
2 with appropriate live load reductions as permitted therein.
A'$ area of compression reinforcement, square
millimeters. 408.3.3 In design for wind and earthquake loads, integral
b width of compression face of member, mm. structural parts shall be designed to resist the total lateral
d distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid loads.
oftension reinforcement, mm.
Ee modulus of elasticity of concrete, megapascals. See 408.3.4 Consideration shall be given to effects of forces
Section 408.6.1. due to prestressing, crane loads, vibration. impact,
Es modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, shrinkage, temperature changes, creep, expansion of
megapascals. See Sections 408.6.2 and 408.6.3. shrinkage-compensating concrete and unequal settlement of
Fe spscified compressive strength of concrete, supports.
megapascals.
h specified yield strength of nonprestressed
reinforcement, megapascals. 408.4 METHODS OF ANALYSIS
In clear span for positive moment or shear and average
of adjacent clear spans for negative moment. 408.4.1 All members of frames or continuous
Ve nominal shear strength provided by concrete. construction shall be designed for the maximum effects of
we' unit weight of concrete, kilograms per cubic meter. factored loads as determined by the theory of elastic
Wu . factored load per unit length of beam or per unit
analysis, except as modified by Section 408.4. It is
area of slab. permitted to simplifY the design by using the assumptions
111 factor defined in Section 410.3.7.3. specified in Sections 408.7 through 408.10.
tt net tensile strain in extreme tension steel at nominal
strength. 408.4.2 Except for prestressed concrete, approximate
p ratiQofnonprestressed tension reinforcement. methods of frame analysis may be used for buildings of
A/bd usual types of construction, spans and story heights,
p' ratio of nonprestressed compression reinforcement.
A'/bd 408.4.3 As an alternate to frame analysis, the following
Ph rei~f'o~cement ratio producing balanced strain approximate moments and shears shall be permitted to be
. conditions, See Section 410.4.2. used in design of continuous beams and one-way slabs
.strength-reduction factor. See Section 409.4. (slabs reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one
direction), provided:

" :_:~08.2 DESIGN METHODS 1. There are two or more spans,

408.1.1 In design of structural concrete, members shall be
propori.io~ed . for adequate strength in accordance with
provisions Of this chapter, using load factors and strength
reduction factors specified in Section 409.
408.2.2 Nonprestressed reinforced concrete members
shall be pernlltted to be designed using the provisions of
Section 426.
2. Spans are approximately equal, with th~ larger of
two adjacent spans not greater than the shorter by
more than 20 percent,
3. Loads are uniformly distributed,
4. Unit live load does not exceed three times unit dead
load, and

408.2.3 Design of reinforced concrete using Section 425 5, Members are prismatic.
shall be permitted.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
4-25

POSITIVE MOMENT: 408.5.4 For criteria on moment redistribution for

prestressed concrete members, see Section418.1IA.
End spans
Discontinuous end unrestrained w" 1/11 I
Discontinuous end integral with
408.6 MODULUS OF ELASTICITY
support ,. ... ,. ................................ w"I/1I4

Interior spans ,. ,. ........................ ,. ...... .

408.6.1 Modulus .of elasticity Ec for concrete s~all be
permitted to be taken as w/ 50.043..Jf'c (in MPa) for
NEGATIVE MOMENT: values of We between 1,500 and 2,500 kg/m 3 For
normal. weight concrete, Ec shall be permitted to betaken
at exterior face of first interior support
as 4700 ..J f ' c ' .
Two spans .. ,........................................ w,J/19
More than two spans .......................... wuln21I0
408.6.2 Modulus of elasticity Es for nonprestressed
at other faces of interior supports ............ wJn2111
reinforcement shall be permitted to be taken as 20'0,000
MPa.
at face of all supports for: slabs with
spans not exceeding 3 meters; and
408.6.3 Modulus of elasticity Es for prestressing tendons
beams where ratio of sum of column
shall be determined by tests or supplied by the
stiffnesses to beam stiffness exceeds "';i",
manufacturer.
eight at each end of the span .................. wJ/!l2
at interior face of exterior support for

members built integrally with

408.7 STIFFNESS
supports:

where support is a spandrel beam ....... wJ/124

408.7.1 Use of any set of reasonable assumptions shall be
where support is a column .................. w,//116
permitted for computing relative flexural and torsional
stiffnesses of columns, walls, floors and roof systems. The
SHEAR: assumptions adopted shall be consistent throughout .,
analysis.
at face of first interior support .............. 1. 15 w"l j2

at face of all other supports ........................ wulj2

408.7.2 Effect of haunches shall be considered both in
determining moments and in design of memb.ers.

408.5 REDISTRIBUTION OF NEGATIVE 408.8 SPAN LENGTH

MOMENTS IN CONTINUOUS
NONPRESTRESSED FLEXURAL MEMBERS
408.5.1 Except where approximate values for moments
are used, it is permitted to increase or decrease negative
moments calculated by elastic theory at supports of
continuous flexural members for any assumed loading
arrangement by not more than
408.8.1 Span length of members not built integrally with
supports shall be considered the clear span plus depth of
member, but need not exceed distance between centers of
. . l~"
supports.
408.8.2 In analysis of frames or continuous construction

20.1
( ~I'\ . percent
for determination of moments, span length shall be taken as
the distance center to center of supports.
\. Ph j
408.8.3 For beams built integrally with supports, design
on the basis of moments at faces of support' shall be
408.5.2 The modified negative moments shall be used for permitted.
calculating moments at sections within the spans.
408.8.4 It shall be permitted to analyze solid or ribbed
408.5.3 Redistribution of negative moments shall be made slabs built integrally with supports, with clear spans not
only when the section, at which moment is reduced, is so more than 3 meters, as continuous slabs on knife edge
designed that P or (P PI is not greater than 0.50 {lb, supports with spans equal to the clear spans of the slab and
where width of beams otherwise neglected.
Pb = 0.85Pl f' c ( 600 J (408-1 )
Iv l600+ f"

National Stru.ctur~ Code of the Philippine!! Volume 1

 4-26 ANALVSIS AND DESIGN
408.9 COLUMNS
408.9.1 Columns shall be designed to resist the axial
forces from factored loads on all floors or roof and the
maximum moment from factored loads on a single adjacent
span of the floor or roof under consideration. Loading
condition giving the maximum ratio of moment to axial
load shall also be considered.
408.9.2 In frames or continuous construction, consi
deration shall be given to the effect of unbalanced floor or
roof loads on both exterior and interior columns and of
eccentric loading due to other causes.
408.9.3 In computing gravity load moments in columns, it
shall be permitted to assume far ends of columns built
integrally with the structure to be fixed.
408.9.4 Resistance to moments at any floor or roof level
shall be provided by distributing the moment between
columns immediately above and below the given floor in
proportion to the relative column stiffnesses and conditions
of restraint.
t For other T-beams, only the effective overhanging slab
408.10 ARRANGEMENT OF LIVE LOAD
408.10.1 It is permissible to assume that:
I. the live load is applied only to the floor or roof under
consideration, and
2. the far ends of columns built integrally with the
structure are considered to be fixed.
408.10.2 It is permitted to assume that the arrangement of
live load is limited to combinations of:
I. Factored dead load on all spans with full-factored
live load on two adjacent spans, and
2. Factored dead load on all spans with full-factored
live load on alternate spans.
408.11 T-BEAM CONSTRUCTION
408.10.1 In T-beam construction, the flange and web shall
be built integrally or otherwise effectively bonded together.
..f08.11.2 Width of slab effective as a T-beam flange shall
not exceed one fourth the span length of the beam, and the
etfective overhanging slab width on each side of the web
shall not exceed:
Eight times the slab thickness, or
One haif the clear distance to the next web.
Association of Structural Enaineers of the Philippines
408.11.3 For beams with a slab on one side only, the
effective overhanging flange width shall not exceed:
1. One twelfth the span length ofthe beam,
2. Six times the slab thickness, or
3. One half the clear distance to the next web.
408.11.4 Isolated beams, in which the T-shape is used to
provide a flange for additional compression area, shall have
a flange thickness not less than one half the width of web
and an effective flange width not more than four times the
width of web.
408.11.5 Where primary flexural reinforcement in a slab
that is considered as a T-beam flange (excluding joist
construction) is parallel to the beam, reinforcement
perpendicular to the beam shall be provided in the top of
the slab in accordance with the following:
408.11.5.1 Transverse reinforcement shall be
designed to carry the factored load on the overhanging slab
width assumed to act as a cantilever. For isolated beams,
the full width of overhanging flange shall be considered.
width need be considered.
408.11.5.2 Transverse reinforcement shall be spaced
not farther apart than five times the slab thickness or 450
mm.
408.12 JOIST CONSTRUCTION
408.12.1 Joist construction consists of a monolithic
combination of regularly spaced ribs and a top slab
arranged to span in one direction or two orthogonal
directions.
408.12.2 Ribs shall not be less than 100 mm in width and
shall have a depth of not more than three and one-half times
the minimum width of rib.
408.12.3 Clear spacing between ribs shall not exceed 750
mm.
408.12.4 Joist construction not meeting the limitations of
Sections 408.12.1 through 408.12.3 shall be designed as
slabs and beams .
408.12.5 When permanent burned clay or concrete tile
fillers of material having a unit compressive strength at
least equal to that of the specified strength of concrete in
the joists are used:
408.12.5.1 For shear and negative-moment strength
computations, it shall be permitted to include the vertical
 CONCRETE
shells of fillers in contact with ribs. Other portions of fillers
shall not be included in strength computations.
408.12.5.2 Slab thickness over permanent fillers shall
not be less than one twelfth the clear distance between ribs
nor less than 40 mm.
408.12.5.3 In one-way joists, reinforcement normal to
the ribs shall be provided in the slab as required by Section
407.13.
408.12.6 When removable forms or fillers not
complying with Section 408.12.5 are used:
408.12.6.1 Slab thickness shall not be less than one
twelfth the clear distance between ribs, or less than 50
mm.
408.11.6.2 Reinforcement normal to the ribs shall be
provided in the slab as required for flexure, considering
load concentrations, if any, but not less than required
by Section 407. 13.
408.12.7 Where conduits or pipes as permitted by Section
406.3 are embedded within the slab, slab thickness shall be
at least 25 mm greater than the total overall depth of the
conduits or pipes at any point. Conduits or pipes shall not
impair significantly the strength of the construction.
408.12.8 For joist construction, contribution of concrete
to shear strength Vc is permitted to be 10 percent more than
that specified in Section 411. It shall be permitted to
increase shear strength using shear reinforcement or by
widening the ends of the ribs.
408.13 SEPARATE FLOOR FINISH
408.13.1 A floor finish shall not be included as part of a
structural member unless placed monolithically with the
floor slab or designed in accordance with requirements of
Section 417.
408.13.2 It shall be permitted to consider all concrete
floor finishes may be considered as part of required cover
or total thickness for non structural considerations
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-27
SECTION 409 - STRENGTH AND
SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS
409.1 NOTATIONS
Ag gross area of section, mm2
A's = area of compression reinforcement, mm 2 .
b width of compression face of member, mm
c distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral
=
axis in millimeters.
D dead loads, or related internal moments and forces.
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
of tension reinforcement, mm.
d' = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
of compression reinforcement, mm.
d, = distance from extreme tension fiber to centroid of
tension reinforcement, mm.
dt distance from extreme compression fiber to extreme
tension steel, mm.
E = load effects of earthquake, or related internal
moments and forces.
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa. See Section
408.6.1
F loads due to weight and pressures of fluids with
well defined densities and controllable maximum
heights, or related internal moments and forces.
Pc = specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa.
~f' c = square root of specified compressive strength of
concrete, MPa.
let average splitting tensile strength of lightweight i
ag.,.gregate concrete, MPa.
/r modulus ofrupture of concrete, MPa.
.h specified yield strength of nonprestressed
reinforcement, MPa.
H = loads due to weight and pressure of soil, water in
soil, or other materials, or related internal moments
and forces.
h overall thickness of member, mm.
Ier moment of inertia of cracked section transformed to
concrete, mm4.
Ie effective moment of inertia for computation of
deflection, mm4
!" moment of inertia of b'TOSS concrete section about
4
centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement, mm
L live loads, or related internal moments and forces.
/ span length of beam or one-way slab, as defined in
Section 408.8; clear projection of cantilever, mm.
In length of clear span in long direction of two-way
construction, measured face to face of supports in
slabs without beams and face to face of beams or
other supports in other cases.
Al" maximum moment in member at stage deflection is
computed.
!t.4cr = cracking moment. See Equation (409-8).
 4-28 STRI;NGTH AND SERVICEABIUTY REQUIREMENTS

nominal axial load strength at balanced strain

409.3.2 If resistance to structural effects of a specified
conditions. See Section 41004.2.
wi.nd load W are included in design, the following
P" nominal axial load strength at given eccentricity.
combinations of D, L and W shall be investigated to
T cumulative effects of temperature, creep, shrinkage, determine the greatest required strength U:
differential settlement and shrinkage compensating
concrete. U = 0.75 (lAD -+ 1.7 L + 1.7 W) (409-2)
U required strength to resist factored loads or related
internal moments and forces. where load combinations shall include both full value and
W wind load, or related internal moments and forces. zero value of L to determine the more severe condition, and
weight of concrete, kg/m3 .
distance from centroidal axis of gross section, U 0.9D -+ 1.3 W (409-3)
neglecting reinforcement, to extreme fiber in
tension. but for any combination ofD, L and W, required strength U
a ratio ot flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural shall not be less than Equation (409-1).
stiffness of a width of slab bounded laterally by
center line of adjacent panel (if any) on each side of 409.3.3 If resistance to specified earthquake loads or
beam~ See Section 413. forces E are included in design, the following combinations
average value of (l': for all beams on edges of a ofD, L and E shall be investigated to determine the greatest
panel. required strength U:
ratio of clear spans in long-to-short direction of
two-way slabs. U = l.3D + 1.1L + 1.1E (409-4)
= time-dependent factor for sustained load. See
Section 409.6.2.5. where load combinations shall include both full value and
~ = net tensile strain in extreme tension steel at nominal zero value of L to determine the more severe condition, and
strength.
A = multiplier for additional long-time deflection as U 0.9D + 1.1E (409-5)
defined in Section 409.6.2.5.
but for any combination of D, L and E, required strength U
p ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement,
shall not be less than Equation (409-1).
A/bd.
p' reinforcement ratio for nonprestressed compression
409.3.4 If resistance to earth pressure H is included in
reinforcement, A '/bd
design, required strength U shall be at least equal to
" "
Ph reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain
conditions. See Section 423.10.3.2.
U lAD+1.7L+1.7H (409-6)
~ strength-reduction factor. See Section 409.4.

except that where D or L reduces the effect of H, 0.9D

shall be substituted for lAD and zero value of L shall be
::::: 409.2 GENERAL used to determine the greatest required strength U. For any
combination of D, L and H, required strength U shall not
409.2.1 Structures and structural members shall be be less than Equation (409-1).
designed to have design strengths at all sections at least
'hi,
,,',
equal to the required strengths calculated for the factored 409.3.5 If resistance to loadings due to weight and
loads and forces in such combinations as are stipulated in pressure of fluids with well-defined densities and
this code. controllable maximum heights F is included in design, such
loading shall have a load factor of 1.4 and be added to all
409.2.2 Members also shall meet all other requirements loading combinations that include live load.
of this code to ensure adequate performance at service load
levels. 409.3.6 If resistance to impact effects is taken into
account in design, such effects shall be included with live
load L.
409.3 REQUIRED STRENGTH
409.3.7 Where structural effects T of differential
409.3.1 Required strength U to resist dead load D and live settlement, creep, shrinkage, expansion of shrinkage
load L shall be at least equal to: compensating concrete or temperature change may be
U 104 D + 1.7 L (409-1) significant in design, required strength U shall be at least
equal to

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
4-29

U=0.75(I.4D + l.4T+ l.7L)
but required strength U shall not be less than
U 1.4 (D + 7)
Estimations of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage,
expansion of shrinkage-compensating concrete or tempe
rature change shall be based on a realistic assessment of
such effects occurring in service.
409.3.8 Load Factors. For post-tensioned anchorage
zone design, a load factor of 1.2 shall be applied to the
maximum tendon jacking force.
(409-7) than 0.70, ; shall be permitted to be increased linearly to
0.90 as ; Pn decreases from 0.10 /,c Ag to zero.
For other reinforced members, ; shall be permitted to be
increased linearly to 0.90 as ; P" decreases from O.lO/,c A~
(409-8)
or ;Pb , whichever is smaller, to zero.
409.4.2.3 Shear and torsion (See also
Section 409.4.4 for shear walls and frames in
Seismic Zones 4) ................................................. 0.85
409.4.2.4 Bearing on concrete (except for
post-tensioning anchorage zones) ......................... 0.70
409.4.2.5 Post-tensioned anchorage zones .. 0.85

409.4.3 Development lengths specified in Section 412 do

409.4 DESIGN STRENGTH
not require a ; factor.
409.4:.1 Design strength provided by a member, its
409.4.4 In Seismic Zone 4, strength-reduction factors
connection to other members and its cross sections, in terms
of flexure, axial load, shear and tension, shall be taken as ; shall be as given above except for the following:
the nominal strength calculated in accordance with
requirements and assumptions of this chapter, multiplied by 409.4.4.1 The shear strength-reduction factor shall be
0.6 for the design of walls, topping slabs used as
a str~ngth-reduction factor ; in Sections 409.4.2 and
diaphragms over precast concrete members and structural
409.4.4.
framing members, with the exception of joints, if t~eir
nominal shear strength is less than the shear correspondmg
409.4.1.1 If the structural framing includes primary
to development of their nominal flexural strength. .The
members of other materials proportioned to satisfy the load
nominal flexural strength shall be detemuned
factor combinations of Section 2.4 of ASCE 7, it shall be
corresponding to the most critical factored axial lo~ds
permitted to proportion the concrete members using the set
including earthquake effects. The shear strength reductIOn
of strength-reduction factors, ;, listed in Section 425 and
factor for joints shall be 0.85.
the load-factor combinations in ASCE 7.
409.4.4.2 Reinforcement used for diaphragm chords
409.4.2 Strength-reduction factor. Strength-reduction
or collectors placed in topping slabs over precast concrete
factor ; Shall be as follows: members shall be designed using a strength-reduction factor
of 0.6.
409.4.2.1 Flexure, without axial load ...... 0.90
409.4.5 Strength reduction factor ; for flexure,
409.4.2.2 Axial load and axial load with flexure. (For
compression, shear and bearing of structural plain concrete
axial load with flexure, both axial load and moment in Section 422 shall be 0.65.
nominal strength shall be multiplied by appropriate single
value of ;.)
409.5 DESIGN STRENGTH FOR
Axial tension and axial tension with flexure ......... 0.90

REINFORCEMENT
Axial compression and axial compression with flexure:
Designs shall not be based on a yield strength of
Members with spiral reinforcement reinforcement J;, in excess of 550 MPa, except for
conforming to Section 410.10.3 ........ .......... 0.75 prestressing tendons.
Other reinforred members 0.70

except that for low values of axial oompression, ; shall be

t>ermitted to be increased in accordance with the following:
For members in which h does not exceed 415 MPa, with
sYlllmetric reinforcement, and with (h - d' - dJIh not less

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

4-30 STRENGTH AND SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

409.6 CONTROL OF DEFLECTIONS where

f,I g
409.6.1 Reinforced concrete members subject to flexure Mcr= (409-10)
shall be designed to have adequate stiffness to limit y,
deflections or any deformations that affect strength or and for normal-weight concrete
serviceability ~f a structure adversely.
f, O.'l{"?c (409-11)
409.6.2 One-Way Construction (nonprestressed).
When lightweight aggregate concrete is used, one of the
409.6.2.1 Minimum thickness stipulated in Table following modifications shall apply:
409-1 shall apply for one-way construction not supporting 1. Whenfct is specified and boncrete is proportioned in
or attached to partitions or other construction likely to be accordance with Section 405.3, f, shall be modified
d;nnaged by large deflections, unless computation of by substituting 1.8!ct fo~c but the value of 1.8/ct
deflection indicates a lesser thickness may be used without shall not exceechJ7c
adverse effects.
2. When!ct is not specified, Ir shall be multiplied by
0.75 for "all-lightweight" concrete, and 0.85 for
Table 409-1 - Minimum Thickness of "sand-lightweight" concrete. Linear interpolation
Nonprestressed Beams or One-Way Slabs shall be permitted to be used when partial sand
Unless Deflections are Computed replacement is used.

Minimum Thickness. h 409.6.2.4 For continuous members, effective moment

Simply One end Both ends of inertia shall be permitted to be taken as the, average of
Member Cantilever values obtained from Equation (409-9) for the critical
Supported continuous continuous
Members not supporting or attached to partitions or other positive and negative moment sections. For prismatic
construction likely to be damaged by large deflections members, effective moment of inertia shall be permitted to
be taken as the value obtained from Equation (409-9) at
Solid one-
way slabs
_I
20
_I
24
-.L
28 -' 10 midspan for simple and continuous spans, and at support for
cantilevers.
Beams or
_I _I _I
ribbed one
way slabs 16 18.5 21 8 409.6.2.5 Unless values are obtained by a more .
Values given shaH be used directly for members with normal weight comprehensive analysis, additional longtime deflection
concrete (we = 2,300 kgfm~ and Grade 415 reinforcement. For resulting from creep and shrinkage of flexural members
other conditions, the values shall be modified as follows: (normal-weight or lightweight concrete) shall be
a) For structural lightweight concrete having unit weight in determined by multiplying the immediate deflection caused
the range 1,500-2,000 kg.m 3 , the values shall be
multipfied by (1.65 - 0.0003we) but not less than 1.09,
by the sustained load considered, by the factor
3
where We is the unit weight in kgfm
b) For h other than 415 MPa, the values shall be multiplied A, = (409-12)
by (0.4 + f/700)
1 + 50p'
where p' shall be the value at midspan for simple and
continuous spans, and at support for cantilevers. It is
409.6.2.2 mere deflections are to be computed, permitted to assume the time-dependent factor .; for
deflections that occur immediately on application of load sustained loads to be equal to
shall be computed by usual methods or formulas for elastic
Five years or more ........ .,..... 2.0

deflections, considering effects of cracking and

12 months ...................... .,.... 1.4

reinforcement on member stiffness.

Six months ............................. 1.2

Three months ... .,....................... 1.0

409.6.2.3 Unless stiffness values are obtained by a

more comprehensive analysis, immediate deflection shall
409.6.2.6 Deflection computed in accordance with
be computed with the modulus of elasticity for concrete
this section shall not exceed limits stipulated in Table
as specified in Section 408.6.1 (normal-weight .or
409-2.
lightweight concrete) and with the effective moment of
inertia as follows, but not greater than I g
409.6.3 Two-Way Construction (non prestressed)

I, ~ (~: JI, +[.- (~: J} (409-9) 409.6.3.1 This section shall govern the minimum
thickness of slabs or other two-way construction designed

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
4-31

accordance with the proVISIOns of Section 413 and
"Confonn'tng with the requirements of Section 413.7.1.2.
thickness of slabs without interior beams sparming
between the supports on all sides shall satisfy the
reaUlnlmE:nts of Section 409.6.3.2 or 409.6.3.4. Thickness
slabs with beams spanning between the supports on all
shall satisfy the requirements of Section 409.6.3.3 or
409.6.3.4.
409.6.3.2 For slabs without interior beams sparming
between the supports and having a ratio of long to short
span not greater than 2, the minimum thickness shall be in
accordance with the provisions of Table 409-3 and shall not
be less than the following values:
1. Slabs without drop panels as defined
in Sections 413.4.7.1 and 413.4.7.2 ...... 125 mm
2. Slabs with drop panels as defined in
Sections 413.4.7.1 and413.4.7.2 .............. 100mm
409.6.3.3 For slabs with beams spanning between the
supports on all sides, the minimum thickness shall be as
follows:
1. For a", equal to or less than 0.2, the provisions of
Section 409.6.3.2 shall apply.
. 2. For a", greater than 0.2 but not greater than 2.0, the
thickness shall not be less than
but not less than 125 mm.
3. For a", greater than 2.0, the thickness shall not be
less than
In [O.S + ~J
1500
h == (409-14)
36+9p
but not less than 90 mm.
4. At discontinuous edges, an edge beam shall be
provided with a stifihess ratio a not less than 0.80;
or the minimum thickness required by Equation
(409-13) or (409-14) .shall be increased by at least
10 percent in the panel with a discontinuous edge.
409.6.3.4 Slab thickness less than the minimum
thickness required by Sections 409.6.3.1, 409.6.3.2 and
409.6.3.3 shall be permitted to be used if shown by
computation that the deflection will not exceed the limits
stipulated in Table 409-2. Deflections shall be computed
taking into account size and shape of the panel, conditions
of support, and nature of restraints at the panel edges. The
modulus of elasticity of concrete Ec shall be as ~ecified in
Section 408.6.1. The effective moment of inertia shall be
that given by Equation (409-9); other values shall be
permitted to be used if they result in computed deflections
in reasonable agreement with the results of comprehensive

In [ 0.8 . + -fy J tests. Additional long-term deflection shall be computed in

accordance with Section 409.6.2.5.
1500 .
h (409-13)

Tabl e 4092 - . MaXlmum p ermissl bl e C omputed Deflectlons

Ii Type of Member Deflection to be considered Deflection Limitation
i

Flat roofs not supporting or attached to non- I J

structural elements likely to be damaged by large Immediate deflection due to live load, L
180
deflections
Floors not supporting or attached to non-structural I
Immediate deflection due to live load, L
elements likely to be damaged by large deflections 360
Roof or floor construction supporting or attached to
non-structural elements likely to be damaged by
That part of the total deflection occurring after L
attachment of nonstructural elements (sum of the 480
large deflections
long-term deflection due to all sustained loads and
Floor or floor construction supporting or attached to the immediate deflection due to any additional live I 4
non-structural elements not likely to be damaged by load) 2 240
large deflections
1 Limit not intended to safeguard against ponding. Ponding should 3 Umit may be exceeded if adequate measures are taken to
be checked by suitable calculations of deflection, including prevent damage to supported or attached elements.
added deflections due to ponded water. and considering long 4 But not greater than tolerance provided for nonstructural
term effects of all sustained loads. camber. construction elements. Limit may be exceeded if camber is provided so that
tolerances. and reliability of provisions for drainage. total deflection minus camber does not exceed Hmit.
Long term deflection shall be determined in accordance with
409.6.2.5 or 409.6.4.2. but may be reduced by amount of
deflection calculated to occur before attachment of nonstructural
elements. The amount shaH be determined on basis of accepted
engineering data relating to time-deflection characteristics of
members similar to those being considered.

National Structural Code of ilia Philippines. Volume 1

 u:n .. t,

STRENGTH AND SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS .

4-32

Table 409-3 - Minimum Thickness of Slabs

components, and of axial creep effects In a prestressed
Without Interior Beams
concrete member.
Without drop panels] With drop panels 2
Yield
i 409.6.5.2 Unsbored construction. If the thickness of
strength E,.1erior panels Interior l Exterior panels Interior
a nonprestressed precast flexural member meets the
panels panels
MPa]
fy
without
edge
with
edge
!
without
edge
IWith
edge
requirements of Table 409-1, deflection need not be
computed. If the thickness of a nonprestressed composite
i
beam beam beam . beam' member meets the requirements of Table 409-1, it is not
In In Ln In I in In required to compute deflection occurring after the member
275
33 36 36 36 40 I 40 becomes composite, but the long-time deflection of the
I
i
i
precast member shall be investigated for magnitude and
In I. Ln In In In duration of load prior to beginning of effective composite
415 30 33 33 33 36 36
i action.
I
In In Ln

1
520 28
l TI 31
l
For values of reinforcement yield strength between the values
l I 409.6.5.3 Deflection computed in accordance with
this section shall not exceed limits stipulated in Table 409
2.
given in the table, minimum thickness shall be determined by
linear interpolation.
2 Drop panels is defined in 413.4.7.1 and 413.4.7.2
3 Slabs with beams between columns along exterior edges. The
value of a for the edge beam shall not be less than O.S.

408.6.4 Prestressed Concrete Construction

409.6.4.1 For flexural members designed in

accordance with provisions of Section 418, immediate
deflection shall be computed by usual methods or formulas
for elastic deflections, and the moment of inertia of the
gross concrete section shall be permitted to be used for
uncracked sections.

409.6.4.2 Additional long-time deflection of

prestressed concrete members shall be computed taking into
account stresses in' concrete and steel under sustained load
and including effects of creep and shrinkage of concrete
and relaxation of steel.

409.6.4.3 Deflection computed in accordance with

this section shall not exceed limits stipulated in Table 409
2.

409.6.5 . Composite Construction

409.6.5.1 Shored construction. If composite flexural

members are supported during construction so that, after
removal of temporary supports, dead load is resisted by the
full composite section, it shall be permitted to consider the
composite member equivalent to a monolithically cast
member for computation of deflection. For nonprestressed
members, the portion of the member in compression shall
determine whether values in Table 409-1 for normal-weight
or lightweight concrete shall apply. If deflection is
computed, account shall be taken of curvatures resulting
from differential shrinkage of precast and cast-in-place

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
SECTION 410 - FLEXURE AND
.AXIAL LOADS
410.1 NOTATIONS
a =depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as
defined in Section 410.3.7.1, mm.
=area of core of spirally reinforced compression
member measured to outside diameter of spiral,
mm2 .
=gross area 0f SectIOn, mm2
=area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement,
square millimeters.
= minimum amount of flexural reinforcement, mm2.
See Section 410.6.
=area of skin reinforcement per unit height in one
side face, mm2 1m. See Section 410.7.7.
=total area of lon~itudinal reinforcement (bars or
steel shapes), mm .
= area of structural steel shape, pipe or tubing in a
2
compOSIte SectiOn, mm ..
2
= loaded area, mm .
= the area of the lower base of the largest frustum of
a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge contained
wholly within the support and having for its upper
base the loaded area, and having side slopes of 1
unit vertical in 2 units horizontal (50% slope), ,
mrn2 .
= width of compression face of member, mm.
web width, mm.
= distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral
axis, mm.
= clear cover from the nearest surface in tension to
the surface of the flexural tension reinforcement,
mm.
= a factor relating actual moment diagram to an
equivalent uniform moment diagram.
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to
centroid oftension reinforcement, mm.
= thickness of concrete cover measured from
extreme tension fiber to center of bar or wire
located closest thereto, mm.
distance from extreme compression fiber to
extreme tension steel, mm.
= modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa See Section
408.6.1.
modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, MPa. See
Sections 408.6.2 and 408.6.3.
EI = flexural stiffiless of compression member. See
Equation (410-12) and (410-13).
= specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
calculated stress in reinforcement at service loads,
MPa.
h specified yield strength of nonprestressed
reinforcement, MPa..
National structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-33
h = overall dimension of member in direction of action
considered, mm.
Ig = moment of inertia of gross concrete section about
centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement, mm4
I.e = moment of. inertia.of reinforcement about
centroidal axis of member cross section, mm4
1/ moment ofinertia of structural steel shape, pipe or
tubing about centroidal axis of composite member
cross section, mm4.
k = effective length factor for compression members.
Ie = length ofa compression member in a frame,
measured from center to ,center of the joints in the
frame.
lu = unsupported length of compression member.
Me factored moment to be used for design of
compression member.
M. moment due to loads causing appreciable sway.
Mu = faqored moment at section.
M] == smaller factored end moment on a compression
member, positive if member is bent in single
curvature, negative if bent in double curvature.
Min. = factored end moment on a compression member at
the end at which MJ acts, due to loads that cause
no appreciable sidesway, calculated using a first
order elastic frame analysis.
M J = factored end moment on compression members at
the end at which M J acts, due to loads that cause
appreciable sidesway, calculated using a first-order
elastic frame analysis.
M2 larger factored end moment on compression
member, always positive.
M 2,min = minimum value ofM 2 .
M 2n = factored end moment on compression member at
the end at which M2 acts, due to loads that cause
no appreciable sidesway, calculated using a first
order elastic frame analysis.
M 2 factored end moment on compression member at
the end at which M2 acts, due to loads that cause
appreciable sidesway, calculated using a first-order
elastic frame analysis.
Pb nominal axial load strength at balanced strain
conditions. See Section 410.4.2.
Pe critical load. See Equation (410- J I).
Pl'I = nominal axial load strength at given eccentricity.
Po nominal axial load strength at zero eccentricity,
Pu = factored axial load at given eccentricity
~ >P".
Q = stability index for a story, See Section 410.12.4.
r = radius of gyration of cross section of a
compression member.
s = maximum center-to-center. spacing of flexural
tension reinforcement neare.st .'to the extreme
is
tension face, mm (where thei~ only one bar or
wire nearest to the extremetensionface, s is the
maximum width ofthe extreme tension face.)
Vu factored horizontal shear in a story.
 FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOADS
z = quantity limiting distribution of flexural
reinforcement. See Section 410.7.
/3J = factor defined in Section 410.3 .7.3.
Pd = (a) for non~sway frames, Pd is the ratio of the
maximum factored axial sustained load to the
maximum factored axial load associated with
the same load combination;
= (b) for sway frames, except as required in Item (c)
of this definition, Pd is the ratio of the
maximum factored sustained shear within a
story to the maximum factored shear in that
story;
= (c) for stability checks of sway frames carried out
in accordance with Section 410.14.6, Pd is the
ratio of the maximum factored sustained axial
load to the maximum factored axial load.
,10 relative lateral deflection between the top and
bottom of a story due to Vu, computed using a first~
order elastic frame analysis and stiffness values
satisfying Section 410.12.1.
8ns morqent magnification factor for frames braced
agaitst sidesway to reflect effects of member
curvature between ends of compression members.
t>: moment magnification factor for frames not braced
against sidesway to reflect lateral drift resulting
from lateral and gravity loads.
Bt net tensile strain in extreme tension steel at
nominal strength.
p = ratioofnonprestressed tension reinforcement.
= Af{lbd
Po = reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain
conditions. See Section 410.4.2.
Ps ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total
volume of core (out~to~ut of spirals) of a spirally
reinforced compression member.
> = strength~reduetion factor. See Section 409.4.
> k = stiffness reduction factor
410.2 SCOPE
Provisions of Section 410 shall apply for design of
members subject to flexure or axial loads or to combined
flexure and axial loads.
410.3 DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS
410.3.1 Strength design of members for flexure and axial
loads shall be based on assumptions given in Sections
410.3.2 through 410.3.7 and on satisfaction of applicable
conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of strains.
410.3.2 Strain ih reinforcement and concrete shall be
assumed directly proportional to the distance from the
neutral axis, except, for deep flexural members with overall
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
depth-t~clear-span ratios greater than two fifths for
continuous spans and four fifths for simple spans, a
nonlinear distribution of strain shall be considered. See
Section 410.8.
410.3.3 Maximum usable strain at extreme concrete
compression fiber shall be assumed equal to 0.003.
410.3.4 Stress in reinforcement below specified yield
strength.!;, for grade of reinforcement used shall be taken as
Es times steel strain. For strains greater than that
corresponding to .!;., stress in reinforcement shall be
considered independent of strain and equal to./y.
410.3.5 Tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected in
axial and flexural calculations of reinforced concrete,
except where meeting requirements of Section 418.5.
410.3.6 Relationship between concrete compressive stress
distribution and concrete strain shall be assumed to be
rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic or any other shape that
results in prediction of strength in substantial agreement
with results of comprehensive tests.
410.3.7 Requirements of Section 410.3.6 may be
considered satisfied by an equivalent rectangular concrete
stress distribution defined by the following:
410.3.7.1 Concrete stress of 0.85f'c shall be assumed
uniformly distributed over an equivalent compression zone
bounded by edges of the cross section and a straight line
located parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a = Pi C
from the fiber of maximum compressive strain.
410.3.7.2 Distance c from fiber of maximum strain to
the neutral axis shall be measured in a direction
perpendicular to the axis.
410.3.7.3 Factor Pi shall be taken as 0.85 for concrete
strengths f'c up to and including 30 MPa. For strengths
above 30 MPa, Pl shall be reduced continuously at a rate of
0.05 for each 7 MPa of strength in excess of 30 MPa, but /3J
shall not be taken less than 0.65.
410.4 GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND
REQUIREMENTS
410.4.1 Design~f cross section subject to flexure or axial
loads or to combined flexure and axial loads shall be based
on stress and strain compatibility using assumptions in
Section 410.3.
410.4.2 Balanced strain conditions exist at a cross section
when tension reinforcement reaches the strain
corresponding to its specified yield strength./y just as

CONCRETE
CO:lcrete in compression reaches its assumed ultimate strl;lin
of 0.003.
410.4.3 For flexural members, and for members subject to
combined flexure and compressive axial load when the
design axial load strength rjJPn is less than the smaller of
0.10 f'c Ag or rjJPb, the ratio of reinforcement p provided
shall not exceed 0.75 of the ratio Ph that would produce
balanced strain conditions for the section under flexure
without axial load. For members with compression
reinforcement, the portion of Ph equalized by compression
reinforcement need not be reduced by the 0.75 factor.
410.4.4 Use of compression reinforcement shall be
permitted in conjunction with additional tension
reinforcement to increase the strength of flexural members.
410.4.5 Design axial load strength rjJPn of compression
members shall not be taken greater than the following:
410.4.5.1 For nonprestressed members with spiral
reinforcement confonning to Section 407.1 L 4 or composite
members conforming to Section 410.17:
410.4.5.2 For nonprestressed members with tie
reinforcement conforming to Section 407.11.5:
410.4.5.3 For prestressed members, design axial load
strength lP" shall not be taken greater than 0.85 (for
members with spiral reinforcement) or 0.80 (for members
with tie reinforcement) of the design axial load strength at
zero eccentricity rjJ PQ.
410.4.6 Members subject to compressive axial load shall
be designed for the maximum moment that can accompany
the axial load. The factored axial load Pu ' at given
eccentricity shall not exceed that given in Section 410.4.5.
The maximum factored moment Mu shall be magnified for
slenderness effects in accordance with Section 410.11.
410.5 DISTANCE BETWEEN LATERAL
SUPPORTS OF FLEXURAL MEMBERS
410.5.1 Spacing of lateral supports for a beam shall not
exceed SO times the least width b of compression flange or
face.
410.5.2 Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be
taken into account in detennining spacing of lateral
supports.
National Structural Code
4-35
410.6 MlNlMUM RElNFORCEM~ENT OF
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
410.6.1 . At every section of a flexural member where
tensile reinforcement is required by analysis, except as
provided in Sections 410.6.2,410.6.3 and 410.6.4, the area
As provided shall not be less than that given by:
As,min Jf'c bwd (410-3)
4 Iv
and not less than 1.4 bw d if;,
410.6.2 For a statically determinate T-section with flange
in tension, the area A. min shall be equal to or greater than
the smaller value given either by:
if
As,min = - - b",d (410-4)
2/,
or Equation (410-3) with b", set equal to the width of the
flange.
410.6.3 The requirements of Sections 410.6.1 and 410.6.2
need not be applied if at every section the area of tensile
reinforcement provided is at least one-third greater than that
required by analysis.
410.6.4 For structural slabs and footings of uniform
thickness, the minimum area of tensile reinforcement in the
direction of span shall be the same as that required by
Section 407. 13. Maximum spacing of this reinforcement
shall not exceed the lesser of three times the thickness and
450mm.
410.7 DISTRIBUTION OF FLEXURAL
REINFORCEMENT IN BEAMS AND ONE
WAY SLABS
410.7.1 This section prescribes rules for distribution of
flexural reinforcement to control flexural cracking in beams
and in one-way slabs (slabs reinforced to resist flexural
stresses in only one direction).
410.7.2 Distribution of flexural reinforcement in two-way
slabs shall be as required by Section 413.4.
410.7.3 Flexural tension reinforcement shall be well
distributed within maximum flexural tension zones of a
member cross section as required by Section 410.7.4.
410.7.4 The spacing s of reinforcement closest to a
surface in tension shall not exceed that given by
95,OOQ _ 2.5c
s c (410-5)
j~
of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-36 FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOADS
but not greater than (75,0001fs)
Calculated stress in reinforcement Is (in MFa) shall be
computed as the unfactored moment divided by the product
of steel area and internal moment arm. It shall be permitted
to takelsas 60 percent of specified yield strength h.
410.7.5 Provisions of Section 410.7.4 may not be
sufficient for structures subject to very aggressive exposure
or designed to be watertight. For such structures, special
investigations and precautions are required.
410.7.6 Where flanges of T-beam construction are in
tension, part of the flexural tension reinforcement shall be
distributed over an effective flange width as defined in
Section 408.11, or a width equal to one tenth the span,
whichever is smaller. If the effective flange width exceeds
one tenth the span, some longitudinal reinforcement shall
be provided in the outer portions ofthe flange.
410.7.7 If the effective depth d of a beam or joist exceeds
900 mm, longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be uniformly
distributed along both side faces of the member for a
distance dl2 nearest the flexural tension reinforcement. The
ar~a of skin reinforcement Ask per mm of height on each
side face shall be at least equal to 1.0(d - 750). The
maximum spacing of the skin reinforcement shall not
exceed the lesser of d/6 and 300 mm. It shall be permitted
to include such reinforcement in strength computations if a
strain compatibility analysis is made to determine stresses
in the individual bars or wires. The total area of
longitudinal skin reinforcement in both faces need not
exceed one half of the required flexural tensile
reinforcement.
410.8 DEEP FLEXURAL MEMBERS
410.8.1 Flexural members with overall depth-to-clear
span ratios greater than 0.4 for continuous spans, or 0.8 for
simple spans, shall be designed as deep flexural members,
taking into account nonlinear distribution of strain and
lateral buckling. (See also Section 412.11.6)
410.8.2 Shear strength of deep flexural members shall be
in accordance with Section 411.9.
410.8.3 Minimum flexural tension reinforcement shall
conform to Section 410.6.
410.8.4 Minimum horizontal and vertical reinforcement
in the side faces of deep flexural members shall be the
greater ofthe requirements of Sections 411.9.8,411.9.9 and
411.9.10 or Sections 414.4.2 and 414.4.3.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
410.9 DESIGN DIMENSIONS FOR
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
410.9.1 Isolated Compression Member With Multiple
Spirals. Outer limits of the effectivJ: cross section of a
compression member with two or more interlocking spirals
shall be taken at a distance outside the extreme limits of the
spirals equal to the minimum concrete cover required by
Section 407.8.
410.9.2 Compression Member Built Monolitbically
With Wall. Outer limits of the effective cross section of a
spirally reinforced or tied reinforced compression member
built monolithically with a concrete wall or pier shall be
taken not greater than 40 mm outside the spiral or tie
reinforcement.
410.9.3 Equivalent Circular Compressiou Member.
As an alternate to using the full gross area for design of a
compressive member with a square, octagonal or other
shaped cross section, it shall be permitted to use a circular
section with a diameter equal to the least lateral dimension
of the actual shape. Gross area considered, required
percentage of reinforcement, and design strength shall be
based on that circular section
410.9.4 Limits of Section. For a compression member
with a cross section larger than required by considerations
of loading, it shall be permitted to base the minimum
reinforcement and design strength on a reduced effective
areaAg not less than one half the total area. This provision
shall not apply in Seismic Zone 4.
410.10 LIMITS FOR REINPORCE~fENT OF'
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
410.10.1 Area of longitudinal reinf'ff'.ement f;)r
noncomposite compression members shall not be less than
0.01 or more than 0.08 times gross areaA g of section
410.10.2 Minimum number of longitudinal bars in
compression members shall be four (4) for bars within
rectangular or circular ties, three (3) for bars within
triangular ties, and six (6) for bars enclosed by spirals
conforming to Section 410. 10.3.
410.10.3 Ratio of spiral reinforcement P. shall not be less
than the value given by
P. = 0.45 (Ag
Ac
1) i'e
i
(410-6)
y
where h is the specified yield strength of spiral
reinforcement but not more than 415 MFa.
 CONCRETE
410.11 SLENDERNESS EFFECTS IN
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
410.11.1 Except as allowed in Section 410.11.2, the
design of compression members, restraining beams and
other supporting members shall be based on the factored
forces and moments from a second order analysis
considering materials nonlinearity and cracking, as well as
the effects of member curvature and lateral drift, duration of
loads, shrinkage and creep, and interaction with the
supporting foundation. The dimensions of each member
cross section used in the analysis shall be within 10 percent
of the dimensions of the members shown on the design
drawings and the analysis shall be repeated. The analysis
procedure shall have been shown to result in prediction of
strength in substantial agreement with the results of
comprehensive tests of columns in statically indeterminate
reinforced concrete structures.
410.11.2 As an alternate of the procedure prescribed in
Section 41 0.11. 1, it shall be permitted to base the design of
compression members, restraining beams, and other
supporting members on axial forces and moments from the
analyses described in Section 410.12.
410.12 MAGNIFIED MOMENTS - GENERAL
410.12.1 The factored axial forces, P u , the factored
moments, MJ and M 2, at the ends of the column and, where
required, the relative lateral story deflections, .do, shall be
computed using an elastic first-order frame analysis with
the section properties determined taking into account the
influence of axial loads, the presence of cracked regions
along the length of the member and effects of duration of
loads. Alternatively, it shall be permitted to use the
following properties for the members in the structure:
1. Modulus of elasticity .... ... from Section 408.6.1.
2. Moment of inertia:
Beams .......... ........... ........... ........ ... 0.351g
Columns ....................................... 0.70Ig
Walls - Uncracked .............. 0.701"
- Cracked ........... ....... 0.35Ig
about both principal axes, the moment about each axis shall
Flat plates and flat slabs .. ............ 0.25Ig
be magnified separately based on the conditions of restraint
3. Area .............................................. 1.0 Ag
The moments of inertia shall be divided by (1 +h)
1. when sustained lateral loads act, or
2. for stability checks made in accordance with Section
410.14.6.
410.12.2 It shall be permitted to take the radius of
gyration, r, equal to 0.30 times the overalliimension of the
direction stability is being considered for rectangular
compression members and 0.25 times ihe dIameter for
circular compression members. For other simpes. it shall be
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-37
permitted to compute the radius of gyration for the gross
concrete section.
410.12.3 Unsupported Length Of Compression
Members
-410.12.3.1 The unsupported length lu of a
compression member shall be taken as the clear distance
between floor slabs, beams or other members capable of
providing lateral support in the direction being considered.
410.12.3.2 Where column capitals or haunches are
present, the unsupported length shall be measured to the
lower extremity of the capital or haunch in the plane
considered.
410.12.4 Columns and stories in structures shall be
designated as nonsway or sway columns or stories. The
design of .columns in nonsway frames or stories shall be
based on Section 410.13. The design of columns in sway
frames or stories shall be based on Section 410.14.
410.12.4.1 It shall be permitted to assume a column in
a structure is non-sway if the increase in column end
moments due to second-order effects does not exceed 5
percent of the first-order end moments.
410.12.4.2 It also shall be permitted to assume a story
within a structure is nonsway if:
(410-7)
,
is less than or equal to 0.05, where 'EPu and Vu are the
total vertical load and the story shear, respectively, in the
story in question and .10 is the first-order relative deflection
between the top and bottom ofthat story due to Vu.
410.12.5 Where an individual compression member in the
frame has a slenderness, kl,/r, of more than 100, Section
410.11.1 shall be used to compute the forces and moments
in the frame.
410.12.6 For compression members subject to bending
corresponding to that axis.
410.13 MAGNIFIED MOMENTS - NONSWAY
FRAMES
410.13.1 For compression members in nonsway frames,
the effective length factor k shall be taken as 1.0, unless
analysis shows that a lower value is justified. The
calculation of k shall be based on the E and J values used
in Section 410,12.1.
4-38 FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOADS

410.13.2 In non-sway frames, shall be permitted to 410.14 MAGNIFIED MOMENTS - SWAY

ignore slenderness effect for compression members which FRAMES
satisfy:

k:u ~ 12(~J
34 (410-8)
where the term [34-12MJIM21 shall not be taken greater than
40. The term MiM2 is positive if the member is bent in
single curvature, and negative if the member is bent in
double curvature.
410.13.3 Compression members shall be designed for the
factored axial load, Pu, and the moment amplified for the
effects of member curvature, Me, as follows:
410.14.1 For compression members not braced against
sidesway, the effective length factor k shall be determined
using E and I values in accordance with Section 410.12.1
and shall be greater than 1.0.
410.14.2 For compression members not braced against
sidesway, effects of slenderness may be neglected when
kllr is less than 22,
410.14.3 The moments M J and M2 at the ends of an
individual compression member shall be taken as '

(410-9) M J "" M Jns + 0 sMJ. (410-16)

Where: M2 = M 2ns + OsM2s (410-17)
~ 1.0 (410-10) where 0. MJs and 0. M2s shall be computed according to
Section 410.14.4.
0.75 Pc
410.14.4 Calculation of 4,M..

(410-11) 410.14.4.1 The magnified sway moments & Ms shall

be taken as the column end moments calculated using a
AI shall be taken as second-order elastic analysis based on the member
(0.2EJg +E,lJ stiffnesses given in Section 410.12,1.
El (410-12)
1+ Pd
410.14.4.2 Alternatively, it shall be permitted to
or
calculate 0.M.. as
El (410-13)
~ Ms (410-18)
1 Q
410.13.3.1 For members without transverse loads
between supports, em
shall be taken as If 0. calculated in this way exceeds 1.5, li', A{, shall be
calculated using Section 410, 14.4.1 or 410.14.4.3.
(410-14)
410.14.4.3 Alternatively, it shall be perl1litted to
where MJIM2 is positive if the column is bent in single calculate the magnified sway moment lisM, as
curvature. For members with transverse loads between 11,1,
supports, Cm shall be taken as 1.0. 0" M s = - - - ' - - - (410-19)
- -IF"
----,

410.13.3.2 The factored moment M2 in Equation (410 0.75IPc

9) shall not be taken less than
M 2.J".in = P u (15 + 0.03h) (410-15)
about each axis separately, where 15 and h are in
millimeters. For members for which M 2min exceeds M 2, the
value ofC", in Equation (410-14) shall either be taken equal
to 1,0, or shall be based on the ratio of the computed end
moments MJ and M 2 ,
where EPII is the summation for all the vertical loads in a
story and E Pc is the summation for all sway resisting
columns in a story, Pc is calculated using Equation (410-11)
using k from Section 410.13,1 and EI from Equation (410
12) or (410-13).
410.14.5 If an individual compression member has
35
>
r (410-20)

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE 4-39

be designed for the factored axial load, PlI , and the
Me. calculated using Section 410.13.3 in which MJ
2 are computed in accordance with Section 410.14.3,
as defined for 'd combination under consideration
k as defined in ~t.y'10n 410,13,1.
l'410.14.6In addition to load cases involving lateral loads,
." the strength and stability of the structure as a whole under
factored gravity loads shall be considered.
1. When a.M, is computed from Section 410.14.4.1, the
ratio of second-order lateral deflections to first-order
lateral deflections for 1.4 dead load and 1.7 live load
plus lateral load applied to the structure shall not
exceed 2.5,
2. When a.Ms is computed according to Section
410.14.4.2, the value ofQ computed using SPu for
1. 4, dead load plus 1. 7 live load shall not exceed
0.60.
3. When a.M. is computed from Section 410.14.4.3, a.
computed using SPu and SPc corresponding to the
factored dead and live loads shall be positive and
shall not exceed 2.5.
In cases 1, 2 and 3 above, fJd shall be taken as the ratio of
the maximum factored sustained axial load to the total
factored axial load.
410.14.7 In sway frames, flexural members shall be
designed for the total magnified end moments of the
compression members at the joint.
410.15 AXIALLY LOADED MEMBERS
well integrated with floor concrete, and shall be placed in
accordance with Sections 406.4.5 and 406.4.6.
410.16.2 Strength of a column through a floor system
shall be based on the lower value of concrete strength with
vertical dowels and spirals as required.
410.16.3 For columns laterally supported on four sides by
beams of approximately equal depth or by slabs, strength of
the column may be based on an assumed concrete strength
in the column joint equal to 75 percent of column concrete
strength plus 35 percent of floor concrete strength.
410.17 COMPOSITE COMPRESSION
MEMBERS
410.17.1 Composite compression members shall include
all such members reinforced longitudinally with structural
steel shapes, pipe or tubing with or without longitudinal
bars.
410.17.2 Strength of a composite member shall be
computed for the same limiting conditions applicable to
ordinary reinforced concrete members.
410.17.3 Any axial load strength assigned to concrete ofa
composite member shall be transferred to the concrete by
members or brackets in direct bearing on the composite
member concrete.
410.17.4 All axial load strength not assignen *') concrete
of a composite member shall be develop. )y ditect
connection to the structural steel shape, pipe or tube.

SUPPORTING SLAB SYSTEM

410.17.5 For evaluation of slenderness effects, radius of
gyration of a composite section shall not be greater than the
Axially loaded members supporting slab system included value given by:
within the scope of Section 413.2 shall be designed as
provided in Section 410 and in accordance with the
additional requirements of Section 413. (410-21)

and, as an alternative to a more accurate calculation, El in

410.16 TRANSMISSION OF COLUMN
Equation (410-11) shall be taken either as Equation (410
LOADS THROUGH FLOOR SYSTEM
12) or

When the specified compressive strength of concrete in a (410-22)

column is greater than 1.4 times that specified for a floor
system, transmission of load through the floor system shall
be provided by. Section 410.16.1, 410.16.2, or 410.16.3: 410.17.6 Structural steel-encased concrete core
410.16.1 Concrete of strength specified for the column 410.17.6.1 For a composite member with concrete
shall be placed in the floor at the column location. Top core encased by structural steel, thickness of the steel
surface of the column concrete shall extend 600 mm into encasement shall not be less than
the slab from face of column. Column concrete shall be

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOADS

410.17.8.5 Vertical spacing of lateral ties shall not

for each face of width b exceed 16 longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar diameters,
or one half times the least side dimension of the composite
nor member.

for circular sections of diameter h
410.17.6.2 Longitudinal bars located within the
encased concrete core shall be permitted to be used in
computing At and It.
410.17.7 Spiral reinforcement around structural steel
core. A composite member with spirally reinforced
concrete around a structural steel core shall conform to
Sections 410.17.7.1 through 410.17.7.5.
410.17.7.1 Specified compressive strength of concrete
f'c shall not be less than 17 MFa.
410.17.7.2 Design yield strength of structural steel
core shall be the specified minimum yield strength for
grade of structural steel used but not to exceed 345 MFa.
, wider on all sides than the loaded area, design bearing
410.17.7.3 Spiral reinforcement shall conform to
Section 410. 10.3.
410.17.7.4 Longitudinal bars located within the spiral
Iq
shall not be less than 0.01 or more than 0.08 times net area
of concrete section.
410.17.8.6 Longitudinal bars located within the ties
shall not be less than 0.01 or more than 0.08 times net area
of concrete section.
410.17.8.7 A longitudinal bar shall be located at every
corner of a rectangular cross section, with other
longitudinal bars spaced not farther apart than one half the
least side dimension of the composite member.
410.17.8.8 Longitudinal bars located within the ties
shall be permitted to be used in computing AI for strength
but not in computing It for evaluation of slenderness effects.
410.18 BEARING STRENGTH
410.18.1 Design bearing strength on concrete shall not
exceed If? (0.85f'c AI), except when the supporting surface is
strength on the loaded area shall be permitted to be
mUltiplied by "A 2 1AI, but not more than 2.
410.18.2 Section 410.18 does not apply to post-tensioning
anchorage.

410.17.7.5 Longitudinal bars located within the spiral

shall be permitted to be used in computing At and It.

410.17.8 Tie reinforcement around structural steel

core. A composite member with laterally tied concrete
around a structural steel core shall conform to Sections
410.17.8.1 through 410.17.8.8:
".
":

", 410.17.8.1 Specified compressive strength of concrete

f'c shall not be less than 17 MFa.

410.17.8.2 Design yield strength of structural steel

'""
core shall be the specified minimum yield strength for
grade of structural steel used but not to exceed 345 MFa.

410.17.8.3 Lateral ties shall extend completely around

the structural steel core.

410.17.8.4 Lateral ties shall have a diameter not less

than 0.02 times the greatest side dimension of composite
member, except that ties shall not be smaller than 10 mm
diameter and are not required to be larger than 16 mm
diameter. Welded wire fabric of equivalent area shall be
permitted.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE 4....1
SECTION 411 - SHEAR AND
TORSION
411.1 NOTATIONS
Ac = area of coricrete section resisting shear transfer,
2
mm
are~ enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross
section, mm2. See Section 411. 7.1.
area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting
2
factored moment [V"a + N.w(h - d)], mm .
gross area of section, mml.
area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural
tension reinforcement, mml.
total area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist
torsion, mm2
area of reinfurcement in bracket or corbel resisting
tensile force N.,e, mml.
gross area enclosed by shear flow, mm2
area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed
transverse torsional reinforcement, mml.
Aps area of prestressed reinforcement in tension zone,
mml.
A, area of non-prestressed tension reinforcement,
mm2.
area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion
within a distance s, mm2.
area of shear reinforcement within a distance s, or
area of shear reinforcement perpendicular to
flexural tension reinforcement within a distance S
for deep flexural members, mm2 .
area of shear-friction reinforcement, mm2
area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural
tension reinforcement within a distance S2, mm2 .
a shear span, distance between concentrated load and
face of supports, mm.
width of compression face of member, mm.
perimeter of critical section for slabs and footings,
mm.
width of that part of cross section containing the
closed stirrups resisting torsion.
web width, or diameter of circular section, mm.
width of the critical section defined in Section
411.13.6.1 measured in the direction of the span for
which moments are determined, mm.
width of the critical section defined in Section
411.13.6.1 measured in the direction perpendicular
to h j , mm.
size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular
column, capital or bracket measured in the direction
of the span for which moments are being
determined, mm.
size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular
column, capital or bracket measured transverse to
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
the direction of the span for which moments are
being determinee, mm.
d distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
of longitudinal tension reinforcement, but need not
be less than O.SOh for prestressed members,
millimeters. (For circular sections, d need not be
less than the distance from extreme compression
fiber to centroid of tension reinforcement in
opposite half of member), mm.
Pe specified compressive strength of concrete, :MPa.
ff: = square root of specified compressive strength of
concrete, :MPa.
fet average splitting tensile strength of lightweight
aggregate concrete, :MPa.
h stress due to unfactored dead load, at extreme fiber
of section where tensile stress is caused by
externally applied loads, :MPa.
fpc compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for
all prestress losses) at centroid of cross secti6n
resisting externally applied loads or at junction of
web and flange when the centroid lies within the
flange, MFa. (In a composite member, fpc is
resultant compressive stress at centroid of
composite section, or at junction of web and flange
when the centroid lies within the flange, due to both
prestress and moments resisted by precast member
acting alone.)
fpe compressive stress in concrete due to effective
prestress forces only (after allowance for all
prestress losses) at extreme fiber of section where
tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads,
:MPa.
/p" specified tensile strength of prestressing tendons,.
MFa.
1;. specified yield strength of non-prestressed
reinforcement, MFa.
hi yield strength of longitudinal torsional
reinforcement, MFa.
.h'V yield strength of closed transverse torsional
reinforcement, MFa.
h overall thickness of member, mm.
h" total depth of shearhead cross section, mm.
hw total height ofwall from base to top, mm.
I moment of inertia of section resisting externally
applied factored loads, mm4.
In clear span measured face to face of supports.
Iv length of shearhead arm from centroid of
concentrated load or reaction, mm.
lw horizontal length of wall, mm.
Mer moment causing flexural cracking at section due to
externally applied loads. See Section 411.5.2.1.
Mm = modified moment.
Mmar= maximum factored moment at section due to
externally applied loads.
Mp = required plastic moment strength of shearhead cross
section.
 4

SHEAR AND Tm'IC111')N

4-42

factored moment at section.

rf fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by
moment resistance contributed by shearhead
flexure at slab-column connection. See Section
reinforcement.
413.6.3.2.

N" factored axial load normal to cross section

r" fraction of unbalanced moment tr~sferred by

occurring simultaneously with Vu; to be taken as eccentricity of shear at slab-column connections.

positive for compression, negative for tension, and See Section 411.13.6.1.

to include effects of tension due to creep and 1- rf

shrinkage. ", number of identical arms of shearhead.

factored tensile force applied at top of bracket or f.1. coefficient of friction. See Section 411.8.4.3.

corbel acting simultaneously with Vii to be laken as A correction factor related to unit weight ofconcrete.

positive for tension.

p ratio of non-prestressed tension reinforcement.

Pcp outside perimeter of the concrete cross section, mrn.

A/bd
Ph perimeter of centerline of outermost closed
Ph ratio of horizontal shear reinforcement area t'O gross

transverse torsional reinforcement, mrn.

concrete area of vertical section.

s spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in

direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement, Pn ratio of vertical shear reinforcement area to gross

mm. concrete area of horizontal section.

spacing of vertical reinforcement in wall, mm. Pw A/b"d.

spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in () angle of compression diagonals in truss analogy for

direction . perpendicular to longitudinal torsion.

reinforcement-or spacing of horizontal '" strength reduction factor. See Section 409.4.

reinforcement in wall, mm.

nominal torsional moment strength.
factored torsional moment at section. 411.2 SHEAR STRENGTH
thickness of a wall of a hollow section, mm.
nominal shear strength provided by concrete. 411.2.1 Design of cross sections subject to shear shall be
nominal shear strength provided by concrete when based on
diagonal cracking results from combined shear and
moment. (411-1)
nominal shear strength provided by concrete when
diagonal cracking results from excessive principal where V;, is factored shear force at section considered and
tensile stress in web. Vn is nominal shear strength computed by
shear force at section due to unfactored dead load.
factored shear force at section due to externally
(411-2)
"oj,

applied loads occurring simultaneously with Mmax.

nominal shear strength.

where Vc is nominal shear strength provided by concrete in
vertical component of effective prestress force at
accordance with Section 411.4 or Section 411.5, and 1/~ is
section.
nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement in
nominal shear strength provided by shear
accordance with Section 411.6.6.
reinforcement.

factored shear force at section.

411.2.1.1 In determining shear strength Vn , the effect
nominal shear stress, MPa. See Section 411.13.6.2.
of any openings in members shall be considered.
y, distance from centroidal axis of gross section.
neglecting reinforcement, to extreme fiber in 411.2.1.2 In determining shear strength Vel whenever
tension. applicable. effects of axial tension due to creep and
shrinkage in restrained members shall be considered and
a angle between included stirrups and longitudinal
effects of inclined flexural compression in variable-depth
axis of member.
members shall be permitted to be included.
angle between shear-friction reinforcement and
shear plane.
411.2.2 The values of -.Jf'e used in Section 411 shall not
a, constant used to compute Vc in slabs and footings.
exceed 0.7 MPa.
a ,. ratio of stiffness of shearhead arm to surrounding
composite slab section. See Section 411.13.4.5.
EXCEPTION:
ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load
or reaction area. Values of lie greater than 0.7 MPa is allowed ill
constant used to compute f~ in prestressed slabs.
computing V", V ci and Vel\' for reinforced or prestressed
concrete beams and concrete jOist cOllstruction having

I
l Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
L
 CONCRETE

web reinforcement equal to f'/35 times, but not through 411.4.1.3 unless a more detailed calculation is
than three times the amounts required by Sections made in accordance with Section 411.4.2.
.. 6.5.3, 411.6.5.4 and 411. 7.5.2.
411.4.1.1 For members subject to shear and flexure
Computations of maximum factored shear force only,
supports in accordance with Section 411.2.3. 1 or
.3.2 shall be permitted when both of the following two V=!Ff"bd
a 6 "Ii' a w (411-3)
.ndltlOllS are satisfied:
Support reaction, in direction of applied shear, 411.4.1.2 For members subject to axial compression,
introduces compression into the end regions of
member, and
No concentrated load occurs between face of support
Va = 1(l+~)
6
Ff" b d
14Ag "Ii' c w
(411-4)

and location of critical section defined in Sections

Quantity N"IAg shall be expressed in MFa.
411.2.3.1 and 411.2.3.2.
411.4.1.3 For members subject to significant axial
1.2.3.1 For non-prestressed members, sections
tension, shear reinforcement shall be designed to carry total
. . located less than a distance d from face of support shall be
shear, unless a more detailed analysis is made using Section
permitted to be designed for the same shear v~ as that
411.4.2.3.
computed at a distance d
. 411.4.2 Detailed calculation for Vc- Shear strength Vc
411.2.3.2 For prestressed members, sections located
shall be permitted to be computed by the more detailed
less than a distance hl2 from face of support shall be
calculation of Sections 411.4.2.1 through 411.4 .2.3.
permitted to be designed for the same shear V" as that
computed at a distance h12.
411.4.2.1 For members subject to shear and flexure
only,
411.2.4 For deep flexural members, brackets and corbels,
walls and slabs and footings, the special provisions of
Sections 411.9 through 411.13 shall apply.
Va 1( r;;- + 120 Pw _u_
-l"lif'c V dJ b,. d (411-5)
7 M.
but not greater than 0.3...J f~ bw d. Quantity Vu 1M" shall
not be taken greater than 1.0 in computing Vc by Equation
411.3 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE (411-5), where M" is factored moment occurring
simultaneously with V" at section considered.
411.3.1 Provisions for shear strength Ve apply to normal
weight concrete. When lightweight aggregate concrete is
411.4.2.2 For members subject to axial compression,
used, one of the following modifications shall apply:
it shall be permitted to compute Vc using Equation (411-5)
with Mm substituted for M" and V.,dIM" not then limited to
411.3.1.1 When let is specified and concrete is
1.0, where
proportioned in accordance with Section 405.3, provisions
for Ve shall be modified by substituting 1.8fet for ...J/,,,, but M", M -N (4h-dl (411-6)
the value of 1.8/ct shall not exceed ...J/'e.
U 8)
However, Vc shall not be taken greater than

JI + o.~~. )~1', b.d

411.3.1.2 When fet is not specified, all values of...J /,c
affecting Ve, Tc and Mer shall be multiplied by 0.75 for all ;: " 0.3 ( (411-7)
lightweight concrete and 0.85 for sand-lightweight
concrete. Linear interpolation shall be permitted when Quantity N.,IA g shall be expressed in MFa. When Mm as
partial sand replacement is used. computed by Equation (411-6) is negative, Vc shall be
computed by Equation (411-7).

411.4 SHEAR STRENGTH PROVIDED BY 411.4.2.3 For members subject to significant axial
CONCRETE FOR NONPRESTRESSED tension,
MEMBERS

411.4.1 Simplified calculation for Vc- Shear strength Vc

Va ~(1 + O.~~u )~f'c b w d (411-8)

shall be computed by provisions of Sections 411.4.1.1 but not less than zero, where N" is negative for tension.
Quantity NulAg shall be expressed in MPa.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 SHEAR AND TORSION
411.4.3 Circular members. For circular members, the
area used to compute V" shall be taken as the product of the
diameter and effective depth of the concrete section. It
shall be permitted to take the effective depth as 0.8 times
the diameter of the concrete section.
411.5 SHEAR STRENGTH PROVIDED BY
CONCRETE FOR PRESTRESSED MEMBERS
411.5.1 For members with effective prestress force not
less than 40 percent of the tensile strength of flexural
reinforcement, unless more detailed calculation is made in
accordance with Section 411.5.2.
V =
.c
(J,f'c;
20
+5 VudJb d
Mu'"
(411-9)
but Vc need not be taken less than (1/6)"1'" bw d nor
shall V" be taken greater than 0.4" fe bw d nor the value
given in Section 411.5.3 or 411.5.4. The quantity V,.dIM"
f shall not be taken greater than 1.0, where M" is factored
moment occurring simultaneously with V" at section
considered. When applying Equation (411-9), d in the term
V,.dIM" shall be the distance from extreme compression
fiber to centroid of prestressed reinforcement.
"""" 411.5.2 Shear strength v;, shall be permitted to be
computed in accordance with Sections 411.5.2.1 and
411.5.2.2 where Vc shall be the lesser of Vet or VCWo
"
~'''''
411.5.2.1 Shear strength Vet shall be computed by
~fc
20
b
w
d + V + V;Mcr
d M max
(411-10)
.: ::~~:
but Vet need not be taken less than (1/7) "fe. where
(411-11)
and values of Mmax and V; shall be computed from the load
combination causing maximum moment to occur at the
section.
411.5.2.2 Shear strength Vow shall be computed by
(411-12)
Alternatively, Vcw may be computed as the shear force
corresponding to dead load plus live load that results in a
principal tensile stress of (113) "fe at the centroidal axis
of member, or at intersection of flange and web when
centroidal axis is in the flange. In composite members,
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
principal tensile stress shall be computed using the cross
section that resists live load.
411.5.2.3 In Equations (411-10) and (411-12), d shall
be the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
of prestressed reinforcement or 0.8h, whichever is greater.
411.5.3 In a pretensioned member in which the section at
a distance hl2 from face of support is closer to end of
member than the transfer length of the prestressing tendons,
the reduced prestress shall be considered when computing
Vow. This value of V"w shall also be taken as the maximum
limit for Equation (411-9). Prestress force may be assumed
to vary linearly from zero at end of tendon to a maximum at
a distance from end of tendon equal to the transfer lengt~
assumed to be 50 diameters for strand and 100 diameters
for single wire.
411.5.4 In a pretensioned member where bonding of
some tendons does not extend to end of member, a reduced
prestress shall be considered when computing Vc in
accordance with Section 411.5.1 or 411.5.2. Value of V"w
calculated using the reduced prestress shall also be taken as
the maximum limit for Equation (411-9). Prestress force
due to tendons for which bonding does not extend to end of
member may be assumed to vary linearly from zero at the
point at which bonding commences to a maximum at a
distance from this point equal to the transfer length,
assumed to be 50 diameters for strand and 100 diameters
for single wire.
411.6 SHEAR STRENGTH PROVIDED BY
SHEAR REINFORCEMENT
411.6.1 Types of shear reinforcement.
411.6.1.1 Shear reinforcement consisting of the following
shall be permitted:
L Stirrups pefpendicular to axis of member.
2. Welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicular
to axis of member.
3. Spirals, circular ties, or hoops.
411.6.1.2 For non-prestressed . members,
reinforcement shall be permitted to also consist of:
1. Stirrups making an angle of 45 degrees or more with
longitudinal tension reinforcement.
2. Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making
an angle of 30 degrees or more with the longitudinal
tension reinforcement.
3. Combination of stirrups and bent
reinforcement.
 CONCRETE

411.6.2 Design yield strength of shear reinforcement shall 411.6.5.4) and non-prestressed members shall be computed
not exceed 415 MPa, except that the design yield strength by:
ofwelded deformed wire fabric shall not exceed 550 MPa.
b"s
A" '" 3/ (411-13)
411.6.3 Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear y
reinforcement shall extend to a distance d from extreme
compression fiber and shall be anchor~ at both ends where bw and s are in millimeters.
according, to Section 412.14 to develop the design yield
strength ofreinforcement. 411.6.5.4 For prestressed members with effective
prestress force not less than 40 percent of the tensile
411.6.4 Spacing Limits for Shear Reinforcement strength of flexural reinforcement, the area of shear
reinforcement shall not be less than the smaller A",
Spacing of shear reinforcement pl~ computed by Equation (411-13) or (411-14).
perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed dI2 in
non-prestressed members and (3/4)h in prestressed
(411-14)
members or 600 rom.

. 411.6.4.2 Inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal

. reinforcement shall be so spaced that every 45-degree line,
411.6.6 Design of Shear Reinforcement
extending toward the reaction from mid-depth of member
411.6.6.1 Where factored shear force Vu exceeds
dI2 to longitudinal tension reinforcement, shall be crossed
. , by at least one line of shear reinforcement. shear strength ;Vc> shear reinforcement shall be provided to
1 satisfy Equations (411-1) and (411-2), where shear strength
Vs sha:ll be computed in accordance with Sections 411.6.6.2
411.6.4.3 When Vs exceeds (1/3)" Pc b" d ,
through 411.6.6.8.
maximum spacing given in Sections 411.6.4,1 and
411.6.4.2 shall be reduced by one half 411.6.6.2 When shear reinforcement perpendicular to
axis of member is used,
411.6.5 Minimum shear reinforcement

411.6.5.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement (411-15)

shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural
members (prestressed and non-prestressed) where factored
shear force Vu exceeds one half the shear strength provided
by concrete; Vc, except:
Slabs and footings,
1. equation (411-15) where d shall be taken as the effective
2. Concrete joist construction defined by Section
408,12.
3. Beams with total depth not greater than 250 rom, two
and one half times thickness of flange or one half the
width ofweb, whichever is greater.
411.6.5.2 Minimum shear reinforcement requirements
of Section 411.6.5.l shall be waived if shown by test that
required nominal flexural and shear strengths can be
developed when shear reinforcement is omitted. Such tests
shall simulate effects of differential settlement, creep,
shrinkage and temperature change, based on a realistic
assessment of such effects occurring in service.
411.6.5.3 Where shear reinforcement is required by
Section 411.6.5.1 or for strength and where Section 411.7.l
allows torsion to be neglected, the minimum area of shear
reinforcement for prestressed (except as provided in Section
where Av is the area of shear reinforcement within a
distance s.
411.6.6.3 When circular .ties, hoops, or spirals are
used as shear reinforcement, v..
shall be computed using
depth defined in Section 411.4.3. Av shall be taken as two
times the area ofthe bar in a circular tie, hoop, or spiral at a
spacing s, and /yh is the specified yield strength of circular
tie, hoop or spiral reinforcement.
411.6.6.4 When inclined stirrups are used as shear
reinforcement,
v. = A.,/vs d (sino. + coso. ) (411-16)
411.6.6.5 When shear reinforcement consists of a
single bar or a single group of parallel bars, all bent up at
the same distance from the support,
(411-17)
but not greater than (1/4) "Pc hwd
 SHEAR AND TORSION

411.6.6.6 When shear reinforcement consists of a 1. for non-prestressed members, at the sections
series of parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel bent-up described in Section 411.7.2.4:
bars at different distances from the support, shear strength
v~ shall be computed by Equation (411-16). ;[.1'; [A!]
3 Pcp
411.6.6.7 Dnly the center three fourths of the inclined
portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be considered
effective for shear reinforcement 2. for prestressed members, at the sections described in
Section 411.7.2.5:
411.6.6.8 Where more than one type of shear
reinforcement is used to reinforce the same portion of a
member, shear strength Vs shall be computed as the sum of
;r.r: [A!Pcp ]1
3
3
+ fpc
~j'c
the Vs values computed for the various types.
In such a case, the correspondingly redistributed bending
411.6.6.9 Shear strength Vs shall not be taken greater moments and shears in the adjoining members shall be used
than (2/3) ..jf'c bwd in the design ofthose members.

411.7.2.3 Unless determined by a more exact analysis,

it shall be permitted to take the torsional loading from a
411.7 DESIGN FOR TORSION
slab as uniformly distributed along the member.
411.7.1 It shall be permitted to neglect torsion effects
411.7.2.4 In non-prestressed members" sections
when the factored torsional moment T" is less than:
located less than a distance d from the face of a support
shall be designed for not less than the torsion Tu computed
1. for non-prestressed members:
at a distance d. If a concentrated torque occurs within this
distance, the critical section for design shall be at the face
;[.1'; [A!) of the support.
12 Pcp
411.7.2.5 In prestressed members, sections located
2. for prestressed members: less than a distance hl2 from the face of a support shall be
designed for not less than the torsion Tu computed at a
; [.1'; [A! J' 1+ 3fpc distance h12. If a concentrated torque occurs within this
distance, the critical section for design shall be at the face
12 Pcp ~j'c of the support.

For members cast monolithically with a slab, the 411.7.3 Torsional Moment Strength
overhanging flange width used in computing Acp and Pcp
shall conform to Section 413.3.4. 411.7.3.1 The cross-sectional dimensions shall be
such that:
411.7.2 Calculation of Factored Torsional Moment 1. for solid sections:
Tl1.'
411.7.2.1 If the factored torsional moment Tu in a
member is required to maintain equilibrium and exceeds the 'l/(~)2 +
b", d
(~)2
1.7 A~
< [~+ 2[.1';J
- ; bw d 3
minimum value given in Section 411.7.1, the member shall (411-18)
be designed to carry that torsional moment in accordance 2. for hollow sections:
with Sections 411.7.3 through 411.7.6.

411.7.2.2 In a statically indeterminate structure where

:<; ;[~+
b",d
2~j'c
3
J
reduction of the torsional moment in a member can occur
due to redistribution of internal forces upon cracking, the (411-19)
maximum factored torsional moment 1;, shall be permitted
to be reduced to 411.7.3.2 If the wall thickness varies around the
perimeter of a holloyv section, Equation (411-19) shall be
evaluated at the Idcation where the left-hand side of
Equation (411-19) is a maximum.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE 447

If the wall thickness is less than Aoh Ph, the
term in Equation (41 1-19) shall be taken as:
(1.7~Oh t)
t .is the thickness of the wall of the hollow section at
location where the stresses are being checked.
411.7.3.4 Design yield strength of non-prestressed
t6rSion reinforcement shall not exceed 415 MPa.
lIt 7.3.5 The reinforcement required for torsion shall
be;determined from:
T" (411-20)
411.7.3.6 The transverse reinforcement for torsion shall be
designed using:
_-=-..:.::...;c.:... cotO (411-21)
s longitudinal bars or tendons and one or more of the
where Ao shall be determined by analysis except that it shall
be permitted to take Ao equal to 0.85Aoh; 0 shall not be
411.7.3.10 In Prestressed Beams:
1. The total longitudinal reinforcement including
tendons at each section shall resist the factored
bending moment at that section plus an additional
concentric longitudinal tensile force equal to A/;:I,
based on the factored torsion at that section, and
2. The spacing of the longitudinal reinforcement
including tendons shall satisfy the requirements in
Section 411.7.6.2.
411.7.3.11 In prestressed beams, it shall be permitted
to reduce the area oflongitudinal torsional reinforcement on
the side of the member in compression due to flexure below
that required by Section 4117.3.10 in accordance with
Section 411.7.3.9.
411.7.4 Details of torsional reinforcement
411.7.4.1 Torsion reinforcement shall consist of
following:
L Closed stirrups or closed ties, perpendicular to the

taken smaller than 30 degrees nor larger than 60 degrees. It axis of the member, or

shall be permitted to take 0 equal to: 2. A closed cage of welded wire fabric with transverse
wires perpendicular to the axis ofthe member, or
1. 45 degrees for non-prestressed members or members
with less prestress than in Item 2 below, 3. In non-prestressed beams, spiral reinforcement.

z. 37.5 degrees for prestressed members with an

effective prestress force not less than 40 percent of 411.7.4.2 Transverse torsional reinforcement shall be
the tensile strength of the longitudinal reinforcement. anchored by one of the following:
1 A 135-degree standard hook around a longitudinal
bar, or
411.7.3.7 The additional longitudinal reinforcement
required for torsion shall not be less than: 2. According to Section 412.14.2.1, 412.14.2.2 or
412.14.2.3 in regions where the concrete surrounding
At Ivv t2f)
p,,-_-co (411-22) the anchorage is restrained against spaUing by a
S fyl flange or slab or similar member.
\-~here 0 shall be the same value used in Equation (411-21)
and AI is shall be taken as the amount computed from
411.7.4.3 Longitudinal torsion reinforcement shall be
Equation (411-21) not modified in accordance with Section
developed at both ends.
411.7.5.20r411.7.5.3.
411.7.4.4 For hollow sections in torsion, the distance
411.7.3.8 Reinforcement required for torsion shall be
measured from the centerline of the transverse torsional
added to that required for the shear, moment and axial force
reinforcement to the inside face of the wall of a hollow
that act in combination with the torsion. The most
section shall not be less than O.SAohlph
restrictive requirements for reinforcement spacing and
placement must be met.
411.7.5 Minimum Torsion Reinforcement
411.7.3.9 It shall be permitted to reduce the area of
411.7.5.1 A minimum area of torsion reinforcement
longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the flexural
shall be provided in all regions where the factored torsional
compression zone by an amount equal to M" 1(0.9dJ;,),
moment Til exceeds the values specified in Section 411.7.1.
where M" is the factored moment acting at the section in
combination with Til, except that the reinforcement
provided shall not be less than that required by Section
4 t!. 7.5.3 or 4117.6.2.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 SHEAR AND TORSION

411.7.5.2 Where torsional reinforcement is required 411.8.3.1 Provisions of Sections 411.8.5 through
by Section 411.7.5.1, the minimum area of transverse 411.8.1 0 shall apply for all calculations of shear transfer
closed stirrups shall be computed by: strength.

(411-23) 411.8.4 Shear-Friction .{)esign Methods

411.8.4.1 When shear-friction reinforcement 1S

411.7.5.3 Where torsional reinforcement is required perpendicular to shear plane, shear strength Vn shall be
by Section 411.7.5.1, the minimum total area of computed by
longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be computed by:
=
~min Vn Avf/yP (411-25)
,
== 5ffc A.,p
I21yl
(At '1 Iyv Ph
s ) Iyl
(411-24)
where p is coefficient of friction in accordance with
Section 411.8.4.3.
where A/s shall not be taken less than (I/6)b'/fyv.
411.8.4.2 When shear-friction reinforcement is
411.7.6 Spacing of Torsion Reinforcement.
inclined to shear plane such that the shear force produces
tension in shear-friction reinforcement, shear strength Vn
411.7.6.1 The spacing of transverse torsion
shall be computed by
reinforcement shall not exceed the smaller of p"I8 or 300
mm. (411-26)

411.7.6.2 The longitudinal reinforcement required for
torsion shall be distributed around the perimeter of the
dosed stirrups with a maximum spacing of 300 mm. The
longitudinal bars or tendons shall be inside the stirrups.
There shall be at least one longitudinal bar or tendon in
each comer of the stirrups. Bars shall have a diameter at
where af is angle between shear-friction reinforcement and
shear plane.
411.8.4.3 Coefficient of friction p in Equation (411
25) and Equation (411-26) shaIl be
Concrete placed monolithically.................. 1.4A

leas! 1/24 of the stirrup spacing but not less than a 10 mm Concrete placed against hardened

diameter bar. concrete with surface intentionally

roughened as specified in Section

411.7.6.3 Torsion reinforcement shall be provided for 411.8.9 ............................................... LOA

a distance of at least (b l + d) beyond the point theore-tically
required.
411.8 SHEAR - FRICTION
411.8.1 The following provisions shall be applied where
it is appropriate to consider shear transfer across a given
plane, such as an existing or potential crack, an interface
between dissimilar materials, or an interface between two
concretes cast at different times.
411.8.2 Design of cross sections subject to shear transfer
as described in Section 411.8 shall be based on Equation
(411-1) where Vn is calculated in accordance with
provisions of Section 411.8.3 or 411.8.4.
411.8.3 A crack shall be assumed to occur along the shear
plane considered. Required area of shear-friction
reinforcement Avf across the shear plane may be designed
using either Section 411.8.4 or any other shear transfer
design methods that result in prediction of strength in
substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests.
Concrete placed against hardened
concrete not intentionally
roughened ........................................... 0.6A
Concrete anchored to as-roIled
structural steel by headed studs or
by reinforcing bars (see Section
411.8.10) ....................................... O.H
where .A = 1.0 for normal-weight concrete, 0.85 fOI saIl'!
lightweight concrete and 0.75 for all-lightweight concrete
Linear interpolation shall be permitted when partial sand
replacement is used.
411.8.5 Shear strength Vn shall not be taken greater than
O.2f'aAc or 55 Ac in newlons, where Ac is area of concrete
section resisting shear transfer.
411.8.6 Design yield strength of shear-friction
reinforcement shall not exceed 415 MPa.
411.8.7 Net tension across shear plane shall be resisted by .
additional reinforcement. Permanent net compression
across shear plane shaIl be permitted to be taken as additive
to the force in the shear-friction reinforcement Avfh' when
calculating required A,of:

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE

reinforcement shall be 411.9.7 Shear strength l'c shall be permitted to be

placed along the shear plane and shall be computed by
develop the specified yield strength on both
em!bedlm~~nt, hooks or welding to special devices. M\(IF: + 120 p", -'"-
f>::-1 ( 3.5 -2.5-:;:-,,--j Vd) b w d
7 fud Mu
For the purpose of Section 411.8, when concrete (411-29)
against previously hardened concrete, the interface
transfer shall be clean and free of laitance. If p is except that the tenn
ll""'~"'~-' to LOA, interface shall be roughened to a full
of approximately 6 mm. shall not exceed 2.5, and Ve shall not be taken greater than
(1/2) "Pc b,p. MIl is factored moment occutring simul
When shear is transferred between as-rolled taneously with Vu at the critical section defined in Section
concrete using headed studs or welded reinforcing 411.9.5.
steel shall be clean and free of paint
411.9.8 Where factored shear force Vu exceeds shear
strength lc~, shear reinforcement shall be provided to
SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR DEEP satisfy Equations (411- 1) and (411-2), where shear strength
MEMBERS V. shall be computed by

[ l+~-l
1 provisions of this section shall apply for members
t;,ld less than 5 that are loaded on one face and vs ~ _d_ + AVh [1l._!'!d_..lJ] f
__ d
on the opposite face so that the compression s 12 S2 12 }'
can develop between the loads and the supports. See
also Section 412.11.6.
r
(411-30)

.9.2 The design of simple supported deep flexural
;.; mlemlbers for shear shall be based on Equations (411-1) and
(41 V2), where shear strength Vc shall be in accordance with
S~iion 411.9.6 or 411.9.7, and shear strength V. shall be in
a,,60rdance with Section 411.9.8.
411.9.3 The design of continuous deep flexural members
for shear shall be based on Sections 411.2 through 411.6
'with Section 411.9.5 substituted for Section 411.23, or on
methods satisfying equilibrium and strength requirements.
In either case, the design shall also satisfy Sections 41 1.9.4,
411.9.9 and 411.9,10.
411.9.4 Shear strength Vn for deep flexural members shall
not be taken greater than (2/3) Pe bw d when lid is less
than 2. When I,/d is between 2 and 5,
v n
:= 1(1O+~) TF'
18 d 1JJ c
bd
'"
(411-27)
where Av is area of shear reinforcement perpendicular to
flexural tension reinforcem~nt within a distance s, and Avh is
area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural
reinforcement within a distance S2.
411.9.9 Area of shear reinforcement Av shall not be k~i
than 0.0015 b,.s, and s shall not exceed diS or 450 mm.
411.9.10 Area of horizontal shear reinforcement AVh shall
not be less than 0.0025 b"s2, and S2 shall not exceed d/3 or
450 mm.
411.9.11 Shear reinforcement required at the critical
section defined in Section 411.9.5 shall be used throughout
the span.
411.10 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR
BRACKETS AND CORBELS

411.10.1 The following provisions apply to brackets and

411.9.S Critical section for shear measured from face of
support shall be taken at a distance O. I5ln for uniformly
loaded beams and 0.50a for beams with concentrated loads,
but not greater than d
411.9.6 Unless a more detailed calculation is made in
accordance with Section 411.9.7.
(411-28)
corbels with a shear span-to-depth ratio aid not greater than
unity, and subject to a horizontal tensile force Nuc not larger
than Vu. Distance d shall be measured at face of support.
411.10.2 Depth at outside edge of bearing area shall not be
less than 0.5d
411.10.3 Section at face of support shall be designed to
resist simultaneously a shear I:" a moment [Vua + N"e (h
d)], and a horizontal tensile force N;,c'

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

-, ~"_,,,_,_--"""TIlii'_"iIIl7IrrrI1Inltl~tll"
 4-50 SHEAR AND TORSION
411.10.3.1 In all design calculations in accordance with
Section 411.9, strength-reduction factor (J shall be taken
equal to 0.85.
411.10.3.2 Design of shear-friction reinforcement Alifto
resist shear Vu shall be in accordance with Section 411.8.
411.10.3.2.1 For normal-weight concrete, shear
strength Vn shall not be taken greater .than 0.2 j'eb" d nor 5.5
bw d in newtons.
411.10.3.2.2 For all lightweight or sand-lightweight
concrete, shear strength Vn shall not be taken greater than
(0.2 - 0.07 a/d)!eb,.d nor (5.5 - 1.9 aid) b,p in newtons.
411.10.3.3 Reinforcement AI to resist moment [V,,a +
Nue (h-d)] shall be computed in accordance with Sections
410.3 and 410.4.
411.10.3.4 Reinforcement An to resist tensile force Nile
shall be determined from Nue < (JA,/y. Tensile force N,1t:
shall not be taken less than O.2Vu unless special provisions
are made to avoid tensile forces. Tensile force Nue shall be
'regarded as a live load even when tension results from
creep, shrinkage or temperature change.
411.10.3.5 Area of primary tension reinforcement As
.
.,
,.
II shall be made equal to the greater of (Af + An) or (2A'f/3
+ An).
411.10.4 Closed stirrups or ties parallel to As, with a total
area Ah not less than O.S(As - An), shall be uniformly
distributed within two thirds of the effective depth adjacent
toA,.
411.10.5 Ratio p=A/bdshall not be less than 0.04 (j'e!fv).
411.10.6 At front face of bracket or corbel, primary tension
h' 'I
reinforcement As shall be anchored by one of the following:
by a structural weld to a transverse bar of at least
equal size; weld to be designed to develop specified
.'
~, '\
"
yield strength/y of As bars;
2 by bending primary tension bars As back to form a
horizontal loop; or
3 by some other means of positive anchorage.
411.10.7 Bearing area of load on bracket or corbel shall
not project beyond straight portion of primary tension bar
As, or project beyond interior face of transverse anchor bar
(if one is provided).
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
411.11 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR WALLS
411.11.1 Design for shear forces perpendicular to face of
wall shall be in accordance with provisions for slabs in
Section 411.13. Design for horizontal shear forces in plane
of wall shall be in accordance with Section 411.11.2
through 411.11.8.
411.11.2 Design of horizontal section for shear in plane of
wall shall be based on Equations (411-1) and (411-2),
where shear strength Ve shall be in accordance with Section
411.11.5 or 411.1 1.6 and shear strength Vs shall be in
accordance with Section 41 L 11.9.
411.11.3 Shear strength Vn at any horizontal section for
shear in plane of wall shall not be taken greater than
(S/6) ...Jj'c hd
411.11.4 For design for horizontal shear forces in plane of
wall, d shall be taken equal to 0.8Iw . A larger value of d,
equal to the distance from extreme compression fiber to
center of force of all reinforcement in tension shall be
permitted to be used when determined by a strain
compatibility analysis.
411.11.5 Unless a more detailed calculation is made in
accordance with Section 411.1 1.6, shear strength ~~ shall
not be taken greater than (1/6) ...Jl' c h d for walls subject to
N" in compression, or ~.~ shall not be taken greater than the
value given in Section 411.4.23 for walls subject to N" in
tension.
411.11.6 Shear strength Ve shall be permitted to be
computed by Equations (411-31) and (411-32), where Vc
shall be the lesser of Equation (411-31) or (411-32).
V = ~~f'c hd + N"d (411-31)
c 4 41w
or
vc
(411-32)
where N" is negative for tension. When (M,,/v,, 1)2) is
negative, Equation (411-32) shall not apply.
411.11.7 Sections located closer to wall base than a
distance /,./2 or one half the wall height, whichever is less,
shall be permitted to be designed for the same T'c as that
computed at a distance 1,/2 or one half the height
 CONCRETE 4--51
411.11.8 When factored shear force VII is less than vJ2,
"reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with Section
411.11. 9 or in accordance with Section 414. When VI(
exceeds Vc 12, wall reinforcement for resisting shear shall
be provided in accordance with Section 411.11.9.
411.11.~ Design of Shear Reinforcement for Walls
411.11.9.1 Where factored shear force VI( exceeds
shear strength Vc, horizontal shear reinforcement shall be
provided to satisfy Equations (411-1) and (411-2), where
shear strength V. shall be computed by
(411-33)
where Av is area of horizontal shear reinforcement within a
distance S2 and distance d is in accordance with Section
411.11.4. Vertical shear reinforcement shall be provided in
accordance with Section 411.11.9.4.
411.11.9.2 Ratio Ph of horizontal shear reinforcement
area to gross concrete area of vertical section shall not be
less than 0.0025.
411.11.9.3 Spacing of horizontal shear reinforcement
S2shall not exceed 1... 15, 3h or 450 mm.
411.11.9.4 Ratio Pn of vertical shear reinforcement
area to gross concrete area of horizontal section shall not be
less than
r - h':
PI! = 0.0025 + 0.5l2.5 J
(Ph 0.0025) 411.13.2 The design of a slab or footing for two-'WaY
(411-34)
nor 0.0025, but need not be greater than the required
horizontal shear reinforcement.
411.11.9.5 Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement Sl
shall not exceed 1".13, 3h or 450 mm.
411.12 TRANSFER OF MOMENTS TO
COLUMNS
411.12.1 When gravity load, wind, earthquake or other
lateral forces cause transfer of moment at connections of
framing elements to columns, the shear resulting from
moment transfer shall be considered in the design of lateral
reinforcement in the columns.
411.12.2 Except for connections not part of a primary
seismic load-resisting system that are restrained on four
sides by beams or slabs of approximateiy equal depth,
connections shall have lateral reinforcement not less than
that required by Equation (411-13) within the column for a
National S1ructural Code of the Philippines. Volume 1
depth not less than that of the deepest connection of
framing elements to the columns. See also Section 407.10.
411.13 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SLABS
AND FOOTINGS
411.13.1 The shear strength of slabs and footings in the
vicinity of columns, concentrated loads or reactions is
governed by the more severe of two conditions:
411.13.1.1 Beam action where each critical section to
be investigated extends in a plane across the entire width.
For beam action the slab or footing shall be designed in
accordance with Sections 411.2 through 411.6.
411.13.1.2 Two-way action where each of the critical
sections to be investigated shall be located so that its
perimeter, bo. is a minimum, but need not approach closer
than d/2 to:
1. Edges or comers of columns, concentrated loads or
reaction areas, or
2. Changes in slab thickness such as edges of capitals
or drop panels.
For two-way action, the slab of footing shall be designed in
accordance with Sections 411.13.2 through 411.13.6.
411.13.1.3 For square or rectangular columns,
concentrated loads or reactions areas, the critical sections
with four straight sides shall be permitted.
action is based on Equations (411-1) and (411-2). Vc shall
be computed in accordance with Section 411.13.2.1,
411.13.2.2 or 411.13.3.1. Vs shall be computed in
accordance with Section 411.12.3. For slabs with shear
heads, Vn shall be in accordance with Section 411.13.4.
When moment is transferred between a slab and a column,
Section 411.13.6 shall apply.
411.13.2.1 For non-prestressed slabs and footings, Vc
shall be the smallest of:
1. Vc .!..(1+~J~f'c
6 Pc
bod (411-35)
where Pc is the ratio of long side to short side of the
column, concentrated load or reaction area
2. 1l' asd
12 b(}
+ 2J IF: b d
c 0
(411-36)
where a~ is 40 for interior columns, 30 for edge columns
and 20 for comer columns, and
 4-52 SHEAR AND TORSION

411.13.4.3 . The ends of each shearhead arm shall be

3. (411-37) permitted to be cut at angles not less tran 30 degrees with
the horizontal, provided the plastic moment strength of the
411.13.2.2 At columns of two-way prestressed slabs remaining tapered section is adequate to resist the shear
and footings that meet the requirements of Section 418.9.3: force attributed to the arm ofthe shearhead.

411.13.4.4 All compression flanges of steel shapes

shall be located within O.3d of compression surface of slab.

where Pp is the smaller of 0.3 or (asdlbo + 1.5)/12, as is 40
for interior columns, 30 for edge columns and 20 for comer
columns, bo is perimeter of critical section defined in
Section 41 1.1 3.1.2, fpc is the average value of fpc for the
two directions, and v;, is the vertical component of all
effective prestress forces crossing the critical section. Vc
shall be permitted to be computed by Equation (411-38) if
the following are satisfied; otherwise, Section 411.13 .2.1
shall apply:
1. No portion of the column cross section shall be
411.13.4.5 The ratio a" between the stiffness of each
shearhead arm and that of the surrounding composite
cracked slab section of width (C2' + d) shall not be less than
0.15.
411.13.4.6 The plastic moment strength Mp required
for each arm of the shearhead shall be computed by
~Mp = ~~[h" + a (I,. - ~ JJ
v (411-39)

closer to the discontinuous edge than four times the

slab thickness, and where ~ is the strength-reduction factor for flexure, 11 is the
number of arms, and I" is the minimum length of each
2. f'c in Equation (411-38) shall not be taken greater shearhead arm required to comply with requirements of
than 35 MPa), and Section 411.13.4.7 and 411.13 .4.8.
3. fpc in each direction shall not be less than 0.9 MPa, or
be taken greater than 3.5 MPa. 411.12.4.7 The critical slab section for shear shall be
perpendicular to the plane of the slab and shall cross each
.. .
' 411.13.3 Shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires shearhead arm at three fourths the distance [Iv - (cJI2)] from
~.
shall be permitted in slabs and footings in accordance with the column face to the end of the shearhead arm. The
:1 the following: critical section shall be located so that its perimeter bo is a
minimum, but need not be closer than the perimeter defined
411.13.3.1 Vn shall be computed by Equation (411-2), in Section 411.13 .1.2, Item 1.

I""

'"
where ~.~ shall not be taken greater than (/6) ..J f'cbdi, and

the required area of shear reinforcement AI' and Vs shall be 411.12.4.8 Vn shall not be taken greater than (1/3) ..Jf'c '.

.,;.
:i calculated in accordance with Section 411.6 and anchored bod, on the critical section defined in Section 411.13.4.7.

",
'f~"
'" in accordance with Section 412.14. When shearhead reinforcement is provided, Vn shall not be

".
''"" taken greater than 0.6..J Pc bod , on the critical section
I.~,

'". 411.13.3.2 Vn shall not be taken greater than defined in Section 411.13.1.2, Item 1.
,~ .., O.s..Jf'cbo d.
Iii

411.13.4.9 The moment resistance "WI' contributed to

1'I " II, 411.13.4 Shear reinforcement conslstmg of steel 1- or each slab column strip computed by a shearhead shall not
L",. channel- shaped sections (shearheads) shall be permitted-in be taken greater than
:~!
slabs. The provisions of Sections 41 L 13.4. 1 through
411.13.4.9 shall apply where shear due to gravity load is ~a,. ~~, (I _~) (411-40)
transferred at interior column supports. Where moment is 2 11 l. ,. 2
transferred to columns, Section 411.13.6.3 shall apply.
where r/J is the strength-reduction factor for flexure, 11 is the
411.13.4.1 Each shearhead shall consist of steel number of arms, and I,. is the length of each shearhead arm
shapes fabricated by welding with a full penetration weld actually provided. However, M" shall not be taken larger
into identical arms at right angles. Shearhead arms shall not than the smaller of:
be interrupted within the column section. 1. Thirty percent of the total factored moment required for
each slab column strip,
411.13.4.2 A shearhead shall not be deeper than 70 2 The change in column strip moment over the length I",
times the web thickness of the steel shape. .
3. The value ofMp computed by Equation (411-39).

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE

When unbalanced moments are consi where Vc and VI are defined in Section 41 U.::'.3. If shear
shearhead must have adequate anchoragt) to reinforcement is provided, the design shall take into
transmit Mp to column. account the variation of shear stress around the column.

Opening in slabs. When openings in slabs are
. lOcated at a distance less than 10 times the slab thickness
from a concentrated load or reaction area, or when openings
in flat slabs are located within column strips as defined in
Section 413, the critical slab sections for shear defined in
Section 411.13.1.2 and Section 411.13.4.7 shall be
modified as follows:
41i.13.5.1 For slabs without shearheads, that part of
the perimeter of the critical section that is enclosed by
. straight lines projecting from the centroid of the column,
concentrated load or reaction area and tangent to the
boundaries of the openings shall be considered ineffective.
411.13.6.3 When shear reinforcement consisting of
steel 1- or channel-shaped sections (shearheads) is provided,
the sum of the shear stresses due to vertical load acting on
the critical section' defined by Section 411.13.4.7 and the
shear stresses resulting from moment transferred by
eccentricity of shear about the centroid of the critical
section defined in Section 411.13.1. 2 shall not exceed q,
(1/3) ..J/,c

411.13.5.2 For slabs with shearheads, the ineffective

portion of the perimeter shall be one half of that defined in
Section 411.13.5.1

411.13.6 Transfer of Moment in Slab-Column

Connections

411.13.6.1 When gravity load, wind, earthquake or

other lateral forces cause transfer of unbalanced moment,
M u, between a slab and a column, a fraction rr Mu of the
unbalanced moment shall be transferred by flexure in
accordance with Section 413.6.3. The remainder of the
unbalanced moment given by rv Mu shall be considered to
be transferred by eccentricity of shear about the centroid of
the critical section defined in Section 411.13. 1.2 where:

rv = (1 - rr) (411-41)

411.13.6.2 The shear stress resulting from moment

transfer by eccentricity of shear shall be assumed to vary
linearly about the centroid of the critical sections defined in
Section 411.13.1.2. The maximum shear stress Jue to the
factored shear force and moment shall not exceed q, lin:

L For members without shear reinforcement:

;vn = q,(:a J (411-42)

where Vc is as defined in Section 411.13.2.1 and 411.13.2.2.

2. For members with shear reinforcement other than

shearheads:

(411-43)

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 DEVELOPMENT AND SPLICES OF REINFORCEMENT

SECTION 412 - DEVELOPMENT Ihb basic development length of standard hook in

tension, mm.
AND SPLICES OF Mn nominal moment strength at section, Newton meter.
REINFORCEMENT AJ;{d - a '2).
N number of bars in a layer being spliced or
developed at a critical section.
412.1 NOTATIONS n number of bars or wires being spliced or developed
along the plane of splitting.
Ab area ofan individual bar, mm2.
s maximum center to center spacing of transverse
As area of non-prestressed tension reinforcement,
reinforcement within Jd, mm.
mm2 . Sw spacing ofwire to be developed or spliced, mm.

Atr total cross-sectional area of all transverse Vu factored shear force at section.

reinforcement which is within the spacing sand a reinforcement location factor. See Section 412.3.4.

which crosses the potential plane of splitting fJ coating factor. See Section 412.3.4.

through the reinforcement being developed, mm2 /3b ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total area of
Av area of shear reinforcement within a distance s, tension reinforcement at section.
mm-.
1
r reinforcement size factor. See Section 412.3.4.
Aw area of an individual wire to be developed or A. lightweight aggregate concrete factor. See Section
spliced, mm2 . 412.3.4.
a depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as
defined in Section 410.3.7.1, mm.
bw web width, or diameter of circular section, mm. 412.2 DEVELOPMENT OF
c spacing or cover dimension, mm. See Section RE~ORCEMENT-GENERAL
412.3.4.
d distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid 412.2.1 Calculated tension or compression in
oftension reinforcement, mm. reinforcement at each section of structural concrete
nominal diameter of bar, wire or prestressing strand, members shall be developed on each side of that section by
mm. embedment length, hook or mechanical device, or a
specified compressive strength ofconcrete, MPa. combination thereof Hooks shall not be used to develop
square root of specified compressive strength of bars in compression.
concrete, MPa.
average splitting tensile strength of lightweight 412.2.2 The values of "f'c used in Section 412 shall not
'I" aggregate concrete, MPa.
exceed 0.7 MPa.
stress in prestressed reinforcement at nominal

strength, MPa.

fse effective stress in prestressed reinforcement (after

412.3 DEVELOPMENT OF DEFORMED
allowance for all prestress losses), MPa.
BARS AND DEFORMED WIRE IN TENSION
specified yield strength of non-prestressed

reinforcement, lVUPa
412.3.1 Development length, lcJ, in terms of diameter, db,
specified yield strength of transverse reinforceme~t,
for deformed bars and deformed wire in tension shall be
MPa.
determined from either Section 412.3.2 or 412.3.3, but Id
overall thickness of member, mm.
shall not be less than 300 mm.
transverse reinforcement index.

AtrfytllO.m 412.3.2 For deformed bars or deformed wire, J)db shall

additional embedment length at support or at point
be as follows:
of inflection, mm.

development length, mm.

Idb multiplied by applicable modification factors.

basic development length, mm.

development length of standard hook in tension,

measured from critical section to outside end of

hook [straight embedment length between critical

section and start of hook (point of tangency) plus

radius of jj~ild and one bar diameter], mm.

Ihb tittles appiicable modification factors.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE 4-55

20 mm diameter c spacing or cover dimension, millimeters.

and smaller bars 25 mm diameter Use the smaller of either the distance from the
and and larger bars center of the bar to the nearest concrete surface or
one-half the center-to-center spacing of the bars
being developed.
K tr = transverse reinforcement index
Atr/yt
lei 12/y ap;, lei 3/y ap;,
10sn
db 25~f'c db == 5~f'c
where:
Atr total cross-sectional area of all transverse
reinforcement which is within the spacing sand
which crosses the potential plane of splitting
lei IS/yap;, lei 9/y ap;, through the reinforcement being developed,
square millimeters.
db 25~/'c db lO~f'c
/yt specified yield strength of transverse
reinforcement, square millimeters.
s maximum center-to-center spacing of transverse
For deformed bars or deformed wire, Ie/db shall reinforcement within Id, millimeters.
N number of bars or wires being developed along
the plane of splitting.
(412-1)
It shall be permitted to use K tr 0 as a design simplification
even if transverse reinforcement is present.
in which the term (c + ktr)/db shall not be taken greater
412.3.5 Excess reinforcement. Reduction in
than 2.5
development length shall be permitted where reinforcement
in a flexural member is in excess of that required by
412.3.4 The factors for use in the expressions for
analysis except where anchorage or development for /y is
development of deformed bars and deformed wires In
specifically required or the reinforcement is designed under
tension in Sections 412.1 through 412.20 are as follows:
provisions of Section 421.2.1.4 .... [(A.,r<quired)/(As,provi&d)]
a reinforcement location factor
= 1.3 for horizontal reinforcement so placed that
more than 300 mm of fresh concrete is cast 412.4 DEVELOPMENT OF DEFORMED
in the member below the development BARS IN COMPRESSION
length or splice
1.0 for other reinforcement. 412.4.1 Development length ld, in millimeters, for
f3 coating factor deformed bars in compression shall be computed as the
1.5 for epoxy-coated bars or wires with cover product of the basic development length Idb and applicable
less than 3d!>. or clear spacing less than 6db modification factors as defined in this section, but Id shall
1.2 All other epoxy-coated bars or wires. not be less than 200 mm.
] .0 for uncoated reinforcement.
However, the product af3 need not be taken greater than 412.4.2 Basic development length lab shall be
1.7.
r reinforcement size factor
IJb = l7.-
4,,/'.
dh but not less than 0.04dt/y
0.8 for 20 nun diameter and smaller bars and
deformed wires.
412.4.3 Basic development length Idb shall be permitted to
1.0 25 nun diameter and larger bars
be multiplied by applicable factors for:
;. lightweight aggregate concrete factor.
1.3 when lightweight aggregate concrete is used, 412.4.3.1 Excess reinforcement.
however, when!ct is specified, A. shall be
permitted to be ~/'c 11.8/at but not less Reinforcement in excess of that required by
anal ysi s (A "required)!(A .,provid~)
than 1.0
1.0 When normal weight concrete is used.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 DEVELOPMENT AND SPLICES OR REINFORCEMENT

412.4.3.2 Spirals and ties 412.6.3.4 Excess reinforcement.

Reinforcement enclosed within spiral reinforcement not Where anchorage or development for h is not specifically
less than 10 mm diameter and not more than 100 mm pitch required, reinforce-ment in excess of that required by
or within 12 mm diameter ties in conformance with analysis [(As required)/(As provi<JeJl
Section 407.11.5 and spaced not more than 100 mm on
center .. ....... ....... ....... ....... ........ ................................ 0.75 412.6.3.5 Lightweight aggregate
concrete ......................................................... 1.3

412.6.3.6 Epoxy-coated reinforcement.

412.5 DEVELOPMENT OF BUNDLED BARS
Hooked bars with epoxy coating .............................. 1.2
412.5.1 Development length of individual bars within a
412.6.4 For bars being developed by a standard hook at
bundle, in tension or compression, shall be that for the
discontinuous ends of members with side cover and top (or
individual bar, increased 20 percent for 3-bar bundle, and
bottom) cover over hook less than 65 rnm, hooked bar shall
33 percent for 4-bar bundle.
be enclosed within ties or stirrups spaced along the full
development length ldh not greater than 3db, where db is
412.5.2 For determining the appropriate factors in Section
diameter of hooked bar. For this case, factor of Section
412.3, a unit of bundled bars shall be treated as a single bar
412.6.3.3 shall not apply.
ofa diameter derived from the equivalent total area.
412.6.5 Hooks shall not be considered effective In
developing bars in compression.
412.6 DEVELOPMENT OF STANDARD
HOOKS IN TENSION
412.7 MECHANICAL ANCHORAGE
4J2.6.1 Development length ldh in mm for deformed bars
in tension terminating in a standard hook shall be computed 412.7.1 Any mechanical device capable of developing the
as the product of the basic development length ihb of
strength of reinforcement without damage to concrete may
Section 412.6.2 and the applicable modification factor or be used as anchorage.
factors of Section 412.6.3, but ldh shall not be less than 8db
or less than 150 mm. 412.7.2 Test results showing adequacy of such
mechanical devices shall be presented to the building
412.6.2 Basic development length lhb for a hooked bar official.
with h equal to 415 MPa shall be
i = 100 d 412.7.3 Development of reinforcement shall be permitted
hh ~J'c b to consist of a combination of mechanical anchorage plus
additional embedment length of reinforcement between the
412.6.3 Basic development length lhb shall be multiplied
point of maximum bar stress and the mechanical anchorage.
by applicable factor or factors for:

412.6.3.1 Bar yield strength.

412.8 DEVELOPMENT OF WELDED
Bars withh other than 415 MPa .......................... h/415
DEFORMED WIRE FABRIC IN TENSION
412.6.3.2 Concrete cover.
412.3.1 Development length id, in millimeters, of welded
For 36 mm diameter bar and smaller, side cover (normal to
deformed wire fabric measured from the point of critical
plane of the hook) not less than 65 mm, and for 90-degree
section to the end of wire shall be computed as the product
hook, cover on bar extension beyond hook not less than 50
of the development length ld, from' Section 412.3.2 or
millimeters ........................................................... 0.7
412.3.3 times a wire fabric factor from Section 412.8.2 or
412.8.3. It shall be permitted to reduce the development
412.6.3.3 Ties or stirrups.
length in accordance with Section 412.3.5 when applicable,
For 36 mm diameter bar and smaller, hook enclosed
but ld shall not be less than 200 mm except in computation
vertically or horizontally within ties or stirrup ties spaced
of lap splices by Section 412.19. When using the wire
along the full development length ldh not greater than 3db,
fabric factor from Section 412.8.2, it shall be permitted to
where db is diameter
use an epoxy-coating factor P of 1.0 for epoxy-coated
of hooked bar .......................................................... 0.8
welded wire fabric in Sections 412.3.2 'and 412.3.3.

412.3.2 For welded deformed wire fabric with at least one

cross wire within the development length and not less than

AsSociation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
from the point of the critical section, the
1......""TPr"
factor shall be the greater of:
not be taken greater than 1.
For welded deformed wire fabric with no cross
within the development length or with a single cross
than 50 millimeters from the point of the critical
the wire fabric factor shaH be taken as 1, and the
lop1melilt length shall be determined as for deformed
When any plain wires are present in the deformed
fabric in the direction of the development length, the
. shall be developed in accordance with Section 412.9.
DEVELOPMENT OF WELDED PLAIN
FABRIC IN TENSION
Yield strength of welded plain wire fabric shall
considered developed by embedment of two cross wires
the closer cross wire not less than 50 millimeters from
the point ofthe critical section. However, the development
length [d, in millimeters, measured from the point of the
critical section to the outermost cross wire shall not be less
. than
except that when reinforcement provided is in excess of that
required, this length may be reduced in accordance with
Section 412.3.5. ld shall not be less than 150 rom except in
computation oflap splices by Section 412.20
412.10 DEVELOPMENT OF PRESTRESSING
STRAND
412.10.1 Three- or seven-wire pre-tensioning strand shall
be bonded beyond the critical section for a development
length, in millimeters, not less than
Expression in parentheses used as a constant without units.
where db is strand diameter in millimeters, and/p. andlse are
expressed in megapascals.
412.10.2 Limiting the investigation to cross sections
nearest each end of the member that are required to develop
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-57
full design strength under specified factored loads shall be
permitted.
412.10.3 Where bonding of a strand does not extend to end
of member, and design includes tension at service load in
pre-compressed tensile zone as permitted by Section
418.5.2, development length specified in Section 412.10.1
shall be doubled.
412.11 DEVELOPMENT OF FLEXURAL
REINFORCEMENT -.GENERAL
412.11.1 Development of tension reinforcement by
bending across the web to be anchored or made continuous
with reinforcement on the opposite face of member shall be
permitted.
412.11.2 Critical sections for development of
reinforcement in flexural members are at points of
maximum stress and at points within the span where
adjacent reinforcement terminates or is bent. Provisions of
Section 412.12.3 must be satisfied.
412.11.3 Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point at
which it is no longer required to resist flexure for a distance
equal to the effective depth of member or 12db, whichever
is greater, except at supports of simple spans and at free end
of cantilevers.
412.11.4 Continuing reinforcement shall have an
embedment length not less than the development length,[d
beyond the point where bent or terminated tension
reinforcement is no longer required to resist flexure.
412.11.5 Flexural reinforcement shall not be termir1ated in
a tension zone unless one of the following conditions is
satisfied:
412.11.5.1 Shear at the cutoff point does not exceed
two thirds that permitted, including shear strength of shear
reinforcement provided.
412.11.5.2 Stirrup area in excess of that required for
shear and torsion is provided along each terminated bar or
wire over a distance from the termination point equal to
three fourths the effective depth of member. Excess stirrup
areaAv shall not be less than OAby,si;.). Spacing s shall not
exceed dl8Pb where Pb is the ratio of area of reinforcement
cut offto total area oftension reinforcement at the section,
412.11.5.3 For Diameter 36 mm bar and smaller,
continuing reinforcement provides double the area required
for flexure at the cutoff point and shear does not exceed
three fourths that permitted.
 DEVELOPMENT AND SPLICES OR REINFORCEMENT
412.11.6 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for
tension reinforcement in flexural members where
reinforcement stress is not directly proportional to moment,
such as sloped, stepped or tapered footings, brackets, deep
flexural members, or members in which tension
reinforcement is not parallel to compression face. See
Sections 412.12.4 and 412.13.4 for deep flexural members.
412.12 DEVELOPMENT OF POSITIVE
MOMENT REINFORCEMENT
412.12.1 At least one third the positive moment
reinforcement in simple members and one fourth the
positive moment reinforcement in continuous members
shall extend along the same face of member into the
support. In beams, such reinforcement shall extend into the
support at least 150 mm.
412.12.2 When a flexural member is part of a primary
lateral-load-resisting system, positive moment reinforce
ment required to be extended into the support. by Section
412.12.1 shall be anchored to develop the specified yield
strength/y in tension at the face of support.
412.12.3 At simple supports and at points of inflection,
positive moment tension reinforcement shall be limited to a
diameter such that ld computed for t, by Section 412.3
satisfies Equation (412-2), except Equation (412-2) need
not be satisfied for reinforcement terminating beyond center
line of simple supports by a standard hook or a mechanical
anchorage at least equivalent to a standard hook.
(412-2)
where:
la at a support shall be the embedment length beyond
center of support.
I" at a point of inflection shall be limited to the
effective depth of member or 12d", whichever is
greater.
!iIIl
Mn nominal strength assuming all reinforcement at the
section to be stressed to the specified yield
strengthJ;.
V" factored shear force at the section.
An increase of 30 percent in the value of M,/V" shall be
permitted when the ends of reinforcement are confined by a
compressive reaction.
412.12.4 At simple supports of deep flexural members,
positive moment tension reinforcement shall be anchored to
develop the specified yield strength /y in tension at the face
of support. At interior supports of deep flexural members,
positive moment tension reinforcement shall be continuous
or be spliced with that ofthe adjacent spans.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
412.13 DEVELOPMENT OF NEGATIVE
MOMENT REINFORCEMENT
412.13.1 Negative moment reinforcement in a continuous,
restrained or cantilever member, or in any member of a
rigid frame, shall be anchored in or through the supporting
member by embedment length, hooks or mechanical
anchorage.
412.13.2 Negative moment reinforcement shall have an
embedment length into the span as required by Sections
412.2 and 412.11, Item 3.
412.13.3 At least one third the total tension reinforcement
provided for negative moment at a support shall have an
embedment length beyond the point of inflection not less
than effective depth of member, 12db, or 1/l6 the clear
span, whichever is greater.
412.13.4 At interior supports of deep flexural members,
negative moment tension reinforcement shall be continuous
with that of the adjacent spans.
412.14 DEVELOPMENT OF WEB
REINFORCEMENT
412.14.1 Web reinforcement shall be carried as close to
compression and tension surfaces of member as cover
requirements and proximity of other reinforcement will
permit.
412.14.2 Ends of single leg, simple U- or multiple U
stirrups shall be anchored by one ofthe following means:
412.14.2.1 For 16 mm diameter bar and D31 wire, and
smaller, and for 20 and 25 mm diameter bars witht. of 275
MPa or less, a standard stirrup hook around longitudinal
reinforcement.
412.14.2.2 For 20 and 25 mm diameter stirrups with,(.
greater than 275 MFa, a standard stirrup hook around a
longitudinal bar plus an embedment betweenmidheight of
the member and the outside end of the hook equal to or
greater than 0.1 d,J;.! fc
412.14.2.3 For each leg of welded smooth wire fabric
forming simple U-stirrups, either:
1. Two longitudinal wires spaced at a 50 mm spacing'
along the member at the top ofthe U.
2. One longitudinal wire located not more than d/4
from the compression face and a second wire closer
to the compression face and spaced not less than 50
millimeters from the first wire. The second wire shall
be permitted to be located on the stirrup leg beyond a
 CONCRETE 4-59
bend, or on a bend with an inside diameter of bend
not less than 8db.
For each end of a single-leg stirrup of
plain or deformed wire fabric, two longitudinal
at a minimum spacing of 50 millimeters and with the
wire at least the greater of d'4 or 50 millimeters from
of member d?. Outer longitudinal wire at
face shall not be farther from the face than the
of primary flexural reinforcement closest to the
4.2.5 In joist construction as defined in Section
for 12 mm diameter bar and D20 wire and smaller,
~.",.rI'''rri hook.
; Between anchored ends, each bend in the
lntl.nW)US portion of a simple U-stirrup or multiple U
shall enclose a longitudinal bar.
Longitudinal bars bent to act as shear
'reilnt()rc(ID}mt, if extended into a region of tension, shall be
':c<mtinw)us with longitudinal reinforcement and, if extended
a region of compression, shall be anchored beyond
d/2 as specified for development length in
412.3 for that part of./y required to satisfy Equation
11-19).
Pairs of U-stirrups or ties so placed as to form a
closed unit shall be considered properly spliced when
lengths oflaps are 1.31d . In members at least 450 mm deep,
such splices with AI;, not more than 40 kN per leg may be
considered adequate if stirrup legs extend the full available
. depth of member.
SPLICES OF REINFORCEMENT
Splices of reinforcement shall be made only as
required or permitted on design drawings or in
specifications, or as authorized by the engineer.
412.15.2 Lap splices
412.15.2.1 Lap splices shall not be used for bars
larger than 36 mm diameter, except as provided in Sections
412.17.2 and 415.9.2.3.
412.15.2.2 Lap splices of bars in a bundle shall be
based on the 'Iap splice length required for individual bars
within the bundle, increased in accordance with Section
412.5. Individual bar splices within a bundle shall not
overlap. Entire bundles shall not be lap spliced.
412.15.2.3 Bars spliced by non-contact lap splices in
flexural members shall not be spaced transversely farther
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
apart than one fifth the required lap splice length, or 150
mm.
412.15.3 Welded splices and mechanical connections
412.15.3.1 Welded splices and other mechanical
connections may be used.
412.15.3.2 Except as provided in this chapter, all
welding shall conform to "Structural Welding Code
Reinforcing Steel" (ANSIIAWS D1.4).
412.15.3.3 A full-welded splice shall develop at least
125 percent of specified yield strength,J;" of the bar.
412.15.3.4 A full mechamcal connection shall develop
in tension or compression, as required, at least 125 percent
of specified yield strength J;. of the bar.
412.15.3.5 Welded splices and mechanical
connections not meeting requirements of Section 412.15.3.3
or 412.15.3.4 are allowed only for 16 mm diameter bars and
smaller and in accordance with Section 412.16.4.
412.15.3.6 Welded splices and mechanical
connections shall maintain the clearance and coverage
requirements of Sections 407.7 and 407.8.
412.16 SPLICES OF DEFORMED BARS AND
DEFORMED WIRE IN TENSION
412.16.1 Mimmum length of lap for tension lap spliees
shall be as required for Class A or B splice, but not less
than 300 mm, where:
Class A splice .................................. 1.01d
Class B splice ........................ ........... 1.31d
where ld is the tensile development length for the specified
yield strength./y in accordance with Section 412.3 without
the modification factor of Section 412.3.5.
412.16.2 Lap splices of deformed bars and deformed wire
in tension shall be Class B splices except that Class A
splices may be used when:
1. the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice
that required by analysis over the entire length of the
splice, and
2. one half or less of the total reinforcement is spliced
within the required lap length.
412.16.3 Welded splices or mechamcal connections used
where area of reinforcement provided is less than twice that
required by analysis shall meet requirements of Section
412.15.3.3 and 412.15.3.4.
 DEVELOPMENT AND SPLICES OR REINFORCEMENT
4-60
412.16.4 Welded splices or mechanical connections not
meeting the requirements of Section 412.15.3.3 or
412.15.3.4 are allowed for 16 mm diameter bars and
smaller when the area of reinforcement provided is at least
twice that required by analysis, and the following
requirements are met:
412.16.4.1 Splices shall be staggered at least 600 mm
and in such manner as to develop at every section at least
twice the calculated tensile force at that section but not less
than 140 MPa for total area of reinforcement provided.
412.16.4.2 In computing tensile forces developed at
each section, rate the spliced reinforcement at the specified
splice strength. Unspliced reinforcement shall be rated at
that fraction of jy defined by the ratio of the shorter actual
development length to ld required to develop the specified
yield strengthjy.
412.16.4.3 Mechanical connections need not be
staggered as required by Section 412.16.4.1 or 412.16.5
provided the clearance and coverage requirements of
Sections 407.7 and 407.8 are maintained and, at 90 percent
of the yield stress, the strain measured over the full length
of the connector does not exceed 50 percent ofthe strain of
an unspliced bar when the maximum computed design load
stress does not exceed 50 percent ofthe yield stress.
412.16.5 Splices in "tension tie members" shall be made
with a full-welded splice or full mechanical connection in
accordance with Section 412.15.3.3 and 412.15.3.4, and
splices in adjacent bar shall be staggered at least 750 mm.
:I~.
.pl'l 412.17 SPLICES OF DEFORMED BARS IN
COMPRESSION
412.17.1 Compression lap splice length shall be 0.07f;db
for jy of 415 MPa or less, or (0.13 .t;. - 24) db for.1; greater
than 415 MPa, but not less than 300 mm. For f~ less than
20. MPa, length of lap shall be increased by one third.
412.17.2 When bars of different size are lap spliced in
compression, splice length shall be the larger of:
development length oflarger bar, or splice length of smaller
bar. Lap splices of 45 and 60 mm diameter bars to 36 mm
diameter and smaller bars shall be permitted.
412.17.3 Welded splices or mechanical connections used
in compression shall meet requirements of Sections
412.15.3.3 and 412.15.3.4.
412.17.4 End-Bearing Splices
412.17.4.1 In bars required for compression only,
transmission of compressive stress by bearing of square cut
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
ends held in concentric contact by a suitable device shall be
permitted.
412.17.4.2 Bar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces
within 1-112 degrees of a right angle to the axis of the bars
and shall be fitted within 3 degrees of full bearing after
assembly.
412.17.4.3 End-bearing splices shall be used only in
members containing closed ties, closed stirrups or spirals.
412.18 SPECIAL SPLICE REQUIREMENTS
FOR COLUMNS
412.18.1 Lap splices, butt welded splices, mechanical
connections or end-bearing splices shall be used with the
limitations of Sections 412.18.2 through 412.18.4. A splice
shall satisfY requirements for all load combinations for the
column.
412.18.2 Lap Splices in Colnmns
412.18.2.1 Where the bar stress due to factored loads
is compressive, lap splices shall conform to Sections
412.17.1 and 412.17.2, and where applicable, to Section
412.18.2.4 or 412.18.2.5.
412.18.2.2 Where the bar stress due to factored load'.>
is tensile and does not exceed 0.5};. in tension, lap splices
shall be Class B tension lap splices if more than one half of
the bars are spliced at any section, or Class A tension lap
splices if one half or fewer of the bars are spliced at any
section and alternate lap splices are staggered by 'd.
412.18.2.3 Where the bar stress due to factored loads
is greater than 0.5 };. in tension, lap splices shall be Class B
tension lap splices.
412.18.2.4 In tied reinforced compression members,
where ties throughout the lap splice length have an effective
area not less than O.OOIsh 05, lap splice length shall be
permitted to be multiplied by 0.83, but lap lefibrth shall not
be less than 300 mm. Tie legs perpendicular to dimension
h shall be used in determining effective area.
412.18.2.5 In spirally reinforced compression
members, lap splice length of bars within a spiral shall be
permitted to be multiplied by 07<;, but lap length shall not
be less than 300 mm.
412.18.3 Welded splices or mechanical connectors in,
columns. Welded splices or mechanical connectors in,
columns shall meet the requirements of Section 412.15.3.
or412.15.3.4.
 CONCRETE 4-61

splices in columns. End-bearing SECTION 413 - TWO-WAY SLAB

with Section 412.17.4 shall be permitted to be
bars stressed in compression provided the
C>t"{1(7~'rM or additional bars are provided at splice
continuing bars in each face of the column shall
strength, based on the specified yield strength /y,
O.2/y times the area of the vertical reinforcement in
Splices of Welded Deformed Wire Fabric
Minimum length of lap for lap splices of welded
wire fabric measured between the ends of each fabric
not be less than 1.31d or 200 rom, and the overlap
between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet
be less than 50 millimeters, Id shall be the development
for the specified yield strength h. in accordance with
12.8.
Lap splices of welded deformed wire fabric, with no
within the lap splice length, shall be determined as
When any plain wires are present in the deformed wire
in the direction of the lap splice or when deformed wire
. lap spliced to plain wire fabric, the fabric shall be lap
in accordance with Section 412.20.
Splices of Welded Plain Wire Fabric in
""'Millimum length of lap for lap splices of welded smooth wire
shall be in accordance with the following:
!'!'i'l'~12.20.1 When area of reinforcement provided is less than
. ,.;..~ce that required by analysis at splice location, length of
"';':ovedap measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric
':~:Sheet shall not be less than one spacing of cross wires plus 50
'*[~;millimeters, or less than 1.5 ld, or 150 rom, ld shall be the
!'!~evelopment length for the specified yield strength /y in
accordance with Section 412.9.
412.20.2 When area of reinforcement provided is at least twice
.tthat required by analysis at splice location, length of overlap
. measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet
"shall not be less than 1.5 ld, or 50 millimeters, ld shall be the
'~development length for the specified yield strength h in
accordance with Section 412.9.
SYSTEMS
413.1 NOTATION
bi = width of the critical section defined in Section
411.13 .1.2 measured in the direction of the span for
which moments are determined, mm
b2 = width of the critical section defined in Section
411.13.1.2 measured in the direction perpendicular to
bI, mm
C cross-sectional constant to define torsional properties
The constant C for T - or L-sections shall be permitted
to be evaluated by dividing the section into separate
rectangular parts and summing the values of C for
each part
CI = size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column,
capital, or bracket measured in the direction of the span
for which moments are being determined, mm
C2 = size of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column,
capital or bracket measured transverse to the direction
of the span for which moments are being determined,
mm
Ecb = modulus of elasticity of beam concrete
Ecs = modulus of elasticity of slab concrete
h = overall thickness of member, mm
h moment of inertia about centroidal axis of gross section
ofbeam as defined in Section 413.4
Is = moment of inertia about centroidal axis of gross section
of slab
h3/12 times width of slab defined in notations a. and f:Jr
Kr torsional stiffness of torsional member; moment per
unit rotation
In = length of clear span in direction that moments are being
determined, measured face to face of supports
11 length of span in direction that moments are being
determined, measured center to center of supports
12 = length of span transverse to i J, measured center to
center of supports. See also Sections 413.7.2.3 and
413.7.2.4
Mo = total factored static moment
Mu = factored moment at section
Vc =:nominal shear strength provided by concrete. See
Section 411.13.2.1
VII factored shear force at section
Wd = factored dead load per unit area
WI = factored live load per unit area
Wu = factored load per unit area
x = shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross
section, mm

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 4-62 TWO-WAY SLAB SYSTEMS
y = longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross
section, mm
a ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural
stiffness of a width of slab bounded laterally by center
lines of adjacent panels (if any) on each side of the
beam
= F
E ,.,Is
includes that portion of slab on each side of the beam
a in direction of II
= in direction of 12
= ratio of torsional stiffness of edge beam section to
flexural stiffness of a width of slab equal to span length
of beam, center to center of supports
= EdJC
2E,'S!,
"" fraction ofunbalanced moment transferred by flexure at
slab-column connections. See Section 413.6.3.2
y" fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by
eccentricity of shear at slab-column connections
= 1 - Yf
P ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement
Ph reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain
conditions
407.13.
strength reduction factor
413.2 SCOPE
f!I.i 413.2.1 The provisions of this Section shall apply for design of
slab systems reinforced for flexure in more than one direction,
with or without beams between supports.
413.2.2 For a slab system supported by columns or walls, the
dimensions Cj and c:! and the clear span In shall be based on an
effective support area defined by the intersection of the bottom
-', surface of the slab, or of the drop panel if there is one, with the
.'"
largest right circular cone, right pyramid, or tapered wedge
whose surfaces are located within the column and capital or
bracket and are oriented no greater than 45 degrees to the axis of
the column.
'"
413.2.3 Solid slabs and slabs with recesses or pockets made by
permanent or removable fillers between ribs or joists in two
directions are included within the scope of this Section.
413.2.4 Minimum thickness of slabs designed in accordance
with this Section shall be as required by Section 409.6.3.
413.3 DEFINITIONS
413.3.1 Column strip is a design strip with a width on each side
of a column centerline equal to 0.2512 or 0.2511, whichever is
less. Column strip includes beams, if any.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
413.3.2 Middle strip is a design strip bounded by two
strips.
413.3.3 A panel is bounded by column, beam or wall
lines on all sides.
413.3.4 For monolithic or fully composite construction, a
a distance equal to the projection of the beam above or below
slab, whichever is greater, but not greater than four times
slab thickness.
413.4 SLAB REINFORCEMENT
413.4.1 Area of reinforcement in each direction for two-way
systems shall be determined from moments at critical
but shall not be less than required by Section 407.13.
413.4.2 Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall
exceed two times the slab thickness, except for portions of
area of cellular or ribbed construction. In the slab over
spaces, reinforcement shall be provided as required by
413.4.3 Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular
discontinuous edge shall extend to the edge of slab and
embedment, straight or hooked, at least 150 mm in
beams, columns or walls.
413.4.4 Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to
discontinu.ous edge shall be bent, hooked or otherwise
in spandrel beams, columns or walls, to be developed at tac~
support according to provisions of Section 412.
413.4.5 Where a slab is not supported by a spandrel
wall at a discontinuous edge or where a slab cantilevers
the support, anchorage of reinforcement shall be
within the slab.
413.4.6 In slabs with beams between supports with a
a greater than I. 0, special top and bottom slab r",i,nf'nrf'.pm
shall be provided at exterior comers in accordance with
following: .
413.4.6.1 The special reinforcement in both top and
slab shall be sufficient to resist a moment equal to the
positive moment (per meter of width) in the slab.
413.4.6.2 The moment shall be assumed to be about an
perpendicular to the diagonal from the comer in the top
slab and about an axis parallel to the diagonal from the
the bottom ofthe slab.
413.4.6.3 The special reinforcement shall be provided
distance in each direction from the corner equal to one-fifth
longer span.
 CONCRETE
The special reinforcement shall be placed in a band
the diagonal in the top of the slab and a band
to the diagonal in the bottom of the slab.
the special reinforcement shall be placed in two
to the sides of the slab in both the top and bottom
Where a drop panel is used to reduce amount of negative
.. reinforcement over the column of a flat slab, size of
shall be in accordance with the following:
7.1 Drop panel shall extend in each direction from
of support a distance not less than one-sixth the span
measured from center-to-center of supports in that
7.2 Projection of drop panel below the slab shall be at
one-fourth the slab thickness beyond the drop.
7.3 In computing required slab reinforcement, thickness of
dtOl,.t)~Ltlel below the slab shall not be assumed greater than one
the distance from edge of drop panel to edge of column or
capital.
Details or Reinforcement In Slabs Without Beams
In addition to the other requirements of Section 413.4,
..1.01....0 .1.
in slabs without beams shall have minimum
!I.~ensions as prescribed in Figure 413-1.
~13.4.8.2 Where adjacent spans are unequal, extension of
1m'~tive moment reinforcement beyond the face of support as
preStnbed in Figure 413-1 shall be based on requirements of
longer span.
413.4.8.3 Bent bars shall be permitted only when depth-span
. ratio permits use of bends 45 degrees or less.
:~t3~4.8.4 In frames where two-way slabs act as primary
1fi~tllbers resisting lateral loads, lengths of reinforcement shall be
di:{cimined by analysis but shall not be less than those
prescnbed in Figure 413 -1.
'(~r":" ,
413.4.8.5 All bottom bars or wires within the column strip, in
each direction, shall be continuous or spliced with Class A
splices located as shown in Figure 413-1. At least two of the
column strip bottom bars or wires in each direction shall pass
. '... the column core and shall be anchored at exterior
413.4.8.6 In slabs with shearheads and in lift-slab construction
2Y;~ere it is not practical to pass the bottom bars required by
~,~on 413.4.8.5 through the column, at least two bonded
:6Ottom bars or wires in each direction shall pass through the
.shearbead or lifting collar as dose to the column as practicable
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-63
and be continuous or spliced with a Class A splice. At exterior
columns, the reinforcement shall be anchored at the shearhead or
lifting collar.
413.5 OPENINGS IN SLAB SYSTEMS
413.5.1 Openings of any size shall be permitted in slab systems
if shown by analysis that the design strength is at least equal to
the strength considering Sections 409.3 and 409.4, and that all
serviceability conditions, including the specified linlits on
deflections, are met.
413.5.2 As an alternate to special analysis as required by Section
413.5.1, openings shall be permitted in slab systems without
beams only in accordance with the following:
413.5.2.1 Openings of any size shall be permitted in the area
common to intersecting middle strips, provided total amount of
reinforcement required for the panel without the opening is
maintained.
413.5.2.2 In the area common to intersecting column strips, not
more than one-eighth the width of column strip in either span
shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of reinforcement
equivalent to that interrupted by an opening shall be added on
the sides ofthe opening .
413.5.2.3 In the area common to one column strip and one
middle strip, not more than one-fourth the reinforcement in
either strip shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of
reinforcement equivalent to that interrupted by an opening shall
be added on the sides of the opening.
413.5.2.4 Shear requirements of Section 411.13.5 shall be
satisfied.
413.6 DESIGN PROCEDURES
413.6.1 A slab system shall be designed by any procedure
satisfying conditions of equilibrium and geometric compatibility,
if shown that the design strength at every section is at least equal
to the required strength set forth in Sections 409.3 and 409.4
and that all serviceability conditions, including limits on
deflections, are met.
413.6.1.1 Design ofa slab system for gravity loads including the
slab and beams (if any) between supports and supporting
columns or walls forming orthogonal frames, by either the
Direct Design Method pf Section 413.7 or the Equivalent Frame
Method of Section 413.8, shall be permitted.
413.6.1.2 For lateral loads, analysis of frames shall take into
account effects of cracking and reinforcement on stiffiJ.ess of
frame members.
 4-64 TWO-WAY SLAB SYSTEMS
413.6.1.3 Combining the results of the gravity load analysis with
the results of the lateral load analysis shall be permitted.
413.6.2 The slab and beams (if any) between supports shall be
proportioned for factored moments prevailing at every section.
413.6.3 When gravity load, wind, earthquake or other lateral
forces cause transfer of moment between slab and column, a
fraction of the unbalanced moment shall be transferred by
flexure in accordance with Sections 413.6.3.2 and 413.6.3.3.
413.6.3.1 Fraction of unbalanced moment not transferred by
flexure shall be transferred by eccentricity of shear in
accordance with Section 411.13.6.
413.6.3.2 A fraction of the unbalanced moment given by Yf
A1" shall be considered to be transferred by flexure within an
effective slab width between lines that are one and one-half slab
or drop panel thickness (1.5h) outside opposite faces of the
column or capital where M., is the moment to be transferred and
(413-1)
r.r
413.6.3.3 For unbalanced moments about an axis parallel to the
edge at exterior supports, the value ofYrby Equation (413-1)
shall be permitted to be increased up to 1.0 provided that v" at an
edge support does not exceed 0.75Vc or at a comer support does
not exceed O.ScpVc. For unbalanced moments at interior supports,
and for unbalanced moments about an axis transverse to the edge
at exterior supports, the value of y! in Equation (413-1) shall be
permitted to be increased by up to 25 percent provided that Jt~! at
the support does not exceed O.4cpVc. The reinforcement ratio p,
-" within the effective slab width defined in Section 413.6.3.2, shall
not exceed 0.375pb. No adjustments to Y.r shall be permitted for
"'h,
,~ 'j, prestressed slab systems.
413.6.3.4 Concentration of reinforcement over the column by
closer spacing or additional reinforcement shall be used to resist
"'" moment on the effective slab width defined in Section 413.6.3.2.
413.6.4 Design for transfer of load from slab to supporting
columns or walls through shear and torsion shall be in
accordance with Section 411.
413.7 DIRECT DESIGN METHOD
413.7.1 Limitations
Design of slab systems within the following limitations by the
direct design method shall be permitted:
Association of Structural E!'1!:.'ineers of the Philippines
413.7.1.1 There shall be a minimum of three continuo,;s
each direction.
413.7.1.2 Panels shall be rectangular, with a ratio of
shorter span center-to-center supports within a panel not
than 2.
413.7.1.3 Successive span lengths center-to-center Cl1T,,.,,,rt<
each direction shall not differ by more than one-third the
span.
413.7.1.4 Offset of columns by a maximum of 10 percent of
span (in direction of offset) from either axis between center
of successive columns shall be permitted.
413.7.1.5 All loads shall be due to gravity only and
distributed over an entire panel Live load shall not exceed
times dead load.
413.7.1.6 For a panel with beams between supports on aU
the relative stiffness of beams in two perpendicular
shall not be less than 0.2 nor greater than 5.0.
413.7.1.7 Moment redistribution as permitted by Section
shall not be applied for slab systems designed by the
Design Method. See Section 413.7.7.
413.7.1.8 Variations from the limitations of Section 413.7.1
be permitted if demonstrated by analysis as long as ,,,,,-,,uu,,,w
of Section 413 .6.1 are satisfied.
413.7.2 Total Factored Static Moment For A Span
413.7.2.1 Total factored static moment for a span
determined in a strip bounded laterally by centerline of
each side of centerline of supports.
413.7.2.2 Absolute sum of positive and average
factored moments in each direction shall not be less than:
will
M = 112 n
o 8
413.7.2.3 Where the transverse span of panels on either
the centerline of supports varies, /2 in Equation (413-3)
taken as the average of adjacent transverse spans.
413.7.2.4 When the span adjacent and parallel to an
being considered, the distance from edge to panel
shall be substituted for 12 in Equation (413-3).
 CONCRETE 4-65

4h;z,,2~5 Cl~ar span In shall extend from face ~o face. of 413.7.4.2 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the
'YulllnS, capitals, brackets or walls. Value of In used m Equation following percentage of exterior negative factored moments:
!~i~)hall not be less than 0.6511. Circular or regular p~lygon
;~~~' supports shall be treated as square supports With the
js.~l!illIea.

4tj.7.3 Negative And Positive Factored Moments

:~;:~.il Negative factored moments shall be located at face of

';~tangular supports. Circular or regular polygon-shaped
supports shall be treated as square supports with the same area.
413..7.3.2 In an interior span, total static moment Mo shall be
~diStributed as follows:
Negative factored moment ....................... 0.65
Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.
413.7.4.3 Where supports consist of columns or walls extending
for a distance equal to or greater than three fourths the span
length 12 used to compute M,,, negative moments shall be
considered to be uniformly distributed across 12 .

Positive factored moment ................. '" .... 0.35

413.7.4.4 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the
following percentage of positive factored moments:
,413.7.3.3 In an end span, total factored static moment Mo shall
;be.distributed as follows:
(1) (2) (3) (4) :J5ll
Slab WIthout Beams
Slabs with
between Interior Supports Exterior
Beam. Edge Fully
_en Wilhout WiIh
Restrained
All Edge Edge
Su Its Seams Beams Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown:
0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65
413.7.4.5 For slabs with beams between supports, the slab
0.57 0.52 0.50 0.35
portion of column strips shall be proportioned to resist that
0.30 0.65 portion of column strip moments not resisted by beams.

413.7.3.4 Negative moment sections shall be designed to resist

"thelarger of the two interior negative factored moments
determined for spans framing into a common support unless an
analysis is made to distribute the unbalanced moment in
accordance with stiffness of adjoining elements.
413.7.3.5 Edge beams or edges of slab shall be proportioned to
resist in torsion their share of exterior negative factored
moments.
413.7.3.6 The gravity load moment to be transferred between
slab and edge column in accordance with Section 413.6.3.1 shall
beO. 3Mo.
413.7.4 Factored Moments In Column Strips
413.7.5 Factored Moments In Beams
413.7.5.1 Beams between supports shaH be propurtioned tQ) resist
85 percent of column strip moments if fa,!],,/!) is equal to or
greater than LO.
413.7.5.2 For values of fa/,//,) between LO and zero,
proportion of column strip moments resisted by beams. shall be
obtained by linear interpolation between 85 and zero percent.
413.7.5.3 In addition to moments calculated for uniform loads
according to Sections 413.7.22, 413.7.51 and 4137.5.2, beams
shall be proportioned to resist all moments caused by
concentrated or linear loads applied directly to beams, including
weight of projecting beam stem ahove or below the slab.

413.7.4.1 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the

following percentage of interior negative factored moments' 413.7.6 Factored Moment'i In I\'fiddle Strips

413.7.6.1 That iJortion of negative and positi ve factored

moments not resisted by column strips shall be proportionately
assigned to corresponding half middle stlips.

Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown. 413.7.6.2 Each middle strip shali be proportioned to resist the
sum of the 1110ments assigned to ib nvu half f11i~ld!e "trips

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

4-66 TWO.JNAY SLAB SYSTEMS
413.7.6.3 A middle strip adjacent to and parallel with an edge
supported by a wall shall be proportioned to resist twice the
moment assigned to the half middle strip corresponding to the
first row of interior supports.
413.7.7 Modification Of Factored Moments
Modification of negative and positive factored moments by 10
percent shall be permitted provided the total static moment for a
panel in the direction considered is not less than that required by
Equation (413-3).
413.7.8 Factored Shear In Slab Systems Witb Beams
413.7.8.1 Beams with ai211j equal to or greater than 1.0 shall
be proportioned to resist shear caused by factored loads on
tributary areas bounded by 45-degree lines drawn from the
corners of the panels and the center lines of the adjacent panels
parallel to the long sides.
413.7.8.2 In proportioning of beams with ai211Jless than 1.0 to
resist. shear, linear interpolation, assuming beams carry no load
at aj = 0, shall be permitted.
413.7.8.3 In addition to shears calculated according to Sections
413.7.8.1 and 413.7.8.2, beams shall be proportioned to resist
shears caused by factored loads applied directly on beams.
413.7.8.4 Computations of slab shear strength on the assumption
that load is distributed to supporting beams in accordance with
Section 413.7.8.1 or 413.7.8.2 shall be permitted. Resistance to
total shear occurring on a panel shall be provided.
413.7.8.5 Shear strength shall satisfy requirements of Section
411.
413.7.9 Factored Moments In Colnmns And WaDs
413.7.9.1 Columns and walls built integrally with a slab system
shall resist moments caused by factored loads on the slab
system.
413.7.9.2 At an interior support, supporting elements above and
below the slab shal( resist the moment specified by Equation
(413-4) in direct/proportion to their stiffnesses unless a general
analysis is made.
(413-4)
where W 'd, I '2 and I 'n refer to shorter span.
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
413.8 EQUIVALENT FRAME METHOD
413.8.1 Design of slab systems by the equivalent frame method
shall be based on assumptions given in Sections 413.8.2 through
413.8.6, and all sections of slabs and supporting members shall.
be proportioned for moments and shears thus obtained.
413.8.1.1 Where metal column capitals are used, it shall be
permitted to take account of their contributions to stiffuess and
resistance to moment and to shear.
413.8.1.2 Neglecting the change in length of columns and slabs
due to direct stress, and deflections due to shear, shall be
permitted.
413.8.2 Equivalent Frame
413.8.2.1 The structure shall be considered to be made up of
equivalent frames on column lines taken longitudinally and
transversely through the building.
413.8.2.2 Each frame shall consist of a row of columns or
supports and slab-beam strips, bounded laterally by the
centerline of panel on each side of the centerline of columns or
supports.
413.8.2.3 Columns or supports shall be assumed to be attached
to slab-beam strips by torsional members (Section 413.8.5)
transverse to the direction of the span for which moments are
being determined and extending to bounding lateral panel center
lines on each side of a column.
413.8.2.4 Frames adjacent and parallel to an edge shall be
bounded by that edge and the centerline ofadj acent panel.
413.8.2.5 Analysis of each equivalent frame in its entirety shall
be permitted. Alternatively, for gravity loading, a separate
analysis of each floor or roof with far ends of columns
considered fixed shall be permitted.
413.8.2.6 Where slab-beams are analyzed separately,
determination of moment at a given support assuming that the
slab-beam is fixed at any support two panels distant therefrom,
shall be permitted, provided the slab continues beyond that
point.
413.8.3 Slab-Beams
413.8.3.1 Determination of the moment of inertia of slab-beams
at any cross section outside ofjoints or column capitals using the
gross area of concrete shall be permitted.
413.8.3.2 Variation in moment of inertia along axis of slab
beams shall be taken into account.
 CONCRETE
413.8.3.3 Moment of inertia of slab-beams from center of
column to face of column, bracket or capital shall be assumed
equal to the moment of inertia of the slab-beam at face of
column, bracket or capital divided by the quantity (1 C:ll2)2
where C2 and 12 are measured trans-verse to the direction of the
span for which moments are being determined.
413.8.4 Columns
413.8.4.1 Determination of the moment of inertia of columns at
any cro!!s section outside of joints or column capitals using the
gross area of concrete shall be permitted.
413.8.4.2 Variation in moment of inertia along axis of columns
shall be taken into account.
413.8.4.3 Moment of inertia of columns from top to bottom of
the slab-beam at a joint shall be assumed infinite.
413.8.5 Torsional Members
413.8.5.1 Torsional members (see Section 413.8.2.3) shall be
assumed to have a constant cross section throughout their length
consisting ofthe largest of:
1. A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the
column, bracket or capital in the direction of the span for
which moments are being determined, or
2. For monolithic or fully composite construction, the
portion of slab specified in (1) above plus that part of the
transverse beam above and below the slab, and
3. The transverse beam as defined in Section 413.3.4.
413.8.5.2 Where beams frame into columns in the direction of
the span for which moments are being determined, the torsional
stiffness shall be multiplied by the ratio of moment of inertia of
slab with such beam to moment of inertia of slab without such
beam.
413.8.6 Arrangement Of Live Load
413.8.6.1 When loading pattern is known, the equivalent frame
shall be analyzed for that load.
413.8.6.2 When live load is variable but does not exceed three
fourths of the dead load, or the nature of live load is such that all
panels will be loaded simultaneously, it shall be permitted to
assume that maximum factored moments occur at all sections
with full factored live load on entire slab system.
413.8.6.3 For loading conditions other than those defined in
Section 413.8.6.2, it shall be permitted to assume that maximum
National Structural Code
4-67
positive factored moment near midspan of a panel occurs with
three-fourths of the full factored live load on the panel and on
alternate panels; and it shall be permitted to assume that
maximum negative factored moment in the slab at a support
occurs with three-fourths of the full live load on adjacent panels
only.
413.8.6.4 Factored moments shall not be taken less than those
occurring with full factored live load on all panels.
413.8.7 Factored Moments
413.8.7.1 At interior supports, critical section for negative
factored moment (in both column and middle strips) shall be
taken at face of rectilinear supports, but not greater than 0.1751}
from center of a column.
413.8.7.2 At exterior supports provided with brackets or capitals,
critical section for negative factored moment in the span
perpendicUlar to an edge shall be taken at a distance from face of
supporting element not greater than one-half the projection of
bracket or capital beyond face of supporting element.
413.8.7.3 Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports shall be
treated as square supports with the same area for location of
critical section for negative design moment.
413.8.7.4 When slab systems within limitations of Section
413.7.1 are analyzed by the Equivalent Frame Method, it shall
be permitted to reduce the resulting computed moments in such
proportion that the absolute sum of the positive and average
negative moments used in the design need not exceed the value
obtained from Equation (413-3).
413.8.7.5 Distribution of moments at critical sections across the
slab-beam strip of each frame to column strips, beams and
middle strips as provided in Sections 413.7.4, 413.7.5 and
413.7.6 shall be permitted if the requirement of Section
413.7.1.6 is satisfied.
Or the Philippines, Volume 1
 WALLS

SECTION 414 - WALLS 414.2 SCOPE

414.2.1 Provisions of Section 414 shall apply for design of walls

414.1 NOTATION
mm2
= gross area 0 f sectIOn,
= area of longitudinal tension reinforcement in wall
segment, mm2
area of effective longitudinal tension reinforce~ment in
wall segment, mm2 as calculated by Equation 414-8
c = distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral
axis, mm
d = distance of extreme compression fiber to centroid of
longitudinal tension r~inforcement, mm
= modulus of elastiCity of concrete, MPa
specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
specified yield strength of non-prestressed
reinforcement, MPa
= overall thickness of member, mm
= moment of inertia of cracked section transformed to
concrete, mm4
effective moment of inertia for computation of
deflection, mm4
'= effective length factor
= vertical distance between supports, mm
= horizontal length of wall, m m
= maximum unfactored moment due to service loads,
including P A effects
maximum moment in member at stage deflection is
computed
= moment causing flexural cracking due to applied lateral
and vertical loads
= nominal moment strength at section
= maximum unfactored applied moment due to service
loads, not including PA effects
factored moment at section including PA effects
= moment at the midheight section of the wall due to
factored lateral and eccentric vertical loads
n = modular ratio of elasticity, but not less than 6
=E/Ec
Pnw = nominal axial load strength of wall designed by Section
414.5.
unfactored axial load at the design (midheight) section
including effects of self-weight
= factored axial load
= maximum deflection at or near mid height due to service
loads, mm
deflection at midheight of wall due to factored loads,
mm
strength-reduction factor. See Section 409.4.
= ratio of tension reinforcement
= A/(lvtl)
reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain
conditions
subjected to axial load, with or without flexure.
414.2.2 Cantilever retaining walls are designed according to
flexural design provisions of Section 410 with minimum
horizontal reinforcement according to Section 414.4.3.
414.3 GENERAL
414.3.1 Walls shall be designed for eccentric loads and any
lateral or other loads to which they are SUbjected.
414.3.2 Walls subject to axial loads shall be designed in
accordance with Sections 414.3,414.4 and either Section 414.5,
414.6 or 414.9.
414.3.3 Design for shear shall be in accordance with Section
411.11.
414.3.4 Unless demonstrated by a detailed analysis, horizontal
length of wall to be considered as effective for each concentrated
load shall not exceed center-to-center distance between loads,
nor width of bearing plus four times the wall thickness.
414.3.5 Compression members built integrally with walls shall
conform to Section 410.9.2.
414.3.6 Walls shall be anchored to intersecting elements such as
floors or roofs; or to columns, pilasters, buttresses, and
intersecting walls; and to footings.
414.3.7 Quantity of reinforcement and limits of thickness
required by Sections 414.4 and 414.6 shall be permitted to be
waived where structural analysis shows adequate strength and
stability.
414.3.8 Transfer of force to footing at base of wall shall be in
accordance with Section 415.9.
414.4 MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT
414.4.1 Minimum vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall be
in accordance with Sections 414.4.2 and 414.4.3 unless a greater
amount is required for shear by Sections 411.11.8 and 411.11.9.
414.4.2 Minimum ratio of vertical reinforcement area to gross
concrete area shall be:
1. 0.0012 for deformed bars not larger than 16 mm diameter
with a specified yield strength not less than 420 MPa, or
2. 0.0015 for other deformed bars, or

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE 4-69

3.
0.0012 for welded wire fabric (plain or deformed) not middle third of the overall thickness of wall and all limits of
larger than W31 or D31.
Sections 414.3, 414.4 and 414.6 are satisfied.

414.4.3 Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement area to gross
concrete area shall be:
L 0.0020 for deformed bars not larger than 16 mm diameter
with a specified yield strength not less than 420 MPa, or
2. 0.0025 for other deformed bars, or
3. 0.0020 for welded wire fabric (plain or deformed) not
larger than W31 or D3 1.
414.4.4 Walls more than 250 rom thick, except basement walls,
shall have reinforcement for each direction placed in two layers
parallel with faces ofwall in accordance with the following:
1. One layer consisting of not less than one half and not
more than Jwo-thirds of total reinforcement required for
each direction shall be placed not less than 50 mm or
more than one-third the thickness of wall from exterior
surface.
2, The other layer, consisting of the balance of required
reinforcement in that direction, shall be placed not less
than 20 rom or more than one-third the thickness of wall
from interior surface.
414.4.5 Vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall not be
spaced farther apart than three times the wall thickness, nor
farther apart than 500 mm.
414.6.2 Design axial load strength <l>P"". of a wall satisfying
limitations of Section 414.6.1 shall be computed by Equation
(414-1) unless designed in accordance with Section 414.5:
(4i4-1)
where <I> = 0.70 and effective length factor k shall be:
For walls braced top and bottom against lateral translation and
Restrained against rotation at one or
both ends (top, bottom, or both) ., ......... 0.8
2. Unrestrained against rotation at both ends ... 1,0
For walls not braced against lateral translation ..... 2.0
414.6.3 Minimum Thickness Of Walls Designed By
Empirical Design Method
414.6.3.1 Thickness of bearing walls shall not be less than 1/25
the supported height or length, whichever is shorter, nor less
thap. 100 mm.
414.6.3.2 Thickness of exterior basement walls and foundation
walls shall not be less than 190 mm.

414.4.6 Vertical reinforcement need not be enclosed by lateral

ties if vertical reinforcement area is not greater than 0,01 times
gross concrete area, or where vertical reinforce-ment is not
required as compression reinforcement.
414.4.7 In addition to the minimum reinforcement required by
Section 414.4.1, not less than two 16 mm diameter bars shall be
provided around all window and door openings. Such bars shall
be extended to develop the bar beyond the corners of the
openings but not less than 600 mm.
414.5 WALLS DESIGNED AS COMPRESSION
MEMBERS
414.7 NON-BEARING WALLS
414.7.1 Thickness of nonbearing walls shall not be less than 100
mm, or not less than 1/30 the least distance between members
that provide lateral support,
414.8 WALLS AS GRADE BEAMS
414.8.1 Walls designed as grade beams shall have top and
bottom reinforcement as required for moment in accordance
with provisions of Sections 410.3 through 410,8. Design for
shear shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 411.

Except as provided in Section 414.6, walls subject to axial load
or combined flexure and axial load shall be designed as
compression members in accordance with provisions of Sections
410.3, 410.4, 410.1i, 410.12, 410.13, 410.14, 410.15, 410.18,
414.3 and 414.4.
414.6 EMPIRICAL DESIGN METHOD
414.6.1 Walls of solid rectangular cross section shall be
permitted to be designed by the empirical provisions of Section
414.6 if resultant of all factored loads is located within the
414.8.2 Portions of grade beam walls exposed above grade shall
also meet requirements of Section 414.4.
414.9 ALTERNATE DESIGN OF SLENDER WALLS
414.9.1 When flexural tension controls the design of a wall, the
requirements of Section 414.9 are considered to satisfy Section
410.11.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 4-70 WALLS

414.9.2 Walls designed by the provisions of Section 414.9 shall (414-6)

satisfy Sections 414.9.2.1 through 414.9.2.6. Mil

414.9.2.1 The wall panel shall be designed as a simply

supported, axially loaded member subjected to an out-of-plane
uniform lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections where:
occurring at midspan.
2 lwe'
== nAse ( d - c ) + -3 (414-7)
414.9.2.2 The cross section shall be constant over the height of
the panel.
and
414.9.2.3 The reinforcement ratio p shall not exceed 0.6p".

414.9.2.4 Reinforcement shall provide a design strength: (414-8)

(414-2)
414.9.4 The maximum deflection Lls due to service loads,
where Mer shall be obtained using the modulus of rupture given including P Ll effects, shall not exceed IJJ50. The mid height
by Equation 409-9. deflection Lls shall be determined by:

414.9.2.5 Concentrated gravity loads applied to the wall above

(5M)I/ (414-9)
the design flexural section shall be assumed to be distributed A = -'--':""";'-
over a width: s 48EJ,

(a) Equal to the bearing width, plus a width on each side that Ms. (414-10)
increases at a slope of2 vertical to 1 horizontal down to M = 5P1 2
1 _ -S- "
the design section; but 48).
"., .....
1~II'h~

(b) Not greater than the spacing of the concentrated loai:ls; Ie shall be calculated using the procedure of Section 409.6.2.3,
and substituting M for Ma . lor shall be evaluated using Equation
414-7.
(c) Does not extend beyond the edges of the wall paneL
,~, ,;::,
414.9.2.6 Vertical stresses P,,/Ag at the midheight section shall
not exceed 0.061'0'

414.9.3 The design moment strength A1n for combined flexure

and axial loads at the mid-height cross section shall be:

(414-3)

where:

(414-4)

M,f.{J is the moment at the midheight section of the wall due to

factored loads, and Ll" is:

5MJc~ (414-5)
t/J48EJcr

Mu shall be obtained by iteration of deflections, or by direct

calculation using Equation 414-6:

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
g:~~TION 415 - FOOTINGS
,iii;.. NOTATlON
l gross area of section, mm
2
d; "" diameter of pile at footing base, mm
2. Halfway between middle and edge of wall, for footings
It ::: ratio oflong side to short side offooting
supporting a masonry wall;
415.2SCOPE
4{5.2.1 Provisions of Section 415 shall apply for design of
isolated footings and, where applicable, to combined footings
alld mats.
415.2.2 Additional requirements for design of combined footings
ana mats are given in Section 415.11.
415.3 LOADS AND REACTIONS
415.3.1 Footings shall be proportioned to resist the factored
loads and induced reactions, in accordance with the appropriate
design requirements of this code and as provided in this section.
415.3.2 Base area of footing or number and arrangement of piles
shall be determined from unfactored forces and moments
transmitted by footing to soil or piles and permissible soil
pressure or permissible pile capacity selected through principles
ofsoil mechanics.
415.3.3 For footings on piles, computations for moments and
shears may be based on the assumption that the reaction from
. any pile is concentrated at pile center.
415.4 FOOTINGS SUPPORTING CIRCULAR OR
REGULAR POLYGON-SHAPED COLUMNS OR
PEDESTALS
For location of critical sections for moment, shear and
development of reinforcement in footings, it shall be permitted
to treat circular or regular polygon-shaped concrete columns or
pedestals as square members with the same area.
415.5 MOMENT IN FOOTINGS
415.5.1 External moment on any section of a footing shall be
determined by passing a vertical plane through the footing and
computing the moment of the forces acting over the entire area
of footing on one side of that vertical plane.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-71
415.5.2 Maximum factored moment for an isolated footing shall
be computed as prescribed in Section 415.5.1 at critical sections
located as follows:
1. At face of column, pedestal, or wall, for footings
supporting a concrete column, pedestal, or wall;
3. Halfway between face of column and edge of steel base
plate, for footings supporting a column with steel base
plate.
415.5.3 In one-way footings and two-way square footings,
reinforcement shall be distributed uniformly across entire width
of footing.
415.5.4 In two-way rectangular footings, reinforcement shall be
distributed as follows:
415.5.4.1 Reinforcement in long direction shall be distributed
uniformly across entire width of footing.
415.5.4.2 For reinforcement in short direction, a portion of the
total reinforcement given by Equation (415-1) shall be
distributed uniformly over a band width (centered on centerline
of column or pedestal) equal to the length of short side of
footing. Remainder of reinforcement required in short direction
shall be distributed uniformly outside center band width of
footing.
Reinforcement in
bandwidth (415-1)
Total Reinforcement (fJ+1)
in short direction
415.6 SHEAR IN FOOTINGS
415.6.1 Shear strength in footings shall be in accordance with
Section 411.13.
415.6.2 Location of critical section for shear in accordance with
Section 411 shall be measured from face of column, pedestal or
wall, for footings supporting a column, pedestal or wall. For
footings supporting a column or pedestal with steel base plates,
the critical section shall be measured from location defined in
Section 415.5.2, Item 3.
415.6.3 Computation of shear on any section through a footing
supported on piles shall be in accordance with the following:
415.6.3.1 Entire reaction from any pile whose center is located
dJ2 or more outside the section shaH be considered as producing
shear on that section.
4-72 FOOTINGS
415.6.3.2 Reaction from any pile whose center is located dJ2 or
more inside the section shall be considered as producing no
shear in that section.
415.6.3.3 For intermediate positions of pile center, the portion of
the pile reaction to be considered as producing shear on the
section shall be based on straight-line interpolation between full
value at dp/2 outside the section and zero value at dJ2 inside the
section.
415.7 DEVELOPMENT OF REINFORCEMENT IN
FOOTINGS
415.7.1 Development of reinforcement in footings shall be in
accordance with Section 412.
415.7.2 Calculated tension or compression in reinforcement at
each section shall be developed on each side of that section by
embedment length, hook (tension only) or mechanical device, or
combinations thereof
415.7.3 Critical sections for development of reinforcement shall
be as!\llmed at the same locations as defined in Section 415.5.2
for maximum factored moment, and at all other vertical planes
where changes of section or reinforcement occur. See also
Section 412.11.6.
415.8 MINIMUM FOOTING DEPTH
Depth of footing above bottom reinforcement shall not be less
than 150 mm for footings on soil, or not less than 300 mm for
footings on piles.
415.9 TRANSFER OF FORCE AT BASE OF
COLUMN, WALL OR REINFORCED PEDESTAL
415.9.1 Forces and moments at base of column. wall. or pedestal
shall be transferred to supporting pedestal or footing by bearing
on concrete and by reinfurcement. dowels, and mechanical
connectors.
415.9.1.1 Bearing on concrete at contact surface between
supported and supporting member shall not exceed concrete
bearing strength for either surface as given by Section 410.18.
415.9.1.2 Reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical connectors
between supported and supporting members shall be adequate to
transfer:
1. All compressive force that exceeds concrete bearing
strength ofeither member;
2. Any computed tensile force across interface.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
In addition, reinforcement, dowels or mechanical
shall satisfy Section 415.9.2 or 415.9.3.
415.9.1.3 If calculated moments are transferred to .,..,.'UV1<11I
pedestal or footing, reinforcement, dowels or
connectors shall be adequate to satisfy Section 412.18.
415.9.1.4 Lateral forces shall be transferred to
pedestal or footing in accordance with shear-friction nrrn""l1","
of Section 411.8 or by other appropriate means.
415.9.2 In cast-in-place construction, reinforcement required
satisfy Section 415.9.1 shaH be provided either by ext:en<iml
longitudinal bars into supporting pedestal or footing, or<
dowels.
415.9.2.1 For cast-in-place columns and pedestals, area
reinforcement across interface shall not be less than 0.005
gross area of supported member.
415.9.2.2 For cast-in-place walls, area of reinforcement across
interface shall not be less than minimum vertical .."'inF"..."" .... '~ntC";jn
given in Section 414.4,2.
415.9.2.3 At footings, 45 mm and 55 mm diameter longitudinal
bars, in compression only, may be lap spliced with dowels
provide reinforcement required to satisfy Section 415,9, 1.
Dowels shall not be larger than 32 rnm diameter bar and
extend into supported member a distance not less than the
development length of 45 mm or 55 rnm diameter bars or the
splice length of the dowels, whichever is greater, and into the
footing a distance not less than the development length of
dowels.
415.9.2.4 If a pinned or rocker connection is provided in cast-in
place construction, connection shall conform to Sections 415.9.1
and 415.9.3,
415.9.3 In precast construction, reinforcement required to
Section 415.9.1 may be provided by anchor bolts or suitable
mechanical connectors.
415.9.3.1 Connection between precast columns or pedestals and
supporting members shall meet the requirements of Section
416.6.1.3, Item 1.
415.9.3.2 Connection between precast walls and supporting
members shall meet the requirements of Section 416,6.1.3, Items
2 and 3.
EXCEPTION:
In tilt-up constroction, this connection may be to an adjacent
floor slab. In no case sha" the connection prOVided be less than
that required by Section 411.
 CONCRETE
415.9.3.3 Anchor bolts and mechanical connectors shall be
designed to reach their design strength prior to anchorage failure
or failure of surrounding concrete.
415.10 SLOPED OR STEPPED FOOTINGS
415.10.1 In sloped or stepped footings, angle of slope or depth
and location of steps shall be such that design requirements are
satisfied at every section.
415.10.2 Sloped or stepped footings designed as a unit shall be
constructed to ensure action as a unit.
415.11 COMBINED FOOTINGS AND MATS
415.11.1 Footings supporting more than one column, pedestal,
or wall (combined footings or mats) shall be proportioned to
resist the factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance
with appropriate design requirements of this code.
415.11.2 The Direct Design Method of Section 413 shall not be
used for design of combined footings and mats.
415.113 Distribution of soil pressure under combined footings
and mats shall be consistent with properties of the soil and the
structure and with established principles of soil mechanics.
415.12 PLAIN CONCRETE PEDESTALS AND
FOOTINGS. See Section 422.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
473
SECTION 416 - PRECAST CONCRETE
416.1 NOTATION
Ag gross area of column, mm2
I clear span, mm.
416.2 SCOPE
416.2.1 All provisions of this code not specifically excluded and
riot in conflict with the provisions of Section 416, shall apply to
structures incorporating precast concrete structural members.
416.3 GENERAL
416.3.1 Design of precast members and connections shall
include loading and restraint conditions from initial fabrication
to end use in the structure, including form removal, storage,
transportation and erection.
416.3.2 When precast members are incorporated into a
structural system, the forces and deformations occurring in and
adjacent to connections shall be included in the design.
416.3.3 Tolerances for botb precast members and interfacing
members shall be specified. Design of precast members and
connections shall include the effects of these tolerances.
416.3.4 In addition to the standard requirements for drawings
and specifications, the following shall be included in either the
contract documents or shop drawings:
1. Details of reinforcement, inserts and lifting devices
required to resist temporary loads from handling, storage,
transportation and erection;
2. Required concrete strength at stated ages or stages of
construction.
416.4 DISTRIBUTION OF FORCES AMONG
MEMBERS
416.4.1 Distribution of forces that are perpendicular to tbe plane
of members shall be established by analysis or by test.
416.4.2 Where tbe system behavior requires in-plane forces to be
transferred betweel1 the members of a precast floor or wall
system, tbe following shall apply:
416.4.2.1 In-plane force paths shall be continuous through both
connections and members.
- $ $)" d 111;- .'~
 PRECAST CONCRETE
474
416.4.2.2 Where tension forces occur, a continuous path of steel
or steel reinforcement shall be provided.
416.5 MEMBER DESIGN
416.5.1 In one-way precast floor and roof slabs and in one-way
precast, prestressed wall panels, all not wider than 4 m, and
where members are not mechanically connected to cause
restraint in the transverse direction, the shrinkage and
temperature reinforcement requirements of Section 407.13 in the
direction normal to the flexural reinforcement shall be permitted
to be waived. This waiver shall not apply to members which
require reinforcement to resist transverse flexural stresses.
416.5.2 For precas~ nonprestressed walls the reinforcement
shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of Section
410 or 414, except that the area of horizontal and vertical
reinforcement shall each be not less than 0.001 times the gross
cross-sectional area of the wall panel. Spacing of reinforcement
shall not exceed five times the wall thickness or 800 mm for
interior walls or 500 mm for exterior walls.
416.6 STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY
416.6.1 Except where the provisions of Section 416.6.2 govern,
the following minimum provisions for structural integrity shall
apply to all precast concrete structures:
416.6.1.1 Longitudinal and transverse ties required by Section
407.14.3 shall connect members to a lateral load resisting
system.
416.6.1.2 Where precast elements form floor or roof
diaphragms, the connections between diaphragm and those
members being laterally supported shall have a nominal tensile
strength capable of resisting not less than 45 kN/m.
416.6.1.3 Vertical tension tie requirements of Section 407.}4.3
shall apply to all vertical structural members, except cladding.,
and shall be achieved by providing connections at horizontal
joints in accordance with the following:
I. Precast columns shall have a nominal strength in tension
not less than I.SAg in kN. For columns with a larger cross
section than required by consideration of loading, a
reduced effective area Ag , based on cross section required
but not less than one-half the total area, shall be
pennitted;
2. Precast wall panels shall have a minimum of two ties per
panel, with a nominal tensile strength not less than 45 kN
per tie~
3. When design forces result in no tension at the base,' the
ties required by Section 416.6.1.3, Item 2, shall be
ASSOCiation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
permitted to be anchored into an appropriately relTltor'c~n:
concrete floor slab on grade,
416.6.1.4 Connection details that rely solely on friction
by gravity loads shall not be used.
416.6.2 For precast concrete bearing wall structures three
more stories in height, the following minimum provisions
apply:
416.6.2.1 Longitudinal and transverse ties shall be provided
floor and roof systems to provide a nominal strength of 20 kN/m
of width or length. Ties shall be provided over interior wall
supports and between members and exterior walls. Ties shall be
positioned in or within 0,6 m of the plane of the floor or roOf,
~~. ~
/~
416.6.2.2 Longitudinal ties parallel to floor or roof slab spaJ
shall be spaced not more than 3.0 m on centers, Provisions shall
be made to transfer forces around openings.
416.6.2.3 Transverse ties perpendicular to floor or roof
spans shall be spaced not greater than the bearing wall spacing;,
416.6.2.4 Ties around the perimeter of each floor and
within 1.2 m of the edge, shall provide a nominal <:tr'>nath
tension not less than 70 kN.
416.6.2.5 Vertical tension ties shall be provided in all walls
shall be continuous over the height of the building. They
provide a nominal tensile strength not less than 40 kN
horizontal meter of waIL Not less than two ties shall be
for each precast panel.
416.7 CONNECTION AND BEARING DESIGN
416.7.1 Forces shall be permitted to be transferred between
members by grouted joints, shear keys, mechanical cormec~tol
reinforcing steel connections, reinforced topping or
combination ofthese means.
416.7.1.1 The adequacy of connections to transfer
between members shall be determined by analysis or by
Where shear is the primary result of imposed loading, it shall
permitted to use the provisions of Section 411 ,8 as applicable.
416.7.1.2 When designing a connection using materials
different structural properties, their relative stiffhesses,
and ductilities shall be considered.
416.7.2 Bearing for precast floor and roof members on
supports shall satisfy the following:
.416.7.2.1 The allowable bearing stress at the contact
between supported and supporting members and between
 CONCRETE 4-75

intermediate bearing elements shall not exceed the bearing 416.10 HANDLING
strength for both surface and the bearing element. Concrete
bearing strength shall be as given in Section 410.18. 416.10.1 Member design shall consider forces and distortions
during curing, stripping, storage, transportation and erection so
416.7.2.2 Unless shown by test or analysis that performance will that precast members are not overstressed or otherwise damaged.
not be impaired, the following minimum requirements shall be
met: 416.10.2 During erection, precast members and structures shall
be adequately supported and braced to ensure proper alignment
1. Each member and its supporting system shall have design
and structural integrity until permanent connections are
dimensions selected so that, after consideration of
completed.
tolerances, the distance from the edge of the support to
the end of the precast member in the direction of the span
is at least 11180 of the clear span, I, but not less than:
416.11 STRENGTH EVALUATION OF PRECAST
For solid or hollow-core slabs... ... .. ...... . . .. 50 mm CONSTRUCTION
For beams or stemmed members... ...... . . . . . . . .. 75 mm
416.11.1 A precast element to be made composite with cast-in
2. Bearing pads at unarmored edges shall be set back a
place concrete shall be permitted to be tested in flexure as a
minimum of 15 mm from the face of the support, or at
precast element alone in accordance with the following:
least the chamfer dimension at chamfered edges.
416.11.1.1 Test loads shall be applied only when calculations
416.7.2.3 The requirements of Section 412.12.1 shall not apply
indicate the i.solated precast element will not be critical in
. to the positive bending moment reinforcement for statically
compression or buckling.
determinate precast members, but at least one-third of such
reinforcement shall extend to the center of the bearing length.
416.11.1.2 The test load shall be that load which, when applied
to the precast member alone, induces the same total force in the
tension reinforcement as would be induced by loading the
416.8 ITEMS EMBEDDED AFTER CONCRETE composite member with the test load required by Section
PLACEMEl"n' 420.4.2.
416.8.1 When approved by the engineer, embedded items (such 416.11.2 The provisions of Section 420.6 shall be the basis for
as dowels or inserts) that either protrude from the concrete or acceptance or rejection of the precast element.
remain exposed for inspection shall be permitted to be embedded
while the concrete is in a plastic state provided that:

416.8.1.1 Embedded items are not required to be hooked or tied

to reinforcement within the concrete.

~16.8.1.2 Embedded items are maintained in the correct position

while the concrete remains plastic.

416.8.1.3 The concrete is properly con'solidated around the

embedded item.

0116.9 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION

416.9.1 Each precast member shall be marked to indicate its

location and orientation in the structure and date of manufacture.

416.9.2 Identification marks shall correspond to placing

drawings.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS
SECTION 417 - COlVIPOSITE
CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS
417.1 NOTATION
Ac = area of contact surface being investigated for horizontal
shear, mm 2
2 417.3.7 Composite members shall meet requirements for control
AI' = area ofti"es within a distance s, mm
h" width of cross section at contact surface being
investigated for horizontal shear, mm
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of
tension reinforcement for entire composite section, mm
h overall thickness of composite members, mm
s = spacing of ties measured along the longitudinal axis of
the member, mm
~ 'ryh nominal horizontal shear strength
VII = factored shear force at section
A = correction factor related to unit weight of concrete.
PI' ratio of tie reinforcement area to area of contact surface.
h,.s
strength-reduction factor. See Section 409.4
417.2 SCOPE
417.2.1 Provisions of Section 417 shall apply for design of
composite concrete flexural members defined as precast or cast
in-place concrete elements or both constructed in separate
placements but so interconnected that all elements respond to
load., as a unit.
417.2.2 A.ll provi<;ions of this code shall apply to composite
concrete flexural members, except as specifically modified in
thi.., Section.
417.3 GENERAL
4 P .3.1 The use of an entire composite member or portions
thereof for resisting shear and moment shall be permitted.
417.3.2 Individual ciements shall be investigated for all critical
stages of loading.
417.3.3 If the specified stren!:,rth, unit weight or other properties
:)f ~!Je 'various elements are different, properties of the individual
ciements or the most critical values shall be used in design.
417.3.4 In strength computations of composite members, no
distinction shaH be made between shored and unshored
members
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
476
417.3.5 All elements shall be designed to support all loads
introduced prior to full development of design strength of
composite members.
417.3.6 Reinforcement shall be provided as required to control
cracking and to prevent separation of individual elements of
composite members.
of deflections in accordance with Section 409.6.5.
417.4 SHORING
When used, shoring shall not be removed until suppor.ted
elements have developed design properties required to suPPort
all loads and limit deflections and cracking at time of shoring
removal.
417.5 VERTICAL SHEAR STRENGTH
417.5.1 When an entire composite member is assumed to resist
vertical shear, design shall be in accordance with requirements
of Section 411 as for a monolithically cast member of the same
cross-sectional shape.
417.5.2 Shear reinforcement shall be fully anchored into
interconnected elements in accordance with Section 412.14.
4 t 7.5.3 Extended and anchored shear reinforcement shall be
permitted to be included as ties for horizontal shear.
417.6 HORIZONTAL SHEAR STRENGTH
417 .6.1 In a composite member, full transfer of horizontal shear
forces shall be assured at contact surfaces of interconnected
elements.
4l".6.1.1 Full transfer of horizontal shear force may be assumed
when all of the following are satisfied:
1. Contact surfaces are clean, free of laitance, and
intentionally roughened to a full amplitude of
approximately 6 mm.
2. Minimum ties are provided in accordance with Section
417.7.
3. Web members are designed to resist total vertical shear,
and
4. All shear reinforcement is fully anchored into <ill
interconnected elements.
417.6.1.2 If all the requirements of Section 4l7.6.1.1 are not
satisfied, horizontal shear shall be investigated in accordance
with Section 4l7.6.2 or 417.6.3.
 CONCRETE 4-77

417.7 TIES FOR HORIZONTAL SHEAR

417.6.2 Unless calculated in accordance with Section 417.6.3,
design of cross sections subject to horizontal shear shall be 417.7.1 When ties are provided to transfer horizontal shear, tie
based on: area shall not be less than that required by Section 41 1.6.5.3 and
tie spacing shall not exceed four times the least dimension of
(417-1) supported element, or 600 mm.

where Vu is factored shear force at section considered and Vnh is 417.7.2 Ties for horizontal shear shall consist of single bars or
nominal horizontal shear strength in accordance with the wire, multiple leg stirrups, or vertical legs of welded wire fabric
following: (plain or deformed).

417.6.2.1 When contact surfaces are clear, free of laitance and 417.7.3 All ties shall be fully anchored into interconnected
intentionally roughened, shear strength Vnh shall not be taken elements in accordance with Section 412.14.
greater than O.6b,.d, in newtons.

417.6.2.2 When minimum ties are provided in accordance with

Section 417.7 and contact surfaces are clean and free of laitance,
but not intentionally roughened, shear strength Vnh shall not be
taken greater than O.6b,d, in newtons.

417.6.2.3 When minimum ties are provided in accordance with

Section 417.7 and contact surfaces are clean, free of laitance,
and intentionally roughened to a full amplitude of approximately
5 mm, shear strength Vnh shall be taken equal to (1.8 +
O.6pJ;.)Ab vdin newtons, but not greater than 3.5bvd, in newtons.
Values for A in Section 411.8.4.3 shall apply.

417.6.2.4 When factored shear force Vu at section considered

exceeds <jl3.5bvd, design for horizontal shear shall be in
accordance with Section 411.8.4.

417.6.2.5 When determining nominal horizontal shear strength

over prestressed concrete elements, d shall be as defined or 0.8h,
whichever is greater.

417.6.3 As an alternative to Section 417.6.2, horizontal shear

.shall be permitted to be determined by computing the actual
change in compressive or tensile force in any segment, and
provisions shall be made to transfer that force as horizontal shear
to the supporting element. The factored horizontal shear force
shall not exceed horizontal shear strength <jl Vnh as given in
Sections 417.6.2.1 through 417.6.2.4 where area of contact
surface Ac shall be substituted for bvd.

417.6.3.1 When ties provided to resist horizontal shear are

designed to satisfy Section 417 6.3, the tie-area-to-tie-spacing
ratio along the member shall approximately reflect the
distribution of shear forces in the member.

417.6.4 When tension exists across any contact surface between

interconnected elements, shear transfer by contact may be
assumed only when minimum ties are provided in accordance
with Section 41 7.7

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 4-78

SECTION 418 - PRESTRESSED a = total angular change of prestressing tendon profile

radians from tendon jacking end to any point x

CONCRETE = factor defined in Section 410.3.7.3.

= factor for type of prestressing tendon.

= 0.55 forfd!;,. not less than 0.80

418.1 NOTATIONS = 0.40 forfdfpu not less than 0.85

= 0.28 forfdfpu not less than 0.90

A = area of that part of cross section between flexural

2 = correction factor related to unit weight of concrete

tension face and center of gravity of gross section, mm Section 411.8.4.3)

= larger gross cross-sectional area of the slab-beam strips

11 = curvature friction coefficient

of the two orthogonal equivalent frames intersecting at

2 p = ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement

a column of a two-way slab, mm

2 = A'!(bd)
Aps = area of prestressed reinforcement in tension zone mm
= area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement ~2
p' = ratio of compression reinforcement
As
2 = A,'/(bd)
As' = area of compression reinforcement, mm '
b = width of compression face of member, mm = ratio of prestressed reinforcement
= Ap'!(bllp)
D = dead loads or related internal moments and forces
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of = strength-reduction factor. See Section 409.4
nonprestressed tension reinforcement, mm co = phI'c

d' = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of co' = p'fj!,c

compression reinforcement, mm = pp.h>sfc

= distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of coP"" co' w = reinforcement indices for flanged sections
prestressed reinforcement, mm computed as for OJ, COp. and oJ' except that b shall be the
f = base ofNapierian logarithms web width, and reinforcement area shall be that
= specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa required to develop compressive strength of web only
= square root of specified compressive strength of
concrete, MPa
!,c; = compressive strength of concrete at time of initial
418.2 SCOPE
prestress, MPa
fpc = average compressive stress in concrete due to effective
418.2.1 Provisions of this Section shall apply to members
prestressed with wire, strands or bars conforming to provisions
prestress force only (after allowance for all prestress
for prestressing tendons in Section 403.6.5.
losses), MPa
!;,S = stress in prestressed reinforcement at nominal strength,
418.2.2 All provisions of this code not specifically excluded, and
MPa
not in conflict with provisions of this Section, shall apply to
fpu = specified tensile strength of prestressing tendons, MPa
prestressed concrete.
fpy = specified yield strength of prestressing tendons, MPa
J,. = modulus of rupture of concrete, MPa
fse = effective stress in prestressed reinforcement (after
418.2.3 The following provisions of this code shall not apply to
prestressed concrete, except as specifically noted: Sections
allowance for all prestress losses), MPa
407.7.5, 408.5, 408.11.2 through 408.11.4, 408.12, 410.4.2 and
h = specified yield strength of nonprestressed
410.4.3,410.6,410.7,410.10.1,410.10.2,413,414.4,414.6 and
reinforcement, MPa
414.7.
h = overall dimension of member in direction of action
considered, mm
K = wobble friction coefficient per mm of prestressing
tendon 418.3 GENERAL
Ix = length of prestressing tendon element from jacking end
to any point x, m. See Equations 418-1 and 418-2 418.3.1 Prestressed members shall meet the strength
L = live loads or related internal moments and forces
requirements specified in this code.
n = number of monostrand anchorage devices in a group
Nc = tensile force in concrete due to unfactored dead load
418.3.2 Design of prestressed members shall be based on
plus live load (D + L) strength and on behavior at service conditions at all stages that
p. = prestressing tendon force at jacking end
may be critical during the life of the structure from the time
Px = prestressing tendon force at any point x
prestress is first applied.
P:ru = factored post-tensioned tendon force at the anchorage
device 418.3.3 Stress concentrations due to prestressing shall be
considered in design.

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONCRETE
418.3.4 Provisions shall be made for effects on adjoining
construction of elastic and plastic deformations, deflections,
changes in length and rotations due to prestressing. Effects of
temperature and shrinkage shall also be included.
418.3.5 Possibility of buckling in a member between points
where concrete and prestressing tendons are in contact and of
buckling in thin webs and flanges shall be considered.
418.3.6 In computing seGtion properties prior to bonding of
prestressing tendons, effect of loss of area due to open ducts
shall be considered.
418.4 DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS
418.4.1 Str~gth design of prestressed members for flexure and
axial loads shall be based on assumptions given in Section
410.3, except that Section 410.3.4 shall apply only to
reinforcement conforming to Section 403.6.3.
418.4.2 For investigation of stresses at transfer of prestress, at
service loads, and at cracking loads, straight-line theory shall be
used with the following assumptions:
418.4.2.1 Strains vary linearly with depth through entire load
range.
418.4.2.2 At cracked sections, concrete resists no tension.
418.5 PERMISSmLE STRESSES IN CONCRETE
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
418.5.1 Stresses in concrete immediately after prestress transfer
(before time-dependent prestress losses) shall not exceed the
following:
1. Extreme fiber stress in compression ........ . 0.60f'cI
2. Extreme fiber stress in tension except as
permitted in 3. .. ....................... 0.25g
3. Extreme fiber stress in tension at ends of simply
supported members .................... , 0.50g
Where computed tensile stresses exceed these values, bonded
additional reinforcement (nonprestressed or prestressed) shall be
provided in the tensile zone to resist the total tensile force in
COncrete computed with the assumption of an uncracked section.
418.5.2 Stresses in concrete at service loads (after allowance for
aU prestress losses) shall not exceed the following:
1. Extreme fiber stress in compression due to prestress
plus sustained loads ................... 0.45f'c
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-79
2. Extreme fiber stress in compression due to prestress
plus total load ...... .. . .............. O.60f'c
3. Extreme fiber stress in tension in precompressed
tensile zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 0.50Jj,'
4. Extreme fiber stress in tension in precompressed tensile
zone of members (except two-way slab systems), where
analysis based on transformed cracked sections and on
bilinear moment-deflection relationships show that
immediate and long-time deflections comply with
requirements of Section 409.6.4, and where cover
requirements comply with Section 407.8.3.2 ......... .
........... 1.0[1;
418.5.3 Permissible stresses in concrete of Sections 418.5.1 and
418.5.2 may be exceeded if shown by test or analysis that
performance will not be impaired.
418.6 PERMISSmLE STRESS IN PRESTRESSING
TENDONS
418.6.1 Tensile stress in prestressing tendons shall not exceed
the following:
1. Due to tendon jacking force. .. ........ 0.94fpy
but not greater than the lesser of 0.80./pu and the
maximum value recommended by manufacturer of
prestressing tendons or anchorage devices.
2. Immediately after prestress transfer ....... 0.82J;y
but not greater than 0.74 j pu'
3. Post-tensioning tendons, at anchorage devices and
couplers, immediately after force transfer .. 0.70jpu
418.7 LOSS OF PRESTRESS
418.7.1 To determine effective prestress 1_ allowance for the
following sources ofloss of prestress shall be considered:
1. Tendon seating at transfer;
2. Elastic shortening of concrete;
3. Creep of concrete;
4. Shrinkage of concrete;
5. Relaxation oftendon stress;
6. Friction loss due to intended or unintended curvature
in post-tensioning tendons.
 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
418.7.2 FRICTION LOSS IN POSTTENSIONING
TENDONS
418.7.2.1 Effect of friction loss in post-tensioning tendons shall
be computed by:
(418-1)
When (Klx + pa) is not greater than 0.3, effect of friction loss
shall be permitted to be computed by:
Ps Px ( 1 + Klx + pa) (418-2)
418.7.2.2 Friction loss shall be based on experimentally
determined wobble K and curvature p friction coefficients and
shall be verified during tendon stressing operations.
418.7.2.3 Values of wobble and curvature friction coefficients
used in design shall be shown on design drawings.
418.7.3 Where loss of prestress in member may occur due to
connection of member to adjoining construction, such loss of
prestress shall be allowed for in design.
,
418.8 FLEXURAL STRENGTH
418.8.1 Design moment strength of flexural members shall be
computed by the strength design methods of this chapter. For
prestressing tendons, Ips shall be substituted for 1; in streng1"
computations.
418.8.2 As an alternative to a more accurate determination of/ps
based on strain compatibility, the following approximate values
of/p. shall be used if/.e is not less than 0.5/p".
J. For members with bonded prestressing tendons:
(418-3)
If any compression reinforcement is taken into account
when calculating/ps by Equation (418-3), the term:
~
[pp fe' lU')]
shall be taken not less than 0.17 and d' shall be no greater
than 0.15 dp
2. For members with unbonded prestressing tendons and
with a span-to-depth ratio of35 or less:
(418-4)
Association of Structural Engineers of the PhiliDDines
4-80
but Ips in Equation (418-4) shall not be taken greater
/PJ'> nor greater than (f.e+ 420).
3. For members with unbonded prestressing tendons
with a span-to-depth ratio greater than 35:
f'e
fs< + 7 0 +
30 Opp
but/ps in Equation (418-5) shall not be taken greater
/py, nor greater than (f.e + 200).
418.8.3 Non-prestressed reinforcement conforming to ije;ctlcm
403.6.3, if used with prestressing tendons, shall be permitted
be considered to contribute to the tensile force and to
included in moment strength computations at a stress equal
the specified yield strength /y. Other
reinforcement shall be permitted to be included in "t""ncrl"h"
computations only if a strain compatibility analysis is made
determine stresses in such reinforcement.
418.9 LIMITS FOR REINFORCEMENT OF
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
418.9.1 Ratio of prestressed and nonprestressed reiJrlforce-m,mf
used for computation of moment strength of a member, except as
provided in this section shall be such that wp' [ ~
(dlllp)(w - w')], or [lDpw + (dlllp)(w,., - w'w)] is not greater than
, 36ftl.
418.9.2 When a reinforcement ratio in excess of that specified'
Section 418.9.1 is provided, design moment strength shall not
exceed the moment strength based on the compression portion
the moment couple.
418.9.3 Total amount of prestressed and
reinforcement shall be adequate to develop a factored load
least 1.2 times the cracking load computed on the basis of
modulus of rupture f, specified in Section 409.6.2.3.
provision shall be permitted to be waived for:
1. Two-way, unbonded post-tensioned slabs;
2. Flexural members with shear and flexural strength at least
twice that required by Section 409.3.
418.10 MINIMUM BONDED REINFORCEMENT
418.10.1 A minimum area of bonded reinforcement shall
provided in all flexural members with unbonded nri>dri'.,.,itUI
tendons as required by Sections 418.10.2 and 418.10.3.
418.10.2 Except as provided in Section 418.10.3, minimum area
ofbonded reinforcement shall be computed by:
 CONCRETE

{~A?
A,=O.004A (418-6)
"ffL.::,;,
"'418.10.2.1 Bonded reinforcement required by Equation (418-6)
hall be uniformly distributed over precompressed tensile zone
a~ close as practicable to extreme tension fiber.
At;{
418.10.2.2 Bonded reinforcement shall be required regardless of
service load stress conditions.
One-way, unbonded, post-tensioned slabs and beams plus 25
.percent of the unreduced superimposed live load by some
method other. than the primary unbonded post-tensioned
reinforcement. Design shall be based on the strength method of
design with a load factor and capacity reduction factor of one.
;All reinforcement other than the primary unbonded
. reinfurcement provided to meet other requirements of this
section may be used in the design.
418.10.2.3 Maximum spacing limitations of Sections 407.7.1
and 408.11.5.2, for bonded reinforcement in slabs are not
'lipplicable to spacing of bonded reinforcement in members with
Urtbonded tendons.
418.10.3 For two-way flat plates, defined as solid slabs of
uniform thickness, minimum area and distribution of bonded
reinforcement shall be as follows:
418.10.3.1 Bonded reinforcement shall not be required in
positive moment areas where computed tensile stress in concrete
at service load (after allowance for prestress losses) does not
exceed 0.17 Jl;
418.10.3.2 In positive moment areas where computed tensile
r
stress in concrete at service load exceeds 0.17 J.t: minimum area
of bonded reinforcement shall be computed by:
418.10.4.1 In positive moment areas, minimum length of bonded
reinforcement shall be one-third the clear span length and
centered in positive moment area.
418.10.4.2 In negative moment areas, bonded reinforce-ment
shall extend one-sixth the clear span on each side of support.
418.10.4.3 Where bonded reinforcement is provided for design
moment strength in accordance with Section 418.8.3, or for
tensile stress conditions in accordance with Section 418.10.3.2,
minimum length also shall conform to provisions of Section 412 .
418.11 STATICALLY INDETERMINATE
STRUCTURES
418.11.1 Frames and continuous constf!.!tion of prestressed
concrete shall be designed for satisfactory performance at
service load conditions and for adequate strength.
418.11.2 Performance at service load conditions shall be
determined by elastic analysis, considering reactions, moments,
shears, and axial forces produced by prestressing, creep,
shrinkage, temperature change, axial deformation, restraint of
attached structural elements and foundation settlement.
418.11.3 Moments used to compute required strength shall be
the sum of the moments due to reactions induced by prestressing
(with a load factor of 1.0) and the moments due to factored
loads. Adjustment of the sum of these moments shall be
permitted as allowed in Section 418.11.4.
418.11.4 Redistribution Of Negative Moments In
Continuous Prestressed Flexural Members

~ (418-7) 418.11.4.1 Where bonded reinforcement is provided at supports

A, in accordance with Section 418.10, negative moments calculated
0.5 f,
by elastic theory for any assumed loading arrangement shall be
where design yield strength';;. shall not exceed 420 MPa. Bonded permitted to be increased or decreased by not more than:
reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed over precompressed
tensile zone as close as practicable to extreme tension fiber.
percent
418.10.3.3 In negative moment areas at column supports,
minimum area of bonded reinforcement As in the top of the slab
in each direction shall be computed by: 418.11.4.2 The modified negative moments shall be used for
calculating moments at sections within spans for the same
As . 000075Ac{ (418-8)
loading arrangement.
Bonded reinforcement required by Equation (418-8) shall be
418.11.4.3 Redistribution of negative moments shall be made
distributed between lines that are 1.5h outside opposite faces of
only when the section at which moment is reduced is so
the column support. At least four bars or wires shall be provided
designed that 0Jp, [mp + (lIdp)(m m')], or [lk./pw + (Vtlp)(mw
in each direction. Spacing of bonded reinforcement shall not
m'w)], whichever is applicable, is not greater than 0.2413,.
e\ceed JOO mm.

418.10.4 Mini mum length of bonded reinforcement required by

Sections :!18.10.:2 and 4\8.10.3 shall be as follows

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 CONCRETE
418.12 COMPRESSION MEMBERS - COMBINED
FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOADS
418.12.1 Prestressed concrete members subject to combined
flexure and axial load, with or without nonprestressed
reinforcement, shall be proportioned by the strength design
methods of this chapter. Effects of prestress, creep, shrinkage
and temperature change shall be included.
418.12.2 Limits for Reinforcement of Prestressed
Compression Members
418.12.2.1 Members with average prestress/pc less than 1.5 MPa
shall have minimum reinforcement in accordance with Sections
407.11,410.10.1 and 410.10.2 for columns, or Section 414.4 for
walls.
418.12.2.2 Except for walls, members with average prestress/pc
equal to or greater than 1.5 MPa shall have all prestressing
tendons enclosed by spirals or lateral ties in accordance with the
following:
1. f Spirals shall conform to Section 407.11.4;
2. Lateral ties shall be at least 10 mm diameter in size or
welded wire fabric of equivalent area, and spaced
vertically not to exceed 48 tie bar or wire diameters or
least dimension of compression member;
,, .
3. Ties shall be located vertically not more than half a tie
spacing above top of footing or slab in any story, and
shall be spaced as provided herein to not more than half a
tie spacing below lowest horizontal reinforcement in
members supported above;
4. Where beams or brackets frame into all sides of a column,
it shall be permitted to terminate ties not more than 75
mm below lowest reinforcement in such beams or
brackets.
418.12.2.3 For walls with average prestress fpc equal to or
greater than 1.5 MPa, minimum reinforcement required by
Section 414.4 may be waived where structural analysis shows
adequate strength and stability.
418.13 SLAB SYSTEMS
418.13.1 Factored moments and shears in prestressed slab
systems reinforced for flexure in more than one direction shall
be determined in accordance with provisions of Section 413.8,
(excluding Sections 413.8.7.4 and 413.8.7.5), or by more
detailed design procedures.
418.13.2 Moment strength of prestressed slabs at every section
shall be at least equal to the required strength considering
Sections 409.3,409.4,418.11.3 and 418.11.4. Shear strength of
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
4-82
prestressed slabs at columns shall be at least equal to
required strength considering Sections 409.3, 409.4, 41
411.13.2 and 411.13.6.2.
418.13.3 At service load conditions, all
limitations, including specified limits on deflections, shall
met, with appropriate consideration of the factors listed
Section 418.11.2.
418.13.4 For normal live loads and load uniformly distributed,'
spacing of prestressing tendons or groups of tendons in one:
direction shall not exceed eight times the slab thickness, nor LSi
m. Spacing of tendons also shall provide a minimum averagey
prestress (after allowance for all prestress losses) of 0.9 MPa on'~
the slab section tributary to the tendon or tendon group. k.~
minimum of two tendons shall be provided in each directionJ
through the critical shear section over columns. SpeciaL
consideration of tendon spacing shall be provided for slabs with:
concentrated loads.
418.13.5 In slabs with unbonded prestressing tendons, bonded
reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with Sections'
418.10.3 and 418.10.4.
418.13.6 In lift slabs, bonded bottom reinforcement shall bet
detailed in accordance with the last paragraph of Section
413.4.8.6.
418.14 POST-TENSIONED TENDON ANCHORAGE
ZONES
418.14.1 Anchorage Zone
The anchorage zone shall be considered as composed of two
zones:
1. The local zone is the rectangular prism (or equivalent
rectangular prism for circular or oval anchorages) of
concrete immediately surrounding the anchorage device
and any confining reinforcement;
2. The general zone is the anchorage zone as defined in
Section 402 and includes the local zone.
418.14.2 Local Zone
418.14.2.1 Design of local zones shall be based upon the
factored tendon force, p.u , and the requirements of Sections
409.3.8 and 409.4.2.5
418.14.2.2 Local-zone reinforcement shall be provided where
required for proper functioning of the anchorage device.
418.14.2.3 Local-zone requirements of Section 418.14.2.2 are
satisfied by Section 418.15.1 or 418.16.1 and 418.16.2.
 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
418.14.3 General Zone
cc'~i
;418.14.3.1 Design of general zones shall be based upon the
factored tendon force, P,"" and the requirements of Sections
409.3.8 and 409.4.2.5
;:418.14.3.2 General-zone reinforcement shall be provided where
:~equired to resist bursting, spalling, and longitudinal edge
tension forces induced by anchorage devices. Effects of abrupt
change in section shall be considered.
418.14.3.3 The general-zone requirements of Section 418.14.3.2
are satisfied by Sections 418.14.4, 418.14.5, 418.14.6 and
$,~hichever one of Section 418.15.2 or 418.15.3 or 418.16.3 is
Applicable.
418.14.4 Nominal Material Strengths
418.14.4.1 Nominal tensile strength of bonded reinforce-ment is
'limited to /y for nonprestressed reinforcement and to /py for
prestressed reinforcement. Nominal tensile stress of unbonded
'prestressed reinforcement for resisting tensile forces in the
anchorage zone shall be limited to
Ips =Ise + 10,000.
418.14.5.6 Where curved tendons are used in the general zone,
418.14.4.2 Except for concrete confined within spirals or
hoops providing confinement equivalent to that corresponding to
Equation (410-6), nominal compressive strength of concrete in
the general zone shall be limited to 0.7 Al'd.
418.14.4.3 Compressive strength of concrete at time of post
tensioning shall be specified on the design drawings. Unless
oversize anchorage devices sized to compensate for the lower
compressive strength are used or the tendons are stressed to no
more than 50 percent of the final tendon force, tendons shall not
be stressed until f'cb as indicated by tests consistent with the
.curing of the member, is at least 28 MFa for multi strand tendons
or at least 17 MFa for single-strand or bar tendons.
418.14.5 Design Methods
418.13.5.1 The following methods shall be permitted for the
design of general zones provided that the specific procedures
used result in prediction of strength in substantial agreement
with results of comprehensive tests:
1. Equilibrium based plasticity models (strut-and-tie
models);
2. Linear stress analysis (including finite element analysis or
equivalent); or
3. Simplified equations where applicable.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-33
418.14.5.2 Simplified equations shall not be used where member
cross sections are nonrectangular, where discontinuities in or
near the general zone cause deviations in the force flow path,
where minimum edge distance is less than 1.5 times the
anchorage device lateral dimension in that direction, or where
multiple anchorage devices are used in other than one closely
spaced group.
418.14.5.3 The stressing sequence shall be specified on the
design drawings and considered in the design.
418.14.5.4 Three-dimensional effects shall be considered in
design and analyzed using three-dimensional procedures or
approximated by considering the summation of effects for two
orthogonal planes.
418.14.5.5 For intermediate anchorage devices, bonded
reinforcement shall be provided to transfer at least 0.35 Pm into
the concrete section behind the anchor. Such reinforcement shall
be placed symmetrically around the anchorage devices and shall
be fully developed both behind and ahead of the anchorage
devices.
except for monostrand tendons in slabs or where analysis shows
reinforcement is not required, bonded reinforcement shall be
provided to resist radial and splitting forces.
418.14.5.7 Except for mono-strand tendons in slabs on where
analysis shows reinforcement is not required, minimum
reinforcement with a nominal tensile strength equal to 2 percent
of each factored tendon force shall be provided in orthogonal
directions parallel to the back face of all anchorage zones to
limit spalling.
418.14.5.8 Tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected in
calculations of reinforcement requirements.
418.14.6 Detailing Requirements
Selection of reinforcement sizes, spacings, cover, and other
details for anchorage zones shall make allowances for tolerances
on the bending, fabrication, and placement of reinforcement, for
the size of aggregate, and for adequate placement and
consolidation ofthe concrete.
 CONCRETE
4-84

418.15 DESIGN OF ANCHORAGE ZONES FOR 418.16 DESIGN OF ANCHORAGE ZONES FOR
MONO-STRAND OR SINGLE 16 MM DIAMETER MULTI-STRAND TENDONS
BAR TENDONS
418.16.1 Local Zone Design
41S.1S.1 Local Zone Design
Basic multi-strand anchorage devices and local zo
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHT.
Mono-strand or single 16 mm or smaller diameter bar anchorage
"Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division I
devices and local zone reinforcement shall meet the
Articles 9.21.7.2.2 through 9.21.7.2.4.
requirements of the Post-Tensioning Institute's "Specification
for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons" or the special anchorage
Special anchorage devices shall satisfy the tests required i'
device requirements of Section 418.16.1.
AASHTO "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges,
Division I, Article 9.21.7.3 and described in AASHT
"Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division
41S.1S.2 General Zone Design For Slab Tendons
Article 10.3.2.3.
41S.1S.2.1 F9r anchorage devices for 12 mm or smaller diameter
418.16.2 Use Of Special Anchorage Devices
strands in n<tmalweight concrete slabs, minimum reinforcement
meeting the requirements of418.15.2.2 and 418.15.2.3 shall be
Where special anchorage devices are to be used, supplemen
provided unless a detailed analysis satisfying 418.14.5 shows
skin reinforcement shall be furnished in the correspoO(lm~\I
such reinforcement is not required.
regions of the anchorage zone, in addition to the confinin
reinforcement specified for the anchorage device. Thi
41SUS.2.2 Two horizontal bars at least 12 mm diameter in size
supplemental reinforcement shall be similar in configuration
shall be provided parallel to the slab edge. They shall be
at least equivalent in volumetric ratio to any supplementary s
permitted to be in contact with the front face of the anchorage
reinforcement used in the qualifying acceptance tests of th
device and shall be within a distance of ~ h ahead of each
anchorage device.
""'''
'''Itt"
device. Those bars shall extend at least 150 rom either side ofthe
outer edges of each device.
418.16.3 General Zone Design
41S.1S.2.3 If the center-to-center spacing of anchorage devices Design for general zones for multi strand tendons shall meet
is 300 rom or less, the anchorage devices shall be considered as a requirements of Sections 418.14.3 through 418.14.5.
group. For each group of six or more anchorage devices, n + 1
hairpin bars or closed stirrups at least 10 mm diameter in size
shall be provided, where n is the number of anchorage devices. 418.17 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR
One hairpin bar or stirrup shall be placed between each UNBONDED PRESTRESSING TENDONS
anchorage device and one on each side of the group. The hairpin
bars or stirrups shall be placed with the legs extending into the 418.17.1 Unbonded tendons shall be encased with Sh~attltn~:.~
slab perpendicular to the edge. The center portion of the hairpin The tendons shall be completely coated and the sheathing
bars or stirrups shall be placed perpendicular to the plane of the the tendon filled with suitable material to inhibit corrosion.
slab from 3h18 to hl2 ahead of the anchorage devices.
'IIm. 418.17.2 Sheathing shall be watertight and continuous
41S.1S.2.4 For anchorage devices not conforming to Section entire length to be unbonded.
418.15.2.1, minimum reinforcement shall be based upon a
detailed analysis satisfying Section 418.14.5. 418.17.3 For applications in corrosive environments,
sheathing shall be connected'to all stressing, intermediate
fixed anchorages in a watertight fashion.
418.15.3 General one Design for Groups of Mono-strand
Tendons in Bearns and Girders 418.17.4 Unbonded single strand tendons shall be protected
against corrosion in accordance with the Post-Tensioning
Design of general zones for groups of mono strand tendons in Institute's "Specifications for Unbonded Single Strand
beams and girders shaH meet the requirements of Sections Tendons."
418.14.3 through 418.14.5.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
ill8.18 POST-TENSIONING DUCTS
c~HtI8.1 Ducts for grouted tendons shall be mortar-tight and
nonreactive with concrete, tendons, grout, and corrosion
JIDibitor.
418.18.2 Ducts for grouted single wire, single strand, or single
b~ tendons shall have an inside diameter at least 6 mm larger
thantendon diameter.
418.18.3 Ducts for grouted multiple wire, multiple strand, or
multiple bar tendons shall have an inside cross-sectional area at
least two times the cross-sectional area of tendons.
418.18.4 Ducts shall be maintained free of ponded water if
members to be grouted are exposed to temperatures below
freezing prior to grouting.
418.19 GROUT FOR BONDED PRESTRESSING
TENDONS
418.19.1 Grout shall consist of portland cement and water; or
portland cement, sand, and water.
418.19.2 Materials for grout shall conform to Sections
418.19.2.1 through 418.19.2.4.
418.19.2.1 Portland cement shall conform to Section 403.3.
418.19.2.2 Water shall conform to Section 403.5.
,">{
418.19.2.3 Sand, if used, shall conform to "Standard
Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar" (ASTM C 144)
except that gradation shall be permitted to be modified as
necessary to obtain satisfactory workability.
418.19.2.4 Admixtures conforming to Section 403.7 and known
to have no injurious effects on grout, steel, or concrete shall be
permitted. Calcium chloride shall not be used.
418.19.3 Selection of grout proportions
418.19.3.1 Proportions of materials for grout shall be based on
either of the following:
1 Results of tests on fresh and hardened grout prior to
beginning grouting operations; or
2. Prior documented experience with similar materials and
equipment and under comparable field conditions.
418.19.3.2 Cement used in the work shall correspond to that on
which selection of grout proportions was based.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-85
418.19.3.3 Water content shall be minimum necessary for proper
pumping of grout; however, water-cement ratio shall not exceed
0.45 by' weight.
418.19.3.4 Water shall not be added to increase grout flowability
that has been decreased by delayed use of the grout.
418.19.4 Mixing and pumping grout
418.19.4.1 Grout shall be mixed in equipment capable of
continuous mechanical mixing and agitation that will produce
uniform distribution of materials, passed through screens, and
pumped in a manner that will completely fill tendon ducts.
418.19.4.2 Temperature of members at time of grouting shall be
above 2 c and shall be maintained above 2 c until field-cured
50 mm cubes of grout reach a minimum compressive strength of
5,5 MPa.
418.19.4.3 Grout temperatures shall not be above 32 degrees C
during mixing and pumping.
418.20 PROTECTION FOR PRESTRESSING
TENDONS
Burning or welding operations in the vicinity of prestressing
tendons shall not be performed so that tendons are not subject to
excessive temperatures, welding sparks, or ground currents.
418.21 APPLICATION AND MEASUREMENT OF
PRESTRESSING FORCE
418.21.1 Prestressing force shall be determined by both of the
following methods:
1. Measurement of tendon elongation. Required elongation
shall be determined from average load elongation curves
for the prestressing tendons used;
2. Observation of jacking force on a calibrated gage or load
cell or by use of a calibrated dynamometer.
Cause of any difference in force detennination between methods
1 and 2 that exceeds 5 percent for pretensioned elements or 7
percent for post-tensioned construction shall be ascertained and
corrected.
418.21.2 Where the transfer of force from the bulkheads of
pretensioning bed to the concrete is accomplished by flame
cutting prestressing tendons, cutting points and cutting sequence
shall be predetermined to avoid undesired temporary stresses.
 CONCRETE
418.21.3 Long lengths of exposed pretensioned strand shall be
cut near the member to minimize shock to concrete.
418.21.4 Total loss of prestress due to umeplaced broken
tendons shall not exceed 2 percent of total prestress.
418.22 POST-TENSIONING ANCHORAGES AND
COUPLERS.
418.22.1 Anchorages and couplers for bonded and unbonded
prestressing tendons shall develop at least 95 percent of the
specified breaking strength of the tendons, when tested in an
unbonded condition, without exceeding anticipated set. For
bonded tendons, anchorages and couplers shall be located so that
100 percent of the specified breaking strength of the tendons
shall be developed at critical sections after tendons are bonded in
the member.
418.22.2 Couplers shall be placed in areas approved by the
engineer and enclosed in housing long enough to permit
necessary movements.
, members.
418.22.3 In unbonded construction subject to repetitive loads,
special attention shall be given to the possibility of fatigue in
anchorages and couplers.
.. 418.22.4 Anchorages, couplers, and end fittings shall be
permanently protected against corrosion.
418.23 EXTERNAL POST-TENSIONING
418.23.1 Post-tensioning tendons shall be permitted to be
external to any concrete section of a member. The strength
serviceability design methods of this code shall be used in
evaluating the effects of external tendon forces on the concrete
structure.
418.23.2 External tendons shall be considered as unbonded
tendons when computing flexural strength unless provisions are
made to effectively bond the external tendons to the concrete
section along its entire length.
418.23.3 External tendons shall be attached to the concrete
member in a manner that maintains the desired eccentricity
between the tendons and the concrete centroid throughout the
full range of anticipateo member deflection.
418.23.4 External tendons and tendon anchorage regions shall be
protected against corrosion, and the details of the protection
method shall be indicated on the drawings or in the project
specifications.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
4-86
SECTION 419 - SHELLS AND FOLDED
PLATE MEMBERS
419.1 NOTATION
=modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa, See
408.6.1
= specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
= square root of specified compressive strength
concrete, MPa
1;, = specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcemen
MPa
h thickness of shell or folded plate, mm
Id = development length, mm
J = strength-reduction factor. See Section 409.4
419.2 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS
419.2.1 Provisions of Section 419 shall apply to thin-shell
folded-plate concrete structures, including ribs and ed
419.2.2 All provisions of this Code not specifically exclude
and not in conflict with provisions of Section 419, shall apply t
thin-shell structures.' .
AUXILIARY MEMBERS - Ribs or edge beams that serve t
strengthen, stiffen, or support the shell; usually, auxili
members act jointly with the shell.
ELASTIC ANALYSIS - An analysis of deformations a
internal forces based on equilibrium, compatibility of strai
and assumed elastic behavior, and representing to a suita
approximation the three-dimensional action of the shell toget
with its auxiliary members,
EXPERIMENTAL ANALYSIS - An analysis procedure base
on the measurement of deformations and/or strains of
structure or its model; experimental analysis may be based 0
either elastic or inelastic behavior.
FOLDED PLATES - A special class of shell structure form
by joining flat, thin slabs along their edges to create a thr
dimensional spatial structure.
INELASTIC ANALYSIS - An analysis of deformations a
internal forces based on equilibrium, nonlinear stress-st
relations for concrete and reinforcement, consi-deration
cracking and time-dependent effects and compatibility of stra
The analysis shall represent a suitable approximation of t
three-dimensional action of the shell together with its auxili
members,
 SHELLS AND FOLDED PLATE MEMBERS
IUBBED SHELLS - Spatial structures with material placed
primarily along certain preferred rib lines, with the area between
the ribs filled with thin slabs or left open.
THIN SHELLS - Three-dimensional spatial structures made up
of one or more curved slabs or folded plates whose thicknesses
are small compared to their other dimensions. Thin shells are
characterized by their three-dimensional load-carrying behavior
which is determined by the geometry of their forms, by the
manner in which they are supported and by the nature of the
applied load.
419.3 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
419.3.1 Elastic behavior shall be an accepted basis for
determining internal forces and displacements of thin shells.
This behavior shall be permitted to be established by
computations based on an analysis of the uncracked concrete
structure in which the material is assumed linearly elastic,
homogeneous and isotropic. Poisson's ratio of concrete shall be
permitted to be taken equal to zero. .
419.3.2 Inelastic analysis shall be permitted to be used where it
can be shown that such methods provide a safe basis for design.
419.3.3 Equilibrium checks of internal resistances and external
loads shall be made to ensure consistency of results.
419.3.4 Experimental or numerical analysis procedures shall be
permitted where it can be shown that such procedures provide a
safe basis for design.
419.3.5 Approximate methods of analysis shall be permitted
where it can be shown that such methods provide a safe basis for
design.
419.3.6 In prestressed shells, the analysis shaH also consider
behavior under loads induced during prestressing, at cracking
load and at factored load. Where prestressing tendons are draped
within a shell, design shall take into account force components
on the shell resulting from the tendon profile not lying in one
plane.
419.3.7 The thickness of a shell and its reinforcement shall be
proportioned for the required strength and serviceability, using
either the strength design method of Section 408.2.1 or the
. alternate design method of Section 408.2.2.
419.3.8 Shell instability shall be investigated and shown by
407.13.
design to be precluded.
419.3.9 Auxiliary members shall be designed according to the
applicable provisions of this code. It shall be permitted to
assume that a portion of the shell equal to the flange width, as
specified in Section 408.11, acts with the auxiliary member. In
National Struct-"ral Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-87
such portions of the shell, the reinforcement perpendicular to the
l
I
auxiliary member shall be at least equal to that required for the
flange of aT-beam by Section 408.11.5.
419.3.10 Strength design of shell slabs for membrane and
bending forces shall be based on the distribution of stresses and
strains as determined from either an elastic or an inelastic
analysis.
419.3.11 In a region where membrane cracking is predicted, the
nominal compressive strength parallel to the cracks shall be
taken as O.4/'c.
419.4 DESIGN STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
419.4.1 Specified compressive strength of concrete fc at 28
days shall not be less than 21 MPa.
419.4.2 Specified yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement
1;, shall not exceed 420 MPa.
419.5 SHELL REINFORCEMENT
419.5.1 Shell reinforcement shall be provided to resist tensile
stresses from internal membrane forces, to resist tension from
bending and twisting moments, to control shrinkage and
temperature cracking and as special reinforcement as shell
boundaries, load attachments and shell openings.
419.5.2 Tensile reinforcement shall be provided in two or more
directions and shall be proportioned such that its resistaJIce in
any direction equals or exceeds the component of internal forces
in that direction.
Alternatively, reinforcement for the membrane forces in the slab
shall be calculated as the reinforcement required to resist axial
tensile forces plus the tensile force due to shear- friction required
to transfer shear across any cross section of the membrane. The
assumed coefficient of friction shall not exceed LOA where A =
1.0 for normal-weight concrete, 0.85 for sand-lightweight
concrete, and 0.75 for all lightweight concrete. Linear
interpolation shall be permitted when partial sand replacement is
used.
419.5.3 The area of shell reinforcement at any section as
measured in two orthogonal directions shall not be less than the
slab shrinkage or temperature reinforcement required by Section
419.5.4 Reinforcement for shear and bending moments about
axes in the plane of the shell slab shall be calculated in
accordance with Sections 410, 411 and 413.
 CONCRETE
419.5.5 The area of shell tension reinforcement shall be limited
so that the reinforcement will yield before either crushing of
roncrete in compression or shell buckling can take place.
419.5.6 In regions of high tension, membrane reinforcement
shall, if practica~ be placed in the general directions of the
principal tensile membrane forces. Where this is not practical, it
shall be permitted to place membrane reinforcement in two or
more component directions.
419.5.7 If the direction of reinforcement varies more than 10
degrees from the direction of principal tensile membrane force,
the amount of reinforcement shall be reviewed in relation to
cracking at service loads.
419.5.8 Where the magnitude of the principal tensile membrane
stress within the shell varies greatly over the area of the shell
surface, reinforcement resisting the total tension may be
concentrated in the regions of largest tensile stress where it can
be shown that this provides a safe basis for design. However, the
ratio of shell reinforcement in any portion of the tensile zone
shall not be less than 0.0035 based on the overall thickness of
the shell.
419.5.~ Reinforcement required to resist shell bending moments
shall be proportioned with due regard to the simultaneous action
of membrane axial forces at the same location. Where shell
reinfurcement is required in only one face to resist bending
moments, equal amounts shall be placed near both surfaces of
the shell even though a reversal of bending moments is not
indicated by the analysis.
419.5.10 Shell reinforcement in any direction shall not be spaced
farther apart than 500 mm, or five times the shell thickness.
Where the principal membrane tensile stress on the gross
concrete area due to factored loads exceeds 0.331/1.[1:
reinforcement shall not be spaced farther apart than three times
the shell thickness.
419.5.11 Shell reinforcement at the junction of the shell and
supporting members or edge members shall 'be anchored in or
extended through such members in accordance with the
requirements of Section 412, except that the minimum
development length shall be 1.214 but not less than 500 mm.
419.5.12 Splice development lengths of shell reinforcement shall
. be governed by the provisions of Section 412, except that the
minimum splice length of tension bars shall be 1.2 times the
value required by Section 412 but not less than 500 mm. The
number of splices in principal tensile reinforcement shall be kept
to a practical minimum. Where splices are necessary, they shall
be staggered at least 14 with not more than one-third of the
reinforcement spliced at any section.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
419.6 CONSTRUCTION
419.6.1 When removal of formwork is based on a
modulus of elasticity of concrete because of stability
deflection considerations, the value of the modulus of
Ee shall be determined -from flexural tests of field-cured
specimens. The number of test specimens, the dimensions
test beam specimens and test procedures shall be specified.
419.6.2 The tolerances for the shape of the shell shall
specified. If construction results in deviations from the
greater than the specified tolerances, an analysis of the effect
the deviations shall be made and any required remedial
shall be taken to ensure safe behavior.
SECTION 420 - STRENGTH
EVALUATION OF EXISTING
STRUCTURES
420.1 NOTATION
D dead loads or related internal moments and forces
Fc specified compressive strength concrete, MPa.
h = overall thickness of member in the direction of action
considered, mm
L = live loads or related internal moments and forces
It = span of member under load test, mm. (The shorter
span for two-way slab systems.) Span is the smaller
of (1) distance between centers of supports and
clear distance between supports plus thickness h of
member. In Equation (420-1), span for a cantilever
shall be taken as twice the distance from support to
cantilever end
Amax = measured maximum deflection, mm. See Equation
(420-1)
Ar max = measured residual deflection, mm. See Equations
(420-2) and (420-3)
A/max maximum deflection measured during the second test
relative to the position of the structure at the
beginning of the second test, mm. See Equation (420- .
3)
420.2 STRENGTH EVALUATION-GENERAL
420.2.1 If there is a doubt that a part or all of a structure meets
the safetyrequirements5)f this code, a strength evaluation shall
be carried out as required by the engineer or building officiaL
420.2.2 Ifthe effect of the strength deficiency is well understood
and if it is feasible to measure the dimensions and materials
 STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES
properties required for analysis, analytical evaluations of
strength based on those measurements shall suffice. Required
data shall be determined in accordance with Section 420.3.
420.2.3 If the effect of the~-'Strength deficiency is not well
understood or if it is not feasible to establish the required
dimensions and material properties by measurement, a load test
shall be required if the structure is to remain HLservl~
420.2.4 If the doubt about safety of a part or all of a structure
involves deterioration and if the observed response during the
.load test satisfies the acceptance criteria, the structure or part of
the structure shall be permitted to remain in service for a
specified time period. If deemed necessary by the engineer,
periodic re-evaluations shall be conducted.
420.3 DETERMINATION OF REQUIRED
DIMEl'N'SIONS AND MATERIAL PROPERTIES
.420.3.1 Dimensions of the structural elements shall be
established at critical sections.
420.3.2 Locations and sizes of the reinforcing bars, welded wire
fabric or tendons shall be determined by measurement. It shall
be permitted to base reinforcement locations on available
drawings if spot checks are made confirming the information on
the drawings.
420.3.3 If required, concrete strength shall be based on results of
cylinder tests or tests of cores removed from the part of the
structure where the strength is in doubt. Concrete strength shall
be determined as specified in Section 405.7.3.
420.3.4 If required, reinforcement or tendon strength shall be
based on tensile tests of representative samples of the material in
the structure in question.
420.3.5 If the required dimensions and material properties are
determined through measurements and testing, and if
calculations can be made in accordance with Section 420.2.2, it
. shall be permitted to increase the strength-reduction factor in
Section 409.4, but the strength-reduction factor shall not be more
than:
Flexure without axial load ..... . . . . . . . .. .. .......
Axial tension and axial tension with flexure.... . . . . . .. 1.0
Axial compression and axial compression with flexure:
Members with spiral reinforcement conforming to
Section410.10.3 ...................... 0.9
Other members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shear and/or torsion... ........................ 0.9
evidence of failure. Spalling and crushing of compressed
. Bearing on concrete. . ..... . ................... 0.85
concrete shall be considered an indication offailure.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-89
1
420.4 LOAD TEST PROCEDURE
420.4.1 Load arrangement
The number and arrangement of spans or panels loaded shall be
selected to maximize the deflection and stresses in the critical
regions of the structural elements of which strength is in doubt.
More than one test load arrangement shall be used if a single
arrangement will not simultaneously result in maximum values
of the effects (such as deflection, rotation or stress) necessary to
demonstrate the adequacy of the structure.
420.4.2 Load intensity
The total test load (including dead load already in place) shall
not be less than 0.S5(1.4D + 1.71-). It shall be permitted to
reduce I- in accordance with the requirements of this code.
420.4.3 A load test shall not be made until that portion of 'the
structure to be subject to load is at least 56 days old. If the o~r
of the structure, the contractor, and all involved parties agree, it
shall be permitted to make the test at an earlier age.
420.5 LOADING CRITERIA
420.5.1 The initial value for all applicable response
measurements (such as deflection, rotation, strain, slip, crack
widths) shall be obtained not more than one hour before
application of the first load increment. Measurements shall be
made at locations where maximum response is expected.
Additional measurements shall be made ifrequired.
420.5.2 Test load shall be applled in not less than four
approximately equal increments.
420.5.3 Uniform test load shall be applied in a manner to ensure
uniform distribution of the load transmitted to the structure or
portion of the structure being tested. Arching of the applied load
shall be avoided.
420.5.4 A set of response measurements shall be made after
each load increment is applied and after the total load has been
applied on the structure for at least 24 hours.
1. 0
420.5.5 Total test load shall be removed immediately after all
response measurements defined in Section 420.5.4 are made.
420.5.6 A set of final response measurements shall be made 24
hours after the test load is removed.
420.6 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
0.85
420.6.1 The portion of the structure tested shall show no
 CONCRETE
420.6.2 Measured maximum deflections shall satisfy one of the
following conditions:
e
~max ~ 20 ,~OOh (420-1)
~rmax ~ 4 (420-2)
If the measured maximum and residual deflections do not satisfy
Equation (420-1) or (420-2), it shall be permitted to repeat the
load test.
The repeated test shall be conducted not earlier than 72 hours
after removal of the first test load. The portion of the structure
tested in the repeat test shall be considered acceptable if
deflection recovery satisfied the condition:
~ ~ (420-3)
rmax 5 width of the joint shall not exceed the smaller of
where AI max is the maximum deflection measured during the
second test relative to the position of the structure at the
beginning of the second test.
420.6.3 Structural members tested shall not have cracks
indicating the imminence of shear failure.
420.6.4 In regions of structural members without transverse
reinforcement, appearance of structural cracks inclined to the
longitudinal axis and having a horizontal projection longer than
the depth of the member at mid-point of the crack shall be
evaluated.
420.6.5 In regions of anchorage and lap splices, the appearance
along the line of reinforcement of a series of short inclined
cracks or horizontal cracks shall be evaluated.
420.7 PROVISIONS FOR LOWER LOAD RATING
If the structure under investigation does not satisfy conditions or
criteria of Section 420.2.2,420.6.2 or 420.6.3, the structure may
be permitted for use at a lower load rating based on the results of
the load test or analysis, if approved by the building official.
420.8 SAFETY
420.8.1 Load tests shall be cond~cted in such a manner as to
provide for safety of life and structure during the test.
420.8.2 No safety measures shall interfere with load test
procedures or affect results.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
4-90
SECTION 421- SPECIAL PROVISIONS
FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
421.1 NOTATION
= cross-sectional area of a structural member
out-to-out oftransverse reinforcement, mm2
area of concrete section, resisting shear,
individual pier or horizontal wall segment, mm2
= gross area of concrete section bounded by
thickness and length of section in the direction of
force considered, mm2
gross area of section, mm2
effective cross-sectional area within a joint (see CI<;;',U"-'R.1!jJ
421.6.3.1) in a plane parallel to flane of
generating shear in the joint, mm . The joint depth
be the overall depth of the column. Where a
frames into a support of larger width, the "'t+,~Ml'"
1. beam width plus the joint depth
2. twice the smaller perpendicular distance from
the longitudinal axis of the beam to the column'
side. See Section 421.6.3.1.
= total cross-sectional area of transverse rel:n-icJroement
(including crossties) within spacing, s,
perpendicular to dimension, he, mm 2
total area of reinforcement in each group of """!5V""'"
bars in a diagonally reinforced coupling beam,
b = effective compressive flange width of a
member, mm
= web width, or diameter ofcircular section, mm
= distance from the extreme compression fiber to neutral
axis, see Section 410.3.7, calculated for the factored
axial force and nominal moment strength, consistent
with the design displacement 0;" resulting in the largest
neutral axis depth, mm
= effective depth of section, mm
= bar diameter, mm
= load effects of earthquake, or related internal moments
and forces
specified compressive strength of concrete, .MFa
square root of specified compressive strength of
concrete, .MFa
= specified yield strength of reinforcement, MPa
= specified yield strength of transverse reinforcement,
MPa
cross-sectional dimension of column core measured
center-to-center ofconfining reinforcement, mm
= height of entire wall or of the segment of wall
considered, mm
= maximum horizontal spacing of hoop or crosstie legs
on all faces of the column, mm
development length for a straight bar
 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
"" development length for a bar with a standard hook as
defined in Equation (421-6), mm
clear span measured face-to-face of supports, mm
== minimum length, measured from joint face along axis
of structural member, over which transverse
reinforcement must be provided, mm
"" length of entire wall or of segment of wall considered
in direction of shear force, mm
moment at the face of the joint, corresponding to the
nominal flexural strength of the column framing into
that joint, calculated for the factored axial force,
consistent with the direction of the lateral forces
considered, resulting in the lowest flexural strength, see
Section 421.5.2.2
'.'M.g "" moment at the face of the joint, corresponding to the
nominal flexural strength of the girder including slab
where in tension, framing into that joint, see Section
421.5.2.2
Mpr probable flexural strength of members, with or without
axial load, determined using the properties of the
member at the joint faces assuming a tensile strength in
the longitudinal bars of at least 1.25./y and a strength
reduction factor tP of 1.0
Ms = portion of slab moment balanced by support moment
M" factored moment at section
s = spacing of transverse reinforcement measured along the
longitudinal axis ofthe structural member, mm
Se CONNECTION
moment, shear or axial force at connection cross section
other than the nonlinear action location corresponding
to probable strength at the nonlinear action location,
taking gravity load effects into consideration, per
Section 421.3.7.3
Sn COf..WECTION
nominal strength of connection cross section in flexural,
shear or axial action, per Section 421.3.7.3
= maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement, mm
= longitudinal spacing of transverse reinforcement within
the length 10 , mm
vc = nominal shear strength provided by concrete
re design shear force determined from Section 421.4.4.1
or421.5.5.1
Vn = nominal shear strength
Vu factored shear force at section
a angle between the diagonal reinforcement and the
longitudinal axis of a diagonally reinforced coupling
beam
coefficient defining the relative contribution of concrete
strength to wall strength, See Equation 421-7
= design displacement, mm
p ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement
= A,(hd)
ratio o(total reinforcement area to cross-sectional area
of column
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-91
Pn = ratio of area of distributed reinforcement parallel to the
plane of Acv to gross concrete area perpendicular to that
reinforcement
P. = ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to the core
volume confined by the spiral reinforcement (measured
out-to-out)
Pv = ratio of area of distributed reinforcement perpendicular
to the plane of Acv to gross concrete area Acv
tP = strength-reduction factor
Llm R",Ll.
Lls = Design Level Response Displacement, which is the
total drift or total story drift that occurs when the
structure is subjected to the design seismic forces.
tp =Dynamic Amplification Factor from Sections 421.3.7.3
and 421.3.7.4.
421.2 DEFINITIONS
BASE OF STRUCTURE - Level at which earthquake motions
are assumed to be imparted to a building. This level does not
necessarily coincide with the ground level.
BOUNDARY ELEMENTS - Portions along structural wall and
structural diaphragm edges strengthened by longitudinal and
transverse reinforcement. Boundary elements do not necessarily
require an increase in the thickness of the wall or diaphragm.
Edges of openings within walls and diaphragms shall be
provided with boundary elements as required by Sections
421.7.6 and 421.8.5.3.
COLLECTOR ELEMENTS - Elements that serve to transmit
the inertial forces within structural diaphragms to me~bers of
the lateral-force-resisting systems.
CONFINED CORE - the area within the core defined by he
CONNECTION - an element that joins two precast members or
a precast member and a cast-in-place member.
COUPLING BEAM - a horizontal element in plane with and
connecting two shear walls.
CROSSTIE - A continuous reinforcing bar having a seismic
hook at one end and a hook of not less than 90 degrees with at
least six-diameter extension at the other end. The hooks shall
engage peripheral longitudinal bars. The 90-degree hooks of two
successive crossties engaging the same longitudinal bars shall be
alternated end for end.
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT - Total lateral displacement
expected for the design-basis earthquake, as required by the
governing code for earthquake-resistant design.
DESIGN LOAD COMBINATIONS - Combinations of
factored loads and forces specified in Section 409.3.
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR A BAR WITH A
STANDARD BOOK - The shortest distance between the
 CONCRETE
critical section (where the strength of the bar is to be developed)
and a tangent to the outer edge of the 9O-degree hook.
DRY CONNECTION - a connection used between precast
members which does not qualify as a wet connection.
FACTORED LOADS AND FORCES - Loads and forces
modified by the factors in Section 409.3.
HOOP - A closed tie or continuously wound tie. A closed tie
can be made up of several reinforcing elements, each having
seismic hooks at both ends. A continuously wound tie shall have
a seismic hook at both ends.
JOINT - the geometric volume common to intersecting
members.
LATERAL FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM - That portion of
the structure composed of members proportioned to resist forces
related to earthquake effects.
LIGHTWEIGHT-AGGREGATE CONCRETE All
lightweight or sand-lightweight aggregate concrete made with
lightweight aggregates conforming to Section 403.4.
MOMENT FRAME - Space frames in which members and
joints resist forces through flexure, shear, and, axial force.
Moment frames shall be categorized as follows:
Intermediate moment frame - A frame complying with the
requirements of Sections 421.3.2.3 and 421. 11 in addition to the
requirements for ordinary moment frames.
Ordinary moment frame - A frame complying with the
requirements of Sections 401 through 418.
Special moment frame - A frame complying with the
requirements of Sections 421.3 through 421.6 in addition to the
requirements for ordinary moment frames.
NONLINEAR ACTION LOCATION - the center of the
region of yielding in flexure, shear or axial action.
NONLINEAR ACTION REGION - the member length over
which nonlinear action takes place. It shall be taken as extending
a distance of no less than hJ2 on either side of the nonlinear
action location.
SEISMIC HOOK - A hook on a stirrup, hoop or crosstie
having a bend not less than 135 degrees, except that circular
hoops shall have a bend not less than 90 degrees. Hooks shall
have a six-diameter [but not less than 75 mm], extension "that
engages the longitudinal reinforcement and projects into the
interior of the stirrup or hoop.
SHELL CONCRETE - concrete outside the transverse
reinforcement confining the concrete.
SPECIAL BOUNDARY ELEMENTS - Boundary elements
required by Section 421. 7.6.2 or 421.7.6.3.
SPECIFIED LATERAL FORCES Lateral forces
corresponding to the appropriate distribution of the design bast'
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
shear force prescribed by the governing code for ..",.,rhf11!1",lr:
resistant design.
STRONG CONNECTION - a connection that remains
while the designated nonlinear action regions undergo .
response under the Design Basis Ground Motion.
STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGMS - Structural members,
as floor and roof slabs, that transmit inertial forces to
force resisting members.
STRUCTURAL TRUSSES - Assemblages of
concrete members subjected primarily to axial forces.
STRUCTURAL WALLS - Walls proportioned to
combinations of shears: moment, and axial forces induced
earthquake motions. A shear wall is a structural wall. "'-t,.,,,I"I1,,>'
walls shall be categorized as follows:
Ordinary reinforced concrete structural walls
complying with the requirements of Sections 401 through 418.
Ordinary structural plain concrete wall A wall ",.,llllJlV ....
with the requirements of Section 422.
Special reinforced coIicrete structural wall
complying with the requirements of Sections 421.3 and 421.7
addition to the requirements for ordinary reinforced
structural walls.
STRUT - An element of a structural diaphragm used to
continuity around an opening in the diaphragm.
TIE ELEMENTS - Elements that serve to transmit
forces and prevent separation of building components such
footings and walls.
WALL PIER - a wall segment with a horizontal lengrll-tO
thickness ratio between 2.5 and 6, and whose clear height is
least two times its horizontal length.
WET CONNECTION - uses any of the splicing methods,
Section 421.3.6.1 or 421.4.2.3, to connect precast members
uses cast-in-place concrete or grout to fill the splicing closure.
421.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
421.3.1 Scope
421.3.1.1 Section 421 contains special requirements for
and construction of reinforced concrete members of a
for which the design forces, related to earthquake motions,
been determined on the basis of energy dissipation in
nonlinear range of response.
421.3.1.2 The provisions of Sections 401 through 418
apply except as modified by the provisions of Section 421
Where the design seismic loads are computed using
for intermediate or special concrete systems, the requirements
 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
s~ion 421 for intermediate or special systems, as applicable,
shaH be satisfied.
421;3.1.3 In Seismic Zone 2, reinforced concrete frames
resisting forces induced by earthquake motions shall be
intermediate moment-resisting frames proportioned to satisfy
onlY Section 421.11 in addition to the requirements of Sections
401 through 418. In Seismic Zone 2, frame members which are
not designated to be part of the lateral-force-resisting system
shall conform to Section 421.1 O.
421.3.1.4 In Seismic Zone 4, all reinforced concrete structural
members that are part of the lateral-foree-resisting system shall
satisfy the requirements of Sections 421.3 through 421.10, in
addition to the requirements of Sections 401 through 417.
4~1..3.1.5 A reinforced concrete structural system not satisfying
it~~ . requirements of this Section shall be permitted if it is
demonstrated by experimental evidence and analysis that the
proposed system will have strength and toughness equal to or
exceeding those provided by a comparable monolithic reinforced
concrete structure satisfying this Section.
421.3.1.6 Precast lateral-foree-resisting systems shall satisfy
either ofthe following criteria:
L Emulate the behavior of monolithic reinforced concrete
construction and satisfy Section 421.3.2.5, or
2. Rely on the unique properties of a structural system
composed of interconnected precast elements and
conform to Section 208.4.6.6.
421.3.1.7 In structures having precast gravity systems, the
lateral-foree-resisting system shall be one of the systems listed in
Table 208-11 and shall be well distributed using one of the
following methods:
1. The lateral-foree-resisting systems shall be spaced such
that the span of the diaphragm or diaphragm segment
between lateral-foree-resisting systems shall be no more
than three times the width of the diaphragm or diaphragm
segment.
Where the lateral-force-resisting system consists of
moment-resisting frames, at least [(Nof4) + I} of the bays
(rounded up to the nearest integer) along any frame line at
any story shall be part of the lateral-foree-resisting
system, where No is the total number of bays along that
line at that story. This requirement applies to only the
lower two thirds of the stories of buildings three stories or
taller.
2. All beam-to-column connections that are not part of the
lateral-force-resisting system shall be designed in
accordance with the following:
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-93
Connection design force. The connection shall be
designed to develop strength M. M is the moment
developed at the connection when the frame is displaced
by 11s assuming fixity at the connection and a beam
flexural stiffuess of no more than one-half of the gross
section stiffuess. M shall be sustained through a
deformation of Lim.
Connection cbaracteristics. The connection shall be
permitted to resist moment in one direction only, positive
or negative. The connection at the opposite end of the
member shall resist moment with same positive or
negative sign. The connection shall be permitted to have
zero flexural stiffuess up to a frame displacement of Lis.
In addition, complete calculations for the deformation
compatibility of the gravity load carrying system sha1l be
made in accordance with Section 208.8.2.3 using cracked
section stiffuesses in the lateral-foree-resisting system and
the diaphragm.
Where gravity columns are not provided with lateral
support on all sides, a positive connection shall be
provided along each unsupported direction parallel to a
principal plan axis of the structure. The connection shall
be designed for a horizontal force equal to 4 percent of
the axial load strength (Po) ofthe column.
The bearing length shall be 50 mm more than that
required for bearing strength.
421.3.2 Analysis and proportioning of structural
members
421.3.2.1 The interaction of all structural and nonstructural
members which materially affect the linear and nonlinear
response of the structure to earthquake motions shall be
considered in the analysis.
421.3.2.2 Rigid members assumed not to be a part of the lateral
force resisting system shall be permitted, provided their effect on
the response of the system is considered and accommodated in
the structural design. Consequences of failure of structural and
nonstructural members, which are not a part of the lateral-force
resisting system, shall also be considered.
421.3.2.3 Structural members below base of structure that are
required to transmit to the foundation forces resulting from
earthquake effects shall also comply with the requirements of
Section 421.
421.3.2.4 All structural members assumed not to be part of the
lateral-force resisting system shall conform to Section 421.10.
 CONCRETE
421.3.2.5 Precast structural systems using frames and emulating
the behavior of monolithic reinforced concrete construction shall
satisfy either Section 421.3.2.6 or 421.3.2.7.
421.3.2.6 Precast structural systems, utilizing wet connections,
shall comply with all the applicable requirements of monolithic
concrete construction for resisting seismic forces.
421.3.2.7 Precast structural systems not meeting Section
421.3.2.6 shall utilize strong connections resulting in nonlinear
response away from connections. Design shall satisfy the
requirements of Section 421.3.7 in addition to all the applicable
requirements of monolithic concrete construction for resisting
seismic forces, except that provisions of Section 421.4.1.2 shall
apply to the segments between nonlinear action locations.
421.3.3 S(rength-reduction factors
Strength reduction factors shall be as given in Section 409.4.4.
421.3.4 .Concrete in members resisting earthquake-induced
forces.
421.3.4.1 Compressive strength Fe shall be not less than 21
MPa~
EXCEPTION:
Footings of buildings three stories or less may have concrete
.. , with f 'c ofnot less than 17 MPa.
421.3.4.2 Compressive strength of lightweight aggregate
concrete used in design shall not exceed 28 MPa. Lightweight
aggregate concrete with higher design compressive strength shall
be permitted if demonstrated by experimental evidence that
structural members made with that lightweight aggregate
concrete provide strength and toughness equal to or exceeding
those of comparable members made with normal weight
aggregate concrete of the same strength. In no case shall the
compressive strength of lightweight concrete used in design
exceed 41 MPa.
~I.
~ I 421.3.5 Reinforcement in members resisting earth-quake
induced forces
421.3.5.1 Reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced flexural
and axial forces in' frame members and in wall boundary
elements shall comply with ASTM A 706M.
421.3.5.2 ASTM A615M Grades 275 and 420 reinforcement
shall be permitted in these. members if:
1. The actual yield strength based on mill tests does not
exceed the specified yield strength by more than 120 MFa
(retests shall not exceed this value by more than an
additional 20 MFa), and
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
2. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to
actual tensile yield strength is not less than 1.25.
421.3.5.3 The average prestress fpc, calculated for an area
to the member's shortest cross-sectional dimension multiplied
the perpendicular dimension, shall be the lesser of 2.4 MPa
1')12 at locations of nonlinear action, where
tendons are used in members of frames.
421.3.5.4 For members in which prestressing tendons are
together with mild reinforcement to resist
forces, prestressing tendons shall not provide more than
quarter of the strength for both positive and negative moments
the joint face and shall extend through exterior joints and
anchored at the exterior face of the joint or beyond.
421.3.5.5 Shear strength provided by prestressing tendons shall
not be considered in design.
421.3.6 Welded splices and mechanically connected
reinforcement
421.3.6.1 Reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced
or axial forces in frame members or in wall boundary
shall be permitted to be spliced using welded splices
mechanical connectors conforming to Section 412.15.3.3
412.15.3.4.
Splice locations in frame members shall conform to ~e<~lOllifll
421.3.6.1.1 or 421.3.6.1.2.
421.3.6.1.1 Welded splices. In Seismic Zones 2 and 4, welded
splices on billet steel A615 or low allow A 706 reinforcement
shall not be used within an anticipated plastic hinge region nor
within a distance of one beam depth on either side of the I"~"W~>"
hinge region or within a joint.
421.3.6.1.2 Mechanical connection splices. Splices
mechanical connections shall be classified according to C1tr,>nath
capacity as follows:
Type 1 splice. Mechanical connections meeting
requirements of Sections 412.15.3.4 and 412.15.3.5.
Type 2 splice. Mechanical connections that develop in tension
the lesser of 95 percent of the ultimate tensile strength or 160
per cent of specified yield strength,J;., ofthe bar.
Mechanical connection splices shall be permitted to be located
as follows:
Type I splice. In Seismic Zones 2 and 4, a Type 1 splice shall
not be used within an anticipated plastic hinge region or within a
distance of one beam depth on either side of the plastic hinge
region or within a joint.
Type 2 splice. A Type 2 splice shall be permitted in any location
within a member.
 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
:421.3.6.2 Welding of stirrups, ties, inserts or other similar
elements to longitudinal reinforcement required by design shall
not be permitted.
;lit.3.7 Emulation of monolithic construction using strong
connections. Members resisting earthquake-induced forces in
precast frames using strong connections shall satisfy the
following:
421.3.7.1 Location. Nonlinear action location shall be selected
sO that there is a strong column/weak beam deformation
mechanism under seismic effects. The nonlinear action location
shall be no closer to the near face of strong connection than hl2.
For column-to-footing connections, where nonlinear action may
bcCur at the column base to complete the mechanism, the
nonlinear action location shall be no closer to the near face of
the connection than hl2.
421.3.7.2 Anchorage and splices. Reinforcement in the
cfioruinear action region shall be fully developed outside both the
strong connection region and the nonlinear action region.
N"9ncontinuous anchorage reinforcement of strong connection
'shan be fully developed between the connection and the
beginning of nonlinear action region. Lap splices are prohibited
within connections adjacent to a joint.
.~Jl.3.7.3 Design forces. Design strength of strong connections
~~all be based on:
"c,:",'
<p SrI CONNECTION > \If Se CONNECTION (421-1)
Dynamic amplification factor \If shall be taken as 1.0.
421.3.7.4 Column-to-column connection. The strength of such
connections shall comply with Section 421.3.7.3 with \If taken as
1.4. Where column-to-column connections occur, the columns
(!hall be provided with transverse reinforcement as specified in
Sections 421.5.4.1 through 421.5.4.3 over their full height if the
factored axial compressive force in these members, including
seismic effects, exceeds AJ"/10.
EXCEPTION:
r,Wl!ere column-to-column connection is located within the
{Iljidd/e third of the column clear height, the follOWing shall
fffpply: (1) The design moment strength ivf" of the connection
#shall not be less than 0.4 times the maximum Mpr for the column
. the story height, and (2) the design shear strength ;V" oj
C01:mel-:ticln shall lIot be less than that determined per Section
Column-face connection. Any strong connection
outside the middle half of a beam span shall be a wet
unless a dry connection can be substantiated by
cyclic test results. Any mechanical connector located
such a column-face strong connection shall develop in
National ~ral Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
tension or compression, as required, at least 140 percent of
specified yield strength,f", ofthe bar.
421.4 FLEXURAL MEMBERS OF FRAMES
421.4.1 Scope
Requirements of Section 421.4 apply to special moment frame
members (1) resisting earthquake-induced forces and (2)
proportioned primarily to resist flexure. These frame members
shall also satisfy the following conditions:
421.4.1.1 Factored axial compressive force on the member shall
not exceed (Agf/10).
421.4.1.2 Clear span for the members shall not be less than four
times its effective depth.
421.4.1.3 The width-to-depth ratio shall not be less than 0.3.
421.4.1.4 The width shall not be (1) less than 250 mm, and (2)
more than the width of the supporting member (measured on a
plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the flexural
member) plus distances on each side of the supporting member
not exceeding three-fourths ofthe depth of the flexural member.
421.4.2 Longitudinal reinforcement
421.4.2.1 At any section of a flexural member, except as
provided in Section 410.6.3, for top as well as for bottom
reinforcement, the amount of reinforcement shall not be less
than that given by Equation (420-3) but not less than 1.4pwc/IJ;.,
and the reinforcement ratio, p, shall not exceed 0.025. At least
two bars shall be provided continuously both top and bottom.
421.4.2.2 Positive-moment strength at joint face shall not be less
than one half of the negative-moment strength provided at that
face of the joint. Neither the negative nor the positive-moment
strength at any section along member length shall be less than
one fourth the maximum moment strength provided at face of
either joint.
421.4.2.3 Lap splices of flexural reinforcement shall be
permitted only if hoop or spiral reinforcement is provided over
the lap length. Maximum spacing of the transverse
reinforcement enclosing the lapped bars shall not exceed dl4 or
100 mm. Lap splices shall not be used (1) within the joints, (2)
within a distance of twice the member depth from the face of the
joint, and (3) at locations where analysis indicates flexural
yielding caused by inelastic lateral displacements of the frame.
421.4.2.4 Welded splices and mechanical connections
shall conform to Section 421.3.6.1.
 CONCRETE
421.4.3 Transverse reinforcement
421.4.3.1 Hoops shall be provided in the following regions of
frame members:
1. Over a length equal to twice the member depth measured
from the face of the supporting member toward midspan,
at both ends of the flexural member;
2. Over lengths equal to twice the member depth on both
sides. of a section where flexural yielding is likely to occur
in connection with inelastic lateral displacements of the
frame.
421.4.3.2 The first hoop shall be located not more than 50 mm
from the face of a supporting member. Maximum spacing of the
'hoops shall not exceed (1) d/4, (2) eight times the diameter of
the smallest longitudinal bars, (3) 24 times the diameter of the
hoop bars, and (4) 300 mm.
421.4.3.3 Where hoops are required, longitudinal bars on the
perimeter shall have lateral support conforming to Section
407.11.5.3.
421.4:3.4 Where hoops are not required, stirrups with seismic
hooks at both ends shall be spaced at a distance not more than
dl2 throughout the length ofthe member.
421.4.3.5 Stirrups or ties required to resist shear shall be hoops
over lengths of members as specified in Sections 421.4.3,
4215.4 and 421.6.2.
421.4.3.6 Hoops in flexural members shall be permitted to be
made up of two pieces of reinforcement: a stirrup having seismic
hooks at both ends and closed by a crosstie. Consecutive
crossties engaging the same longitudinal bar shall have their 90
degree hooks at opposite sides of the flexural member. If the
longitudinal reinforcing bars secured by the crossties are
confined by a slab on only one side of the flexural frame
member, the 90-degree hooks of the crossties shall all be placed
on that side.
421.4.4 Shear strength requirements
421.4.4.1 Design forces
The design shear forces Ve shall be determined from
consideration of the static forces on the portion of the member
between faces of the joint. It shall be assumed that moments of
opposite sign corresponding to probable flexural strength Mpr act
at the joint faces and that the member is loaded with the tributary
gravity load along its span.
421.4.4.2 Transverse reinforcement
Transverse reinforcement over the lengths identified in Section
421.4.3.1 shall be proportioned to resist shear assuming Vc = 0
when both of the following conditions occur:
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
The earthquake-induced shear force calculated in
with Section 421.4.4.1 represents one-half or more
maximum required shear strength within those lengths;
The factored axial compressive force including
effects is less than Ag{'cl20.
414.5 SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME MEMBERS
SUBJECTED TO BENDING AND AXIAL LOAD
421.5.1 Scope
The requirements of Section 421.5 apply to special
frame members (1) resisting earthquake-induced forces and
having a factored axial force exceeding Ag{'clIO. These
members shall also satisfy the following conditions:
421.5.1.1 The shortest cross-sectional dimension, measured on
straight line passing through the geometric centroid, shall not
less than 300 mm.
421.5.1.2 The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension
the perpendicular dimension shall not be less than 0.4.
421.5.2 Minimum flexural strength of columns
421.5.2.1 Flexural strength of any column proportioned to resist
a factored axial compressive force exceeding AI'clIO shall
satisfy Section 421.5.2.2 or 421.5.2.3.
Lateral strength and stiffhess of columns not satisfying Section
421.5.2.2 shall be ignored in determining the calculated strength
and stiffhess of the structure, but such column shall conform to
Section 421. 10.
421.4.2.2 The flexural strengths of the columns shall satisfy
Equation (421-2):
EMe 2: (6/5)EMg (421-2)
where:
rue = sum of moments at the faces of the joint corresponding to
the nominal flexural strength of the columns framing into that
joint. Column flexural strength shall be calculated for the
factored axial force, consistent with the direction of the lateral
forces considered, resulting in the lowest flexural strength.
rug = sum of moments at the faces of the joint corresponding
to the nominal flexural strengths of the girders framing into that
joint. In T-beam construction, where the slab is in tension under
moments at the face of the joint, slab reinforcement within an
effective slab width defined in Section 408.11 shall be assumed
to contribute to flexural strength if the slab reinforcement is
developed at the critical section for flexure.
 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
Flexural strengths shall be summed such that the column
I moments oppose the beam moments. Equation (421~2) shall be
satisfied for beam moments acting in both directions in the
vertical plane ofthe frame considered.
421.5.2.3 If Section 42l.5.2.2 is not satisfied at a joint, columns
SUpporting reactions from that joint shall be provided with
tranSVerse reinforcement as specified in Sections 421.5.4.1
through 421.5.4.3 over their full height.
421.5.3 Longitudinal reinforcement
421.5.3.1 The reinforcement ratio Pg shall not be less than 0.01
and shall not exceed 0.06.
421.5.3.2 Mechanical splices shall conform to Section
421.3.6.1.2 and welded splices shall conform to Section
421.3.6.1.1. Lap splices shall be permitted only within the center
half of the member length, shall be designed as CONCRETE ten~
sion lap splices, and shall be enclosed within transverse
reinforcement conforming to Sections 421.5.4.2 and 421.5.4.3.
421.5.4 Transverse reinforcement
421.5.4.1 Transverse reinforcement as required below shall be
provided unless a larger amount is required by Section 421.5.3.1
or 421.5.5.
The volumetric ratio of spiral or circular hoop
1.
reinforcement p$ shall not be less than that required by
Equation (421~3):
(421~3)
and shall not be less than that required by Equation
(41O~6).
2. The total cross~sectional area of rectangular hoop.
reinforcement shall not be less than that required by
Equations (421~) and (421~5):
Ash 0.3 (shcfc4,h)(AIAch) -1] (421-4)
A$h = 0.09(shcfc4,h) (421~5)
3. Transverse reinforcement shall be provided by either
single or overlapping hoops. Crossties of the same bar
size and spacing as the hoops shall be permitted. Each
end of the crosstie shall engage a peripheral longitudinal
reinforcing bar. Consecutive crossties shall be alternated
end for end along the longitudinal reinforcement.
4. If the design strength of member core satisfies the
requirement of the design loading combinations including
earthquake effect, Equations (421~4) and (410-1) need not
be satisfied.
National Structural Code
4-97
5. If the thickness of the concrete outside the confining
transverse reinforcement exceeds 100 mm, additional
transverse reinforcement shall be provided at a spacing
not exceeding 300 mm. Concrete cover on the additional
reinforcement shall not exceed 100 mm.
6. Where the calculated point of contraflexure is not within
the middle half of the member clear height, provide
transverse reinforcement as specified in Sections
421.5.4.1, Items 1 through 3, over the full height of the
member.
421.5.4.2 Transverse reinforcemt:nt shall be spaced at a distu...lce
not exceeding (1) one-fourth of the minimum member
dimension, (2) six times the diameter of the longitudinal
reinforcement, and (3) Sx. as defined by Equation (421-6):
(421-6)
The value of Sx shall not exceed 150 mm and need not be taken ~
less than 100 mm. Anchor bolts set in the top of a column shall
be enclosed with ties as specified in Section 421.5.4.8.
421.5.4.3 Crossties or legs of overlapping hoops shall not be
spaced more than 350 mm on center in the direction
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis ofthe structural member.
421.5.4.4 Transverse reinforcement in amount specified in
Sections 421.5.4.1 through 421.5.4.3 shall be provided over a
length 10 from each joint face and on both sides of any section
where flexural yielding is likely to occur as a result of i~lastic
lateral displacements of the frame. The length to shall not be less
than (1) the depth of the member at the joint face or at the
section where flexural yielding is likely to occur, (2) one~sixth of
the clear span of the member, and (3) 450 mm.
421.5.4.5 Columns supporting reactions from discontinued stiff
members, such as walls, shall be provided with transverse
reinforcement as specified in Sections 421. 5.4.1 through
421.5.4.3 over their full height beneath the level at which the
discontinuity occurs if the factored axial compressive force in
these members, related to earthquake effect, exceeds At!'cliO.
Transverse reinforcement as required in Sections 421.5.4.1
through 421.5.4.3 shall extend into the discontinued member for
at least the development length of the largest longitudinal
reinfurcement in the column in accordance with Section 421.6.4.
If the lower end of the column terminates on a wall, transverse
reinforcement as required in Sections 421.5.4.1 through
421.5.4.3 shall extend into the wall for at least the development
length of the largest longitudinal bar in the column at the point
of terminatIon. If the column terminates on a footing or mat,
transverse reinforcement as required in Sections 421.5.4.1
through 421.5.4.3 shall extend at least 300 mm into the footing
or mat.
of the Philippines, Volume 1
 CONCERETE

421.5.4.6 Where transverse reinforcement, as specified in 421.6 JOINTS OF SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES
Sections 421.5.4.1 through 421.5.4.3, is not provided throughout
the full length of the column, the remainder of the column length 421.6.1 General requirements

shall contain spiral or hoop reinforcement with center-to-center

spacing not exceeding the smaller of six times the diameter of 421.6.1.1 Forces in longitudinal beam reinforcement at the

the longitudinal column bars or 150 mm. face shall be determine.<! by assuming that the

flexural tensile reinforcement is 1.25/y.

421.5.4.7 At any section where the design strength, lPn, of the

column is less than the sum of the shears Ve computed in 421.6.1.2 Strength of joint shall be governed by the !>nn,rnnri"f,

accordance with Sections 421.4.4.1 and 421.5.5.1 for all the strength reduction factors specified in Section 409.4.

beams framing into the column above the level under

consideration, transverse reinforcement as specified in Sections 421.6.1.3 Beam longitudinal reinforcement
terminated
421.5.4.1 through 421.5.4.3 shall be provided. For beams column shall be extended to the far face of the confined

framing into opposite sides of the column, the moment core and anchored in tension according to Section 421.6.4,

components may be assumed to be of opposite sign. For the in compression according to Section 412.

determination of the design strength, 4>Pn, of the column, these

moments may be assumed to result from the deformation of the 421.6.1.4 Where longitudinal beam reinforcement

frame in anyone principal axis. through a beam-column joint, the column dimension parallel

the .beam reinforcement shall not be less than 20 times

421.5.4.8 Ties at anchor bolts. Anchor bolts which are set in diameter of the largest longitudinal bar for
normal
the top of a column shall be provided with ties which enclose at concrete. For lightweight concrete, the dimension shall not

least four vertical column bars. Such ties shall be in accordance less than 26 times the bar diameter.

withSection 407.2.3, Item 3, shall be within 125 mm of the top

of the folumn, and shall consist of at least two 12 mm diameter 421.6.2 Transverse reinforcement

bars or three 10 rom diameter bars.

421.6.2.1 Transverse hoop reinforcement as specified in

421.5.5 Shear strength requirements 421.5.4 shall be provided within the joint, unless the joint

confined by structural members as specified

in
421.5.5.1 Design forces 421.6.2.2.

The design shear force V" shall be determined from 421.6.2.2 Within the depth of the shallowest framing mernoer"

consideration of the maximum forces that can be generated at transverse reinforcement equal to at least one half the
<UlI'UUl.lL'
the faces of the joints at each end of the member. These joint required by Section 421.5.4.1 shall be provided where mernbe:rs

forces shall be determined using the maximum probable moment frame into all four sides of the joint and where each member

strengths Mpr of the member associated with the range of width is at least three- fourths the column width. At these

factored axial loads on the member. The member shear need not locations, the spacing required in Section 421.5.4.2(2) shall be

exceed those determined from joint strengths based on the permitted to be increased to 150 rom.

probable moment strength Mpr of the transverse members

framing in the joint. In no case shall V" be less than the factored 421.6.2.3 Transverse reinforcement as required by Section

shear determined by analysis of the structure. 421.5.4 shall be provided through the joint to provide

confinement for longitudinal beam reinforcement outside the

421.5.5.2 Transverse reinforcement over the lengths 10 , identified column core if such confinement is not provided by a beam

in Section 421.5.4.4, shall be proportioned to resist shear framing into the joint.

assuming Vc 0 when both ofthe following conditions occur:

421.6.3 Shear strength

1. The earthquake-induced shear force, calculated in

accordance with Section 421.5.5.1, represents one-half or 421.6.3.1 The nominal shear strength of the joint shall not be

more of the maximum required shear strength within taken greater than the forces specified below for normal weight

those lengths; aggregate concrete.

2. The factored axial compressive force including

earthquake effects is less than AJ"flO. For joints confined on all four faces. . . . . .. 1.7 .fl:.AJ

For joints confined on three

faces or on two opposite faces 1.25.fl:.Aj

Forothers ......................... . LO.fl:.Aj

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
;A member that frames into a face is considered to provide
c~nfinement to the joint if at least three-fourths of the face of the
joint is covered by the framing member. A joint is considered to
be confined if such confining members frame into all faces of
thejoint.
421.6.3.2 For lightweight aggregate concrete, the nominal shear
strength of the joint shall not exceed three- fourths of the limits
for normal-weight aggregate concrete given in Section 421.6.3.1.
421.6.4 Development length for bars in tension
421.6.4.1 The development length I.u. for a bar with a standard
90-degree hook in normal weight lif~gregate concrete shall not be
less than the largest of 8d", 150 mll':, and the length required by
Equation G421-7):
(421-7)
fur bar sizes 10 mm through 36 rom diameter.
For lightweight aggregate concrete, the development length for a
bar with a standard 90-degree hook shall not be less than the
largest of 10d", 190 rom, and 1.25 t:mes that required by
Equation (421-7).
The 90-degree hook shall be located within the c('nfined core of
a column or of a boundary member.
421.6.4.2 For bar sizes 10 rom through 38 mm diameter, the
deVelopment length Id for a straight bar shall not be less than (1)
2.5 times the length required by Section 421.6.4.1 if the depth of
the concrete cast in one lift beneath the baf does not exceed 300
mm, and (2) 3.5 times the length required by'Section 421.6.4.1 if
the depth of the concrete cast in one lift beneath the bar exceeds
300 rom.
421.6.4.3 Straight bars terminated at a joint shall pass through
the confined core of a column or of a boundary member. Any
portion of the straight embedment length not within the confined
core shall be increased by a factor of 1.6.
421.6.4.4 If epoxy-coated reinforcement is used, the
development lengths in Sections 421.6.4.1 through Section
421.6.4.3 shall be multiplied by the applicable factor specified in
Section 412.3.4 or 412.6.3.6.
421.7 SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE
STRUCTURAL WALLS AND COUPLING BEAMS
421.7.1 Scope
The requirements of Section 421.7 apply to special reinforced
concrete structural walls and coupling beams serving as part of
the earthquake force resisting system.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
499
421.7.2 Reinforcement
421.7.2.1 The distributed web reinforcement ratios, PI' and PIl'
for structural walls shall not be less than 0.0025, except if the
design shear force does not exceed (l112)A",.f1:" the minimum
reinforcement for structural walls shall be permitted to be
reduced to that required in Section 414.3. Reinforcement spacing
each way in structural walls shall not exceed 450 mm.
Reinforcement provided for shear strength shall be continuous
and shall be distributed across the shear plane.
421.7.2.2 At least two curtains of reinforcement shall be used in
a wall if the in-plane factored shear force assigned to the wall
exceeds (I/6)Acv.[1;.
When Vu in the plane of the all exceeds 0.08A""f1:"
horizontal reinforcement terminating at the edges of shear walls
shall have a standard hook engaging the edge reinforcement, or
the edge reinforcement shall be enclosed in "U" stirrups having
the same size and spacing as, and spliced to, the horizontal
reinforcement.
421.7.2.3 All continuous reinforcement in structural walls shall
be anchored or spliced in accordance with the provisions for
reinforcement in tension in Section 421.6.4.
421.7.3 Design forces
The design shear force Vu shall be obtained from the lateral load
analysis in accordance with the factored load combinations
specified in Section 409.3 and as modified in Section 203.3.1.
~
421.7.4 Shear strength
421.7.4.1 Nominal shear strength v,. of structural walls shall not
exceed
v,. = A"I'[ acfll12) ff + P,J; ] (421-8)
where the coefficient a" is 3.0 for h..I1". S; 1.5, is 2.0 for h,.ll,.. ~
2.0, and varies linearly between 3.0 and 2.0 for 11."11,,, between
1.5 and 2.0.
421.7.4.2 In Section 421. 7.4.1, the value of ratio h..lI,.. used
for determining Va for segments of a wall shall be the larger of
the ratios for the entire wall and the segment ofwall considered.
421.7.4.3 Walls shall have distributed shear reinforcement
providing resistance in two orthogonal directions in the plane of
the wall. If the ratio h"lI,.. does not exceed 2.0, reinforcement
ratio p. shall not be less than reinforcement ratio p".
421.7.4.4 Nominal shear strength of all wall piers sharing a
common lateral force shall not be assumed to exceed
 CONCRETE
(2/3)Acv J7':, where Acv is the total cross-sectional area, and the
nominal shear strength of anyone of the individual wall piers
shall not be assumed to exceed (5/6)Aq>J7':, where Aq> is the
cross-sectional area of the pier considered.
421.7.4.5 Nominal shear strength of horiwntal wall segments
and coupling beams shall be assumed not to exceed
(5/6)Aq>J7':, where Aq> is the cross-sectional area of a
horizontal wall segment or coupling beam.
421.7.5 Design for flexural and axial loads
421.7.5.1 Structural walls and portions of such walls subject to
combined flexural and axial loads shall be designed in
accordance with Sections 410.3 and 410.4 except that Section
410.4.6 and the nonlinear strain requirements of Section 410.3.2
shall not apply. Concrete and developed longitudinal rein
forcement within effective flange widths, boundary elements,
and the wall web shall be considered effective. The effects of
openings shall be considered.
421.7.5.2 Unless a more detailed analysis is performed,
effectiv~ flange widths of flanged sections shall extend from the
face of the web a distance equal to the smaller of one-half the
distance to an adjacent wall web and 25 percent of the total wall
height.
421.7.6 Boundary elements ofspecial reinforced
concrete structural walls
421.7.6.1 The need for special boundary elements at the edges
of structural walls shall be evaluated in accordance with Section
421.7.6.2 or 421.7.6.3. The requirements of Sections 421.7.6.4
and 421.7.6.5 also shall be satisfied.
421.7.6.2 This section applies to walls or wall piers that are
effectively continuous from the base of structure to top of wall
and designed to have a single critical section for flexure and
axial loads. Walls not satisfying these requirements shall be
designed by Section 421. 7.6.3.
1. Compression zones shall be reinforced with special
boundary elements where:
l (421-9)
c 2: w
600 (0. I h.,.)
reinforcement shall satisfy Sections 421.5.4.1(3
The quantity ~ Ihw :n Equation (421-9) shall not be taken less
than 0.007.
2. Where special boundary elements are required by Section
421.7.6.2(1), the special boundary element reinforcement
shall extend vertically from the critical section a distance
not less than the larger of lw or M,,/(4V,J.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
42.1.7.6.3 Structural walls not designed to the provisions
Section 421.7.6.2 shall have special boundary elements
boundaries and edges around openings of structural walls
the maximum extreme fiber compressive stress, COIreSDOIldin
to factored forces including earthquake effect, exceeds
The special boundary element shall be permitted to be
tinued where the calculated compressive stress is less
O.15.fc' Stresses shall be calculated for the factored forces
a linearly elastic model and gross section properties. For
with flanges, an effective flange width as defined
421.7.5.2 shall be used.
421.7.6.4 Where special boundary elements are required
Section 421.7.6.2 or 421. 7.6.3, the following shall be satisfied:
1. The boundary element shall extend horizontally from
extreme compression fiber a distance not less than
larger of c - O. II.. and ell;
2. In flanged sections, the boundary element shall .
the effective flange width in compression and shall
at least 300 mm into the web;
3. Special boundary element transverse reinforcement
satisfy the requirements of Sections 421.5.4.1
421.5.4.3, except Equation (421-4) need not be satisfied;
Special boundary element transverse reinforcement at
wall base shall extend into the support at least
development length of the largest longitudinal
ment in the special boundary element unless the
boundary element terminates on a footing or mat,
special boundary element transverse reinforcement
extend at least 300 mm into the footing or mat;
5. Horizontal reinforcement in the wall web shall
anchored to develop the specified yield strength h.
the confined core of the boundary element;
6. Mechanical splices of longitudinal reinforcement
boundary elements shall conform to Section 421.3.6.1.
Welded splices of longitudinal reinforcement of UUI.U1\.IIU J
elements shall conform to Section 421.3.6.1.1.
421.7.6.5 Where special boundary elements are not required
Section 421.7.6.2 or 421. 7.6.3, the following shall be satisfied:
1. If the longitudinal reinforcement ratio at the
boundary is greater than 2.81.1;. boundary tr"'n~'l,..r""f
421.5.4.3, and 421.7.6.4(1). The maximum 10n:gituldinaJ:
spacing of transverse reinforcement in the boundary
not exceed 200 mm;
2. Except when V" in the plane of the wall is less
(1I12}AcvJ7':, horizontal reinforcement terminating
the edges of structural walls without boundary
 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
shall have a standard hook engaging the edge
reinforcement or the edge reinforcement shall be enclosed
in U-stirrups having the same size and spacing as, and
spliced to, the horizontal reinforcement.
:421.7.6.6 Mechanical and welded splices of longitudinal
rehlforcement of boundary elements shall conform to Sections
421.3.6.
421.7.7 Coupling beams
421.7.7.1 Coupling beams with aspect ratio I" Id~.4, shall
satisfy the requirements of Section 421.4. The provisions of
Sections 421.4.1.3 and 421.4.1.4(1) shall not be required if it can
be shown by analysis that the beam has adequate lateral stability.
421.7.7.2 Coupling beams with aspect ratio, 1"ld < 4, shall be
permitted to be reinforced with two intersecting groups of
diagonally placed bars symmetrical about the midspan.
421.7.7.3 Coupling beams with aspect ratio, 1"ld < 2, and with
factored shear force V,.. exceeding (1/3)Jl': b..d shall be
reinforced with two intersecting groups of diagonally placed
bars symmetrical about the midspan, unless it can be shown that
loss of stiffuess and strength of the coupling beams will not
impair the vertical load carrying capacity of the structure, or the
egress from the structure, or the integrity of non structural com
ponents and their connections to the structure.
421.7.7.4 Coupling beams reinforced with two intersecting
groups of diagonally placed bars symmetrical about the midspan
shall satisfy the following:
1. Each group of diagonally placed bars shall consist of a
minimum of four bars assembled in a core having sides
measured to the outside of transverse reinforcement no
smaller than bw 12 perpendiCUlar to the plane of the beam
and b... 15 in the plane of the beam and perpendicular to
the diagonal bars;
2. The nominal shear strength, V" shall be determined
by
Vn = 1Avd./v sin a $ (5/6) ff b,.d (421-10)
EXCEPTION:
The design of coupling beams need not comply with the
requirements for diagonal reinforcement if it can be shown that
fail of the coupling beams will not impair the vertical load
carrying capacity of the structure, the egress from the structure,
or the integrity of nons/ructural components and connections.
The analysis shall take into account the effects if the failure of
the coupling beams (]fI foundation rota/iou and overall system
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4101
displacements. Design strength of coupling beams assumed to
be part of the seismic force resisting system shall not be
reduced below the values otherwise required
3. Each group of diagonally placed bars shall be enclosed in
transverse reinforcement satisfying Sections 421.5.4.1
through 421.5.4.3. For the purpose of computing Ag for
use in Equations (410-6) and (421-4), the minimum
concrete cover as required in Section 407.8 shall be
assumed on all four sides of each group of diagonally
placed reinforcing bars;
4. The diagonally placed bars shall be developed for tension
in the wall;
5. The diagonally placed bars shall be considered to
contribute to nominal flexural strength of the coupling
beam;
6. Reinforcement parallel and transverse to the longitudinal
axis shall be provided and, as a minimum, shall conform
to Sections 412.8.9 and 412.8.10.
421.7.8 Construction joints
All construction joints in structural walls shall conform to
Section 406.4 and contact surfaces shall be roughened as in
Section 411.8.9.
421.7.9 Discontinuous walls
Columns supporting discontinuous structural walls shall be
reinforced in accordance with Section 421.5.4.5. '
421.8 STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGMS AND TRUSSES
421.8.1 Scope
Floor and roof slabs acting as structural diaphragms to transmit
design actions induced by earthquake ground motions shall be
designed in accordance with this Section 421.8. This Section
also applies to struts, ties, chords, and collector elements that
transmit forces induced by earthquakes, as well as trusses
serving as parts of the earthquake force-resisting systems.
421.8.2 Cast-in-place composite topping slab diaphragms
A composite-topping slab cast in place on a precast floor or roof
shall be permitted to be used as a structural diaphragm provided
the topping slab is reinforced and its connections are
proportioned and detailed to provide for a complete transfer of
forces to chords, collector elements, and the lateral-force
resisting system. The surface of the previously hardened
concrete on which the topping slab is placed shall be clean, free
oflaitance, and intentionally roughened.
 CONCRETE
421.8.3 Cast-in-place topping slab diaphragms
A cast-in-place noncomposite topping on a precast floor or roof
shall be permitted to serve as a structural diaphragm, provided
the cast-in-place topping acting alone is proportioned and
detailed to resist the design forces.
421.8.4 Minimum tbickness of diaphragms
Concrete slabs and composite topping slabs serving as structural
diaphragms used to transmit earthquake forces shall not be less
than 50 mm thick. Topping slabs placed over precast floor or
roof elements, acting as structural diaphragms and not relying on
composite action with the precast elements to resist the design
seismic forces, shall have thickness not less than 65 mm.
421.8.5 Reinforcement
421.8.5.1 The minimum reinforcement ratio for structural
diaphragms shall be in conformance with Section 407.13.
Reinforcement spacing each way in nonposttensioned floor or
roof systems shall not exceed 450 mm. Where welded wire
fabric is used as the distributed reinforcement to resist shear in
topping slabs placed over precast floor and roof elements, the
wires parallel to the span of the precast elements shall be spaced
not less than 250 mm on center. Reinforcement provided for
shear strength shall be continuous and shall be distributed
uniformly across the shear plane.
421.8.5.2 Bonded prestressing tendons used as primary
reinforcement in diaphragm chords or collectors shall be
proportioned such that the stress due to design seismic forces
does not exceed 420 :MFa. Pre-compression from unbonded
tendons shall be permitted to resist diaphragm design forces if a
complete load path is provided.
421.8.5.3 Structural truss elements, struts, ties, diaphragm
chords, and collector elements with compressive stresses
exceeding 0.2f" at any section shall have transverse
reinforcement, as in Sections 421.5.4.1 through 421.5.4.3, over
the length of the element. The special transverse reinforcement
is allowed to be discontinued at a section where the calculated
compressive strength is less than 0.15f". Stresses shall be
calculated for the factored forces using a linearly elastic model
and gross-section properties ofthe elements considered.
421.8.5.4 All continuous reinforcement in diaphragms, trusses,
struts, ties, chords, and collector elements shall be anchored or
spliced in accordance with the provisions for reinforcement
tension as specified in Section 421.6.4.
421.8.5.5 Type 2 splices are required where mechanical splices
are used to transfer forces between the diaphragm and the
vertical components of the lateral-force-resisting system.
421.8.6 Design forces
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
4-102
The seismic design forces for structural diaphragms shall be
obtained from the lateral load analysis in accordance with the
design load combinations.
421.8.7 Shear strength
421.8.7.1 Nominal shear strength Vn of
diaphragms shall not exceed:
(421-11)
421.8.7.2 Nominal shear strength Vn of cast-in-place composite-
topping slab diaphragms and cast-in-place noncomposite .
slab diaphragms on a precast floor or roof shall not exceed
shear force
(421-12)
where A"" is based on the thickness of the topping slab. The,
required web reinforcement shall be distributed uniformly in
both directions.
421.8.7.3 Nominal shear strength shall not exceed
(213)A""Jl': where A"" is the gross cross-sectional area of the
diaphragm.
421.8.8 Boundary elements of structural diaphragms
421.8.8.1 Boundary elements of structural diaphragms shall be
proportioned to resist the sum of the factored axial forces acting
in the plane of the diaphragm and the force obtained from
dividing the factored moment at the section by the distance
between the boundary elements of the diaphragm at that section.
421.8.8.2 Splices of tensile reinforcement in the chords and .
collector elements of diaphragms shall develop the yield strength
of the reinforcement. Mechanical and welded splices shall
conform to Sections 421.3.6.
421.8.8.3 Reinforcement for chords and collectors at splices and
anchorage zones shall have either:
1. A minimum spacing of three longitudinal bar diameters,
but not less than 40 mm, and a minimum concrete cover
of two and one-half longitudinal bar diameters, but not
less than 50 mm; or
2. Transverse reinforcement as required by Section
411.6.5.3, except as required in Section 421.8.5.3.
421.8.9 Construction joints
All construction joints in diaphragms shall conform to Section
406.4 and contact surfaces shall be roughened as in
Section 411.8.9.
 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
4~1.9 FOUNDATIONS
421.9.1 Scope
'4Z1.9.1.1 Foundations resisting earthquake~induced forces or
transferring earthquake-induced forces between structure and
gtbund shall comply with Section 421.9 and other applicable
code provisions.
421.9.1.2 The provisions in Section 421.9 for piles, drilled piers,
caissons, and slabs on grade shall supplement other applicable
code design and construction criteria. See Section& 401.2.5 and
401.2.6.
421.9.2 Footings, foundation mats, and pile caps
421.9.2.1 Longitudinal reinforcement of columns and structural
walls resisting forces induced by earthquake effects shall extend
into the footing, mat, or pile cap, and shall be fully developed for
tension at the interface.
.4.21.9.2.2 Columns designed assuming fixed-end conditions at
thefoundation shall comply with Section 421.9.2.1 and, ifhooks
are required, longitudinal reinforcement resisting flexure shall
have 90-degree hooks near the bottom of the foundation with the
free end of the bars oriented towards the center ofthe column.
421.9.2.3 Columns or boundary elements of special reinforced
concrete structural walls that have an edge within one-half the
footing depth from an edge of the' footing shall have transverse
reinforcement in accordance with Section 421.5.4 provided
below the top of the footing. This reinforcement shall extend
into the footing a distance no less than the smaller of the depth
of the footing, mat, or pile cap, or the development length in
tension of the longitudinal reinforcement.
421.9.2.4 Where earthquake effects create uplift forces in
boundary elements of special reinforced concrete structural walls
or columns, flexural reinforcement shall be provided in the top
of the footing, mat or pile cap to resist the design load
combinations, and shall not be less than required by Section
410.6.
421.9.2.5 See Section 422. I 1 for use of plain concrete In
footings and basement walls.
421.9.3 Grade beams and slabs on grade
421.9.3.1 Grade beams designed to act as horizontal ties
between pile caps or footings shall have continuous longitudinal
reinforcement that shall be developed within or beyond the
supported column or anchored within the pile cap or footing at
all discontinuities,
421.9.3.2 Grade beams designed to act as horizontal ties
between pile caps or footings shall be proportioned such that the
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-103
smallest cross-sectional dimension shall be equal to or greater
than the clear spacing between connected columns divided by
20, but need not be greater than 450 mrn. Closed ties shall be
provided at a spacing not to exceed the lesser of one-half the
smallest orthogonal cross-sectional dimension or 300 mm
421.9.3.3 Grade beams and beams that are part of a mat
foundation subjected to flexure from columns that are part of the
lateral-force-resisting system shall conform to Section 421.4.
421.9.3.4 Slabs on grade that resist seismic forces from walls or
columns that are part of the lateral-force-resisting system shall
be designed as structural diaphragms in accordance with Section
421.8. The design drawings shall clearly state that the slab on
grade is a structural diaphragm and part of the lateral-force
resisting system.
421.9.4 Piles, piers, and caissons
421.9.4.1 Provisions of Section 421,9.4 shall apply to concrete
piles, piers, and caissons supporting structures designed for
earthquake resistance .
421.9.4.2 Piles, piers, or caissons resisting tension loads shall
have continuous longitudinal reinforcement over the length
resisting design tension forces, The longitudinal reinforcement
shall be detailed to transfer tension forces within the pile cap to
supported structural members,
421.9.4.3 Where tension forces induced by earthquake effects
are transferred between pile cap or mat foundation and precast
pile by reinforcing bars grouted or post-installed in the top of the
pile, the grouting system shall have been demonstrated bytest to
develop at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength of the
bar,
421.9.4.4 Piles, piers, or caissons shall have transverse
reinforcement in accordance with Section 421.5,4 at the
following locations:
1. At the top of the member for at least 5 times the member
cross-sectional dimension. but not less than 2 m below the
bottom ofthe pile cap;
2. For the portion of piles in soil that is not capable of
providing lateral support, or in air and water, along the
entire unsupported length plus the length required in
Section 421.9.4.4(1),
421.9.4.5 For precast concrete driven piles, the length of
transverse reinforcement provided shall be sufficient to account
for potential variations in the elevation in pile tips.
421.9.4.6 Concrete piles, piers, or caissons in foundations
supporting one- and two-story stud bearing wall construction are
exempt from the transverse reinforcement requirements of
 CONCRETE
Sections 421.9.4.4 and 421.9.4.5.
421.9.4.7 Pile caps incorporating batter piles shall be
designed to resist the full compressive strength of the batter piles
acting as short columns. The slenderness effects of batter piles
shall be considered for the portion of the piles in soil that is not
capable of providing lateral support, or in air or water.
421.10 FRAME MEMBERS NOT PROPORTIONED
TO RESIST FORCES INDUCED BY EARTHQUAKE
MOTIONS
421.10.1 Frame members assumed not to contribute to lateral
resistance shall be detailed according to Section 421.10.2 or
421.10.3 depending on the magnitude of moments induced in
those members if subjected to the design displacement, AM. If
effects of design displacements are not explicitly checked, it
shall be permitted to apply the requirements of Section 421.10.3.
421.10.2 When the induced moments and shears under design
displacements of Section 421.1 0.1 combined with the factored
gravity moments and shears do not exceed the design moment
and shear strength of the frame member, the conditions of
Sections 421.10.2.1, 421.10.2.2, and 421.10.2.3 shall be
satisfied. For this purpose, the load combinations (lAD + 1.4L)
and O.9D shall be used.
421.10.2.1 Members with factored gravity axial forces not
. exceedingA./'tflO shall satisfy Section 421.4.2.1. Stirrups shall
be spaced not more than d/2 throughout the length of the
member.
421.10.2.2 Members with factored gravity axial forces
exceeding A./'c 110, but not exceeding O.3P0> shall satisfy
Sections 421.5.3, 421.5.4.1(3), and 421.5.5. Design shear
strength shall not be less than the shear associated with the
less than
development of nominal moment strengths of the member at
each end of the clear span. The maximum longitudinal spacing
ofties shall be So for the full column height. The spacing So shall
not be more than (I) six diameters of the smallest longitudinal
bar enclosed, (2) 16 tie-bar diameters, (3) one-half the least
cross-sectional dimension of the column, and (4) 150 mm,
whichever is smaller.
421.10.2.3 Members with factored gravity axial forces
exceeding 0.35Po shall satisfy Section 421.10.2.2 and the
amount oftransverse reinforcement provided shall be one-half of
that required by Section 421.5.4.1 but shall not exceed a spacing
So for the full height ofthe column.
421.10.3 If the induced moment or shear under design
displacements of Section 421.10.1 exceeds the design moment
or shear strength of the frame member, or if induced moments
are not calculated, the conditions of Sections 421.10.3.1,
421.10.3.2, and 421.10.3.3 shall be satisfied.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
421.10.3.1 Materials shall satisfy Sections 421.3.4 and 421.3.
Mechanical splices shall satisfy Section 421.3 .6.1.2 and
splices shall satisfy Section 421.3.6. 1. 1.
421.10.3.2 Members with factored gravity axial forces
exceeding A./'.110 shall satisfy Sections 421.4.2.1 and 421
Stirrups shall be spaced at not more than d/2 throughout
length of the member.
421.10.3.3 Members with factored gravity axial
exceeding A./'.110 shall satisfy Sections 421.5.4, 421.5.5,
421.6.2.1.
421.10.4 Ties at anchor bolts. Anchor bolts set in the top of a
column shall be enclosed with ties as specified in Section
421.5.4.8.
421.11 REQUIREMENTS FOR INTERMEDIATE
MOMENT FRAMES, SEISMIC ZONE 2.
421.11.1 The requirements of Section 421.11 apply to
intermediate moment frames in addition to those of Sections 401
through 418.
421.11.2 Reinforcement details in a frame member shall satisfy
Section 421.11.4 if the factored compressive axial load for the
member does not exceed A./'.110. If the factored compressive
axi~ load is larger, frame reinforcement details shall satisfy
Sectlon 421.11.5 unless the member has spiral reinforcement
according to Equation (410-6). Ifa two-way slab system
be.ams is treated as part of a frame resisting earthquake effect,
reinforcement details in any span resisting moments caused by
lateral force shall satisfy Section 421.11.6.
421.11.3 Design shear strength of beams, columns. And two
way slabs, resisting earthquake effect shall not be
either:
1. The sum of the shear associated with development of
nominal moment strengths of the member at each
retrained end of the clear span and the shear calculated fur
factored gravity loads;
2. The maximum shear obtained from design load
combinations that include earthquake effect E, with E
assumed to be twice that prescribed in Section 208.
421.11.4 Beams
421.11.4.1 The positive moment strength at the face of the joint
shall be not less than one-third the negative' moment strength
provided at that face of the joint. Neither the negative nor the
positive moment strength at any section along the length of the
member shall be less than one-fifth the maximum moment
 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN 4-105

strength provided at the face of either joint. in Section 413.3.1.

~ii11.4.2 At both ends of the member, stirrups shall be
provided over lengths equal to twice the member depth
measured from the face of the supporting member toward
fnjdspan. The first stirrup shall be located at not more than 50
rdtri from the face of the supporting member. Maximum stirrup
spacing shall not exceed:
1. d/4;
2. Eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar
enclosed;
3. Twenty four times the diameter ofthe stirrup bar; and
4. 300mm.
421.11.4.3 Stirrups shall be placed at not more than d/2
throughout the length of the member.
421.11.6.2 The fraction, defined by Equation (413-1), of
moment M$ shall be resisted by reinforcement placed within the
effective width in Section 413.6.3.2.
421.11.6.3 Not less than one-half of the reinforcement in the
column strip at support shall be placed within the effective slab
width specified in Section 413.6.3.2.
421.11.6.4 Not less than one-fourth of the top reinforcement at
the support in the column strip shall be continuous throughout
the span.
421.11.6.5 Continuous bottom reinforcement in the column strip
shall be not less than one-third of the top reinforcement at the
support in the column strip.

421.11.5 Columns 421.11.6.6 Not less than one-half of all bottom reinforcement at
midspan shall be continuous and shall develop its yield strength
421.11.5.1 Maximum tie spacing shall not exceed So over a at face of support as defined in Section 413.7.2.5.
length 10 measured from the joint face. Spacing So shall not
exceed the smallest of 421.11.6.7 At discontinuous edges of the slab all top and bottom
reinforcement at support shall be developed at the face of
1. Eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar support as defined in Section 413.7.2.5.
enclosed;
2. 24 times the diameter ofthe tie bar;
3. One-half of the smallest cross sectional dimension of the
frame member; and
4. 300 mm

Length 10 shall not be less than the largest of:

LOne-sixth of the clear span of the member;

2. Maximum cross-sectional dimension of the member; and
3. 450mm.

421.11.5.2 The first tie shall be located at not more than st/2
from the joint face.

421.11.5.3 Joint reinforcement shall conform to Section

411.12.2.

421.11.5.4 Tie spacing shall not exceed twice the spa- cing So.

421.11.5.5 Column lateral ties shall be as specified in Section

107.2.3. Anchor bolts set in the top of a column shall be
enclosed with ties as specified in Section 421.5.4.8.

421.11.6 Two-way slabs without beams

421.11.6.1 Factored slab moment at support related to

earthquake effect shall be determined for load combinations
defined by Equations (409-2) and (409-3). All reinforcement
provided to resist M s, the portion of slab moment balanced by
support moment shall be placed within the column strip defined

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 CONCRETE

SECTION 422 - STRUCTURAL PLAIN 422.2.1.2 Design and construction of soil-supported slabs,
as sidewalks and slabs on grade, shall not be governed by
CONCRETE code unless they transmit vertical loads from other parts of
structure to the soil.
422.1 NOTATION
422.2.2 For special structures, such as arches,
Ag = gross area of section, mm 2
2 utility structures, gravity walls, and shielding walls, nrrnnc""
Al =loaded area, mm
ofthis section shall govern where applicable.
A2 = the area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a
pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge contained wholly
within the support and having for its upper base the
loaded area, arid having side slopes of I vertical to 2 422.3 LIMITATIONS
horizontal, mm2
b = width of member, mm 422.3.1 Provisions of Section 422 shall apply for design
bo = perimeter ofcritical section for shear in footings, nun structural plain concrete members defined as either um:eiljlfol'CC
B" = nominal bearing load
or containing less reinforcement than the minimum
Pc: specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa. See specified in this code for reinforced concrete. See Section 402:
Section 405.
Ffc = square root of specified compressive strength of
422.3.2 Use of structural plain concrete shall be limited to:

concrete, MPa 1. Members that are continuously supported by soil

= average splitting tensile strength of lightweight supported by other structural members capable
aggregate concrete, MPa. See Sections 405.2.4 and providing continuous vertical support;
405.2.5.
h f = overall thickness of member, mm
2. Members for which arch action provides ~~,~~'""'''.';r
'< vertical distance between supports, mm under all conditions of loading; or
AI" = nominal moment strength at section
Mil = factored moment at section 3. Walls and pedestals. See Sections 422.7 and 422.9.
1'" = nominal strength of cross section subject to use of structural plain concrete columns shall
compression permitted.
P nw nominal axial load strength of wall designed by Section
422.7.5 422.3.3 Section 422 shall not govern design and installation
1'" = factored axial load at given eccentricity cast-in-place concrete piles and piers embedded in ground.
S = elastic section modulus of section
r:, = nominal shear strength at section 422.3.4 Minimum strength. Specified compressive strength
I'" = shear stress due to factored shear force at section. plain concrete to be used for structural purposes shall be not
l'lI factored shear force at section than 17 MPa.
Be ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or
reaction area 422.3.5 Seismic Zones 2 and 4. Plain concrete shall not be
Q> = strength reduction factor. See Section 409.4.5 in Seismic Zone 2 or 4 except where specifically permitted
Section 422.11.3.

422.2 SCOPE
422.2.1 Section 422 provides minimum requirements for design
and construction of structural plain concrete members (cast-in
place or precast) except as specified in Sections 422.2.1.1 and
422.2.1.2.
EXCEPTION:
422.4 JOINTS
422.4.1 Contraction or isolation joints shall be provided
divide structural plain concrete members into t1
discontinuous elements. The size of each element shall limit
control excessive buildup of internal stresses caused by
to movements from creep. shrinkage and temperature effects.

The design is not required nhen the minimum foundation for
stud walls is in accordance with I.able 305-1.
422.2.1.1 Structural plain concrete basement walls shall be
exempted from the requirements for special exposure conditions
of Section 404.3.1.
422.4.2 In determining the number and location of contraction
isolation joints, consideration shall be given to: influence
climatic conditions; selection and proportioning of m~ttel[1al
mixing, placing and curing of concrete; degree of restraint
movement; stresses due to loads to which an element is subj
and construction techniques.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 STRUCTURAL PLAIN CONCRETE 4-107

~~~.5 DESIGN MEmOD where P" is fact.ored load and Pn is nominal compression
strength computed by:
~22;5.1 Structural plain concrete members shall be designed for
~dequate strength in accordance with the code, using load
. f~ors and design strength. (422-4)

422.5.2 Factored loads and forces shall be in combinations as in

Section 409.3. where Al is the loaded area.

422.5.3 Where required strength exceeds design strength, 422.6.3 Members subject to combined flexure and axial load in
reinforcement shall be provided and the member designed as a compression shall be proportioned such that on the compression
reinforced concrete member in accordance with appropriate face:
design requirements of the code.
(422-5)
422.5.4 Strength design of structural plain concrete members for
flexure and axial loads shall be based on a linear stress-strain and on the tension face:
r'eIationship in both tension and compression.
(422-6)
422.5.5 Tensile strength of concrete shall be permitted to be
considered in design of plain concrete members when provisions
422.6.4 Design of rectangular cross sections subject to shear
ofSection 422.4 have been followed.
shall be based on:
422.5.6 No strength shall be assigned to steel reinforcement that
(422-7)
may be present.

422.5.7 Tension shall not be transmitted through outside edges, where Vu is factored shear and Vn is nominal shear strength
construction joints, contraction joints, or isolation joints of an computed by:
iildividual plain concrete element No flexural continuity due to
(ension shall be assumed between adjacent structural plain (422-8)
Concrete elements.
for beam action and by:
422.5.8 When computing strength in flexure, combined flexure
and axial load, and shear, the entire cross section of a member
shall be considered in design, except for concrete cast against (422-9)
Soil where overall thickness h shall be taken as 50 mm less than
actual thickness.
for two-way action but not greater than 2/9 ..[l'; bJr.

422.6 STRENGTH DESIGN 422.6.5 Design of bearing areas subject to compression shall be
based on
422.6.1 Design of cross sections subject to flexure shall be
(422-10)
based on:

(422-1) where P u is factored bearing load and Bn is the nominal bearing

strength ofloaded area Al computed by:
where Mil is factored moment and Mn is nominal moment
~ength computed by: En = 0.8:if'cA] (422-11)
except when the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the
loaded area, design bearing strength on the loaded area shall be
Mn = (51I2).[J': s (422-2)
multiplied by ~ Az I A1 but not more than 2.
S is the elastic section modulus ofthe cross section.
. 422.6.6 Lightweight concrete

Equations for nominal flexural and shear strengths apply for

normal weight concrete; for lightweight aggregate concrete, one
(422-3) ofthe following modifications shall apply:

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

---- -~~- ~--...,...,-.- -------,-

-
~-~ ~- ~~ --~-- - -~~---~~-~~
 CONCRETE
L When 1<1 is specified and concrete is proportioned in
accordance with Section 405.3,1<1/6.7 shall be substi
tuted for (I112)..[1': but the value of 1<1/6.7 shall not
exceed (l1l2)..[1': ;
2. When 1<1 is not specified, the value of (1/12)..[1': shall
be multiplied by 0.75 for all-lightweight concrete and by
0.85 for sand-lightweight concrete. Linear interpolation
shall be permitted when partial sand replacement is used.
422.6.6.1 Provisions of Section 422.6 apply to normal weight
concrete. When lightweight aggregate concrete is used, one of
the following modifications shall apply:
1. When 1<1 is specified and concrete is proportioned in
accordance with Section 405.3, equations that include
(1112)..[1': shall be modified by substituting 1.,/6.7 for
(1/12)..[1': wherever it appears in Section 422., but the
value oflctl6.7 shall not exceed (1112)..[1':;
2. When 1<1 is not specified, all values of (1112)..[1': in
Section 422.6 shall be multiplied by 0.75 for all
lightweight concrete, and 0.85 for sand-lightweight
concrete. Linear interpolation shall be permitted when
partial sand replacement is used.
422.7 WALLS
422.7.1 Structural plain concrete walls shall be continuously
supported by soil, footings, foundation walls, grade beams or
other structUral members capable of providing continuous
vertical support.
422.7.2 Structural plain concrete walls shall be designed for
vertical, lateral and other loads to which they are subjected.
422.7.3 Structural plain concrete walls shall be designed for an
eccentricity corresponding to the maximum moment that can
accompany the axial load but not less than O.10h. lfthe resultant
of all factored loads is located within the middle- third of the
overall wall thickness, the design shall be in accordance with
Section 422.6.3 or 422.7.5. Otherwise, walls shall be designed in
accordance with Section 422.6.3.
422.7.4 Design for shear shall be in accordance with Section
422.6.4.
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
422.7.5 Empirical design method
422.7.5.1 Structural plain concrete walls of solid rec1tan~~la
cross section shall be permitted to be designed by .....'l'... 'O<JlVJ
(422-12) if the resultant of aU factored loads is located within
middle-third of the overall thickness of wall.
422.7.5.2 Design of walls subject to axial loads in ~t)ITlm'PQ'''t"\~
shall be based on:
where Pu is the factored axial load and P"",is nominal axial
strength computed by
422.7.6 Limitations
422.7.6.1 Unless demonstrated by a detailed analysis, horizoltltal
length of wall to be considered effective for each
concentrated load shall not exceed center-to-center
between loads, nor width of bearing plus four times the
thickness.
422.7.6.2 Except as provided for in Section 422. 7.6.3, thl(~kflieSSl
of bearing walls shall not be less than 1124 the uns:UPI)of1ted"
height or length, whichever is shorter, nor less than 140 mm.
422.7.6.3 Thickness of exterior basement walls and tOlmdati!)n'~11
walls shall be not less than 190 mm.
422.7.6.4 Walls shall be braced against lateral translation. See
Sections 422.4 and 422.5.7.
422.7.6.5 Not less than two 16 mm diameter bars shall be
provided around all window and door openings. Such bars shall
extend at least 600 mm beyond the corners of openings.
422.8 FOOTINGS
422.8.1 Structural plain concrete footings shall be designed for
factored loads and induced reactions in accordance with
appropriate design requirements of this Chapter and as provided
in Sections 422.8.2 through 422.8.8.
422.8.2 Base area of footing shall be determined from
unfactored forces and moments transmitted by footing to soil .
and permissible soil pressure selected through principles of soil
mechanics.
 STRUCTURAL PLAIN CONCRETE 4-109

422.8.3 Plain concrete shall not be used for footings on piles. 422.9.2 Ratio of unsupported height to average least lateral
dimension of plain concrete pedestals shall not exceed 3.
422.8.4 Thickness of structural plain concrete footings shall be
not less than 200 nun. See Section 422.5.8. 422.9.3 Maximum factored axial load applied to plain concrete
pedestals shall not exceed design bearing strength given in
422.8.5 Maximum factored moment shall be computed at critical Section 422.6.5.
sections located as follows:
1. At the face of the column, pedestal or wall, for footing
422.10 PRECAST MEMBERS
supporting a concrete column. pedestal or wall;
422.10.1 Design of precast plain concrete members shall
2. Halfway between center and face of the wall, for footing
consider all loading conditions from initial fabrication to
supporting a masonry wall;
completion of the structure, including form removal, storage.
transportation and erection.
3. Halfway between face of column and edge of steel base
plate, for footing supporting a column with steel base
422.10.2 Limitations of Section 422.3 apply to precast members
plate.
of plain concrete not only to the final condition but also during
fabrication, transportation and erection.
422.8.6 Shear in plain concrete footing
422.10.3 Precast members shall be connected securely to
422.8.6.1 Maximum factored shear shall be computed in
transfer all lateral forces into a structural system capabTe of
accordance with Section 422.8.6.2, with location of critical
resisting such forces.
section measured at face of column, pedestal or wall for footing
supporting a column, pedestal or wall. For footing supporting a
422.10.4 Precast members shall be adequately braced and
column with steel base plates, the critical section shall be
supported during erection to ensure proper alignment and
measured at location defined in Section 422.8.5 (3).
structural integrity until permanent connections are completed.
422.8.6.2 Shear strength of structural plain concrete footings in
the vicinity of concentrated loads or reactions shall be governed
by the more severe of two conditions: 422.11 PLAIN CONCRETE IN EARTHQUAKE
RESISTING STRUCTURES
1. Beam action for footing, with a critical section extending
in a plane across the entire footing width and located at a 422.11.1 General. The design and construction of plain cQncrete
distance h from face ofconcentrated load or reaction area. components that resist seismic forces shall conform to the
For this condition, the footing shall be designed in requirements of Section 422, except as modified by this section.
accordance with Equation (422-8). '
422.11.2 Seismic Zones 2 and 4. Structural plain concrete
2. Two-way action for footing, with a critical section
members are not permitted in buildings located in Seismic Zones
perpendicular to plane of footing and located so that its
2 and 4.
perimeter 110 is a minimum, but need not approach closer
than hl2 to perimeter of concentrated load or reaction
area. For this condition. the footing shall be designed in EXCEPTIONS:
accordance with Equation (422-9).
(1) Footings for buildings of Group R, Division 3 or Group U,
422.8.7 Circular or regular polygon shaped concrete columns or Division 1 Occupa11C)l constrocted in accordance with Table
pedestals shall be permitted to be treated as square members 305-1. (2) Non-structural slabs supported directly on the ground
with the same area for location of critical sections for moment or by approved structural systems.
and shear.
422.11.3 Structures designed for earthquake induced forces in
422.8.8 Factored bearing load on concrete at contact surface regions of high seismic risk or assigned to high seismic
between supporting. and supported member shall not exceed performance or design categories shall not have foundation
design bearing strength for either surface as given in Section elements of structural plain concrete, except as follows:
422.6.5.
1. For detached one- and two-family dwellings three stories
422.9 PEDESTALS or less in height and constructed with stud bearing walls,
plain concrete footings without longitudinal
422.9.1 Plain concrete pedestals shall be designed for vertical, reinforcements supporting walls and isolated plain
lateral and other loads to which they are SUbjected.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

.,,
 CONCRETE
concrete footings supporting columns or pedestals are
SECTION 423 - ANCHORAGE TO
permitted;
2. For all other structures, plain concrete footings supporting
walls are permitted provided the footings are reinforced
longitudinally with not less than two continuous
reinforcing bars. Bars shall not be smaller than 12 mm
diameter and shall have a total area of not less than 0.002
times the gross cross-sectional area of the footing.
Continuity of reinforcement shall be provided at corners
and intersections;
3. For detached one- and two-family dwellings three stories
or less in height and constructed with stud bearing walls"
plain concrete foundations or basement walls are
permitted provided the wall is not less than 190 mm thick
and retains no more than 1.2 mofunbalanced fill.
ASSOCiation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
CONCRETE
423.1 SERVICE LOAD DESIGN
Bolts and headed stud anchors shall be solidly cast in concrete
and the service load shear and tension shall not exceed
values set forth in Table 423-1.
For combined tension and shear:
(423-1)
Where:
p. = applied service tension load
PI = Table 423-1 service tension load
Vs = applied service shear load
Vr = Table 423-1 service shear load
423.2 STRENGTH DESIGN
The factored loads on embedded anchor bolts and headed ~+>"ci.,<,~.
shall not exceed the design strengths determined by ':>V\,L1U'lU~a
423.3.
In addition to the load factors in Section 409.3, a multiplier of2
shall be used if special inspection is not provided, or of 1.3 if it
is provided. When anchors are embedded in the tension zone
a member, the load factors in Section 409.3 shall have
multiplier of3 if special inspection is not provided, or of2 if it is
provided.
423.3 STRENGTH OF ANCHORS
423.3.1 General
The strength of headed bolts and headed studs solidly cast in
concrete shall be taken as the average of 10 tests approved by
the building official for each concrete strength and anchor size.
Alternatively, the strength of the anchor shall be calculated in
accordance with Sections 423.3.2 through 423.3.4. The bearing
area of headed anchors shall be at least one and one-half times
the shank area.
423.3.2 Design strength in tension
The design strength of anchors in tension shall be the minimum
of Pu or ; Pc where:
(423-2)
 ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE
and for an anchor group where the distance between anchors is
less than twice th~ir embedment length or for a single anchor or
anchor group where the distance between anchors is equal to or
greater than twice their embedment length:
(423-3)
where:
area of anchor. Must be used with the corresponding
steel properties to determine the weakest part of the
assembly in tension, mm2 .
= the effective area (in mm2 ) of the projection of an
assumed concrete failure surface upon the surface from
which the anchor protrudes. For a single anchor or for
an anchor group where the distance between anchors is
equal to or greater than twice their embedment length,
the surface is assumed to be that of a truncated cone
radiating at a 45-degree slope from the bearing edge of
the anchor toward the surface from which the anchor
protrudes. The effective area is the projection of the
cone on this surface. For an anchor which is
perpendicular to the surface from which it protrudes,
the effective area is a circle.
For an anchor group where the distance between
anchors is less than twice their embedment length, the
failure surface is assumed to be that of a truncated
pyramid radiating at a 45-degree slope from the bearing
edge of the anchor group toward the surface from
which the anchors protrudes. The effective area is the
projection of this truncated pyramid on this surface. In
addition, for thin sections with anchor groups, the
failure surface shall be assumed to follow the extension
of this slope through to the far side rather than be
truncated, and the failure mode resulting in the lower
value of Pc shall control.
= anchor shank diameter
specified compression strength of concrete, which shall
not be taken as greater than 42 MPa for design.
= minimum specified tensile strength of the anchor, MPa.
May be assumed to be 420 MPa for AJ07 bolts or
A108 studs.
= design tensile strength
= required tensile strength from factored loads
design shear strength
= required shear strength from factored loads
= 1.0 for normal weight concrete, 0.75 for "all
lightweight" concrete, and 0.85 for "sand-lightweight"
concrete.
.~ strength reduction factor
0.65
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Vokme 1
4--111
EXCEPI10N:
When the anchor is attached to or hooked around reinforcing
steel or otherwise terminated to effectively transfer forces to the
reinforcing steel that is designed to distribute forces and avert
sudden local failure, may be taken as 0.85.
Where edge distance is less than embedment length, reduce ;Pc
proportionately. For multiple edge distances less than
embedment length, use multiple reductions.
423.3.3 Design strength in shear
The design strength of anchors in shear shall be the minilllum of
Vss or ;Vc where:
(423-4)
and where loaded toward an edge greater than 10 diameters
away,
(423-5)
or where loaded toward an edge equal to or less than 10
diameters away,
(423-6)
where tie equals the edge distance from the anchor axis to the
free edge.
For groups of anchors, the concrete design shear strength shall
be taken as the smallest of:
1. The design strength of the weakest anchor times the
number of anchors;
2. The design strength of the row of anchors nearest the free
edge in the direction of shear times the number of rows;
or
3. The design strength of the row farthest from the free edge
in the direction of shear.
For shear loading toward an edge equal to or less than 10
diameters away, or tension or shear not toward an edge less than
five diameters away, reinforcing sufficient to carry the load shall
be provided to prevent failure of the concrete in tension. In no
case shall the edge distance be less than four diamet:tn.
 CONCRETE

423.3.4 Combined tension and shear s

spacing of shear reinforcement in direction
=
longitudinal reinforcement, mm
When tension and shear act simultaneously, all of the following v = design shear stress
shall be met: Vc = permissible shear stress carried by concrete, MFa
VII = permissible horizontal shear stress, MPa

(Vu) (423-7) V = design shear force at section

-1 - <1
tP V, a = angle between inclined stirrups and longitudinal axis
member
Pc = ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load
(
pV )2 +(Vu)2 ~l reaction area
Pss Vss Pw = ratio of tension reinforcement
=A/b,.d
{I = strength reduction factor. See Section 424.3.1

424.2 SCOPE
SECTION 424 - AL TERNA TE DESIGN
METHOD 424.2.1 Non-prestressed reinforced concrete members shall
permitted to be designed using service loads (without
factors) and permissible service load stresses in accordance
424.1 NOTATION
provisions of Section 424.
Some notation definitions are modified from those in the main
424.2.2 For design of members not covered by Section
body of the code for specific use in the application of Section
appropriate provisions ofthis code shall apply.
424.
2
424.2.3 All applicable provisions of this code for n01mrt~str'essed
= gross area of section, mm
concrete, except Section 408.5, shall apply to members Uv:)1~II"U
= area of shear reinforcement within a
distance s,
by the Alternate Design Method.
mm2
= loaded area
424.2.4 Flexural members shall meet requirements
= maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface
deflection control in Section 409.6, and requirements ofSe<:tiolns
that is geometrically similar to and concentric with the
410.5 through 410.8 ofthis code.
loaded area
= perimeter of critical section for slabs and footings, mm
= web width, or diameter of circular section, rnm
= distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of
424.3 GENERAL
tension reinforcement, mm
= modulus of elasticity of concrete, MPa. See Section
424.3.1 Load factors and strength reduction factors {I shall
408.6.1 taken as unity for members designed by the Alternate
= modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, MFa. See
Method.
E.
Section 408.6.2
= specified compressive strength of concrete, MFa. See 424.3.2 It shall be permitted to proportion members for 75
Section 405.
percent of capacities required by other parts of Section 424
when considering wind or earthquake forces combined
= square root of specified compressive strength of

other loads, provided the resulting section is not less than

concrete, MPa
= average splitting tensile strength of lightweight
aggregate concrete, MPa. See 405.2.4
Is = permissible tensile stress in reinforcement, MFa
h = specified yield strength of reinforcement, MFa.
See Section 403.6.3.
M == design moment
n = modular ratio of elasticity
= E.lEc
N = design axial load normal to cross section occurring
simultaneously with V; to be taken as positive for
compression, negative for tension, and to include
effects of tension due to creep and shrinkage
required for the combination of dead and live load.
424.3.3 When dead load reduces effects of other loads, members
shall be designed for 85 percent of dead load in combination
with the other loads.
424.4 PERMISSmLE SERVICE LOAD STRESSES
424.4.1 Stresses in concrete shall not exceed the following:
1. Flexure
Extreme fiber stress in compression............ .0,45j'a

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 ALTERNA.TE DESIGN METHOD 4--113

'., hear*
~5]S stressed to the permissible tensile stress/. . and V" shall be taken
~~,).Beams and one-way slabs and footings: as unfactored shear force at the section.
~, Shear carried by concrete, Vc . ......... . 0.09ff
Maximum shear carried by concrete plus
424.6 FLEXURE
shear reinforcement .............. vc + 0.38 ff

For investigation of stresses at service loads, straight-line theory

Joists:*
Shear carried by concrete,
Two-way slabs and footings:
Shear carried by concrete,
(for flexure) shall be used with the following assumptions.
Vc' . . . . . . . . . 1.2ff 424.6.1 Strains vary linearly as the distance from the neutral
axis, except for deep flexural members with overall depth-span
ratios greater than 2/5 for continuous spans and 4/5 for simple
Vc t ..... {l+21PJ f f spans, a nonlinear distribution of strain shall be considered. See
Section 410.8 of this Chapter.

424.6.2 Stress-strain relationship of concrete is a straight line

Bearing on loaded areat . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... O.3fc under service loads within permissible service load stresses .

. ,,424.4.2 Tensile stress in reinforcementls shall not exceed the 424.6.3 In reinforced concrete members, concrete resists no
following: tension.

Grade 275 or Grade 350 424.6.4 It shall be permitted to take the modular ratio,
reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 140 MPa n EslE", as the nearest whole number (but not less than 6).
Except in calculations for deflections, value of n for lightweight
2. Grade 420 reinforcement or greater
concrete shall be assumed to be the same as for normal weight
and welded wire fabric (plain
concrete ofthe same strength.
or deformed) . . .. ................. 170 MPa

424.65 In doubly reinforced flexural members, an effective

3. For flexural reinforcement, 10 mm or less in diameter, in modular ratio of 2E/Ec shall be used to transform compression
one-way slabs reinforcement for stress computations. Compressive stress in
of not more than 4 m span. . . . . . . . . . . .. 0.50/y such reinforcement shall not exceed permissible tensile stress.
but not greater than 200 MPa

424.7 Compression members with or without

A24.5 DEVELOPMENT AND SPLICES OF tlexure
REINFORCEMENT
424.7.1 Combined flexure and axial load capacity of
424.5.1 Development and splices of reinforcement shall be as
compression members shall be taken as 40 percent of that
required in Section 412 ofthis Chapter.
computed in accordance with provisions in Section 410 of this
Chapter.
424.5.2 In satisfYing requirements of Section 412.12.3, Mn
shan be taken as computed moment capacity assuming all 424.7 2 Slenderness effects shall be included according to
;positive moment tension reinforcement at the section to be requirements of Sections 410.10 through 410.13. In Equations
(41O-lO) and (410-19) the term P" shall be replaced by 2.5 times
For more detailed calculation of the shear stress carried by concrete Vc 8lld the design axial load, and the factor 0.75 shall be taken equal to
shear values for lightweight aggregate concrete, see Section 424.8.4.
1.0.
v'Designed in accord8llce \-'1ith Section 408.12 of this code.
424.7.3 Walls shall be designed in accordance with Section 414
'tlfshear reinforcement is provided, see Sections 424,8.7.4 and 424.8,7.5 of this Chapter with flexure and axial load capacities taken as 40
percent ofthat computed using Section 414. In Equation (414-1),
tWben the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the loaded area,
pemrlssible bearing stress on the loaded area shall be pennitted to be multiplied ; shall be taken equal to 1.0.
by ~A,.I Al but not more than 2. When the supporting surface is sloped or
stepped, A2 shall be pennitted to be taken as the area of the lower base of the
largest 1iustum of a right pyramid or cone contained wholly within the support
and having for its upper base the loaded area, and having side slopes of I vertical
to 2 horizontal.

National Structural Code of the Philippines,

 CONCRETE
424.8 Shear and torsion Quantity NIA,l shall be expressed in MPa.
424.8.1 Design shear stress l' shall be computed by
V= VI(b..d) (424-1)
where V is design shear force at section considered.
424.8.2 When the reaction, in direction of applied shear,
introduces compression into the end regions of a member,
sections located less than a distance d from face of support shall
be permitted to be designed for the same shear l' as that
computed at a distance d.
424.8.3 Whenever applicable, effects of torsion, in accordance
with provisions of Section 411 of this Chapter, shall be added.
Shear and torsional moment strengths provided by concrete and
limiting maximum strengths for torsion shall be taken as 55
percent ofthe values given in Section 411.
424.8.4 Shear stress carried hy concrete
424.8.4.1 For members subject to shear and flexure only, shear
stres~ carried by concrete Ve shall not exceed 1.1..Jl': unless a
more detailed calculation is made in accordance with Section
424.8.4.4.
424.8.4.2 . For members subject to axial compression, shear
stress carried by concrete 1'e, shall not exceed 1.1..Jl': unless a
more detailed calculation is made in accordance with 424.8.4.5.
424.8.4.3 For members subject to significant axial tension, shear
reinforcement shall be designed to carry total shear, unless a
more detailed calculation is made using:
(424-2)
where N is negative for tension. Quantity NIA,l shall be
expressed in MPa.
424.8.4.4 For members subject to shear and flexure only, it shall
be permitted to compute Ve by
Ve 0.085..Jl': + 9p,.,Vd/M (424-3)
but Ve shall not exceed 0.14~f'c . Quantity Vd/M shall not be
taken greater than 1.0, where M is design moment occurring
simultaneously wi~h Vat section considered.
424.8.4.5 For members subject to axial compression, it shall be
permitted to compute l'e by
l'e = 0.09(1 + 0.09NIA,)~f'c (4244)
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
424.8.4.6 Shear stresses carried by concrete 1'" apply to
weight concrete. When lightweight aggregate concrete is used,
one ofthe following modifications shall apply:
1. When fet is specified and concrete is proportioned
accordance with Section 405.3,fc/6.7 shall be
for ..Jl': but the value offc/6. 7 shall not exceed ..Jl':.
2. When fet is not specified, the value of ffc shall
multiplied by 0.75 for "all-lightweight" concrete and
0.85 for "sand-lightweight" concrete. Linear intt~rp()latiion;
shall be permitted when partial sand replacement is
424.8.4.7 In determining shear stress carried by concrete
whenever applicable, effets of axial tension due to creep
s!rrinkage in restrained members shall be included and it shall
permitted to include e:tIects of inclined flexural compression
variable-depth members.
424.8.5 Shear stress earried by shear reinforcement
424.8.5.1 Types of shear reinforcement
Shear reinforcement shall consist of one ofthe following:
1. Stirrups perpendicular to axis of member;
2. Welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicular
axis of member making an angle of 45 degrees or
with longitudinal tension reinforcement;
3. Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making
angle of 30 degrees or more with longitudinal tensloll'lt
reinforcement;
4. Combinations of stirrups and bent longitudinal
forcement;
5. Spirals.
424.8.5.2 Design yield strength of shear reinforcement shall
exceed 420 MPa.
424.8.5.3 Stirrups and other bars or wires used as
reinforcement shall extend to a distance d from
compression fiber and shall be anchored at both ends acc:or<Ut
to Section 412.14 of this Chapter to develop design
strength ofreinforcement.
424.8.5.4 Spacing limits for shear reinforcement
424.8.5.4.1 Spacing of shear reinforcement placed pet"Petldl(~la
to axis of member shall not exceed d/l, nor 600 mm.
 ALTERNATE DESIGN METHOD
424.8.5.4.2 Inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal
~einforcement shall be so spaced that every 45-degree line,
i Jxtending toward the reaction from mid-depth of member (d/l)
to longitudinal tension reinforcement, shall be crossed by at least
one line of shear reinforcement.
~24.8.5.4.3 When (v-vJ exceeds 2.JJ':, maximum spacing
8iven in Sections 424.8.5.4.1 and 424.8.5.4.2 shall be reduced by
one-half
~j4.8.5.5 Minimum shear reinforcement
'424.8.5.5.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement shall be
;provided in all reinforced concrete flexural members where
design shear stress v is greater than one-half the permissible
shear stress v" carried by concrete, except:
Slabs and footings;
2. Concrete joist construction defined by Section 408.12 of
this Chapter;
3. Beam with total depth not greater than 250mm, 2.5 times
thickness of flange, or one-half the width of web,
whichever is greatest.
424.8 5.5.2 Minimum shear reinforcement requirements of
"'Section 424.8.5.5.1 shall be permitted to be waived if shown by
test that required ultimate flexural and shear strength can be
developed when shear reinforcement is omitted.
424.8.5.5.3 Where shear reinforcement is required by
Section 424.8.5.5.1 or by analysis, minimum area of shear
reinforcement shall be computed by
A. = b..,s/3J;, (424-5)
where b w and s are in mm.
424.8.5.6 Design of shear reinforcement
424.8.5.6.1 Where design shear stress v exceeds shear stress
carried by concrete ve shear reinforcement shall be provided in
'accordance with Sections 424.8.5.6.2 through 424.8.5.6.8 .
. 424.8.5.6.2 When shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis of
'member is used:
Av = (v-vJb..,s1J;, (424-6)
424.8.5.6.3 When inclined stirrups are used as shear
reinforcement,
(424-7)
f.(sin a + cosa)
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
4-115
424.8.5.6.4 When shear reinforcement consists of a single bar or
a single group of parallel bars, all bent up at the same distance
from the support,
(424-8)
where (v - vJ shall not exceed (1/8) ff..
424.8.5.6.5 When shear reinforcement consists of a series of
parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel bent-up bars at
different distances from the support, required area shall be
computed by Equation (424-7).
424.8.5.6.6 Only the center three-quarters of the inclined
portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be considered effective
for shear reinforcement.
424.8.5.6.7 When more than one type of shear rein-forcement is
used to reinforce the same portion of a member, required area
shall be computed as the sum of the various types separately. In
such computations, Ve shall be included only once.
424.8.5.6.8 Value of (v - vJ shall not exceed (3/8) ff..
424.8.6 Shear friction
Where it is appropriate to consider shear transfer across a given
plane, such as. an existing or potential crack, an interface
between dissimilar materials, or an interface between two
concretes cast at different times, shear-friction provisions of
Section 411.8 of this Chapter shall be permitted to be applied,
with limiting maximum stress for shear taken as 55 percent of
that given in Section 411.8.5. Permissible stress in shear-friction
reinforcement shall be that given in Section 424.4.2.
424.8.7 Special provisions for slabs and footings
424.8.7.1 Shear capacity of slabs and footings in the vicinity
of concentrated loads or reactions is governed by the more
severe oftwo conditions:
424.8.7.1.1 Beam action for slab or footing, with a critical
section extending in a plane across the entire width and located
at a distance d from face of concentrated load or reaction area.
For this condition, the slab or footing shall be designed in
accordance with Sections 424.8.1 through 424.8.5.
424.8.7.1.2 Two-way action for slab or footing, with a critical
section perpendicular to plane of slab and located so that its
perimeter is a minimum, but need not approach closer than d/l
to perimeter of concentrated load or reaction area. For this
 CONCRETE
condition, the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance
with Sections 424.8.7.2 and 424.8.7.3.
424.8.7.2 Design shear stress v shall be computed by
v= VI(bot/) (424-9)
where V and b o , shall be taken at the critical section defined in
Section 424.8.7.1.2.
424.8.7.3 Design shear stress v shall not exceed v" given by
Equation (424-10) unless shear reinforcement is provided
(424-10)
but Vc shall not exceed (1I6).[r;' Pc is the ratio oflong side to
short side of concentrated load or reaction area. When
lightweight aggregate concrete is used, the modifications of
Section 424.8.4.6 shall apply.
424.8.7.4 If shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires is
provi4ed in accordance with Section 411.13.3 of this Chapter, v"
shall not exceed (1/12) ff.,
and v shall not exceed 0.25 ff..
424.8.7.5 If shear reinforcement consisting of steel 1- or
channel-shaped sections (shearheads) is provided in accordance
with Section 411.13.4 of this Chapter, l' on the critical section
defined in Section 424.8.7.1.2 shall not exceed 0.3 ff.,
and v on
the critical section defined in Section 41 1.1 3.4.7 shall not exceed
(1I6).[r;, In Equations (411-39) and (411-40), design shear
force V shall be multiplied by 2 and substituted for Vu'
424.8.8 Special provisions for other members
For design of deep flexural members, brackets and corbels, and
walls, the special provisions of Section 411 of this Chapter shall
be used, with shear strengths provided by concrete and limiting
maximum strengths for shear taken as 55 percent of the values
given in Section 411. In Section 411.11.6, the design axial load
shall be multiplied by 1.2 if compression and 2.0 if tension, and
substituted for Nil'
424.8.9 Composite concrete flexural memhers
For design of composite concrete flexural members, permissible
horizontal shear stress Vh shall not exceed 55 percent of the
horizontal shear strengths given in
Section 417.6.2 ofthis Chapter.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
SECTION 425 - UNIFIED DESIGN
PROVISIONS FOR REINFORCED
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
FLEXURAL AND COMPRESSION
MEMBERS
425.1 SCOPE
Design for flexure and axial load by provisions of Section
shall be pennitted. When Section 425 is used in d~sign,
provisions of this Section shall be used in place of
corresponding provisions in Sections 408,409,410 and 418.
instance, Section 425.408.4 is substituted for Section
Section 425.418.10.4 is substituted for Section 418.1J.1.If
section in Section 425 is used, all sections in Section 425
be substituted for the corresponding sections in the body of
code, and all other sections in the body of the code shall
applicable.
425.408.5 Redistribution of negative moments in
continuous flexural members
425.408.5.1 Except where approximate values for moments
used, it shall be permitted to increase or decrease
moments calculated by elastic theory at supports of COfltmu4
flexural members for any assumed loading arrangement by
more than 1000e, percent, with a maximum of20 percent.
425.408.5.2 The modified negative moments shall be used
calculating moments at sections within the spans.
425.408.5.3 Redistribution of negative moments shall be
only when e, is equal to or greater than 0.0075 at the section
which moment is reduced.
425.409.4 Design Strength
425.409.4.1 Design strength provided by a member,
connections to other members, and its cross sections, in
flexure, axial load, shear, and torsion, shall be taken as
nominal strength calculated in accordance with requirements
assumptions of this code, multiplied by a strength
factor ;.
425.409.4.2 Strength reduction factor; shall be as follows:
425.409.4.2.1 Tension-controlled sections. . . . . . 0.90
425.409.4.2.2 Compression-controlled sections:
1. Members with spiral reinforcement
 UNIFIED DESIGN PROVISIONS FOR REINFORCED AND PRESTRESSED
CONCRETE FLEXURAL AND COMPRESSION MEMBERS 4-117

Conforming to Section 410.9.3 ...... ... 0.75
Other reinforced members .............. 0.70
reinforcement shall be adequate to develop a factored load at
sections in which the net tensile strain in the extreme tension
at nominal strength is between the limits for compression
COll,UUJll"'-' and tension-controlled sections, ; shall be linearly
';"'I'.-",aSp.C1 from that for compression-controlled sections to 0.90
425.418.9.2 Total amount of prestressed and nonprestressed
least 1.2 times the cracking load computed on the basis of the
modulus ofrupturef,. specified in Section 409.6.2.3, except for
flexural members with shear and flexural strength at least twice
that required by Section 409.3.

as the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel at nominal
strength increases from the compression-controlled strain limit
to 0.005. Alternatively, it shall be permitted to take; as that for
compression- controlled sections.
'425.409.4.2.3 Shear and torsion 0.85
425.418.9.3 Part or all of the bonded reinforcement consisting of
bars or tendons shall be provided as close as practicable to the
extreme tension fiber in all prestressed flexural members, except
that in members prestressed with unbonded tendons, the
minimum bonded reinforcement consisting of bars or tendons
shall be as required by Section 418.10.

425.409.4.2.4 Bearing on concrete. 425.418.11.4 Redistribution ofnegative moments

.. See also Section 418.13 , ........... 0.70 in continuous prestressed flexural members

425.418.11.4.1 Where bonded reinforcement is provided at

425.410.4.2 Balanced strain conditions exist at a cross section supports in accordance with Section 418.10.2, it shall be
when tension reinforcement reaches the strain corresponding to permitted to increase or decrease negative moments calculated
its specified yield strength /, just as concrete in compression by-elastic theory for any assumed loading, in accordance with
. reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003. Section 425.408.5.

The compression-controlled strain limit is the net tensile strain in
the reinforcement at balanced strain conditions. For prestressed
sections, it shall be permitted to use the same compression
controlled strain limit as that for reinforcement with a design
yield strength/, of 420 MPa.
425.418.11.4.2 The modified negative moments shall be used for
calculating moments at sections within spans for the same
loading arrangement.

425.410.4 3 Sections are compression-controlled when the net

tensile strain in the extreme tension steel is equal to or less than
the compression-controlled strairi limit at the time the concrete
in compression reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003.
Sections are tension-controlled when the net tensile strain in the
extreme tension steel is equal to or greater than 0.005 just as the
concrete in compression reaches its assumed strain limit of
0.003. Sections with net tensile strain in the extreme tension
steel between the compression-controlled strain limit and 0.005
constitute a transition region between compression-controlled
and tension- controlled sections,

425.418.2.3 The following provisions of this code shall not

apply to prestressed concrete, except as specifically noted:
Sections 407.7.5, 408.11.2, 408.11.3, 408.11.4,408.12,410.6,
410.7,410.10.1 and 410.10.2; Section 413; and Sections 414.4,
414.6 and 414.7.

425.418.9 Limits for reinforcement of flexural

members

425.418.9.rPresuessed concrete sections shaH be classified as

tension-controlled and compression-controlled sections in
accordance with Section 425.410.4.3. The appropriate9I- fa(:tors
from Section 425.409.4.2 shall apply.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 CONCRETE

SECTION 426 - ALTERNATIVE LOAD the load factors of Section 409.2.8 and ;- factors of
AND STRENGTH REDUCTION 409.4.2.5.
FACTORS

426.1 GENERAL

426.1.1 It shall be permitted to proportion the concrete members

of a building structure using the load factor combinations in
ASCE 7-95 in conjunction with the following strength reduction
factors, .if the structural framing includes primary members of
other materials proportioned to satisfy the load factor
combinations in Section 2.3 of ASCE 7-95.

426.1.1.1 Flexure, without axial load . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.80

426.1.1.2 Axial tension and axial tension

with flexure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.80

426.1.1.3 Axial compression and axial compression with

flexure:

1. Members with spiral reinforcement

~nforming to Section 410.10.3 ... 0.70

2. Other reinforced members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 0.65

except that for low values of axial compression, it shall be

permitted to increase ;towards the value for flexure, 0.80, using
the linear interpolation provided in either Section 409.4.2.2 or
425.409.3.2.2.

426.1.1.4 Shear and torsion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75

Except in structures that rely on special moment resisting frames

or special reinforced concrete structural walls to resist
earthquake effects:

L Shear in any member that is designed to resist earthquake

effects if its nominal shear strength is less than the shear
corresponding to the development of the nominal flexural
strength ofthe member......... 0.55

2. Shear in. diaphragms shall not exceed the nurumum

strength reduction factor for shear used for the vertical
components ofthe primary lateral-force resisting system

3. Shear in joints and diagonally reinforced coupling beams

0.80

426.1.1.5 Bearing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.65

426.1.1.6 Plain concrete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55

426.1.2 The design of post-tensioned anchorage zones shall use

1"I.::II::tUClatlon or ~:,,:ructural Engineers of the Philippines

 1
i

CHAPTERS
STRUCTURAL STEEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 501 - GENERAL PROVISIONS .......................................................................... 5-1

Scope ..................................................... 5-1 501-5 Design Basis .......................................... 5-5

Limits ofApplicability ............. ........ ...... 5-1 501-6 Referenced Codes and Standards ........... 5-5

Materials ....................................... ......... 5-2 501-7 Design Documents ................................. 5-6

Loads and Forces ................................. 5-4

SECTION 502 - DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 5-7

Scope .................................................... 5-7 502.7 Rotational Restraint at Points of

Gross Area .. ..... ... .... .. ................. ........... 5-7 Support ............. ................. ............... 5-12

Net Area ............. ............. ..................... 5-7 502.S Limiting Slenderness Ratios .............. 5-12

Effective Net Area................................... 5-7 502.9 Simple Spans ....................................... 5-12

Stability................................................... 5-S 502.10 End Restraint . ............ ............. ............ 5-12

Local Buckling... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5-8 502.11 Proportions of Beams and Girders ....... 5-12

502.12 Proportioning of Crane Girders 5-13

SECTION 503 - FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES ........................................... 5-14

503.1 Scope ......................................... ,......... 5.14 503.2 Frame Stability ................................... 5-14

503.2 General ................................................ 5-14

'SECTION 504 - TENSION MEMBERS ........................................................................... 5-14

504.1 Scope ................................................... 5-14 504.3 Built-Up Members ............................. 5-14

504.2 Allowable Stress ................................ 5-14 504.4 Pin-Connected Members .................... 5~15

SECTION 505 - COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS ............. 5-16

505.1 Scope ................................................... 516 505.5 Built-Up Members ............................. 5-16

505.2 Effective Length and Slenderness 505.6 Pin-Connected Compression

Ratio ................................................ 516 Members .......................................... 5-17

505.3 Allowable Stress ................................ : 5-16 505.7 Column Web Shear ............................ 5-17

505.4 Flexural-Torsional Buckling .............. 5-16

National Structural Code of the Philippines. Volume 1

 STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION 506 BEAM AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS ............................. 5-18

506,1 Scope ................................................. 5-18 506.4 Allowable Stress: Bending ofBox

506.2 Allowable Stress: Strong Axis Members, Rectangular Tubes and

Bending ofI-Shaped Members and Circular Tubes ...... ........... , ............... 5-20
~ ~

Channels ............... ..................... 5-18

,~ ~'" ~ 506.5 Allowable Shear Stress t 5-20

506.3 Allowable stress: Weak Axis 506.6 Transverse Stiffeners ............................ 5-20

Bending ofT-Shaped Members, 506.7 Built-Up Members ................ .......... , .. 5-21

Solid Bars and Rectangular Plates -.... 5-19 506.8 Web-Tapered Members . ........ .. .... 5-21

~ ~ '" ~

SECTION 561 - PUTE G'IMERS ....................................................................................... 5-23

507.1 Scope ................................................... 5-23 507.4 Allowable Shear Stress with

507.2 Web-Slenderness Limitations ............ 5-23 Tension Field Action ...................... 5-24

507.3 Allowable Bending Stress ................. 5-23 507.5 Transverse Stiffeners ............... ........... 5-24

507.6 Combined Shear and Tension Stress... 5-25

SECTION 508 - COMBIN'ED STRESSES .......".................................................................. !...25

508.1 Scope .... ...... ..... ..... .......... .................... 5-25 508.3 Axial Tension and Bending ............... 5-26

508.2 Axial Compression and Bending ....... 5~25

SECTION 509 - COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION ........................................................_.. .5-27

509.1 Scope .................................................. 5-27 509.5 Shear Connectors ............................... 5-28

509.2 Definition .......................................... 5-27 509.6 Composite Beams or Girders with

509.3 Design Assumptions ................ ........... 5-27 Fonned Steel Deck. ........................ 5-29

509.4 End Shear ......... .................... .............. 5-27 509.7 Special Cases ......... ................ .............. 5-30

SECTION 510 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS ................................ 5-31

510.1 Scope .................................................. .. 5-31 510.7 Fillers ................................................. . 5-42

510.2 General Provisions ............................. . 5-31 510.8 Splices ................................................. 5-42

510.3 Welds................................................... . 5-33 510.9 Allowable Bearing Stress ................. . 5-42

510.4 Bolts, Threaded Parts and Rivets ... .. 5-37 510.10 Columns Bases and Bearing on
510.5 Allowable Shear Rupture ................... 5-41 Masonry and Concrete ................... . 5-42

510.6 Connecting Elements ........................ .. 5-41 510.11 Anchor Bolts ..................................... . 5-42

'.

SECTION 511 - SPECIAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ............._............................... 5-43

51Ll Scope .................................................. 5-43 511.3 Ponding......... .................. ...................... 5-45

511.2 Webs and Flanges Under 511.4 Torsion ................................................ 5-45

Concentrated Forces .................. ...... 5-43 511.5 Fatigue .......................... .......... ............. 5-45

SECTION 512 - SERVICEABILITY DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS .......................... 5-51

512.1 Scope .................................................. 5-51 512.4 Deflecition.. Vibration and Drift ......... 5-51

512.2 Camber ........ ........... ............................. 5-51 512.5 Connection Slip ............................... ;.. 5-51

512.3 Expansion and Contraction ................ 5-51 512.6 Corrosion ............................................ 5-51

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5-iii

SECTION 513 - FABRICATION, ERECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL ............ 5-52

1I

Shop Drawings ......... ........ ... ..... ....... ... 5-52 513.4 Erection ............................................... 5-53

Fabrication ........ ................................. 5-52 513.5 Quality Control................................... 5-54

Shop Painting ................ ...... ..... .... ... ... 5-53

SECTION 514 - P.LASTIC DESIGN ................................................................................... 5-55

514.5 Shear .................................................. . 5-56

514.1 Scope .................................................. . 5-55 514.6 Web Crippling ................................... . 5-56

514.2 Structural Steel .................................. . 5-55 514.7 Minimum Width-Thickness Ratios .... . 5-56

514.3 Basis for Maximum Strength 514.8 Connections ........................................ . 5-57

Determination .................................. . 5-55 514.9 Lateral Bracing .................................. . 5-57

514.4 Columns ............................................. . 5-56 514.10 Fabrication ........................................ . 5-57

SECTION 515 - SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL

BUILDINGS J:N" SEISMIC ZONE 4 ............................................................................. ,.......... 5-58

515.1 Scope ................................................... 5-58 515.8 Requirements for Braced Frames ........ 5-62

515.2 General ................................................. 5-58 515.9 Requirements for Special

515.3 Definitions ........... ................................. 5-58 Concentrically Braced Frames ........... 5-64

515.4 Materials .......... ..................... ........ ....... 5-58 515.10 Eccentrically Braced Frame

515.5 Column Requirements ......................... 5-59 Requirements .............. ..... ......... ... .... 5-66

515.6 Ordinary Moment Frame 515.11 Requirements Special Truss Moment

Requirements ..................................... 5-59 Frames......................... ....................... 5-68

515.7 Special Moment-Resisting Frame

(SMRF) Requirements .......... ............ 5-60

SECTION 516 - SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL

BUlLDJ:N"G J:N" SEISMIC ZONE 2 ................................................................................................... 5-6'9

516.1 General ................................................. 5-69 516.5 Special Moment Resisting Frame

516.2 Definitions..................... ....................... 5-69 (SMRF) Requirements ......................... 5-69

516.3 Materials ............................................... 5-69 516.6 Requirements for Braced Frames .......... 5-70

516.4 Ordinary Moment Frame

Requirements ..................................... 5-59

SECTION 517 -LIGHT FRAMED WALL SySTEMS.............................................................. 5-72

516.1 General ................................................. 5-72

516.2 Boundary Members and Anchorage ....... 5-72

516.3 Wood Structural Panel Sheathing .......... 5-72

SECTION 518 - INSPECTION ...........................................................-......................................... 5-72

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 501 - GENERAL
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. For the
PROVISIONS
profiles contain rounded corners and slender flat elements,
561.1 SCOPE
501.1.1 Tbe Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings
Allowance Stress Design and Plastic Design is intended as
an alternate to the currently approved Load and Resistance
Factor Design Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings
ofthe American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
561.1.2 This Section provides minimum requirements for the
design and construction of structural steel building elements
of any structure erected under requirements of the National
Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP) to which this
Section fo~s a part of by reference.
501.1.3 This Section shall govern in all matters pertaining to
the design, construction, and material properties of structural
steel elements wherever this Section is in conflict with
requirements contained in other standards referenced in this
Section.
501.1.4 Alternative Design Specification. As an
alternative, the design of structural steel buildings using the
Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for
Structural Steel Buildings, December 1, 1993, published by
the American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. shall be
permitted.
501.1.5 Cold-Formed Steel Strudural Members. The
design of cold-formed carbon or low-alloy steel structural
members shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
Load and Resistance Factor Design Specifications for Cold
formed Steel Structural Members, March 16 1991; or the
Specifications for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members, 1986 (with December 1989 Addendum),
published by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AlSI).
501.1.6 Special Provisions For Earthquake R.esistance
S01.1.6.1 In regions of high seismic risk (seismic zone 4) or
moderate (seismic zone 2) provisions of Section 515 shall be
satisfied. See Section 515.
501.1 LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY
501.2.1 Structural Steel Dermed
501.2.1.1 As used in this Specification, the term structural
steel refers to the steel elements of the structural steel frame
essential to the support of the design loads. Such elements
are generally enumerated in Section 2.1 of the AlSC Code of
. National Structural Code of the PhUippines, Volume 1
design of cold-fonned steel structural members, whose
the provisions of the American Iron and Steel Institute
Specifications for the Design of Cold-formed Steel
Structural Members are recommended.
501.2.2 Types of Constmction
501.2.2.1 Three basic types of construction and associated
design assumptions are permissible under the respective
conditions stated herein, and each will govern in a specific
manner the size of members and the types and strength of
their connections:
Type 1, commonly designated as "rigid-frame" (continuous
frame), assumes that beam-column connections have
sufficient rigidity to hold virtually unchanged the original
angles between intersecting members.
Type 2, commonly designated as "simple framing"
(unrestrained, free-ended), assumes that, insofar as gravity
loading is concerned, ends of beams and girders are
connected for shear only and are free to rotate under gravity
load.
Type 3. commonly designated as "semi-rigid framing"
(partially restrained), assumes that the connections of beams
and girders possess a dependable and known moment
capacity intermediate in degree between the rigidity of Type
1 and the flexibility ofTyj>e 2.
501.2.2.2 The design of all connections shall be consistent
with the assumptions as to type of construction called for on
the design drawings.
501.2.2.3 Type 1 construction is unconditionally permitted
under this Specification. Two different methods of design
are recognized. Within the limitations laid down in
Section 514.1, members of continuous frames or continuous
portions of frames maybe proportioned, on the basis of their
maxiII\.um predictable strength, to resist the specified design
loads multiplied by the prescribed load factors. Otherwise,
Type 1 construction shall be designed, within the limitations
of Sections 501 through 513, to resist the stresses produced
by the specified design loads, assuming moment distribution
in accordance with the elastic theory.
501.2.2'.4 Type 2 construction is permitted under this
Specification, subject to the stipulations of the following
paragraph, wherever applicable.
501.2.2.5 In buildings designed as Type 2 construction
(Le., with beam-to-column connections other than wind
connections assumed flexible under gravity loading) the
 5-2 STRUCTURAL STEEL
wind moments may be distributed among selected joints of
the frame, provided:
1. Connections and connected members have adequate
capacity to resist wind moments.
2. Girders are adequate to carry full gravity load as
"simple beams."
3. Connections have adequate inelastic rotation capacity
to avoid overstress of the fasteners or welds under
combined gravity and wind loading.
501.2.2.6 Type 3 (semi-rigid) construction is permitted upon
evidence, the connections to be used are capable of
furnishing, as a minimum, a predictable proportion of full
end restraint. The proportioning of main members joined by
such connections shall be predicated upon no greater degree
of end restraint than this minimum.
501.2.2.7 Type 2 and 3 construction may necessitate some
non elastic, but self-limiting, deformation of a structural steel
part.
501.3 MATERIAL
501.3.1 Structural Steel
501.3.1.1 ASTM Designations
1. Material conforming to one of the following standard
specifications is approved for use under this
Specification:
Structural Steel, ASTM A36
Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and
Seamless Steel Pipe, ASTM A53, Grade B
~" ;~ High-strength Low-alloy Structural Steel, ASTM A242
High-strength Low-alloy Structural Manganese Vanadium
Steel, ASTM A441
Cold-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes, ASTM A500
Hot-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing, ASTM A501
High-yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered A1loy-Steel
Plate, Suitable for Welding, ASTM A514
Structural Steel with 290 MPa Minimum Yield Point, ASTM
A529
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-rolled, Structural
Quality, ASTM A570 Grade 275,310 and 345
High-strength, Low-alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of
Structural Quality, ASTM A572
High-strOength Low-alloy Structural Steel With 345 MPa
Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm Thick, ASTM A588
Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-strength, Low-alloy, Hot-rolled
and Cold-rolled, With Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance, ASTM A606
Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-alloy,
Columbium or Vanadium, or both Hot-Rolled and Cold
Rolled, ASTM A607
Hot-formed Welded and Seamless High-strength Low-alloy
Structural Tubing, ASTM A618
Structural Steel for Bridges, ASTM A709
Quenched and Tempered Low-alloy Structural Steel Plate
with 483 MPa Minimum Yield Strength to 100 mm thick,
ASTM A852
2. Certified mill test reports or certified reports of tests
made by the fabricator or a testing laboratory in
accordance with ASTM A6 or A568, as applicable,
and the governing specification shall constitute
sufficient evidence of conformity with one of the
above ASTM standards. Additionally, the fabricator
shall, if requested, provide an affidavit stating the
structural steel furnished meets the requirements of
the grade specified.
501.3.1.2 Unidentified steel. Unidentified steel, if free from
surface imperfections, is permitted for parts of minor
importance, or for unimportant details, where the precise
physical properties of the steel and its weldability would not
affect the strength of the structure.
501.3.1.3 Heavy shapes
For ASTM A6 Groups 4 and 5 rolled shapes to be used as
members subject to primary tensile stresses due to tension or
flexure, toughness need not be specified if splices are made
by bolting. If such members are spliced using full
penetration welds, the steel shall be specified in the contract
documents to be supplied with Charpy V-Notch testing in
accordance with ASTM A6, Supplementary Requirement S5.
The impact test shall meet a minimum average value of 27
N-m, absorbed energy at +21.1 C and shall be conducted in
accordance with ASTM A673 with the following exceptions:
 GENERAL PROVISIONS
The center longitudinal axis of the specimens shall be
located as near as practical to midway between the
inner flange surface and the center of the flange
thickness at the intersection with the web mid
thickness.
Tests shall be conducted by the producer on material
selected from a location representing the top of each
ingot or part of an ingot used to produce the product
represented by these tests.
For plates exceeding 50 mm thick used for built-up
members with bolted splices and subject to primary
tensile stresses due to tension or flexure, material
toughness need not be specified. If such members are
spliced using full penetration welds, the steel shall be
specified in the contract documents to be supplied
with Charpy V-Notch testing in accordance with
ASTM A6, Supplementary Requirement S5. The
impact test shall be conducted by the producer in
accordance with ASTM A673, Frequency P, and shall
meet a minimum average value of 27 N-m absorbed
energy at +21.1 0c.
The above supplementary toughness requirements
shall also be considered for welded full-penetration
joints other than splices in heavy rolled and built-up
members subject to primary tensile stresses.
4. Additional requirements for joints in heavy rolled and
built-up members are given in Sections 510.2.7,
510.2.8,510.3.7,510.3.8 and 513.2.2.
501.3.2 Steel Casting and Forgings
501.3.2.1 Cast steel shall conform to one of the following
standard specifications:
Mild-to-medium-strength Carbon-steel Castings for General
Applications, ASTM A27, Grade 448-241
High-Strength Steel Castings for Structural Purposes, ASTM
A148, Grade 551-345
501.3.2.2 Steel forgings shall conform to the following
standard specifications:
Steel Forgings Carbon and Alloy for General Industrial Use,
ASTMA668
501.3.2.3 Certified test reports shall constitute sufficient
evidence of conformity with the standards.
501.3.2.4 Allowable stresses shall be the same as those
provided for other steels, where applicable.
National Structural Code of tile Philippines, Volume 1
501.3.3 Rivets
501.3.3.1 Steel rivets shall conform to the following standard
specifications:
Steel Structural Rivets, ASTM AS02
501.3.3.2 Manufacturer's certification shall constitute
sufficient evidence of conformity with the standard.
501.3.4 Bolts. Washers and Nuts
501.3.4.1 Steel bolts shall conform to one of the .following
standard specifications:
Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 414 MPa Tensile Strength,
ASTMA407
High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, ASTM A325
Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs, ASTM
A449
Heat-treated Steel Structural Bolts, 1034 MPa Minimum
Tensile Strength, ASTM A490
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts, ASTM AS63
Hardened Steel Washers, ASTM F436
501.3.4.2 A449 bolts are pennitted only in connections
requiring bolt diameters greater than 38 mm and shall not be
used in slip-critical connections.
501.3.4.3 Manufacturer's certification shall constitute
sufficient evidence of conformity with the standards.
501.3.5 Anchor Bolts aud Threaded Rods
501.3.5.1 Anchor bolt and threaded rod steel shall conform
to one ofthe following standard specifications:
Structural Steel ASTM A36
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and
High-temperature Service, ASTM A194, Grade 48
Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs and Other
Externally Threaded Fasteners, ASTM A354
Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs, ASTM
A449
High-strength Low-alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of
Structural Quality, ASTM A572
High-strength Low-alloy Structural Steel With 345 MPa
Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm Thick, ASTM A588
 STRUCTURAL STEEL
High-strength Non-headed Steel Bolts and Studs, ASTM
A681
S01.3.S.2 Threads on bolts and rods shall conform to Unified
Standard Series of latest edition of ANSI BI8.I and shall
have Class 2A tolerances.
S01.3.S.3 Steel bolts conforming to other proVIsIons of
Section 501.3 are permitted as anchor bolts. A449 material is
acceptable for high-strength anchor bolts and threaded rods
of any diameter.
SOI.3.S.4 Manufacturer's certification shall constitute
sufficient evidence of conformity with the standards.
S01.3.6 Filler Metal and Flux for Weldiug
SOI.3.6.1 Welding electrodes and fluxes shall conform to
one of the following specifications of the American Welding
Society: *
Specifications for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding
Electrodes, AWS A5.I
Sp~cifications for Low-alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding
Electrodes, AWS A5.5
Specifications for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for
Submerged-Arc Welding, AWS AS.I1
Specifications for Carbon Steel Filler Metals for Gas
Shielded Arc Welding, AWS A5.I8
Specifications for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux.,.Cored
Arc Welding, AWS A5.20
Specifications for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for
Submerged-Arc Welding, AWS A5.23
Specifications for Low-Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas
Shielded Arc Welding, AWS A5.28
Specifications for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux
Cored Arc Welding AWS AS.29
S01.3.6.2 Manufacturer's certification shall constitute
sufficient evidence of conformity with the standards.
SOI.3.7 Stud Shear Connectors
501.3.7.1 Steel stud shear connectors shall conform to the
requirements of Structural Welding Code - Steel, AWS
D1.1.
Approval of these welding electrode specifications is given without
regard to weld metal notch toughness requirements, which are generally
not critical to building construction.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
SOI.3.7.2 Manufacturer's certification shall constitute
sufficient evidence of conformity with the code.
501.4 LOADS AND FORCES
501.4.1 The nominal loads shall be the minimum design
loads stipulated by the applicable code under which the
structure is designed or dictated by the conditions involved.
In the absence of a code, the loads and load combinations
shall be those stipulated in Chapter 2.
SOI.4.1.1 Dead Load and Live Load
The dead load to be assumed in design shall consist of the
weight of steelwork and all material permanently fastened
thereto or supported thereby.
The live load shall be that stipulated by the applicable code
under which the structure is being designed or that dictated
by the conditions involved.
S01.4.1.2 Impact
For structures carrying live loads'" "'which induce impact, the
assumed live load shall be increased sufficiently to provide
for same.
If not otherwise specified, the increase shall be not less than:
For supports of elevators ................................... 100%
For cab-operated traveling crane support
girders and their connections ........ , ... ... ..... 25%
For pendant-operated traveling crane support
girders and their connections .................... 10%
For supports of light machinery,
shaft or motor driven.. .......................... 20%
For supports of reciprocating machinery
or power driven units... . . ... . .. . .. ... .. . . .. .. .... 50%
For hangers supporting floors and
balconies... .. . . ..... .......................... 33%
501.4.1.3 Crane Runaway Horizontal Forces
The lateral force on crane runways to provide for the effect
of moving crane trolleys shall be not less than 20% of the
sum of weights of the lifted load and of the crane trolley, but
exclusive of other parts of the crane. The force shall be
assumed to be applied at the top of the rails, acting in either
direction normal to the runway rails, and shall be dis~buted
with due regard for lateral stiffhess of the structure
supporting the rails.
The longitudinal tractive force shall be not less than 10010 of
the maximum wheel loads of the crane applied at the top of
the rail, unless otherwise specified.
 GENERAL PROVISIONS
crane runway shall also be designed for crane stop
provision shall be made for stresses caused by wind,
during erection and after completion of the building.
in localities subject to earthquakes, typhoons and
L.l\. . . . . . . 'w,.,
extraordinary conditions shall be designed with due
for such conditions.
.,v,............. Except as provided in Section 514, all structural
membiers, connections and connectors shall be proportioned
the stresses due to the working loads do not exceed the
afi()w8lble stresses specified in Sections 504 through 511.
allowance stresses specified in these Sections do not
to peak stresses in regions of connections (see also
~Secticln 502.10), provided requirements of Section 511 are
SOI.5.1.2 For provisions pertaining to plastic design, refer to
Section 514.
SOl.S.2 Wind and Seismic Stresses
SOI.S.2.1 Allowable stresses may be increased 113 above the
values otherwise provided when produced by wind or
seismic loading, acting alone or in combination with the
design dead and live loads, provided the required section
computed on this basis is not less than that required for the
design dead and live load and impact (if any) computed
without the 1/3 stress increase, and further provided that
stresses are not otherwise required to be calculated on the
basis of reduction factors applied to design loads in
combinations. The above stress increase does not apply to
allowable stress ranges provided in Section 511.5.
SOl.5.3 Structural Analysis
SOl.5.3.1 The stresses in members, connections and
connectors shall be determined by structural analysis for the
loads defined" in Section 501.4. Selection of the method of
analysis is the prerogative ofthe responsible engineer.
Live loads on crane support girders shall be taken as the
maximum crane wheel/oads.
National structural Code of
501.5~4 Design for Serviceability and Other
Considerations
501.5.4.1 The overall structure and the individual members,
connectiOns and connectors shall be checked for
serviceability in accordance with Section 512.
561.6 REFERENCED CODES AND STANDARDS
501.6.1 Where codes and standards are referenced in this
Specification, the following standards with to be used as
reference are listed:
American National Standards Institute
ANSI B1S.1-72
ANSIA5S.1-82
American Society of Testing and Materials
Specifications for General Requirements for Rolled Steel
Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use,
ASTMA6-S7d
Specifications for Steel Castings, Carbon for General
Application, ASTM A27-87
. Specifications for Structural Steel, ASTM A36-87
Specifications for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc
Coated Welded and Seamless, ASTM A53-88
Specifications for Steel Castings, High-Strength, for
Structural Purposes, ASTM A148-84
Specifications for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel,
ASTM A142-87
Specifications for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded
Standard Fasteners, ASTM A307-86a
Specifications for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel
Joints, ASTM A325-86
Specifications for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel
Bolts, Studs and Other Externally Threaded fasteners,
ASTM A354-86
Specifications for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Manganese Vanadium Steel, ASTM A441-85
Specifications for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and
Studs, AStM A449-87
Specifications for Heat-Treated, Steel Structural Bolts 1034
MPa Tensile Strength, ASTM A490-85
the Philippines, Volume 1
 STRUCTURAL STEEL
Specifications for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubings in Rounds and Shapes,
ASTM A500-84
Specifications for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing, ASTM A501-84
Specifications for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and
Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding, ASTM
A514-87a
Specifications for Structural Steel with 290 MPa Minimum
Yield Point 12 mm Minimum Thickness, ASTM A529-85
Specifications for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts, ASTM
A563-84
Specifications for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot
Rolled, Structural Quality, ASTM A570-85
Specifications for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium
Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality, ASTM A572-85
Specifications for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
"'lith 345 MPa Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm Thick,
ASTM A588-87
Specifications for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength,
Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, With Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance, ASTM A606-85
"
Specifications for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength,
Low-Alloy Columbium or Vanadium, or Both, Hot-Rolled
and Cold-Rolled, ASTM A607-85
Specifications for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High
"" Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing, ASTM A618-84
Ii
Specifications for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for
General Industrial Use, ASTM A668-85a
Specifications for Quenched and Tempered Carbon-Steel
and High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Plates for Structural
Applications, ASTM A678-84
Specifications for Concrete Aggregates, ASTM C33-86
Specifications for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural
Concrete, ASTM C330-87
ASTM F436-86
Specifications for Steel Structural Rivets, ASTM A502-83A
ASTM A709-87b
ASTM A852-85
American Welding Society
AWS D1.l-88 AWS A5.1-81
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
AWS A5.5-81 AWS A5.17-80
AWS A5.18-79 AWS A5.20-79
AWS A5.23-80 AWS A5.28-79
AWS A5.29-80
Research Council on Structural Connections ,
Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 of
A490 Bolts, 1985
501.7 DESIGN DOCUMENTS
501.7.1 Plans
501.7.1.1 The design plans shall show a complete design
with sizes, sections and relative locations of the various
members. Floor levels, column centers and offsets shall be '
dimensioned. Drawings shall be drawn to a scale large
enough to show the information clearly.
501.7.1.2 Design documents shall indicate the type or types
of construction as defined in Section 501.2.2 and shall
include the loads and design requirements necessary for
preparation of shop drawings including shears, moments and
axial forces to be resisted by all members and their
connections.
501.7.1.3 Where Jomts are to be assembled with high
strength bolts, design documents shall indicate the
connection type (slip-critical, tension or bearing).
501.7.1.4 Camber of trusses, beams and girders, if required,
shall be called for in the design documents. The
requirements for stiffeners and bracing shall be shown on the
design documents.
501.7.2 Standards Symbols and Nomenclature
501.7.2.1 Welding and inspection symbols used on plans and
shop drawings shall preferably be the American Welding
Society symbols. Other adequate welding symbols are
permitted, provided a complete explanation thereof is shown
in the design documents.
501.7.3 Notation for Welding
501.7.3.1 Notes shall be made in the design documents and
on the shop drawings of those joints or groups of joints in
which the welding sequence and technique of welding shall
be carefully controlled to minimize distortion.
501.7.3.2 Weld lengths called for in the design documents
and on the shop drawings shall be the net effective lengths.
 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
This Section contains provisions which are common
the Specifications as a whole.
GROSS AREA
1 The gross area of a member at any point shall be
detemlll'Ilea by summing the products of the thickness and
gross width of each element as measured normai to the
ofthe member.
.;:lV.", For angles, the gross width shall be the sum of the
ofthe legs less the thickness.
1 The net area A" of a member is the sum of the
of the thickness and the net width of each element
computed as follows:
F~V"',~.,;,
For a chain of holes extending across a part in any
diagonal or zigzag line, the net width of the part shall be
obtained by deducting from the gross width the sum of the
diameters or slot dimensions as provided in Section 510.4.2,
of all holes in the chain, and adding, for each gage space in
the chain, the quantity
where:
longitudinal center-to~center spacing (pitch) of any
two consecutive holes, mm
transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between
fastener gage lines, mm
502.3.4 For angles, the gage for holes in opposite adjacent
legs shall be the sum of the gages from the back of the
angles less the thickness.
502.3.5 The critical net area An of the part is obtained from
that chain which gives the least net width.
502.3.6 In determining the net area across plug or slots
welds, the weld metal shall not be considered as
adding to the net area.
Nationat Structural Code of.the Philippines, Volume 1
5-7
502.4 EFFECTIVE NET AREA
502.4.1 When the load is transmitted directly to each of the
cross-sectional elements by connectors, the effective net area
Ae is equal to the net area An.
502.4.2 When the load is transmitted by bolts or rivets
through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of
the member, the effective net areaAe shall be computed as:
(502-1)
where:
2
An net area ofthe member, mm
U = reduction coefficient
502.4.3 When the load is transmitted by welds through some
but not all of the cross sectional elements of the member, the
effective net area Ae shall be computed as:
(502-2)
where:
2
Ag gross area of the member, mm
502.4.4 Unless a larger coefficient is justified by tests or
other criteria, the following values of U shall be used:
1. W, M or S shapes with flange widths not less than 2/3
the depth, and structural tees' cut from these shapes,
provided the connection is to the flanges. Bolted or
riveted connections shall have no fewer than three
fasteners per line in the direction of
stress. .. . ............................................... U= 0.90
2. W, M or S shapes not meeting the conditions of
subparagraph a, structural tees cut from these shapes
and all other shapes including built-up cross sections.
Bolted or riveted connections shall have no fewer than
three fasteners per line in the direction of
stress.............................. '" .. . ... . . .. . ..... U = 0.85
3. All members with bolted or riveted connections
having only two fasteners per line in the direction of
stress ............................................... U = 0.75
502.4.5 When load' is transmitted by transverse welds to
some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of W, M or
S shapes and structural tees cut from these shapes, A~ shall
be taken as the area ofthe directly connected elements.
502.4.6 When the' load is transmitted to a plate by
longitudinal welds along both edges at the end of the plate,
the length ofthe welds shall not be less than the width of the
5-3 STRUCTURAL STEEL
plate. The effective net area Ae shall be computed by
Equation (502-2).
502.4.7 Unless a larger coefficient can be justified by tests or
other criteria, the following values of U shall be used:
l. When I> 2w . .. .................................. U=1.00
2. When 2w > I> 1.5w ......... ............... ...... U= 0.81
502.6.1.3 For stiffened elements, i.e., supported along
3. When 1.5w > I> It' .......................... ... .fJ= 0.15
edges parallel to the direction of the compression force,
Where:
I = weld length, mm
w plate width (distance between welds), mm
502.4.8 Bolted and riveted splice and gusset plates and other
connection fittings subject to tensile force shall be designed
in accordance with the provisions of Section 504.2, where
the effective net area shall be taken as the actual net area,
except that, for the purpose of design calculations, it shall
not be taken as greater than 85% of the gross area.
502.5 STABILITY
,
502.5.1 General stability shall be provided for the structure
as a whole and for each compression element.
502.5.2 Consideration shall be given to significant load
effects resulting from the deflected shape of the structure or
of individual elements of the lateral load resisting system,
including effects on beams, columns, bracing, connections
and shear walls.
502.6 LOCAL BUCKLING
502.6.1 Classification of Steel Sections
502.6.1.1 Steel sections are classified as compact, non
compact and slender element sections. For a section to
qualify as compact, its flanges must be continuously
connected to the web or webs and the width-thickness ratios
of its compression elements must not exceed the applicable
limiting width-thickness ratios from Table 502-1. Steel
sections that do not qualify as compact are classified as non
compact if the width-thickness ratios of the compression
elements do not exceed the values shown for non-compact in
Table 502-1. If the width-thickness ratios of any
compression element exceed the latter applicable value, the
section is classified as a slender element section.
502.6.1.2 For unstiffened elements, which are supported
along only one edge, parallel to the djrection of the
compression force, the width shall ee4aken as follows:
1. For flanges ofl-shaped members and tees, the width b
Association of Structural Engineers of the
is half the full nominal width.
2. For legs of angles and flanges of channels and
the width b is the full nominal dimension.
3. For plates, the width b is the distance from the
edge to the frrst row of fasteners of line of welds.
4. For stems of tees, dis taken as the full nominal
width shall be taken as follows:
L For webs of rolled, built-up or formed sections, his
clear distance between flanges.
2. For webs of rolled, built-up or formed sections, dis
the full nominal depth.
3. For flange or diaphragm plates in built-up sections,
the width b is the distance between adjacent lines of
fasteners or lines of welds.
4. For flanges of rectangular hollow structural sections,
the width b is the clear distance between webs less
inside comer radius on each side. Ifthe comer radius
is not known, the flat width may be taken as the total
section width minus three times the thickness.
502.6.1.4 For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the LHH_"-U."'''''
is the nominal value halfway between the free edge and
corresponding face of the web.
502.6.2 Slender Compression Elements
502.6.2.1 For the design of flexural and
sections with slender compressive elements the IOllOVVlni
Section shall apply.
502.6.2.2 Axially loaded members and flexural Ul'-111V"'"
containing elements subject to compression which have
width-thickness ratio in excess of the applicable
compact value shall be proportioned according to
Section.
1. UnstifTened Compression Elements
The allowable stress of unstiffened compression "l"""~'U'.,
whose width-thickness ratio the applicable
value shall be subject to a reduction factor Qs. The value
Qs shall be determined by Equations (502-3)
(502-8), as applicable, where b is the width of
unstiffened element as defined in Section 502.6.1.
such elements comprise the compression flange of a
member, the maximum allowable bending stress shall
exceed 0.60F;Qs nor the applicable value as provided
Section 506.2.3. The allowable stress of axially
compression members shall be modified by the amlrOlrma:te
reduction factor Q, as provided in Section 502.6.2.2 item 3.
P~ilippines
 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
5-9 1,
angles:
When 200 I ..{F; -5, bit -5, 407 I ..{F; :

Qs:::; l.340-0.001702(blt)jF; (502-3)

When bit> 4071 ..jF; :

o : :; 106,870 (502-4)
_$ Fy(blti

or plates projecting from columns or other

members, and for projecting elements of
flanges of beams and girders:
When 2491JFy lk c -5,blt-5,512IJFy lk c :

Qs =1.293-0.001177(blt)JFy lkc (502-5)

When blt>512IJFy lk c :

Q = 180,640kc (502-6)
s Fy(bltf

stems of tees:
When 3331..jF; -5, bit -5, 462/ ..{F; :

Qs 1.908-0.00272(blt)..{F; (502-7)

When bl t > 462/..jF;:

Q :::; 137,900 (502-8)

s ~,(blt)2

"" width of unstiffened compression element as defined in

Section 502.6.1
=thickness ofunstiffened elements, mm
=specified minimum yield stress, MFa

kc == 4.0~46 if hlt>70, otherwise kc =1.0.

(hit) .
 5-10 STRUCTURAL STEEL

Table 502-1
:nnlnr'~lillnn Members
Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios
j---
Description of Element
Compact Non-compact
a
Flanges ofl-shaped rolled beams and channels in flexure
l701jF;
Flanges ofl-shaped welded beams in flexure
bit 170/ ~r:l' 250/
~--~-~--~-~-~~~-~--~---------~------~----- ----;---~~-- ............ ---~
Outstanding legs of pairs of angles in continuous contact; I

angles or plates projecting from rolled beams or columns; i b/t

NA
stiffeners on . I

Angles or plates projecting from girders, built-up columns or !

other compression members; compression flanges of plate i b/t

NA
i
Stems oftees NA 333/ jF;
1-=-:---:::::--.....-:--;-----:---:,--------::---:------ --,----;--+--- -----.--f----.--- - - - - ! - -.
Unstiffened elements simply supported along one edge, such

as legs of single-angle struts, legs of double-angle struts with

bit NA 200/ ~Fy
separators and cross or star-shaped cross sections

Flanges of square and rectangular box and hollow structural

sections of uniform thickness subject to bending or

500/ ~Fy 625/ ~Fy

c;mpressiond ; flange cover plates and diaphragm plates

between lines of fasteners or welds

Unsupported width of cover plates perforated with a

succession of access holesb NA

All other stiffened elements, i.e.,
NA

dt 1680/ ~Fy
;-------+----
1995/ ~Fy
Webs in combined flexural and axial compression

For > 0.16

675

"

'.
Circular hollow sections
In axial compression 22,750/ F~
Dd
In flexure 22,750/ Fy
For hybrid beams, use the yield the flange 1">1 instead of Fy.

b Assumes net area ofplat at widest hole.

e For design of slender sections that exceed the non-compact limits see Section 502.6.2.2.

d See also Section 506.4.1.

kc = 4.05 if h/t>70.othernise kc=l.O.

(h/t)0.46' .

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
5-11

Unstiffened elements of tees whose proportions exceed the For axially loaded circular sections:
limits of Section 502.6.1 shall conform to the limits given Members with diameter-to-thickness ratios Dlt greater than
in Table 502-2. 22,750IFy. but having a diameter-to-thickness ratio of less
than 89, 63 OIFy , shall not exceed the smaller value
2. Stiffened Compression Elements determined by Section 505.3 nor
F 4564 +OAF
When the width-thickness ratio of uniformly compressed a Df t Y (502-11)
stiffened elements (except perforated cover plates) exceeds
the non-compact limit stipulated in Section 502.6.1, a where:
reduced effective width be shall be used in computing the D outside diameter, mm
design properties of the section containing the element, t = wall thickness, mm
except that the ratio b.jt need not be taken as less than the
applicable value permitted in Section 502.6.1. 3. Design Properties

For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of Properties of sections shall be determined using the full
uniform thickness: cross section, except as follows:

132.1 <b
(bft).J]
j
\
(502-9) In computing the moment of the inertia and section
modulus of flexural members, the effective width of
uniformly compressed stiffened elements, as determined in
For other uniformly compressed elements: Section 502.6.2.2 item 2 shall be used in determining
effective cross-sectional properties.
b 6641
e..[j
[1- 116.3 l;f b
(b I t)..[j
(502-10) For stiffened elements of the cross section:
effective area
where:
(502-12)
b = actual width of a stiffened compression element, as
actual area
defined in Section 502.6.1, mm
be = reduced width, mm For unstiffened elements of the cross section, Qs is
t element thickness, mm determined from Section 502.6.2.2 item 1
f = computed compressive stress (axial plus bending
stresses in the stiffened elements, based on the design For axially loaded compression members the gross
properties as specified in Section 502.6.2.2, MPa. If sectional area and the radius of gyration r shall be
unstiffened elements are included in the total cross computed on the basis of the actual cross section.
section, f for the stiffened element must be such that
the maximum compressive stress in the unstiffened The allowable stress for axially loaded compression
element does not exceed FaUs or FbQ" as applicable. members containing unstiffened or stiftened shall not
exceed:
Table 502-2

Limitin ortioos for Chanoels and Tees

( (KI f 1')2
Ql1----- Fv
J
Ratio of full Ratio of flange 2C' 2
flange width to thickness to web F = c (502-13)
a 5 3(KI I r) (KI f r)3
stem thickness
:=---jc-..c....- - - -..
~
- + ..._..... -- - .-- ---
;f 3.00
-'--._.._.--1------
3 8C'c 8C' c 3
;f 2.00
when Klfr is less than C '", where
Built-up te~.!_-l--__~ ._,--,-_.___.._~._._ ..__._;;::_.1.25
Rolled tees I ;;:: 050 ;;:: 1.10

When the allowable stresses are increased due to wind or

seismic loading in accordance with the provisions of
and
Section 501.5.2, the effective width be shan be determined Q
QsQa
on the basis of 3/4 times the stress caused by wind or
a. Cross sections composed entirely of unstiffened
seismic loading acting alone or in combination with the
elements, Q = Qs i.e. (Q" = 1.0)
design dead and live loading.
b. Cross sections composed entirely of stiffened
elements, Q = Q" i.e. (Qs 1.0)

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

.. -.----.-.-.~-----
512 STRUCTURAL STEEL
c. Cross sections composed of both stiffened and
unstiffened elements, Q Qs Qa
When Kllr exceeds C 'c :
(502-14)
4. Combined Axial and Flexural Stress
In applying the provisions of Section 508 to members
subject to combined axial and flexural stress and containing
stiffened elements whose width-thickness ratio exceeds the
applicable non-compact limit given in Section 502.6.1, the
stresses Fa, fix; andfiy shall be calculated on the basis ofthe
section properties as provided in Section 502.6.2.2 item 3 as
applicable. The allowable bending stress Fb for members
containing unstiffened elements whose width-thickness
ratio exceeds the non-compact limit given in Section
502.6.1 shall be the smaller value, 0.60FyQs or that provided
in Section 506.2.3 The termjalO.60Fy in Equations (508-2)
and (506-30) shall be replaced by jJO.60FyQ.
502.7 ROTATIONAL RESTRAINT AT POINTS
OF SUPPORT
502.7.1 At points of support, beams, girders and trusses
shall be restrained against rotation about their longitudinal
axis.
502.8 LIMITING SLENDERNESS RATIOS
502.8.1 For members whose dj;sign is based on
compressive force, the slenderness ratio KPr preferably
should not exceed 200. If this limit is exceeded, the
allowance stress shall not exceed the value obtained from
Equation (505-2).
502.8.2 For members whose design is based on tensile
force, the slenderness ratio Ur preferably should not exceed
300. The above limitation does not apply to rods in tension.
Members which have been designed to perform as tension
members in a structural system, but experience some
compression loading, need not satisfy the compression
slenderness limit.
502.9 SIMPLE SPANS
502.9.1 Beams, girders and trusses designed on the basis of
simple spans shall have an effective length equal to the
distance between centers of gravity of the members to
which they deliver their end reactions.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
502.10 END RESTRAINT
502.10.1 When designed on the assumption of full or partial
end restraint due to continuous, semi-continuous or
cantilever action, the beams, girders and trusses, as well as
the sections of the members to which they connect, shall be
designed to carry the shears and moments so introduced as
well as all other forces, without exceeding at any point the
unit stresses prescribed in Sections 504 through 506, except
that some non-elastic but self-limiting deformation of a part
of the connection is permitted when this is essential to
avoid overstressing of fasteners.
502.11 PROPORTIONS OF BEAMS AND
GIRDERS
502.11.1 Rolled or welded shapes, plate girders and cover
plated beams shall, in general, be proportioned by the
moment of inertia of the gross section. No deduction shall
be made for shop or field bolt or rivet holes in either flange
provided that:
where Afg is the gross flange area and Afo is the net flange
area, calculated in accordance with the provisions 6f
Section 502.2 and 502.3.
502.11.2 If
the member flexural properties shall be
effective tension flange area Ate
5 FUA
Afe - - fil
6 F;,
502.11.3 Hybrid girders may be proportioned by the
moment of inertia of their gross section,' subject to the
applicable provisions in Section 507.2, provided they are
not required to resist an axial force greater than O.15Fy
times the area of the gross section, where Fy is the yield
stress of the flange material. To qualify as hybrid girders,
the flanges at any given section shall have the same cross
sectional area and be made of the same grade of steel.
No limit is placed on the web stresses produced by the applied
bending moment for which a hybrid girder is designed; except
as provided in Section 511.5.
 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
513

11.4 Flanges of welded beams or girders may be varied
thic:kness or width by splicing a series of plates or by the
of cover plates.
11.5 The total cross~sectional area of cover plates of
or riveted girders shall not exceed 70% of the total
502.12 PROPORTIONING OF CRANE
GIRDERS
502.12.1 The flanges of plate girders supporting cranes or
other moving loads shall be proportioned to resist the
horizontal forces produced by such loads.

1.6 High-strength bolts, rivets or welds connecting

to web, or cover plate to flange, shall be
t\nt~rtl,rm~t1 to resist the total horizontal shear resulting
the bending forces on the girder. The longitudinal
. of these bolts, rivets or intermittent welds shall
n proportion to the intensity of the shear. However, the
. spacing shall not exceed the maximum
ermllttt~<1 for compression or tension members in Section
or 505.5, respectively. Bolts, rivets or welds
cormelctirlg flange to web shall also be proportioned to
transnlit to the web any loads applied directly to the flange,
provision is made to transmit such loads by direct

_,>,.u,,,...... 7
Partial length cover plates shall be extended
the theoretical cut-off point and the extended
portion and the extended portion shall be attached to the
beam or girder by high-strength bolts in a slip-critical
connection, rivets or fillet welds adequate, at the applicable
stresses allowed in Sections 510.3.5,510.4.4, or 511.5, to
develop the cover plate's portion of the flexural stresses in
-the beam or girder at the theoretical cutoff point.

502.11.8 In addition, for welded cover plates, the welds

connecting the cover plate termination to the beam or girder
in the length a', defined below, shall be adequate, at the
allowed stresses, to develop the cover plate'S portion of the
flexural stresses in the beam or girder at the distance a'
from the end of the cover plate. The length a " measured
from the end of the cover plate, shall be:

A distance equal to the width of the cover plate when

there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than 3/4
of the plate thickness across the end of the plate and
continuous welds along both edges of the cover plate
in the length a '.
A distance equal to l1f2 times the width of the cover
plate when there is a continuous weld smaller than
3/4 of the plate thickness across the end of the plate
and continuous welds along both edges of the cover
plate in the length a'.
A distance equal to 2 times the width of the cover
plate when there is no weld across the end of the end
of the plate, but continuous welds along both edges
ofthe cover plate in the length a'.

National ~I Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 514 STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION 503 - FRAMES AND SECTION 504 - TENSION MEMBERS

OTHER STRUCTURES

503.1 SCOPE 504.1 SCOPE

503.1.1 This Section specifies general requirements to 504.1.1 This section applies to prismatic members subject
assure stability of the structure as a whole. to axial tension caused by forces acting through the
centroidal axis. For members subject to combined axial
tension and flexure, see Section 508.3. For members subject
to fatigue, see Section 511.5. For tapered members, see
503.2 GENERAL
Section 506.8. For threaded rods see Section 510.4.
503.2.1 In addition to meeting the requirements of member
strength and stiffhess, frames and other continuous
structures ~ll be designed to provide the needed 504.2 ALLOWABLE STRESS
deformation capacity and to assure over-all frame stability.
504.2.1 The allowable stress Fr shall not exceed 0.60Fy on
the gross area nor 0.50Fu on the effective net area. In
503.3. FRAME STABILITY addition, pin-connected members shall meet the
requirements of Section 504.4.1 at the pinhole.
503.3.1 Braced Frames
504.2.2 Block shear strength shall be checked at end
In trusses and in those frames where lateral stability is connections oftension members in accordance with Section
, provided by adequate attachment to diagonal bracing, to 510.5.
shear walls, to an adjacent structure having adequate lateral
stability or to floor slabs or roof decks secured horizontally 504.2.3 Eyebars shall meet the requirements of Section
by walls or bracing systems parallel to the plane of the 504.4.1.
frame, the effective length factor K for the compression
members shall be taken as unity, unless analysis shows that
a smaller value is permitted.
504.3 BUILT-UP MEMBERS
503.3.2 Unbraced Frames
504.3.1 The longitudinal spacing of connectors between
elements in continuous contact consisting of a plate and a
In frames where lateral stability is dependent upon the
shape or two plates shall not exceed:
bending stiffiless of rigidly connected beams and columns,
,..
"'".' the effective length K1 of compression members shall be
24 times the thickness of the thinner plate, nor
determined by analysis and shall not be less than the actual
'\
~I
300 mm for painted members or unpainted
unbraced length.
'It.. :
members not subject to corrosion.

14 times the thickness of the thinner plate, nor

175 mm for unpainted members of weathering
steel subject to atmospheric corrosion.
\
504.3.2 In a tension member the longitudinal spacing of
fasteners and intermittent welds connecting two or more
shapes in contact shall not exceed 600 mm. Tension
members composed of two or more shapes or plates
separated by intermittent fillers shall be connected to one
another at these fillers at intervals such that the slenderness
ratio of either component between the fasteners does not
exceed 300.

504.3.3 Either perforated cover plates or tie plates without

lacing are permitted on the open sides of built-up tension
members. Tie plates shall have a length not less than 2/3 the
distance between the lines of welds or fasteners connecting

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 TENSION MEMBE~S
5-15

to the components of the member. The thickness of 504.4.3 Eyebars

tie plates shall not be less than 1150 of the distance
these lines. The longitudinal spacing of 504.4.3.1 Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness, without
"rn"ittf"nt welds or fasteners at tie plates shall not exceed reinforcement at the pinholes, and have circular heads
whose periphery is concentric with the pin hole. The
radius of the transition between the circular head and the
The spacing of tie plates shall be such that the eyebar body shall not be less than the diameter of the
"nnf"rne!':>!ratio of any component in the length between head.
plates should preferably not exceed 300.
504.4.3.2 For calculation purposes, the width of the
body of an eyebar shall not exceed 8 times its thickness.
PIN-CONNECTED MEMBERS
504.4.3.3 The thickness may be less than 12 mm only if
Allowable Stress external nuts are provided to tighten pin plates into snug
contact. For calculation purposes, the distance from the
The allowable stress on the net area of the pinhole
;:.,,,'...."7,,-1 . . . hole edge to plate edge perpendicular to the direction of
pin-connected members is 0.45Fy . The bearing stress on the applied load shall not be less than 2/3 nor greater
projected area of the pin shall not exceed the stress than 3/4 times the width of the eyebar body.
,,,11.,,,,,,.11 in Section 510.9.
504.4.3.4 The pin diameter shall be not less than 7/8
The allowable stress on eyebars meeting the times the eyebar width.
,,.,..,ir"m,nt,, of Section 504.4.3 is 0,60Fy on the body area.
504.4.3.5 The pinhole diameter shall be no more than
";''''...'1.,,, Pin-connected Plates n 8 mm greater than the pin diameter.
;''''.'1.",.1 The minimum net area beyond the pinhole, 504.4.3.6 For steel having a yield stress greater than 483
nJlJraliel to the axis of the member, shaH not be less than 2/3 MPa, the hole diameter shall not exceed 5 times the
the net area across the pinhole. plate thickness and the width of the eyebar shall be
reduced accordingly.
The distance used in calculations, transverse to
h ;:;;>:lU't.''t.'"'.'''
the axis of pin-connected plates or any individual element
of a built-up member, from the edge of the pinhole to the
edge ofthe member or element shall not exceed 4 times the
thickness at the pinhole. For calculation purposes, the
distance from the edge of the pin hole to the edge of the
plate or to the edge of a separated element of a built-up
member at the pinhole, shall not be assumed to be more
than 4/5 times the diameter ofthe pinhole.

, 504.4.2.3 For pin-connected members in which the pin is

expected to provide for relative movement between
connected parts while under full load, the diameter of the
pinhole shall not be more than 0.8 mm greater than the
diameter of the pin.

504.4.2.4 The corners beyond the pin hole may be cut at 45

to the axis of the member, provided the net area beyond the
pin hole, on a plane perpendicular to the cut, is not less than
that perpendicular to the direction ofthe applied load.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 5-16 STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION 505 - COLUMNS AND 505,4 FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING

OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS 505.4.1 Singly symmetric and unsymmetric columns, such
as angles or tee-shaped columns, and doubly symmetric
columns such as cruciform or built-up columns with very
thin walls, may require consideration of flexural-torsional
505.1 SCOPE and torsional Quckling.

505.1.1. This section applies to prismatic members with

compact and non-compact sections subject to axial
compression through the centroidal axis. For members with
slender elements, see Section 502.6.2. For members subject
to combined axial compression and flexure, see Section
508. For tapered members, see Section 506.8.
505.5 BUILT-UP MEMBERS
505.5.1 All parts of built-up compression members and the
transverse spacing of their lines of fasteners shall meet
requirements of Section 502.8.

505.5.2 For spacing and edge distance requirements for

505.2 EFFECTIVE LENGTH AND SLENDER
NESS RATIO
595.2.1 The effective-length factor K shall be determined in
accordance with Section 503.3.
505.2.2 In determining the slenderness ratio of an axially
f loaded compression member, the length shall be taken as its
effective length Kl and r as the corresponding radius of
gyration. For fimiting slenderness ratios, see Section 502.8.
505.3 ALLOWABLE STRESS
.... " maximum longitudinal spacing of bolts, rivets or
505.3.1 On the gross section of axially loaded compression
members whose cross sections meet the provisions of Table
502-1, when Kllr, the largest effective slenderness ratio of
any unbraced segment is less than Cc , the allowable stress
is:
weathering steel members, see Section 510.4. 10.
505.5.3 At the ends of built-up compression members
bearing on base plates or milled surfaces, all components in'
contact with one another shall be connected by rivets
bolts spaced longitudinally not more than 4 diameters apart
for a distance equal to 1112 times the maximum width of the
member, or by continuous welds having a length not less
than the maximum width ofthe member.
505.5.4 The longitudinal spacing for intermediate bolts,
rivets or intermittent welds in built-up members shall be
adequate to provide for the transfer of calculated stress. The
intermittent welds connecting two rolled shapes in contact
shall not exceed 600 mm. In addition, for painted members
and unpainted members not subject to corrosion where the
outside component consists of a plate, the maximum
longitudinal spacing shall not exceed:

1- (K!/ r)2 )F 333 1 JF; times the thickness ofthe outside

[ 2C 2 Y plate nor 300 mm when fasteners are not
F = c (505-1) staggered along adjacent gage lines.
a 5 3 Kllr (Kllr)3
+---_._-
3 8 Cc 8e c 3 5001.JF; times the thickness ofthe outside
plate nor 450 mm when fasteners are staggered
\ where: along adjacent gage lines.

(505-1a) 505.5.5 Compression members composed of two or more

rolled shapes separated by intermittent fillers shall be
connected at these fillers at intervals such that the
505.2.2 On the gross section of axially loaded slenderness ratio KFr of either shape, between the fasteners
compression members, when KI/r exceeds Cc the does not exceed 3/4 times the governing slenderness
allowable stress is: of the built-up member. The least radius of gyration r shaH
2 be used in computing the slenderness ratio of
F = 12n E
(505-2) component part. At least two intermediate connectors
a 23(Kllr)2
be used along the length of the built-up member.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS
5-17

All connections, including those at the ends, shall 505.6 PIN-CONNECTED COMPRESSION
1
i

welded or shall utilize high-strength bolts tightened to MEMBERS

requirements of Table 510-12.
505.6.1 Pin-connection of pin-connected compression
7 Open sides of compression members built-up from members shall conform to the requirements of Section
or shapes shall be provided with lacing having tie 504.4.
at each end and at intermediate points if the lacing is
Tie plates shall be as near the ends as
I1"Ll"U'Lll.-. In main members carrying calculated stress, the
505.7 COLUMN WEB SHEAR
plates shall have a length of not less than the
.<1u,tarlce between the lines of fasteners or welds connecting 505.7.1 Column connections must be investigated for
to the components of the member. Intermediate tie concentrated force introduction in accordance with
shall have a length not less than 1/2 of this distance. Section 511.2.
thickness of tie plates shall not be less than 1/50 of the
distance between the lines of fasteners or welds connecting
them to the components of the member. In bolted and
riveted construction, the spacing in the direction of stress in
tie plates shall not be more than 6 diameters and the tie
shall be connected to each component by at least 3
fasteners. In welded construction, the welding on each line
connecting a tie plate shall aggregate not less than 1/3 the
of the plate.

505.5.8 Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels or

other shapes employed as lacing, shall be so spaced that the
ratio //r of the flange included between their connections
. shall not exceed 3/4' times the governing ratio for the
member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to resist a
shearing stress normal to the axis of the member equal to
2% of the total compressive stress in the member. The ratio
fir for lacing bars arranged in single systems shall not
exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio shall not exceed
200. Double. 'hicing bars shall be joined at their
intersections. For lacing bars in compression the
unsupported length of the lacing bar shall be taken as the
distance between fasteners or welds connecting it to the
component of the built-up member for single lacing, and
70% of that distance for double lacing. The inclination of
lacing bars to the axis of the member shall preferably be not
than 60 for single lacing and 45 for double lacing.
When the distance. between the lines of fasteners or welds
in the flanges is more than 380 mm., the lacing preferably
shall be double or be made of angles.

505.5.9 The function of tie plates and lacing may be

performed by continuous cover plates perforated with
access holes. The unsupported width of such plates at
access holes, as defined in Section 502.6, is assumed
available to resist axial stress, provided that: the width-to
thickness ratio conforms to the limitations of Section
502.6; the ratio of length (in direction of stress) to width of
holes shall not exceed 2; the clear distance between holes in
the direction of stress shall be not less than the transverse
distance between nearest lines of connecting fasteners or
welds; and the periphery of the holes at all points shall have
a minimum radius of38 mm.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 5-18 STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 506 - BEAMS AND OTHER
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
506.1 SCOPE
506.1.1 Beams shall be distinguished from plate girders on
the basis of the web slenderness ratio hlw. When this value
is greater than the 2547 I ~Fy> allowable bending
stress is given in Section 507. The allowable shear stresses
and stiffener requirements are given in Section 506 unless
tension field action is used, then the allowable shear
stresses are given in Section 507.
506.1.2 This Section applies to singly or doubly symmetric
beams including hybrid beams and girders loaded in the
plane of symmetry. It also applies to channels loaded in a
plane passing through the shear center parallel to the web or
restrained against twisting at load points and points of
support. For members subject to combined flexural and
axial force, see Section 508.2.
506.2 ALLOWABLE STRESS: STRONG AXIS
BENDING OF I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND
CHANNELS
506.2.1 Members with Compact Sections
506.2.1.1 For members with compact sections as defined in
Section 502.6.1 (excluding hybrid beams and members with
yield points greater than 448 MPa) symmetrical about, and
loaded in, the plane of their minor axis the allowable stress
IS:
F" =0.66F.v (506-1 )
provided the flanges are connected continuously to the web
or webs and the laterally unsupported length of the
compression flange Lh does not exceed the value of Le , as
given by the smaller of:
200bf 137,900
- - or-----'- (506-2)
,JF; (dIAf)Fy
506.2.1.2 Members (including composite members and
excluding hybrid members and members with yield points
greater than 448 MPa) which meet the requirements for
compact sections and are continuous over supports or
rigidly framed to columns, may be proportioned for 9/1 0 of
the negative moments produced by gravity loading when
such moments are maximum at points of support, \provided
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
that, for such members, the maximum positive m(lml~ntj,
increased by 1110 of the average negative moments.
reduction shall not apply to moments produced by
on cantilevers. If the negative moment is resisted
column rigidly framed to the beam or girder, the
reduction is permitted in proportioning the column for
combined axial and bending loading, provided that
stress fa due to any concurrent axial load on the
does not exceed 0.15Fa.
506.2.2 Members with Non-cGmpact Sections
506.2.2.1 For members meeting the requirements of
506.2.1 except that their flanges are
(excluding built-up members and members with
points greater than 448 MFa), the allowable stress is:
506.2.2.2 For built-up members meeting the r"'r"'ir"'...... ""
of Section 506.2.1 except that their flanges are D0I1-C()ml
and their webs are compact or non-compact,
hybrid girders and members with yield points greater
448 MPa) the allowable stress is:
where:
k = 4.05
if h'lw > 70, otherwise ke = 1
C (hI I.,., )0.46
506.2.2.3 For members with a non-compact
(Section 502.6), but not included above, and
through the shear center and braced laterally in the
of compression stress at intervals not exc:eeidin
200b f l ~F.p
the allowable stress is:
Fb 0.60.z.:v
506.2.3 Members with Compact or Non-compact
Sections with Unbraced Length Greater than L"
506.2.3.1 For flexural members with compact or
compact sections as defined in Se.ction 502.6.1, and
unbraced lengths greater than I.e as defined in
506,2.1, the allowable bending stress in tension
determined from Equation (506-5).
506.2.3.2 For such members with an axis of symmetry
and loaded in the plane of their web, the
 BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
stress in compression is detennined as the larger
from Equations (506-6) or (506-7) and (506-8),
that Equation (506-8) is applicable only to sections
compression flange that is solid and approximately
in cross section and that has an area not less
tension flange. Higher values of the allowable
. stress are permitted if justified by a more
analysis. Stresses shall not exceed those pennitted
507, if applicable.
For channel bent about their major axis, the
compressive stress is determined from Equation
When
(506-6)
When
(506-7)
For any value of llrT:
F =~2,740Cb ~0.60F (506-8)
b (ld/ AI) Y
. where:
I = distance between cross sections braced against twist
or lateral displacements of the compression flange,
mm. For cantilevers braced against twist only at the
support, I may conservatively be taken as the actual
length.
radius of gyration of a section comprising the
compression flange plus 1/3 of the compression web
area, taken about an axis in the plane ofthe web, mm
area of the compression flange, mm2
i,
1. 75 + 1.05 (Mr M 2 ) + 0.3 (M1!M2 but not more
than 2.3', M J is the smaller andM2 the larger bending
moment at the ends of the unbraced length, taken
about the strong axis of the member, and where
M J.M2 , the ratio of end moments, is positive when
M1 and M2 have the same sign (reverse curvature
----.-----.--~
It is conservative to take Cb as unity. For values smaller than
2.3, see Table 6 in the Numerical Values Section.
National Structural Code of thePhilippines,Vohme 1
5-19
bending) and negative when they are of opposite
signs (single curvature bending). When the bending
moment at any point within an unbraced length is
larger than that at both ends of this length, the value
of Cb shall be taken as unity. When computing Fbx to
be used in Equation (508-1), Cb may be computed by
the equation given above for frames subject to joint
translation, and it shall be taken as unity for frames
braced against joint translation. Cb may
conservatively be taken as unity for cantilever
beams."
506.2.3.4 For hybrid plate girders, Fy for Equations (506-6)
and (506-7) is the yield stress of the compression flange.
Equation (506-8) shall not apply to hybrid girders.
Section 506.2.3 does not apply to tee sections if the sections
if the stem is in compression anywhere along the unbraced
length.
506.3 ALLOWABLE STRESS: WEAK AXIS
BENDING OF I-SHAPED MEMBERS, SOLID
BARS AND RECTANGULAR PLATES
506.3.1 Lateral bracing is not required for members loaded
through the shear center about their weak axis nor for
members of equal strength about both axes.
506.3.1.1 Memhers With Compact Sections
506.3.1.1.1 For doubly symmetrical 1- and H-shape
members with compact flanges (Section 502.6)
continuously connected to the web and bent about their
weak axes (except members with yield points greater than
448 MFa); solid ,round and square bars; and solid
rectangular sections bent about their weaker axes, the
allowable stress is:
(506-9)
506.3.1.2 Members With Non-compact Sections
506.3.1.2.1' For members not meeting the requirements for
compact sections of Section 502.6 and not covered in
Section 506.4, bent about their minor axis, the allowable
stress is
(506-10)
506.3.1.2.2 Doubly symmetrical 1- and H-shape members
bent about their weak axes (except members with yield
points greater than 448 MFa) with non-compact flanges
For the use oflarger Cb values, see Guide to Stability Design
Criteria for Metal Structures, 4th Edition, Galambos (1988).
--.-.---~-.----
 5-20 STRUCTURAL STEEL

(Section 502.6) continuously connected to the web may be 506.5 ALLOWABLE SHEAR STRESS
designed on the basis of an allowable stress of:
506.5.1 For on hltw::::;998/~F.l" the overall depth
b '\ the web thickness, the allowable shear stress is:
Fb=Fy [ 1.075 0.00192~JF;j (506-11)
F.., 0.40 r:v
506.5.2 For hltw >998/.[F;~ the allowable
506.4 ALLOWABLE STRESS: BENDING OF stress is on the clear distance between flanges times the
BOX MEMBERS, RECTANGULAR TUBES AND thickness is:
Fy
CIRCULAR TUBES Fy = --(C,.)::::; 0.40F..
2.89 .
506.4.1 Members With Compact Sections
where:
506.4.1.1 For members bent about their strong or weak
axes, members with compact sections as defined in Section 31O,264kv C
C" = 2 when y IS less than 0.8
502.6 and flanges continuously connected to the webs, the Fy(hlt ... )
allowable stress is:
=500 ~fk,:-
- - - - w hen ( ,
v .Ismorethan 0 .8
hit.,. Fy
(506-12)

506.4.1.2 To be classified as a compact section, a box kv =4.00+~when a/h is less than 1.0
shaped member shall have, in addition to the requirements (al h)2
tin Section 502.6, a depth not greater than 6 times the width,
a flange thickness not greater than 2 times the web thickness =5.34+~when a'h is more than l.0
and a laterall y unsupported length Lb less than or equal to: (al h)2
t,. = thickness of web, mm
a clear distance between transverse stiffeners, rom
(
Lc = l13,445 MI) -b, rom
+8,275- (506-13) h = clear distance between flanges at the section
M2 Fy investigation, mm

except that it need not be less than 8,275(b/Fy),
where M J is the smaller and J.12 the larger bending
moment at the ends of the unbraced length, taken
about the strong axis of the member, and where
MiM2, the ratio of end moments, is positive when
M J and M2 have the same sign (reverse curvature
bending) and negative when they are of opposite
signs (single curvature bending).
506.5.3 For shear rupture on coped beam end cormelchC'1\1
see Section 510.5.
506.5.4 Maximum hit", limits are given in Section 507.
506.5.5 An alternative design method for plate
utilizing tension field action is given in Section 507.

506.4.2 Members With Non-compact Sections 506.6 TRANSVERSE STIFFENERS

506.4.2.1 For box-type and tubular flexural members that 506.6.1 Intermediate stiffeners are required when the
meet the non-compact section requirements of Section hit", is greater than 260 and the maximum web shear
502.6, the allowable stress is: /vis greater than that permitted by Equation (506-16).

(506-14) 506.6.2 The spacing of intermediate stiffeners,

required, shall be such that the web shear stress will
506.4.2.2 Lateral bracing is not required for a box section exceed the value for Fv given by Equation (506-16)
whose depth is less than 6 times its width. Lateral-support (507-4), as applicable, and
requirements for box sections of larger depth-to-width
a ( 260 ,\2
ratios must be determined by special analysis. -::::; - - - ) and 3.0
h (hltw)

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS 5-21

7 BUILT-UP MEMBERS When the effective slenderness ratio S is less than Cc :

7.1 Where two or more rolled beams or channels are

side-by-side to form a flexural member, they shall be (
1.0 S2 JFy
2C c 2

;onnectea together at intervals of not more than 1.5 meter.

Fay = 5 3S S3 (506-19)
olllzh-,OOlts and separators are permitted, provided that, -+----
beams having a depth of 300 mm or more, no fewer than 3 8C c 8Cc 3
bolts shall be used at each separator location. When

;onceIJttrated loads are carried from one beam to the other, When the effective slenderness ratio S exceeds C :

distributed between the beams, diaphragms having

121[2 E
,uu.,,""'" stiffness to distribute the load shall be riveted, Fay (506-20)
bolted or welded between the beams. 23S 2
where:
S Kilroy for weak axis bending and Kjlrox for strong axis
WEB-TAPERED MEMBERS bending
K = effective length factor for a prismatic member
The design of tapered members meeting theKr = effective length factor for a tapered member as determined
requirements of this Section shall be governed by the by an analysis
provisions of Section 506. I = actual unbraced length of member, mm
rox strong axis radius of gyration at the smaller end of a tapered
506.8.2 General Requirements member, mm
roy = weak axis radius of gyration at the smaller end of tapered
;)U~,.o .",.1 In order to qualify under this Specification, a member, mm
tapered member must meet the following requirements:
506.8.5 Allowable Flexural Stress"
It shall' possess at least one axis of symmetry which
shall be perpendicular to the plane of bending if 506.8.5.1 Tension and compression stresses on extreme
moments are present. fibers of tapered flexural members, in MPa, shall not
The flanges shall be of equal and constant area. exceed the following values:

-~[1 ~v IF
The depth shall vary linearly as:

d
( ~)
doll+Y ~ (506-18)
K.
VI - 3 .
0-
6B IF + F j <060F
"sy
2
'W'!
2 Y -. Y
(506-21)

where:

do = depth at smaller end of member, mm unless fi,y:::; F/3, in which case

dL = depth at larger end of member, mm

'Y (dL _do)/do :::; the smaller of O. 268 (Lido) or 6.0 Ffrt =B~Fsy2+F,*/ (506-22)

distance from the smaller end of member, mm

unbraced length of member measured between the

center of gravity of the bracing members, mm In the above equations,

F = 82,740
506.8.3 Allowable Tensile Stress (506-23)
sy hsLdo I AJ
506.8.3.1 The allowable tensile stress of tapered tension
members shall be determined in accordance with Section (506-24)
504.2.
where:
506.8.4 Allowable Compressive Stress h, = factor equal to 1.0+0.0230'Y~Ldo I AJ
506.8.4.1 On the gross section of axially loaded tapered
h". = factor equal to 1.0+0.00385y~LI r To
"nrnnT"'.....inn members, the allowable compressive stress, in radius of gyration of a section at the smaller end,
MPa, shall not exceed the following: considering only the compression flange. plus 1/3

See Commentary Appendix F7.3 of the M..anual of Steel Construction,

Allowable Stress Design. 9th Edition.
"See CommentaIy Appendix F7A of the Manual of Steel Construction,
Allowable Stress Design. 9th Editi.on.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

5-22 STRUCTURAL STEEL

of the compression web area, taken about an axis
in the plane of the web, mm
Af = area of the compression flange, mm2
and where B is determined as follows:
a. When the maximum moment M2 in three adj'acent
segments of approximately equal unbraced length is
506.8.6.1 The allowlihle shear stress of tapered flexural
members shall be in accordance with Section :06 5.
506.8.7 Combined Flexural and Axial Force
~I
506.8.7.1 Tapered members and unbraced ~egments thereof I
subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses I
shall be proportioned to satisfy the following requirement:

(~: (;~J (k
located withirf'he central segment and M J is the
larger moment at one end of the three-segment
portion of a member: J+ J< LO (506-29)1
F' ey
B=I+0.37(1+ Ml J+0.50 Y(I+ Ml J~1.0 (506-25)
-~-
- M2 M2 and ~~
-~~
fa + fh 1.0
(506-30)~
:0;
b. When the largest computed bending stress fb2 occurs 0.60}~ Ffry
at the larger end of two adjacent segments of
appropriately equal unbraced lengths and fbJ is the
computed bending stress at the smaller end of the WhenfaJFay:O; 0.15, Equation (506-31) is permitted in lieu
two-segment portion of a member:' ofEquations (506-29) and (506-30),

B = 1+0.58(1+ fbI J-0.70 Y(I+ fbi J ~ 1.0 (506-26)

fao + fbi
Fay F by
:0; 1.0
fb2 fb2
where:
c. When the largest computed bending stress .fb2 occurs Fay= axial compressive stress permitted in the absence of
at the smaller end of two adjacent segments of bending moment, MPa
approximately equal unbraced length and fh! is the bending stress permitted in the absence of axial
computed bending stress at the larger end of the two force, MPa
segment portion of a member:' Euler stress divided by factor of safety, MPa, equal
B =1+ 0.55(1 + fbi J + 2.2Y(1 + fbi J ~ 1.0 (506-27)
to:
fb2 fb2

In the foregoing, Y = (dL - do)/do is calculated for the where lb is the actual unbraced length in the plane of
unbraced length containing the maximum computed bending and rbo is the corresponding radius of gyration at its
bending stress. smaller end
.fao = computed axial stress at the smaller end of the
d. When the computed bending stress at the smaller end member or unbraced segment thereof, as applicable,
of a tapered member or segment thereof is equal to MPa
zero: fbI = computed bending stress at the larger end of the
B= 1.75 member or unbraced segment thereof, as applicable,
(506-28) MPa
1+0.25.[y
C'm= coefficient applied to bending term In
equation

1+0.1[:~O J+0.3[:~0 J2
where Y = (dL - do)/do , calculated for the unbraced length
adjacent to the point of zero bending stress. = (506-33)
e; <..""1

506.8.6 Allowable Shear when the member is subjected to end moments which cause
single curvature bending and approximately equal
computed bending stresses at the ends
,\111112 is considered as negative when producing single CUTyature. In the
rare case where M/N!2 is positive, it is recommended it be taken as zero. = faa 1+ rfaa Y
l-o.l F') 0 .6
'/b1!fi2 is considered as negative when producing single curvature. If a I F')
<"'{ \. ey
point 9f contrafiell:ure occurs in one of two adjacent unbraced segments,
fi,/fi,:! i~ considered as positive. The ratiofi,/fi,:! '" O.

Association of Structural EJlQineers of the Philippines

 PLATE GIRDERS
5-23

the computed bending stress at the smaller end of the SECTION 507 - PLATE GIRDERS
length is equal to zero.

Kllr 2: Cc and combined stresses are checked 507.1 SCOPE

along the length, fao may be replaced by fa,
\;U1''''1'''''''1

may be replaced by A in Equations (506-29) and

1). 507.1.1 Plate girders shall be distinguished from beams on
the basis of the web slenderness ratio 11 't,... When this value
is greater than the 2547/.[i;~ provisions of this
Section shall apply for allowable bending stress, otherwise
Section 506 is applicable.

507.1.2 For alIowable shear stress and transverse stiffener

design see appropriate Articles in Section 506 or this
section if tension field action is utilized.

507.2 WEB SLENDERNESS LIMITATIONS

507.2.1 When no transverse stiffeners are provided or when

transverse stiffeners are spaced more than 1lh times the
distance between flanges:
!!.- < 96,530
(507-1)
t,., - .JFy(Fy + 114)

507.2.2 When transverse stiffeners are provided, spaced not

more than llh times the distance between flanges:
h 5,250
<-- (507-2)
tll' - ~F.vf

507.3 ALLOWABLE BENDING STRESS

507.3.1 When the web depth-to-thickness ratio exceeds the

254 7/.[i;~ maximum bending stress in the
compression flange shall not exceed:

(507-3)

where:
Fb = applicable bending stress given in Section
506,MPa

RPG =1 0.0005 A,. (!!.-1996J:S;LO

Af t JF;

A
12 + --2!..(3a. -0.3)
Re=--........::.---- .0

(non-hybrid girders, Re = 1.0)

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 524
Aw= area of web at the section under investigation, mm2
Af = area of compression flange, mm2
a = 0.6 FywlFb ~ 1.0
507.4 ALWWABLE SHEAR STRESS WITH
TENSION FIELD ACTION
507.4.1 Except as herein provided, the largest average web
shear,!., in MPa, computer for any condition of complete or
partial loading, shall not exceed the value given by
Equation (506-16).
507.4.2 Alternatively, for girders other than hybrid girders,
if intermediate stiffeners are provided and spaced to satisfY
the provisions of Section 507.5 and if C" ~ I, the allowable
shear including tension field action given by Equation (507
4) is permitted in lieu of the value given by Equation (506
16).
+ I-Cv
1.15~1 +(alh)2
) (507-4)*
507.5 TRANSVERSE STIFFENERS
507.5.1 Transverse stiffeners shall meet the requirements of
"",
Section 506.6.
507.5.2 In girders designed on the basis of tension field
action, the spacing between stiffeners at end panels, at
panels containing large holes, and at panels adjacent to
panels containing large holes shall be such that Iv does not
exceed the value given by Equation (506-16).
'~ : tension flange, provided bearing is not needed to transmit
507.5.3 Bolts and rivets connecting stiffeners to the girder
web shall be spaced not more than 300 mm. on centers. If
intermittent fillet welds are used, the clear distance between
welds shall not be more than 16 times the web thickness nor
more than 250 mm.
507.5.4 The moment of inertia, 1st. of a pair of intermediate
stiffeners, or a single intermediate stiffener, with reference
to an axis in the plane of the web, shall be limited as
follows:
(507-5)
507.5.5 The gross area (total area, when stiffeners are
furnished in pair), in mm2 , of intermediate stiffeners spaced
as required for Equation (507-4) shall be not less than:
Equation (507-4) recognizes the contribution of tension field action.
Assochltion of structural Engineers of the Philippines
STRUCTURAL STEEL
A l-c,,[a (alh)2 \
s( =~ ~:[~+(al(i)/;J.YDh)t.
AS( - -- - YDht
2 h ~1+(alh)2
where:
C'" a, h, and t are as defined in Section 506.5
Y = ratio of yield stress of web steel to yield stress
stiffener steel
D = 1.0 for stiffeners furnished in pairs
1.8 for single angle stiffeners
2.4 for single plate stiffeners
507.5.6 When the greatest shear stress.tv in a panel is
than that permitted by Equation (507-4), the reduction
this gross area requirements is permitted in like proportion.
507.5.7 Intermediate stiffeners required by Equation
4) shall be connected for a total shear transfer, in N
linear millimeter of single stiffener or pair of stiffeners,
less than:
j,., h (5:~ J
where Fy = yield stress ofweb steel, MPa.
507.5.8 This shear. transfer may be reduced in the
proportion that the largest computed shear stress j;, in
adjacent panels is less than that permitted by JJI.J'L.li1L1Ul
(507-4). However, rivets and welds in
stiffeners which are required to transmit to the web
applied concentrated load or reaction shall be nr"nr,.-t;,... n",
for not less than the applied load or reaction.
507.5,9 Intermediate stiffeners may be stopped short of
concentrated load or reaction. The weld by
intermediate stiffeners are attached to the web shall
terminated not closer than 4 times nor more than 6 times
web thickness from the near toe of the web-to-flange
When single stiffeners are used, they shall be attached
the compression flange, if it consists of rectangu lar plate, .
resist any uplift tendency due to torsion in the plate.
lateral bracing is attached to a stiffener, or a pair
stiffeners, in tum, these shall he connected to
compression flange to transmit 1% of the total flange
unless the flange is composed only ofangles.
 PLATE GIRDERS & COMBINED STRESSES
Plate girder webs which depend upon tension field
as provided in Equation (507-4), shall be so
.~~,"'u"""'rl that bending tensile stress, due to moment in
plane of the girder web, shall not exceed 0.60Fy . nor
( 0.825 - 0.375 fv IFy (507-8)
\ Fl')
computed average web shear stress (total shear
divided by web area), MPa
allowable web shear stress according to Equation
(507-4), l\tIPa
The allowable shear stress in the webs of girders
flanges and webs with yield point greater than 448
shall not exceed the values given by Equation (506
ifthe flexural stress in the flange./i, exceeds 0.75ft,.
National Structural Code
525
SECTION 508 - COMBINED
STRESSES
508.1 SCOPE
508.1.1 The strength of members subjected to combined
stresses shall be determined according to the provisions of
this Section.
508.1.2 This Section pertains to doubly and singly
symmetrical members only. See Section 505 for
determination of Fa and Section 506 for determination of
Fhx and Fby .
508.2 AXIAL COMPRESSION AND BENDING
508.2.1 Members subjected to both axial compression and
bending stresses shall be proportioned to satisfY the
following requirements:
(508-1)
(508-2)
when fi/Fa ~ 0.15, Equation (508-3) is permitted in lieu of'
Equations (508-1) and (508-2):
fa +Ar + iby ~1.0 (508-3)
Fa FOT Fby
508.2.2 In Equations (508..:1), (508-2) and (508-3), the
subscripts x and y, combined with subscripts b, m and e,
indicate the axis of bending about which a particular stress
or design properly applies, and
Fa = axial compressive stress that would be permitted if
. axial force alone existed, MPa
Fb = compressive bending stress that would be permitted
if bending moment alone existed, MPa
121t2 E
F' e
Euler stress divided by a factor of safety, MPa(In the
expression for F'e, I" is the actual unbraced length in
the plane of bending and rb is the corresponding
radius of gyration. K is the effective length factor in
the plane of bending) As in the case of Fa, F" and
of the Philippines, Volume 1
 5-26 STRUCTURAL STEEL

0.60~., F'e may be increased 113 in accordance with 508.3.2 However the computed bending compressive
Section 501.5.2. stress arising from an independent load source relative to
the axial tension, taken above, shall not exceed the
fa computed axial stress, MFa applicable value required in Section 506.
,in = computed compressive bending stress at the point
under consideration, MFa

c Coefficient whose value shall be taken as follows:

a. For compression members in frames subject to joint

translation (sidesway),

0.85

b. For rotationally restrained compression members in

frames braced against joint translation and not

subject to transverse loading between their supports

in the plane of bending,

CIII =0.6 0.4(M j /M 2 )

where M r M 2 is the ratio of the smaller to larger

moments at the ends of the portion of the member

unbraced in the plane of bending under

consideration. MI'M2 is positive when the member is

bent in reverse curvature, negative when bent in

single curvature.

c. For compression members in frames braced against

joint translation in the plane of loading and subjected

to transverse loading between their supports, the

value of em may be determined by an analysis.

'I 1
However, in lieu of such analysis, the following

values are permitted:

\' ,
"
i'l i. For members whose ends are restrained against
, ,,
~"
rotation in the plane of bending,
em = 0.85
~ :-1
11. For members whose ends are unrestrained against

rotation in the plane of bending,

~
-1 em == 1.0

508.3 AXIAL TENSION AND BENDING

508.3.1 Members subject to both axial tension and bending

stresses shall be proportioned at all points along their length

to satisfy the following equation:

(508-4)

where Ji> is the computed bending tensile stress, .f~ is the

computed axial tensile stress, Fh is the allowable bending

stress and Ft is the governing aiJowable tensile stress

defined in Section 504.2.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
.SECTION 509 - COMPOSITE
on shoring) and, acting in conjunction with the slab, to
CONSTRUCTION
the concrete, without exceeding a computed bending stress
509.1 SCOPE
509.1.1 This Section applies to steel beams supporting a
reinforced concrete slab so interconnected that the beams
and the slab act together to resist bending. Simple and
.. continuous composite beams with shear connectors and
concrete-encased beams, constructed with or without
temporary shores, are included.
509.2 DEFINITION
509.2.1 Two cases of composite members are recognized:
Totally encased members which depend upon natural bond
for interaction with the concrete and those with shear
connectors (mechanical anchorage to the slab) with the steel
member not necessarily encased.
509.2.2 A b~am totally encased in concrete cast integrally
with the slab may be assumed to be connected to the
.concrete by natural bond, without additional anchorage,
provided that:
1. Concrete cover over beam sides and soffit is at least
50mm.
2. The top of the beam is at least 38 mm below the top
and 50 mm above bottom of the slab.
3. Concrete encasement contains adequate mesh or
other reinforcing steel throughout the whole depth
and across the soffit ofthe beam to prevent spalling
of the concrete.
509.2.3 Shear connectors must be provided for composite
action if the steel member is not totally encased in concrete.
The portion of the effective width of the concrete slab on
each side ofthe beam centerline shall not exceed:
a. One-eighth of the beam span, center-to-center of
supports;
S4J Ss +
b. One-half the distance to the centerline of the adjacent
beam; or
c. The distance from the beam centerline to the edge of
the slab.
509.3 DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS
509.3.1 Encased beams shall be proportioned to support,
unassisted, all dead loads applied prior to the hardening of
the concrete (unless these loads are supported temporarily
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
support all dead and live loads applied after hardening of
ofO.66Fy, where F;, is the yield stress of the steel beam. The
bending stress produced by loads after the concrete has
hardened shall be computed on the basis of the section
properties of the composite section. Concrete tension
stresses shall be neglected. Alternatively, the steel beam
alone may be proportioned to resist, unassisted, the positive
moment produced by all loads, live and dead, using a
bending stress equal to 0.76Fy, in which case temporary
shoring is not required.
509.3.2a When shear connectors are used in accordance
with Section 509.5, the composite section shall be
proportioned to support all of the loads without exceeding
the allowable stress prescribed in Section 506.2.1, even
when the steel section is not shored during construction. In
positive moment areas, the steel section is exempt from
compact flange criteria (Section 502.6) and there is no limit
on the unsupported length ofthe compression flange.
509.3.2b Reinforcement parallel to the team within the
effective width of the slab, when anchored in accordance
with the provisions of the applicable building code, may be
included in computing the properties of composite sections,
provided shear connectors are furnished in accordance with
the requirements of Section 509.5. The section properties of
the composite section shall be computed in accordance with
the elastic theory. Concrete tension stresses shall be
neglected. For stress computations, the compression area of
lightweight or normal weight concrete shall be treated as all
equivalent area of steel by dividing it by modular ratio n for
normal weight concrete of the strength specified when
determining the section properties. For deflection
calculations, the transformed section properties shall be
based on the appropriate modular ratio n for the strength
and weight concrete specified, where 11 = E Ec.
509.3.2c In cases where it is not feasible or necessary to
provide adequate connectors to satisfy the horizontal shear
requirements for full composite action, the effective section
modulus shall be determined as,
~~;~~I (Str Ss) (509-1)
where:
Vh and V'n are as defined in Section 509.)
S, = section modulus ofthe steel beam referred to its
bottom flange, mm3
SI1' = section modulus of the transformed composite
section referred to its bottom flange, based upon
maximum permitted effective width of concrete
flange (Section 509.2), mm 3
 STRUCTURAL STEEL
528
509.3.2d For composite beams constructed without
temporary shoring, stresses in the steel section shall not
exceed 0.90Py . Stresses shall be computed assuming the
steel section alone resists all loads applied before the
concrete has reached 75% of its required strength and the
effective composite section resists all loads applied after
that time.
509.3.2e The actual section modulus of the transformed
composite section shall be used in calculating the concrete
flexural compression stress and. for construction without
temporary shores, this stress shall be based upon loading
applied after the concrete has reached 75% of its required
strength. The stress in the concrete shall not exceed O.4~f'c.
509.4 END SHEAR
509.4.1 The web and the end connections of the steel beam
shall be designed to carry the total reaction.
, 509.5 SHEAR CONNECTORS
509.5.1 Except in the case encased beams, as defined in
Section 509.3.1, the entire horizontal shear at the junction
of the steel beam and the concrete slab shall be assumed to
be transferred by shear connectors welded to the top flange
I, of the beam and embedded in the concrete. For full
composite action with concrete subject to flexural
compression, the total horizontal shear to be resisted
between the point of maximum positive moment and points
of zero moment shall be taken as the smaller value using
Equations (509-2) and (509-3):
(509-2)"
and
(509-3)
where:
1', specified compression strength of concrete, MPa
Ac actual area of effective concrete flange defined
Article 509.1, rnm2
2 area and the nearest point of zero moment, shall be not less
As area of steel beam, mm
509.5.2 In continuous composite beams where longitudinal
reinforcing steel is considered to act compositely with the
steel beam in the negative moment regions the total
horizontal shear to be resisted by shear connectors between
an interior support and each adjacent point of contraflexure
shall be taken as:
The term 1I2Fl'.A', shall be added to the right-hand side of Equation
(509-2) if longitudinal reinforcing steel with area A 's located within the
effective width of the concrete flange is included in the properties of the
composite section.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Phitippines
T.. - -F" A srl~
"11- ..v r
/"1 (509-4)
where:
total area oflongitudinal reintorcing steel at the
interior support located within the effective flange
width specified in Section 509.2, mm1
specified minimum yield stress of the longitudinal
reinforcing steet MPa
509.5.3 For full composite action, the number of connectors
resisting the horizontal shear, V" q. where q. the allowable
shear load for one connector, is given in Table 509-1 for
flat somt concrete slabs made with ASTM C33 aggregates.
For flat soffit concrete slabs made with rotary kiln produced
aggregates, conforming to ASTM C330 with concrete unit
weight not less than 1440 kg/m\ the allowable shear load
for one connector is obtained by multiplying the values
from Table 509-1 by the coefficient from Table 5092.
509.5.4 For partial composite action with concrete subject
to flexural compression, the horizontal shear V'n to be used
in computing S~tTshall be taken as the product of q times the
number of connectors furnished between the point of
maximum moment and the nearest point of zero moment.
509.5.5 The value of V'n shall not be less than Y4 the smaller
value of Equation (509-2), using the maximum permitted
effective width of the concrete flange, or Equation (509-3),
The effective moment of inertia for deflection computations
shall be determined by:
F
Ieff =Is + ,1~(Ilr -Is) (509-5)
, r II
where:
4
Is = moment of inertia ofthe steel beam, mm
ft,. moment of inertia of the transformed composite
4
section, mm
509.5.6 The connectors required each side of the point of
maximum moment in an area of positive bending may be
uniformly distributed between that point and adjacent
In points of zero moment, except that N::. the number of shear
connectors required between any concentrated load in that
than that determined by Equation (509-6).
M(3 1
N( ( ----1)
\Mmax (509-6)
N2
(3-1
where:
M moment (less than the maximum moment) at a
concentrated load point
NJ number of connectors required between point of
maximum moment and point of zero moment,
 COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
5-29

determined by the relationship VJq or V'hlq, as

applicable TABLE 509-1
Allowable Horizontal Shear Load
Sir Seff
f3 == c;- or - - , as applicable For One Connector , kN"
,) s Ss !
Specified Compressive Strength of
Connectarb 1_______ ~'g!lcre!~__'Lc1J\:1J>a- .
509.5.7 For a continuous beam, connectors required in the
. 21 ; 24 : ~ 28
region of negative bending may be uniformly distributed
between the point of maximum moment and each point of 12mm dia. x 50mm
zero moment. hooked or headed
stud
- - . - .... --_.-.. _. __.. _-_ ..
26.244
509.5.8 Shear connectors shall have at least 25 mm. of 16mm dia. x 65mm
lateral concrete cover, except for connectors installed in the hooked or headed
ribs of formed steel decks. Unless located directly over the stud
web, the diameter of studs shall not be greater 2Y2 times the
40.923

thickness of the flange to which they are welded. The

20mm dia. x 75mm

minimum center-to-center spacing of stud connectors shall

hooked or headed

be 6 diameters along the longitudinal axis of the supporting

59.161

composite beam and 4 diameters transverse to the

22mm dia. x 90mm

longitudinal axis of the supporting composite beam. The

hooked or headed

maximum center-to-center spacing of stud connectors shall

stud

not exceed 8 times the total slab thickness.

_1_._.2}2~_J..-.Z1J?9 [~~9.(j_r..
Channel i 0.753w
x 4.1 0.82311'c I 0.8751t,c
c
i

509.6 COMPOSITE BEAMS OR GIRDERS ChannelC4 x 5.4-10-:-80-5~;c--ri5~875wc, 0.928;;,"

WITH FORMED STEEL DECK
509.6.1 Composite construction of concrete slabs on
formed steel deck connected to steel beams or girders shall
be designed by the applicable portions of Section 509.2
through 509.5, with the following modifications.
-Ch~~ei C5 -;;6.'7-l0.858-11TTo:928;:;c-rO.980J~;:( .
:Applicableoniyto conc;ete made wiih ASTrvf C33 aggregates:'
The allowable horizontal loads tabulated arc also for studs
longer than shown.
Ow len or channel, nun

509.6.1.1 General 509.6.1.2 Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Steel

Beam or Girder
1. Section 509.6 is applicable to decks with nominal rib
height not greater than 75 mm. 1. Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be
The average width concrete rib or haunch Wr shall be neglected when determining section properties and in
not less than 50 mm, but shall not be taken in calculating Ac for Equation (509-2)
calculations as more than the minimum clear width 2. The spacing of stud shear connectors along the
near the top of the steel deck. See Section 509.6.1.3 lenglh of a supporting. beam or girder shall not
items 2 and 3, for additional provisions exceed 900 mm.
3. The aUowable horizontal shear load per stud
The concrete slab shall be connected to the steel
connector q shall be the value stipulated in Section
beam or girder with welded stud shear connectors
509.5.1 (Tables 509-] and 509-2) multiplied by the
20 mm or less in diameter (AWS D1.1, Section 7,
Part F). following reduction factor:
Stud shear connectors shall extend not less than
0.85 lr I,(H,
38 mm above the top of the steel deck after
( --!i -
wI' I
j - ' -1.0 ::S:1.0 (509-7)
installation.
The slab thickness above the steel shaH be not less l [ii; )\ "r hr J\ )
than 50 mm.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 STRUCTURAL STEEL
5-30

TABLE 509-2
where hr and Hs are as defined in Section 509.6.1.2 and Wr

Coefficients for Use with Concrete Made with

is the average width of
concrete rib or haunch
C330 A re ates
(see Section 509.6,1.1 item 2,
and Section 509.6.1.3
Specified Air Dry Unit Weight of Concrete, kN/m
3
item3)

Compressi

i
ve Strength

of Concrete
i
17.3 UU j 18.8 509.7 SPECIAL CASES
(f'c)
s: 28.MPa 509.7.1 When composite construction does not confow to
._._._-_...+---;...-
the retirements of Section 509.2 through 509.6, the
::::34 MPa
allowable load per shear connector must be established by
a suitable test program.

Where:
II,. = nominal rib height, mm
Us "'" length of stud connector after welding, mm, not to
exceed the value (h r+75) in computations, although
the actual length may be greater
Nr = number of stud connectors on a beam in one rib, not
to exceed 3 in computations, although more than 3
studs may be installed.
WI' = average width of concrete rib, mm (see Section
509.6.1.2)

4. To resist uplift, the steel deck shall be anchored to all

compositely designed steel beams or girders at a
spacing not to exceed 400 mm. Such anchorage may
be provided by stub connectors, a combination of
stud connectors and arc spot (puddle) welds, or other
devices specified by designer.

509.6.1.3 Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Steel Beam or

Girder

1. Concrete below the top of the steel deck may be

included when determining section properties and
shall be included in calculating Ac for Equation
(509-2).
2. Steel deck ribs over supporting beams or girders may
be split longitudinally and separated to form a
concrete haunch.
3. When the nominal depth of steel deck is 38 mm or
greater, the average width Wr of the supported
haunch or rib shall be not less than 50 mm for the
first stud in the transverse row plus 4 stud diameters
for each additional stud.
4. The allowable horizontal shear load per stud
connector q shall be the value stipulated in Section
509.5 (Tables 509-1 and 509-2), except when the
ratio wrhr is less than 1.5, the allowable load shall be
multiplied by the following reduction factor:

(11',. I(H$
0.6j - ) --LO ~1.0
) (509-8)
\ h,. \ hr

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONNECTIONS, JOINTS AND FASTENERS
CTION 510 - CONNECTIONS,
INTS AND FASTENERS
510.1.1 This Section applies to connections consisting of
elements (plates, stiffeners, gussets, angles,
bralckc~s) and connectors (welds, bolts, rivets).
510.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS
510.2.1 Design Basis
510.2.1.1 Connections shall be proportioned so that the
calculated stress is less than the allowable stress determined
(1) by structural analysis for loads acting on the structure or
(2) as a specified proportion of the strength of the
connected members, whichever is appropriate.
510.2.2 Simple Connections
510.2.2.1 Except as otherwise indicated in the design
documents, connections of beams, girders or trusses shall
be designed as flexible and ordinarily may be proportioned
for the reaction shears only. Flexible beam connections
shall accommodate end rotations of unrestrained (simple)
beams. To accomplish this, inelastic deformation in the
connection is permitted.
510.2.3 Moment Connections
510.2.3.1 End connections of restrained beams, girders and
trusses shall be designed for the combined effect of forces
resulting form moment and shear induced by the rigidity of
the connections.
510.2.4 Compression Members with Bearing Joints
510.2.4.1 When column bear on bearing plates or are
finished to bear at splices, there shall be sufficient
connectors to hold all parts securely in place.
510.2.4.2 When other compression members are finished to
bear, the splice material and its connectors shall be arranged
to hold all parts in line and shall be proportioned for S(Y}-o of
the strength of the member.
510.2.4.3 All compression joints shall be proportioned to
. resist any tension developed by the specified lateral loads
acting in conjunction with 7S% of the calculated dead-load
stress and no live load.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
5-31
510.2.5 Connections of Tension and Compression
Members in Trusses
510.2.5.1 The connections at ends of tension or
compression members in trusses shall develop the force due
to the design load, but not less than SO% of the effective
~tr~gth of th~ member, unless a smaller percentage is
Justlfiep by engmeering analysis that considers other factors
including handling, shipping and erection.
510.2.6 Minimum Connections
510.6.~.1 Connections carrying calculated stresses, except
for lacmg, sag bars and girts, shall be designed to support
not less than 26.7 kN.
510.2.7 Splices in Heavy Sections
510.2.7.1 This article applies to ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5
rolled shapes, or shapes built-up by welding plates more
than SO mm thick together to form the cross section', and
where the cross section is to be spliced and subject to
primary tensile stresses due to tension or flexure.
510.2.7.2 When tensile forces in these sections are to be
transmitted through splices by full-penetration groove
welds, material notch-toughness requirements as given in
Sect~on S01.3.1.3, weld access holes details as given in
SectIOn SI0.2.8, compatible welding procedures as given in
Section Sl 0.3.7, welding preheat requirements as given in
Section S10.3.8 and thermal cut surface preparation and
inspection requirements as given in Section S13.2.2 apply.
510.2.7.3 At tension splices in these sections, weld tabs and
backing shall be removed and the surfaces ground smooth.
510.2.7.4 When splicing these sections, and where the
section is to be used as a primary compression member, all
weld access holes required to facilitate groove welding
operations shall satisfY the provisions of Section S10.2.8.
510.2.7.5 Alternatively, splicing of such members subject
to compression, including members which are subject to
tension due to wind or seismic loads, may be accomplished
using splice details which do not induce large weld
shrinkage strains such as partial-penetration flange groove
welds with fillet-welded surface lap plate splices on the
web, or with bolted or combination bolted/fillet-welded lap
plate splices.
\\'hen the indi\ldual elements of the eros" section are spliccd prior to
being joined to form the cross sectilm in accordance \\ itb AWS D1. L
Article 3.4,6. the appliCllbk pn.l\j,ion; of AWS nu applY ill ht'u of
the requirements of this 5ectilm. .
 5-32 STRUCTURAL STEEL
510.2.8 Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes
510.2.8.1 All weld access holes required to facilitate
welding operations shall have a length from the toe of the
weld preparation not less than 1V2 times the thickness of the
material in which the hole is made. The height of the access
hole shall be adequate for deposition of sound of weld
metal in the adjacent plates and provide clearance for weld
tabs. In hot rolled shapes and built-up shapes, all beam
copes and weld access holes shall be shaped free of notches
or sharp re-entrant corners except that, when fillet web-to
flange welds are used in built-up shapes, access holes are
permitted to terminate perpendicular to the tlange.
510.2.8.2 For Group 4 and 5 shapes and built-up shapes of
material more than 50 mm thick, the thermally cut surfaces
of beam copes and weld access holes shall be ground to
bright metal and inspected by either magnetic particle or
dye penetrant methods. If the curved transition portion of
weld access holes and beam copes are formed by predrilled
or sawed holes, that portion of the access or cope need not
be ground. Weld access holes and beam copes in other
shapes need not be ground nor inspected by dye penetrant
or magnetic particle.
510.2.9 Placement of Welds, Bolts and Rivets
510.2.9.1 Group of welds, bolts or rivets at the ends of any
member which transmit axial stress into that member shall
be sized so the center of gravity of the member, unless
provision is made for the eccentricity. The foregoing
provision is not applicable to end connections of statically
loaded single-angle, double-angle and similar members.
Eccentricity between the gravity axes of such members and
the gage lines for their riveted or bolted end connections
may be neglected in statically loaded members, but shall be
considered in members subject to fatigue loading.
510.2.9.2 See Section 510.4.10 for placement of fasteners
in built-up members made of weathering steeL
510.2.10 Bolts in Combination with Welds
510.2.10.1 In new work, A307 bolts or high-strength bolts
used in bearing-type connections shall not be considered as
sharing the stress in combination with welds. Welds, if
used, shall be provided to carry the entire stress in the
connection. High-strength bolts proportioned for slip
critical connections may be considered as sharing the stress
with the welds.
510.2.10.2 In making welded alterations to structures,
existing rivets and high-strength bolts tightened to the
requirements for slip-critical connections are permitted for
carrying stresses resulting from loads present at the time of
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
alteration, and the welding need be adequate to carry only
the additional stress.
510.2.11 High-Strength Bolts (n Slip-Critical
Connections In Combination With Rivets
510.2.11.1 In both new work and alterations, high-strength
bolts in slip-critical connections may be considered as
sharing the load with rivets.
510.2.12 Limitations on Bolted and Welded Connections
510.2.12.1 Fully-tensioned high-strength bolts (see Table
510.3.7) or welds shall be used for the following
connections:
Column splices in all tier structures 60 meters or more in
height
Column splices in tier structures 30 to 60 meters in height,
if the least horizontal dimension is less than 40% of the
height
Column splices in tier structures less than 30 m in height, if
the least horizontal dimension is less than 25% of the height
Connections of all beams and girders to columns and of any
other beams and girders on which the bracing of columns is
dependent, in structures over 38 meters in height.
In all structures carrying cranes of over 5-ton capacity: roof
splices and connections of trusses to column, column
splices, column bracing, knee braces and crane supports
Connections for supports of running machinery or of other
live loads, which produce impact or reversal of stress
Any other connection stipulated on the design plans.
510.2.12.2 In aU other cases, connections may be made
with high-strength bolts tightened to the snug-tight
condition or with A307 bolts.
510.2.12.3 For the purpose of this section, the height of a
tier structure shall be taken as the vertical distance from the
curb level to the highest point of the roof beams in the case
of tlat roofs, or to the mean height of the gable in the case
of roofs having a rise of more than 2-2/3 in 12. Where the
curb levels has not been established, or where the structure
does not adjoin a street, the mean level of the adjoining land
shall be used instead of curb level. Penthouses may be
excluded in computing the height of the structure.
 CONNECTIONS, JOINTS AND FASTENERS
533

510.3 WEL.DS ABLE 510-1

Effective Throat Thidmess of Partial

510.3.1 All provisions of the American Welding Society penetration Groove 'Welds

structural Welding Code-Steel, AWS DI.1, except Sections Included

Effective
2.3.2.4, 2.5, 8.13.1, 9, and 10, apply to work performed Welding Angle at
Welding Process Throat
under this Specification. Position Root of
Thickness
Groove
510.3.1 Groove Welds Shielded metal arc
Submerged arc ) .o((lj~iTlt~
510.3.2.1 Effective Area Depth of
Gas metal arc BevelorV : chamfer
The effective area a groove welds shall be All joint .:::: 60 I
considered as the effective length of the weld times
the effective throat thickness. Flux-cored arc ~evel or V i Depth of
joint < 60! chamfer
2. The effective length a groove weld shall be the width but.:::: 45 minus
ofthe part joined. 3mm

3. The effective throat thickness of a complete

penetration groove weld shall be the thickness of the TABLE 510-2

thinner part joined, Effective Throat Thickness of Flare Groove Welds

Type of Weld Radius (R) of I Effective Throat

4. The effective throat thickness of a partial-penetration Bar or Bend Thickness
groove weld shall be as shown in Table 510-1.
Flare b e v e l : All i 5/] 6R
.....8l'()()ve_. _ _~~~ ____ "~._,_"._.._~_""._."_._
5. The effective thickness of a partial-penetration
Flare V-s!?ove .L. _ _~L_.~-,... _~_!L21(_~_ .
groove weld shall be as shown in Table 510-1. a Use (3/8)R for Gas Metal Arc Welding (except short circuiting
transfer vrocess) when R.:::: 12 mm.
6. The effective throat thickness of a flare groove weld
when flush to the surface of a bar or 90 bend in a TABLE 51O~3

formed section shall be as shown in Table 510-2. Minimum Effective Throat Thickness of Partial

Random sections of production welds for each enetration Groove Welds

welding procedure, or such test sections as may be Minimum Effective Throat

required by design documents, shall be used to verify Thickness' (mm)
that the effective throat is consistently obtained.
3
5
7. Larger effective throat thicknesses than those in
6
Table 5 I 0-2 are permitted, provided the fabricator 0_,_. _ .._.... ,~ .. ___.

can establish by qualification that he can consistently 8

provide such larger effective throat thicknesses. Over 38 to 57
--.---~-~-.-.-----
10
~--,- '-~'"'-"'--"---'----'~' -----"_ ..
Qualification shall consist of sectioning the weld Over 57 12
normal to its axis, at mid-length and terminal ends, Over 150 ......... . L_ _ ~~ _ _.. _~ ___ ]6~.~ ..... ~~____ _
a See Section 510.3.
Such sectioning shall be made on a number of
combinations of materials sizes representative of the
range to be used in the fabrication or as required by
the designer.

510.3.2.2 Limitations. The mlntmum effective throat

thickness of a partial-penetration groove weld shall be as
shown in Table 510-3. Minimum effective throat thickness
is determined by the thicker of the two parts joined, except
that the weld siz~ need not exceed the thickness of the
thinnest part joined. For this exception, particular care shall
be taken to provide sufficient preheat for soundness of the
weld.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 STRUCTURAL STEEL
5-34
510.3.3 Fillet Welds
510.3.3.1 Effective Area
1. The effective area of fillet welds shall be taken as the
effective length times the effective throat thickness.
2. The effective length of fillet welds, except fillet
welds in holes and slots, shall be the overall length of
full-size fillets, including returns.
3. The effective throat thickness of a fillet weld shall be
the shortest distance from the root of the joint to the
face of the diagrammatic weld, except that tor fillet
welds made by the submerged arc process, the
effective throat thickness shall be taken equal to the
leg size for 10 mm and smaller fillet welds, and
equal to the theoretical throat plus 3 mm for fillet
welds larger than 10 mm.
4. For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective
length shall be the length of the centerline of the
weld along the center of the plane through the throat.
In the case of overlapping fillets, the effective area
shall not exceed the nominal cross-sectional area of
the hole slot in the plane of the faying surface.
510.3.3.2 Limitations
1. The minimum size of fillet welds shall be as shown
in Table 510-4. Minimum weld size is dependent
upon the thicker of the two parts joined, except that
the weld size need not exceed the thickness of the
thinner part. For this exception, particular care shall
be taken to provide sufficient preheat for soundness
of the weld. Weld sizes larger than the thinner part
joined are permitted if required by calculated
strength. In the as-welded condition, the distance
between the edge of the base metal and the toe of the
weld may be less than 1.6 mm provided the weld size
is dearly verifiable.
2. The maximum size of fillet welds that is permitted
along edges of connected parts shall be:
Material less than 6 mm thick, not greater than
the thickness of the material.
Material 6 mm or more in thickne'>s, not
greater than the thickness of the material
minus 1.6 mm, unless the weld is especially
designated on the drawings to be built out to
obtain full-throat thickness
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
TABLE 510-4
Minimum Size of Fillet Welds
Material Thickness of Minimum Size ofFil!et
Thicker Part Joined (mm) \Veld" (mm)
To 6 inclusive 3
-1-----'
.---- - 'O~e~6-i-;-i 2---'--'
3. The minimum etfective length of fillet welds
designated on the basis of strenbrth shall be not less
than 4 times the nominal size, or else the size of the
weld shall be considered not to exceed l/4 of its
effective length. If longitudinal fillet welds are used
alone in end connections of tlat bar tension members,
the length of each tillet '"veld shall be not less than
the perpendicular distance between them. The
transverse spacing oflongitudinal fillet welds used in
end connections of tension members shall not exceed
200 mm, unless the member is designed on the basis
of effective net area in accordance with Section
502.4.
4. Intermittent fillet welds are permitted to transfer
calculated stress across a joint or faying surface
when the strength required is less than that
developed by a continuous fillet weld of the smallest
permitted size, and to join components of built-up
members. The effective length of any segment of
intermittent fillet welding shall be not less than 4
times the weld size, with a minimum of38 mm.
5. In lap joints, the minimum lap shall be 5 times the
thickness of the thinner part joined, but not less than
25 mm. Lap joints joining plates or bars subjected to
axial stress shall be fillet welded along the end of
both lapped parts, except where the deflection of the
lapped part is sufficiently restrained to prevent
opening of the joint under maximum loading.
6. Fillet welds in holes or slots are pern1itted to transmit
shear in lap joints or to prevent the buckling or
separation of lapped parts and to join components of
built-up members. Such fillet welds may overlap,
subject to the provision of Section 510.3. Fillet welds
in holes or slots are not to be considered plug or slot
welds.
7. Slide or end tlllet welds terminating at ends or sides,
respectively, ~f parts or members shalL wherever
practicable, be returned continuously- around the
comers for a distance not less than 2 times the
nominal size of the weld. This provision shall apply
to side and top fillet welds connecting brackets,
 CONNECTIONS, JOINTS AND FASTENERS
beam seats ~nd similar connections, on the plane
about which bending moments are computed. For
framing angles and simple end-plate connections
which depend upon flexibility of the outstanding legs
tor connection flexibility, end returns shall not
exceed four times the nominal size of the weld. Fillet
welds that occur on opposite sides of a common to
both welds End returns shall be indicated on the
design and details drawings.
510.3.4 Plug and Slot Welds
510.3.4.1 Effective Area. The effective shearing area of
piug and slot welds shall be considered as the nominal
cross-sectional area of the hole or slot in the plane of the
faying surface.
510.3.4.2 Limitations
Plug or slot welds are permitted to transmit shear in
lap joints or to prevent buckling of lapped parts and
to join component parts ofbuilt-up members.
2. The diameter of the hole for a plug weld shall not be
less than the thickness of the part containing it plus 8
mm, rounded to the next larger odd 1.6 mm, nor
greater than the minimum diameter plus 3 mm or 21;4
times the thickness ofthe weld.
3. The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug welds
shall be four times the diameter of the hole.
4. The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a
direction transverse to their length shall be 4 times
the width of the slot The minimum center-to-center
spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line shall
be 2 times the length ofthe slot.
National StrudJU81 Code of ,the Philippines, Volume 1
5-35
5. The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed
10 times the thickness of the weld. The width of the
slot shall be not less than the thickness of the
part containing it plus g mm, nor shall it be larger
than 2Y4 times the thickness of the weld. The ends
of the slot shall e semicircular or shall have the
comers rounded to a radius not less than the
thickness of the part containing it, except those
ends which extend to the edge of the part.
6. The thickness of plug or slots welds in material
16 mm. or less in thickness shall be equal to
the thickness of the material. In material over
16 mm. thick, the thickness of the we14 shall be at
least 112 the thickness of the material but not less
than 16 mm.
510.3.5 Allowable Stresses
510.3.5.1 Except as modified by the provisions of Section
511.5, welds shall be proportioned to meet the stress
requirements given in Table 510-5.
510.3.6 Combination of Welds
510.3.6.1 If two or more of the general types of weld
(groove, fillet, plug, slot) are combined in a single joint, the
effective capacity of each shall be separately computed with
reference to the axis of the group in order to determine the
allowable capacity of the combination.
510.3.7 Mixed Weld Metal
510.3.7.1 When notch-toughness is specitied, the process
consumables for all weld metal, tack welds, root pass and
subsequent passes, deposited in a joint shall be compatible
to assure notch-tough composite weld metal.
5-36 STRUCTURAL STEEL

TABLE 510-5
Allowable Stress on Weldsf
Type of Weld and Stress" Allowable Stress Required Weld Strength Levelbc
Complete-penetration Groove Welds
--------------------------~ ..... -------------~
Tension normal to pttp('f1VP Same as base metal "Matching" weld metal shall be used.
area I
COInpression noimartO--:same as'base met'ilf ----T-
effective area _________~------.-. .----.---I

Tension or compression : Same as base metal I .

. f ld I i Weld metal wIth a strength level equal to or less than

ara11e1t 0 axIS 0 we -.-----...... ; mate mg weld metaJ IS
! " h'" permitte
d.
Shear on effective area I
I
!
Partial-penetration Groove Weldsd

Comp.ression normal to --I Sameas- base metal I.

effectIve area I -----1

Tension or compression -----T Same as base m~ I

'parallel to axis of weld" .--1----------- ---J
Shear parallel to axis of weld i 0.30 * nominal tensile 'I'

I strength of weld metal W Id I 'th h I I

! (MPa) i "e ~et,~ WI a st:engt . eve equal to or less
than
Tension normal to effective to.30 * nominal tensile i matchmg weld metal IS permItted.

area : strength of weld metal '

: (MPa). except tensile stress

; on base metal shall not

i exceed 0.60 x yield stress

Fillet Welds

Shear on effective area

Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less than

--._--_.. _----_ ...._,---_. --_.-;--'-- :L.----------c - - - - - - - : "matching" weld metal is permitted.
Tension or compression
_paralleL!.o. ofweld<
Plug and Slot Welds
Shear parallel 10 faying , 0.30 * nominal tensile
i . WeJd metal with a strength level equal to or less than
surfaces (on effective area) , strength of weld metal
"matching" weld metal is permitted.
_______________. ",.(M~al ________
a Fordefinition of efTective area. see Section 51 OJ.

bFoT "matching" weld metal. sec Table 4. L LAWS Dtt

cWeld metal one strength le\cl stronger than "matching" weld mctal will be permitted.

dSee Section 51O.3.2.2 for a limitation on use of partial-penetration groove welded joints.

"Fillet welds and parLial-penetration groove welds joining the component elements of built-up members, such as flange-to-web

connections. may bc designed without regard to the tensile or compressive stress in these elements parallel to the axis of welds.

f The desi of connected material is oO\'emed hv Sections 504 throu h 507.

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONNECTIONS, JOINTS AND FASTENERS
510.3.S Preheat for Heavy Shapes
510.3.S.1 For ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and welded
built-up members made of plates more than 50 rom thick, a
equal to or greater than 177C shall be used when
making groove weld splices.
510.4 BOLTS, THREADED PARTS AND RIVETS
510.4.1 High-Strength Bolts
Except as otherwise provided in this
. Specification, use of high-strength bolts shall conform to
the provision of the Specifications for Structural Joints
"-Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts approved by the
Research Council on Structural Connections of the
Engineering Foundation (RCSC).
510.4.1.2 If required to be tightened to more than 50% of
their minimum specified tensile strength, ASTM A449 bolts
in tension and bearing-type shear connections shall have an
ASTM F436 hardened washer installed under the bolt head,
and the nuts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A563.
510.4.2 Size and Use of Holes
510.4.2.1 The maximum sizes of holes for bolts are given in
Table 510-6, except that larger holes, required for tolerance
on location of anchor bolts in concrete foundations, are
permitted in column base details.
510.4.2.2 Standard holes shall be provided in member-to
member connections, unless oversized, short-slotted or
long-slotted holes in bolted connections are approved by the
designer. Finger shims up to 6 mm may be introduced into
slip-criti<;al connections designed on the basis of standard
holes without reducing the allowable shear stress of the
fastener.
510.4.2.3 Oversized holes are permitted in any or all plies
of slip-critical connections, but they shall not be used in
bearing-type connections. Hardened washers shall be
installed over oversized holes in an outer ply.
510.4.2.4 Short-slotted holes are permitted in any or all
plies of slip-critical or bearing-type connections. The slots
are permitted without regard to direction of loading in slip
critical connections, but the length shall be normal to the
direction of the load in bearing-type connections. Washer
shall be installed over short-slotted holes in an outer ply;
when high-strength bolts are used, such washer shall be
hardened.
510.4.2.5 Long-slotted holes are permitted in only one of
.the connected parts of either a slip-critical or bearing-type
COnnection at an individual faying surface. Long-slotted
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
5-37
holes are permitted without regard to direction of loading in
slip-critical connections, but shaH be normal to the direction
of load in bearing-type connections. Where long-slotted
holes are used in an outer ply, plate washers or a continuous
bar with standard holes, having a size sufficient to
completely cover the slot after installation, shall be
provided. In high-strength bolted connections, such plate
washers or continuous bars shall be not less than 8 mm
thick and shall be of structural grade material, but need not
be hardened. If hardened washers are required for use of
high-strength bolts, the hardened washers shall be placed
over the outer surface of the plate washer or bar.
510.4.2.6 When A490 bolts over 25 mm diameter are used
in slotted or oversize holes in external plies, a single
hardened washer conforming to ASTM F436, except
8 mm minimum thickness, shall be used in lieu of the
standard washer.
510.4.3 Effective Bearing Area
510.4.3.1 The effective bearing area of bolts, threaded
parts and rivets shall be the diameter multiplied by the
length in bearing, except that for countersunk bolts and
rivets 112 the depth of the countersink shall be deducted.
510.4.4 Allowable Tension and Shear
510.4.4.1 Allowable tension and shear stresses on bolts,
threaded parts and rivets shall be as given in Tab I e 5 i 0-7,
in MPa of the nominal body area of rivets (before driving)
or the unthreaded nominal body area of bolts and threadeQ
parts other than upset rods (see footnote c, Table 510-7)
High-strength bolts supporting applied load by direct
tension shall be so proportioned that their average tensile
stress, computed on the basis of nominal bolt area and
independent of any initial tightening force, will not exceed
the appropriate stress given in Table 510-7. The applied
load shall be the sum of the external load any tension
resulting from prying action produced by deformation of
the connected parts.
510.4.4.2 When specified by the designer, the nominal slip
resistance for connections having special faying surface
conditions may be increased to the applicable values in the
RCSC Specifications tor Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts.
510.4.4.3 Finger shims up to 6 mm may be introduced into
slip-critical connections designed on the basis of standard
holes without reducing the allowable shear stress of the
fastener to that specified for slotted holes.
510.4.4.4 Design for bolts, threaded parts and rivets
subject to fatigue loading shall be in accordance with
Section 511.5, 1. 5
5-38 STRUCTURAL STEEL

wbere:
TABLE 510-6
Fp allowable bearing stress, MPa
Nominal Hole Dimensions, mm

Hole Dimensions 2. In long-slotted holes with the axis of the

Bolt Standard Oversize Short-slot Long-slot perpendicular to the direction ofload and with two
Dia. (Dia.) (Dia.) (Width x (Width x more bolts in the line of force,
length) length)
12 14 14 x 17
Fp = l.OOf;,
16 14x32
16 17 21 17 x 22 17 x 40
510.4.7.2 On the projected area of the bolt or rivet closest
20 ._.... 21 24 21 x 25 21 x 48
the edge in standard or short-slotted holes with the
22 24 27 24x28 24x55
distance less than 15d and in all connections with a

~~"
25 27 x JJ 27x 63 bolt in the line afforce:
(d+- 1.6) x (d+l.6)x
;::: 28 d+L6 d+8
(d+ 10) (2,5 xd)

where:
510.4.5 Combined Tension and Sbear in Bearing-type distance from the free edge to center of the bolt, mm
Connections d = bolt diameter, mm

510.4.5.1 Bolts and rivets subject to combined shear and 510.4.7.3 If deformation around the hole is not a design
tension shall be so proportioned that the tension stress F/ in consideration and adequate spacing and edge distance is as
ksi on the nominal body area Ab produced by forces applied required by Section 510.4.8 and 5104.9, the following
~o the connected parts, shall nOt exceed the values equation is permitted in lieu of Equation (510-1):
computed from the equations in Table 510-8, where f", the
shear stress produced by the same forces, shall not exceed F~ 1.50/-;,
the value for shear given in Table 510-7. When allowable
stresses are increased for wind or seismic loads in and the limit In Equation (510-3) shall be increased to
accordance with Section 501.5.2, the constants in the L5f~<.
equations listed on Table 510-8 shall be increased by 113,
but the coefficient applied to fv shall not be increased.

510.4.6 Combined Tension and Shear in Slip-Critical

Joints

510.4.6.1 For A325 and A490 bolts used in slip-critical

connections, the maximum shear stress allowed by Table
510-7 shall be multiplied by the reduction factor (1 - fAtl
Th)' where it is the average tensile stress due to a direct load
applied to all of the bolts in a connection and Tb is the
pretension load of the bolt specified in Table 510.3.7. When
allowable stresses are increased for wind or seismic loads in
accordance with the provisions of Section 501.5.2, the
reduced allowable shear stress shall be increased by 1/3.

510.4.7 Allowable Bearing at Bolt Holes

510.4.7.1 On the projected area of bolts and rivets in shear

connections with the end distance in the line of force not
less than 1lj7l and the distance center to center of bolts not
less than 3d:

1. In standard-or short-slotted holes with two or more

bolts in the line of force,

(510-1)

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONNECTIONS, JOINTS AND FASTENERS 5-39

TABLE 510-7
Allowable Stress on MPa
Allowable She~ {FJ

Allowable Slip-Critical Connectionse.i

g Bearing
Description of Fasteners Tension
(Pt) Oversized Long-slotted Holes type
and Short connections!
slotted Holes

0.33F a,c,h o b

O.33F a.b O.22F h

d
303 117 103 82.7 68.9 14Sf

303 d 117 103 82.7 68.9 20t

193f
d
372 145 ]24 103 89.6
f
372d 145 124 103 89.6 276

permitted in shear planes.

tensile capacity of the threaded portion of an upset rode, based upon the cros!l-sectional area at its majof thread diameter Ah shall be
than the nominal body area ofthe rod before upsetting times 0.60F,.
A325 and A490 bolts subject to tensile fatigue loading, see Section 51 L5.I.5.
Class A (slip coefficient 0.33). Clean mill scale and blast-cleaned surfaces with Class A coatings. When specified by the design<!f. the
iillowable shear stress, Fr', for slip-critical connections haying spccial fa)ing surface conditions may be increased to the applicable value
;given in the RCSC Specifications.
:f';When bearing-type connections used to splice tension members haye a fastener pattern whose Icne,>th. measured parallel to the line of
force. exceed 1250 mm. tabulated yalues shall be reduced by 20%.
'See Section 501.5.2. . .
~See Table 2. NlUllerical Values Section for values for specific ASTM steel specifications.
IFor limitations on use of oyersized and slotted holes, see Section 510.4.2.
j For Direction of load . relative to axis of slot.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 'I

 STRUCTURAL STEEL

510.4.8 Minimum Spacing 510.4.9 Minimum Edge Distanee

510.4.8.1 The. distance between centers of standard, 510.4.9.1 The distance from the center of a standard hole to.
oversized or slotted fastener holes shall not be less 2-2/3 an edge of a connected part shall be not less than .
times the nominal diameter of the fastener' nor less than applicable value from Table 510-10 nor the value from
that required by the following paragraph, if applicable. Equation (510-6), as applicable.

510.4.8.2 Along a line of transmitted forces, the distance
between centers of holes s shall be not less than 3d when Fp
is determined by Equations (510-1) and (510-2). Otherwise,
the distance between centers of holes shall not be less than
the following:
510.4.9.2 Along a line of transmitted force, in the direction .
. of the force, the distance from the center of a standard
to the edge of the connected part L" shall be not less
LSd when Fp is determined by Equations (510-1)
(510-2). Otherwise the edge shall be not less than

a. For standard holes:

(51{}"5) where P, F'b t are defined in Section 510.4.8.

where 510.4.9.3 The distance from the center of an oversized or

P = force transmitted by one fastener to the critical
connected part, kN
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the critical
connected part, MPa
thickness of the critical connected part, mm
11. For oversized and slotted holes, the distance required
for standard holes in subparagraph a, (above), plus
the applicable increment C1 from Table 510-9, but
the clear distance between holes shall not be less
than on diameter.
TABLE 510..8
slotted hole to an edge of an oversized or slotted hole to an
edge of a connected part shall be not less than required for a
standard hole plus the applicable increment C2 from Table
51{}"11.
510.4.10 Maximum Edge Distance and Spacing
SlO.4.10.lThe maximum distance from the center of any
rivet or bolt to the nearest edge of parts in contact shall be
12 times the thickness of the connected part under
consideration, but shall not exceed 150 mm. Bolted joints in
unpainted steel exposed to atmospheric corrosion require
special limitations on pitch and edge distance.

Allowable Tension Stress Ft for Fasteners in

510.4.10.2 For unpainted, built-up members made of
Bearing-type CODnections
weathering steel which will be exposed to atmospheric
Description I Threads Included in Threads Excluded
corrosion, the spacing of fasteners connecting a plate and a
shape or two-plate components in contact shall not exceed
ofFasteners i Shear Plane from Shear Plane
14 times the thickness of the thinnest part nor 175 mm, and

.,,----.---.l~(303)2
A307 bolts ~

A325 bolts
. --------T 179.2 - 1.8.f., s; 137.8

-4.39// I ~(303)2 -2.15//

-' the maximum edge distance shall not exceed eight times the
thickness of the thinnest part, or 125 mm.

---,--,,-- i - - -..--....----~.-...- . - - - - - - -

A490 bolts I ~(372)2 -3.75// I ~(372)2 - 1.82//

--.--..- . --t--------\-----..
Threaded I
parts, A449 \ 0.4 3Fu - 1.8/~ S; I 0.43FII - L4fv S;
bolts' over. 0.33F~1 0. 33Fu
?8-'!!.~ dia. 1 _ _ _ _. _....__ I --
~02 Gr_ I i 207 1.3.f., S; 159
nvets
---_..----1-..
I
"..-------_..___-- -

~502 Gr. 2 i 262 1.3j,. S; 200

rivets

A distance oDd is preferred.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONNECTIONS, JOINTS AND FASTENERS
5-41
I
1

TABLE 510-9
510.6.1 Eccentric Connections
Values of S adn Increment C mm

Slotted Holes 510.6.1.1 Intersecting axially stressed members shall have

Over Perpen Parallel to Line of Force their gravity axes intersect at one point, if practicable; if
sized dicular not, provision shall be made for bending and shearing
Hole to Line Short-slots Long-slots stresses due to the eccentricity.
ofForce
3.0 0 5.0 l.5d-1.6
TABLE Sl0-10

5.0 0 6.0 36
Miuimum Edge Distancet mm

6.0 0 .~ ..
8.0
~-
1.5d-1.6 Center of Standard Bole to Ed e of Conneded Part

"When length of slot is less than maximum allowed in Table Nominal

510-6, C] may be reduced by the difference between the Bolt or At Rolled Edges of
maximum and actual slot lengths. At Sheared
River Plates, Shapes or
Edges
Dia. Bars, Gas Cut or
mm Saw-cut Ed esb
SI0.4.n Long Grips 12 22 20....__.......... _..
16 28 22

-.. r.. . -----28

SI0.4.11.1 AJ07 bolts which carry calculated stress, with a 20 32 25
grip exceeding five diameters, shall have their number
increased 1% for each additional 1.6 mm. in the grip.
;~ . "j ..~ "1~:-

510.5 ALLOWABLE SHEAR RUPTURE

28

OV!;32
. '1----_
r-
50

1.7/:Di-a~
38

510.5.1 At beam end connections where the top flange is
coped, and in similar situations where failure might occur
by shear along a plane through the fasteners, or by a
combination of shear along a plane through the fasteners
plus tension along a perpendicular plane:
1 1.25~Dia.--
For oversized or slotted holes, see Table 51011.
b All edge distances in this column may be reduced 3 mm
when the hole is at a point where stress does not exceed
25% of the maximum design strength in the element.
These may be 32 mm at the ends of beam connection
an les.

(510-7)

acting on the net shear area Av and, TABLE 510-11

Values of Edge Distance Increment C2~ mm

Fp =0.50F" (510-8) Nornin If---~----"--~-r----l

Slotted Holes
a1 Dia. Over-! P~ndicular to E~~
acting on the net tension area At. of sized i Short Long" Parallel
Fasten Hole I Slots Slotsa to Edge
510.S.2 The minimum net failure path on the periphery of er
welded connections shall be checked.' $22 __ ~1..~5__+___3~.O~ __~
25 .~~ 3.0 3.0 O.75d o
~_..?~8 3.~ .._.0. . . _~...L...-
. O_....l. __5.. .. _ _ _ _ ..L.'_ _ . _

510.6 CONNECTING ELEMENTS
510.S.1 This section applies to the design of connecting
elements, such as stiffeners, gussets, angles and brackets
and the panel zones of beam-to-column connections.
When length of slot is less than maximum allowable (sec
Table 510-6), ('2 may be reduced by one-half the difference
between the maximum and actual slot lengths.
510.6.2 AUowable Shear Rupture

510,6.2.1 For situations where failure might occur by

shear along a plane through the fasteners. or by a
combination of shear along a plane through the fasteners
plus tension along a perpendicular plane, see Section
510.5
See SectioD 502.3 and Commentary Figure.~ C-.I4.1, C-J.U and C-J4.4
of the l\1anual of Steel Construction, AlIowa!-:le Stress Design, qlh
Editi,'n.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 STRUCTURAL STEEL

TABLE 510-12 510.9 ALLOWABLE BEARING STRESS

Minimum Pretension for Ful -ti teoed Bolts, ~
Bolt Size, 510.9.1 On contact area of milled surfaced and ends of
A325 Bolts A490Bolts
fitted bearing stiffeners; on projected area of pins in
53.378
-+_....._._....... _.__._ _ ...._--_.66.723

reamed, drilled or bored holes:
84.516
__________ 0- 106.757
20 124.550 155.687 Fp 0.90F/
1 - - - - --:- ---173.480 -----217.962
22 --_._--_.. __ ._-- _._--- _ .
25 226.859 510.9.2 Expansion rollers and rockers, Newtons per linear .

--.---~--- ... -- -.-- 284.686

-~ ...- ---
.-~~

28 249.100 355.857 millimeter:

._._-_.. _ --------_._---_.. ..

-89.6)O.66d
-~.- -~.---~"'----

~---.--~-
32 ..
315.823
---- ..
.-~--.---."---- -~----
453.718
--.------- -.-
Fp -
_(F~ (510-10)
35
----------------._- 378.098 538.234
-~
137.8
38 458.166 658.336
Equal to 0.70 of minimum tensile strength of bolts as specified in
ASTM specifications for A325 and A490 bolts with UNC where d is the diameter of roller or rocker, mm
threads.

510.10 COLUMN BASES AND BEARING ON

510.7 FILLERS ~ONRYANDCONCRETE

510.7.1 In welded construction, any filler 6 nun or more in
thickness shall extend beyond the edges of the splice plate
and shall be welded to the part on which it is fitted with
Bufficient weld to transmit the splice plate stress, applied at
the surface of the finer as an eccentric load. The welds
joining the splice plate to the filler shall be sufficient to
transmit the splice stress and shall be long enough to avoid
overstressing the fillet along the toe of the weld. Any filler
less than 6 mm thick shall have its edges flush with the
edges of the splice plate and the weld size shall be sum of
the size necessary to carry the splice plate stress plus the
thickness ofthe filler plate.
510.7.2 When bolts or rivets carrying computed stress pass
through fillers thicker than 6 mm, except in slip-critical
connections assembled with high-strength bolts the fillers
shall be extended beyond the splice material and the fiUer
extension shall be secured by enough bolts or rivets to
distribute the total stress in the member uniformly over the
combined section of the member and the filler, or an
equivalent number of fasteners shall be included in the
connection. Fillers between 6 mm and 20 mm thick,
inclusive, need not be extended and developed, provided
the allowance shear stress in the bolts is reduced by the
factor, 0.4 (1-6), where t is the total thickness of the fillers,
upto20mm.
510.8 SPLICES
510.8.1 Groove welded splices in plate girders and beams
shall develop the full strength of the smaller spliced section.
Other types of splices in cross sections of plate girders and
beams shall develop the strength required by the stresses at
the point of splice.
510.10.1 Proper provision shall be made to transfer the
column loads moments to the footings and foundations.
510.10.2 In the absence of code regulations the following
stresses apply:
On sandstone and limestone ............. .. Fp= 2.75MPa
On brick in cement mortar ................. . Fp= 1.72 MFa
On the full area of a concrete support..... . Fp = 0.351'0
On less than the full area of a conclete
support.............. Fp 0.35f'c ~A21 AI -50.70f'c
where
1'c = specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa
AJ = area of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete
support, mm2
A;? = maximum area of the portion of the supporting
surface that is geometrically similar to and
2
concentric with the loaded area, mm
510.11 ANCHOR BOLTS
510.11.1 Anchor bolts shall be designed to provided
resistance to all conditions on completed structures of
tension and shear at the bases of columns, including the net
tensile components of any bending moment which may
result from fixation or partial fixation ofcolumns.
When parts in contact have different yield stresses, F;.. shall be
the smaller value.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 SPECIAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
5-43

SECTION 511- SPECIAL DESIGN 511.2.2.2 If the length of loading measured across the
member flange is less than O.15h, where b is the member
CONSIDERA TIONS flange width, Equation (511-1) need not be checked.

511.2.3 Local Web Yielding

511.1 SCOPE 511.2.3.1 Bearing stiffeners shall be provided if the

compressive stress at the web toe of the fillets resulting
.511.1 This Section covers member strength design from concentrated loads exceeds O.66T;~..
considerations related to concentrated forces, ponding,
torsion and fatigue. a. When the force to be resisted is a concentrated load
producing tension or compression., applied at a distance
from the member end that is greater than the depth of the
511.2 WEBS AND FLANGES UNDER CONCEN member,
TRATED FORCES R
- - - - ~ O.66FJ' (511-2)
t..,(N +Sk)
511.2.3 Design Basis

511.2.1.1 Members with concentrated loads applied normaP'
to one flange and symmetric to the web shall have a flange
and web proportioned to satisfy the local flange bending,
web yielding strength, web crippling and sidesway web
When the force to be resisted is a concentrated load applied
at or near the end ofthe member,
R (511-3)
- - - - ' , - ~ O.66F

buckling criteria to both flanges shall have a web I.,.(N + 2.Sk) y

proportioned to satisfy the web yielding web crippling and

column web buckling criteria of Sections 511.2.3, 511.2.4 wbere

and 511.2.6. R = concentrated load or reaction N

I.,. "" thickness ofweb, mm '

5U.2.1.2 Where pairs of stiffeners are provided on opposite N = length of bearing (not less than k for end reactions),

sides of the web, at concentrated loads, and extend at least mm

half the depth of the member, Sections 511.2.2 and 511.2.3 k = distance from outer face of flange to web toe of fillet,
need not be checked. mm

511.2.1.3 For column webs subject to high shears, see
Section 511.2.7; for bearing stiffeners see Section 511.2.8.
511.2.2 Local Flange Bending
511.2.1.1 A pair of stiffeners shall be provided opposite the
tension flange or flange plate of the beam or girder framin/'
into the member when the thickness of the member flange If
is less than
511.2.4 Web Crippling
511.2.4.1 Bearing stiffeners shall be provided in the webs
of members under concentrated loads, when compressive
force exceeds the following limits:
When the concentrated load is applied at a distance not less
than d/2 from the end ofthe member:

12.6SJP~
Fyc

..

(511-1)
R= 1772t.'[1 +{;X:; fk,.tf ll (511-4)

wbere: b. When the concentrated load is applied less than a distance

Fyc co~umn yield stress; MPa d/2 from the end of the member:

{;X:; fk,.tf II.

Pbf = the computed force delivered by the flange or
moment connection plate multiplied by 5/3, when the
computed force is due to live and dead load only, or by
R= 893t.'[1+ (511-5)
4/3, when the computed force is due to live and dead load
in conjunction with wind or earthquake forces, N where:
Fyw= specified minimum yield stress ofbeam web, MPa
d =overall depth of the member, rom
Except where other codes may govern. For example. see ~ti~n 4(0)
It =flange thickness, mm
"Reoommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commentary."
Structural Engineers Association ofCalifomia. 197.5.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 STRUCTURAL STEEL

511.Z.4.2 If stiffeners are provided and extend at least one
half the web depth, Equations (511-4) and (511-5) need not
be checked.
511.2.5 Sidesway Web Buckling
511.2.5.1 Bearing stiffeners shall be provided in the webs
of members with flanges not restrained against relative
or
movement by stiffeners or lateral bracing and subject to
511.2.8 Stiffener Requirements for Concentrated Loads
511.2.8.1 Stiffeners shall be placed in pairs at unframed
ends or at points of concentrated loads on the interior of
beams, girders or columns if required by Section 511.2.2
through 511.2.6, as applicabIe.
511.2.3.2 If required by Sections 511.2.2, 511.23
Equation (511-9), stiffeners need not extend more than one

concentrated compressive loads, when the compressive half the depth ofthe web, except as follows:

force exceeds the following limits:

511.2.8.2a If stiffeners are required by Section 51 L2.4 or

a. If the loaded flange is restrained against rotation and 511.2.6 the stiffeners shall be designed as axially

(dJt",)/(lIhp is less than 2.3: compressed members (columns) in accordance

with
requirements of Section 505.3 with an effective length

R 46,8801,/
h
[I + O.4[dc / tw
llbf
)3] (511-6)
equal to O.75h, a cross section composed of two stiffeners

and a strip of the web having a width of 25t".. at interior

stiffeners and 121,.. at the ends of members.

h. If the loaded flange is not restrained against rotation 511.2.8~3 When the load normal to the flange is tensile, the

and (dJt".)I(llhl ) is less than 1.7: stiffeners shall be welded to the loaded flange. When the

load normal to the flange is compressive, the stiffeners shall

r [ \31j
R = 46,8801,;J 0.4 d() (~
either bear on or be welded to the loaded flange.

h l II hf J
(511-7)
511.2.8.4 When flanges or moment connection plates for
where:
end connections of beams and girders are welded to the
I largest laterally unbraced length along their flange at
flange of an 1- or H-shape column, a pair of column-web
the point ofload, mm stiffeners having a combined cross-sectional area A" not
hi flange width, mm less than that computed from Equation (51 1-9) shall be
de (d - 2k) = web depth clear of fillets, mm provided whenever the calculated value of A y [ is positive.

Equations (511-6) and (511-7) need not be checked (511-9)

providing (dJtw)/(llb r) exceeds 2.3 or 1.7. respectively, or
for webs subject to uniformly distributed load.
where:
511.2.6 Compression Buckling of the Web J' ys ,=
stiffeners yield stress, MPa
k distance between outer face of column flange and
511.2.6.1 For unstiffened portion of webs members under web toe of its fillet, if column is a rolled shape. or
concentrated loads to both flanges, a stiffeners or a pair of equivalent distance if column is a welded shape, mm
stiffeners shall be provided opposite the compression flange (r, thickness of flange or moment connection plate
when the web depth clear of fillets de is greater than delivering concentrated torce, mm

3 511.2.8.5 Stiffeners required by the provisions of Equation

10.81...
(511-8) (511-9) and Sections 511.2.2 and 51 L2.6 shall comply with
the following criteria:

where:
t"y; = thickness of column web, mm
511.2.7 Compression Members witb Web Panels
Subject to 10gb Shear
511.2.7.1 Members subject to high shear in the web should
be checked for conformance with Section 506.5'
See Commentary Section E6 of the 9'h Edition of Manual of
Steel Construction
1. The width of each stiffener plus 112 the thickness of the
column web shall be not less than 1/3 the width of the
flange or moment connection plate delivering the
concentrated force.
2. The thickness of stitfeners shall be not less than one-half
the thickness of the flange or plate delivering the
concentrated load.
3. The weld joining stiffeners to the column web shall
be sized to carry the force in the stiffener caused by

Assocmtion of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 SPECIAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

unbalanced moments on opposite sides of the 511.5 FATIGUE

column.
511.5.1 Members and their connections subject to fatigue
loading shall be proportioned in accordance with the
511.3 PONDING provisions ofthis Article.

511.3.1 The roof system shall be investigated by structural 511.5.1.1 Members and connections subject to fatigue
analysis to assure adequate strength and stability under loading shall be proportioned in accordance with the
ponding conditions, unless the roof surface is provided with provisions of this Section.
sufficient slope toward points of the drainage or adequate
individual drains to prevent the accumulation of rainwater. 511.5.1.2 Fatigue, as used in this Specification, is defined
as the damage that may result in fracture after a sufficient
511.3.2 The roof system shall be considered stable and not number of fluctuations of stress. Stress range is defin as
requiring further investigation if: the magnitude of these fluctuations. In the case of a stress
reversal, the stress range shall be computed as the
C p +O.9Cy ~0.25 (51l~1O) numerical sum of maximum repeated tensile and
compressive stresses or the sum of maximum shearing
(51l-11) stresses of opposite direction at a given point, resulting
from differing arrangement of live load.
where:
4 511.!U.3 Loading Conditions; Type and Location of
' _ 5061...1_ p
Material
( p -

Ip
In the design of members and connections subject to
506Sr s 4 repeated variation of live load, consideration shall be given
c., to the number of stress cycles, the expected range of stress
and the type and location of member or detail.

Lp = column spacing in direction of girder (length of Loading conditions shall be classified according to Table
primary members), m 511-1.
L, = spacing of secondary members, m
S spacing of secondary members, m
Iv moment of inertia of primary members, mm"
is moment of inertia of secondary members, mm4
ld moment of inertia of the steel deck supported on
secondary members, mm" per m

51) .3.3 For trusses and steel joists, the moment of inertia r,
shall be decreased 15% when used in the above equation. A
steel deck shall be considered a secondary member when it
is directly supported by the primary members.

511.3.4 Total bending stress due to dead loads, gravity live

loads (if any) and ponding shall not exceed 0.80Fy for
primary and secondary members. Stresses due to wind or
seismic forces need not be included in a ponding analysis.

511.4 TORSION

511.4.1 The effects of torsion shall be considered in the

design of members and the normal and shearing stresses
due to torsion shall be added to those from all other loads,
with the resultants not exceeding the allowable values.

National Structul'ill Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 STRUCTURAL STEEL

TABLE 511-1
Number of Loadina Cycles
Loading Condition I From i To
I ! 2.o,.oOOa IO.o,OOOD
--~--

2
I
10.0'1..0.00 ~
I 5.oO,.oOOc
.-~

-.-------~

--_.__ .... _-3 I 5OO,O.oQ_--.-l

.-~

2,000,00.0
4 Ov~r 2,OOO,00<U
Approximately equivalent to two (2) applications every day

for 25 years.

b Approximately equivalent to ten (I 0) applications every day

for 25 years.

C Approximately equivalent to fifty (50) applications every day

for 25 vears.

d Appro~ately equivalent to two hundred (200) applications

every day for 25 years.

The type and location of material shall be categorized

according to Table 511-2.

511.5.1.4 Allowable Stress Range

The maximum stress shall not exceed the basic allowable

stress provided in Sections 501 through 513 of this
Specification and the maximum range of stress shall not
exceed that given in Table 511-3.

511.5.1.5 Tensile Fatigue

When subject to tensile fati.b'Ue loading, the tensile stress

in A325 or A490 bolts due to the combined applied load
. and prying forces shall not exceed the following values,
and the prying force shall not exceed 6.0%. of the externally
applied load.

.__ ,_~l:llllJ>er of9!de~==~r=-A}25__ ~29_ J

Not more than 2.0,.0.0.0 i 44 ! 54 i
to
I'Fr~~ 2.0,00.0 5.0.0,.0.0.0-'''''-- '-1-40'--1- 49- i
ri10rethan 5.0000.0
1. ,~,._._ _ _ _ _
-----r"-j'i-r---'38-i
.:::::.2...:::. _ _ _ __ _____-1-_..___._ _
~_~. .~ , _________ .1

Bolts must be tensioned to the requirements of

Table 510-12

The use of other bolts and threaded parts subjected to

tensile fatigue loading is not recommended,

Few members or connections in conventional buildings

need to be designed for fatigue, since most load changes in
such structures occur only a small number of times or
produce only minor stress fluctuations. The occurrence of
full design wind or earthquake loads is too infrequent to
warrant consideration in fatigue design. However, crane
runways and supporting structures for machinery and
equipment are often subject to fatigue loading conditions.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 SPECIAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
5-47

TABLE 511-2
ClassifICations
Jllu~trative
Example
Nos.
Kind of (See
Situation Stress 511
with rolled or surface. Flame-cut edges T or Rev. 1,2
ofl
in members without attachments, built-up plates B 3,4,5,6

! -,
To~Re~.--!-B' 3,4,5,6

TorRev.

TorRev. 5
TorRev. 5
5

-
"T" signifies range in tensile stress only; "Rev." signifies a range involving reversal oftcnsile or compressive stress; "s" signifies range
in shear, including shear stress reversal.
These examples are provided as guidelines and are not intended to exclude other reasonably similar situations.
Allowable fatigue stress range for transverse partial-penetration and transverse fillet welds is II function of the effective throat, depth M
. and thickness. See Frank and Fisher (l

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

5-48 STRUCTURAL STEEL

TABLE 511-2 (continued)

and Location of Matf'rial

Stress

General Kind of
a
Condition Situation Stress
Groove Base metal and weld metal at full-penetration groove welded : T or Rev
Welds splices of parts of similar cross section ground flush. with
! grinding in the direction of applied stress and with weld .
, soundness established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection i
: in accordance with the requirements of 9.25.2 or 9253 of :
AWS D1.1
: .
; Base metal and weld metal at full-penetratIOn groove welded
i splices at transitions in width or thickness, with welds ground !
to provide slopes no steeper than I to 2 Y2 with grinding in the :
direction of applied stress.. and with weld soundness:
established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in!
accordance with the requirements of9.25.2 or 9.25.3 of AWS ;
D1.1 i '
i i
A514 base metal i
T or Rev. B' i l2,13

~~~:!::=I :~~~eldmetal at'-fiill-penetrarlongroove-wclaed-H ~i-~~~~l--{--+' 10, a~I;Jj

splices, with or without transitions having slopes no greater I I. I[
than 1 to 2Y:a when reinforcement is not removed but weld I i
I soundness is established by radiographic or ultrasonic! I I
i inspection in accordance with requirements of 9.25.2 or II I I
! 9.25.3 of AWS D1.1 ' -+-
Partial Weld metal of partial-penetration transverse groovewelds:t T or R~v.--i--F-c-'" 1-16"
Penetration based on effective throat area of the weld or welds I I
Groove Welds I
Fillet-welded
Connections Base metal at junction of axially loaded members with
welded end connections. Welds shall be disposed about the
axis ofthe member so as to balance weld stresses
b$25 mm

TorRev C
See Notec
Fillet Welds or intermittent longitudinal or S

Plug or
Slot Welds
Mechanically
Fastened
Connections

Base metal at net section

bolted bearing connections

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 SPECIAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
5-49

TABLE 511-2 (continued)

aDd Material
llIu8trative
Stress Example
Nos.
Kind of
(See
Situation
Stressa
511
Base metal at details attached by full-penetration groove

welds subject to longitudinal and/or transverse loading w.hen

the detail embodies a transition radius R with the weld

termination ground smooth and for transverse loading, the

weld sound-ness established by radiographic or ultrasonic

inspect-ion in accordance with 9.25.2 or 9.25.3 of AWS D1.1

Longitudinal loading
R>600mm
600mm>R> 150mm T or Rev. B 14
, 150 mm > R > 50 mm TorRev. C 14
50mm>R T or Rev. D 14
T or Rev. E 14
Detail base metal for transverse loading: equal thickness and
reinforcement removed
R>600mm
T or Rev. B 14
600 mm > R > 150 mm
T or Rev. C 14
150 mm > R > 50 mm
TorRev. D 14
150mm>R TorRev. E 14,15

Detail base metal for transverse loading: equal thickness and

reinforcement not removed
R>600mm
TorRev. C 14
600mm>R> 150mm
T or Rev. C 14
150 mm > R > 50 mm
TorRev. D 14
50mm>R
TorRev. E 14,15

Detail base metal for transverse loading: unequal thickness

and reinforcement removed
R> 50mm TorRev. D J4
50 mm>R Tor Rev. E 14,15

Detail base metal for transverse loading: unequal thickness

and reinforcement not removed
aliR T or Rev. E 14,15

Detail base metal for transverse loading

R> 150mm T or Rev'. C 19
I 150 mm > R > 50 mm T or Rev. D 19
50 mm >R Tor Rev. E 19

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 STRUCTURAL STEEL

TABLE 511-2 (tontinued)

T:ypeand Loc' tena

I
atlOnofMa'
Illustrative
Stress Example
Category Nos.
General Kind of (see Table (See Fi~.
Condition Situation Stress 511-3) 511-1)'
Attachments Base metal at detail attached by full-penetration groove welds
(continued) subject to longitudinal loading

50 nun <a< 12b or 100 mm TorRev. D 15

a> 12b or 100mm when b:s: 25 nun T or Rev. E 15
-a > 12b or 100 mm when b > 25 mm TorRev. i
I
E' 15
Base metal at detail attached by fillet welds or parti.al-
penetration groove welds subject to longitudinal loading

a< 50 mm TorRev. C 15,23,24

25,26
50 mm < a < 12b or 100 mm TorRev. D 15,23,24,26
a > 12b or 100 nun when b :s: 25 mm TorRev. E 15,23,24,26
! a> 12b or 100 nun when b > 25 mm TorRev. E' 15,23,24,26
I Base metal attached by fillet welds or partial-penetration
groove welds SUbjected to longitudinal load-ing when the
, weld termination embodies a transition radius with the weld
termination ground smooth:

R>50mm I TorRev. D 19
R:S:50mm I TorRev. E 19
Fillet-welded attachments~herethe-wet(itefmination
embodies a transition radius, weld termination ground I
smooth. and main material subject to longitudinal loading:
I
I Detail base metal for transverse loading: !
H>50mm
R<50nun
I' TorRev.
TorRev.
D
E
19
19
Base -metalai" stUd-type"shearooMeci", attaChed by fillett o r Rev C 22

_
i weld or automatic end weld
rs--~~-~'-------'---
. . .______ .~~~ str~~~_~..!lQmin'l.L~Iea of~!l!.<!:~Y.Pe s!t~ connectors . S
---- F

TABLE 511-3
Allowable Stress Ran e. MPa
Category Loading Loading Loading Loading
(from Table Condition Condition Condition Condition
511-2) 1 2 3 4
A 434 255
B 200
158
145
110 ------t---.-
... ..
---~ ---.-~--~ --------~+-----------

Flexural stress range of 82.7 MPa permitted at toe of stiffener welds on flanges.

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 SERVICEABILITY DESIGN CONSIDERAnONS
5-51

SECTION 512 - SERVICEABILITY 512.4.2 Vibration

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 512.4.2.1 Beams and girders supporting large open floor
areas free of partitions or other sources of damping shall be
designed with due regard for vibration.
512.1 SCOPE

512.1.1 This Section provides design guidance for 512.5 CONNECTION SLIP
serviceability considerations not covered elsewhere.
Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building, 512.5.1 For the design of slip-resistant connection see
its appearance, maintainability, durability and comfort of its Section 510,4.
occupants. are pre~rved under normal usage.

512.1.2 Limiting values of structural behavior to ensure 512.6 CORROSION

serviceability (e.g., maximum deflections, accelerations,
etc.) shall be chosen with due regard to the intended
function ofthe structure.
512.2 CAMBER
512.2.1 If any special camber requirements are necessary to
bring a loaded member into proper relation with the work of
other trades, the requirements shall be set forth in the
design documents.
512.6.1 When appropriate, structural components shall be
designed to tolerate corrosion or shall be protected against
corrosion that impairs the strength or serviceability of the
structure.
512.6.2 Where beams are exposed they shall be sealed
against corrosion of interior surfaces or spaced sufficiently
far apart to permit cleaning and painting.

512.2.2 Trusses of24.4 m or greater span generally shall be

cambered for approximately the dead-load deflection.
Crane girders of 22.9 m or greater span generally shall be
cambered for approximately the dead-load deflection plus
112 the live-.load deflection.

512.2.3 Beams and trusses detailed without specified

camber shall be fabricated so that after erection any camber
due to rolling or shop assembly shall be upward. If camber
involves the erection of any member under a preload, this
shall be noted in the design documents.

512.3 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION

512.3.1 Provision shall be made expansion and contraction

appropriate to the service. conditions ofthe structure.

512.4 DEFLECTION, VIBRATION AND DRIFT

512.4.1 Deflection

5J2.4.1.1 !!earns and girders supporting floors and roofs

shall be proportioned with due regard to the deflection
produced by the design loads. Beams and girders
supporting plastered ceiling shall be so proportioned that
the maximum live-load deflection does not exceed 1/360 of
the span.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 513 - FABRICATION,
ERECTION AND QUALITY
CONTROL
513.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
513.1.1 Shop drawings giving complete information
necessary for the fabrication of the component parts of the
structure, including the location, type and size of all welds,
bolts and rivets, shall be prepared in advanCe of the actual
fabrication. These drawings shall be clearly distinguish
between shop and field welds and bolts and shall clearly
identify type of bigh-strength bolted connection (snug-tight
or fully-tightened bearing, or slip-critical),
513.1.2 Shop drawings shall be in conformity with the best
practice and with due regard to speed and economy in
fabrication and erection.
513.2 FABRICATION
513.2.1 Cambering, Curving and Straightening
512.2.1.1 Local application of heat or mechanical means
are permitted to introduce or correct camber, curvature and
straightness. The temperature of heated areas, as measured
by approved methods, shaU not exceed 565C for A852
steel, 593C for AS 14 steel nor 649C for other steels. The
same limits apply for equivalent grades of A709 steels.
",~I' 513.2.2 Thermal Cutting
513.2.2.1 Thermally cut free edges which will be subject to
substantial tensile stress shall be free of gouges greater than
5 rom. Gouges greater than 1,6 rom deep and sharp notches
shall be removed by grinding or repaired by welding.
Thermally cut edges which are to have weld deposited upon
them, shall be reasonably free of notches or gouges.
513.2.2.2 All reentrant comers shall be shaped to a smooth
transition. If specific contour is required, it must be shown
on the contract documents.
513.2.2.3 Beam copes and weld access holes shall meet the
geometrical requirements of Section 510.2.8. Beam copes
and weld access holes in ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes
and welded built-up shapes with material thickness greater
than 50 rum shall be preheated to a temperature of not less
than 65.6oC prior to thermal cutting.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
513.2.3 Planning of Edges
513.2.3.1 Planing or finishing of sheared or thermally cut
edges of plates or shapes will not be required unless
specifically called for in the design documents or included
in a stipulated edge preparation for welding.
513.2.4 Welded Construction
513.2.4.1 The technique of welding, the workmanship,
appearance and quality of welds and the methods used in
correcting nonconforming work shall be in accordance with
"Section 3-Workmansbip" and "Section4-Technique" of
the AWS Structural Welding Code-Steel, D 1.1.
513.2.5 High-Strength Bolted Construction-Assembly
513.2.5.1 All parts of bolted members shall be pinned or
bolted and held together rigidly white assembling. Use of a
drift pin in bolt holes during assembling shall not distort the
metal or enlarge the holes. Poor matching of holes shall be
cause for rejection.
513.2.5.2 If the thickness of the material is not greater than
the nominal diameter of the bolt plus 3 mrn, the holes may
be punChed. If the thickness of the material is greater than
the nominal diameter of the bolts plus 3 mm, the holes shall
be either drilled or sub-punched holes and the drill for all
sub-drilled holes shall be at least 1.6 mm smaller than the
nominal diameter of the bolt. Holes in A514 steel plates
over 12 rum thick shall be drilled.
513.2,5.3 Surfaces of bigh-strength-bolted parts in contact
with bolt head and nut shall not have a slope of more than
1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Where
the surface of a high-strength-bolted part has a slope of
more than 1:20, a beveled washer shall be used to
compensate for the lack of parallelism. High-strength
bolted parts shall fits solidly together when assembled and
shall not be separated by gaskets or any other interposed
compressible materials.
513.2.5.4 The orientation of fully inserted finger shims,
with a total thickness of not more than 6 mrn within a joint,
is independent of the direction ofapplication of the load.
513.2.5.5 When assembled, all joints surfaces, including
surfaces adjacent to the bolt head and nut, shall be free of
scale, except tight mill scale and shall be free of scale,
except tight mill scale and shall be free of dirt or other
foreign material. Burrs that would prevent solid seating of
the connection parts in the snug-tight condition shall be
removed. Contact surfaces within slip~critical connections
shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer or other coatings, except
as listed in Table 3 of the RCSC Specifications for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
 FABRICATION, ERECTION AND QUAUTY CONTROL 553
513.2.5.6 The use of high-strength bolts shall conform to
the requirements of the RCSC Specifications for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
513.2.6 Compression Joints.
513.2.6.1 Compression joints which depend on contact
bearing as part of the splice capacity shall have bearing
surfaces of individual fabricated pieces prepared by milling,
sawing or other means.
513.2.7 Dimensional Tolerances
513.2.7.1 Dimensional tolerances shall be as permitted in
the Code of Standard Practice of the American Institute of
Steel Construction, Inc.
513.2.8 Finishing of Column Bases
513.2.8.1 Column bases and base plates shall be finished in
accordance with the following requirements:
a. Rolled steel bearing plates 50 mm or less in
thickness are permitted without milling,' provided a
satisfactory contact bearing is obtained; rolled steel
bearing plates over 50 mm but not over 100 mm in
thickness may be straightened by pressing, or if
presses are not available, by milling for all bearing
surfaces (except as noted in subparagraphs (c) and
(d) of this section), to obtain a satisfactory contact
bearing; rolled steel plates over 100 mm thick shall
be milled for all bearing surfaces (except as noted in
subparagraphs (c) and (d) ofthis Section).
b. Column bases other than rolled steel bearing plates
shall be milled for all bearing surfaces (except as
noted in subparagraphs (c) and (d) ofthis Section).
The bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column
bases which are grouted to insure full bearing contact
on foundations need not be milled.
The top surfaces of base plates with column full
penetration welded need not be pressed or milled.
513.3 SHOP PAINTING
513.3.1.1 Shop painting and surfaces preparation shall be in
ac<:ordlan<::e with the provisions of the Code of Standard
Practice of the American Institute of Steel Construction,
513.3.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, steelwork which will
be concealed by interior building finish or will be in contact
See Commentaty Section J8 of the Manual of Steel Construction,
Allowable Stress Design, 91h Edition.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
with concrete need not be painted. Unless specifically
excluded shall be given one coat of shop paint.
513.3.2 Inaccessible Surfaces
513.3.2.1 Except for contact surfaces, inaccessible after
shop assembly shall be cleaned and painted prior to
assembly, if required by the design documents.
513.3.3 Contact Surfaces
513.3.3.1 Paint is permitted unconditionally in bearing-type
connections. For slip-critical connections, the faying
surface requirements shall be in accordance with the RCSC
Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A32S or
A490 Bolts, paragraph 3.(b)
513.3.4 Finished Surfaces
513.3.4.1 Machine-finished surfaces shall be protected
against corrosion by a rust-inhibiting coating that can be
removed prior to erection, or which has characteristics that
make removal prior to erection unnecessary.
513.3.5 Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds
513.3.5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the design
documents, surfaces within SO mm of any field weld
locations shall be free of materials than would prevent
proper welding or produce toxic fumes during welding.
513.4 ERECTION
513.4.1 Alignment of Column Bases
513.4.1.1 Column bases shall be set level and to correct
elevation with full bearing on concrete or masonry.
513.4.2 Bracing
513.4.2.1 The frame of steel skeleton buildings shall be
carried up true and plumb within the limits defined in the
Code of Standard Practice of the American Institute of Steel
Construction. Temporary bracing shall be provided, in
accordance with the requirements of the Code of Standard
Practice, wherever necessary to take care of all loads to
which the structure may be subjected including equipment
and the operation of same. Such bracing shall be left in
place as long as I?-ay be required for safety.
513.4.2.2 Wherever piles of materials erection equipment or
other loads are supported during erection, proper provision
shall be made to take care of stresses resulting from such
loads.
 ----~---- ...
5-54 STRUCTURAL STEEL
513.4.3.1 No permanent bolting or welding shall be
performed until as much of the structure as will be stiffened
513.4.4 Fit-ofColumn Compression Joints
513.4.4.1 Lack of contact bearing not exceeding a gap of
1.6 nun regardless of the type of connections used
(partial-penetration, groove-welded or bolted), shall be
acceptable. If the gap exceeds 1.6 nun, but is less than 6
mm, and if an engineering investigation shows sufficient
contact area does not exist, the gap shall be packed with
non-tapered steel shims. Shims may be of mild steel,
regardless ofthe grade of the main material.
513.4.5 Field Welding
513.4.5.1 Shop paint on surfi1ces adjacent to welds shall be
wire-brushed to reduce paint film to a minimum.
513.4.6 Field Painting
513.4.6.1 Responsibility for touch-up painting, cleaning
and field-painting shall be allocated in accordance with
accepted local practices, and this allocation shall be set
forth explicitly in the design documents.
513.4.7 Field Connections
513.4.7.1 As erection progresses, the work shall be
securely bolted or welded to take care of all dead load,
wind and erection stresses.
513.5 QUALITY CONTROL
513.5.1 The fabricator shall provide quality control
procedures to the extent that he deems necessary to assure
that all work is performed in accordance with this
Specification. In addition to the fabricator's quality control
procedures, material and workmanship at all times D;lay be
subject inspection by qualified inspectors representing the
purchases. If such inspection by representatives of the
purchaser will be required, it shall be so stated in design
documents.
513.5.2 Cooperation
513.5.2.1 A far as possible, all inspection by
representatives of the purchaser shall be made at the
fabricator's plant. The fabricator shall cooperate with the
inspector, permitting access for inspection to all places
where work is being done. Tbe purchaser's inspector shall
schedule his work for minimum interruption to the work of
the fabricator.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
thereby has been properly aligned.
513.5.3 Rejections
513.5.3.1 Material or workmanship not in
conformances with the -provisions of this specification
be rejected at any time during the progress of the
The fabricator shall receive copies of all reports !urmslled
to the purchaser by the inspection agency.
513.5.4 Inspection of Welding
513.5.4.1 The inspection of welding shall be performed .
accordance with the provisions of Section 6 of the AWS
Structural Welding Code-Steel, 01.1.
513.5.4.2 When nondestructive testing is required,
process, extent and standards of acceptance
defined clearly in the design documents.
513.5.5 Inspection of Slip-Critical, High-Strengtb
Bolted Connections
513.5.5.1 The inspection of slip-critical, high-strength
bolted connections shall be in accordance with
provisions of the RCSC Allowable Stress Design
Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts.
513.5.6 Identification of Steel
513.5.6.1 The fabricator shall be able to demonstrate by
~tten procedure and by actual practice a method of
material application and identification, visible at least
through the "fit-up" operation, of the main structural
elements of a shipping piece.
513.5.6.2 The identification method shall be capable of
verifying proper material applicable as it relates to:
1. Material specification designation
2. Heat number, if required
3. Material test reports for special requirements
 PlASTIC DESIGN

SECTION 514 - PLASTIC DESIGN Structural Steel With 290 MPa Minimum Yield Point,
ASTMA529

High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel

With 345 MPa Minimum Yield Point to l00-mm
Thick, ASTM A588
514.1.1 Subject to the limitations contained herein, simple
and (iontinuous beams, braced and unbraced planar rigid
frames, and similar parts of structures rigidly constructed 514.3 BASIS FOR MAXIMUM STRENGm
so as to be continuous over at least one interior support,'
DETERMINATION
are permitted to be proportioned on the basis of plastic
design, i.e., on the basis of their maximum strength. This
514.3.1 For one-or two-story frames, the maximum
strength, as determined by rational analysis, shall be not
strength is permitted to be determined by a routine plastic
less than that required to support a factored load equal to
procedure and ignore the frame instability effect (p.o.). For
1.7 times the given live load and dead load, or 1.3 times
braced multi-story frames, provisions shall be made to
these loads acting in conjunction with 1.3 times any
include the frame instability effect in the design of bracing
specified wind or earthquake forces.
system and frame members. For unbraced multi-story
frames, the frame instability effect shall be included
514.1.2 Rigid frames shall satisfy the requirements for
directly in the calculations for maximum strength.
Type 1 construction in the plane of the frame, as provided
in Section 501.2.2. This does not preclude the use of some
514.3.2 Stability of Braced Frames
simple connections, provided provisions of Section 514.3
are satisfied. Type 2 construction is permitted for members
514.3.2.1 The vertical bracing system for plastically
between rigid frames. Connections joining a portion of
designed braced multi-story frame shall be adequate, as
structure designed on the basis of plastic behavior with a
determined by an analysis, to:
po~ion not so designed need be no more rigid than
ordtnary seat-and-top-angle or ordinary web connections.
1. Prevent buckling of the structure under factored
gravity loads
514.1.3 Where plastic design is used as the basis for
2. Maintain the lateral stability of the structure
including the overturning effects of drift, und~
proportioning continuous beams and structural frames the
provisi~ns relating to allowable stress are waived. E~cept factored gravity plus factored horizontal loads.
as modtfied by these rules, however, all other provisions of
Sections 501 through 513 shall govern.
514.3.2.2 It is permitted to consider that the vertical
bracing system functions together with in-plane shear
514.1.4 It is not recommended that crane runways be
resisting exterior and interior walls, floor slabs and roof
designed continuous over interior vertical supports on the
decks, if these walls, slabs and decks are secured to the
basis of maximum strength. However, rigid frame bents
s~ctural frames. The columns, girders, beams and
supporting crane runways may be considered as coming
dIagonal members, when used as the vertical bracing
within the scope ofthe rules.
system, could be considered to comprise a vertical
cantilever, simply connected truss in the analyses for frame
buckling and lateral stability. Axial deformation of all
514.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL members in the vertical bracing system shaH be included in
the lateral stability analysis. The axial force in these
514.2.1 Structural steel shall conform to one of the
members caused by factored gravity plus factored
following specifications:
horizontal loads shall not exceed 0.85Py , where Py is the
product of yield stress times the profile area of the
Structural Steel, ASTM A36
member.
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, ASTM A242
514.3.2.3 Girders and beams included in the vertical
bracing system of a braced multi~story frame shall be
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Manganese Vanadium
proportioned for axial force and moment caused by the
Steel, ASTM A441
concurrent factored horizontal and gravity loads, in
accordance with Equation (514-2), with Per taken as the
As used here, "interior support" includes a rigid-frame maximum axial strength of the beam, based on the actual
knee formed by the junction of a column and a sloping or slenderness ratio between braced points in the plane of
horizontal beam or girder. bending.

National Structyral Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 STRUCTURAL STEEL

514.3.2 Stability of Unbraced Frames 514.5 SHEAR

514.3.2.1 The strength of an unbraced multi-story frame
shall be determined by an analysis which includes the
effect of frame instability and column axial deformation.
Such a frame shall be designed to be stable under (1)
factored gravity loads and (2) factored gravity loads plus
factored horizontal loads. The axial force in the columns at
factored load levels shall not exceed 0.75Py
514.5.1 Unless reinforced by diagonal stiffeners or a
doubler plate, the webs of columns, beams and girders,
including areas within the boundaries of the connections,
shall be so proportioned that,
where:

V shear that would be produced by the required

514.4 COLUMNS factored loading, N

d depth of the member, rom
514.4.1 In the plane of bending of columns which would tw =0 web thickness, rom
develop a plastic hinge at ultimate loading, the slenderness
ratio llr shall not exceed Ce , defined in Section 505.3.
514.6 WEB CRIPPLING
514.4.2 The maximum strength of an axially loaded
compression member shall be taken as, 514.6.1 Web stiffeners are required on a member at a point
ofload applications where a plastic hinge would form.
(514-1 )
514.6.2 At points on a member where the concentrated
where A is gross of the member and Fa, as defined by load delivered by the flanges of a member framing into it
Equation (505-1), is based upon the applicable slenderness would produce web crippling opposite the compression
ratio. flange or high-tensile stress in the connection of the tension
flange, web stiffeners are required in accordance with the
514.4.3 Members subject to combined axial load bending provisions of Section 511,2.
moment shall be proportioned to satisfy the following
interaction formulas,
514.7 MINIMUM THICKNESS (WIDTH
(514-2) TIDCKNESS RATIOS)
514.7.1 The width-thickness ratio for flanges of rolled W,
M or S shapes similar built-up, single-web shapes
(514-3) SUbjected to compression involving hinge rotation under
ultimate loading shall not exceed the following values:
in which:
M = maximum factored moment, kN-m
P factored axial load, kN
FvJMPa) bllt, I
248 8.5
Pe = Euler buckling load, kN 290 8.0
= (23/12)F'.,A, where F',A is as defined in Section
310 7.4
508.2.
345 7.0
e", = coefficient defined in Section 508, L 379 6.6
Mm= maximum moment that can be resisted by the
414 6.3 i
member in the absence of axial load, kN-m
448 6.0
Mp plastic moment, kN-m
=F,Z
Z = piastic section modulus, mm) 514.7.2 It is permitted to take the thickness of sloping
flanges as their average thickness.
For columns braced in the weak direction:
(514-4) 514.7.3 The width-thickness ratio of similarly compressed
M1'I/=Mpx
plates in box sections and cover plates shall not exceed For
For columns unbraced in the weak direction: this purpose, 500/ JF y . the width of a cover plate

M = },07
).jF;\\
(// r l
' AJI'~::S; Mpx (514-5)
shall be taken as the distance between longitudinal
lines of connecting rivets, high-strength bolts or welds.
1'1/ [ 8297'
/

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 PLASTIC DESIGN
514.7.4 The depth~thickness ratio of webs of members
sUbject to plastic bending shall not exceed the value given
by Equation (514-7) or (514-8), as applicable,
d 1082 (
-:;; ~ 1-1.4- when
p) p-::;0.27 (514~7)
t yFy Py Py
d 675 P
= ~ when > 0.27 (514-8)
t yFy Py
514.8 CONNECTIONS
514.8.1 All connections, the rigidity ofwhich is essential to
the continuity assumed as the basis of the analysis, shall be
capable of resisting the moments, shears and axial loads to
which they would be subjected by the full factored loading,
or any probable partial distribution thereof
514.8.2 Comer connections (haunches) that are tapered or
curved for architectural reasons shall be so proportioned
that the full plastic bending strength of the section adjacent
to the connection can be developed, if required.
514.8.3 Stiffeners shall be used, as required, to preserve the
flange continuity of interrupted members at their junction
with other members in a continuous frame. Such stiffeners
shall be placed in pairs on opposite sides of the web of the
member which extends continuously through the joint.
514.8.4 High-strength bolts, A307 bolts, rivets and welds
shall be proportioned to resist the forces produced at
factored load, using stresses equal to 1.7 times those given
in Sections 501 through 513. In general, groove welds are
preferable to fillet welds, but their use in mandatory.
514.8.5 High-strength bolts are permitted in joints having
painted contact surfaces when these joints are of such size
that the slip required to produce bearing would not
interfere with the formation, at factored loading, of the
plastic hinges assumed in the design.
514.9 LATERAL BRACING
514.9.1 Members shall be braced adequately to resist
,lateral and torsional displacements at the plastic hinge
locations associated with the failure mechanisms. The
laterally unsupported distance La from such braced hinge
locations to similarly terminated from Equation (514-9) or
(514-10), as applicable,
f '-9480 M
~=--+25 when +1.0> >-0.5 (514-9)
ry Fy Mp .
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
fer 9480 M (
- = - - when -0.5>->-1.0 514-10)
ry Fy Mp
wbere:
ry = radius of gyration of the member about its weak.
axis, mm
M = lesser of the moments at the ends of the unbraced
segment, kN-m
M/Mp= end moment ratio, positive when the segment is
bent in reverse curvature and negative when bent
in single curvature.
514.9.2 The foregoing provisions need not apply in the
region of the last hinge to form in the failure mechanism
assumed as the basis for proportioning a given member,
nor in members oriented with their weak. axis normal to the
plane of bending. However, in the region of the last hinge
to form, and in regions not adjacent to a plastic hinge, the
maximum distance between points of lateral support shall
be such as to satisfy the requirements of Equations (506-5),
(506-6), or (506-7), as well as Equations (508-1) and
(508-2). For this case, the values of fa and fb shall be
computed from the moment and axial force at factored
loading, divided by the applicable load factor.
514.9.3 Members built into a masonry wall and having
their web perpendicular to this wall can be assumed to
laterally supported with respect to their weak. axis of
bending.
514.10 FABRICATION
514.10.1 The provisions of Sections 501 through 513 with
respect workmanship shall govern the fabrication of
structures, or portions of structures, designed on the basis
of maximum strength, subject to the following limitations:
1. The use of sheared edges shall be avoided in
locations subject to plastic hinge rotation at factored
loading. If used, they shall be finished smooth by
grinding, chipping or planing.
2. In locations subject to plastic hinge rotation at
factored loading, holes for rivets or bolts in the
tension area shall be sub-punched and reamed or
drilled full size.
 STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 515 - SEISMIC
PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL
STEEL BUILDINGS IN SEISMIC
ZONE 4
515.1 SCOPE
515.1.1 The provisions contained in this Section are a
supplement to the Specifications from Sections 501
through 514. Additional design and detailing requirements
are provided to reach the levels of inelastic strength and
stability requires to meet the design objectives of this
Specification, particularly fur the detailed design of
buildings and structures that are subjected to substantial
earthquake effects.
515.1.2 When the load combinations of Section 201 sub
paragraph (e) for Allowable Stress Design are used,
structural steel buildings shall be designed in accordance
with the provisions of Sections 501 through 514 and this
Section where applicable.
, systems shall conform to A36, A441, ASOO, AS01, A572
515.2 GENERAL
515.2.1 Design and construction of steel framing in lateral
force-resisting systems in Seismic Zone 4 shall conform to
the requirements ofthis Section.
515.3 DEFINITIONS
Allowable Stresses are prescribed in Sections 501 through
514 of this Specification.
Chevron Bracing is that form of bracing where a pair of
braces located either above or below a beam terminates at a
single point within the clear beam span.
Connection is the group of elements that connect the
members to the joint.
Diagonal Bracing is that form of bracing that diagonally
connects joints at different levels.
Eccentric Braced Frame (EBF) is a diagonal braced
frame in which at least one end of each bracing member
connects to a beam a short distance from a beam-to-column
connection or from another beam-to-brace connection.
Girder is the horizontal member in a seismic frame. The
words beam and girder may be used interchangeably..
Joint is the entire assemblage at the intersections of the
members.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
K-bradng is that form of bracing where a pair of braces
located on one side of a column terminates at a single point
within the clear column height.
Link Beam is that part of a beam in an eccentrically
braced frame which is designed to yield shear and/or
bending so that buckling of the bracing members
prevented.
Strength is that strength prescribed in Section 515.4.2.
V-bracing is that form of chevron bracing that intersects a
beam from above and inverted V -bracing is that form of
chevron bracing that intersects a beam from below.
X-bracing is that form of bracing where a pair of diagonal.
braces cross near mid-length of the bracing members.
515.4 MATERIALS
515.4.1 Quality
5] 5.4.1.1 Structural steel used in lateral force resisting
(Grades 42 and SO), A913 (Grades 50 and 65) and A588.
Structural steel confomling to A283 (Grade D) may be
use.d for base plates and anchor bolts.
l!.:X('EP110N:
Other steel listed in the reference standards may be used
for the follOWing:
a. One-story buildings
h. Light-:framed wall .\),stems in accordance with
Section 515.12
515.4.2 Member Strength
515.4.2.1 When this section requires the strength of the
member be developed, the following shall be used:
Full Penetration welds F, A
Partial penetration and fillet 1.7F$
welds
Bolts and fillet welds 1. 7 Fs
 SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDING IN SEISMIC ZONE 4
== Flexural Strength.
=: Axial dead load
= Axial load on member due to earthquake
= AXial live load
=: Compressive axial strength of member
== tensile axial strength of member
:: shear strength of member
= plastic section modulus
515.4.2.2 Where Fs is the allowable stress value defined in
Allowable Stress Design in Sections 505 and 506. For the
purpose of determining the member or connection
strengths, the allowable stress values shall not be increased
by the one-third allowable stress increase per
Section 203.4.
-515.4.2.3 Members need not be compact unless otherwise
required by this Section.
515.5 COLUMN REQUIREMENTS
515.5.1 Column Strength
515.5.1.1 Columns shall satisfy the load combinations
required by Section 203.4 at allowable stress limits with
stress increases allowed by Section 203.4.2. In addition, in
Seismic Zone 4, columns in frames shall have the strength
to resist the axial force resulting from the following load
combinations in item 1 and 2.
1. Axial Compression
2. Axial Tension
EXCEPTIONS:
The axial load combinations as outlined above:
1. Need not exceed either of the maximum force that
can be transferred to the column, by elements of the
structure, or the limit as determined by the
overturning uplift which the foundation is capable of
resisting.
2. Need not apply to columns in moment-resisting
frames complying with Equation (5 J5-3) or
Equation (5 J5-4) where fa is equal to or less than
O. 3Fy for all load combinations.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
The above load combinations need only be used when
specifically referred to.
515.5.2 Column Splices
515.5.2.1 Column splices shall have sufficient strength to
develop the column forces determined in Section 515.5.1.1
items (1) and (2). Welded column splices that are subject to
net tensile forces shall comply with the more critical of the
following:
l. Partial penetration welds shall be designed to resist
150 percent of the force determined from Section
515.5.1.1 item (2).
2. Welding shall develop not less than 50 percent of
the flange area strength of the smaller column.
515.5.2.2 Splices employing partial penetration welds shall
be located at least 900 mm from girder flanges.
515.5.3 Slenderness Evaluation
This sub-section is applicable when the proVlslOns are
applied to the effective length determination of columns of
moment frames resisting earthquake forces. In the plane of
the earthquake forces the factor K may be taken as unity
when all ofthe following conditions are met:
The column is either continuous or fixed at each joint.
The maximum axial compressive stress, la, does not exceed
O.4Fy under design loads.
Calculated story drift ratios are less than the values given
in Section 208.5.8.
515.6 ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME
REQUIREMENTS
515.6.1 Ordinary moment frames (OMF) shall be designed
to resist the load combinations in Section 203.4.
515.6.2 All beam-to-column connections in OMFs which
resist earthquake forces shall meet one of the following
requirements:
l. Fully restrained (Type FR or Type 1) conforming
to Section 515.7.l.
2. Fully restrained (Type F.R. or Type 1) connections
with the design strengths of the connections capable
of resisting a combination of gravity loads and 00
times the design seismic forces.
5-60 STRUCTURAL STEEL
3. Partially restrained (Type P.R. or Type 3)
connections are permitted provided:
1. The connections are designed to resist the load
combinatio... ' ~n Sections 203.3 or 203.4 and,
2. . The connections have been demonstrated by
cyclic test to have adequate rotation capacity to
accommodate a story drift due to no times the
design seismic forces.
515.6.3 The moment frame drift calculations shall include
the contribution due to the rotation and distortion of
connections.
515.6.4 See Section 501.2.2 for the definitions of fully
restrained and partially restrained connections.
515.7 SPECIAL MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME
(SMRF) REQUIREMENTS
515.7.1 Girder-to-Column Connection
515.7.1.1 Required Strength
The girder-to-column connection shall be adequate to
develop the lesser of the following:
1. The strength of the girder in flexure.
2. The moment corresponding to development of the
panel zone shear strength as determined from
Equation (515-1).
Where a connection is not designed to contribute flexural
resistance at the joint, it need not develop the required
strength above if it can be shown to meet the deformation
compatibility requirements of Section 202.8.2.3.
515.7.1.2 Connection Strength
Connection configurations utilizing welds or high-strength
bolts shall demonstrate, by approved cyclic test results or
calculations, the ability to sustain inelastic rotation and
develop the strength criteria in Section 515.7.1.1
considering the effect of steel over strength and strain
hardening.
515.7.1.3 Flange Detail Limitations
For steel whose specified ultimate strength is less than
1.5 times the specified yield strength, plastic hinges shall
not form at locations in which the beam flange area has
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
been reduced, such as for bolt holes. Bolted connections of
flanges plates of beam- column joints, shall have the net
to-gross area ratio AelAg equal to or greater than l.2Fy IFu.
515.7.2 Panel Zone
515.7.2.1 Strength
The shear strength of the joint shall be capable of resisting
the shear induced by beam bending moments due to gravity
loads plus 1.85 times the prescribed seismic forces, but the
shear strength need not exceed that required to develop
0.8Ws of the girders framing into the column flanges at
the joint. The joint panel zone shear strength may be
obtained from the following formula:
where:
be = the width ofthe column flange, mm
db = the depth of the beam, mm
de = the column depth, mm
t = the total thickness of the panel zone including
doubler plates, mm
ti = the thickness ofthe column flange, mm
515.7.2.2 Thickness
The panel zone thickness, tz , shall conform to the following
formula:
(515-2)
where:
dz = the panel zone depth between continuity plates, mm
W z = the panel zone width between column flanges, mm
For this purpose, the tz shall not include any doubler plate
thickness unless the doubler plate is connected to the
column web with plug welds adequate to prevent local
buckling of the plate.
515.7.2.3 Doubler Plates
Doubler plates provided to reduce panel zone shear stress
or to reduce the web depth thickness ratio shall be placed
not more than 2 mm from the column web and shall be
welded across the plate width top and bottom with at least
5 mm fillet weld. They shall be either butt or fillet welded
to the column flanges to develop the shear strength of the
doubler plate. Weld strength shall be as given in
Section 515.4.2.
 SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDING IN SEISMIC ZONE 4
6-61

515.7.3 Width-Thickness Ratio is defined for the purpose of this exception as

a single line of columns, or parallel lines of
Girders shall comply with Section 506, except that the columns located within 10 percent of the plan
dimension perpendicular to the line of
flange width-thickness ratio, bf l2ft shall not exceed The
columns; or
width- 0.31~E I Fy . thickness ratio of column sections
shall meet the requirements of Section 502.6. (c) When the design for combined axial
The outside wall width-thickness ratio of rectangular tubes compression and bending is proportioned to
used for columns shall not exceed unless otherwise satisfy Allowable Stress Design without the
one-third permissible stress increase.
stiffened. 0.65~EI Fy
2. Columns in any story which has a lateral shear
515.7.4 Continuity Plates
strength 50 percent greater than that qf the story
above.
When determining the need for tension flange continuity
plates, the value of Phfshall be taken as 1.8(bv1Fyb.
3. Columns which lateral strengths are not included ill
the design to resist code-required shears.
515.7.5 Strength Ratio
515.7.6 Trusses in SMRSF
515.7.5.1 At any moment frame the joint, the column
girder moment strength ratio in the following formula shall
515.7.6.1 Trusses may be used as horizontal members in
be satisfied:
SMRF if the sum of the truss seismic force flexural
IZAFyc fa)/IMc >1.0 strength exceeds the sum of the column seismic force
(515-3)
flexural strengths immediately above and below the truss
by a factor of at least 1.25. For this determination the
strengths of the members shall be reduced by the gravity
(5]5-4)
load effects. In buildings of more than one story, the
column axial stress shall not exceed 0.4 f~ and the ratio of
the unbraced column height to' the least radius of gyration
where, (fa > 0)
shall not exceed 60. Columns shall have allowable stresses
Me ::: the moment at column center line due to the
reduced 25 percent when one end frame into a truss, and 50
development of plastic hinging in the beam
percent when both ends frame into trusses. The connection
accounting for over-strength and strain hardening,
of truss chords to the column shall develop the lesser ofth~
kN-m
following:
Mpz= the sum of beam moments when the panel zone
shear strength reaches the value specified in
1. The strength of the truss chord.
Equation (515-1), kN-m
2. The chord force necessary to develop 125 percent of
EXCEPTION:
the flexural strength ofthe column.
Columns meeting the compactness limitations for beams
515.7.7 Girder-Column Joint Restraint
given ill Section 515.7.3 need flot comply with this
reqlliremmt provided they conform to one of the follOWing
515.7.7.1 Restrained Joint
conditions:
Where it can be shown that the columns of SMRF remain
1. Columns with fa less than O.4F;. for all load
elastic, the flanges of the columns need be laterally
combinations, other than loads spec!fied in Sectioll
supported only at the level of the girder top flange.
515.5.1 and
Columns may be assumed to remain elastic if one of the
(a) Which are used il1 the top story of a
following conditions is satisfied:
multistory bUilding with building period
greater than O. 7 second;
1. The ratio in Equation (515-3) or (515-4) is greater
than] .25.
(b) Where the Slim of their resistance is less than
20 percent qf the shear ill a story. alld is less
than 33 percent of the shear on each qf the
column lilies wi/hill th(lt story. A column line

National Structural Code of the Philippines. Volume 1

5-62 STRUCTURAL STEEL
2. The flexural strength of the column is at least 1.25
times the moment that corresponds to a total panel
zone shear strength.
3. Girder flexural strength or panel zone strength will
limit column stress (fa+fbx+fhy) to Fy of the column.
The column will remain elastic under gravity loads plus no
times the design seismic forces.
Where the column cannot be shown to remain elastic, the
column flanges shall be laterally supported at the levels of
the girder top and bottom flanges. The column flange
lateral support shall be capable of resisting a force equal to
one percent of the girder flange capacity at allowable stress
and at a limiting displacement perpendicular to the frame 5
mm. Required bracing members may brace the column
flanges either directly, or indirectly through the column
web or girder flanges.
515.7.7.2 Unrestrained Joint
Columns without lateral support transverse to a joint shall
t::anform to the requirements of Section 501.4, with the
column considered as pin ended and the length taken as the
distance between lateral supports conforming with Section
515.7.7.1. The column stress,Ja, shall be determined from
gravity loads plus the lesser ofthe following:
no times the design seismic forces.
The forces corresponding to either 125 percent of the
girder flexural strength or the panel zone shear Strength.
The stress,h" shall include the effects of the bracing force
specified in Section 515.7.7.1 and P..1 effects.
IIr for such columns shall not exceed 60.
At truss frames, the culumn shall be braced at each truss
chord for a lateral force of one percent of the compression
yield strength ofthe truss chord.
515.7.8 Beam Braciog
Both flanges of beams shall be braced directly or
indirectly. The beam bracing between column centerlines
shall not exceed 96rp. In addition, braces shall be placed at
concentrated loads where a hinge may form.
515.7.9 Changes in Beam Flange Area
Abrupt changes in beam flange area are not permitted
within possible plastic hinge regions of special moment
resistant frames.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
515.7.10 Moment Frame Drift Calculation
515.7.10.1 Moment frame drift calculations shall include
bending and shear contributions from the clear girder and
column spans, column axial deformation, and the rotation:
and distortion ofthe panel zone.
EXCEPTIONS:
1. Drift calculations may be based on column and
girder center lines where either of the follOWing
conditions are met:
(a) It can be demonstrated that the drift so
computedfor frames of similar cOl~figuration is
typically within 15 percent of that determined
above.
(b) The column panel zone strellgth call develop 0.8
2M. of the girders framing to the column
.panges at the joint.
.2. Column arial deformations maybe neglected if they
contribute less than 10 percent to the total drift.
515.8 REQUIREMENTS FOR BRACED
FRAMES
515.8.1 General
515.8.1.1 The provisions of this section apply to all braced
frames, except Special Concentrically Braced Frames
designed in accordance with Section 515.9 or Eccentrically
Braced Frames (EBF) designed in accordance with Section
515.10. Those members which resist seismic forces totally
or partially by shear or flexure shall be designed 10
accordance with Section 515. g except Section 515.8.3.
515.8.2 Braciog Members
515.8.2.1 Slenderness
In Seismic Zone 4, the Ilr for bracing members shall not
exceed 4 .3~ E I Fy except as permitted in Sections 515. g.4
and 515.8.5.
515.8.2.2 Stress Reduction
The allowable stress, Fa.< for bracing members resisting
seismic forces in compression is given by the following
formula:
Fas= f3Fa (515-4)
 SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDING IN SEISMIC ZONE 4
Where:
p : .: the stress reduction factor determine',d from the
following formula:
1
P== --Kl---'-
l+(I_)
2ec
Fa ::.: the allowable axial compression stress, allowed in
ASD.
EXCEPTION:
Bracing members carrying gravity load.. may be designed
llsing the column strength reqllirement and load
combinations ofSection 515.5.1.
515.S.2.3 Latera) forte distribution
The seismic lateral force along any line of bracing shall be
distributed to the various members so that neither the sum
of the horizontal component.s of the forces in members
acting in tension nor the sum of the horizontal components
of forces in members acting in compression exceeds 70
percent of the total force.
EXCEPTION:
Where compression bracing acting alone has the strength,
neglecting the strength-reduction factor A to resist no
times the design seismic force, such distribution is Iwl
required.
A line of bracing is defined, for the purpose of this
provision, as a single line, or parallel lines located within
10 percent of the dimension of the structure perpendicular
to the line ofbracing.
515.8.2.4 Built-up members
The llr of individual parts of built-up bracing members
between stitches when computed about a line perpendicular
to the axis through the parts, shall not be greater than 75
percent ofthe llr of the member as a whole.
515.S.2.5 Compression elements in brates
The width-thickness ratio of stiffened and unstiffened
compression elements used in braces shall be as shown in
Table 502.1 for compact sections.
The width-ihickness ratio of angle sections shall be limited
to O.31~E I Fy. Circular sections shall have outside
diameter-waIl thickness ratio not exceeding 7. 63E!/y.
National Structural Code of
5.03
Rectangular tubes shall have outside width-thickness ratio
not exceeding O.65~ E ! Fy .
EXCEPTION:
Compression elements stiffened to resist local buckling.
515.8.3 Bracing connedions.
515.8.3.1 Forces.
Bracing connections shall have the strength to resist the
least of the following:
1. The tensile strength of the bracing, Pst.
2. J.i" times the force in the brace due to design seismic
forces, in combination with gravity loads.
3. The maximum force that can be transferred to the
brace by the system.
Bracing connections shall, as a minim~ satisfy the load
combinations required by Section 2.I.I.e at allowable
stress design limits with stress increases allowed by
Section 2.1. 1. c. These combinations shall include the
provisions for Sections 515.8.2.2 and 515.8.4.1.
Beam-to-column connections for beams, that are part of the
bracing system shall have 'the capacity to transfer the force
determined above. Where eccentricities in the frame
geometry or connection load path exist, the affected
members and connections shall have the strength to resist
all secondary forces resulting from the eccentricities fn
combination with all primary forces using the lesser of the
forces determined above.
515.8.3.2 Net area.
In bolted brace connections, the ratio of effective net
section area to gross section area shall satisfy the formula:
where:
Ae effective net area as defined in ASD.
Fu =:: minimum tensile strength.
F = stress in brace as determined in Section 515.8.3.1
a = fraction of the member force from Section 515.8.3.1
that is transferred across a particular section.
the Philippines, Volume 1
5-64 STRUCTURAL STEEL
515.8.4 Bracing configuration.
515.8.4.1 Chevron bracing
Chevron bracing shall conform with the following:
1. Bracing members shall be designed for 1.5 times the
otherwise prescribed seismic forces, in addition to
the requirement of Section 515.8.2.2.
2. The beam intersected by chevron braces shall be
continuous between columns.
3. Where chevron braces intersect a beam from below,
i.e. inverted V brace, the beam shall be capable of
supporting all tributary gravity loads presuming the
bracing not to exist.
EXCEPTION:
This limitation need not apply to penthouses, one-story
building or top story ofbuilding.
51~.8.4.2 K-bracing
K-bracing is prohibited except as permitted by Section
'515.8.5.
515.8.4.3 Non-concentric bracing
Non-concentric bracing shall conform with the following:
1. Any member intersected by the brace shall be
continuous through the connection.
2. When the eccentricity of the brace is greater than the
depth of the intersected member at the eccentric
location, the affected member shall have the strength
to resist the forces prescribed in Section 515.8.2.2,
including the effects of all secondary forces
resulting from eccentricities.
515.8.5 One- and two- story building.
Braced frames not meeting the requirements of Sections
515.8.2 through 515.8.4 may be used in buildings not over
two stories in height and in roof structures, if the braces
have the strength to resist Do times the design seismic
forces.
515.8.6 Non-building Structures.
Non-building structures with Rw values defined by Table
2.21 need comply only with the provisions of Section
515.8.3.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
515.9 REQUIREMENTS SPECIAL
CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME
515.9.1 General
The provisions of this section apply to special
concentrically braced frame structures as defined in
Section 2.2.2. All members and connections in special
braced frames shall be designed and detailed to resist shear
and flexure caused by eccentricities in the geometry of the
members comprising the frame in accordance with Section
515.9. Any member intersected by a brace shall be
continuous through the connection. Horizontal bracing that
transfers forces between horizontally offset bracing in the
vertical plane shall be subject to the requirements of
Section 515.9, except Sections 515.9.2.3; 515.8.4.1, Item 3;
and 515.8.4.2. Horizontal bracing other than the above is
not subjected to the requirements of Section 515.9.
515.9.2 Bracing Members
515.9.2.1 Slenderness
The kllr for bracing members shall not exceed
5.87.JE I Fy except as permitted in Section 515.9.6.
515.9.2.2 Lateral-force distribution
The seismic lateral force along any line of bracing shall be
distributed to various members so that neither the sum of
the horizontal components of forces in members acting in
compression or tension exceed 70 percent of the total force.
EXCEPTION:
Where compression bracing acting alone has the strength
to resist no times the design seismic force. such
distribution is not required
A line of bracing is defined, for the purposes of this
provision, as a single line or parallel lines within 10
percent of the dimension of the structure perpendicular to
the line ofbracing.
515.9.2.3 Built-up members
The spacing of stitches shall be such that the slenderness
ratio (/ir) of individual elements between the stitches does
not exceed 0.4 times the governing slenderness ratio of the
built-up members. The total shear strength of the stitches
shall be at least equal to the tensile strength of each
element The spacing of the stitches shall be uniform and
not less than two stitches shall be used. Bolted stitches
shall not belocated within the middle one fourth of the
clear brace length.
 REQUIREMENTS SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME
lrhere it can be shown that the braces can buckle without
Causing shear in the stitches, the spacing of the stitches
shall be such that the slenderness ratio (llr) of the
uldividual element between the stitches does not exceed
(J.75 times the governing slenderness ratio of the built-up
member.
515.9.2.4 Compression elements in braces
The width-thickness ratio of the compression elements
used in braces shall meet the requirements of ASD Table
502.1, for compact sections. The width-thickness ratio of
angle section shall be limited to O.3I~ E I Fy. Circular
sections shall have outside diameter-wall thickness ratio
. lnot exceeding 7.63E!FJ" rectangular tubes shalt have
'outside wall width-thickness ratio not exceeding
O.65~E I Fy
tCompression elements stiffened to resist local buckling.
;515.9.3 Bracing connectioDs
Bracing connections shall have the strength to resist the
lesser of the following:
The strength of brace in axial tension, Pst.
flo times the force in the brace due to the design
seismic forces, in combination with gravity loads.
The maximum force that can be transferred to the
brace by the system.
Hr""'T'" connections shall, as a minimum. satisfy the load
required by Section 2.1.1 at allowable stress
s with stress increases allowed by Section 2.] .l.c.
to-column connections for beams that are part of the
ng system shall have the capacity to transfer the force
ed above. Where eccentricities in the frame
or connection load path exist, the affected
lPrtll~p"" and connectrons shall have the strength to resist
secondary forces resulting from the eccentricities in
. . with all primary forces using the lesser of the
determined above.
9.3.2 Net area
bolted brace connections, the ratio of effective net
area to gross section shall satisfY Equation (S] S-6)
Section 5158.3.2.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
5-65
515.9.3.3 Gusset Plates
End connections of braces shall provide a flexural strength
in excess ofthat ofthe brace gross section about the critical
buckling axis.
EXCEPTION:
Where the out-?f-plane buckling strength of the brace is
less than the in-plane buckling strength, the brace is
permitted to terminate on a single gusset plate connection
with a setback oftwo times the gusset thickness from a line
about which the gusset plate may bend unrestrained by the
columll or beam joints. The gusset plate shall be designed
to carry the compressive strength of the brace without
buckling.
515.9.4 Bracing configuration
515.9.4.1 Chevron bracing
Chevron bracing shall conform with the following:
1. The beam intersected by chevron braces shall be
continuous between columns.
2. Where chevron braces intersect a beam from below,
i.e., inverted V brace, the beam shall be capable of
supporting all tributary gravity toads presuming the
bracing not to exist.
3. A beam intersected by chevron braces shall have the
strength to support the following tributary gravit)i
loads and unbalanced brace force combinations:
1.2D + O.SL + Pb (SIS-8)
0.9D- P b (SIS-9)
Where:
D tributary dead load
L == tributary live load
Ph == the maximum unbalanced post~buckling force that
can be applied to the beam by the braces. For this
purpose, the maximum unbalanced force may be
computed using a minimum of PSI for the tension
and a maximum of 0.3P,c for the compressioll.
brace.
4. Both flanges of beams at the point of intersection of
chevron braces shall be laterally supported directly
or indirectly.
5-66 STRUCTURAL STEEL
EXCEPTION:
beam at a total frame drift of Lk times the drift
Limitations 2 and 3 need not apply to penthouses, one
story buildings or the top story ojhuilding.'" for prescribed seismic forces, shall not exceed th~
515.9.4.2 K-Bradng
K bracing is prohibited.
515.9.5 Columns
Columns in braced frames shall meet the requirements of
Section 515.7.3. In addition to meeting the requirements of
Section 515.5.1 and 515.5.2, columns splices shall be
designed to develop the full shear strength and 50 percent
of the full moment strength of the section. Splices shall be
located in the middle one third of the column clear height.
515.9.6 Non-building structures
Non-building structures with R", values defined by
Table 2.21 need comply only with the provisions of
Sections 515.8.3.1 and 515.8.3.2.
515.10 ECCENTRIC BRACED FRAME (EBF)
REQUIREMENTS
515.10.1General
Eccentrically braced frames shall be designed In
accordance with this section.
515.10.2 Link beam
There shall be a link beam provided at least at one end of
each brace. Beams in EBF's shall comply with the
requirements of Sec. 4.5.1.4.1, except that the flange
width-thickness ratio, h/2t" shall not exceed OJ I~ HII'y .
515.10.3 Link beam strength
Link beam shear strength V" and flexural strength, /0.1." are
the strengths as defined in Section 5 J5.4.1. Where the link
beam strength is governed by shear, the flexural and axial
capacities within the link shall be calculated using the
beam flanges only.
A reduced flexural strength Mrs. for use in Sections
515.10.8 and 515.10.13 is defined as Z(F,. - {,,), Wherefo is
less than 0.15 [~.,fo may be neglected. "
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
515.10.4 Link Beam Rotation
The rotation of the link segment relative to the rest of
following:
1. 0.090 radians for link segments having clear lengths
of 1.6M/Y. or less.
2. 0.30 radians for link segments having clear
of 3.0 M/Vs or greater.
3. A value obtained by linear interpolation for
lengths between the above limits.
515.10.5 Link beam web
The web of the link beam shall be single thickness without
doubler plate reinforcement. No openings shall be placed
in the web of a link beam. The web shear shall not exceed
0.8Vs, under prescribe lateral forces.
515.10.6 Beam connection braces
Brace-to-beam connections shall develop the compression
strength of the brace and transfer this force to the beam
web. No part of the brace-to-beam connection shall extend
into the web area of a link beam.
515.10.7 Link beam stiffeners
Link beam shall have full depth web stiffeners on both
sides of the beam web at the brace end of the link beam. In
addition, for link beams with clear lengths within the limits
of Section 515.10.4 Item 3, full depth stiffeners shall be
placed a distance hI from each end of the link. The
stiffeners shall have a combined width not less than br 2tw
and Ii thickness not less than 0.75 t", or Less than 10 mm.
515.10.8 Intenoediate stiffeners
Intermediate full depth web stiffeners shall be provided in
either of the following conditions:
Where the link beam strength is controlled by Vs.
Where the link beam strength is controlled by flexure and
the shear determined by applying the reduced flell.'Ural
strength., M". exceeds 0.45 !~df.
515.10.9 Web stiffener spacing
Where intermediate web stiffeners are required, the spacing
shall c.onfoml to the requirements given below.
For Link beams with a rotation angle of 0.09 radian, the
spacing shall not exceed 381,r - 115.
 REQUIREMENTS SPEQAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME
For link beams with a rotation angle of 0.03 radian or less
the spacing shall not exceed 56/,. - dIS. Interpolation may
be used for rotation angles between 0.03 and 0.09 radian.
515.10.10 Web Stiffener Location
For beams 610mm in depth and greater, intermediate full
depth web stiffeners are required on both sides of the web.
Such web stiffeners are required only on one side of the
beam web for beams less than 610mm in depth. The
stiffener thickness, I,., of one side stiffeners shall be not
less than 10mm and the width shall not be less than
(hI2) - t,..
515.10.l1Stiffener Welds
Fillet welds connecting the stiffener to the beam web shall
develop a stiffener force of AsFy . Fillet welds connecting
the stiffener to the flanges shall develop a stiffener force of
A sFJ4.
Where:
As! hI of stiffener.
b = width ofstiffener plate
515.10.12 Link beam-column connection
Length of link beam connected to the column flange shall
not exceed L6MIV,
Where a link beam is connected to the column flange the
following requirements shall be met:
The beam flanges shall have full penetration welds to the
column.
Where the link beam strength is controlled by shear as per
Section 515.10.8 the web connection shall be welded to
develop the full link beam web shear strength.
Where the link beam is connected to the column web, the
beam flanges shall have full penetration welds to the
connection plates and the web connection shall be welded
to develop the link beam web shear strength. Rotation
between the link beam and the column shall not exceed
0.015 radian at a total frame drift of L1A/.
515.10.13 Brace and beam strength.
The controlling link beam strength is either the shear
strength, Vs, or the reduced flexural strength, Mrs,
whichever results in the lesser force in the brace.
Each brace and beam outside the link shall have the axial
strength or reduced flexural strength, Mrs, at least 1.5 times
the forces corresponding to the controlling link beam
National Structural Code
5-67
strength. Each brace and beam assembly outside the link
shall have combined reduced flexural strengths, Mm at
least 1.3 times the forces corresponding to the controlling
link beam strength.
515.10.14 Column strength
Columns shall be designed to remain elastic at 1.25 times
the strength of the EBF bay, as defined in Section
515.10.13. Column strength need not exceed the
requirements of Section 515.5.
515.10.15 Roof link beam
A link beam is not required in roof beams for EBF over
five stories.
515.10.16 Concentric brace in combination
The first story of an EBF bay over five stories in height
may be concentrically braced if this story can be shown to
have an elastic capacity 50 percent greater than the yield
capacity of the story frames above the first story.
515.10.17 Axial forces
Axial forces in beams ofEBF frames due to braces and due
to transfer of seismic force to the end of the frames shall be
included in the frame calculations.
515.10.18 Beam flanges
Top and bottom flanges of EBF frame beams shall be
laterally braced at the ends of link beams and at intervalS'
not exceeding 0.45J E I Fy times the beam flange width.
End bracing shall be designed to resist 6.0 percent of the
beam flange strength, defined as F;bf If Intermediate
bracing shall be designed to resist 1.0 percent of the beam
flange force at the brace point using the link beam strength
determined in Sec. 515. 10.13.
515.10.19 Beam-column connection
Beam connections to columns may be designed as pins in
the plane of the beam web if the link beam is not adjacent
to the column. Such connection must have capacity to
resist a torsional moment of 0.01 f~.b;lt1.
of the Philippines, Volume 1
 STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION 515.11 REQUIREMENTS gravity loads and lateral forces necessary to develop
maximum amplified vertical shear force in all special
SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT segments, VS!h given by the following formula:
FRAMES
3.4M. (L Ly)... .

515.11.IGeneraI
.
V-"""-L-+O.l 1E1
.
L3 +LL.5(Pg ,+0.3P",)sma

Special truss moment frames of steel shall be designed in where:

accordance with this section. EI flexural stiffness ofthe chord members.

L = span length ofthe truss.

515.11.2 Special segment Ls = 0.9 times the length of the special segment.

Ms flexural strength of the chord members.

Each horizontal truss which is part of the moment frame Psc = axial compression strength of the diagonal

shall have a special segment located within the middle one
half length of the truss. Such trusses shall be limited to
span lengths between columns not to exceed 15240mm and
overall depth not to exceed 1829mm. The length of the
special segment shall have a range from 0.1 to 0.5 times
the truss span length. The length-to-depth ratio of any
panel in the special segment shall be limited to a maximum
of 0.67. All panels within the special segment shall be
either Vierendeel or X-braced, not a combination thereof
Where diagonal members are used in the special segment,
they shall be arrange in an X pattern separated by vertical
members. Such diagonal members shall have the strength
to resist a force at least equal to 0.25 times the diagonal
member tension strength. Bolted connections shall not be
used for web members within the special segment. Splicing
of chord members shall not be permitted within the special
segment or within a one-half panel length from the ends of
the special segment. Axial stresses in diagonal web
members due to concentrated dead load plus live loads
acting within the special segment shall not exceed 0.03 Fy
member.
axial tension strength of diagonal members.
angle that the diagonal member make with the
horizontal
515.11.S Connections
Connections of all elements in the truss frames, including
those within the truss, shall conform to the requirements of
Section 208.6.2.
515.11.6 Compactness
Diagonal web members of the special segment shall
be made of flat bars. The width-thickness ratio of such flat
bars shall not exceed 2.5. The width-thickness ratio of
angles, and flanges and webs of T sections used for chord
members in the special segment shall not exceed
0.31JE I Fy.

515.11.3 Special segment members strength 515.11.7Lateral bracing

In the fully yielded state, the special segment shall develop Top and bottom chords of the trusses shall be laterally

vertical shear strength through flexural strength of the braced at the ends of the segment, and at intervals not to

chord members and through axial tension and compression exceed Lp along the entire length ofthe truss.

strength of diagonal web members. The top and bottom where:

chord members in the special segment shall be made of

identical sections and shall provide at least 25 percent of
the required vertical shear strength. The maximum axial
stress in the chord members shall not exceed 0.4 Fy .
Diagonal members. in any panel of the special segment
shall be made of identical sections. The end connections of
diagonal web members in the special segment shall have
strength to resist a minimum force equal to Pst of the
member.
~ 176r,~:,
Lp
Each lateral brace at the ends of and within the special
segment shall have strength to resist at least 5 percent of Pst
of the chord member. Lateral braces outside of the special
segment shall have strength to resist at least 2.5 percent of .
P3t of the chord member.

515.11.4 Non-special segment members strength 515.11.8Materials

All members and connections of special truss moment The material specifications of Section 501.3 are superseded
frames, except those in Section 515.11.3, shall have by the requirements of Section 515.4.1 for all elements in
strength to resist t~e forces due to combination of specified the special trusses.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDING IN SEISMIC ZONE 2 5-69

SECTION 516 SEISMIC accommodate a story drift due to no times the

design seismic forces.
PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL
STEEL BUILDINGS IN SEISMIC 3.3 The moment frame drift calculations shall
include the contribution due to the rotation and
. ZONE 2 distortion of the connection.

516.1 General See Chapter 5 for definition offully restrained connections.

Design and construction of steel framing in lateral~force ~16.5 SPECIAL MOMENT RESISTING FRAME
resisting systems in Seismic Zone 2 shall conform to the (SMRF) REQUIREMENTS
requirements of this code. Additionally, in Seismic Zone 2,
such framing shall conform to the requirements of this 516.5.1 Girder-to-column connections
section.
516.5.1.1 Required Strength. The girder4a-column
516.2 Definitions
connection shall be adequate to develop the lesser of the
following:
Definitions shall be as prescribed in Section 515.3.

1. The strength of the girder in flexure.

516.3 Materials
2. The moment corresponding to development of the
panel zone shear strength as determined from
Materials shall be as prescribed in Section 515.4.
Formula (11-1).

EX('EPTION:
EXCEPTION:

Where a connection is not designed to contribute flexural

Ordinary moment frames in accordance with Section
resistance at the joint, it need not develop the required
516.4.
516.4 ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME
REQUIREMENTS
Ordinary moment frames (OMF) shall be designed to resist
the load combination of Section 203.4 for Allowable
Stress Design.
All beam-to-column connections in OMFs that resist
earthquake forces shall meet one of the follo,",,1.ng
requirements:
1. Fully restrained (Type F.R. or Type 1) conforming
to Section 516.5.1.
2. Fully restrained (Type F.R. or Type 1) connections
with the design strength of the connections capable
of resisting a combination of gravity loads and no
times the design seismic forces.
3. Partially restrained (Type P.R. or Type 3)
connections are permitted as follows:
3. 1 The connections are designed to resist the load
combinations in Section 203.4 for Allowable
Stress Design., and
3.2 The connection have been demonstrated by
cyclic tests to have adequate rotation capacity to
strength if it can be shown to meet the deformation
compatibility requirements of Section 1633.2.4
516.5.1.2. Connection Strength. The girder to column
connection may be considered to be adequate to develop
the flexural strength of the girder if it conforms to the
following:'
1. The flanges have full-penetration butt welds to the
columns.
2. The girder-ta-web connections shall be capable of
resisting the girder shear determined for the
combination of gravity loads and the seismic shear
forces which result from the compliance with
Section 516.5.1.1. This connection strength need not
exceed that required to develop gravity load plus no
times the girder shear resulting from the design
seismic forces.
Where the flexural strength of the girder flanges is greater
than 70 percent of the flexural strength of the entire section
[ i.e. bt{d-lpFy>O. 7Z;xF)'] the web connection may be made
by means ofwelding or high strength bolting.
F or girders not meeting the criteria in the paragraph above,
the girder web-to-column connection shall be made by
means of welding the web directly or through shear tabs to
the column. That welding shall have a strength capable of
development at least 20 percent of the flexural strength of
the girder web. The girder shear shall be resisted by means
of additional welds or friction-type high strength bolts or
both.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 5-70 STRUCTURAL STEEL
516.5.1.3 Alternate connection. Connection configurations
utilizing welds or high-strength bolts not conforming with
Section 516.5.1.2 may be used if they are shown by test or
calculation to meet the criteria in Section 516.5. L L Where
conformance is shown by calculation, 125 percent of the
strength of the connecting elements may be used.
516.5.1.4 Flange detail limitations. For steel whose
specified strength is less than 1,5 time the specified yield
strength, plastic hinges shall not form at locations in which
the beam flange area has been reduced, such as for bolt
holes. Bolted connections of flange plates of beam-column
joints shall have the net-to-gross area ratio A,/Ag equal to
greater than I.2F;F.,.
516.5.2 Trusses in SMRF. Trusses may be used as
horizontal members in SMRF if the sum of the truss seismic
force flexural strength exceeds the sum of the column
seismic force flexural strength immediately above and below
the truss by a factor of at least 1.25. For this determination,
the strengths of the members shall be reduced by the gravity
load effects. In buildings of more than one story, the column
axial stress shall not exceed O.4Fy and the ratio of the
un~raced column height to the least radius of gyration shall
not exceed 60. The connection of the truss chords to the
column shall develop the lesser ofthe following:
1. The strength of the truss chord.
2. The chord force necessary to develop 125 percent of
the flexural strength of the column.
516.5.3 Girder-column joint restraint
516.5.3.1 Restrained joint. Where it can be shown that the
columns of SMRF remain elastic, the flanges of the columns
need be laterally supported only at the level of the girder top
flange.
Columns may be assumed to remain elastic if one of the
following conditions is satisfied:
1. The ratio in Formula (515-3) or (515-4) is grater than
1.25.
2. The flexural strength of the column is at least
1.25 times the moment that corresponds to the panel
zone shear strength.
3. Girder flexural strength or panel zone strength will
limit column stress (fu+."'-,+/h).) to f~, of the column.
4. The column will remain elastic under gravity load
plus no time the design seismic forces.
Where the column cannot be shown to remain elastic, the
column flanges shall be laterally supported at the levels of
the girder top and bottom flanges. The column flange lateral
support shall be capable of resisting a force equal to one
percent of the girder flange capacity at the allowable stresses
[ and at a limiting displacement perpendicular to the frame
of 5.08 mm]. Required bracing members may brace the
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
l
column flanges directly or indirectly through the column
web or the girder flanges.
515.5.3.2 Unrestrained joint Columns without lateral
support transverse to a joint shall conform to the
requirements of Division m,.with the columns considered as
a pin ended and the length taken as the distance between
lateral supports conforming with Section 516.5.3. L The
column stress Fa, shall be determined from the gravity loads
plus the lesser of the following:
1. no times the design seismic forces.
2. The forces corresponding to either 125 percent of the
girder flexural strength or the panel zone shear
strength.
The stress, /by> shall include the effects of the bracing force
specified in Section 516.5.3.1 and PA effects.
L'r for such columns shall not exceed 60.
At truss frames, the columns shall be braced at each truss
chord for a lateral force equal to one percent of the
corresponding yield strength ofthe chord.
516.5.4 Changes in beam flange area. Abrupt changes in
beam flange area are not permitted within possible plastic
hinge regions of the special moment-resistant frames.
516.6 Requirements for Braced Frames
516.6.1 General The provisions of this section apply to all
braced frames, except special concentrically braced frames
designed in accordance with Section 515.9 and eccentrically
braced frames designed in accordance with Section 515.10.
Those members which resist seismic forces totally or
partially by shear or flexure shall be designed in accordance
with Section 516.5.
516.6.2 Bracing members
516.6.2.1 Stress rednction. The allowable stress, Fa., for
bracing members resisting seismic forces in compression
shall be determined from the following formula: .
Fas /3Fa (516-1)
where:
P = the stress-reduction factor determined from the
following formula:
B = ll{l + [(K/ir)/2CcIJ > 0.8
Fa= the allowable axial compressive stress allowed in
DivisionID.
 SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDING IN SEISMIC ZONE 4
5-71

EXCEPTION: supporting all tributary gravity loads presuming the bracing

Bracing members carrying gravity loads may be designed
using the column strength requirement and the load
combination of Sectio11515.5.1, Item 1.
516.6.2.2 Built-up members. The llr of individual parts of
built-up bracing members between stitches, when computed
about a line perpendicular to the axis through the parts, shall
not be greater than 75 percent of the Ilr of the member as a
whole.
516.6.2.3 Compression elements in brates. The width-to
thickness ratio of stiffened and unstiffened compression
elements used in braces shall be shown this Chapter.
516.6.3 Bracing connections
516.6.3.1 Forces. Bracing connections shall be designed the
lesser of the following:
1. The tensile strength of the bracing.
2. no time the force in the brace due to design seismic
forces.
3. The maximum force that can be transferred to the
brace by the system
not to exist.
EXCEPTION:
These limitations need not apply to penthouses, one-story
blli/dings or the top story if buildings.
516.6.5 One- and two-story buildings. Braced frames not
meeting the requirements of Section 516.6.2 and 516.6.4
may not be used in buildings not over two stories in height
and in roof structures as defined in Chapter 15 if the braces
have the strength to resist no times the design seismic
forces.
516.6.6 Nonbuilding structures. Nonbuilding structures
with R values defined by Table 208-13, need comply only
with the provisions of Section 516.6.3.
516.7 Special Concentrically Braced Frames. Special
concentrically braced frames shall comply with the
requirements of Section 515.9,
516.8 Eccentrically Braced Frames. Eccentrically braced
frames shaH comply with the requirements of
Section 515.1 O.

Beam-to-column connections for beams that are part of the 516.9 Nondestructive Testing. Nondestructive testing shall
bracing system shall have the capacity to transfer the force comply with the provisions of Section 1703 of 1997
determined above. Uniform Building Code.

516.6.3.2 Net Area. 1n bolted connections, the ratio of 516.10 Special Truss Moment Frames. Special truss
effective net section area to gross section area shall satisfy moment frames shall comply with the requirements of
the formula: Section 51 5.11.
Ae 1.2aF*
::::--- (516-3)
Ag Fu

effective net area as defined in Division III.

= gross area of member.
minimum tensile strength.
= stress in the brace due to forces determined in
Section 515.8.3.1.
a. = fraction of the member force from Section 515.8.3.1
that is transferred across a particular net section.

516.6.4 Bracing conftguration for chevron and K

bracing. Bracing members shall be designed for 1.5 times
the otherwise prescribed forces.

The beam intersected by chevron braces shall be continuous

between columns.

Where chevron braces intersect a beam from below,

i.e., inverted V brace, the beam shall be capable of

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

5-72 STRUCTURAL STEEL

SECTION 517 - LIGHT FRAMED SEC.518 - INSPECTION

WALL SYSTEMS
Tension groove welded connections between primary
517.1 General. A steel stud wall system consists of vertical members of the frames which are part of the lateral load
steel studs with stee~ structural wood or gypsum shear resisting system shall be tested by non-destructive methods
panels, used to resist horizontal wind or earthquake. for compliance with AWSD 1.1-90 and job specifications. A
program for this testing shall be established by the engineer.
In Seismic Zone 4, steel stud wall systems may be used to
resist the specified seismic forces in buildings not over five
stories high. Such systems shall comply with the following:

1. The IIr ofthe brace may exceed 200 and is unlimited.

2. All boundary members, chords, and collectors, shall
be designed and detailed to transmit the induced axial
forces.
3. Connection of the diagonal bracing member, top
chord splices, boundary members and collectors shall
be designed to develop the full tensile strength of the
member or flo times the otherwise prescribed seismic
forces.
4. Vertical and diagonal members of the braced bay
shall be anchored so the bottom track is not required
to resist uplift forces by bending ofthe track web.
5. ' Both flanges of studs in a bracing panel shall be
braced to prevent lateral torsional buckling. Wire tied
bridging shall not be considered to provide such
restraint.
6. Screws shall not be used to resist lateral forces by
pullout resistance.
7. Provision shall be made for pretensioning or other
methods of installation of tension only bracing to
guard against loose diagonal straps.

517.2 Boundary members and ancborage. Boundary

members and the uplift anchorage thereto shall have the
strength to resist the forces determined by the load
combinations in Section 515.5.1.

517.3 Wood structural panel sbeatbing. \\'here wood

structural panels provide lateral resistance, the design and
construction of such walls shall be in accordance with the
additional requirements of this .section. Perimeter members
at openings shall be provided and shall be detailed to
distribute the shearing stresses. Wood sheathing shall not be
used to splice these members.

Wood structural panels shall be manufactured using exterior

glue.

Wall studs and track shall have a minimum

uncoated base metal thickness of not less than 0.8mm and
shall not have an uncoated base metal thickness greater
l.lOmm.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 5-73

NUMERICAL VALUES

TABLE 1

Allowable Stress (MPa)

F~, (MPa)
0.40Fy b,. 0.75F/
91.0 170.9
96.5 181.3 217.1
100.0 186.1 223.3

276 110.3 ]24.1 165.4 182.0 206.8 248.2

290 115.8 l30.3 173.7 190.9 217.1 260.6
310 124.1 139.9 186.1 204.7 233.0 279.2

317 126.8 142.7 190.2 209.6 237.8 285.4

345 137.8 155.1 206.8 227.5 258.5 310.2
379 151.6 170.9 227.5 250.2 284.7 341.2

414 165.4 186.1 248.2 273.0 310.2 372.3

448 179.2 202.0 268.8 295.7 336.4 403.3
483 193.0 217.1 289.5 434.3

620 248.2 279.2 372.3 558.4

689 275.7 310.2 413.6 620,5
a See Article 504.1, 504.3 Tension
b See Article 504.3, 506.4, 51Ll Shear
C See Article 506, I, 506.2 Bending
d See Article 510,8 Bearing
C See Article 507.3 Shear in Plate Girders

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

6-74 STRUCTURAL STEEL

NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 2

ASTM Connected Part ofDesignated

5 Desig
Fy FI< Bolt or Threaded Part of Designated Steel
Steel
.::: nation
(MPa) (MFa)
Tension Bearing Tension Shear
0.5Fa 1.2Fb 0.33F c 0.22Ft
131.6

A242 345 483 241.3 579.1 159.2

A441 317 462 230.9 554.3 152.3
A588 290 434 217.1 521.2 143.4
276f 414 206.8 496.4 136.5
rIO A500
~ 310 155.1 372.3
p.., 227/269g
1$ 290/317g 400 199.9 479.8
1
1:
317/345 g
f-o!
....
0" I

.] I 276 189.6 455.0

~I 290 199.9 479.8
'"0
!li i A572 290 206.8 496.4 136.5 70.3 91.0
Q)I 345 224.0 537.7 148.2 76.5 98.5
.,gl 414 258.5 620.5 170.9 88.2 113.7
(/)

~" 448 275.7 661.8 182.0 93.7 ]21.3

~ A514 689 379.2 910.1 250.2 128.9 166.8
ui'
Q,)
620 344.7 827.3 227.5 117.2 151.6
1i A606 310 224.0 537.7
s::
","
345 241.3 579.1
Q,)
c.. A607 310 414 206.8 496.4
.!
(/)
345 448 224.0 537.7
379 483 241.3 579.1
414 517 258.5 620.5
448 552 275.7 661.8
483 586 293.0 703.2
345 483 241.3 579.1
345 448 224.0 537.7
483 621-758 310.2 744.6
634 827 273.0 140.6 182.0
~""
0 558 724 239.2 123.4 159.2
!Xl 400 621 204.7 105.4 ]36.5
On effective net area, see Articles 504.1, 510.4.
b Produced by fastener in shear, see Article 510.3.7. Note that smaller maximum design bearing stresses, as a function of hole spacing, may
be required by Articles 510.3.& and 510.3.9.
C On nominal body area, see Table 510-7.

d Threads not excluded from shear plane, see Table 510-7.

e Threads excluded from shear plane, see Table 510-7.
f For A441 material only.
g Smaller value for circular shapes, larger value for square or rectangular shapes.
Note: For dimensional and size limitations, see the appropriate ASTM Specification.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

L_~_~~~~" __ ,~

5-75

NUMERICAL VALUES

TABLE 3
VALUESofC.
For Determining Allowable Stress When KlI,. :s Cc for Steel of Any Yield Stress

Kill' Kill' KIll'

Co Cc Co Cc Co Cc Co
0.01 0.599 . 0.26 0.548 0.51 0.47:2 0.76 0.375
0.02 0.597 0.27 0.546 0.52 0.469 0.77 0.371
0.03 0.596 0.28 0.543 0.53 0.465 0.78 0.366
0.04 0.594 0.29 0.540 0.54 0.462 0.79 0.362
0.05 0.593 0.30 0.538 0.55 0.458 0.80 0.357

0.06 0.591 0.31 0.535 0.56 0.455 0.81 0.353

0.07 0.589 0.32 0.532 0.57 0.451 0.82 0.348
0.08 0.588 0.33 0.529 0.58 0.447 0.83 0.344
0.09
0.10

0.11
0.586
0.584

0.582
0.34
0.35

0.36
0.527
0.524

0.521
0.59
0.60

0.61
0.444
0.440

0.436
0.84
0.85

0.86
0.339
0.335

0.330
-
1~

'\;
fj
0.12 0.580 0.37 0.518 0.62 0.432 0.87 0.325 "t:I
0.13 0.578 0.38 0.515 0.63 0.428 0.88 0.321 ...
=
0.14
0.15
0.576
0.574
0.39
0.40
0.512
0.509
0.64
0.65
0.424
0.420
0.89
0.90
0.316
0.311 --
~
f:)f)

0.16 0.572 0.41 0.506 0.66 0.416 0.91 0.306

0.17 0.570 0.42 0.502 0.67 0.412 0.92 0.301
0.18 0.568 0.43 0.499 0.68 0.408 0.93 0.296
0.19 0.565 0.44 0.496 0.69 0.404 0.94 0.291
0.20 0.563 0.45 0.493 0.70 0.400 0.95 0.286

0.21 0.561 0.46 0.489 0.71 0.396 0.96 0.281

0.22 0.558 0.47 0.486 0.72 0.392 0.97 0.276
0.23 0.556 0.48 0.483 0.73 0.388 0.98 0.271
0.24 0.553 0.49 0.479 0.74 0.384 0.99 0.266
0.25 0.551 0.50 0.476 0.75 0.379 1.00 0.261
Kit r Kllr
When ratios exceed the noncompact section limits of Article 502.5.1, use C' in lieU{9f values and equation
c
Fa = CaQaQsF;. (Appendix Article 502.5).

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

5-76 STRUCTURAL STEEL

NUMERICAL VALUES

F ,(MPa)
___L _____ ,L-
227
241 107.0
248 102.0
269 97.7
1-----------4----------+---------~~----
93.8
79.8 - .. ---~

75.7

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 5-77

TABLE 5

Specification Section
and Ratios 248 414 448

1701j"F; 10.8 10.0 9.6 9.2 8.4 8.1

5001 jF; 31.7 29.3 28.0 26.9 24.5 23.6

16801 j"F; 106.7 98.7 94.4 90.5 82.6 79.4

675/ 42.8 39.6 37.9 33.2 31.9

53.,JC; 49.,JC; 47..jC; 45..jC; 41..jC; 40..jC;

119'[c; 110'[c; 1OS..jC; 101'[c; 92..jC; 89..jC;

12.7 11. 7 11.2 10.7 9.8 9.4

250/ .JF; 15.8 14.7 14.0 13.4 12.3 11.8

3331 jF; 19.6 18.7 18.0 16.4 15.8

502-1
6251j"F; 36.7 35.1 33.7 30.7 29.5

8321j"F; 48.9 46.7 44.8 40.9 39.3

6341 j"F; 39.0 37.3 31.4

91.7 78.6 71.7 66.0 55.0 50.8

310 283 260 217 200

322 282 261 243 207 192

52501 jF; 333 309 295 283 258 248

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

r ~-~.~,---------' ~-,-

578 STRUCTURAL STEEL

TABLE 6
VALUES of
Ml Ml !!1~
M2 Cb M2 Cb Cb ! M2 Cb
_, _ _ .~ ._i .. -----~--,--.-~,----.-

i
-1.00 l.000 1,228 L552 0.20 1.972
-0.99 1.005 -0.59 1.235 -0.19 1.56J 0.21 1,984
-0.98 1.009 -0.58 l.242 -0.18 1.571 0,22 1.996
-0.97 l.014 -0.57 1.249 -0.17 J .580 0.23 2,007
-0.96 1.018 -0.56 1.256 -0.16 1.590 0,24 2,019

0.95 l.023 -0.55 1.263 -0.15 1.599 0.25 2.031

-0.94 l.028 -0.54 J,270 -0.14 1.609 0.26 2.043
-0.93 1.033 -0.53 1.278 -0.13 1.619 0.27 2.055
-0.92 1.038 -0.52 1.285 -0.12 1.628 0.28 2.068
-0.91 1.043 -0.51 1.293 -0.11 1.638 0.29 2.080

-0.90 1.048 -0.50 1.300 -0.10 1.648 0.30 2.092

-0.89 1.053 -0.49 1.308 -0.09 l.658 0.31 2.104
-0.88 l.058 -0.48 1.315 -0.08 1.668 0.32 2.117
-0.87 1.064 -0.47 1.323 -0.07 1.678 0.33 2.129
-0.86 l.069 -0.46 1.330 -0.06 1.688 0.34 2.142

-0.85 l.074 -0.45 1.338 -0.05 1.698 0.35 2.154

-0.84 1.080 -0.44 1.346 -0.04 1.708 0.36 2.167
-0.83 1.085 -OA3 1.354 -0.03 1.719 0.37 2.180
-0.82 1.091 -OA2 1.362 -0.02 1.729 0.38 2.192
-0.81 1.096 -0.41 1.370 -0.01 1.740 0.39 2.205

-0.80 1.102 -0.40 1.378 0.00 1.750 OAO 2.218

-0.79 LI08 -0.39 1.386 0.01 1.761 0.41 2.231
-0.78 1.114 -0.38 1.394 0.02 1.771 0.42 2.244
-0.77 1.119 -0.37 1.403 0.03 1.782 0.43 2.257
-0.76 LI25 -0.36 1.411 0.04 1.792 0.44 2.270

-0.75 1.131 -0.35 l.419 0.05 1.803 0.45 2.283

-0.74 1.137 -0.34 1.428 0.06 1.814 0.46 2.296
-0.73 1.143 -0.33 1.436 0.07 1.825 ' :2: 0.47 2.300
-0.72 1.150 -0.32 1.445 0.08 1.836
-0.71 1.156 -0.31 1.453 0.09 1.847

-0.70 1.162 -0.30 1.462 0.10 1.858

-0.69 1.168 -0.29 1.471 0.11 1.869
-0.68 1.175 -0.28 1.480 0.12 1.880
-0.67 1.181 -0.27 1.488 0.13 1.892
-0.66 1.188 -0.26 1.497 0.14 1.903

-0.65 1.194 -0.25 1.506 0.15 1.914

-0.64 1.201 -0.24 1.515 0.16 1.926
-0.63 1.208 -0.23 1.524 0.17 1.937
-0.62 1.214 -0.22 1.534 0.18 1.949
-0.61 1.221 -0.21 1.543 0.19 1.960
Note 1: C b ::: 1.75+ l.05(M1/M2 ) + 0.3(M1/M2 )2 :s; 2.3
Note 2: MI/M2 positive for reverse curvature and negative for single curvature.

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 7

MI MI MI Ml.
Cm M2 Cm M2 Cm M2 Cm M2 Cm
-1.00 1.000 -0.60 0.840 -0.20 0.680 0.21 0.516 0.61 0.356
.;.0.99 0.996 -0.59 0.836 -0.19 0.676 0.22 '0.512 0.62 0.352
-0.98 0.992 -0.58 0.832 -0.18 0.672 0.23 0.508 0.63 0.348
-0.97 0.988 -0.57 0.828 -0.17 0.668 0.24 0.504 0.64 0.344
~0.96 0.984 -0.56 0.824 -0.16 0.664 0.25 0.500 0.65 0.340
-0.95 0.980 -0.55 0.820 -0.15 0.660 0.26 0.496 0.66 0.336'
:'0.94 0.976 -0.54 0.816 0.14 0.656 0.27 0.492 0.67 0.332
-0.93 0.972 -0.53 0.812 -0.13 0.652 0.28 0.488 0.68 0.328
-0.92 0.968 -0.52 0.808 -0.12 0.648 0.29 0.484 0.69 0.324
-0.91 0.964 -0.51 0.804 -0.11 0.644 0.30 0.480 0.70 0.320

-0.90 0.960 -0.50 0.800 -0.10 0.640 0.31 0.476 0.71 0.316
-0.89 0.956 -0.49 0.796 -0.09 0.636 0.32 0.472 0.72 0.312
-0.88 0.952 -0.48 0.792 -0.08 0.632 0.33 0.468 0.73 0.308
-0.87 0.948 -0.47 0.788 -0.07 0.628 0.34 0.464 0.74 0.304
-0.86 0.944 -0.46 0.784 -0.06 0.624 0.35 0.460 0.75 0.300
:.0.85 0.940 -0.45 0.780 -0.05 0.620 0.36 0.456 0.76 0.296
-0.84 0.936 -0.44 0.776 -0.04 0.616 0.37 0.452 0.77 0.292
-0.83 0.932 -0.43 0.772 -0.03 0.612 0.38 0.448 0.78 0.288
-0.82 0.928 -0.42 0.768 -0.02 0.608 0.39 0.444 0.79 0.284
-0.81 0.924 -0.41 0.764 -0.01 0.604 0.40 0.440 0.80 0.280
0.00 0.600

-0.80 0.920
-0.40 0.760 0.01 0.596 0.41 0.436 0.81 0.276
-0.79 0.916 -0.39 0.756 0.02 0.592 0.42 0.432 0.82 0.272
-0.78 0.912 -0.38 0.752 0.03 0.588 0.43 0.428 0.83 0.268
-0.77 0.908 -0.37 0.748 0.04 0.584 0.44 0.424 0.84 0.264
-0.76 0.904 -0.36 0.744 0.05 0.580 0.45 0.420 0.85 0.26~
-0.75 0.900 -0.35 0.740 0.06 0.576 0.46 0.416 0.86 0.256
-0.74 0.896 -0.34 0.736 0.07 0.572 0.47 0.412 0.87 0.252
-0.73 0.892 -0.33 0.732 0.08 0.568 0.48 0.408 0.88 0.248
-0.72 0.888 -0.32 0.728 0.09 0.564 0.49 OA04 0.89 0.244
-0.71 0.884 -0.31 0.724 0.10 0.560 0.50 0.400 0.90 0.240

-0.70 0.880 -0.30 0.720 0.11 0.556 0.51 0.396 0.91 0.236
-0.69 0.876 -0.29 0.716 0.12 0.552 0.52 0.392 0.92 0.232
-0.68 0.872 -0.28 0.712 0.13 0.548 0.53 0.388 0.93 0.228
-0.67 0.868 -0.27 0.708 0.14 0.544 0.54 0.384 0.94 0.224
-0.66 0.864 -0.26 0.704 0.15 0.540 0.55 0.380 0.95 0.220
-0.65 0.860 -0.25 0.700 0.16 0.536 0.56 0.376 0.96 0.216
-0.64 0.856 -0.24 0.696 0.17 0.532 0.57 0.372 0.97 0.212
-0.63 0.852 -0.23 0.692 0.18 0.528 0.58 0.368 0.98 0.208
-0.62 0.848 -0.22 0.688 0.19 0.524 0.59 0.364 0.99 0.204
-0.61 0.844 -0.21 0.684 0.20 0.520 0.60 0.360 1.00 0.200
Note 1: C =0.60-0.40(M 1 IM 2 )

Note 2: M'JM2 positive for reverse curvature and negative for single curvature.

. National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

5.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL

NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 8
VALUES of F'e For Use in Equation 508-1), for Steel of Any Yield Stress
K1b
- F'e K1b F'e K1b F'e K1b F'e I -K1b F'e K1b
- F'e
'b
(MPa) 'b (MPa) rb (MPa) rb (MPa) rh (MPa) rb (MPa)
21 2334.70 51 395.85 81 156.93 III 83.56 141 51.79 171 35.21
22 2127.28 52 380.77 82 153.12 112 82.08 142 51.06 172 34.80
23 1946.32 53 366.54 83 149.46 113 80.63 143 50.35 173 34.40
24 1787.51 54 353.09 84 145.92 114 79.22 144 49.65 174 34.01
25 1647.37 55 340.36 85 142.51 115 77.85 145 48.97 175 33.62

26 1523.08 56 328.32 86 13921 116 76.52 146 48.30 176 33.24

27 1412.35 57 316.90 87 IJ6.03 117 75.21 147 47.65 177 32.86
28 1313.27 58 306.07 88 132.96 118 73.94 148 47.01 178 32.50
29 1224.26 59 295.78 89 129.98 119 72.71 149 46.38 179 32.13
30 1144.00 60 286.00 90 127.11 ]20 71.50 150 45.76 180 31.78

31 1071.39 61 276.70 91 124.33 121 70.32 151 45.16 181 31.43

32 1005.47 62 267.85 92 121.65 122 69.18 152 44.56 182 31.08
33 945.46 63 259.41 93 119.04 123 68.05 153 43.98 183 30.74
34 890.66 64 251.37 94 116.52 124 66.96 154 43.41 184 30.41
35 840.49 65 243.69 95 114.08 125 65.89 155 42.86 185 30.08

36 794.45 66 236.36 96 111.72 126 64.85 156 42.31 186 29.76

-
<
37
38
39
752.08
713.02
676.93
67
68
69
2Z9.36
222.67
21626
97
98
99
109.43
107.21
105.05
127
128
129
63.84
62.84
61.87
157
158
159
41.77
41.24
40.73
187
188
189
29.44
29.13
28.82
40 643.50 70 210.12 100 102.96 130 60.92 160 40.22 190 28.52

41 612.49 71 204.25 101 100.93 131 60.00 161 39.72 191 28.22
42 583.68 72 198.61 102 98.96 132 59.09 162 39.23 192 27.93
43 556.84 73 193.21 103 97.05 133 58.21 163 38.75 193 27.64
44 531.82 74 188.02 104 95.19 134 57.34 164 38.28 194 27.36
45 508.45' 75 183.04 105 93.39 135 56.49 165 37.82 195 27.08

46 486.58 76 178.26 106 91.63 136 55.67 166 37.36 196 26.80
47 466.09 77 173.66 107 89.93 137 54.86 167 36.92 197 26.53
48 446.88 78 169.23 108 88.27 138 54.06 168 36.48 198 26.26
49 428.82 79 164.97 109 86.66 139 53.29 169 36.05 199 26.00
50 411.84 80 160.88 110 85.09 140 52.53 170 35.63 200 25.74
2
Note:
F' = 12.1t E
e 23(K1 b Ir/)2

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CHAPTER 6

WOOD

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 601 - GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 6-1

601. 1 Scope............. ................................... ..... 6-1 601.2 Design Method ......................... ~.. . . . ... 6-1

SECTION 602 - DEFINITION ...............................................-.................................................. 6-1

602.1 Definitions ..... ..... .................... ... ........... 6-1

SECTION 603 - MIN"IM'UM QUALITY ................................................................................. 6-2

603.1 Quality and Identification ...................... 6-2 603.5 Dried Fire-retardant-treated Wood... , ..... 6-3

603.2 Minimum Capacity or Grade ................. 6-2 603.6 Size of Structural Members.. ............. 6-3

603.3 Timber Connectors and Fasteners .......... 6-2 603.7 Shrinkage.................................. ,. 6-3

603.4 Fabrication, Installation and Manufacture. 6-3 603.8 Rejection. .. , ................... ' ........ ,., .. , 6-3

SECTION 604 - DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ............................ 6-4

604.1 General .................................... ,............ 6-4

SECTION 605 - DECAY AND TERMITE PROTECTION .................................................. 6-4

6OS.1 Preparation ofBuilding Site .................. 6-4 60S.7 Under-floorVentilation.. ,.......... , .. , ...... 6-S

6OS.2 Wood Support Embedded in Ground ..... 6-4 60S.8 Wood and Earth Separation ........ ,..... 6-S

60S.3 Under-floor Clearance ......................... , 6-4 60S.9 Wood Supporting Roofs and Floors......... 6-S

6OS.4 Plates, Sills and Sleepers .............. ......... 6-S 60S.10 Moisture Content of Treated Wood., .. " ... 6-5

6OS.S Columns and Posts .................................. 6-S 60S.11 Retaining Walls................................ 6-5

60S.6 Girders Entering Masonry or Concrete 60S.12 Weather Exposure ............................. 6-S

Walls....................................................... 6-S 60S.13 Water Splash ................................... 6-6

SECTION 606 - WOOD SUPPORTING MASONRY OR CONCRETE ............................. 6-6

606.1 Dead Load ............ ,............................... , 6-6 606.2 Horizontal Force .................................... 6-6

SECTION 607 - WALLFRAMING ....................................................................................... 6-7

607.1 Wall Framing .. ,..................... ,.... ,.......... 6-7

SECTION 608 - FLOOR FRAMING ..................................................................................... 6-8

60S. 1 Floor Frarnings .................................. ,... 6-S

National Structural Co1:le of the Phllipplhes, Volume 1

 6-ii WOOD

SECTION 609 - EXTERIOR WALL CO'VERIN"GS ............................................................. 6-9

609.1 General ........ ... ........ .... ......... ...... .. ..... ..... 6-9 609.5 Particleboard ......... .. ...... ... ....... ........... 6-10

609.2 Siding .................................................. 6-9 609.6 Hardboard ........................................... 6-10

609.3 Plywood ................................................ 6-9 609.7 Nailing ................................................. 6-10

609.4 Shingles or Shakes ........................... 6-10

SECTION 610 - INTERIOR PANELING ............................................................................. 6-11

610.1 Interior Paneling ..... ......... ............. ......... 6-11

SECTION 611 - SHEATIDNG .................................................................................................6-11

611. 1 Structural Floor Sheathing ............ ......... 6-11 611.2 Structural Roof Sheathing ..... ...... ...... 6-II

SECTION 612 - MECHANICALLY LAMINATED FLOORS AND DECKS ................. 6-12

612.1 Mechanically Laminated Floors

and Decks ... ... ... ......... ... ... ... ... ... .... 6-12

SECTION 613 - POST-BEAM CONN'ECTION .................................................................. 6-12

613.1 Post-Beam Connection .......................... 6-12

SECTION 614 - WOOD SHEAR WALLS AND DIAPHRAGMS .................................... 6-12

614.1 General .................................................. 6-12 614.4 Particleboard Diaphragms .................... 6-14

614.2 Wood Members Resisting Horizontal 614.5 Wood Shear Walls and Diaphragms

Forces Contributed by Masonry in Seismic Zone 4 ............................. 6-14

and Concrete ... ......... ... ................ ........ 6-13 614.6 Fiberboard Sheathing Diaphragms ....... 6-15

614.3 Diagonally Sheathed Diaphragms 6-13

SECTION 615 - STRESSES .................................................................................................. 6-15

615.1 General.................................................. 6-15 615.3 Adjustment of Stresses ........................ 6-15

615.2 Stresses in Piles Used

as Structural Members ......................... 6-15

SECTION 616 - HORIZONTAL MEMBER DESIGN ....................................................... 6-18

616.1 Beam Span ........................................ c... 6-18 616.6 Compression Perpendicular to Grain ... 6-19

616.2 Flexure ..... ................. ................ .... ........ 6-18 616.7 Lateral Support .................................... 6-20

616.3 Horizontal Shear ....................... ............ 6-18 616.8 Lateral Support of Arches,

616.4 Horizontal Shear in Notched Beams ...... 6-19 Compression Chords of Trusses
616.5 Design ofJoints in Shear ............ ............ 6-19 and Studs ......... .... ............. ................ 6-20

SECTION 617 - COLlJMN DESIGN .................................................................................... 6-21

617.1 Column Classifications ....................... 6-21 617.3 Simple Solid-column Design............. 6-21

617.2 Limitation on I d Ratio................. 6-21 617.4 Tapered Column........................... 6-22

I Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 Table of Contents 6iii

SECTION 618 - FLEXURAL AND AXIAL LOADING COMBINED .............................. 6-23

618.1 Flexure and Axial Tension ................... 6-23 618.4 Truss Compression Chords ................... 6-23

618.2 Flexure and Axial Compression .... ........ 6-23 618.5 Compression at Angle to Grain ............ 6-24

618.3 Spaced Columns .. ...... ....... ..... ........ ...... 6-23

SECTION 619 - TIMBER CONNECTORS AND FASTENERS ....................................... 6-24

619.1 General ................................................ 6-24 619.4 Joist Hangers and Framing Anchors ..... 6-25

619.2 Bolts .................................................... 6-24 619.5 Miscellaneous Fasteners .. ...... ..... ......... 6-25

619.3 Nails and Spikes ..... ..... ... .......... ........ ... 6-24

SECTION 620 - CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION

DESIGN PROVISIONS ............ _................................................................ 6-25

620.1 General.... ....... ........ ..... ............ ............ 6-25 620.5 Additional Requirements

620.2 Design ofPortions ... .............................. 6-25 for Conventional Construction

620.3 Additional Requirements in Seismic Zone 4 ............................. . 6-26

for Conventional Construction 620.6 Girders ................................................ . 6-27

in High-wind Areas ............................ 6-25 620.7 Floor Joists ........................................... . 6-27

620.4 Additional Requirements 620.8 Subflooring .......................................... . 6-28

for Conventional Construction 620.9 Particleboard Underlayment ................ . 6-28

in Seismic Zone 2 ........................ ...... 6-26 620.10 Wall Framing ...................................... . 6-28

SECTION 621 - METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSS DESIGN ................... 6-31

621.1 Design and Fabrication ........................ 6-31 621.3 In-plant Inspection ............................... 6-31

621.2 Performance ......................................... 6-31 621.4 Marking ................................................ 6-31

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 GENERAL & DEFINITION

SECTION 601 - GENERAL SECTION 602 - DEFINITION

601.1 Scope. 602.1 Definitions.
The quality and design of wood members and their The following terms used in this chapter snall have the
fastenings shall conform to the provisions ofthis chapter. meanings indicated in this section:
601.2 Design Method.
BLOCKED DIAPHRAGM is a diaphragm in which all
sheathing edges not occurring on framing members are
Design shall be based on one of the following methods.
supported on and connected to blocking.

601.2.1 Allowable stress design. Design using allowable CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME

stress design methods shall. resist the different load CONSTRUCTION is a type of construction whose
combinations in accordance< with the applicable primary structural elements are formed by a system of
requirements of Section 604. repetitive wood-framing members.

601.2.2 Conventional light-frame construction. The DIAPHRAGM is a horizontal or nearly horizontal system
design and construction of conventional light-frame wood acting to transmit lateral forces to the vertical resisting
structures shall be in accordance with the applicable elements. When the term "diaphragm is used, it includes
requirements of Section 604. horizontal bracing systems.

FIBERBOARD is a fibrous-felted, homogeneous panel

made from lignocellulosic fibers (usually wood or crane)
having a density of less than 497 kg/m3 but more than 160
kglm3 .

GLUED BUILT-UP MEMBERS are structural elements,

the sections of which are composed of built-up lumber,
wood structural panels or wood structural panels in
combination with lumber, all parts bonded together with
adhesive.

GRADE (Lumber), the classification of lumber in regard

to strength and utility in accordance with the grading rules
of an approved lumber grading agency.

HARDBOARD is a fibrous-felted, homogeneous panel

made from lignocellulosic fibers consolidated under heat
and pressure in a hot press to a density not less than 497
kglm3 .

NOMINAL SIZE (Lumber), the commercial size

designation of width and depth, in standard sawn lumber
grades; somewhat larger than the standard net '3ize of
dressed lumber, in accordance with UBC Standard 23-1,
"Classification, Definition and Methods of Grading for All
Species ofLumber"', for sawn lumber.

NORMAL LOADING, a design load that stressed a

member or fastening to the full allowable stress tabulated in
this chapter. This loading may be applied for approximately
I 0 years, either continuously or cumu1atively, and 90
percent ofthis load may be applied for the remainder ofthe
life ofthe member or fastening.

National Structural Code of tile Phifippines, Volume 1

 62
PARTICLEBOARD is a manufactured panel product
consisting of particles of wood or combinations of wood
particles and wood fibers bonded together with synthetic
resins or other suitable bonding system by as bonding
pr'ocess, in accordance with approved nationally recognized
standard.
PLYWOOD is a panel oflaminated veneers conforming to
UBC Standard 23-2, "Construction and Industrial Plywood"
and UBC Standard 23-3, "Performance Standard for Wood
based Structural-Use Panels".
ROTATION is the torsional movement of a diaphragm
about a vertical axis.
SUBDIAPHRAGM is a portion of a larger wood
diaphragm designed to anchor and transfer local forces to
primary diaphragm struts and the main diaphragm.
TREATED WOOD, is wood treated with an approved
preservative under treating and quality control procedures.
WOOD OF NATURAL RESISTANCE TO DECAY OR
TI.:RMITES is the heartwood of the species set forth
below. Corner sapwood is permitted on 5 percent of the
pieces provided 90 percent or more of the width of each
side on which it occurs is heartwood. Recognized species
are:
Decay resistant: Narra, Kamagong, Dao, Tangile.
Termite resistant: Narra, Kamagong.
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL is a structural panel
product composed primarily of wood and meeting the
requirement of UBC Standard 23-2 or 23~3. Wood
structural panels include all-veneer plywood, composite
panels containing a combination of veneer and wood-based
material, and mat-formed panel such as oriented stranded
board and waferboard.
I Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
WOOD
SECTION 603 - MINIMUM QUALITY
603.1 Quality and Identification.
All lumber, wood structural panels, particleboard, timber,
end-jointed lumber, fiberboard sheathing (when used
structurally), hardboard siding (when used structurally),
piles and poles regulated by this chapter shall conform to
the applicable standards or grading rules specified in this
code and shall be so identified by the grade mark or a
certificate ofinspection issued by an approved agency.
All preservatively treated wood required to be treated shall
be identified by the quality mark of an approved inspection
agency.
603.2 Minimum Capacity or Grade.
Minimum capacity of structural framing members may be
established by performance tests. When the tests are not
made, capacity shall be based on allowable stresses and
design criteria specified in this code.
Studs, joists, rafters, foundation plates or sills, planking 50
mm or more in depth, beams, stringers, posts, structural
sheathing and similar load-bearing members shall be of at
least the minimum grades set forth in Table Nos. 61 or
Table 6.2
Approved end-jointed lumber may be used interchangeably
with solid-sawn members of the same species and grade.
Such use shall include, but not be limited to, light-framing
joists, planks and decking.
Wood structural panel shall be of grades specified in UBC
Standard 23-2 and UBC Standard 23-3.
603.3 Timber Connectors and Fasteners.
Safe loads and design practices for types of connectors and
fasteners not mentioned or fully covered in Section 619,
may be determined in a manner approved by the building
officiaL
The number and size of nails connecting wood members
shall not be less than that set forth in Tables 6.3 and 6.4.
Other connections shall be fastened to provide equivalent
strength. End and edge distances and nail penetrations shall
be in accordance with the applicable provisions of Section
619.
Fasteners for pressure-preservative treated and fire
retardant treated wood shall be of hot-dipped zinc coated
 MINIMUM QUALITY 6-3

galvanized, stainless steel, silicon bronze or copper. 603.7 Shrinkage.

Fasteners required to be corrosion resistant shall be either
zinc-coated fasteners, aluminum alloy wire fasteners or Consideration shall be given in the design to the possible
stainless steel fasteners effect of cross-grain dimensional changes considered
vertically which may occur in lumber fabricated in a given
Connections depending on joist hangers or framing anchors, condition.
ties, and other mechanical fastenings not otherwise covered
may be used where approved.
603.8 Rejection.
603.4 Fabrication, Installation and Manufacture. The building official may deny permission for the use of a
wood member where permissible grade characteristics or
603.4.1 General. Preparation, fabrication and installation of defects are present in such a combination that they affect
wood members and their fastenings shall conform to the serviceability of the member.
accepted engineering practices and to the requirements of
this code. All members shall be framed, anchored, tied and
braced to develop the strength and rigidity necessary for the
purposes for which they are used.

603.4.2 Timber connectors and fasteners. The installation

of timber connectors and fasteners shall be in accordance
with the provisions set forth in Section 619.

603.4.3 Metal-plate-connected wood trusses. Metal-plate

connected wood trusses shall conform to the provisions of
Section 618. Each manufacturer of trusses using metal plate
connectors shall retain an approved agency having no
financial interest in the plant being inspected to make
nonscheduled inspections of truss fabrication, delivery, and
operations. The inspection shall cover all phases of truss
operation, including lumber .storage, handling, cutting,
fixtures, presses or rollers, fabrication, bundling and
banding, handling and delivery.

603.5 Dried Fire-retardant-treated Wood.

Approved fire-retardant-treated wood shall be dried,

following treatment, to a maximum moisture content as
foHows: solid-sawn lumber 50 mm in thickness or less to 19
percent, and plywood to 15 percent.

603.6 Size of Structural Members.

Sizes of lumber referred to in this code are nominal sizes.

Computations to determine the required sizes of members
shall be based on the net dimensions (actual size) and not
the nominal sizes. The rough siZe lumber shall not be less
than the nominal size and the reduction in face dimensions
of dressed lumber shall not be more than 6 mm of the
nominal size.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

6-4 WOOD
SECTION 604 - DESIGN AND
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
604.1 General.
The following design requirements apply.
604.1.1 All wood structures shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section
601 up to Section 613.
604.1.2 Wind and earthquake load-resisting systems for all
engineered wood structures shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section
614.
604.1.3 The design and construction of wood structures
using allowable stress design methods shall be in
accordance with Section 615 and Section 618.
604.1.4 The design and construction of conventional light
frame wood structures shall be in accordance with Section
620.
604.1.5 The design and installation of timber connectors
and fasteners shall be in accordance with Section 619.
604.1.6 Metal-plate-connected wood trusses shall conform
to the provisions of Section 621.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
SECTION 605 - DECAY AND
TERMITE PROTECTION
605.1 Preparation of Building Site.
All stumps and roots shall be removed from the soil to a
depth of at least 300 mm below the surface of the ground in
the area to be occupied by the building.
All wood forms which have been used in placing concrete,
if within the ground or between foundation sills and the
ground, shall be removed before a building is occupied or
used for any purpose. Before completion, loose or casual
wood shall be removed from direct contact with the ground
under the building.
605.2 Wood Support Embedded in Ground.
Wood embedded in the ground or in direct contact with the
earth and used for the support of permanent structures shall
be treated wood unless continuously submerged in fresh
water. Round or rectangular posts, poles and sawn timber
columns supporting permanent structures which are
embedded in concrete or masonry in direct contact with the
earth or embedded in concrete or masonry exposed to the
weather shall be treated wood. The wood shall be treated
for ground contact.
605.3 Under-floor Clearance.
When wood joists or the bottom of wood structural floors
without joists are located closer than 450 mm or wood
girders are located closer than 300 mm to exposed ground
in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas located within the
periphery of the building foundation, the floor assembly
including posts, girders, joists and subfloor, shall be
approved wood of natural resistance to decay as listed in
Section 605.4 or treated wood.
When the above under-floor clearances are required, the
under-floor area shall be accessible. Accessible under-floor
areas shall be provided with a minimum 450 mm by 600
mm opening unobstructed by pipes, ducts and similar
construction. All under-floor access opening shall be
effectively screened or covered. Pipes, ducts and other
construction shall not interfere with the accessibility to or
within under-floor areas.

DECAY AND TERMITE PROTECTION
6(l5.4 Plates, Sills and Sleepers.
All foundation plates or sills and sleepers on a concrete or
masonry slab, which is in dire<:;t contact with eerth, and sills
that rest on concrete or masonry foundations, shall be
treated wood, all marked or branded by an approved
agency. Foundation wood marked or branded by an
approved agency may be used for sills in localities subject
to moderate hazard, where termite damage is not frequent
and when specifically approved by the building official. In
localities where hazard of termite is slight, any species of
wood permitted by this chapter may be used for sills when
specifically approved by the building official.
605.5 Columns and Posts.
Columns and posts located on concrete or masonry floors
or decks exposed to the weather or to water splash or in
basements and which support permanent structures shall be
supported by concrete piers or metal pedestals projecting
above floors unless approved wood of natural resistance to
decay or treated wood is used. The pedestal shall project at
least 150 mm above exposed earth and at least 25 mm
above such floors.
Individual concrete or masonry piers shall project at least
200 mm above exposed ground unless the columns or posts
they support are of approved wood of natural resistance to
decay or treated wood is used.
605.6 Girders Entering Masonry or Concrete
Walls.
Ends of wood girder entering masonry or .concrete walls
shall be provided with a 13 mm air space on tops, sides and
ends unless approved wood of natural resistance to decay or
treated wood is used.
605.7 Under-floor Ventilation.
Under-floor areas shall be ventilated by an approved
mechanical means or by openings in exterior foundation
walls. Such openings shall have a net area of not less than
0.067 m2 for each 10 m2 of under-floor area. Openings shall
be located as close to comers as practical and shall provide
cross ventilation. The required area of such openings shall
be approximately equally distributed along the length of at
least two opposite sides. They shall be covered with
corrosion-resistant wire mesh with mesh openings of 6 mm
dimension. Where moisture due to climate and groundwater
conditions is not considered excessive, the building official
may allow operable louvers and may allow the required net
area of vent opening to be reduced to 10 percent of the
National Structural Code of the Philippines. Volame 1
6-5
above, provided the under-floor ground surface area IS
covered with an approved vapor barrier.
605.8 Wood and Earth Separation.
Protection of wood against deterioration as set forth in the
previous sections for specified applications is required. In
addition, wood used in construction of permanent structures
and located nearer than 150 mm to earth shall be treated
wood or wood of natural resistance to decay. Where located
on concrete slabs placed on earth, wood shall be treated
wood or wood of natural resistance top decay. Where not
subject to water splash or to exterior moisture and located
on concrete having a minimum thickness of 75 mm with an
impervious membrane installed between concrete and earth,
the wood may be untreated and of any species.
Where planter boxes are installed adjacent to wood frame
walls a 50 mm air space shall be provided between the
planter and the wall. Flashing shall be installed when the air
space is less than 150 mm in width. Where flashing is used,
provisions shall be made to permit circulation of the air in
the air space. The wood frame shall be provided with an
exterior wall covering conforming to the provisions of
Section 609.
605.9 Wood Supporting Roofs and Floors.
Wood structural members supporting moisture permeable
floors or roofs which are exposed to the weather such as
concrete or masonry slabs shall be approved wood @If
natural resistance to decay or treated wood unless separated
from such floors or roofs by an impervious moisture barrier.
605.10 Moisture Content of Treated Wood.
When wood pressure treated with a water-borne
preservative is used in enclosed locations where drying in
service cannot readily occur, such wood shall be at a
moisture content of 19 percent or less before being covered
with insulation, interior wall finish floor covering or other
material.
605.11 Retaining Walls.
Wood used in retaining or crio walls shall be treated wood.
605.12 Weather Exposure.
All wood structural panels, when designed to be exposed in
outdoor application, shall be of exterior type, except as
provided in Section 605.2 In geographical areas where
experience has demonstrated a specific need, approved
6-6 WOOD

wood of natural resistance to decay or treated wood shall be SECTION 606 - WOOD
used for those portions of wood members which form the
structural support of buildings, balconies, porches, or SUPPORTING MASONRY OR
similar permanent building appurtenances when such CONCRETE
members are exposed to the weather without adequate
protection from a roof, eave, overhang or other covering to
prevent moisture or water accumulation on the surface or at 606.1 Dead Load.
joints between members. Depending on local experience,
such members may include: horizontal members such as Wood members shall not be used to permanently support
girders, joists and decking; or vertical members such as dead load ofany masonry or concrete.
posts, poles and columns; or both horizontal and vertical
members. EXCEPTIONS:

1. Masonry or cOllcrele nOll-sln/clural floor or ro(y

605.13 Water Splash. surfaCing not more than 100 mm thick maybe
supported by wood members.
Where wood-frame walls and partitions are covered on the
2. Any stn/cture may rest upon wood piles constnlcted
interior with plaster, tile or similar materials and are subject
in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 011
to water splash, the framing shall be protected with
"Foundations and Retaining Walls".
approved waterproof paper conforming to Section on
"Weather Protection".
3. Veneer of brick or concrete stone may be supported
by approved treated wood foundations when the
maximum height of veneer does 110t exceed 9000 mm
above the foundations. Such veneer used as all
interior wall finish may also be supported on wood
floors which are designed to support the additional
load, and be designed to limit the deflection and
shrinkage to J.. 600 of the span qf the supporting
members.

4. Glass block masonry having an installed weight qf

97.6 kg.1rl or less. When glass block is supported 011
}I'ood floors, the .floors shall be designed to limit
deflection and shrinkage to 1/600 of the span of the
supporting members alld the allowable stresses for
the framing members shall be reduced in accordance
with Section 615.3.4.

606.2 Horizontal Force.

Wood members shall not be used to resist horizontal forces

contributed by masonry or concrete construction in
buildings over one story in height.

EXCEPTIONS:

I. Wood floor and roof members may be used in

horizontal tntsses and diaphragms to- resist
horizontal forces imposed by wind, earthquake or
earth pre~sure. proVided such forces are not resisted
by rotation ofthe tntss or diaphragm.

2. Vertical wood stntctural panel-sheathed shear walls

may be used to provide resistance to wind or
earthquake forces in two-story buildings ofmasonry

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines


WOOD SUPPORTING MASONRY OR CONCRETE & WALL FRAMING
or concrete construction, provided the following
requirements are met:
Story-to story wall heights shall not exceed 3600
mm.
Horizontal diaphragm shall not be considered to
transmit lateral forces by rotation or cantilever
action.
Deflection of horizontal. and vertical diaphragms
shall not permit per-story deflection of supported
masonry or concrete walls to exceed 0.005 times
each story height.
Wood structural panel sheathing in horizontal
diaphragms shall have all unsupported edges
blocked Wood strUctural panel sheathing for both
stories of vertical diaphragms shall have all
unsupported edges blocked and for the lower walls
have a minimum thickness of 12 mm.
There shall be no out-of-plane horizontal offsets
between the first and second stories of wood
structural panel shear walls.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Vohme 1
6-7
SECTION 607 - WALL FRAMJNG
607.1 wan Framing.
The framing of exterior and interior walls shall be in
accordance with provisions specified in Section 620 unless
a specific design is furnished.
Wood studs walls and bearing partitions shall not support
more than two floors and a roof unless an analysis
satisfactory to the building official shows that shrinkage of
wood framing will not have adverse upon the structure nor
any plumbing, electrical, mechanical systems nor other
equipment installed therein due to the excessive shrinkage
or differential movements caused by shrinkage. The
analysis shall also show that the roof drainage system and
the foregoing systems or equipment will not be adversely
affected or, as an alternate, such systems shall be designed
to accommodate the differential shrinkage or movements.
6-8 WOOD
SECTION 608 - FLOOR FRAMING.
608.1 Floor Framing.
Wood-joisted floors shall be framed and constructed and
anchored to supporting wood stud or masonry walls.
Fire block and draft stops shall be in accordance with the
following provision:
I. In combustible construction, firestopping and
draftstopping shall be installed to cut off all
concealed draft openings (both vertical and
horizontal) and shall form an effective barrier
between floors, between a top story and a roof or
attic space, and shall subdivide attic spaces,
concealed roof spaces and floor-ceiling assemblies.
The integrity of all fire and draft stops shall be
maintained.
2. Firestopping shall be provided in the following
location:
1. I In concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions,
including furred spaces, at the ceiling and floor
levels and at 250 mm intervals along the length of
the wall.
EXCEPTION:
Fire stops may be omitted at floor and ceiling levels when
approved smoke-actllates fire dampers are installed at
these leve/.<;.
2.2 At all interconnections between concealed vertical
and horizontal spaces such as those that occurs at
soffits, drop ceiling and cove ceilings.
2.3 In concealed spaces between stairs stringers at the top
and bottom of the run and between studs along and
in line with the run of stairs if the walls under the
stairs are unfinished
2.4 In openings around vents, pipes, ducts, chimneys,
fireplaces and similar openings which afford a
passage for the fire at ceiling and floor levels, with
noncombustible materials.
....:J. Firestopping shall consist of 50 mm nominal lumber
or one thickness of 18 mm plywood with joints
backed by 18 mm plywood or one thickness of 19
mm Type 2-M particleboard. Fire stops may also be
of gypsum board, cement asbestos board, mineral
fiber, glass fiber or other approved materials securely
fastened in place. Walls having parallel or staggered
studs for sound-transmission control shall have stops
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
of mineral fiber or ~s fiber or other approved non
rigid materials.
4. Draftstopping shall be provided in the locations:
4.1.1 Floor-Ceiling Assemblies.
4.1.2 Single-family dwellings. When there is usable space
above and below the concealed space of a floor
ceiling assembly in a single-family dwelling, draft
stops shall be installed so that the area of the
concealed space does not exceed 93 sq. m.
Draftstopping shall divide the concealed space into
approximately equal areas.
4.1.3 Two or more dwelling units and hotels. Draft stops
shall be installed in floor-ceiling assemblies of
building having more than one dwelling unit and in
hotels. Such draft stops shall be in line with walls
separating tenants from each other and separating
tenants from other areas.
4.1.4 Other uses. Draft stops shall be installed in floor
ceiling assemblies of buildings or portions of
buildings used for other than dwelling or hotel
occupancies so that the area of concealed space does
not exceed 93 sq. m. and so that the horizontal
dimension between stops does not exceed 18.30 m.
EXCEPTION:
Where approved automatic sprinklers are installed within
the concealed space, the area between draft stops may be
278 sq. m. and the horizontal dimension may be 30.50 m.
4.2 Attics.
4.2.1 Single-family dwellings. None required.
4.2.2 Two or more dwelling unit and hotels. Drafts stops
shall be installed in the attics, mansards, overhangs,
false fronts set out from walls and similar concealed
spaces of buildings containing more than one
dwelling unit and hotels. Such drafts stop shall be
above and in line with walls separating tenants from
each other and from other uses.
EXCEPTION:
1. Draft stops may be omitted along one ofthe corridor
walls, prOVided draft stops at tenant separation walls
extend to the remaining corridor draft stop.
2. Where approved sprinklers are installed.
draftstoppillg may be as specified ill the exception
below.
 FLOOR FRAMING & EXTERIOR WALL COVERINGS
4.2.3 Other uses. Draft stops shall be installed in attics,
mansards, over-bangs, false fronts set out from walls
and similar concealed spaces of buildings having
uses other than dwellings or hotels so that the area
between draft stops does not exceed 27S sq. m. and
the greatest horizontal dimension does not exceed
IS.30 m.
EXCEPTION:
Where approved automatic sprinklers are illStalled, the
area between the draft stops may be 836 sq. m. and the
greatest horizontal dimension may he 30.50 m.
Draft stopping materials shall be not less than 12 mm
gypsum board, 9 mm plywood, 9 mm Type 2-M
particleboard or other approved materials adequately
supported. Openings in the partitions shall be
protected by self-closing doors with automatic
latches constructed as required for the partitions.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
6-9
SECTION 609 - EXTERIOR WALL
COVERINGS
609.1 General.
Exterior wood stud walls shall be covered on the outside
with the materials and in the manner specified in this
section or elsewhere in this code. Studs or sheathing shall
be covered on the outside face with a weather-resistive
barrier when required. Exterior wall coverings of the
minimum thickness specified in this section are based upon
a maximum stud spacing of 400 mm unless otherwise
specified.
609.2 Siding.
Solid wood siding shall have an average thickness of 9 mm
unless placed over sheathing permitted by this code.
Siding patterns known as rustic, drop siding or shiplap shall
have an average thickness in place of not less than 15 mm
and shall have a minimum thickness measured not less than
9 mm. Bevel siding shall have a minimum thickness
measured at the butt section of not less than 11 rom and a
tip thickness of not less than 5 mm. Siding of lesser
dimensions may be used, provided such wall covering is
placed over sheathing which conforms to the provisions
specified elsewhere in this code.
All weatherboarding or siding shall be securely nailed to
each stud with not less than one nail, or to solid 25 mm
nominal wood sheathing or 12 mm plywood sheathing or
13 rom particleboard sheathing with not less than one line
of nails spaced not more than 600 rom on center in each
piece of the weatherboarding or siding.
Wood board siding applied horizontally, diagonally or
vertically shall be nailed to studs, nailing strips or blocking
set maximum 600 mm on center. Fasteners shall be nails or
screws with a penetration of not less than 40 mm into studs.
studs and wood sheathing combined, or blocking. Distance
between such fastenings shall not exceed 600 mm for
horizontally or vertically applied sidings and SOO mm for
diagonally applied sidings.
609.3 Plywood.
Where plywood is used for covering the exterior of outside
walls, it shall be of the exterior type not less than 9 mm
thick. Plywood panel siding shall be installed in accordance
with Table 6.5. Unless applied over 25 mm wood sheathing
or 12 mm wood structural panel sheathing or 13 mm
particleboard sheathing joints shaU occur over framing
members and shall be protected with a continuous wood
6-10 WOOD

batten, approved caulking, flashing, vertical or horizontal
shiplaps or joints shall be lapped horizontally or otherwise
made waterproof.
609.4 Shingles or Shakes.
Wood shingles or shakes and asbestos cement shingles may
be used for exterior wall covering, provided the :frame of
the .structure is covered with building paper. All shingles or
shakes attached to sheathing other than wood sheathing
shall be secured with approved corrosion-resistant fasteners
or on furring strips attached to the studs. Wood shingles or
shakes may be applied over fiberboard shingle backer and
sheathing with annular grooved nails. The thickness of
wood shingles or shakes between wood nailing boards shall
not be less than 9 mm. Wood shingles or shakes and
asbestos shingles or siding may be nailed directly to
approved fiberboard nailbase sheathing not less than 13 mm
nominal thickness with annular grooved nails.
The weather exposure of wood shingle or shake siding used
on exterior walls shall not exceed maximum set forth in
Tat>le 6.6.
Nail size and spacing shall follow Table 6.8 and shall
penetrate framing 38 nun. Lap siding shall overlap 2S mm
minimum and be nailed through both courses and into
framing members with nails located 13 mm from bottom of
the overlapped course. Square-edged nongrooved panels
shall be nailed 9 mm from the perimeter of the panel and
intermediately into studs. Shiplap edge panel siding with
9 mm shiplap shall be nailed 9 mm from the edges on both
sides of the shiplap. The 19 mm shiplap shall be nailed 9
mm from the edge and penetrate through both the overlap
and underlap. Top and bottom edges of the panel shall be
nailed 9 mm from the edge. Shiplap and lap siding shall not
be force fit. Square-edged panels shall maintain a 2 mm gap
at joints. All joints and edges of siding shall be over
framing members, and shall be made resistant to weather
penetration with battens, horizontal overlaps or ship laps to
the satisfaction ofthe building official. A 3 mm gap shall be
provided around all openings.
609.7 Nailing.
All fasteners used for the attachment of siding shall be of a
corrosion-resistant type.

609.5 Particleboard.

When particleboard is used for covering the exterior of

outside walls, it shall be of the M-l, M-S and M-2 Exterior
Glue grades. Particleboard panel siding shall be installed in
accordance with Table 6.7 and 6.3. Panel shall be gapped 3
mm and nails shall be spaced not less than 9 mm from
edges and ends of sheathing. Unless applied over 16 mm
net wood sheathing or 13 mm plywood sheathing or 13 mm
particleboard sheathing, joints shall occur over framing
members and shall be covered with a continuous wood batt;
or joints shall be lapped horizontally or otherwise made
waterproof to the satisfaction of the building official.
Particleboard shall he sealed and protected with exterior
quality finishes.

609.6 Hardboard.

When hardboard siding is used for covering the outside of

exterior walls, it shall conform to Table 6.8 Lap siding shall
be installed horizontally and applied to sheathed or
unsheathed walls. Corner bracing shall be installed in
conformance with Section 620.6. A weather-resistive
barrier shall be installed under the lap siding.

Square-edg~ non-grooved panels and shiplap grooved or

non-grooved siding shall be applied vertically to sheathed or
unsheathed walls. Siding that is grooved shall not be less
than 6 mm thick in the groove.

Association of Structural Engineers of the PhiHppines

 INTERIOR PANELING & SHEATHING
6-11

SECTION 610 -INTERIOR designed to support all loads specified in this code and shall
be capable of supporting concentrated loads of not less than
PANELING 1.33 kN without failure. The concentrated load shall be
applied by a loaded disk, 75 mm or smaller in diameter.
Structural roof sheathing shall meet the following
610.1 Interior PaneUng. requirement:

All softwood wood structural panels shall conform to the
provisions of the previous Chapter and shall be installed in
accordance with Table 6.3 Panels shall comply with UBC
Standard 23-3.
L Deflection under uniform design live and dead load
limited to 1/180 of the span between supporting
rafters or beams and 1/240 under live load only.
Roof sheathing conforming to the provisions of Tables 6.9
or 6. 10 and 6.11 shall be deemed to meet the requirements
of this section.

Wood structural panel roof sheathing shall be bonded by

intermediate or exterior glue. Wood structural panel roof
SECTION 611 - SHEATHING sheathing exposed on the underside shall be bonded with
exterior glue.

611.1 Structural Floor Sheathing.

Structural floor sheathing shall be designed in accordance

with the general provisions of this code and the special
provisions in this section.

Sheathing use as sub flooring shall be designed to support

all loads specified in this code and shall be capable of
supporting concentrated loads of not less than 1.33 kN
without failure. The concentrated load shall be applied by a
loaded disc, 75 mm or smaller in diameter.

Flooring, including the finish floor, underlayment and

subfloor, where used, shall meet the following
requirements:

1. Deflection under uniform design load limited to

11360 of the span between supporting joists or
beams.

2. Deflection of flooring relative to joists under a 25

mmdiameter concentrated load of 890 kN limited to
3 mm or less when loaded midway between
supporting joists or beams not over 600 mm on
center and 1/360 of the span for spans over 600 mm.

Floor sheathing conforming to the provisions of Tables 6.9,

6.10, 6.12, or 6.13 shall he deemed to meet the
requirements of this section.

611.2 Structural Roof Sheathing.

Structural roof sheathing shall be designed in accordance

with the general provisions of 'this code and the special
'provisiohs in this section. Structural roof sheathing shall be

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

6-12 WOOD
SECTION 612 - MECHANICALLY
LAMINATED FLOORS AND DECKS
612.1 MechanicaUy Laminated Floors and Decks.
A laminated lumber floor or deck built up of wood
members set on edge, when meeting the following
requirements, may be designed as a solid floor or roof deck
of the same thickness, and continuous span may be
designed on the basis of the full cross section using the
simple span moment coefficient.
Nail length shall not be less than two and one half times the
net thickness of each lamination. When deck supports are
1200 mm on center or less, side nails shall be spaced not
more than 750 mm on center and staggered one third of the
spacing in adjacent laminations. When supports are spaced
more than 1200 mm on center, side nails shall be spaced not
more than 450 mm on center alternately near top and
bottom edges, and also staggered one third of the spacing in
adjacent laminations. Two side nails shall be used at each
eAd of butt-jointed pieces.
Laminations shall be toenailed to supports with 20d or
larger common nails. When supports are 1200 mm on
center or less, alternate laminations shall be toenailed to
alternate supports; when supports are spaced more than
1200 mm on center, alternate laminations shall be toenailed
to every support.
A single-span deck shall have all laminations full length.
A continuous deck of two spans shall have not more than
every fourth lamination spliced within quarter points
adjoining supports.
Joints shall be closely butted over supports or staggered
across the deck but within the adjoining quarter spans.
No lamination shall be spliced more than twice in any span.
ASSOCiation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
SECTION 613 - POST-BEA~1
CONNECTION
613.1 Post-Beam Connection.
Where post and beam or girder construction is used, the
design shall be in accordance with the provisions of this
code. Positive connection shall be provided to ensure
against uplift and lateral displacement.
SECTION 614 - WOOD SHEAR
WALLS AND DIAPHRAGMS
614.1 General.
Particleboard vertical diaphragms and lumber and wood
structural panel horizontal and vertical diaphragms may be
used to resist horizontal forces in horizontal and vertical
distributing or resisting elements. provided the deflection in
the plane of the diaphragms. as determined by calculations,
tests or analogies drawn therefrom, does not exceed the
permissible deflection of attached distributing or resisting
elements. See UBC Standard 23-2 for a method of
calculating the deflection of a blocked wood structural
panel diaphragm.
Permissible deflection shall be that deflection up to which a
diaphragm and any attached distributing or resisting
element will maintain its structural integrity under assumed
load conditions, i.e. continue to support assumed loads
without danger to occupant of the structure.
Connections and anchorages capable of resisting the design
forces shall be provided between the diaphragms and the
resisting elements. Openings in diaphragm which materially
affect their strength shall be fully detailed on the plans and
shall have their edges adequately reinforced to transfer a\1
shearing stresses.
Size and shape of each horizontal diaphragm and shear wall
shall be limited as set forth in Table 6.5. The height of a
shear wall shall be detlned as:
1. The maximum clear height from foundation to
bottom of diaphragm framing above, or
2. The maximum clear height from top of diaphragm to
bottom of diaphragm framing above.
 MECHANICALt.Y LAMINATED FLOORS AND DECKS, POST-BEAM CONNECTION
& WOOD SHEAR WALLS AND DIAPHRAGMS
The width of a shear wall shall be defined as the width of
sheathing.
Where shear walls with openings are designed for force
transfer around the openings, the limitations of
Table 6.14 shall apply to the overall shear wall including
openings and to each wall pier at the side of an opening.
The height f a wall pier shall be defined as the clear height
of the pier at the side of an opening. The width of a wall
pier shall be defined as the sheathed width of the pier at the
side of an opening. Design for force transfer shall be based
on a rational analysis
In buildings of wood-frame construction where rotation is
provided for, the depth ofthe diaphragm normal to the open
side shall not exceed 7500 mm nor two thirds the
diaphragm width, whichever is the smaller depth. Straight
sheathing shall not be permitted to resist shears in
diaphragms acting in rotation.
EXCEPTIONS:
One-story, wood-framed slmclures with the depth
normal to the open side nol greater than 7500 mm
may have a depth equal to the width.
Where calculations show that diaphragm deflections
call be tolerated. the depth normal 10 the open end
may be increased to a depth-Io-width ratio 1I0t
greater than 1 !'2: 1for diagonal sheathing or 2: 1 for
special diagonal sheathed or plywood or
particleboard diaphragms.
masonry or concrete buildings, lumber and wood
panel diaphragms shall not be considered as
tral1snlitting lateral forces by rotation.
Diaphragm sheathing nails or other approved sheathing
"cClnfliectiors shall be driven flush but shall not fracture the
4.2 Wood Members Resisting Horizontal Forces
by Masonry and Concrete.
by masonry or concrete construction in
U"~H"p," over one story in height.
""rood floor and roof members may be used ill
horizontal trusses and diaphragms to resist
horizonlal forces imposed by wind, earthquake or
earth pressure. pnwided slich forces are 1101 resisted
hy I'otatioll l!f the trusses or diaphragm.
National Stru~1 Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
6-13
2. Vertical plywood~eathed shear walls may be used
to prOVide resistance to wind or earthquake forces in
two story bUildings of masonry or concrete
constmction, provided the following requirements
are met:
2.1 Story-ta-story wall heights shall not exceed
3600mm.
2.2 Horizontal diaphragms shall not be considered to
transmit lateral forces by rotation or cantilever
action.
2.3 Deflections of horizontal and vertical diaphragms
shall not permit per-story deflections of supported
masonry or concrete walls to exceed 0.005 times
each story height.
2.4 Wood stmctural panel sheathing in horizontal
diaphragms shall have all unsupported edges
blocked. Wood structural panel sheathing for both
stories of vertical diaphragms shall have all
unsupported edges blocked alld for the lower story
walls hmJe a minimum thickness of 12 mm.
2.5 Where shall be no ollt-oj-plane horizontal offsets
between the first and second stories of plywood
shear walls.
614.3 Diagonally Sheathed Diaphragms.
614.3.1 Conventional lumber diaphragm construction.
Such lumber diaphragms shall be made up of 25 mm
nominal sheathing boards laid at an angle of approximately
45 degrees to supports. Sheathing boards shall be directly
nailed to each intermediate bearing member with not less
than two 8d nails for 25 mm by 150 mm nominal boards
and three 8d nails for boards 200 mm or wider; and in
addition, three 8d nails and four 8d nails shall be used for
150 mm and 200 mm boards, respectively, at the diaphragm
boundaries. End joints in adjacent boards shall be separated
by at least one joist or stud space, and there shall be at least
two boards between joints on the same support. Boundary
members at edges of diaphragms shall be designed to resist
direct tensile or compressive chord stresses and adequately
tied together at comers.
614.3.2 Special lumber diaphragm construction. Special
diagonally sheathed diaphragms shall conform to
conventional construction and in addition, shall have all
elements designed in conformance with the provisions of
this code.
Each chord or portion thereof maybe considered as a beam
loaded with a uniform load per meter equal to 50 percent of
6-14
the unit shear due to diaphragm action. The load shall be
assumed as acting normal to the chord, in the plane of the
diaphragm and either towards or away from the diaphragm.
The span of chord, or potion thereof, shall be the distance
between structural members of the diaphragm such as the
joists, studs and blocking, which serve to transfer the
assumed load to the sheathing.
Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms shall include
conventional diaphragms sheathed with two layers of
diagonal sheathing at 90 degrees to each other and on the
same face ofthe supporting members.
614.3.3 Wood structural panel diaphragm. Horizontal
and vertical diaphragms sheathed with wood structural
panels may be used to resist horizontal forces for horizontal
diaphragm and for vertical diaphragms, or may be
calculated by principles of mechanics without limitation by
using values of nail strength and wood structural panel
shear values as specified elsewhere in this code. Wood
structural panels for horizontal diaphragms shall be as set
forth in Tables 6.10 and 6.11 for corresponding joist
spacing and loads. Wood structural panels in shear walls
shall be at least 8 mm thick for studs spaced 400 mm on
~enter and 9 mm thick where studs are spaced 600 mm on
center.
Maximum spans for wood structural panel subfloor
underlayment shall be as set forth in Table 6.12. Wood
structural panels used for horizontal and vertical
diaphragms shall conform to UBC Standard 23-2 and UBC
Standard 23-3.
All boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced
where necessary to transmit direct stresses. Framing
members shall be at least 50 mm nominal in the dimensions
to which the plywood is attached. In general, panel edges
shall bear on the framing members and butt along their
centerlines. Nails shall be placed not less than 9 mm in
from the panel edge, shall be spaced not more than 150 mm
on center along panel edge bearings, and shall be firmly
driven into the framing members. No unblocked panels less
than 300 mm wide shall be used.
Diaphragms with panel edges supP011ed in accordance with
Tables 6.10, 6.11 and 6.12 shall not be considered as
blocked diagrams unless blocking or other means of shear
transfer is provided.
614.4 Particleboard Diaphragms.
Vertical diaphragms sheathed with particleboard may be
used to resists horizontal forces.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
WOOD
All boundary members shall be proportioned and spliced
where necessary to transmit direct stresses. Framing
members shall be at least 50 mm nominal in the dimension
to which the particleboard is attached. In general, panel
edges shall bear on the framing members and butt along
their centerlines. Nails shall be placed not less than 9 mm in
from the panel edge, shall be spaced not more than 150 mm
on center along panel edge bearings, and shall be firmly
driven into the framing members. No unblocked panels less
than 300 mm wide shall be used.
Diaphragms with panel edges supported in accordance with
Table 6.13 shall not be considered as blocked diaphragms
unless blocking or other means of shear transfer is
provided.
614.5 Wood Shear Walls and Diaphragms in
Seismic Zone 4.
614.5.1 Scope. Design and construction of wood shear
walls and diaphragms in Seismic Zone 4 shall conform to
the requirements ofthis section.
614.5.2 Framing. Collector members shall be provided to
transmit tension and compression forces. Perimeter
members at openings shall be provided and shall be detailed
to distribute the shearing stresses. Diaphragm sheathing
shall not be used to splice these members.
Diaphragm chords and ties shall be placed in, or tangent to,
the plane of the diaphragm framing unless it can be
demonstrated that the moments, shear and deflections and
deformations resulting from other arrangements can be
tolerated.
614.5.3 Wood structural panel. Wood structural panels
shall be manufactured using exterior glue.
Wood structural panel diaphragms and shear walls shall be
constructed with wood structural panel sheets not less than
1200 mm by 2400 mm, except at boundaries and changes in
framing where minimum sheet dimension shall be 600 mm
unless all edges of the undersized sheets are supported by
framing members or blocking.
Framing members or blocking shall be provided at the
edges of all sheets in shear walls.
Wood structural panel sheathing may be used for splicing
members, other than those noted in Section 614.5.2, where
the additional nailing required to develop the transfer of
forces will not cause cross-grain bending or cross-grain
tension in the nailed member.
 STRESSES
614.5.4 Heavy wood panels. Diagonally sheathed panels
utilizing 50 mm nominal boards may be used to resist the
same permissible shear as 25 mm nominal lumber, except
that 16d nails shall be used instead of8d.
Panels utilizing straight decking overlaid with plywood
may be used to resist shear forces using the same shear
values as permitted for the wood structural panel alone.
Wood structural panel joints parallel to the decking shall be
. located at least 25 mm offset from any parallel decking
joint.
Heavy decking panels utilizing dowel pins, or vertically
laminated panels connected by nailing units to one another,
resist shear forces based on the permissible shear values of
their connectors.
614.5.5 Particleboard. Particleboard shall not be less than
Type M "Exterior Glue".
Shear walls shall be sheathed with particleboard sheets not
less than 1200mm by 2400 mm except at boundaries and
changes in framing. The required nail size and spacing in
Table 6.3 apply to panel edges only. All panel edges shall
be backed with 50 mm nominal or wider framing. Sheets
are permitted to be installed either horizontally or
vertically. For 9 mm particleboard sheets installed with the
long dimension parallel to the studs spaced 600 mm on
center, nails shall be spaced at 150 mm on center along
intermediate framing members. For all other conditions,
nails of the same size shall be spaced at 300 mm on center
along intermediate framing members.
614.6 Fiberboard Sheathing Diaphragms.
Wood stud walls sheathed with fiberboard sheathing may
be used to resist horizontal forces not exceeding those set
forth in this section. The fiberboard sheathing, 1200 mm by
2400 mm, shall be applied vertically to wood studs not less
than 50 mm nominal in thickness spaced 400 mm on center.
Nailing shall be provided at the perimeter of the sheathing
board and at the intermediate studs. Blocking not less than
50 mm nominal in thickness shall be provided at horizontal
joints when wall height exceeds length of sheathing panel,
and sheathing shall be fastened to the blocking with nails
sized spaced 75 mm on centers each side of joint. Nails
shall be spaced not less than 9 mm from edges and ends of
. sheathing. Marginal studs of shear walls or shear-resisting
elements shall be adequately anchored at the top and
bottom and designed to resist all forces. The maximum
height-width ratio shall be 1'12: 1.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
6-15
SECTION 615 - STRESSES
615.1 General.
Except as herein provided, stresses shall not exceed the
allowable unit stresses for the respective species and grades
or fabricated products as set forth in Table 6.1 and Table
6.15 for lumber.
The repetitive member adjustment factors for Fb may be
used for the design of an assembly of repetitive framing
such as joists, rafters and studs not over 100 mm in
thickness spaced not more than 600 mm, not less than three
in number and joined by transverse load-distributing
elements adequate to support the design load'.
Values for species and grades not tabulated shall be
approved by the building official.
615.2 Stresses in Piles Used as Structural
Members.
Induced stresses for normal loading of round poles or piles
when used as a structural member, except modulus of
elasticity which shall be the same as for sawn lumber, shall
not exceed 60 percent of the basic unit working stresses for
the species as forth in Table 6.1
615.3 Adjustment of Stresses.
615.3.1 General. The allowable unit stresses specified in
this chapter shall be subject to the adjustments set forth in
the footnotes to the appropriate stress tables and to the
requirements of this section.
615.3.2 Preservative treatment. The values for wood
pressure impregnated with an approved process and
preservative need no adjustment for treatment but are
subjected to other adjustments.
615.3.3 Fire-retardant teatment. The values for lumber
and plywood pressure impregnated with approved fire
retardant chemicals, including fastener values, shall be
recommended by the treater and submitted to the building
official for approval. Submittal to the building official shall
include an substantiating data. Such values shall be
developed from approved test methods and procedures that
consider potential strength-reduction characteristics.
including effects of elevated temperatures and moisture.
Other adjustments are applicable, except that the impact
load-duration factor shall not apply
 6-16 WOOD
615.3.4 Duration ofload. Values for wood and mechanical
fastenings (when the wood determines the load capacity)
are subjected to the following adjustments for the various
duration of loading:
]. Where a member is fully stressed to the maximum
allowable stress, either continuously or cumulatively,
for more than 10 years under the conditions of
maximum design load, the values shall not exceed 90
percent of those in the tables.
2. When the accumulated duration of the full maximum
load during the life of the member does not exceed
the period indicated below, the values may be
increased in the table as follows:
25 percent for seven days duration, as for roof loads
33 113 percent for earthquake
33 1/3 percent for wind (for connections
and fasteners)
60 percent for wind (members only)
100 percent for impact
The foregoing examples are not cumulative. For combined
duration of loadings the resultant structural members shall
not be smaller than the required for the longer duration of
loading.
The duration of load factors in this item shall not apply to
compression-perpendicular-to-grain design values based on
a deformation limit, or to modulus of elasticity.
3. Values for normal loading conditions may be used
without regard to impact if the stress induced by
impact does not exceed the values for normal
loading.
615.3.5 Size factor adjustment. When the depth of a
rectangular sawn . lumber bending member 125 mm or
thicker exceeds 300 mm, the bending values, F", shall be
multiplied by the size factor, CF, as determined by the
Equation (615-1):
CF -_ (300)119 (615-1)
d
Where:
CF = size factor.
d = depth ofbeam in mm.
The effective lengths, Ie in the table are based on an /uld
FOT beams of circular cross section that have a diameter
greater than 340 rom, or 300 rom or larger square beams
loaded in the plane of the diagonal, the size factor CF may
be determined on the basis of an equivalent conventionally
loaded square beam ofthe same cross-sectional area.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
Size factor adjustments are cumulative with form factor
adjustments specified in Section 615.3.7, except for lumber
I beam and box beams, but are not cumulative with
slenderness factor adjustments specified in Section 6]5.3.6.
The size factor adjustment shall not apply to visually
graded lumber 50 mm to 100 mm thick or to machine
stress-rated lumber.
615.3.6 Slenderness factor and flexural stress. When the
depth of a bending member exceeds its breadth, lateral
support may be required and the slenderness factor Cs shall
be calculated by the following Equation:
(615-2)
Where:
Cs slenderness factor.
Ie effective length of beam, mm from the following
table.
d depth of beam, mm.
b breadth ofbeam, mm.
EFFECflVE LENGTH OF BEAMS
VALUE OF
EFFECTIVE
TYPE OF BEAM SPAN AND NATURE OF LOAD
LENGTH,le
Single-span beam, load concentrated at the center. 1.611u
Single-span beam, uniformly distributed load. 1.9Uu
Single-span beam, equal end moments. 1.841u
Cantilever beam, load concentrated
at unsupported end. 1.691u
Cantilever beam, uniformly distributed load. 1.06lu
Cantilever beam, uniformly distributed load
with concentrated load at cantilever end. 1.691u
Single-span or cantilever beam, any other load. l.9Uu
Lu = unsupported length ofbeam, mm
ratio of 17. For other fufd ratios, these effective lengths may
be multiplied by a factor equal to 0.85+2.55/(fufd) except
that this factor shall not apply to a single-span beam with
equal end moments (Je=L84Ju) or to a single span or
cantilever beam with any load (le=L92Ju).
 STRESSES 6-17

When the slenderness factor Cs does not exceed 10, the full
allowable unit stress in bending Fb may be used.
When the slenderness factor Cs is greater than 10 but does
not exceed Ck, the allowable unit stress in bending Fb shall
b~ determined from the following equation:
(615-3)
Where:
provided throughout the length of the beam, the
unsupported Itt is the distance between such points of end
bearing, or the length of the cantilever.
When a beam is provided with a lateral support to prevent
rotational and lateral displacement at intermediate points as
well as the ends, unsupported length III is the distance
between such points of intermediate lateral support.
615.3.7 Form factor adjustments. The allowable unit
stress in bending for non-prismatic members shall not
exceed the value established by multiplying such stress by
the form factor Cfdetermined as follows:

Ck 0.811~E/ Fb (615-4) . BEAM SECTION FORM FACTOR (C1)

E modulus of elasticity. Circular 1.180

Square (with diagonal vertical) 1.414
Fb = allowable unit stress for extreme fiber in bending. Lumber I Beams and Box Beam

Fb' = allowable unit stress for extreme fiber in bending,

adjusted for slenderness. ---
d
O.SI 1+ [( 25~.j
)2 +J..I3
2
1

1 Cg (615-6)
When the slenderness factor Cs is greater than Ck but less
than 50, the allowable unit stress in bending F'h shall be
[ (--~)
\25.-1
+88
determined by the following Equation:
Where:
L-' _ 0.4381:: (615-5)
r b-
( 'S 2 Cr = form factor
(615-7)
In no case shall Cs exceed 50. Cg = support factor (6 8p + 3/i)(1 q) + q

The design values for extreme fiber in bending, 1'1" and p = ratioof depth of compression flange to full depth
modulus elasticity, E, used in the formulas for F'h shall be ofbeam.
modified to account for moisture service condition, duration
of loading, temperature and type of treatment in accordance q = ratio of thickness of web or webs to the full width

with the Section 615.3 except that the modification for size of beam.

factor shown in Section 615.3.5 shall not be take. Design

values for extreme fiber in bending adjusted for slenderness
factor, F'b, are not subject to further modifications for
moisture service condition, duration of loading.
temperature, type of treatment' or size.
The design value for extreme fiber in bending. F 'b, shall not
exceed the fujI design value for extreme fiber in bending,
Fb, modified as allowed in this section, including the size
factor adjustment.
When the compression edge of a beam is supported
throughout its length to prevent its lateral displacement, and
the ends at points of bearing have lateral support to prevent
rotation, the unsupported length 111 may be taken as zero.
When lateral support is provided to prevent rotation at the
points of end bearing but no other lateral support is
The form factor adjustment shall be cumulative with the
size factor adjustment, except for lumber 1 beams and box
beams.
615.3.8 Modulus of elasticity adjustment. The use of
average modulus of elasticity E values are appropriate for
the design of normal wood structural members and
assemblies. In special applications where deflections are
critical to the stability of structures or structural
components, and where exposed to varying temperature and
relative humidity under sustained loading conditions, Ihe
average values of the modulus of elasticity E listed in Table
6.1 shall be reduced to account for variability. Coefficients
of variation C 1, in the modulus of elasticity E fOT lumber as
follows:

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

6-18
Cv
Visually graded sawn lumber 0.25
Machine stress-rated sawn lumber 0.11
The average modulus of elasticity E values listed in the
table shall be multiplied by r-cv , or 1-1.65Cv to obtain a
modulus of elasticity E value exceeded by 84 percent or 95
percent individual pieces, respectively.
The duration-of-Ioad adjustments specified in Section
615.3.4 do not apply to modulus of elasticity values.
615.3.9 Temperature. The allowable unit stress for
untreated and preservative-treated wood specified in this
chapter and as modified in this section apply to uses within
the range of climatic temperature ordinarily encountered in
buildings. Wood members shall not be used in areas subject
to temperatures above 66C unless the exposure is
infrequent and any permanent loss in strength is accounted
for in the design.
The allowable unit stress for fire-retardant-treated solid
sawn lumber and plywood, including fasteners values,
sqJJject to prolonged elevated temperatures from
manufacturing or equipment processes, but not exceeding
66C, shan be developed from approved test methods that
properly consider potential strength-reduction characteristics,
including effects of heat and moisture.
615.3.10 Moisture service condition. Where sawn lumber
and fastenings are exposed to service conditions causing the
wood to possess more than 19 percent moisture content, the
tabulated design values shall be reduced as specified in
Table 6.16
615.3.11 Bolted joints. Bolt values used in conjunction
with metal side plates shall be in accordance with Section
619.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
WOOD
SECTION 616 - HORIZONTAL
MEMBER DESIGN
616.1 Beam Span.
For simple beams, the span shall be taken as the distance
from face to face of support, plus one half the required
length of bearing at each end; for continuous beams, the
span is the distance between centers of bearings on support
over which the beam is continuous.
616.2 Flexure.
616.2.1 Circular cross section. A beam of circular cross
section may be assumed to have the sam.e strength in
flexure as a square beam having the same cross-sectional
area. If a circular beam is tapered, it shall be considered a
beam of variable cross section.
616.2.2 Notching. Ifpossible, notching of beams should be
avoided. Notches in sawn lumber bending members shall
not exceed one-sixth the depth of the member apd shall not
be located in the middle third of the span. Where members
are notches at the ends, the notch depth shall not exceed
one- fourth the beam depth. The tension side of the sawn
lumber bending members of 100 mm or greater nominal
thickness shall not be notch except at ends of members.
Cantilevered portions of beams less than 100 mm in normal
thickness shall not be notched unless the reduced section
properties and lumber defects are considered in the design.
616.2.3 Lateral moment distribution. Lateral moment
distIibution of a CQncentrated load from a critically loaded
beam to adjacent parallel beams shall be calculated.
616.3 HoriZontal Shear.
The maximum horizontal shear stress in a solid-sawn wood
shall .not exceed that calculated by means of Equation
(616-1):
3V
f" = 2bd (616-1)
The actual unit shear fv shall not exceed the allowable for
the species and the grade as given in Table 6.1 adjusted for
duration ofloading, as provided in Section 615.3.4.
When calculating the shear force)/' distribution of load to
adjacent parallel beams by flooring or other members may
be considered, and all loads within a distance from either
 HORIZONTAL MEMBER DESIGN
support equal to the depth of the beam may be neglected for
beams support by full bearing on one surface and loads
applied to the opposite surface.
616.4 Horizontal Shear in Notched Beams.
When rectangular-shaped girder, beams or joists are
notched at points of support on the tension side, they shall
meet the design requirements of that section in bending and
in shear. The horizontal shear stress at such point shall not
exceed the value calculated by Equation (616-2):
-~(~J
Fv - 2bd' d' (616-2)
Where:
d total depth of beam.
d' = actual depth of beam at notch.
Wben girder, beams or joists with circular cross section are
notched at points of support on the tension side, they shall
JTleet the design requirements of that section in bending and
in shear. The actual shear stress at such point shall not
exceed the value calculated by Equation (616-3):
(616-3)
Where:
An = cross-sectional area of notched member.
d total depth of beam.
dn actual depth of beam at notch.
For bending members with other than rectangular or
circular cross section and notched at point of support on the
tension side, the actual shear stress parallel to grain shall be
calculated in accordance with conventional engineering
mechanics.
When girders, beams or JOIsts are notched at point of
support on the compression side, they shall meet design
requirement for that net section in bending and in shear.
The shear at such point shall not exceed the value
calculated by :
(616-4)
National StructUral Code of f.tJe PhRippines. Volume 1
6-19
Where:
d total depth ofbeam.
d' = actual depth ofbeam at notch.
e = distance notch extends inside the inner edge of support.
The shear for the notch on the compression side shall be
further limited to the value determined for a beam of depth
d' if e exceed d'.
616.5 Design of Joints in Shear.
Eccentric connector and bolted joints and beams support by
connectors or bolt shall be designed so that .fi in Equation
(616-5) does not exceed the allowable unit stresses in
horizontal shear.
(616-5)
Where:
de (with connectors) the depth of the member less the
distance from the unloaded edge of the member to the
nearest edge of the nearest connector.
djf (with bolts or log screws) = the depth of the member
less the distance from the unloaded edge of the member to
the center of the nearest bolt or lag screw. 8
Allowable unit stresses in shear for joint involving bolts or
connectors loaded perpendicular to grain may be 50 percent
greater than the horizontal shear values as set forth in Table
6.1 and, provided that the joint occurs at least five times
the depth of the member from its end. When the joint is less
than five times the depth of the member from its end, the
included shear stress is calculated by:
(616-6)
and the 50 percent increase in design values tor shear in
joints does not apply.
616.6 Compression Perpendicular to Grain.
In application where deformation is critical. Equation
(616-7) shall be used to calculate the compression
perpendicular-to-grain design values.
620 WOOD

Fe.!.' = 0.73 FC.L (616-7) 616.7 Lateral Support.

Where: Solid-sawn rectangular lumber beams, rafter and joist shall

be supported laterally to prevent rotation or lateral
Fc.!. = compression-perpendicular-to-grain values from displacement in accordance with the following:
Tables 6.1.
If the ratio of depth to thickness, based on nominal
Fe.!. ' critical compression-perpendicular-to-grain value. dimensions, is:

The duration of load modification factors given in Section
615.3.4 shall not apply to compression-perpendicular-to
grain values for sawn lumber.
The allowable unit stresses for compression perpendicular
to grain in Table Nos. 6.1 and 6.17 apply to bearings of any
length at the ends of the beam and to all bearings 150 mm
or more in length at any other location.
For bearing of less than 150 mm in length and not nearer
than 75 mm to the end of a member, the maximum
allowable load per square mm may be obtained by
multiplying the allowable unit stresses in compression
perpendicular to grain by the factor indicated by:
(616-8)
in which lb is the length of bearing in mm measured along
the grain ofthe wood.
1. Two to 1, no lateral support is required.
2. Three to 1 or 4 to 1, the ends shall be held in
position, as by full-depth solid blocking, bridging,
nailing or bolting to other framing members,
approved hangers or other acceptable means.
3. Five to 1, one edge shall be held in line for its entire
length.
4. . Six to 1, bridging, full-depth solid blocking or cross
bracing shall be installed at intervals not exceeding
2.4 meters unless:
4.1 Both edges of the member are held in line or,
4.2 The compression edge of the member is supported
throughout its length to prevent lateral displacement,
as by adequate sheathing or subflooring , and the
ends and all points of bearing have lateral support to
prevent rotation.

The multiplying factors for indicated length of bearing on 5. Seven to 1, both edges shall be held in line for their
such small areas as plates and washers may be: entire length.

If a beam is subject to both flexure and compression

I
parallel to grain, the ratio may be as much as 5 to 1 if one
Length 150 edge is held firmly inline. Ifunder any combination ofload
of or the unbraced edge of the member is in tension, the ratio
Bearing 13 25 38 50 15 100 More
may be 6 to 1.
(mm)

In lieu of providing lateral support by the methods specified

Factor 1.15 1.38 I 1.25 1.19 1.13 1.10 1.00 in items 2 through 5 above, the allowable stresses shall be
reduced by the slenderness factor set forth in Section
615.3.6.

In using the preceding equation and table for round

washers or bearing areas, use a length equal to the diameter.
In joists supported on a ribbon or ledger board and spiked
to the studding, the allowable stress in compression
perpendicular to grain may be increased 50 percent.
616.8 Lateral Support of Arches, Compression
Chords of Trusses and Studs.
Where roof joist or purlins are used between arches or
compression chords, the largest value of Ie I d, calculated
using the depth of the arch or compression chord or
calculated using the breadth (least dimension) of the arch or
compression chord between points of intermittent lateral
support, shall be used. The roof joist or purlins shall be
placed to account for shrinkage (for example, by placing the

Association of Structural Engineers of the P~ilippines

 COLUMN DESIGN
upper edges of unseasoned joist approximately 5 percent of
the joist depth above the tops of the arch or chord) but also
placed low enough to provide adequate lateral support.
Where roof joist or purlins are placed on top of an arch or
compression chord and are securely fastened to the arch or
compression chord, the largest value of Ie / d, calculated
using the depth of the arch or compression chord or
calculated using the breadth (least dimension) .ofthe arch or
compression chord between points of intermittent lateral
support, shall be used.
Where planks are placed on top of an arch or compression
chord and securely fastened to the arch or compression
chord, or when sheathing is nailed properly to the top chord
of trussed rafter, the depth rather than the breadth of the
arch, compression chord or trussed rafter may be used as
the least dimension in determining Ie / d Where stud walls
in light-frame construction are adequately sheathed on at
least one side, the depth rather than breadth of the stud, may
be taken as the least dimension in calculating the Ie / d ratio.
National SbuctunII Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
6-21
1
!
SECTION 617 - COLUMN DESIGN
617.1 Column Classifications.
617.1.1 Simple solid-wood columns. Simple column
consist of a single piece or of;pieces properly glued together
to form a single member.
617.1.2 Spaced column, connector joined. Spaced
columns are formed of two or more individual members
with their longitudinal axes paralleL separated at the ends
and middle points of their length by blocking and joined at .
the ends' by timber connectors capable of developing the
required shear resistance.
617.1.3 Built-up columns. Built-up columns, other than
connector-joined spaced columns and glued-laminated
columns, shall not be designed as solid columns.
617.2 Limitation on 1/ d Ratio.
For simple solid columns, 1/ d shall not exceed 50.
For individual members of a spaced column, see UBC
Standard No. 25-15, "Design Standard for Spaced Wood
Column Design" or Division II of Uniform Building Code,
Volume 2, 1994
617.3 Simple Solid-column Design.
The effective column length, Ie shall be used in design
Equations given in this section. The effective column
length, Ie shall be determined in accordance with good
engineering practice. Actual column length, I, may be
multiplied by the factors given in the following table to
determine effective column length, Ie.
Allowable unit stresses in newton per square millimeter of
cross-sectional area of square or rectangular simple solid
columns shall be determined by the following formulas, but
such unit stresses shall not exceed values for compression,
parallel to grain Fe in Table 6.1 adjusted in accordance with
provision of this section.
Where:
c' 0.8 for sawn lumber.
c' "'" 0,85 for round timber piles.
6-22 WOOD

Where:

dmin the minimum dimensiofl, d, for that face ofthe

column.
Fc* = tabulated compression design value multiplied by all
dmax = the maximum dimension, d, for that face of the
of the applicable adjustment factors.
column.
KcE 0.3 for visually graded lumber-
Support Conditions:
KcE 0.418 for products such as machine stress-rated sawn
lumber. Large end fixed, small end unsupported a= 0.70
Small end fixed, large end unsupported a 0.30
Both ends simply supported:
, Tapered toward one end a= 0.50

Buckling
Modes I
I
I
I
I
I
!
...
I
I
I
I

;
~
;
;
I \
\
I
I
y
I

I
I
I
I
I
+
~ ... I
I
I
I
Tapered toward both ends

For all other support conditions:

a= 0.70

I I I I
I I I
I I I I
I I I I I
I I
I I I I
l I The design of a column of round cross section shall be
, I I

- T
I I
\
I
, I
I
I
I
I
I
based on the design calculations for a square column of the
\ I I same cross-sectional area and having the same degree of
taper.

t t
Design
buckling
factoI', Ke 0.65 1.00 2.10 2.4
when ideal
conditions
approxi
mated

Rotation fixed, translation fixed

Rotation free, translation fixed

End
Condition Rotation fixed, translation free
Code
Rotation free, translation free

Note: Ie Kle

617.4 Tapered Columns.

When designing a tapered column with a rectangular cross

section, tapered at one or both ends, the representative
dimension, d rep for each face of the column shall be derived
as follows:

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 FLEXURAL AND AXIAL LOADING COMBINED
6-23

SECTION 618 - FLEXURAL:AND AXIAL design in the plane of bending the slenderness ratio, teld, in
LOADING COMBINED the plane of bendin~ shall be used to -calculate Fe and J
and (2) when checking the design perpendicular to the
plane of bending the slenderness ratio, le Id, in the plane of
618.1 Flexure and Axial Tension. bending shall be used to calculate F'c and J shall be set
equal to zero.
Members subjected to both flexure and axial tension shall
be so proportioned that
618.3 Spaced Columns.

:'S 1 (618-1) In the case of spaced columns, this combined stress formula
maybe applied only if the bending is in a direction parallel
and to the greater d of the individual member.
< (618-2)

Where: 618.4 Truss Compression Chords.

Fb * tabulated bending design value multiplied by all Effect of buckling of a 50 rom by 100 mm or smaller truss
applicable adjustment factors except CF . compression chord having effective buckling lengths of2400
mm or less and with 9 rom or thicker plywood sheathing
Fb ** tabulated bending design value multiplied by all
nailed to the narrow face of the chord in accordance with
applicable adjustment factor except CF.
the appropriate standards shall be determined from the
equation:
Fe allowable tension design value parallel to grain,

N/rom2 c.,. = I+O. 62Ie (618-6)

Eo. 05
.f, actual unit stress in tension parallel to grain .
Where:
.k := actual unit stress for extreme fiber in bending.
CT = buckling of the stiffness factor.
618.2 Flexure and Axial Compression. 0.819E for machine-stress-rated lumber.

Members subjected to both flexure and axial compression Ie = effective buckling length used in design of chord for
shaH be proportioned that compression loading.

Eo.05= 0.589E for visually graded lumber.

(618-3)
E Modulus of elasticity from tables of allowable unit
The value of J shall be derived as stress, N/mm2 .

Id"':'l1 The values of CT determined from this equation are for

(618-4)
J wood seasoned to a moisture content of 19 percent or less at
K 11 the time the plywood is nailed to the chord. For wood that
is unseasoned at the time of plywood attachment, CT shall
be determined from the Equation (618-7):
K =0.671 [I (618-5)
~Fc-
(618-7)
except that J shall not be less than zero nor greater than one
(0 S; J::;; 1). For chords with an effective buckling length greater than
2400 rom, Ct shall be taken as the value for a chord having
Fe and K shall be determined in accordance with the an effective length of 2400 rom.
provision in Section 617.3, except (1) when checking the

National Structural Code 01 the Philippines, Volume 1

6-24 WOOD

The buckling stiffness factor does not apply to short
columns or trusses used under wet conditions. The
allowable unit compressive stress shall be modified by the
buckling stiffness factor when a truss chord is subjected to
combined flexure and compression and the bending
moment in the direction that induces compression stresses
in the chord face to which the plywood is attached.
The buckling stiffness factor Cr shall apply as follows:
Short column ( lei d of 11 or less ):
F'c = Fe (618-8)
Intermediate columns (fe" d greater than 11 but less than K):
(618-9)
K = 0.671JCr FE . .
c
SECTION 619 - TIMBER
CONNECTORS AND FASTENERS.
619.1 GeneraL
Timber connectors and fasteners may be used to transmit
forces between wood members and between wood and
metal members. The allowable loads and installation of
timber connectors and fasteners shall be in accordance with
the provision set forth in UBC Standard No. 25-17,
"Timber Connector Joints, Bolted Joints, Drift Bolts and
Wood Screws, Lag Screws; Metal Plate Connected Wood
Truss Design, and Nails and Staples" or Division III of
Chapter23Uriiform Building Code, Volume 2, 1994. For
connectors and fasteners where the wood is wet a time of
fabrication or wet in service, the allowable load shall be
modified in accordance with UBC Standard No. 25-17. The
allowable loads and installation of timber connectors shall
be as set forth in Tables 6.2, 6.17, 6.19, and 6.20.

(618-10) Safe loads and design practices for types of connectors and
fasteners not mentioned or fully covered in UBC Standard
No. 25-17 may be determined in a manner approved by the
Lbng column (Ie; d of K or greater ): building official.

F' _ 0.30F:C r
(618-11)
c- V" I d)2 619.2 Bolts.

Safe loads in leN for bolts in shear in seasoned lumber shall

618.5 Compression at Angle to Grain.
The allowable unit stress in compression at an angle of load
to grain between 0 and 90 shall be computed from the
Hankinson Equation as folIows:
not exceed the values set forth in Table 6.17.
Allowable shear values used to connect a wood to concrete
or masonry are permitted to be determined as one half the
tabulated double shear values for a wood member twice the
thickness of the member attached to the concrete or
masonry.

'e}' (618-12)
L'
I' c
.
S1I1- + ..cl. Co.F'(J
619.3 Nails and Spikes.
Allowable values J'~ shall be adjusted for duration of load
619.3.1 Safe lateral strength. A common wire nail driven
before lise in Hankinson's Equation. Values of Fn and perpendicular to grain of the wood. when used to fasten
are not subjected to duration of load modifications. wood members together, shall not be subjected to a greater
load causing shear and bending than the safe lateral strength
of the wire nail or spike as set forth in Table 6.21.

A wire nail driven parallel to the grain of the wood shall not
be subjected more than two thirds of the lateral load
allowed when driven perpendicular to the grain. Toenails
shall not be subjected more than five sixths of the lateral
load allowed for nails driven perpendicular to the grain.

619.3.2 Safe resistance to withdrawal. A w.ire nail driven

perpendicular to grain of wood shall not be subjected to a
greater load, tending to cause withdrawal, than the safe

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 TIMBER CONNECTORS AND FASTENERS
& CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION DESIGN PROVISIONS
resistance of the nail to withdrawal, as set forth in Table
6.21.
619.3.3 Spacing and penetration. Common wire nails
shall have penetration into the piece receiving the point. as
set forth in Table 6.21. Nails or spikes for which the wire
gauges or lengths are not set forth in Table 6.21 shall have a
required penetration of not less than 11 diameters, and
allowable loads may be interpolated. Design values shall be
increased when the penetration of nails into the member
holding the point is larger than the required by this item.
For wood-to-wood joints, the spacing center to center of
nails in the direction of stress shall not be less than one half
of the required penetration. Edge or end distances in the
direction of stress shall not be less one half of the required
penetration. All spacing and edge and end distances shall be
such as to avoid splitting of the wood.
Holes for nails, where necessary to prevent splitting, shall
be bored of a diameter smaller than that ofthe nails.
619.4 Joist Hangers and Framing Anchors
Connections depending upon joist hangers or framing
anchors, ties and other mechanical fastenings not otherwise
covered may be used where approved
619.5 Miscellaneous Fasteners.
619.5.1 Drift bolts or drift pins. Connections involving
the use of drift bolts or pins, wood and screws and lag
screws shall be designed in accordance with the provisions
set forth in UBC Standard No. 25-17.
619.5.1.1 Withdrawal design values. Drift bolt and drift
pin connections loaded in withdrawal shall be design in
accordance with good engineering practice.
619.5.1.2 Lateral design values. Allowable lateral design
values for drift bolts and drift pins driven in the side grain
of wood shall not exceed 75 percent of the allowable lateral
design values for common bolts of the same diameter and
length in main member. Additional penetration of pin into
members should be provided in lieu ofthe washer, head. and
nut on a common bolt.
619.5.2 Spike grids. Wood-to-wood connections involving
spike grids for lateral load transfer shall be designed in
accordance with good engineering practice.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
6-25
SECTION 620 ~ CONVENTIONAL
LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN PROVISIONS
620.1 General.
The requirements in this section are intended for
conventional light-frame construction. Other methods may
be used provided a satisfactory design is submitted showing
compliance with other provisions ofthis code.
Only the following occupancies may be constructed in
accordance with this division:
1. One-, two- or three-story buildings housing Group R
Occupancies.
2. One-story Occupancy Category 4 buildings, as
defined in Table 6.24, when constructed on a slab
on-grade floor.
3. Group U Occupancies.
4. Top-story walls and roofs of Occupancy Category 4
buildings not exceeding two story's of wood
framing.
5. Interior non-load bearing partitions, ceilings and
curtain walls in all occupancies.
Other approved repetitive wood members may be used in
lieu of solid-sawn lumber in conventional construction
provided these members comply with the provisions of this
code.
620.2 Design of Portions.
When a building of otherwise conventional construction
contains non-conventional structural elements, those
elements shall be designed in accordance with Sec:tion on
"Rationality of Design Method" on the previous chapter.
620.3 Additional Requirements for Conventional
Construction in High-wind Areas.
Appendix Chapter 23 of the Uniform Building Code,
Volume 2, 1994 provisions for conventional construction in
high-wind areas shall apply when specifically adopted.
6-26 WOOD
620.4 Additional Requirements for Conventional
Construction in Seismic Zone 2.
620.4.1 Braced wall lines. Where the basic wind speed is
not greater than 129 kmlh, buildings shall be provided with
exterior and interior braced wall lines. Spacing shall not
exceed 10.20 meters on center in both the longitudinal and
transverse directions in each story.
620.4.2 Braced wall lines for high wind. Where the basic
wind speed exceeds 129 kmlh, buildings shall be provided
with exterior and interior braced wall lines. Spacing shall
not exceed 7.50 meters on center in both longitudinal and
transverse directions in each story.
EXCEPTION:
In one- and two-story Group R. Division 3 buildings.
interior braced wall line spacing may be increased to 1Iot
more than 10.20 meters on center in order to accommodate
lone single room per dwelling unit not exceeding 83.6m2
Ihe building offiCial may require additional walls to
contain braced panels when this exception is used.
620.4.3 Veneer. Anchored masonry and stone wall veneer
shall not exceed 125 mm in thickness.
620.4.4 Unusually shaped buildings. When of unusual
shape as defined in Section 620.5.3, buildings of light
frame construction in Seismic Zone 2 shall have a lateral
force-resisting system designed to resist the forces specified
in Chapter 2. . 5. Gravity loads carried at the end of cantilevered
620.5 Additional Requirements for Conventional
Construction in Seismic Zone 4.
620.5.1 Braced wall lines. Buildings shall be provided with
exterior and interior braced wall lines. Spacing shall not
exceed 7500 mm on center in both the longitudinal and
transverse directions in each story.
EXCEPTION:
In one- and two-story Group R. Division 3 bUildings,
interior braced wall line spacing may be increased to not
more than 10200 mm on center in order to accommodate
one single room per dwelling unit not exceeding 83.61m2.
The building offiCial may require additional walls to
contain braced panels when this exception is used
620.5.2 Veneer. Anchored masonry and stone wall veneer
shall not exceed 125 mm in thickness and shall not extend
above the first story.
620.5.3 Unusually shaped b\lildings. When of unusual
shape, buildings of light-frame construction shall have a
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
lateral-force-resisting system designed to resist the forces
specified in Chapter on Structural Forces. One or more of
the following shall be considered to constitute an unusual
shape:
620.5.3.1 When exterior braced wall panels, as required by
Section 620.10.3, are not in one plane vertically from the
foundation to the uppermost story in which they are
required.
EXCEPTION:
Floors with cantilevers or setbacks Ilot exceedingfour times
the nominal depth of the .floor joists may ,support braced
wall panels prOVided:
I. Floor joists are 50 mm by 250 mm or larger and
spaced at not more than 400 mm on center.
2. The ratio ofthe hack spall to the cantilever is at least
2 to 1.
3. Floor joists at ends of braced wall panels are
doubled.
4. A continuous rim joists is connected to ends of all
cantilevered joists. The rim joist may he spliced
using a metal tie flot les.<; than 1.-17 mm (16
galvanized gage) and 38 mm wide fastened with six
16dnails.
joists are limited to uniform wall and roof load and
the reactions from headers having a span of 2400
mm or less.
620.5.3.2 When a section of floor or roof is not laterally
supported by braced wall lines on all edges.
EXCEPTION:
Portions of roofs or floors which do not support braced
wall panels above may extend up to 1800 mm beyond a
braced wall line.
620.5.3.3 When the end of a required braced wall panel
extends more than 300 mm over an opening in the wall
below. This provision is applicable to braced wall panels
offset in plane and to braced wall panels offset out of plane
as permitted by Section 620.5.3.1.
EXCEPTION:
Braced wall panels may extend over an opening not more
than 2400 mm in width when the header is a 100 mm by
300 mm or larger member.
 CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION DESIGN PROVISIONS
620.5:3.4 When an opening in a floor or roof exceeds the .
lesser of 3600 mm or 50 percent of the least floor or roof
dimension.
620.5.3.5 Construction where portions of a floor level are
vertically offset such that the framing members on either
side of the offset cannot be lapped or tied together in an
approved manner as required by Section 620.7.3.
EXCEPTION:
Framing supported directly byfoundations.
620.5.3.6 When braced wall lines do not occur in two
perpendicular directions.
620.5.3.7 Other configurations which, in the opinion of the
building official, create irregularities or discontinuities
which are not addressed by this Section.
620.5.4 Lumber roof decks. Lumber roof decks shall have
solid sheathing.
620.5.5 Interior braced wall support. In one-story
buildings, interior braced wall lines shall be supported on
continuous foundations at intervals not exceeding 15000
mm. In buildings more than one-story in height, all interior
braced wall panels shall be supported on continuous
foundations.
EXCEPTION:
Two-story bUildings may have interior braced wall lines
:,upported on contimlous foundations at intervals not
exceeding 15000 mm prOVided:
1. Cripple wall height does not exceed 1200 mm.
2, First floor braced wall panels are supported 011
doubled floor joist, amtimlous blocking or floor
heams.
3, Distance between bracing lines does not exceed
twice the building width parallel to the braced wall
line.
620.6 Girders.
Girders for single-story construction or girders supporting
loads from a single floor shan not be less than 100mm by
150 mm for spans ] 800 mm or less, provided that girders
are spaced not more than 2400 mm on center. Other girders
shall be designed to support the loads specified in this code.
Girder end joints shall occur over supports. When a girder
is spliced over a support, an adequate tie shall be provided.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
6-27
The end of beams or girders supported on masonry or
concrete shall not have less than 75 mm of bearing.
620.7 Floor Joists.
620.7.1 General. The limits of defects by grade in joists
and planks for seasoned wood are set forth in
Table 6. IS.
620.7.2 Bearing. Except where supported on a 25 mm by
] 00 mm ribbon strip and nailed to the adjoining stud, the
ends of each joist shall not have less than 38 mm of bearing
on wood or metal, or less than 75 mm on masonry.
620.7.3 Framing details. Joists shall be supported laterally
at the ends and at each support by solid blocking except
where the ends of joists are nailed to a header, band or rim
joist or to an adjoining stud or by other approved means.
Solid blocking shall not be less 50 mm in thickness and the
full depth ofjoist.
Notches on the ends of joists shall not exceed one-fourth
the joist depth. Holes bored in joists shall not be within 50
mm of the top or bottom of the joist, and the diameter of
any such hole shall not exceed one-third the depth of the
joist. Notches in the top or bottom ofjoists shall not exceed
one-sixth the depth and shall not be located in the middle
third of the span.
Joist framing from opposite sides of a beam, girder or
partition shall be lapped at least 75 mm or the opposing
joists shall be tied together in an approved manner.
Joists framing into the side of a wood girder shall be
supported by framing anchors or on ledger strips not less
than 50 mm by 50 mm.
620.7.4 Framing. around openings. Trimmer and header
joists shall be doubled, or of lumber of equivalent cross
section, when the span of the header exceeds 1200 mm.
The ends of header joists more than 1800 mm long shall be
supported by framing anchors or joist hangers unless
bearing on a beam, partition or wall. Tail joists over 3600
mm long shall be supported at header by framing anchors or
on ledger strips not less than 50 mm by 50 mm.
620.7.5 Supporting bearing partitions. Bearing partitions
perpendicular to joists shal1 not be offset from supporting
girders, walls or partitions more than the joist depth.
Joists under and parallel to bearing partitions shall be
doubled.
620.7.6 Blocking. Floor joists shall be blocked when
required by the provisions of Section 620.7.3.
6-28 WOOD
620.8 Subtlooring.
620.8.1 Lumber subfloor. Sheathing used as a structural
sub:'floor shall confonn to the limitations set forth in Table
6.9.
Joints in subflooring shall occur over supports unless end
matched lumber is used in which case each piece shall bear
on at least two joists.
Subflooring may be omitted when joist spacing does not
exceed 400 mm and 25 mm nominal tongue-and-groove
wood strip flooring is applied perpendicular to the joists.
620.8.2 Wood structural panels. Where used as structural .
subflooring, wood structural panels shall be as set forth in .
Tables 6.10 and 6.11. Wood structural panel combination
subfloor underlayment shall have maximum spans as set
forth in Table 6.12.
When wood structural panel floors are glued to joists with
an adhesive in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's
dvections, fasteners may be spaced a maximum of 300 mm
on center at all supports.
620.8.3 Plank flooring. Plank flooring shall be designed in
accordance with the general provisions of this code.
In lieu of such design, 50 mm tongue-and-groove planking
may be used in accordance with Table 6.22. Joints in such
planking may be randomly spaced, provided the system is
applied to not less than three continuous spans, planks are
center-matched and end-matched or splined, each plank
bears on at least one support and joints are separated by at
least 600 mm in adjacent pieces. 25 mm nominal strip
square-edged flooring, 13 mm tongue-and-groove flooring
or 9 mm wood structural panel shall be applied at right
angles to the span of the planks. The 9 mm plywood shall
be applied with the tace grain at right angles to the span of
the planks.
620.8.4 Particleboard. Where used as structural
subflooring or as combined subfloor underlayment,
particieboard shall be as set forth in Table 6.13.
620.9 Particleboanl Underlayment.
In accordance with approved recognized standards,
particleboard floor underlayment shall confonn to Type
PBU. Underlayment shall not be less than 6 mm in
thickness and shall be identified by the grade mark of an
approved inspection agency. Underlayment shall be
installed in accordance with this code and as recommended
by the manutacturer.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
620.10 Wall Framing.
620.10.1 Size. beigltjt and spacing. The size, height and
spacing of studs shall be in accordance with Table 6.23
except that utility grade studs shall not be spaced more than
400 mm on center, or support more than a roof and ceiling,
or exceed 2400 mm in height for exterior walls and load
bearing walls or 3000 mm for interior nonload-bearing
walls.
620.10.2 Framing details. Studs shall be placed with their
wide dimension perpendicular to the wall. Not less than
three studs shall be installed at each corner of an exterior
wall
EXCEPTIONS:
At comers, a third stud may be omitted through the use of
wood. spacers or backup cleats of 9 mm wood stnlctural
panel, 9 mm Type M "Exterior Glue" particle-board, 25
mm lumber or other approved devices that will serve as all
adequate backing for the attachment offaCing materials.
Where fire resistance ratings or shear values are im l01ved,
wood. spacers, backup cleats or other devices shall 1101 be
used unless specifically approvedfor such use.
Bearing and exterior wall studs shall be capped with double
top plates installed to provide overlapping at corners and at
intersections with other partitions. End joints in double top
plates shall be offset at leaSt 2400 mm.
EXCEPTIONS:
A single top plate may be used, prOVided the plate is
adequately tied at jOints, corners and intersecting walls by
at least the equivalent of 75 mm by 150 mm by 0.9 mm
galvanized steel that is nailed to each wall or segment l~f
wall by six 8d nails or equivalent, provided the rcifters,
joists or fntsses are centered over the ,<;tuds with a tolerance
of110 more than 25 mm.
When bearing studs are spaced at 600 mm intervals and top
plates are less than 50 mm by 150 mm or 70 mm by 100
mm members and when the floor joists, floor trusses or roof
trusses which they support are spaced at more than 406 mm
intervals, such joists or trusses shall bear within 125 mm of
the studs beneath or a third plate shall be installed.
Tnterior nonbearing partitions may be capped with a single
top plate installed to provide overlapping at corners and at
intersections with other walls and partitions. The plate shall
be continuously tied at joints by solid blocking at least 400
mm in length and equal in size to the plate or by 3 mm by
38 mm metal ties with spliced sections fastened with two
16d nails on each side of the joint.
 CONVENTIONAL UGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION DESIGN PROVISIONS
Studs shall have full bearing on a plate or sill not less than
50 mm in thickness having a width not less than that of the
wall studs.
620.10.3 Bracing. Braced wall lines shall consists of
braced wall panels which meet the requirements for
location, type and amount of bracing specified in Table
6.24 and are in line or offset from each other by not more
than 1200 mm. Braced wall panels shall start at not more
than 2400 mm from each end of a braced wall line. All
braced wall panels shall be clearly indicated on the plans.
Construction of braced wall panels shall be by one of the
following methods:
1. Nominal 25 mm by 100 mm continuous diagonal
braces let into top and bottom plates and intervening
studs, placed at an angle not more than 60 degrees or
less than 45 degrees from the horizontal, and
attached to the framing in confonnance with Table
6.3.
2. Wood boards of 16 mm net ffilfllmum thickness
applied diagonally on studs spaced not over 600 mm
on center.
3. Wood structural panel sheathing with a thickness not
less than S mm for 400 mm stud spacing and not less
than 9 mm for 600 mm stud spacing in accordance
with Tables 6.5 and 6.25.
4. Fiberboard sheathing 1200 mm by 2400 mm panels
not less than 13 mm thick applied vertically on studs
spaced not over 406 mm on center when installed in
ac.cordance with Section 614.6 and Table 6.27.
5. Gypsum board (sheathing 13 mm thick by 1200 mm
wide, wallboard or veneer base) on studs spaced not
over 600 mm on center and nailed at 175 mm on
center with nails as required by Table 6.2S.
6. Particleboard wall sheathing panels where installed
in accordance with Table 6.29.
7. Portland cement plaster on studs spaced 400 mm on
center installed in accordance with Table 6.2S.
8. Hardboard panel siding when installed in accordance
with Section 609.6 and Table 6.S.
Method I is not permitted in Seismic Zones 2B and 4. For
cripple wall bracing, see Section 620.10.5. For Methods 2,
3, 4, 6 and S, each braced panel must be at least 1200 mm
in length, covering three stud spaces where studs are spaced
400 mm apart and covering two stud spaces where studs are
spaced 600 mm apart.
National Structural Code of the Philippines. Volume 1
6-29
For Method 5, each brar;ed wall panel must be at least 2400
mm in length when a.pplied to one face of a braced wall
panel and 1200mm when applied to both faces.
All vertical joints of panel sheathing shall occur over studs.
Horizontal joints shall occur over blocking equal in size to
the studding except where waived by the installation
requirements for the specific sheathing materials.
Braced wall panel sole plates shall be nailed to the floor
framing and top plates shall be connected to the framing
above in accordance with Table 6.3. Sills shall be bolted to
the foundation or slab. Where joists are perpendicular to
braced wall lines above, blocking shall be provided under
and in line with the braced wall panels.
620.10.4 Alternate braced wall panels. Any braced wall
panel required by Section 620.10.3 may be replaced by an
alternate braced wall panel constructed in accordance with
the following:
l. In one-story buildings, each panel shall have a length
of not less than SOO mm and a height of not more
than 3000 mm. Each panel shall be sheathed on one
face with 9 mm plywood sheathing nailed with Sd
common or galvanized box nails in accordance with
Table 6.3 and blocked at all plywood edges. Two
anchor bolts installed shall be provided in each
panel. Anchor bolts shall be placed at panel quarter
points. Each panel end stud shall have a tie-down
device fastened to the foundation, capable of
providing an approved uplift capacity of not less than
S16.5 kg. The tie-down device shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. The panels shall be supported
directly on a foundation or on floor framing
supported directly on a foundation which is
continuous across the entire length of the braced wall
line. This foundation shall be reinforced with not
less than one 12 mm bar top and bottom.
2. In the first story of two-story buildings, each braced
wall panel shall be in accordance with Section
620.10.4, item 1, except that the plywood sheathing
shall be provided on both faces, three anchor bolts
shall be placed at one-fifth points, and tie-down
device uplift capacity shall not be less than
1360.Skg.
620.10.5 Cripple walls. Foundation cripple walls shall be
framed of studs not less in size than the studding above
with a minimum length of 350 mm, or shall be framed if
solid blocking. When exceeding 1200 mm in height, such
walls shall be framed of studs having the size required for
an additional story.
6-30
Cripple walls having a stud height exceeding 350 mm shall
be braced in accordance with Table 6.26. Solid blocking or
wood structural panel sheathing may be used to brace
cripple walls having a stud height of 350 mm or less. In
Seismic Zone 4, Method 7 is not permitted for bracing any
cripple wall studs.
Spacing of boundary nailing for required wall bracing shall
not exceed 150 mm on center along the foundation plate
and the top plate of the cripple walL Nail size, nail spacing
for field nailing and more restrictive boundary nailing
requirements shall be as required elsewhere in the code for
the specific bracing material used.
620.10.6 Headers. Headers and lintels shall conform to the
requirements set forth in this paragraph and together with
their supporting systems shall be designed to support the
loads specified in this code. All openings 1200 mm wide or
less in bearing walls shall be provided with headers
consisting of either two pieces of 50 mm framing lumber
placed on edge and securely fastened together or 100 mm
lumber of equivalent cross section. All openings more than
1200 mm wide shall be provided with headers or lintels.
Each end of lintel or header shall have a length of bearing
bf not less than 38 mm for the full width of the lintel.
620.10.7 Pipes in waDs. Stud partitions containing
plumbing, heating, or other pipes shall be so framed and the
joists underneath so spaced as to give proper clearance for
the piping. Where a partition containing such piping runs
parallel to the floor joists, the joists underneath such
partitions shall be doubled and spaced to permit the passage
of such pipes and shall be bridged. Where plumbing,
heating or other pipes are placed in or partly in a partition,
necessitating the cutting of the soles or plates, a metal tie
not less than 1.47 mm (16 galvanized gage) and 38 mm
wide shall be fastened to each plate across and to each side
ofthe opening with not less than six 16d nails.
620.10.8 Bridging. Unless covered by interior or exterior
wall coverings or sheathing meeting the minimum
requirements of this code, all stud partitions or walls with
studs having a height-to-least thickness ratio exceeding 50
shall have bridging not less than 50 mm in thickness and of
the same width as the studs fitted snugly and nailed thereto
to provide adequate lateral support.
620.10.9 Cutting and notching. In exterior walls and
bearing partitions, any wood stud may be cut or notched to
a depth not exceeding 25 percent of its width. Cutting or
notching of studs to a depth not greater than 40 percent of
the width of the stud is permitted in nonbearing partitions
supporting no loads other than the weight of the partition.
620.10.10 Bored holes. A hole not greater in diameter than
40 percent of the stud width may be bored in any wood
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
WOOD
stud. Bored holes not greater than 60 percent of the width
of the stud are permitted in nonbearing partitions or in any
wall where each bored stud is doubled, provided not more
than two such successive doubled studs are so bored.
In no case shall the edge of the bored hole be nearer than 16
mm to the edge of the stud. Bored holes shall not be
located at the same section of stud as a cut or notch.
620.10.11 Roof and ceiling framing.
620.10.11.1 General. The framing details required in this
section apply to roofs having a minimum slope of 3 units
vertical in 12 units horizontal (25% slope) or greater. When
the roof slope is less than 3 units vertical in 12 units
horizontal (25% slope), members supP.Orting rafters and
ceiling joists such as ridge board, hips al'ld valley shall be
designed as beams.
620.10.11.2 Framing. Rafters shall be framed directly
opposite each other at the ridge. There shall be a ridge
board at least 25 mm nominal thickness at all ridges and not
less in depth than the cut end ofthe rafter. At all valleys and
hips there shall be a single valley or hip rafter not less than
50 mm nominal thickness and not less than the cut of the
rafter.
620.10.11.3 Notches and holes. Notching at the ends of
rafters or ceiling joists shall not exceed one fourth the
depth. Notches in the top or bottom of the rafter or ceiling
joist shall not exceed one sixth the depth and shall not be
located in the middle one third of the span, except that a
notch not exceeding one third of the depth is permitted in
the top of the rafter or ceiling joist not further from the face
ofthe support than the depth ofthe member.
Holes bored in rafters or ceiling joists shall not be within 50
mm of the top and bottom and their diameter shall not
exceed one third the depth ofthe member.
620.10.11.4 Framing around openings. Trimmer and
header rafters shall be doubled, or of lumber of equivalent
cross section, when the span of the header exceeds 1200
mm. The ends of header rafters more than 1800 mm long
shall be supported by framing anchors or rafter hangers
unless bearing on a beam, partition or walL
620.10.11.5 Rafter ties. Rafter shall be nailed to adjacent
ceiling joists to form a continuous tie between exterior
walls when such joists are parallel to the rafters. Where not
parallel, rafter shall be tied to 25 mm by 100 mm (nominal)
minimum-size crossties. Rafter ties shall be spaced not
more than 1200 mm on center.
620.10.11.6 Purlins. Purlins to support roof loads may be
installed to reduce the span of rafters within allowable
 METAL PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSS DESIGN
limits and shall be supported by struts to bearing walls. The
maximum span of 50 mm by 100 mmpurlins shall be 1200
mm. The maximum span of the 50mm by 150 mm purlins
shall be 1800 mm but in no case shall the purlins be smaller
than 50 mm by 100 mm members. The unbraced length of
struts shall not exceed 2400 mm and the minimum slope of
the struts shall not be less than 45 degrees from the
horizontal.
620.10.11.7 Blocking. Roof rafters and ceiling joists shall
be supported laterally to prevent rotation and lateral
displacement when required by Section 616. Roof trusses
shall be supported laterally at points of bearing by solid
blocking to prevent rotation and lateral displacement.
620.10.11.8 Roof sbeatbing. Roof sheathing shall be in
accordance with Tables 6.10 and 6.11 for wood structural
panels, and Table 6.9 for lumber.
Joints in lumber sheathing shall occur over support unless
approved end-matched is used, in which case each piece
shall bearon at leaSt two supports.
.' "
Wood. structUral panels used. for roof sheathing shall be
bo:nded by intermediate or exterior gIue. Wood' structural
. .p;aneI roof sheathjng exposed on the underside shall 'be
boi1d~ with e~erior gIue.
620.iojl.9 Roof planking. Planking shall be .designed in
accordance with the general provisions of this code.
In lieu of such design, 50 mm ton~e-and-groove planking
. may be usea it;l accordance with Table 6.22. Joints in such
'planking may b~ randomly spaced, provided the system is
applied to' not .\ess than three continuous spans, planks are
c~riter-matched and end-matched or splined, each plank
bears on at least one' support, and joints are separated by at
least 600 mm in adjacent pieces.
620.10.11.10 Ent Facilities. In Seismic Zone 4, exterior
exit balco~ies,. stairs and simila~ exit facilities shall be
positivei y . iuichored to the primary. structure at not over
2400 mm Oil center or shall be designed for lateral forces.
Such attachment' shaH not be accomplished by used of
toenails or nails silbject to withdrawal.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
6-31
SECTION 621 - METAL PLATE
CONNECTED WOOD TRlJSS
DESIGN
621.1 Design and Fabrication.
The design and fabrication of metal plate connected wood
trusses shall be in accordance with ANSlrrPI 1-1995,
National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood
Truss Construction, of the Truss Plate Institute.
621.2 Performance.
Full-scale load tests in accordance with ANSUTPI 2 may be
required at the option of the building official to provide a
means of demonstrating that trummum adequate
performance is obtainable from specific metal plate
connector plates, various lumber types and grades, a
particular truss design and a particular fabrication
procedure. ANSIrrPI 2 provides procedures for testing and
evaluating wood trusses designed in accordance with
ANSUTPI1.
621.3 In-plant Inspection.
Each truss manufacturer shall retain an approved agency
having no financial interest in the plant being inspected to
make nonscheduled inspections shall cover all phrases of
the truss operation, including lumber storage, handling,
cutting, fixtures, presses or rollers, fabrication bundling and
banding, handling, and delivery.
621.4 Marking.
Each truss shall be legibly branded, marked or otherwise
have permanently affixed thereto the following information
located within 600 mm of the center of the span on the face
of the bottom chord:
1. Identity ofthe company manufacturing the truss.
2. The design load.
3. The spacing oftrusses.
6-32 WOOD

Table 6.1 - WORKING STRESSES FOR VISUALLY STRESS-GRADED UNSEASONED STRUCTURAL TIMBER OF
pmuPPINE WOODS.

80% Stress Grade

Species Bending and Modulus of I Compression Compression Shear
(Common and Botanical Names) tension elasticity in paraUel to perpendicula paraUel to
paraUel to bending . grain rto grain grain
~rain
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

1000
MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa
L High Strength Group
Agoho (Casuarina equisetifolia Forst) 26.3 8.22 14.5 5.91 2.95
Liusin [pa.rina.ri corymbosa (Blume) Miq.] 25.0 9.36 15.6 4.31 2.64
Malabayabas (Tristania spp.) 28.7 8.30 15.8 8.70 3.02
Manggacbapui (Hopea spp.) 25.8 9.63 16.0 6.03 2.78
Molave (Vitex parviflorn Juss.) 24.0 6.54 15.4 6.34 2.88
Narig (Vatica spp.) 21.8 8.33 13.7 4.97 2.61
Sasalit [Teijmanniodendron ahernianum (Merr) Bkh.] 31.3 9.72 21.60 10.2 3.38
Yahl (Shorea spp.) 24.5 9.78 15.8 6.27 249

II. Moderately High Strength Group

Antipolo (Arthocarpus spp.) 186 5.35 10.8 3.90 2.06
Binggas (Terrninalia spp.) 18.9 6.57 11.4 3.27 2.24
Bokbok CXanthophyllum excelsum (Blume) Miq.) 18.1 6.36 11.3 3.41 2.18
Dao (Dracontomelon spp.) 16.2 5.43 9.44 2.27 1.92
Gatasan [Garcinia venulosa (Blanco) ChoisY1 20.8 6.84 13.5 3.52 2.36
Ouijo (Shorea spp.) 21.8 8.47 13.2 4.26 2.40
Kamagong (Diospyros spp.) 20.9 7.20 11.7 439 2.47
Kamatog [Erythrophloeum densiflorum (Elm) Merr) 19.0 7.56 ILl ;1.95 2.35
Katmon (Dillenia spp) 18.8 6.82 11.9 4.84 2.29
Kato (Amoora spp.) 184 8.04 10.6 3.46 1.96
Lomarau (Swintorua foxworthyi Elm.) 19.8 7.92 11.8 2.98 2.18
Mahogany, Big-leafed (Swintonia macrophylla King) 16.5 4.66 10.5 3.83 2.71
Makaasim (Sysygium nitidum Benth) 20.5 6.72 11.4 3.70 lAO
Maiakauayan [Decusocarpus philippinensis (Foxw.) de Laub1 18.9 6.66 11.12 2.32 2.14
Narra (Pterocarpus indicus WiUd) 18.0 5.94 11.4 3.07 1.91
Puhutan (Mangilera spp.) 16.6 6.53 10.0 2.50 2.05

III. Medirun Strength Group

Apitong Oipterocarpus spp.) 16.5 7.31 9.56 2.20 1.73
Bagtikan [Parashorea malaanonan (Bianco) Merr.] 16.6 6.48 9.89 2.33 1.82
Dangkalan (Calophyllum spp.) 16.3 6.38 9.20 2.48 1.98
Gisau (Canarium spp.) 14.3 5.33 8.16 1.99 1.90
Lanutan-bagyo [Gonystylus macrophyllum (miq.) Airy Shaw] 15.0 6.06 8.96 2.02 1.84
Lauan (Shorea spp.) 13.9 5.83 8.18 1.72 1.48
Malaanonang (Shorea spp.) 13.8 5.41 8.54 1.96 1.59
Maiasaging (Agiaia spp.) 16.8 5.94 9.51 2.92 1.85
Malugai (pametia spp.) 15.4 6.30 9.33 3.07 2.07
Miau (Dysoxylum spp.) 15.7 6.50 K83 2.78 2.06
Nato (PaLaquium spp.) 16.2 5.56 9.17 2.33 1.98
Pa10sapis (Anisoptera spp,) 13.8 5.98 8.38 2.73 1.68
Pine (pinus spp.) 14.7 6.66 8.29 1.88 1.56
Salakin (Aphanarnixis spp.) 15.7 5.67 8.83 2.94 1.88
Vidallanutan [Hibiscus campylosiphon Turcz. vat. glabrecens

(liar. Ex. Peri.:.) 1

19.5 5.83 8.54 2.65 2.39

IV. Model1lteiy Low Strength Group

Almaciga [Agathis dammara (Lamb.) Rilh.] 11.8 5.47 6.27 1.44 1.47
Bayok (Pterospermmn spp.) 12.6 4.75 7.33 1.30 1.20
Lingo-lingo (Vitex tnrczaninowii Merr.) 13.2 4.13 6.85 2.00 1.66
Mangasinoro (Shorea spp.) 12.8 5.36 7.46 1.97 1.44
Raintree [Samanea saman (Jacq.) Merr.] 11.9 2.75 7.23 3.32 2.07
Yemane (Gmelina arborea R. Br.) 12.6 409 7.87 HO 1.%
~
I

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WOOD 6-33

Tahle6.1 (Continued)

J3"1o Stress Gra~

~-
Spedes Bending and Modulus ot", Compression Compression Shear
(Common and Botanical Names) tension ela.~ticity in paranel to perpendicular parallel to
parallel to bending grain to grain grain
i 2r8in
I
(1) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
I
I
1000
MPa MPa MFa MPa MPa
I. Hill.h Strength Group
Agoho (Casuarina equisetirolia Forst) 20.7 6.47 11.4 4.65 2.32
Liusin ll'arinari corymbosa (Blume) Miq.l 19.7 7.37 12.3 3.39 2.08
Malabayahas (Tristania spp.) 22.6 6.53 12.5 6.85 2.38
Manggachapui (Horea spp) 20.3 7.58 12.6 4.75 2.19
Molayc (Vitex parvitlora .fUSS) 18.9 5.15 12.J 5.00 2.27
Narig (Vatica spp.)
17.2 6.56 10.8 3.92 2.06
I, Sasalit [Tcijrnanniodcndrnn ahernianum (Mcrr) Bi;h.J

Yakal (Shorca spp.)

24.7
19.3
7.65
7.70
17.0
12.0
8.07
4.94
2.67
1.96

II. Moderately Hill.h Strength Group

I Antipol0 (Arthocarpu~ spp.)
Hinggas (Tcrrninalia spp.)

14.7
14.9
4.21
5.17
8.53
8.98
307
2.57
1.62
177
Eo!..h,)!" (Xanthopln'Uumexcdsum (Blume) Miq.]
14.3 5.01 8.90 2.68 1.72
Dan (Dracontnmcloll spp.)
12.8 4.28 7.43 1.79 1.51
Galas"n [Garciniu n:nulosa (Blanco) Choisy]
16.4 5.39 10.6 2.77 1.86
Uuijo C:ihorea "pp)
17.1 6.67 10.4 3.35 1.89
Kamngong I ni(lsp~ Tns Spp)
16.6 5.67 9.21 3.46 1.95
Kamatog iFrvthrophlocmn densitlonun (Elm) Merr.l
15.0 5.95 8.79 3.11 1.85
Kalmon(Dillenia spp)
14.8 5.37 9.38 3.81 1.80
Kaltl U\moom spp.)
14.5 6.33 IU4 2.73 1.54
Lomuruu (S~inhmia ()"worthYl Elm.) 15.6 6.24 9.30 2.34 1.71
Mahogany. Big-leafed (Swintonia rnacrophylla King)
130 3.67 8.24 301 2.13
Makaasim (S\'S\'gium nili<.lum Benth)
16.1 5.29 8.95 2.92 1.89
Malukaul1vun Il)<:cllsOcm1)lL~ phihppincnsis (Foxw.) <.lc l.ullh.1
14.9 5.24 8.79 1.83 1.69
Nurra (Plewcarpu.s indicus Will<.l)
14.2 4.68 8.97 2.42 1.51
PuhUlan (Mangilem spp.!
13.1 5.15 7.88 1.97 1.61

1II. Medium Strength Group I 1.36

Apitong Dipl,-,rocarplls spp.) 13.0 5.76 7.53 1.73
Baglikun (pamshorea malaanonan (Blanco) l\1tl'TT I \3.1 5.10 7.79 1.84 1.43
Dangkalan (Calophyllmn spp.) 12.8 503 7.24 1.96 1.56
OiS<1U (Canarium spp.) 11.2 4.20 6.43
I 1.56 1.49
Lanulan-bagyolGonystylus macroph\lIum (miq.) Air}' Shawl 11.8 4.77 7()(i 1.59 1.45
LawHl (Shorea spp.) 10.9 4.59 6.44 1.35 1.17
Malaunonang (Shorea spr.) Ill.'! 4.26 6.72 1.54 125
l\1alasaging. (Aglai spp.) 13.3 , 4.08 7.49 2.30 146
Malugai (p()lllclia spp.) 12.1 4.% 7.35 2.42 1.03
Miau (Dys,)xylum spp.)
12.3 5.12 6.96 2.19 1.62
Nato (palaql1ilUn spp.)
12.7 4.38 7.22 184 1.56
Palosapis (Anisoptera spr.)
10.9 4.71 6.60 2.15 1.33
Pine ( Pinus spp.!
11.6 5.24 6.53 1.48 1.23
Salakin (AphunamJ"l~ 'pp.)
12.4 I 4.47 (91) 2.32 IAR
Vl<.lallanutan [llihi,cl1:; cumpylo"iphon Tnre? \ aT. glnhrccen"

(I'lar Ex. Perk.) J 1.5 4 4 ..59 6.73 2.09 1.88

IV. Moderatcl~' Low Strength Group I

Almaciga [Agatlw; dU1l111IDr<1 (] .amh.) l~ ilh.} l),~6 4.10 4'M I 1.13 1.16
Bayok (l'lcrot>pemHlIll 'PI'. I 'J <)4 ".74 5.7R t03 0.95
! .ingo-ling,o !Vilex [[Irezunino\\ ii M~rr.1 1t!.4 3.2) 539 1.53 L31
Mangasinoro (Shorea <pp. ) i'.'.O 422 5.f{7 1.55 1.14
Raintrce ISarnanea ,aman (.lacy.) Merr.1 937 2.1(, 5.70 2.61 1.63
YCl1wm: (l imdinH "rhorea RIlL) q .}{\
i ~ 22 , (,20 2.68 1.55
I ! i
--.- ---... '_W' _

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

6-34 WOOD

Table 6.1 (Continued)

Species
(Common and Botanical Names)
II
I
Bcndingand
teadon I M~dulus ofl Compression l
50% Stress Grade

elasticity in , parallel to

Compression
perpendicular
c:---
Shear
parallel to
parallel to I bending I g.....in i
to grain grain
-- .. I grain
j ! I
._M_
(I) (12) (13) (14) I (15) I (16)
I
MPa
1000

MPa
MPa
I l\,iPa Ml'a
I. High Strength Group I
Agoho (Casuarina equiselifolia Fmst)
Liusin [Parinari corymbnsa iBltune) Miq.1 16.4 5.14 9.06 II 3.6<) 184
Malabayabas (Tristania spp.) 15.6 5.R; 9376 2.69 L65
Manggachapui (Hopea spp.) 17.9 5.19 9390 5.44 /.89
Molave (Vitex parvitlora Ju:;s.) 16.1 6.02 10.0 3.77 1.74
Narig (Vatica spp.) 15.0 4.09 %0 3.96 1.80
Sasalit [TeijmaIIDiodendron ahernianum (Mcrr) Bkh.] 13.6 5.20 8.5') 3.11 1.63
GAO
Yakal (Shorea spp.) 19.6
\:)3
6.08
3.11
13.5
9.55 :i.92
2.l2
1.55
I
II. Moderately High Stre~th Group
Antipo\o (Arthocarpus spp.) \ Hi I 3.34 6.77 2.44 1.29
Binggas Crcrminalia spp.) 1\.8 4.11 7.13 2.04 1.40
Bokbok (Xanthophyilmn excelstun (Blume) Miq.1 1\.3 I 3.97 7.06 2.13 1.36
Dao O)raconlomelon spp.) 10.1 3.39 5.90 1.42 1.20
Gatasan IGarcilUa venulosa (Blanco) Choisy] 13.0 4.27 8A2 2.20 1.47
Uuijo (Shorea spp.) 13.6 5.30 8.22 2.66 L50
Kmnugong (Diospyros spp.) I:l.1 4.50 7.31 2.74 154
f
Kamatl1g [Ervlhropbloeum densifl('mm (Elm) Mcrr.]
119 4.72 6.98 2.47 1.47
Killmon (Dillenia spp)
J L7 4.26 7.44 3.03 1.43
Kalo (Amoora spp.)
11.5 5.02 6.62 i 2.17 L23
Lomarau (:'>winlonia foxworthyi Elm.)
12.4 4.95 7.3R 2.R6 1.36
Mahogany, Big-leafed (Swintonia macrophylla King.)
10.3 2.91 6.54 2.39 1.69
Makausim (Sysvgium nitidum lk'llth)
12.8 4.20 7.10 231 l.50
Malukm.lll\'un IDecusocarpus philippinensi~ (Fn~,\'.) de Laub. J
11.8 4.16 6.9R 1.45 IJ4
NtlITU (Pterocarpus indicus Wind)
11.2 3.71 712 I 1.92 1.20
Puhulan (Mangilera spp.l
lOA 4.08 6.25
i l.56 1.28

III. Medium Strength Group

Apilong DipterocarplL' spp.) IOJ 4.57 5.97 137 I.OR
Bag.tikan [paroshorea rnalaanonan (Blanco) Merr.) \0.4 40j 6.18 1.46 \.14
lYdngkalan (Calophyllum spp.) 10.2 3.99 5.75 155 l.24
(ii,;au (Canarium spp.) 8.93 3.33 5.10 1.24 l.IR
Lanulan-oollYo [G(myslylus rnacropbyllum (miq.) Airy Shawl 9.39 3.79 5.60 1.26 Ll5
I ~'llUlI1 (Shorea spp.) R.6R 3.64 5.11 1.07 0.93
Maluunonang (:'>horca spp.) 8.63 :1.38 534 12.3 0.99
Milia,aging (Aglaia spp.) 10.5 3.71 595 1.83 1.I6
Malugai (Pometia spp.) 9.62 3.94 5.83 1.92 1.30
Miau (l~'s()~'vlum spp.) 'i.go 4.0(, 5.52 1.74 L29
Nulo iPalaquiuIn spp.) 10.1 3.18 57. 14(; 124
l'alosapis (Ani~()ptcm sppJ R.65 3.73 5.24 1.70 1.05

Pinc{Pinus 'pp.) 9.1'.1 U6 5.18 U8

0.98
Siliakin (I\phanami,j, spp.) 9X' 3.54 55~ 1.84 UR
Vid"llanulun rHihiscll~ campylosiph(m Turcz. Hlr. glahrec~'O,
tHur. h.l'erk.) I 12.2 3.64 5.34 1.6(, L50

IV. M()de.....teI~ Low Strength Group

Almaci)!<l IAgathi,; dammara ILamb.) Rilh.1 735
7.8')
3.42 3.<)2 0.90 I
0.92
BaYl,k (I'lerll,;pcnnum 'pp.)
r.mg.o-Img,) (Vile, lun:zamno\\ 11 Merr.) R27
2 ~>7
-
4.58
,
O.Rl
- i (175
1.04
Mangasmoro (Shorca ~Pr) 7.'JR 4.6() 123 O')()

Rainlree ISamtlllC<l samail (Jacq.) Merr. J 7.43 4.52 2.07 l.](}

Ycmanc (imciinu urhorca R. Br.) 7.R6 4.92 2.13 1.23

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 6-35

Table 6.2 - GROtJPING OF SPECIES FOR DETERMINING ALLOWABLE LOADS FOR TIMBER JOINTS
,..--
I II III IV
Relative Relative Relative I, , Relative
Species Species Species Species
Density Density Density i Density
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

Malabayabas 0.90 Makaasim 0.74 Malugai 0.61 Lingo-lingo 0.48

Sasalit .90 Kamagong .72 Dangakalan .58 Raintree .48

Agoho .84 Ouijo .70 Apitong .57 Bayok .44

Limin .79 Binggas .70 Sa1akin .56 Ahnaciga .42

Yakal .76 Katmon .68 Pine .55 Manggasinoro .42

Narig .72 Gatasan .67 Lanutan-bagyo .53 Yemane .42

Manggachapui .71 Bok-bok .64 Miau .52

Molave .69 Kamatog .64 Palosapis .52

Lomarau .64 Ma\asaging .51

Kato .59 Vidal Lanutan .50

Pahutan .55 C'risau .50

Mahogany, big leaf .54 Nato .49

Antipolo .52 Bagtikan .44

Narra .52 Malaanonang .41

Malakauayan .50 Lauan

Dao .48
i

SOURCE: Philippine Timber Design Standards (J. E. Rocafort and J. 0. Siopongco)

November, 1991 (FPRDI Terminal Report)

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

6-36 WOOD

Table 6.3 - NAILING SCHEDULE

2-100
100 at 400 mm o.c.
3-100 400mm
2-l6d
end nail
16d at 600 mm o.c.
16d at 400 mm o.c.
8-J6d
3-8d
8d at 150 mm o.c.

100 at 400 mmo.c.

4-8d
3-16d

13 mm and less
15mm-19mm
22mm-25mm
29mm-32mm
Combination
19 mm and less
22mm-25mm
29mm-32mm

20mm

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WOOD 6-37

rlOTES FOR TABLE 6.3

, Common or box nails may be used except where ntherwise stated.
, Nails spaced at 150 mm on center at edges, 300 mm at intermediate SUpp"rts except 150 mm at all support. where spans are 1200 mm or me,re.
For nailing of wood slrucln,-..u
panel and particleboard diaphragms and shear walls, refer to Sections 614.3.3 and 61~.4. Nails ter wall sheathing may be common, box or casing.
3 Common or det,>nned shank.
'Common.
S Deformed shank,
6 Corrosion-resistant siding or casing nails conforming to the requirements of Section 6033.
7 Fasteners spaced 75 mm on center at ex1erior edges and 150 mm on center at intermediate supports.

'Corrosion-resistant roofing nails with II mm head and 38 mm length for 13 mm sheathing and 44 mm length for 20 mm sheathing confurmin!! to th~ rc<]uiromcnts
of Section 603.3.
Corrosion-resistant staples with nominal II mm crown 29 lum length lor 13 mm sheathing and 38 mm length tor 20 mm sheathing contenning to the requirement>
of Section 603.3.
'Panel supports at 400 mm (500 mm if strength axi. in the long direction of the panel, unless otherwi"" marked). Casing or finish nails spaced 150 mm on panel edges.
300 mm at intermediate supports.
11 Panel Sllpports at 600 mm. Casing or finish nails spaced 150 mm on panel edges, 300 mm at intermediate supports.

Table 6.4 - WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL ROOF SHEATHING NAILING SCHEDULE

ROOF FASTENING
2 3
NAILS
Fastening Schedule
(rnrn on center)
150 150
f--..--~~---'"c.---__I-""..--------__+-----~-----1-----------;--_.
150 150
150 150 100
300 I~ I~
""~-....."""'- ..--""""---"'.. '".-.+-.---.---"'---~-+-.~--.-.---:-"'--:;.---+----...--.--""---.~-+-.-.---.--.------+."'-~--"'."'.-."'"'--_.
150 150 150
300 300

, Applies only to mean roof heights up to 10500 mm. For mean roof height' over 10700 mm, the nailing shall be designed.
, The roof fastening zones are shown below:

. - . . 1200 mm

1500 rnrn (INCLUDING 300 mm.

-----T r--- OVERHANG)
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I
I
I
I
fj\ I
\.!J I
I
leD
I
I I I
I I
-/.------l-

ROOFRIIXlE

ROOF FASTENING ZONES

3 Edge spacing also applies over roof framing at gable-end walls.
4 Use 8d ring-shank nails in this zone if mean roof height is greater than 7500 mm.

National structural Code of the PbiJippines. Volmne 1

 6-38 WOOD

Table 6.5 - EXPOSED PLYWOOD PANEL SIDING

MINIMUM TIDCKNESS1 MINIMUM NUMBER OF PLIES STUD SPACING

PLYWOOD SIDING APPLIED DIRECTLY
TO STUDS OR OVER SHEATIDNG
9 = 3
13 = 4 600

I Thickness of grooved panels is measured at bottom of grooves.

"May he 600 mm if plywood siding applied with face grain perpendicular to studs or over one of the following: (I) 25 mm board sheathing, (2) 11 mm wood structural panel
sheathing or (3) 9 mm wood structural panel sheathing with strength a.xis (which is the long direction of the panel unless otherwise marked) of sheatllingperpendicular to studs.

Table 6.6 - WOOD SHINGLE AND SHAKE SIDE WALL EXPOSURES

1_'_' S~GLE OR SHAKE MAXIMUM WEATHER EXPOSURES <mm) !

Single-Coursing Double-Coursing
i Length and Type - r - - - - - - - - - - . - - r - - ...
No.1 No.2 No.1 No.2
400 = shingles j 188 188 .. _. 300 250 ..
450= shingles 212 212 350 275
GO mm shingles 288 288 400 350
1-'-----'
450 mm resawn shakes 188
---_._- - 350 -
1 - - . - -...- - - - -..-
i " '

,___450 mm ouu'e;" ':~: shakes 188

-~
- 400
---- -
600 mm resawn shakes
288 - 500 -

Table 6.7 -ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR EXPOSED PARTICLEBOARD PANEL SIDING

GRADE I STUD SPACING

MINIMUM TIDCKNESS
------------------Sidil;g . - - - -...
Exterior Ceilings and Soffits
Direct to Studs Continuous Support Direcllo Supports

-"'---"'--'"
M-I 400 16mm 9mm 9mm
..-- .......
...
M-S
--~.
"--~-'-'-'

M-2 --Exterior <Hue- 600 16mm 9mm 9mm

.----.. ..----------
I

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WOOD 6-39

Table 6.8 - HARDBOARD SIDING

MINIMAL FRAMING NAIL SPACING

I NAIL
Nominal (50mm x l00mm) SIZE 1,%
SIDING Thickness General Bracing Panels 3
I ~ .......
(mm) Maximum Spacing
_._!.:_.__~AP SIDING
Direct to Studs 9 400mmo.c. 8d 400 mrno.c. Not applicable
-~-~-.-".--.~~-------- .....
______ Over S~~thing ~ _ _._. 9 4oomrno.0. IOd 4oommo.c. Not applicable
~~QUARE EDGE P~.I- SIDING -.----.. ~

150 mrn 0.0. edges; 100 mrn o.c. edges;

Direct to Studs 9 6OOmmo.c. 6d 300 mm o.c. at 200mmo.c.
intermediate suPPOrts intermediate sUE:E2rts
---~-~-~-.-~-' ..--"~-----.-- ..
150 mID 0.0. edges; 100 mrn o.c. edges;
Over Sheathing 9 6OOmmo.o. 8d 300 mrn o.c. at 200nuno.c.
,~. ".".~ ____ .~_~4 ____ ___ interroedia te supports intermediate support:i._
..1,____!!fP~AP EDGE P~L SID~~ .
150 mm 0.0. edges; 100 nun o.c. edges;
Direct to Studs 9 400mmo.o. 6d
300 mm o.c. at 200 mrn o.c.
intennediate supports intermediate SU~_
:--_..
150 mm 0.0, edges; 100 mrn 0.0. edges;
Over Sheathing 9 400 nun 0.0. 8d 200mmo.o.
300 mrn 0.0. at
I intermediatc supports intermediate supports

INails shall be corrosion resistant in accordance with Section 619.

2 Minimum acceptable nail dimensions (mm).

L
Shank diameter
Head diameter

3When used to comply with Section 620.103.

Table 6.9 - ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR LUMBER FLOOR AND ROOF SHEATIDNG 1,1

~-------rl- __-. -------::c-::::::-:= ==-=-==::-====-=-=~--:-~:--::==:-:-:--:::--=--:--==----------,

Perpendicu..la,r_t.o_-"-''--____ ....._ _ _---1I--_ __

SPAN ----S;.raced Dry3 ----

600
400
.. _-_
19 .. - - --\---_. -------_.-._---' 20
17

'Installation details shall conform to Section 620.8.1 and 620.1 1.1 for floor and roof sheathing, respectively.
Z Floor or roofsheathing conforming with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of Section 620.1 0.11.
, Maximum 19 percent moisture content.

National 'Structural Code of the Philippines, Vois.me 1

 6-40 WOOD

Table 6.10 - ALLOWABLE SPANS AND LOADS FOR WOOD STRUCfURAL PANEL SHEATHING AND SINGLE-FLOOR
GRADES CONTINUOUS OVER TWO OR MORE SPANS WIT STRENGTH AXIS PERPENDICULAR TO SUPPORTS 1,2

:--SHEATHING GRADES FLOOR'

L_p!~~~~r~!l Ra~~ Panel Thickness r-----::-::-:::-- Maxim~_Span \r~t Maximum Span
(mm) With FAige Without Edge (rnm:l
RooJIFloor Span
Su rt" Su rt
12/0 8 300 300
1-----1-6/~0----+---~8:-,-:9-------400- 400
+---------------I--------------~----------------r_---------------_+
20/0 500 500

2410 600

24116 600 600

32/16 800 700
f------40-~12:-0-----i----::-:::--:-:---:'-:---::-::---t---- i-000---r-------- ------+-------------+--------- .--- -+-.. ....-.---
800
~-.--.-------.___I----'-:--'--::-~-___I---------t-------.
48/24 .... __-+____-'-__c_____+____ __
._.._._._.__ 1200

_______ 900
I______..-.----... +.-..-.------.-.--.... ..j--.-
54/32 25 1350 1000

-------_.-+-----.!_-----+---
60/48 O
_ _-'---::-_--= __ . _...L.._ _ _ _ _ _+
22, 25,_2_9_--l_ _ _1_50_0___--'-_ _ _lk_'O_ ___12:....0_0-:-_-1
SINGLE-FLOOR GRADES ROOF'
FLOOR'
Panel Span Rating
Maximum Span (mm) LoadS (kilone\'<ton per square meter)
... _.-..--L~---. Panel Thickness Maximwn Spall
(rnm) Withf..dge Without Edge (mml
Roof/Floor Span Total Load Live Load
Su rt Su rt
600 600 1.92 400
~------=----------l'-----::_::'__---'___::---I-------- ---.-------+- . - - -2.40
- -...-----1----.----..-.-...-.-.-
800 800 1.92 1.44
-f---------------r------ ---..--.---+-
]200 900 1.68 1.20
f-..-~------------t---"-:----::---t-----::1200 1000 2.40 1.92
-",----_... ---" ..
1500 ____ ~ __________
1200 2.40
~__________ _L-________
2.40 . . __________ ~ ~

conforn~ing with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of Section fi.ll_
under live land plus dead loud, 'f".
under live load only.
tongue,and-groo've
or shall be supported with blocking unless 6 mm minimum thickness underlayment or 38 mm of appr<wed cellular lIr
lightweight concrete is placed or floor is 19 mm wood strip_
Allowable uniform load based on deflection of '. '60 of span is 4.79 kNtm' except the span
mtin'./. of 1200 mm on center is based on a tOlllllnad of 3.11 kNim.

5 Allo';able load at maximum spnn.

Tongue-and-groove edges, panel edge clips (one midw.), between each support excepi two equally spaced hetween supports 1200 mm nn center). lumber blocking. Or (llher.
Only lumber blocking shall satisfy blocked diaphragms requirements.

7 For 13 mm panel, maximum span sh.n be 600 mm_

May be 600 mm on center where 19 mm wood strip tlooring is installed at right angles tn joist.

, May be 600 mm on center tbr floors where 38 mm of cellular or lightweight concrete is applied orer the panels_

Table 611- ALLOWABLE LOAD FOR WOOD STRtlCTURAL PANEL ROOF SHEATHING CONTINUOtlS OVER TWO OR
MORE SPANS AND STRENGTH AXIS PARALLEL TO SUPPORTS
(Plywood structural panels are five--ply, five-layer unless otherwise noted)l,2

PANEL GRADE THICKNESS (mm) MAXIMUM SPAN (mm)

Li\'c
Structural 1 II 600 0.958
12 600
13 600
16 600 3.353
18, 19 600 4.311
Other Grades Covered in II 400 1'.12
.. 240
UBC Standard 23-2 or 23-3 12 600 i!.958 11(1
13 hOO 1.10 1.44
-
. .~- ._.-< -_.
()OO 2.iu3
600

'Uniform Edges shall be blo"ked with lumhcr C'r othet "l'l'rn\ed 1\ r"
of edge supports.

3 For composite and four-ply plywood sttllcturnl panel. load shall be reduced by 0.72 kN nc

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WOOD

Table 6.12 - ALLOWABLE SPAN FOR WOOD STRUcrURAL PANEL COMBINATION SUBFLOOR-UNDERLAYMENT
(SINGLE FLOOR)I,l

Panels Continuous over Two or More Spans and Strength Axis Perpendicular to Supports

I 13 16 19

=~- - -s-p-a-~-:-~-m-'~4~ -- - tr- - - ~- - ~- -4-0- -;-:-~-.-~-=-~- - - - -:r- - - ~ - -5-=-o-o-~-~-o

--=-.c-=-.--------- :~-.=--~=.-~6=-0=-~=-~=-.c=-.=- ~=--~=-_~:t- ~=- -~-=-~=-8=-0=-0-=-o-=-.c=-.=- ~=-=- - =- t_- ~-~~,~~:-~-j
, Spans limited to value shown because of possible effects of concentrated loads. Allowable unifonn loads based on deflection of '/'.0 of span is 4.79 kN/m'. except allowable total
unifonn load for 29 mm wood structural panels over joists spaced 1200 mm on center is 3.11 kN/m 2 Panel edges shall have approved tongue-and-groove joints or shall be
supported with blocking, unless 6 mm minimum thickness underlayment or 38 mm of approved cellular or lightweight concrete is placed over the subfloor, or finish floor is 19
mm wood strip.
2 Floor panels confonning with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of Section 611.
3 Applicable to all grades of sanded exterior-type plywood. See UBC Standard 23-2 for plywood species groups.
4 Applicable to underlayment grade and C-C (plugged) plywood. and single Hoor grade wood structural panels.

Table 6.13 - ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR PARTICLEBOARD SUBFLOOR AND COMBINED SUBFLOOR

UNDERLAYMENT 1, 1

GRADE THICKNESS (mm)

I______MAX!_MUM S!,_A~~~.Q~_S!!!!'5>~!~~!!l)~______._
I Subfloor Combined Subfloor-Underlayment'"

2-M-W _._ . . _____:~_____ l 19 I

._~~
600
___=_--___-_~~-_-_4_0_0_-==_=~-_--.~
600
__

2-M-3 19 I 500 500

, All panels are continuous over two or more spans.

2 Floor sheathing confonning with this table shall be deemed to meet the design criteria of Section 6.11.

3 Uniform deflection limitation: '/,.. of the span under 4.79 kN/m' minimum load.

Edges shall have tongue-and-groove joints or shall be supported with blocking. The tongue-and-groove panels arc installed with the long dimension perpendicular to supports.
, A tinish wearing surface is to be applied to the top of the panel.

Table 6.14 - MAXIMUM DIAPHRAGM DIMENSION RATIOS

HORIZONTAL DIAPHRAGMS
-.
VERTICAL D1APHRAGl\'!~ __
MATERIAL Maximum Span-Width Ratios Maximum Height-Width Ratios
1. Diagonal sheathing, conventional _. 3:1 1: I'
-----------
2. Diagonal sheathing, special 4:1 2:e -_.
3. Wood structural panels and particleboard, nailed all edges 4:1 2:12 -_._---
4. Wood structural panels and particleboard, blocking omitted at 3
4:1
intermediate joints.

, In Seismic Zone 2, the maximum ratio may be 2: I.

2 In Seismic Zone 2, the maximum ratio may be 3'.';:1.
) Not permitted. .

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 6-42 WOOD

Table 6.15 - LIMITS OF DEFECfS BY GRADE IN JOISTS AND PLANKS FOR SEASONED WOOD

Stress Grade Stress Grade Stress Grade

Kind of Defeds 800/. 63% 50/0

A- NATURAL DEFECTS

1. Wonn holes, average diameter (maximum

allowable size in rom)

a. Individual Not permitted 2 6

b. Quaritity limi tation Not permitted Not clustered Not clustered

2. Slope of Grain (lTIllximum variation in rom

from longitudinal axis per 300 rom within 18 25 32
middle half of length)

3. Checks and Shakes

a. Size of each check and shake, or if in

combination, the sum of the sizes of
ali checks and shakes within middle V. ofthiekness Y.i of thickness 3/8 of thickness
half of depth of thc piece shall not
exceed:

End penetration: Checks and splits at

b.
the middle half of the depth of the
piece shall not extend a distance V. of thickness V. of thickness %of thickness
_____________~~~(ea~t=er~~~(ea~t=er~than~~:~___________1--------------------_+------------________~------------------~

Knoo (Maximum allowable size of individual knot III Narrow face Along Narrow face Along Narrow face Along
rom*) 011edge of center line on edge of eenter line on edge of center line
wide face of wide face wide face of wide tlICe \\ide face ofwidetace
within the within the \\~thin the
middle third middle third middle third
oflength of oflength of oflength of
piece piece piece

Nominal width of lace, in rom

50 6 12 18
75 12 18 25
100 18 18 25 30 38 38
125 25 25 30 38 50 50
150 30 30 45 50 60 60
200 35 38 50 60 70 75
250 38 50 55 80 80 100
300 45 55 65 90 90 110
350 48 65 70 100 95 125
400 50 70 75 100 100 125 I
450 andover 50 75 75 100 100 125

*The S1?.e of knots on the narrow lAce within the middle third of length may he increased proportionately towards the end, or tlte piece of n,ice tbe size permitted on the narrow
face but not to exceed that allowable along the center line of the wide face. The .ize of knots on the edge of wide tace within the middle third of length may he increased
proportionately towards the center of the wide laceand towards the ends of the piece In the size pcmlitted alnng the center line orthe wide lace. The ,UIIl of the sizes or all knnts
in any 150 mm oflength of the piece shall not exceed nvice the maximum permissible size ofknnts. Two knots ofnmxirnunl ,hall not he allo\\ed in the same 15001111 of length
on any face. Clu~1er knot. and knots in group shall not be permitted.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WOOD 6-43

Table 6.1S ( continued)

r Stre~. Grade Stress Grade Stress Grade
I Kind of Defects 80% 63% SO/.
13. HANDLINe;. lvlANlWACTURE OR
PROCESSING DEFECTS

L Want: (maximum allowable size in mm)

Nominal lace dimension in mm

50
.' 12
12

75
3 12
12

100
r; ]5
15

125
{, 15
15

ISO
10 20
20

200
12 ""
k" 25

250
15 25
30

300
18 28
38

350
20 38
45

400
25 45
50

450 and OYcf

30 50
55

2. Tom grain (allowable depth in mm) 2 2

;\

3. Skips, allowable size not to exceed:

surface area
(Width mm x length) width x ]00 \\idth x 100
"idth x 100

Depthmm I 2
3

Quantity I skip per 5 m or shorter I skip per 5 m or Rhorter

len len th

Table 6.16 - WOOD SCREWS-ALLOWABLE LOADS IN SEASONED WOOD-NORMAL DURATION

Screw Size Withdrawal Load from Side Grain per 25 mm Lateral Load in Side Grain, (N)

I
of Penetration of Threaded Portion, (N)

Species Group Species Group

Gauge Diameter I

(mm) I II III
IV
I
II
III
I
IV
4

24
9.449 2695 j 1985
1370
950
3100
2665
2190
1825

20
8.128 2315
1710
1180
820
2295
1970
1620
1350

18
7.468 12130
1570
1085
750
1935
1665
1370
1140

16
6.807 I 1940
1430
985
685
1610
1380
1135
945

14
6.147 1750
1290
890
620
1315
1130
925
770

12
5.486 1565
1155
795
550
1045
900
740
615

10
4.826 1375
1015
700
485
810
695
570
475

9
4.496 1280
945
650
450
700
605
495
415

8
4.166 1185
875
605
420
605
520
425
355

7
3.835 1095 805
555
385
510
440
360
300

6
... 3.505 1000 1 735
510
355 i 425
365
300
250

SOURCE: PhlhpplOe Timber dcs1l!1l Standards (J. E. Rocafort and J. O. SlOpongco)

November,I991 (FPRDI Tenninal Report)

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 WOOD

Table 6.17 - ALLOWABLE LOADS IN kN ON ONE BOLT IN SEASONED WOOD LOAD AT BOTH ENDS (DOUBLE

SHEAR) NORMAL DURATION

SPEOES GROUP (Refer to listing in Table 6.2)

Length of Diameferof I D m IV
Bolt in Bolt
Main d Parallel to I Perpendi-
ParaDelto Petpendi- ParaDel to Petpendi- Parallel to Perpendi-
Memher (mm)
Grain cularto Grain cularto Grain cularto Grain cularto
L
Grain Grain Grain Grain
(mm)
P Q P Q P Q P Q
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
I
J3 7.08 3.76 4.86 1.98 4.20 2.07 3.26 1.82
16 8.75 4.19 6.01 2.21 5.20 2.30 4.01 2.02
40 20 11.0 4.85 7.55 2.56 6.53 2.67 5.02 2.35
22 12.1 5.04 8.30 2.66 7.19 2.77 5.52 2.43
25 13.7 5.47 9.43 2.89 8.16 3.01 6.27 2.64

13 8.38 4.70 5.75 2.48 4.98 2.59 3.99 2.27

16 10.8 5.23 7.42 2.76 6.43 2.88 5.00 2.53
50 20 13.7 6.07 9.38 3.20 RI2 3.34 6.27 2.93
22 15.1 6.30 10.3 3.32 8.95 3.46 6.90 3.04
25 17.2 6.83 11.8 3.61 10.2 3.76 7.84 3.30

13 9.29 6.11 6.38 3.23 5.52 3.36 4.68 2.95

16 13.0 I 6.80 8.95 3.59 7.74 3.74 6.29 3.29
65 20 17.4 7.89 11.9 4.16 10.3 4.34 8.10 3.84
22 19.3 8.19 13.2 4.32 11.4 4.50 8.97 3.%
25 22.2 8.88 15.2 4.69 13.2 4.89 10.2 4.29

13 9.35 6.84 6.42 3.61 5.56 3.76 4.79 3.30

16 13.8 7.85 9.48 4.14 8.21 4.32 6.85 3.79
I 75 20 19.4 9.10 13.3 4.81 11.5 5.01 9.22 4.40
22 21.9 9.45 15.0 4.99 13.0 5.20 10.2 4.56
25 25.5 10.2 17.5 5.41 15.2 5.64 118 4.95

13 9.41 7.14 6.45 3.77 5.59 3.93 4.84 3.45

16 14.1 8.37 9.66 4.42 8.36 4.61 7.09 4.05
80 20 20.3 9.71 14.0 5.13 12.1 5.34 9.77 4.69
22 22.9 10.1 15.7 5.32 13.6 5.54 10.9 4.87
25 26.9 10.9 18.4 5.77 16.0 6.01 12.5 5.28

13 9.39 7.42 6.44 3.92 5.58 4.08 4.84 3.59

16 14.3 9.20 9.79 4.86 8.48 5.06 7.28 4.45
90 20 21.3 10.9 14.6 5.77 12.7 6.04 10.5 5.28
22 24.9 11.3 17.1 5.98 14.8 6.24 12.0 5.48
25 29.4 12.3 20.2 6.49 17.5 6.77 13.9 5.94
13 9040 7.40 6.45 3.91 5.58 4.07 4.84 3.58
16 14.2 9.84 9.78 5.19 8.47 5.41 7.34 4.76
100 20 22.0 12.1 15.1 6.41 13.1 6.68 ILl 5.87
22 25.9 12.6 17.8 6.65 15.4 7.35 12.8 6.45
25 31.8 13.7 21.8 7.21 18.9 7.52 15.3 6.60

13 9.38 6.92 6.44 3.65 5.57 3.81 4.83 3.34

16 14.2 10.1 9.77 5.33 8.46 5.56 7.33 4.89
125 20 22.3 14.3 15.3 7.53 13.2 7.85 11.5 6.89
22 26.90 15.3 18.5 8.10 16.0 8.44 13.8 7.42
25 34.4 11.1 23.6 9.02 20A 9.40 11.3 8.26
28 41.8 18.5 28.7 9.78 24.8 10.2 20.5 8.95

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WOOD 6-45

Table 6.17 (continued)

SPEOES GROUP (Refer to listing in Table 6.2)
Length of Diameter of I II ill IV
Bolt in Bolt
Main
Member
d
<mm)
Parallel to
Grain
Perpendi-
cWarto
Parallel to
Grain
I Perpendi-
eIllar to
Parallel to
Grain
Perpendi
cWarto
~ Parallel to
Grain
Perpendi-
eIllar to
L
(mm)
Grain
I Grain
i
Grain
I
Grain

! P Q P Q P Q P Q
(4) I
(I) (2) (3) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (1O}
I
I3 9.38 6.51 6.44 3.44 5.57 3.58 4.83 3.14
]6 14.2 9.85 9.76 5.20 845 5.42 7.33 4.76
140
I 20
22
22.2
27.0
14.8
164
15.2
18.5
7.79
8.65
13.2
16.0
!U2
9.01
11.4
13.9
7.14
7.92
i
25 34.8 18.7 23.9 9.88 20.7 10.3 17.7 9.04
28 43.1 20.8 29.6 11.0 25.6 11.4 21.7 10.0

16 14.2 9.59 9.76 5.06 8.45 5.28 7.33 4.64

20 223 14.7 15.3 7.78 13.2 8.11 11.5 7.13
150 22 26.9 16.7 18.5 8.84 16.0 9.21 13.8 8.09
25 34.6 19.7 23.8 104 20.6 10.9 17.8 9.54
28 43.5 21.9 29.9 11.6 25.9 12.1 22.1 10.6

16 14.2 8.84 9.72 4.66 8.42 4.86 7.32 4.27 I

20 22.2 14.1 15.2 7.45 13.2 7.76 114 6.82
180 22 26.9 16.6 18.5 8.75 16.0 9.12 13.9 8.01
25 34.8 20.8 23.9 11.0 20.6 11.4 17.9 10.0
28 43.7 24.6 30.0 13.0 25.9 13.5 I 22.5 11.9
i

16 14.2 8.59 9.75 4.54 8.44 4.73 7.30 4.15

20 22.2 13.8 15.3 7.30 13.2 7.61 114 6.69
190 22 26.9 16.3 18.5 8.63 16.0 899 13.9 7.90
25 34.8 20.7 23.9 10.9 20.7 11.4 179 10.0
28 43.6 25.0 29.9 13.2 25.9 13.8 22.5 121

16 14.2 837 9.90 4.42 844 4.61 730 4.05

20 22.2 13.5 15.2 7.13 13.2 7.40 11.4 6.50
200 22 26.8 16.1 18.4 8.48 16.0 8.84 13.9 7.77
25 34.6 i 20.5 23.8 10.8 20.0 IL3 17.8 9.91
28 43.6 25.3 29.9 13.3 25.9 J3.9 22.4 12.2

20 22.2 12.7 15.2 6.69 13.2 6.97 11.4 6.12

22 26.8 15.1 184 7.98 15.9 8.32 13.9 7.31
230 25 34.7 19.7 23.8 104 20.6 10.9 17.9 9.54
28 43.5 24.8 29.9 13.\ 25.9 13.7 22.5 12.0
32 56.8 31.9 39.0 16.8 33.8 17.5 29.3 15.4 i

~2W
20 22.2 12.4 15.2 6.54 13.2 6.81 11.4 5.98 -J
I
22 26.8 14.8 18.4 7.83 16.0 8.15 13.8 7.16
25
28
32
34.7
43.6
57.0
19.4
24.6
31.9
23.8
29.9
39.1
10.2
13.0
16.8
I 20.6
25.9
33.9
10.7
13.5
17.5
17.'i
22.5
29.4
9.37
11.9
15.4

1
i
i

22 26.8 14.4 18.4 7.61 15.9 7.93 13.R 6.97

255 25 34.7 18.8 23.8 9.93 20.6 10.4 17.9 9.09
28 43.5 24.0 29.8 12.7 25.8 13.2 22.4 J 1.6
32 56.7 31.5 38.9 16.6 33.7 17.3 29.2 15.2
i I I I
"jl'
L:. 25
I
34.6
I 20.6
I
9.94 17.\J In3
i
I I III
28
32
43.4
56.9
23.0 29.9
390~~~~
I 953
12.1
I 25.8
33.8
12.6
17.0
22.4
293 I 14.9 I
I 30.8
I I .L- i

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 6-46 WOOD

Table 6 17 (continued)
----1
SPECIES GROUP (Refer to listing in Table 6.2)
Diameter of I II III rv
I Bolt

i
d
(mm) Parallel to I Perpendl- Parallel to Perpendl- Parallel to Perpendi- Parallel to Pcrpcndi
Grain I cular to Grain cular to Grain cularto Grdin cular to
Grain
I
Grain Grain
I Grain

P Q P Q I P Q I P Q

,:
!
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) ( 10)

I 25 34.7 17.8 23.8

I
9.39 20.6 9.79 17.9 8.60
290 28
32
43.5
56.&
22.7
30A
I 29.9
39.0
I 12.0
16.1
25.9
33.7
12.5
16.7
22.+
29.3
11.0
14.7
I
I

I
25 34.7 17.3 23.8 9.13 20.6 9.51 17.& 8.36
22.2 29.8 I
305 28
32
43.4
56.8 29.8 39.0
11.7
15.8
25.8
33.8
12.2
16.4 I 22.4
29.3
10.7
14.4
i

Table 6.18 - ALLOWABLE LOADS IN SEASONED WOOD (NORMAL DURATJON) FOR ONE SHEAR-PLATE UNIT AND

BOLT IN SINGLE SHEAR

Loaded parallel to grain Loaded perpendicular to grain (90;

I diam. (0; I
E.
Shear Bolt Number Net Minimu
Plate offaee dUeknessof med~ Allowable load per Allowable Load per
diam. (mm) ofpiccc lumber distance co~or unit and bolt distance (mm) eo~or unit and bolt (kN)
(mm) with <mm) (mm) (kN)
oonDeC-
tors of Speeies Group Unloaded I ! Speeies Group
same edge i Loaded-
I II III (minimum) ed~
I II III
bolt

1 40minimwn 14.01 11.70 10.10 45 minimum 8.140 6.761 5.872

70 or more 9.830 8.184 7.072
65 20 45 45
2 40 minimum 10.90 9.074 7.828 45 minimum 6.316 5.293 4.537
70 or more 7.651 6.361 5.471
45 or more 7.W5 6.405 5.516
50 13.26 11.03 9519 70 or more 9.296 7.740 6.672

67 & thicker 14.01 11.70 10.10

45 minimum
70 or more
8.140
9.830
I 6.761
!U84
5.871
7.072
1 40 minimum 19.75 16.46 14.19 70 minimum 11.480 9563 8.229
95 or more \3.830 11.52 9.964
70 minimum 12.280 10.23 8.807
. 45 & thicker 2J.l7 17.66 15.21 95 or more 14.810 12.37 10.680
I 100 20 70 70
I 2 45 minimum 14.10 11.74 10.14 70 minimum 8.184 6.805 5.871
95 or more 9.875 8.229 7.117
50 15.75 13.12 11.30 50 70 minimum 9.118 7.606 6.583
95 or more 11.030 9.163 7.917
70 minimum 10.720 8.940 7.695
66 18.46 15.39 13.25 95 or more 12.940 10.760 9.296
70 minimum 11.650 9.697 8.362
75 20.10 16.72 14.46 95 or more 14.060 11.740 10.100
70 minimum 12.280 10.230 8.807
90 & thicker 21.17 17.66 15.21 95 or more 14.810 12.370 10.680
1 40 minimum 1957 16.46 14.19 70 minimum 11.480 9.563 8.229
95 or more 13.830 11.520 9.964
70 minimum 12.010 10.230 8.807

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 Table 6.18 ( Continued)
6-47

l
Loaded parallel to grain Loaded perpendicular to grain (90)
Shear Bolt Number Net Minimu (0">
Plate diaJR. offace thkknessof medge Allowable load per Allowable Load per
diam. (mm) of piece lumber distance connector unit and bolt Edge distance (mm) connector unit and bolt (kN) i
(mm) with (mm) (mm) (kN)
connec
tors of Species Group Unloaded Species Group
I
i same edge Loaded-
I II III edge I II III I
bolt i (minimum)

100 22 45 & thicker 21.17 17.66 15.21 95 or more 14.810 12.370 1O.6RO
70 70
2 45 minimum 14.10 11.74 10.]4 70 minimum 8.]84 6.805 5.918
95 or more 9.875 8.229 7.]]7
50& thicker 16.19 ]3.12 11.30 70 minimum 9.1]8 7.606 6.583
95 or more 11.030 9.163 7.917
66 minimum 18.46 15.39 13.26 70 minimum 10.720 8.940 7.695
95 or more \2.940 10.760 9.296
75 & thicker 20.10 16.72 14.46 70 minimum 11.650 9.697 8.362
95 or more 14.060 11.740 10.100
90 minimum 15.21 70 minimum 12.280 10.230 8.807

I !
i
l i
95 or more 14.810
I 12.370 1O.6R

Table 6.19 - ALLOWABLE LOADS IN SEASONED WOOD (NORMAL DURATION) FOR ONE TOOTHED-RING UNIT AND
DOLT IN SINGLE SHEAR

Loaded parallel to grain Loaded perpendicular to grain ~~

Toothed Bolt No.. of Net Minimu (0")
RinK diam. fa~of thickness medge
Allowa~le Load per Allowable Load per
diam.
(mm)
(mm) piece
with
oflumbcr
(mm)
distance
(mm) connector anit and bolt
(kN)
Edge distance (rom)
I
I
connector unit and bolt (kN)
connec
-ton of Specics Group Unloaded Species Group

same Loaded-
edge
bolt
I i II III
I
(minimu edge I I
I II I III
m) i i

I 25 5.338 4.804 4.181 3.203

minimum
32 minimum

50 or more
3558

4.048 3.647
2.758

3.158
i
i
40& 5.871 5.293 4.581 32 minimum 3.914 3.514 I 3.069
thicker !
50 or more 4.448 4003
- +(19
32 32
50 12 2 40 5.338 4.804 4.181 32 l1l1I1lmum 3.558 3.203 2.758
minimum
50 or more 4.048 3.647 :U58
50& 5.871 5.293 4.581 32 minimum 3.914 3.514 J.069
thicker
! SO or more 4.448 4.003 3.469
25 R.006 7.206 6.227 45 minimluu 5.338 4.804 4.181
minimum
62ormorc 6.094 5.471 4.759
40& 1001 8.985 7.823 45 minimum 6.h72 6.005 5.204
thicker
62 or more 7562 6.805 5.916
45 45
45 minimum 5.338 4.804 4.nQ
65 16 i 2 40 8.006 7.206 6.227 62 or more 6.094 I 5.471 4.759
minimum
I 50 8,852 7.%2 6.894 45 5.916 I 5.293 ..k"SI .. J

,National Struct}iral Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

6-48 WOOD
Table 6.19 (continued)

Loaded parallel to grain Loaded perpendicular to grain (90")

Toothed Bolt No. of Net MiniulU (0")
Ring diam. face of thickness medge
diam. (mm) piece of lumber distance Allowable Load per Edge distance (mm) AUowable Load per
(mm) with (mm) (mm) connector unit and bolt connector unit and bolt (kN)
connec
-tors of I
(kN)

Species Group Unloaded

"" Species Group
same edge Loaded-
bolt I II III (minimu edge I II III
m)
62 or more 6.716 6.049 5.249
45 minimum 6.Q72 6.005 5.204
65& 10.01 8.985 7.828 62 or more 7.562 6.805 5.916
thicker
I 25 IOAI 9.385 8.140 55 minimum 6.939 6.227 5.427
..
mmlmum
80 or more 8.229 7.428 6A50
55 minimum 9.385 8.451 7.295
I 40& 14.06 12.63 10.94 80 or more I L120 10.010 8.674
thicker
55 55
55minimwn 6.939 6.227 5.427
85 20 2 40 lOA I 9.385 8.140 80 or more 8.229 7.428 6.450
minimum
55 minimwn 7.606 6.850 5.916
50 1139 10.27 8.896 80 or more 9.029 8.095 7.028
55minimwn 8.718 7.828 6.805
65 \3.03 J 1.74 10.19 80 or more 10.320 9.296 . 8.051
55 minimum 9.385 8.451 7.295
f 75& 14.06 12.63 10.94 80 or more 11.120 10.010 8.674
thicker
70minimwn 8.362 7.517 6.494
I 25 12.54 11.30 9.786 95 or more 10050 9.029 7.828
minimum
70minimwn 10.850 9.786 8.451
40& 16.32 14.68 12.72 95 or more 13030 11.743 10.19
thicker
70 ! 70
-.
70 minimum 8.362 7.517 6.494
90 or more to.050 9.029 7.828
100 20 2 40 12.54 IUO 9.786
minimum
! 70 minimum 9.029 8.\39 7.072
95 or more 10.850 9.786 8.451
50 13.57 12.19 10.59
70 minimum 10.190 9.163 7.962
95 or more 12.230 10.990 9.519
65 1530 13.74 li.n
70 minimum 10.850 9.700 8,451
I 75&
tJlickcr I
16.32 14Ji8 12.72 95 or more
13.030 i 11.740 10.19

I I , I

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WOOD 6-49

Table 6.20 - ALLOWABLE LOADS IN SEASONED WOOD (NORMAL DURATION) FOR ONE SPLIT-RING
UNIT AND BOLT IN SINGLE SHEAR

Loaded paraDel to grain Loaded perpendic:uIar to grain (90")

I
Split Bolt No. of Net Minimu I (0")

and '":~
Ring diam. face of thiclmess medge
diam. (mm) plea: of lumber distance ~Wable Load per Edge distance (mm)
I .-_Lod
(mm) with (mm) (mm) emmector unit and bolt . ooDJ'ledor unit bolt (kN)
00_ . (kN)
fonof r---- !
i Species Group Unloaded Species Group
same
!(~U
Loaded-
bolt
I I n m edge I n m
i m) i
I
1 25 11.03 9.252 7.%2 45 minimum 6.583 5.471 4.715
minimum
70 or more 7.784 6.494 5.560
40& 13.25 lLl2 9.519 45 minimum 7.873 6583 5.649
thicker
70 or more 9.385 U84 6.672
64 12 45 45
2 40 11.03 9.252 7.962 45minimmn 6.583 5.471 4.715
minimum
70 or more 7.784 6.494 5.560
50& 13.25 11.12 9519 45 minimum 7.872 6.583 5.649
thicker
70 or more 9.385 7.784 6.672
I 25 17.03 14.19 12.23 70 70 mininllun 9.815 8.229 7.117
minimum
95 or more 11.830 9.875 8.496
40& 25.53 21.26 18.37 70 minimum 14.810 12.320 10.630
thicker
95 or more 17.790 14.810 12.770
100 20 2 40 70 17.92 14.90 12.90 70 minimum 10.360 8.629 7.473
minimum
95 or more 12.450 10.360 8.985
50 20.599 17.17 1t81 70 minimum 11.970 9.963 8585'
95 ormorc 14320 11.970 10.320
66 25.04 20.90 18.06
70 minimum 14.540 12.100 10.450
95 or more 17.440 14.540 12540
75& 25.53 21.26 1107 70 minimum 14.810 12.320 10.630
thicker
95 or more 17.790 14.810 12.770
'--.-. I

National StructlBal Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

6-50 WOOD

Table 6.21 - COMMON WIRE NAILS AND SPIKES-ALLOWABLE WAD IN SEASONED WOOD-NORMAL DURATION

Withdrawal Load from Side Grain per 25 mm

Size of NaB or Spike ofPeoeiration of NaB or Spike into the Lateral Load in Side Grain, (N)
Member Holding the Point (N)

Length Diameter Species Group Species Group

Designation (mm) (mml
I
n m IV
I
n m IV

(11 (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) ~ (10) (11) (12)

N 60d 150
6.680 805
550
340
215
1320
1135
930
775

50d 140
6.198 750
510
315
200
1180
1010
830
695

A 40d 125
5.715 690
470
290
180
1045
895
735
615

30d 115
5.258 685
435
265
170
920
790
650
540

20d 100
4.877 590
400
245
155
825
705
580
485

16d 90
4.115 495
340
210
130
640
550
450
375

L IOd 75
3.759 455
310
190
120
555
480
395
33'0

8d 65
3.327 400
275
170
105
465
400
325
275

S 6d 50
2.870 345
235
145
90
370
320
260
220

S
3/8 215
9.525 1035
705
435
275
2020
1735
1425
1190

3/8 180
7.925 860
590
360
230
1535
1320
1085
905

P 60d 150
7.188 780
535
325
205
1325
1140
935
780

50d 140
7.188 780
536
325
205
1325
1140
935
780

40d 125
6.680 725
495
305
195
1185
1020
840
700

30d 115
6.198 675
460
280
180
1060
910
750
625

K 20d 100
5.715 620
425
260
165
940
805
665
5j5

16d 90
5.258 570
390
240
150
830
710
585
490

E 12d 80
4.877 530
360
220
140
740
635
525
435

S IOd 75
4.877 530
360
220
140
740 635 525
435

SOURCE: Philippine Timber design Standards (1. E. Rocafort and J. O. SiojJ9llgco)

November,1991 (FPRDI Terminal Report)

Table 6.22 - ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR SOmrnTONGUE AND GROOVE DECKING

SPANl LIVE LOAD DEFLECI10NLIMlT / E

(mm) (kN/m; (Nlmm; (N/mml)

Roofs
11240 1171.30 .....
0_958 1.102 ~

11360 1?(j3~ _ _.__

11240 1763.84
1200 1.437 11360 1.447 I-~
2645.76
-
11240 2342.60 ..
-
1.916 11360 1.860 3527.68
11240 1667.38 .-
0.958 ]/360 1.378 2101.45
]/240 2501:07---
1350 1.437 ]1360 1.860 2790~L __. _ _

1 - - - - - -3334.76
11240 - .-.... - - - -
1.916 I--
11360 2.412 4995.25
0.958
11240
11360 1.722
2287.48
3445.~ _ _
._----
11240 3410.55
1500 1.437 11360 2.274 -----:5iTi.38
11240 4547.40
1.916 11360 2.894 6890.00

Association of stnactural Engineers of the Philippines

 WOOD 6-51

TABLE 6.22 (Continued)

SPAN1 LIVE LOAD DEFLECflON LIMIT

(mm) (kN/ml)

0.958

1650 1.437

1.916 3.445

0.958 2.480

1800 1.437 3.307

1.916 4.143

0.958 2.894

1950 1.437 3.858

1.916 4.823

0.958 3.376

2100 1.437 4.478

1.916 5.581

0.958 3.858

2250 1.437 5.168

1.916 6.408

0.958
2400
1.437

Floors

1.916 11360

I Spans are based on simple beam action with 0.48 kNlm' dead load and provisions for a l334 N concentrated load on a 300 mm. width of fluor declciJig. Ramfom lay-up permitted
in aooordan~ with the provisions of Section 620.8.3 or 620.1 0.11.9. Lumberthiclrness assumed at 38 mm, net.

TABLE 6.23 - SIZE, HEIGHT AND SPACING OF WOOD STUDS

BEARING WALLS NON-BEARING WALLS

Laterally Supportiug Roof Supportiug One Supporting Two Laterally
STUD SIZE UDSUJlported and Ceiling Only Floor, Roof and Floors, Roof and Unsupported Spacing
StudHeighr CeiIiDg CeiIiDg StudHeighr
(mm) (mm) SpadDg(mm) <mm) (mmJ
30 J{ 75 2 3000 400
55 J{ 100 250 600 400 4200 600
82 J{ 100 250 600 600 400 4200 600
105 x 125 250 600 600 4800 600
130 J{ 150 250 600 600 400 6000 600

1 Listed heights &Ie distances betWeen points of lattnI support placed perpendicular to the plane of the wall. Increa._ in unsupported height 1m: permiUed where jusIified by an
analysis.
2 Shall not be used in exImior walls.

National St.n.IctUIaI Code of 1he Philippines, Volume 1

 WOOD

Table 6.24 - BRACED WALL PANELS!

SEISMIC ZONE CONDITION

1 2
CONSTRUCTION METH002. 1
\13 4 5 7 , 8
BRACED PANEL LOCATION
AND LENGTH" '
.(~

,~
One-story, top of two or r
three-story X X X X X X X
0, I and2A First- story oftwo-story or
... -
Each end and not more than 7500 mm ,~~
second-story of three-story X X X X X X X X on center
~~~.~-----
First-story of three-story X X X X5 X X X
One-story, top of two-story or Each end and not more than 7500 mm
three-story X X X X X x:o X on center
f--- -_.
First-story of two-story or I I X 5
X
Each end and not more than 7500 mm
2B,3 and 4 second of three-story X X X X X on center but not less than 25% of
building length'
First-story of three-story Each end and not more than 7500 mm
X X X X5 X I x:o X on center but not less than 40% of
building length?

1This table specifies minimum requirements for braced panels which form interior or eKterior braced wall lines.

2See Section 620.10.3 for fun description.

3See Section 620.10.4 ror alternate braced panel requirement.

4 Building length is the dimension parallel to the braced waJllength.

5 Gypsum wallboard applied to supports at 400 mm on center.

Not permitted for bracing cripple walls in Seismic Zone 4. See Section 620.10.5.

7 The required lengths shall be doubled ror gypsum board applied to only one fi1ce of a braced wall panel.

TABLE 625 - CRIPPLE WALL BRACING

AMOUNT OF CRIPPLE WALL BRACINGl , I

SEISMIC CONDITION
ZONE <mm)
9 mm wood structural with 8d at 150/300 minimum
9 mm wood structural panel with 8d at 100 1300 mm nailing on 50 peruent of \V'dlilength minimum
4 or
9 mm wood structural with Rd at 150 1 300 mm of w~~~ length ~inimum
9 mm wood structural with 8d at 150/300 mrn of wall
t------~----r_~--~~--~--~_+~----~----~----
~----:::-.~~~=---J-~:::::..:~'L:::-:::.:::.::::J:x.:::-=.:~--I. 9 mrn wood structural panel with Rd ~t_150 1300 mm nailing 01l}..9 percent of waillength miniDlum
9 mm wood structural panel with 8d at 100 1 300 mm nailing on 40 percent of wall1ength minimwn
0,1,2 and 3 Two-story above cripple wall or
9 mm wood structural panel with 8d at 150 1 300 mm nailing on 60 percent of wal! length minimwn

t Braced panel length shall be at least two times the height of the cripple wall, but not less than 1200 mm.

2 All panels "'long a wall shall be nearly equal in length and shall be nearly equally spaced along the length ofthe wall.

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WOOD 6-53

Table 6.26- WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL WALL SHEATHING1

(Not exposed to the weather, strength axis parallel or perpendicular to studs)

I MINIMUM TIDCKNESS PANEL SPAN RATING

[---------1=:~~~~:~~~~~~i~~~d ~;~~~;620:i'o~3J
T Sheathing Perpendicular

l.=-=~9':)I'~.~-~
, Siding Nailed to Sheathing Parallel to Studs

l__ II, 12, 13

_. ---,
24/(l. 24/16. 32/16 Wa_I_I_2_4_,_o,_c_'---e_ _ _61_.lO
Studs
400
-------,
600
_ _ _--'-_ _ _ __
--,----,------_._--+
400
' to Studs

400

(,(jO
600

! In reference to Section 620, I 03, blocking. of horizonwl joints is not required,

Table 6.27 - ALLOWABLE SHEARS FOR WIND OR SEISMIC LOADING ON VERTICAL DIAPHRAGMS OF FIBERBOARD
SHEATHING BOARD CONSTRUCTION FOR TYPE V CONSTRUCTION ONLY

, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -... -------------,--SHE--A-R-=V-,-A-LCC"U=E"""IN::c:-:7=-=S-m-m-N:-c:-A-=-=lL:-C"S=-PA--:cC-=-INC::-G"l
SIZE AND APPLICATION NAIL SIZE AROUND PERIMETER AND 150 mm AT
INTERMEDIATE POINTS J
13 x 1200 x 2400 mm
No, I I gage galyanized TOoting nail 38 mm long. I
------_ ...__.'--------
II mmhead
!
256

I FiOOrboard sheathing dinphmgms shan not be used to bmcc concrete or masonry waIl,_
The ,hearYruue may be 778 N for 13 ~ 1200 by 2400 mm tiberboard nail-hase sheathing.,

National Structural Code of the Plu1ippines, Volume 1

6-54 WOOD

Table 6.28 - ALLOWABLE SHEAR FOR WIND OR SEISMIC FORCES IN POUNDS PER FOOT FOR VERTICAL
DIAPHRAGMS OF LATH AND PLASTER OR GYPSUM BOARD FRAME WALL ASSEMBLIES I

THICKNESS OF WALL NAIL SHEAR

MATERIAL CONSTRUC SPACING1 VALUE MINIMUM NAIL SIZEl (mm)
TYPE OF MATERIAL I
(mm) TION MAXIMUM (mm)
(mm)

1. Expanded metal, or 22 nun Unblocked 150 2628 No. II gage, 38 nun long, II nun head
woven wire lath and No. 16 gage staple, 22 nun legs
portland cement
plaster

2. Gypsum lath 9 nun lath and Unblocked 125 1460 No. 13 gage staple, 29 mm long, 7 mm head,
13 nun plaster plasterboard blued nail

3. Gypsum sheathing 13 nun x 600 rnm Unblocked 100 1095 No. II gage, 44 nun long, II nun head, diamond-
board x 2,400 1llll1 point, galvanized

" _ , 1200 ~IOC'" 2555

1~3"~ x 1200 nun' Un~IOCked 175 1460

4. Gypsum wallboard 175 1460 5d cooler (2.18 nun dia., 41 mm long, 6 mm

or veneer base 13 nun Unblocked head) orwalIboard (2.18 nun dia. 41mnt long,
, 7mmhead)
100 1825

Blocked 175 1825

r-.----
100 2190

Unblocked 175 1679

._. .- 6d cooler (133 nun dia., 47 nun long, 6 nun
head) or wallboard (232 nun dia. 47 mm long,
16mm 100 2117 7 nunhcad)
..._.

Blocked 175 2117

.. ~ ..... -~ ---_._.-.__ .

100 2555

Blocked Base ply: 225 3650 Base ply 6d cooler (2.33 nun diu. 47 m111long,
Two ply Face ply: 175 6 mm head) or wallboard (232 mm dill. 47 mm
long, 7 mm head)
Face ply - 8d cooler (2.87 nun dia., 59 mm long,
7 nun head) or wallboard (2.87 nun dia., 59 rrun 1
IOllg, 9 mm head)

i I
I These vertical diaphragms shall not be used to resist loads imposed by masonry or c<lTIcrete construction. Values shown are for short-tc-rlllloadinJ! due to wind or due to seimnic
loading. Values shown mll,1 be reduced 25 percent lor nonnalloading. The values shown in Items 2.3 and 4 shall be reduced 50 percent lOr loading dtle to earthquake ill Seismic
Zones 3 and 4.
2 Applies to nailing at all studs, top and bottom plates, and blocking.
3 Alternate nails may be lL';ed if their dimensions are not less than lite specified dimension.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 655

Table 6.29 - ALLOWABLE SPANS FOR PARTICLEBOARD WALL SHEATHING)

(Not exposed to the weather. long dimension of the panel parallel or perpendicular to studs)

STUD SPACING (mm)

GRADE TIDCKNESS (mm)

Siding Nailed to Studs Sheathing under Co\cerings

Specified in Section 620.10.3

Parallel or Perpendicular to Studs

M-I 9 ---_._-_ ......- . __ ._- -.-

I-----~~~-~~~--+~------------
M-S

I - - - - - - - - - - - - - ... t - - . - - - - -..--~---
M-2 "Exterior Glue 13 400 400

lin reference to Section 620.103, hlocking of horizontal joints is not required.

Table 6.30 SClENTIFrC NAME OF PHILIPPINE TIMBER ~PECIES

I. Malabayabas (Tristania spp.) includes: 8. Dangkalan (Callophyllum spp.) includes:

Malabayabas (T. decorticata Merr.) DangakaIan (C obliquinenium Merr)

Tiga (T. micrantha Merr.) BitantdJol (C. blancoi FL & Tr.)
Bitaog (C. inophyllum U
2. Manggachapui I.Hopea spp.) includes:
9. GiSl!U (Canarium spp.) includes:

Dalingdingan (H, foxworthyi Elm.)

Manggachapui (H. acuminala Merr.) Dulil [C. hirsutum Willd. Forma multipinnatum

Yakal-saplungan LH. plagata (BIanco) Vid.j (Llanos) H..1. Lam]

Gisau (C. "TIeseanum Engl.)

3. Narig (Vaties spp.) includes: Pagsabingin-bulog tC. calophyllum Perle)
Piling-liilan [C.luzonicum (Blume) A. f'lTay!

Narig ('I. manggachapui Blanco spp. tnanggachapoi)

Narig, Thick-leafed ('I. pachyphylla Merr.) 10. Lauan I.Shorea spp_) includes:

4. Yakal (Shorea spp.) includes: Almon (S. almon Fm.:w.)

Lauan, Red (S. negros(''I1sis Foxw.)
Yakal (S.astylosa Foxw.) Lauan, While (S. cOI1lorta Vid.)

Yakal-gisok (8.gisok Foxw.) Ma),apis [S. squamata (l'urcz. Dyer.]

Yakal-Malx)lo (S. ciliata King) Tangilc IS. polyspenna (Blanco) Merr.]

Yakal-malibato (S. rnalibato Foxw.)

II. Malaanonang (Shorea spp.) includes:

5. Antipolo (Arthocarpus spp.) includes:
Kalunti LS. hopeilolia (Hcim). Sym.]

Antipolo [A. blanco (Elm.) Merr.] Malaanonang (S. polila Vid.

Anubing (A ovato Blanco)

Kubi (A nitida Trec. Spp. Nitida) 12. Malasaging (AgJaia spp.) includes:

Nangka (A heterophylla Lam.)

TIo-ilo LA. iloilo (Blanco) Men.]

Binggas (Terminalia spp.) includes: Kuling-manok [A. luzoniensis (Vid.) Merr. & Rolle]
Malasaging (A diffusa ML--rr.)

Binggas [T. citrina (CIaerln) Roxb1

Kalumpit (T. microcarpa Deone) 13. Malugai (pometia spp.) includes:

Lanipau (T. copeIandii Elm.)

Sakat (T. Nitens Fres!.) Malugai (P. pinnata Forst.)

Talisai-gubat (T. foetidissima Griff.) Malugai-liitan (p. pinnata forma responda Jacobs)

Dao tIJracontomelon spp.) includes: 14. Miau (Dyso;,;ylum spp.) includes:

Dao [D. dao (Blanco) Merr. & Rolfe} Kuling-babui (0. altissisum Mcrr.)
Lamio [D. edule (Blanco) Skeels.] Miau (D. euphlebium Merr.)

National Struclural Code of the Phirlppines, Volume 1

6-56 WOOD

TABLE 6.30 (Continued)

15. Ouijo (Shorea spp.) includes: 19. Nato (Palaquium spp.) includes:

Ouija IS. guiso (Blanco) Blume] Malak-malak IP. philippense (perr.) C. B, Rob.]

Malaguijo (S. plagata Foxw.) Maniknik (p. tenuipeliolatwn Merr.)

Nato [P.luzoniensis (E-ViU,) Vidl

16. Kamagong (Diospyros spp.) includes: PaJak-palak (p. lanceolalwn Dlanco)

Anang 11 pyrrhocarpa Miq.)

20, Palosapis (Anisoptera spp.) includes:
Anang-guIod (0. inclusa Merr.)

Ata-ata (D, mindanaesis Merr.)

Afu (A bnmnea Foxw.)

Bolong-eta (0. pilosanthem Blanco)

Dagang (A, auren Fo;.',\\,,)

Kamagong (D. philippinensis (Resr.) Gurke]

Kamagong, Ponce (D. poncei Merr.)

2L Pine (Pinus spp.) includes:
Katilma (D. nitida Merr.)

Pin!.", Benguet (p. kesiya Royle~. Gordon)

17. Katmin (Dillenia spp,) includes: Pine, Mindoro (P. mcil"llsil Jungh & de Vr.)

Katmon (D. philippinensis Rolfe) 22. Salakin (Aphanamixis spp.) includes:

Katmon-bayani (D. megalantha Merr.)
Malakatmon [D. luzoniensis (Vid.) Martel1iJ Kangko (A perrotleliana A .Iuss)
Salakin LA. cumingiana (C. Dc,)]
IL Kato (Amoora spp.) includes:
23, Bayok (Pterospennum spp.) includes:
Kato (A shermana Merr.)
Katong-Iakihan (A macrocarpa Merr.) Bayok (p. diversifolium Blume)
Bayok-bayokan (P. niveum Vid,)
18. Pahutan (Mangifera spp,) inclUdes:
24. Manggasinoro lShorea spp.) includes:
Pahulan <.M. altissima Blanco
Pahong-liitan (M. merriUii Mukh.) Manggasinoro IS, assamica Dyer. forma philippinensis
(Brandis) Sym.]
13. Apitong (Dipterocarpus spp.) includes: Manggasinorong -Iakihan (S. "irencens Parijs)

Apitong (D. grandiflorus Blanco)

Apitong, Basilan (D. basilanicus Foxw.)

Apilong, Broad-winged (0. speciosus Brandis)

Hagakhak tD. warbugii Brandis)

Malapanau (D. Kerni King)

Panau (D. grandis Blume)

Panau, Leaf-tailed <.0. caudatus FO);w,)

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CHAPTER 7

MASONRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 701 - GENERAL ...................... 7- t

701.1 Scope ......... ............. ................ ......... 7-1 701.3 Definitions ................................ .. .. . 7-1

701.2 Design Methods .......................... 7-1 701.4 Notations ...................................7-2

SECTION 702 - MATERIAL STANDARDS ...................... 7-4

702.1 Quality ............................................ 7-4 702.2 Standards of Quality ....................... 7-4

SECTION 703 - MORTAR AND GROlJT .................... 7-6

703.1 General ........................................... 7-6 703.4 Grout .............................................. 7-6

703.2 Materials ......................................... 7-6 703.5 Additives and Admixtures ................ 7-6

703.3 Mortar................................................... 7-6

SECTION 704 - CONSTRUCTION ...................... 7-7

704.1 General ........................................... 7-7 704.4 Reinforcement Placing ...................... 7-7

704.2 Materials Handling, Storage and 704.5 Grouted Masonry. .. .. . . . . ... ... . . . . . . .. . 7-8

Preparation ......... ................... ....... 7-7 704.6 Aluminum Equipment... ... ............ 7-8

704.3 Placing Masonry Units .. . ... . .. . ..... . 7-7 704.7 Joint Reinforcement... ...... ...... ...... 7-8

SECTION 705 - QUALITY ASSURANCE .................. 7-9

705.1 General ........................................... 7-9 705.4 Mortar Testing ............................... 7-11

705.2 Scope ............................................... 7-9 705.5 Grout Testing................................... 7-11

705.3 Compliance with I'm ....................... 7-9

SECTION 706 - GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 7-11

706.1 General .................................... ..... 7-11 706.3 Working Stress Design and

706.2 Working Stress Design and Strength Design Requirements

Strength Design Requirements for Reinforced Masonry ............. 7-16

for Unreinforced and Reinforced

Masonry ...................................... 7-14

SECTION 707 - WORKING STRESS DESIGN OF MASONRy........................................ 7-18

707.1 General ......................................... 7-18 707.3 Design ofUnreinforced Masonry .... 7-23

707.2 Design of Reinforced Masonry........ 7-19

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7-ii

SECTION 708 - STRENGTH DESIGN OF MASONRY ...................................................... 7-25

708.1 General ......................................... 7-25 708.2 Reinforced Masonry ..................... 7-26

SECTION 709 - EMPIRICAL DESIGN OF MASONRY ..................................................... 7-35

709.1 Height ........................................... 7-35 709.6 Bond......................................... 7-36

709.2 Lateral Stability.................. ...... 7-35 709.7 Anchorage.................................. 7-37

709.3 Compressive Stresses...... ......... ... 7-35 709-8 Unburned Clay Masonry ................. 7-37

709.4 Lateral Support........................... 7-36 709.9 Stone Masonry ............................ 7-37

709.5 Minimum Thickness ..................... 7-36

SECTION 710 - GUSS MASONRY ....................................................................................... 7-38

710.1 General ......................................... 7-38 710.5 Size ofPanels ................................ 7-38

710.2 Mortar Joints .................... ;............ 7-38 710.6 Expansion Joints.................. ... ... 7-38

710.3 Lateral Support... ..... ....... ...... .... 7-38 710.7 Re-use of Units.......................... 7-38

710.4 Reinforcement... ....................... 7-38

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

,
 GENERAL
SECTION 701 - GENERAL
701.1 SCOPE.
The materials, design, construction and quality assurance of
masonry shall be in accordance with this chapter.
701.2 DESIGN METHODS.
Masonry shall comply with the provisions of one of the
following design methods in this chapter as well as the
requirements of Sections 701 through 705.
701.2.1 Working Stress Design. Masonry designed by the
working stress design method shall comply with the
provisions of Sections 706 and 707.
701.2.2 Strength Design. Masonry designed by the
strength design method shall comply with the provisions of
Sections 706 and 708.
701.2.3 Empirical Design. Masonry designed by the
empirical design method shall comply with the provisions
of Sections 706.1 and 709.
701.2.4 Glass Masonry. Glass masonry shall comply with
the provisions of Section 710.
701.3 DEFINITIONS.
For the purpose of this chapter, certain terms are defined as
follows:
AREAS:
BEDDED AREA is the area of the surface of a masonry
unit which is in contact with mortar in the plane of the joint
EFFECTIVE AREA OF REINFORCEMENT is the
cross-sectional area of reinforcement multiplied by the
cosine of the angle between the reinforcement and the
direction for which effective area is to be determined.
GROSS AREA is the total cross-sectional area of a
specified section.
NET AREA is the gross cross-sectional area minus the area
of ungrouted cores, notches, cells and unbedded areas. Net
area is the actual surface area of cross section of masonry.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
7-1
TRANSFORMED AREA is the equivalent area of one
material to a second based on the ratio of moduli of
elasticity of the first material to the second.
BOND:
ADHESION BOND is the adhesion between masonry
units and mortar or grout.
REINFORCING BOND is the adhesion between steel
reinforcement and mortar or grout.
BOND BEAM is a horizontal grouted element within
masonry in which reinforcement is embedded.
CELL is a void space having a gross cross-sectional area
greater than 967 mm2
CLEANOUT is an opening to the bottom of a grout space
of sufficient size and spacing to allow the removal of
debris.
COLLAR JOINT is the mortared or grouted space
between wythes of masonry.
COLUMN, REINFORCED, lS a vertical structural
member in which both the reinforcement and masonry resist
compression.
COLUMN, UNREINFORCED, is a vertical structural
member whose horizontal dimension measured at ri&ht
angles to the thickness does not exceed three times the
thickness.
DIMENSIONS:
ACTUAL DIMENSIONS are the measured dimensions of
a designated item. The actual dimension shall not vary
ITom the specified dimension by more than the amount
allowed in the appropriate standard of quality in Section
702.
NOMINAL DIMENSIONS of masonry units are equal to
its specified dimensions plus the thickness of the joint with
which the unit is laid.
SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS are the dimensions specified
for the manufacture or construction of masonry, masonry
units, joints or any other component of a structure.
GROUT LIFT is an increment of grout height within the
total grout pour.
7-2 MASONRY
GROUT POUR is the total height of masonry wall to be
grouted prior to the erection of additional masonry. A grout
pour will consist of one or more grout lifts.
GROUTED MASONRY:
GROUTED HOLLOW-UNIT MASONRY is that form
of grouted masonry construction in which certain
designated cells of hollow units are continuously filled with
grout.
GROUTED MULTIWymE MASONRY is that form of
grouted masonry construction in which the space between
the wythes is solidly or periodically filled with grout.
JOINTS:
BED JOINT is the mortar joint that is horizontal at the
time the masonry units are placed.
HEAD JOINT is the mortar joint having a vertical
transverse plane.
MASONRY UNIT is brick:, tile, stone, glass block or
C'oncrete block conforming to the requirements specified in
Section 702.
HOLLOW-MASONRY UNIT is a masonry unit whose
net cross-sectional areas (solid area) in any plane parallel to
the surface containing cores, cells or deep frogs is less than
75 percent of its gross cross-sectional area measured in the
same plane.
SOLID-MASONRY UNIT is a masonry unit whose net
cross-sectional area in any plane parallel to the surface
containing the cores or cells is at least 75 percent of the
gross cross-sectional area measured in the same plane.
PRISM is an assemblage of masonry units and mortar with
or without grout used as a test specimen for determining
properties of the masonry.
REINFORCED MASONRY is that form of masonry
construction in. which reinforcement acting in conjunction
with the masonry is used to resist forces.
SHELL is the outer portion of a hollow masonry unit as
placed in masonry.
WALLS:
BONDED WALL is a masonry wall in which two or more
wythes are bonded to act as a structural unit.
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
CA VITY WALL is a wall containing continuous air space
with a minimum width of 51 mm and a maximum width of
114 mm between wythes which are tied with metal ties.
WALL TIE is a mechanical metal fastener which connects
wythes of masonry to each other or to other materials.
WEB is an interior solid portion of a hollow-masonry unit
as placed in masonry.
WYTHE is the portion of a wall which is one masonry unit
in thickness. A collar joint is not considered a wythe.
701.4 NOTATIONS.
= cross-sectional area of anchor bolt, square
millimeter.
effective area of masonry, square millimeter.
= gross area of wall, square millimeter.
= total area of special horizontal reinforcement
through wall frame joint, square millimeter.
= net area of masonry section bounded by wall
thickness and length of section in direction of
shear force considered, square millimeter.
area oftension (pullout) cone of embedded
anchor bolt projected onto surface of
masonry, square millimeter.
= effective cross-sectional area of
As
reinforcement in column or flexural
member, square millimeter.
effective area of reinforcement, square
millimeter
= total cross-sectional area of rectangular tie
reinforcement for confined core, square
millimeter.
area of reinforcement required for shear
reinforcement perpendicular to longitudinal
reinforcement, square millimeter.
A' s effective cross-sectional area of compression
reinforcement in flexural member, square
millimeter.
a depth of equivalent rectangular stress block:,
millimeter.
nominal shear strength of anchor bolt,
kilonewtons.
allowable tensile force on anchor bolt,
kilo newtons
nominal tensile strength of anchor bolt,
kilonewtons.
allowable shear force on anchor bolt,
kilonewtons
b effective width of rectangular member or
width of flange for T and I sections,
millimeter
 GENERAL
= factored shear force supported by anchor bolt,
kilonewtons.
= computed tensile force on anchor belt,
kilonewtons.
= factored tensile force supported by anchor
bolt, kilonewtons.
= computed shear force on anchor bolt,
kilonewtons.
= width ofweb in Tor I section, millimeter.
= nominal shear strength coefficient as obtained
from Table 708-2.
c = distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber,
millimeter.
D = dead loads, or related internal moments and
forces.
d = distance from compression face of flexural
member to centroid oflongitudinal tensile
reinforcement,millimeter.
= diameter of reinforcing bar, millimeter.
diameter of largest beam longitudinal
reinforcing bar passing through, or anchored
in, a joint, millimeter.
diameter of largest pier longitudinal
reinforcing bar passing through a joint,
millimeter.
E = load effects of earthquake. or related internal
moments and forces.
modulus of elasticity of masonry, MPa.
= eccentricity ofPufi millimeter.
= maximum usable compressive strain of
masonry.
F = loads due to weight and pressure of fluids or
related moments and forces.
allowable average axial compressive stress in
columns for centroidally applied axial load
only, MPa.
allowable flexural compressive stress in
members subjected to bending load only, MPa.
= allowable bearing stress in masonry, MPa.
= allowable stress in reinforcement, MPa.
= allowable compressive stress in column
reinforcement, MPa.
= allowable flexural tensile stress in masonry,
MPa.
F" = allowable shear stress in masonry, MPa.
fa computed axial compressive stress due to
design axial load, MPa.
computed flexural stress in extreme fiber due
to design bending loads only, MPa.
= computed compressive stress due to dead load
only, MPa.
= modulus of rupture, MPa.
= computed stress in reinforcement due to design
loads, MPa.
= computed shear stress due to design load, MPa.
= tensile yield stress of reinforcement, MPa.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
1
= tensile yield stress of horizontal
reinforcement, MPa.
specified compressive strength of grout at age of
28 days, MPa.
= specified compressive strength of masonry at
age of 28 days, MPa.
G = shear modulus of masonry, MPa.
H = loads due to weight and pressure of soil, water
in soil or related internal moments and forces.
H height of wall between points of support,
millimeter
beam depth, millimeter.
= cross-sectional dimension of grouted core
measured center to center of confining
= pier depth in plane of wall frame, millimeter.
effective height of wall or column, millimeter.
= moment of inertia about neutral axis of cross
4
sectional area, mm
= effective moment of inertia, mm4.
= gross, cracked moment of inertia of wall cross
4
section, mm
.i = ratio or distance between centroid of flexural
compressive forces and centroid of tensile
forces of depth, d.
K = reinforcement cover or clear spacing,
whichever is less, millimeter.
k = ratio of depth of compressive stress in flexural
member to depth, d.
L ~ live loads, or related internal moments and
forces.
= length of wall, millimeter.
= length of wall or segment, millimeter.
= embedment depth of anchor bolt, millimeter.
= anchor bolt edge distance, the least distance
measured from edge of masonry to surface of
anchor bolt. millimeter.
= required development length of reinforcement,
millimeter.
= design moment, kN-m.
= maximum moment in member at stage
deflection is computed, kN-m.
= moment capacity of compression
reinforcement in flexural member about
centroid oftensile force, kN-m.
nominal cracking moment strength in masonry,
kN-m.
Mill = moment of compressive force in masonry
about centroid of tensile force in
reinforcement, kN-m.
nominal moment strength, kN-m.
moment of tensile force in reinforcement about
centroid of compressive force in masonry,
kN-m.
Mser = service moment at midheight of panel,
including PA effects. kN-m.
factored moment, kN-m.
7-4 MASONRY
n. = modular ratio.
=EIE
$ m
= design axial load, kilonewtons.
= allowable centroidal axial load for reinforced
masonry columns, kilonewtons.
nominal balanced design axial strength,
kilo newtons.
= load from tributary floor or roof area,
kilonewtons.
= nominal axial strength in masonry,
kilo newtons.
nominal axial load strength in masonry without
flexure, kilonewtons.
P" = factored axial load, kilonewtons.
P,q = factored load from tributary floor or roof loads,
kilonewtons.
= factored weight ofwall tributary to section
I.jnder consideration, kilonewtons.
weight of wall tributary to section under
consideration, kilonewtons.
r = radius of gyration (based on specified unit
dimensions or Tables 710-1, 710-2 and 710-3),
millimeter.
= ratio of area ofreinforcing bars cut offto total
area of reinforcing bars at the section.
S = section modulus, mm3 .
S = spacing of stirrups or of bent bars in direction
parallel to that of main reinforcement,
millimeter.
T = effects oftemperature, creep, shrinkage and
differential settlement.
t effective thickness of wythe, wall or column,
millimeter.
u = required strength to resist factored loads, or
related internal moments and forces.
u = bond stress per unit of surface area of
reinforcing bar, MPa.
= total design shear force, kilonewtons.
total horizontal joint shear, kilonewtons.
= nominal shear strength of masonry,
kilonewtons
== nominal shear strength, kilonewtons.
= nominal shear strength of shear reinforcement,
kilonewtons.
=required shear strength in masonry,
kilonewtons.
w = wind load, or related internal moments in
forces.
= factored distributed lateral load.
= horizontal deflection at mid height under
factored load, millimeter.
deflection due to factored loads, millimeter.
= ratio ofarea of flexural tensile reinforcement,
A., to area bd.
= reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain
conditions.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
Po ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on
plane perpendicular to plane of A.nv.
Lo = sum of perimeters of all longitudinal
reinforcement, millimeter.
"if 'm = square root of specified strength of masonry at
the age of 28 days, MFa.
<b strength-reduction factor.
SECTION 702 - MATERIAL
STANDARDS
702.1 QUALITY.
Materials used in masonry shall conform to the
requirements stated herein. If no requirements are specified
in this section for a material, quality shall be based on
generally accepted good practice, subject to the approval of
the building official.
Reclaimed or previously used masonry units shall meet the
applicable requirements as for new masonry units of the
same material for their intended use.
702.2 STANDARDS OF QUALITY.
The standards listed below labeled a "UBC Standard" are
also listed in Chapter 35, Part IT of UBC, and are part of
this code. The other standards listed below are recognized
standards. See Sections 3503 and 3504 ofUBC.
1. Aggregates.
1.1 ASTM CI44, Aggregates for Masonry Mortar
1.2 ASTM C404, Aggregates for Grout
2. Cement.
2.1 ASTM C91-93, Cement, Masonry. (plastic cement
conforming to the requirements ofUBC Standard 25
1 may be used in lieu of masonry cement when it
also conforms to ASTM C 91-93). .
2.2 ASTM C 150, Portland Cement
2.3 ASTM C270
3. Lime.
3.1 ASTM C 5-79, Quicklime for Structural Purposes
3.2 ASTM C 207-91, Hydrated Lime for Masonry
Purposes. When Types N and NA hydrated lime are
used in masonry mortar, they shall comply with the
provisions of UBC Standard ASTM C 270-95,
 1
MATERIAL STANDARDS
7-5

Section 21.1506.7, excluding the plasticity 7.2 All such items not fully embedded in mortar or grout
requirement. shall either be corrosion resistant or shall be coated
after fabrication with copper, zinc or a metal having
4. Masonry units of clay or shale. at least equivalent corrosion-resistant properties.

4.1 ASTM C 34, Structural Clay Load-bearing Wall Tile 8. Mortar.

4.2 ASTM C 56, Structural Clay NOnload-bearing Tile
4.3 ASTM C 62-87, Building Brick (solid units)
4.4 ASTM C 126, Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay
Facing Tile, Facing Brick and Solid Masonry Units.
Load-bearing glazed brick shall conform to the
weathering and structural requirements of ASTM C
73-85, Section 21.106, Facing Brick
4.5 ASTM C 216-86, Facing Brick (solid units)
4.6 ASTM C 90-85, Hollow Brick
4.7 ASTM C 67, Sampling and Testing Brick and
Structural Clay Tile
4.8 ASTM C 212, Structural Clay Facing Tile
4.9 ASTM C 530, Structural Clay Non-Load bearing
Screen Tile.
8.1 ASTM C 270-95, Mortar for Unit Masonry and
Reinforced Masonry other than Gypsum
8.2 ASTM C 270, Field Tests Specimens for Mortar
8.3 ASTM C 780, Standard Test Method for Flexural
Bond Strength ofMortar Cement
9. Grout.
9.1 ASTM C 1019-84, Method of Sampling and Testing
Grout
9.2 ASTM C 476-83, Grout for Masonry
10. Reinforcement.

10.1 ASTM A 82, Part I, Joint Reinforcement for

5. Masonry units of concrete.
5.1 ASTM C 55-85, Concrete Building Brick
5.2 ASTM C 90-85; Hollow and Solid Load-bearing
Concrete Masonry Units .
5.3 ASTM C 129-85, Non-load bearing Concrete
Masonry Units
5.4 ASTM C 140, Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units
5.5 ASTM C 426, Standard Test Method for Drying
Shrinkage of Concrete Block
Masonry
10.2 ASTM A 615, A 616, A 617, A 706, A 767 and A
775, Deformed and Plain Billet-steel Bars, Rail-steel
Deformed and Plain Bars, Axle-steel Deformed and
Plain Bars, and Deformed Low-alloy Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
10.3 ASTM A 4%, Part n, Cold-drawn Steel Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement

6. Masonry units of other materials.

6.1 Calcium silicate.

ASTM C 73-85, Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand
lime Brick)
6.2 ASTM C 216, C 62 or C 652, Unburned Clay
Masonry Units and Standard Methods of Sampling
and ASTM C 67, Testing Unburned Clay Masonry
Units
6.3 ACI-704, Cast Stone
6.4 ASTM E 447-84, Test Method for Compressive
Strength ofMasonry Prisms

.7. Connectors.

7.1 Wall ties and anchors made from steel wire shall
conform to UBC Standard 21-10, Part n, and other
steel wall ties and anchors shall conform to A36 in
accordance with UBC Standard 22-1. Wall ties and
anchors made from copper, brass or other nonferrous
metal shall have a minimum tensile yield strength of
207Mpa

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

7-6 MASONRY

SECTION 703 - MORTAR AND placement under eXlstmg field conditions, without
segregation. Grout shall be specified by one of the
GROUT following methods:

1. Proportions of ingredients and any additives shall be

703.1 GENERAL.
Mortar and grout shall comply with the provisions of this
section. Special mortars, grouts or bonding systems may be
used, subject to satisfactory evidence of their capabilities
when approved by the building official.
703.2 MATERIALS.
Materials used as ingredients in mortar and grout shall
conform to the applicable requirements in Section 702.
Cementitious materials for grout shall be one or both of the
following: lime and portland cement. Cementitious
materials for mortar shall be one or more of the following:
lime, masonry cement, portland cement and mortar cement.
Cementitious materials or additives shall not contain epoxy
resins and derivatives, phenols, asbestos fibers or fire clays.
Water used in mortar or grout shall be clean and free of
del~terious amounts of acid, alkalies or organic material or
other harmful substances.
based on laboratory or field experience with the
grout ingredients and the masonry units to be used.
The grout shall be specified by the proportion of its
constituents in terms of parts by volume, or
2. Minimum compressive strength which will produce
the required prism strength, or
3. Proportions by grout type shall be used as given in
Table 703-2.
703.5 ADDITIVES AND ADMIXTURES.
703.5.1 General. Additives and admixtures to mortar or
grout shall not be used unless approved by the building
official.
703.5.2 Air entrainment. Air-entraining substances shall
not be used m mortar or grout unless tests are conducted to
determine compliance with the requirements ofthis code.

703.3 MORTAR. 703.5.3 Colors. Only pure mineral oxide, carbon black or
synthetic colors may be used. Carbon black shall be limited
7(13.3.1 General. Mortar shall consist of a mixture of to a maximum of3 percent ofthe weight of the cement.
.:cmetitious materials and aggregate to which sufficient
water and approved additives, if any, have been added to
achieve a workable, plastic consistency.

703.3.2 Selecting proportions. Mortar with specified

proportions of ingredients that differ from the mortar
proportions of Table 703-1 may be approved for use when
it is demonstrated by laboratory or field experience that this
mortar with the specified proportions of ingredients, when
combined with the masonry units to be used in the
structure, will achieve the specified compressive strength
I'IIl" Water content shall be adjusted to provide proper
workability under existing field conditions. When the
proportion of ingredients is not specified, the proportions
by mortar type shall be used as given in Table 703-1.

703.4 GROUT.

703.4.1 ~neraL Grout shall consist of a mixture of

cementitious materials and aggregate to which water has
been added such that the mixture will flow without
::;egrtgation of the constituents. The specified compressive
strength ofgroutJ'g, shall not be less than 13.8 MPa

703.4.2 Selecting proportions. Water content shall be

adjusted to provide proper workability and to enable proper

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 704 - CONSTRUCTION
704.1 GENERAL.
Masonry shall be constructed according to the provision of
this section.
704.2 MATERIALS: HANDLING, STORAGE
AND PREPARATION.
All materials shall comply with applicable requirements of
Section 702. Storage, handling and preparation at the site
shall conform also the following:
Masonry materials shall be stored so that at the time
of use the materials are clean and structurally
suitable for the intended use.
..,
.... All metal reinforcement shall be free from loose rust
and other coatings that would inhibit reinforcing
bond.
3. At the time of laying, burned clay units and sand
lime units shall have an initial rate of absorption not
exceeding 1.6 liter per square meter during a period
of one minute. In the absorption test, the surface of
the unit shall be held 3mm below the surface of the
water.
4. Concrete masonry units shall not be wetted unless
otherwise approved.
5. Materials shall be stored in a manner such that
deterioration or intrusion of foreign materials is
prevented and that the material will be capable of
meeting applicable requirements at the time of
mixing or placement.
6. The method of measuring materials for mortar and
grout shall be such that proportions of the materials
can be controlled.
7. Mortar or grout mixed at the job site shall be mixed
for a period of time not less than three minutes or
more than 10 minutes in a mechanical mixer with the
amount of water required to provide the desired
workability Hand mixing of small amounts of
mortar is permitted. Mortar may be re-tempered.
Mortar or grout which has hardened or stiffened due
to hydration of the cement shall not be used. In no
case shall mOltar be used two and one-half hours, nor
grout used one and one half hours, after the initial
mixing water has been added to the dry mgredients at
the jobsitc.
National Structural Code
7-7
EXCEPTION:
Dry mixes for mortar and gmll! which are blended in the
factory and mixed at the job site shall be mixed in
mechanical mixers until workable, but 110t to exceed 10
minutes.
704.3 PLACING MASONRY UNITS.
704.3.1 Mortar. The mortar shall be sufficiently plastic
and units shall be placed with sufficient pressure to extrude
mortar from the joint and produce a tight joint. Deep
furrowing which produces voids shall not be used.
The initial bed joint thickness shall not be less than 6mm or
more than 25 mm; subsequent bed joints shall not be less
than 6 mm or more than 16mm in thickness.
704.3.2 Surfaces. Surfaces to be in contact with mortar or
grOllt shall be clean and free of deleterious materials.
704.3.3 Solid masonry units. Solid masonry units shall
have full head and bed joints.
704.3.4 Hollow-masonry units. All head and bed joints
shall be filled solidly with mortar for a distance in from the
face of the unit not less than the thickness of the shell.
Head joints of open-ends units with beveled ends that are
to be fully grouted need not be mortared. The beveled ends
shall form a grout key which permits grout within J6mIIlaof
the face of the unit. The units sha1l be tightly butted to
prevent leakage of grout.
704.4 REINFORCEMENT PLACING.
Reinforcement details shall conform to the requirements of
this chapter. Metal reinforcement shall be located in
accordance with the plans and specifications.
Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement prior
to grouting by wire positioners or other suitable devices at
intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters.
Tolerances for the placement of reinforcement in walls and
flexural elements shall be plus or minus 12.7 mm for d
equal to 200 mm or less, 25 mm for d equal to 600 mm or
less but greater than 200 mm, and 32 mm for d greater than
600mm
Tolerance for longitudinal location of reinforcement shall
be 51 mm
of the Philippines, Volume 1
 MASONRY
704.5 GROUTED MASONRY.
704.5.1 General Conditions. Grouted masonry shall be
constructed in such a manner that all elements of the
masonry act together as a structural element.
Prior to grouting, the grout space shall be clean so that all
spaces to be filled with grout do not contain mortar
proj ections greater than 12.7 mm, mortar droppings or other
foreign material. Grout shall be placed so that all spaces
designated to be grouted shall be filled with grout and the
grout shall be confined to those specific spaces.
Grout materials and water content shall be controlled to
provide adequate fluidity for placement without segregation
ofthe constituents, and shall be mixed thoroughly.
The grouting of any section of wall shall be completed in
one day with no interruptions greater than one hour.
Between grout pours, a horizontal construction joint shall
be formed by stopping all wythes at the same elevation and
with the grout stopping a minimum of 38 mm below a
mortar joint, except the top of the wall. Where bond beams
o~cur, the grout pour shall be stopped a minimum of 12.7
mm below the top of the masonry.
Size and height limitations of the grout space or cell shall
not be less than shown in Table 704-1. Higher grout pours
or smaller cavity widths or cell size than shown in Table
704-1 may be used when approved, if it is demonstrated
that grout spaces will be properly filled.
Cleanouts shall be provided for all grout pours over 1524
mm in height.
Where required, cleanouts shall be provided in the bottom
course at every vertical bar but shall not be spaced more
than 813 mm on center for solidly grouted masonry. When
cleanouts are required, they shall be sealed after inspection
and before grouting.
Where cleanouts are not provided, special provisions must
be made to keep the bottom and sides of the grout spaces,
as well as the minimum total clear area as required by Table
704-1, clean and clear prior to grouting.
Units may be laid to the full height of the grout pour and
grout shall be placed in a continuous pour in grout lifts not
exceeding 1830 mm. When approved, grout lifts may be
greater than 1830 mm if it can be demonstrated the grout
spaces can be properly filled.
All cells and spaces containing reinforcement shall be filled
with grout.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
704.5.2 Construction requirements. Reinforcement shall
be placed prior to grouting. Bolts shall be accurately set
with templates or by approved equivalent means and held in
place to prevent dislocation during grouting.
Segregation of the grout materials and damage to the
masonry shall be avoided during the grouting process.
Grout shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration during
placement before loss of plasticity in a manner to fill the
grout space. Grout pours greater than 300 mm in height
shall be reconsolidated by mechanical vibration to
minimize voids due to water loss. Grout pours 300 rom or
less in height shall be mechanically vibrated or puddled.
In one-storey buildings having wood-frame exterior walls,
foundations not over 600 mm high measured from the top
of the footing may be constructed of hollow-masonry units
laid in running bond without mortared head joints. Any
standard shape unit may be used, provided the masonry
units permit horizontal flow of grout to adjacent units.
Grout shall be solidly poured to the full height in one lift
and shall be puddled or mechanically vibrated.
In nonstructural elements which do not exceed 2440 mm in
height above the highest point of lateral support, including
fireplaces and residential chimneys, mortar of pouring
consistency may be substituted for grout when the masonry
is constructed and grouted in pours of 300 mm or less in
height.
In multiwythe grouted masonry, vertical barriers of
masonry shall be built across the grout space the entire
height of the grout pour and spaced not more than 9144 rom
horizontally. The grouting of any section of wall between
barriers shall be completed in one day with no interruption
longer than one hour.
704.6 ALUMINUM EQUIPMENT.
Grout shall not be handled nor pumped utilizing aluminum
equipment unless it can be demonstrated with the materials
and equipment to be used that there will be no deleterious
effect on the strength ofthe grout.
704.7 JOINT REINFORCEMENT.
Wire joint reinforcement used in the design as principal
reinforcement in hollow-unit construction shall be
continuous between supports unless splices are made by
lapping:
1. Fifty-four wire diameters in a grouted cell, or
2. Seventy-five wire diameters in the mortared bed
joint, or
 CONSTRUCTION & QUALITY ASSURANCE
3. In alternate bed joints of running bond m?sonry a
distance not less than 54 diameters plus twice the
spacing of the bed ioints, or
4. As required by calculation and specific location in
areas of minimum stress, such as points of inflection.
Side wires shall be deformed and shall conform to UBC
Standard 21-10, Part 1, Joint Reinforcement for Masonry.
Nationai Struc~u'ral Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
7-9
SECTION 705 - QUALITY
ASSURANCE
705.1 GENERAL.
Quality assurance shall be provided to ensure that materials,
construction and workmanship are in compliance with the
plans and specifications, and the applicable requirements of
this chapter. When required, inspection records shall be
maintained and made available to the building officiaL
705.2 SCOPE.
Quality assurance shall include, but is not limited to,
assurance that:
1. Masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime,
aggregate and all other materials meet the
requirements of the applicable standards of quality
and that they are properly stored and prepared for
use.
2. Mortar and grout are properly mixed using specified
proportions of ingredients. The method of
measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be
such that proportions of materials are controlled.
3. Construction details, procedures and workmanship
are in accordance with the plans and specifications.
4. Placement, splices and reinforcement sizes are in
accordance with the provisions of this chapter and
the plans and specifications.
705.3 COMPLIANCE withFm'
705.3.1 General. Compliance with the requirements for
the specified compressive strength of masonry I'm shall be
in accordance with one of the sections in this subsection.
705.3.2 Masonry prism testing. The compressive strength
of masonry determined in accordance with UBC Standard
21-17 for each set of prisms shall equal or exceed I'm"
Compressive strength of prisms shall be based on tests at 28
days. Compressive strength at seven days or three days
may be used provided a relationship between seven-day and
three-day and 28-day strength has been established for the
project prior to the start of construction. Verification by
masonry prism testing shall meet the following:
1. A set offive masonry prisms shall be built and tested
in accordance with ASTM E 447 prior to the start of
construction. Materials used for the construction of
the prisms shall be taken from those specified to be
used in the project. Prisms shall be constructed
under the observation of the engineer or special
7-10 MASONRY
inspector or an approved agency and tested by an
approved agency.
2. When full allowable stresses are used in design, a set
of three prisms shall be built and tested during
construction in accordance with ASTM E 447 for
each 465 m2 of wall area, but not less than one set of
three masonry prisms for the project.
3. When one half the allowable masonry stresses are
used in design, testing during construction is not
required. A letter of certification from the supplier
of the materials used to verify the f m in accordance
with Section 705.3 .2, Item 1, shall be provided at the
time of, or prior to, delivery of the materials to the
job site to ensure the materials used in construction
are representative of the materials used to construct
the prisms prior to construction.
705.3.3 Masonry prism test record. Compressive
strength verification by masonry prism test records shall
meet the following:
1. A masonry prism test record approved by the
building official of at least 30 masonry prisms which
were built and tested in accordance with ASTM E
447. Prisms shall have been constructed under the
observation of an engineer or special inspector or an
approved agency and shall have been tested by an
approved agency.
2. Masonry prisms shall be representative of the
corresponding construction.
3. The average compressive strength of the test record
shall equal or exceed 1.33 f m'
4. When full allowable stresses are used in design, a set
of three masonry prisms shall be built during
construction in accordance with ASTM E 447 for
each 465 m2 of wall area, but not less than one set of
three prisms for the project.
5. When one half the allowable masonry stresses are
used in design, field testing during construction is
not required. A letter of certification from the
supplier of the materials to the job site shall be
provided at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the
materials to assure the materials used in construction
are representative of the materials used to develop
the prism test record in accordance with Section
705.3.3, Item 1.
705.3.4 Unit strength method. Verification by the unit
strength method shall meet the following:
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
1. When full allowable stresses are used in design, units
shall be tested prior to construction and test units
during construction for each 465 m2 of wall area for
compressive strength to show compliance with the
compressive strength required in Table 705-1; and
EXCEPTION:
Prior to the start ofconstruction, prism testing may be used
in lieu of testing the unit strength. During constroction,
prism testing may also be used in lieu of testing the unit
strength and the grout as reqUired by Section 705.3.4,
Item 4.
2. When one half the allowable masonry stresses are
used in design, testing is not required for the units.
A letter of certification from the manufacturer of the
units shall be provided at the time of, or prior to,
delivery ofthe units to the job site to assure the units
comply with the compressive strength required in
Table 705-1; and
3. Mortar shall comply with the mortar type required in
Table 70S-I; and.
4. When full stresses are used in design for concrete
masonry, grout shall be tested tor each 465 m2 of
wall area, but not less than one test per project, to
show compliance with the compressive strength
required in Table 705-1, Footnote 4.
5. When one half the allowable stresses are used in
design for concrete masonry, testing is not required
for the grout. A letter of certification from the
supplier of the grout shall be provided at the time of,
or prior to, delivery of the grout to the job site to
assure the grout complies with the compressive
strength required in Table 705-1, Footnote 4; or
6. When full allowable stresses are used in design for
clay masonry, grout proportions shall be verified by
the engineer or special inspector or an approved
agency to conform with Table 703-2.
7. When one half the allowable masonry stresses are
used in design for clay masonry, a letter of
certification from the supplier of the grout shall be
provided at the time of, or prior to. delivery of the
grout to the job site to assure the grout contorms to
the proportions of Table 703-2.
705.3.5 Testing prisms from constructed masonry.
When approved by the building official, acceptance of
masonry which does not meet the requirements of Section
 QUALITY ASSURANCE &
7-11
GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
705.3.2, 705.3.3 or 705.3.4 shall be permitted to be based
on tests of prisms cut from the masonry construction in
accordance with the following:
1. A set of three masonry prisms that are at least 28
days old shall be saw cut from the masonry for each
465 m2 of the wall area that is in question but not
less than one set of three masonry prisms for the
project. The length, width and height dimensions of
the prisms shall comply with the requirements of
ASTM E 447. Transporting, preparation and testing
of prisms shall be in accordance with ASTM E 447.
2. The compressive strength of prisms shall be the
value calculated in accordance with UBC Standard
21-17, Section 21.1707.2, except that the net cross
sectional area of the prism shall be based on the net
mortar bedded area.
3. Compliance with the requirement for the specified
compressive strength of masonry, j'm. shall be
considered satisfied provided the modified
compressive strength equals or exceeds the specified
I'm. Additional testing of specimens cut from
locations in question shall be permitted.
705.4 MORTAR TESTING.
When required, mortar shall be tested in accordance with
ASTMC270.
705.5 GROUT TESTING.
When required, grout shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM C 476-83.
National Sbuctural Code of the PbiDppines. Volume 1
SECTION 706 - GENERAL DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
706.1 GENERAL.
706.1.1 ~ope. The design of masonry structures shall
comply with the working stress design provisions of
Section 707, or the strength design provisions of Section
708 or the empirical design provisions of Section 709, and
with the provisions of this section. Unless otherwise stated,
all calculations shall be made using or based on specified
dimensions.
706.1.2 Plans. Plans submitted for approval !ball describe
the required design strengths of masonry materials and
inspection requirements for which all parts of the structure
were designed, and any load test requirements.
706.1.3 Design loads. See Chapter 2 for design loads.
706.1.4 Stack bond. In bearing and nonbearing walls,
except veneer walls, if less than 75 percent of the units in
any transverse vertical plane lap the ends of the units below
a distance less than one half the height of the unit, or less
than one fourth the length of the unit, the wall shall be
considered laid in stack bond.
706.1.5 Multiwytbe walls.
706.5.1 General. All wythes of multiwythe walls shall be
bonded by grout or tied together by corrosion-resistant wall
ties or joint reinforcement conforming to the requirements
of Section 702, and as set forth in this section.
706.5.2 Wall ties in cavity wall eonstmetion. Wall ties
. shall be of sufficient length to engage all wythes. The
portion of the wall ties within the wythe shall be completely
embedded in mortar or grout. The ends of the wall ties
shall be bent to 9O-degree angles with an extension not less
than 51 nun long. Wall ties not completely embedded in
mortar or grout between wythes shall be a single piece with
each end engaged in each wythe.
There shall be at least one 9.5 nun diameter wall tie for
each 0.42 m2 of wall area. For cavity walls in which the
width of the cavity is greater than 75 mm, but not more than
115 nun, at least one 9.5 nun diameter wall tie for each 0.28
2
m of wall area shall be provided.
Ties in alternate courses shall be staggered. The maximum
vertical distance between ties shall not exceed 610 nun and
the maximum horizontal distance between ties shall not
exceed 914 nun.
7-12 MASONRY
Additional ties spaced not more than 914 rom apart shall be
provided around openings within a distance of 305 rom
from the edge of the opening.
Adjustable wall ties shall meet the following requirements:
2
1. One tie shall be provided for each 0.16 m of wall
area. Horizontal and vertical spacing shall not
exceed 406 mm. Maximum misalignment of bed
joints from one wythe to the other shall be 32 mm.
2. Maximum clearance between the connecting parts of
the tie shall be 1.6 mm. When used, pintle ties shall
have at least two 4.8 rom diameter pintle legs.
Wall ties of different size and spacing that provide
equivalent strength between wythes may be used.
706.1.5.3 Wall ties for grouted multiwythe construction.
Wythes of multiwythe walls shall be bonded together with
at least 4.8 mm diameter steel wall tie for each 0.19 m2 of
area. Wall ties of different size and spacing that provide
equivalent strength between wythes may be used.
706.1.5.4 Joint reinforcement. Prefabricated Jomt
reinforcement for masonry wall shall have at least one cross
2 placed closer than three diameters, center to center.
wire of at least NO.9 gage steel for each 0.19 m of wall
area. The vertical spacing of the joint reinforcement shall
not exceed 406 mm. The longitudinal wires shall be
thoroughly embedded in the bed joint mortar. The joint
reinforcement shall engage all wythes.
Where the space between tied wythes is solidly filled with
grout or mortar, the allowable stresses and other provisions
for masonry bonded walls shall apply. Where the space is
not filled, tied walls shall conform to the allowable stress,
lateral support, thickness (excluding cavity), height and tie
requirements for cavity walls.
706.1.6 Vertical Support. Structural members providing
vertical support of masonry shall provide a bearing surface
on which the initial bed joint shall not be less than 6mm or
more than 25mm in thickness and shall be of
noncombustible material, e~cept where masonry is a
nonstructural decorative feature or wearing surface.
706.1.7 Lateral support. Lateral support of masonry may
be provided by cross walls, columns, pilasters, counter forts
or buttresses where spanning horizontally or by floors,
beams, girts or roofs where spanning vertically.
The clear distance between lateral supports of a beam shall
not exceed 32 times the least width of the compression area.
706.1.8 Protection of ties and joint reinforcement. A
minimum of 16mm mortar cover shall be provided between
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
ties or joint reinforcement and any exposed face. The
thickness of grout or mortar between masonry units and
joint reinforcement shall not be less than 6mm, except that
6rom .or smaller diameter reinforcement or bolts may be
placed in bed joints which are at least twice the thickness of
the reinforcement or bolts.
706.1.9 Pipes and conduits embedded in masonry. Pipes
or conduit shall not be embedded in any masonry in a
manner that will reduce the capacity of the masonry to less
than that necessary for required strength or required fire
protection.
Placement of pipes or conduits in unfilled cores of hollow
unit masonry shall not be considered as embedment.
EXCEPTIONS:
1. Rigid electric conduits may be embedded in
structural masonry when their locations have been
detailed on the approved plan .
2. Any pipe or conduit may pass vertically or
horizontally through any masonry by means of a
sleeve at least large enough to pass any hub or
coupling 011 the pipeline. Such sleeves shall not be
nor shall they unduly impair the strength of
constnlction.
706.1.10 Load Test. When a load test is required, the
member or portion ofthe structure under consideration shall
be subjected to a superimposed load equal to twice the
design live load plus one half of the dead load. This load
shall be left in position for a period of 24 hours before
removal. If, during the test or upon removal of the load, the
member or portion of the structure shows evidence of
failure, such changes or modifications as are necessary to
make the structure adequate for the rated capacity shall be
made; or where approved, a lower rating shall be
established, A flexural member shall be considered to have
passed the test if the maximum deflection D at the end of
the 24-hour period does not exceed the value of Formula
(706-1) or (706-2) and the beams and slabs show a recovery
of at least 75 percent of the observed deflection within 24
hours after removal of the load.
(706-1)
e
D
4,00Ot (706-2)
 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
706.1.11 Reuse af masonry units. Masonry units may be
reused when clean, whole and conforming to the other
requirements of this section. All structural properties of
masonry of reclaimed units shall be determined by
approved test
706.1.12 Special provisions in area of seismic risk.
706.1.12.1 General. Masonry structures constructed in the
seismic zones shown in Figure 208-1 shall be designed in
accordance with the design requirements of this chapter and
the special provisions for each seismic zone given in this
section.
706.1.12.2 Special proVISIons for Seismic Zone 2.
Masonry structures in Seismic Zone 2 shall comply with the
following special provisions :
L Columns shall be reinforced as specified in Sections
706.3.6,706.3.7 and 701.2.13.
2. Vertical waH reinforcement of at least 130 mm2 in
cross-sectional area shall be provided continuously
from support to support at each corner, at each side
of each opening, at the ends of walls and at
maximum spacing of 1219 mm apart horizontally
throughout walls. . Where ties are placed in horizontal bed joints, hooks shall
..
.J. Horizontal wall reinforcement not less than 130 mm2
in cross-sectional area shall be provided (1) at the
bottom and top ofwall openings and shall extend not
less than 610 mm or less than 40 bar diameters past
the opening, (2) continuously at structurally
connected roof and floor levels and at the top of
walls, (3) at the bottom of walls or in the top of
foundations when doweled in walls, and (4) at
maximum spacing of 3048 mm unless uniformly
distributed joint reinforcement is provided.
Reinforcement at the top and bottom of openings
when continuous in walls may be used in
determining the maximum spacing specified in Item
1 ofthis paragraph.
4. Where stack bond is used, the minimum horizontal
reinforcement ratio shall be O.OOO7bt. This ratio
shall be satisfied by uniformly distributed joint
reinforcement or by horizontal reinforcement spaced
not over 1219 mm and fully embedded in grout or
mortar.
5. The following materials shall not he used as pa..-t of
the vertical or lateral load-resisting system: Type 0
mortar, masonry cement, plastic cement, non-load
bearing masonry units and glass blud:
National Structural Code of the Philippines. Voh.me 1
7-13
706.1.12.3 Special provisions for Seismic Zone 4. All
masonry structures built in Seismic Zone 4 shall be
designed and constructed in accprdance with requirements
for Seismic Zone 2 and with the following additional
requirements and limitations :
1. Column reinforcement ties. In columns that are
stressed by tensile or compressive axial overturning forces
from seismic loading, the spacing of column ties shall not
exceed 203 mm for the full height of such columns. In all
other columns, ties shall be spaced a maximum of 203 mm
in the tops and bottoms of the columns for a distance of one
sixth of the clear column height, 457 nun, or the maximum
column cross-sectional dimension, whichever is greater.
Tie spacing for the remaining column height shall not
exceed the lesser of 16 bar diameters, 48 tie diameters, the
least column cross-sectional dimension, or 457 mm.
Column ties shall terminate with a minimum. 135-degree
hook with extensions not less than six bar diameters or 102
mm. Such extensions shall engage the longitudinal column
reinforcement and project into the interior of the column.
Hooks shall comply with Section 707.2.2.5, Item 3.
EXCEPTION:
consist of a 90-degree bend having an inside radius of not
less thall four tie diameters plus an extension of 32 tie
diameters.
2. Shear Walls.
2.1 Reinforcement. The portion of the reinforcement
required to resist shear shall be uniformly distributed and
shall be joint reinforcement, deformed bars or a
combination thereof. The spacing of reinforcement in each
direction shall not exceed oile half the length of the
element, nor one half the height of the element, nor 1219
mm.
Joint reinforcement used in exterior walls and considered in
the determination of the shear strength of the member shall
be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 385
& A 641.
Reinforcement required to resist in-plane shear shall be
terminated with a standard hook as defined in Section
707.2.2.5 or with an extension of proper embedment length
beyond the reinforcement at the end of the wall s~ion.
The hook or extension may be turned up, down or
horizontally. Provisions shall be made not to obstruct grout
placement. Wall reinforcement terminating in columns or
beams shall be fully anchored into these elements.
2.2 Bond. Multi wythe grouted masonry shear walls shall
!>e designed with consideration of the adhesion bond
7-14 MASONRY
strength between the grout and masonry units. When bond
strengths are not known from previous tests, the bond
strength shall be determined by tests.
2.3 WaD reinforcement. All walls shall be reinforced with
both vertical and horizontal reinforcement. The sum of the
areas of horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall be at
least 0.002 times the gross cross-sectional area of the wall,
and the minimum area of reinforcement in either direction
shall not be less than 0.0007 times the gross cross-sectional
area of the waiL The minimum steel requirements for
Seismic Zone 2 in Section 706.1.12.3, Items 2 and 3, may
be included in the sum. The spacing of reinforcement shall
not exceed 1219 rum. The diameter of reinforcement shall
not be less than 9.5 rum except that joint reinforcement may
be considered as a part or all of the requirement for
minimum reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be
continuous around wall corners and through intersections.
Only reinforcement which is continuous in the wall or
element s~all be considered in computing the minimum
area of 'reinforcement. Reinforcement with splices
conforming to Section 707.2.2.6 shall be considered as
continuous reinforcement.
2~4 Stack bond. Where stack bond is used, the minimum
horizontal reinforcement ratio shall be 0.0015bt. Where
open-end units are used and grouted solid, the minimum
horizontal reinforcement ratio shall be O.OOO7bt.
Reinforced hollow-unit stacked bond construction which is
part of the seismic-resisting system shall use open-end units
so that all head joints are made solid, shall use bond beam
units to facilitate the flow of grout and shall be grouted
solid.
3. Type N mortar. Type N mortar shall not be used as part
of the vertical-or lateral-load-resisting system.
4. Concrete abutting structural masoury. Concrete
abutting structural masonry, such as at starter courses or at
wall intersections not designed as true separation joints,
shall be roughened to a full amplitude of 1.6 rum and shall
be bonded to the masonry in accordance with the
requirements of this chapter as if it were masonry. Unless
keys or proper reinforcement is provided, vertical joints as
specified in Section 706.1.4 shall be considered to be stack
bond and the reinforcement as required for stack bond shall
extend through the joint and be anchored into the concrete.
706.2 WORK1NG STRESS DESIGN AND
STRENGTH 'DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR
UNREINFORCED AND REINFORCED
MASONRY.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
706.2.1 General. In addition to the requirements of Section
706.1, the design of masonry structures by the working
stress design method and strength design method shall
comply with the requirements of this section. Additionally,
the design of reinforced masonry structures by these design
methods shall comply with th~ requirements of Section
706.3.
706.2.2 Specified compressive strength of masonry. The
allowable stresses for the design of masonry shall be based
on value of1'm selected for the construction.
Verification of the value of 1'm shall be based on
compliance with Section 705.3. Unless otherwise specified,
1'm shall be based on 28-day tests. If other than a 28-day test
age is used, the value off'", shall be as indicated in design
drawings or specifications. Design drawings shall show the
value off'", for which each part of the structure is designed.
706.2.3 EFFECTIVE THICKNESS.
706.2.3.1 Single-wythe walls. The effective thickness of
single-wythe walls of either solid or hollow units is the
specified thickness of the wall.
706.2.3.2 Multiwythe walls. The effective thickness of
multiwythe walls is the specified thickness of the wall if the
space between wythes is filled with mortar or grout. For
walls with an open space between wythes, the effective
thickness shall be determined as for cavity walls.
706.2.3.3 Cavity walls. Where both wythes of a cavity
wall are axially loaded, each wythe shall be considered to
act independently and the effective thickness of each wythe
is as defined in Section 706.2.3. L Where only one wythe is
axially loaded, the effective thickness of the cavity wall is
taken as the square root of the sum of the squares of the
specified thicknesses ofthe wythes.
Where a cavity wall is composed of a single wythe and a
multiwythe, and both sides are axially loaded, each side of
the cavity wall shall be considered to act independently and
the effective thickness of each side is as defined in Sections
706.2.3.1 and 706.2.3.2. Where only one side is axially
loaded, the effective thickness of the cavity wall is the
square root of the sum of the squares of the specified
thicknesses of the sides.
706.2.3.4 Columns. The effective thickness for rectangular
columns in the direction considered is the specified
thickness. The effective thickness for non-rectangular
columns is the thickness of the square column with the
same moment of inertia about its axis as that about the axis
considered in the actual column.
 GENERAL DEsiGN REQUIREMENTS
706.2.4 Effective height. The effective height of columns
and walls shall be taken as the clear height of members
laterally supported at the top and bottom in a direction
normal to the member axis considered. For members not
supported at the top normal to the axis considered, the
effective height is twice the height of the member above the
support. Effective height less than clear height may be used
ifjustified.
706.2.5 Effective area. The effective cross-sectional area
shall be based on the minimum bedded area of hollow units,
or the gross area of solid units plus any grouted area. Where
hollow units are used with cells perpendicular to the
direction of stress, the effective area shall be the lesser of
the minimum bedded area or the minimum cross-sectional
area. Where bed joints are raked, the effective area shall be
correspondingly reduced. Effective areas for cavity walls
shall be that ofthe loaded wythes.
706.2.6 Effective width of intersecting walls. Where a
shear wall is anchored to an intersecting wall or walls, the
width of the overhanging flange formed by the intersected
wall on either side ofthe shear wall, which may be assumed
working with the shear wall for purposes of flexural
stiffness calculations, shall not exceed six times the
thickness of the intersected wall. Limits of the effective
flange may be waived if justified. Only the effective area
of the wall parallel to the shear forces may be assumed to
carry horizontal shear.
706.2.7 Distribution of concentrated vertical loads in
walls. The length of wall laid up in running bond which
may be considered capable of working 'at the maximum
allowable compressive stress to resist vertical concentrated
loads shall not exceed the center-to-center distance between
such loads, nor the width of bearing area plus four times the
wall thickness. Concentrated vertical loads shall not be
assumed to be distributed across continuous vertical mortar
or control joints unless elements designed to distribute the
concentrated vertical loads are employed.
706.2.8 Loads on nonbearing walls. Masonry walls used
as interior partitions or as exterior surfaces of a building
which do not carry vertical loads imposed by other
elements of the building shall be designed to carry their
own weight plus any superimposed finish and lateral forces.
Bonding or anchorage of nonbearing walls shall be
adequate to support the walls and to transfer lateral forces
to the supporting elements.
706.2.9 Vertical deflection. Elements supporting masonry
shall be designed so that their vertical deflection will not
exceed 1/600 of the clear span under total loads. Lintels
shall bear on supporting masonry on each end such that
allowable stresses in the supporting masonry are not
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
7-15
exceeded. A minimum bearing length of 102 rom shall be
provided for lintels bearing on masonry.
706.2.10 Structural continuity. Intersecting structural
eleIlJents intended to act as a unit shall be anchored together
to resist the design forces.
706.2.11 Walls intersecting with floors and roofs. Walls
shall be anchored to all floors, roofs or other elements
which provide lateral support for the wall. Where floors or
roofs are designed to transmit horizontal forces to walls, the
anchorage to such walls shall be designed to resist the
horizontal force.
706.2.12 MODULUS OF ELASTICITY OF
MATERIALS.
706.2.12.1 Modulus of elasticity of masonry. The moduli
for masonry may be estimated as provided below. Actual
values, where required, shall be established by test. The
modulus of elasticity of masonry shall be determined by the
secant method in which the slope of the line for the
modulus of elasticity is taken from 0.05 i'm to a point on the
curve at 0.33 i'm. These values are not to be reduced by one
half as set forth in Section 707.1.2.
Modulus of elasticity of clay or shale unit masonry.
Em = 750i'm, 20.5 GPa maximum (706-3)
Modulus of elasticity of concrete unit masonry.
.", = 750i'm. 20.5 GPa maximum (70614)
706.2.12.2 Modulus of elasticity of steel.
Es = 200GPa (706-5)
706.2.13 Shear modulus of masonry.
G 0.4 Em (706-6)
706.2.14 Placement of embedded anchor bolts.
706.2.14.1 General. Placement requirements for plate
anchor bolts, headed anchor bolts and bent bar anchor bolts
shall be determined in accordance with this subsection.
Bent bar anchor bolts shall have a hook with a 90-degree
bend with an inside diameter of three bolt diameters, plus
an extension of one and one half bolt diameters at the free
end. Plate anchor bolts shall have a plate welded to the
shank to provide anchorage equivalent to headed anchor
bolts.
The effective embedment depth lb for plate or headed
anchor bolts shall be the length of embedment measured
,716 MASONRY
perpendicular from the surface of the masonry to the
bearing surface of the plate or head of the anchorage, and 4.
for bent bar anchors shall be the length of embedment
measured perpendicular from the surface of the masonry to
the bearing surface of the bent end minus one anchor bolt
diameter. All bolts shall be grouted in place with at least
25mm of grout between the bolt and the masonry, except
that 6.4 mm bolts may be placed in bed joints which area at
least 12.7 mm in thickness,
706.2.14.2 Minimum edge distance. The minimum
anchor bolt edge distance It.e measured from the edge of the
masonry parallel with the anchor bolt to the surface of the
anchor bolt shall be 38 mm,
706.2.14.3 Minimum embedment depth. The minimum
embedment depth of anchor bolts 4. shall be four bolt
diameters but not less than 51 mm.
706.2.14.4 Minimum spacing between bolts. The
minimum centerto-center distance between anchor bolts
shall be four bolt diameters.
706.2.15 Flexural resistance of cavity waUsa For
cbmputing the flexural resistance of cavity walls, lateral
loads perpendicular to the plane of the wall shall be
distributed to the wythes according to their respective
flexural rigidities.
706.3 WORKING STRESS DESIGN AND
STRENGTH DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR
REINFORCED MASONRY.
706.3.1 General. In addition to the requirements of
Sections 706.1 and 706.2, the design of reinforced masonry
structures by the working stress design method or the
strength design method shall comply with the requirements
of this section.
706.3.2 Plain bars. The use of plain bars larger than 6.4
mm in diameter is not permitted.
706.3.3 Spacing of longitudinal reinforcement. The clear
distance between parallel bars, except in columns, shall not
be less than the nominal diameter of the bars or 25 mm,
except that bars in a splice may be in contact. This clear
distance requirement applies to the clear distance between a
contact splice and adjacent splices or bars.
The clear distaftce between the surface of a bar and any
surface of a masonry unit shall not be less than 6.4 mm for
fine grout and 12.7 mm for coarse grout. Cross webs of
hollow units may be used as support for horizontal
reinforcement.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
706.3.4 Anchorage of flexural reinforcement. The
tension or compression in any bar at any section shall be
developed on each, side of that section by the required
development length. The development length. of the bar
may be achieved by a combination of an embedment length,
anchorage or, for tension only, hooks.
Except at supports or at the free end of cantilevers, every,
reinforcing bar shall be extended beyond the point at which
it is no longer needed to resist tensile stress for a distance
equal to 12 bar diameters or the depth of the beam,
whichever is greater. No flexural bar shall be terminated in
a tensile zone unless at least one ofthe following conditions
is satisfied :
1. The shear is not over one half that permitted,
including allowance for shear reinforcement where
provided.
2. Additional shear reinforcement in excess of that
required is provided each way from the cutoff a
distance equal to the depth of the beam. The shear
reinforcement spacing shall not exceed dl8rb.
3. The continuing bars provide double the area required
for flexure at that point or double the perimeter
required for reinforcing bond.
At least one third of the total reinforcement provided for
negative moment at the support shall be extended beyond
the extreme position of the point of inflection a distance
sufficient to develop one half the allowable stress in the bar,
not less than 1/16 of the clear span, or the depth d of the
member, whichever is greater.
Tensile reinforcement for negative moment in any span of a
continuous restrained or cantilever beam, or in any member
of a rigid frame, shall be adequately anchored by
reinforcement bond, hooks or mechanical anchors in or
through the supporting member.
At least one third of the required positive moment
reinforcement in simple beams or at the freely supported
end of continuous beams shall extend along the same face
of the beam into the support at least 152 mm. At least one
fourth of the required positive moment reinforcement at the
continuous end of continuous beams shall extend along the
same face ofthe beam into the support at least 152 mm.
Compression reinforcement in flexural members shall be
anchored by ties or stirrups not less than 6.4mm in
diameter, spaced not~farther apart than 16 bar diameters or
48 tie diameters, whichever is less. Such ties or stirrups
shall be used throughout the distance where compression
reinforcement is required.
 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
7-17

706.3.5 Anchorage of shear reinforcement. Single, provided the total cross-sectional area of such smaller ties
separate bars used as shear reinforcement shall be anchored crossing a longitudinal plane is equal to that of the larger
each end by one of the following methods: ties at their required spacing.

Hooking tightly around the longitudinal
reinforcement through 180 degrees.
Embedment above or below the mid-depth of the
beam on the compression side a distance sufficient to
develop the stress in the bar for plain or deformed
bars.
By a standard hook, as defined in Section 707.2.2.5,
considered as developing 52 MPa, plus embedment
sufficient to develop the remainder of the stress to
which the bar is subjected. The effective embedded
length shall not be assumed to exceed the distance
between the mid-depth of the beam and the tangent
of the hook.
The ends of bars forming a single U or multiple U stirrup
shall be anchored by one of the methods set forth in Items 1
through 3 above or shall be bent through an angle of at least
90 degrees tightly around a longitudinal reinforcing bar not
less in diameter than the stirrup bar, and shall project
beyond the bend at least 12 stirrup diameters.
706.3.7 Column ancbor bolt ties. Additional ties shall be
provided around anchor bolts which are set in the top of
columns. Such ties shall engage at least four bolts or,
alternately, at least four vertical column bars or a
combination of bolts and bars totaling at least four. Such
ties shall be located within the top 127 rom of the column
and shall provide a total of 260 rom 2 or more in cross
sectional area. The uppermost tie shall be within 51 mm of
the top of the column.
706.3.8 Effective width b of compression area. In
computing flexural stresses in walls where reinforcement
occurs, the effective width assumed for running bond
masonry shall not exceed six times the nominal wall
thickness or the. center-to-center distance between
reinforcement. Where stack bond is used, the effective
width shall not exceed three times the nominal wall
thickness or the center-to-center distance between
reinforcement or the length of one unit, unless solid grouted
open-end units are used.

The loops or closed ends of simple U or multiple U stirrups

shall be anchored by bending around the longitudinal
reinforcement through an angle of at least 90 degrees and
project beyond the end of the bend at least 12 stirrup
diameters.

706.3.6 Lateral ties. All longitudinal bars for columns

shall be enclosed by lateral ties. Lateral support shall be
provided to the longitudinal bars by the corner of a
complete tie having an included angle of not more than 135
degrees or by a standard hook at the end of a tie. The
corner bars shall have such support provided by a complete
tie enclosing the longitudinal bars. Alternate longitudinal
bars shall have such lateral support provided by ties and no
bar shall be farther than 152 mm from such laterally
supported bar.

Lateral ties and longitudinal bars shall be placed not less

than 38 mm and not more than 127 rom from the surface of
the column. Lateral ties may be placed against the
longitudinal bars or placed in the horizontal bed joints
where the requirements of Section 706.1.8 are met.
Spacing of ties shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar
diameters, 48 tie diameters or the least dimension of the
column but not more than 457 mm.
Ties shall be at least 6.4 mm in diameter for 20 rom or
smaller longitudinal bars and at least 10 rom for
longitudinal bars larger than 20 mm. Ties smaller than 10
mm may be used for longitudinal bars larger than 20 mm,

National structJP'81 Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

1-18 MASONRY

SECTION 707 - WORKING STRESS
DESIGN OF MASONRY
707.1 GENERAL.
707.1.1 Scope. The design of masonry structures using
working stress design shall comply with the provisions of
Section 706 and this section. Stresses in clay or concrete
masonry under service loads shall not exceed the values
given in this section.
707.1.2 Allowable masonry stresses. When quality
assurance provisions do not include requirements for
special inspection as prescribed in Section 701, the
allowable stresses for masonry in Section 707 shall be
reduced by one half.
When one half allowable masonry stresses are used in
Seismic Zone 4, the value ofI'm from Table 705-1 shall be
limited to a maximum of 10 MPa for concrete masonry and
18 MPa for clay masonry unless the value ofI'm is verified
b tests in accordance with Section 705.3.4, Items 1 and 4
or 6. A letter of certification is not required.
strain distribution assumptions with all stresses lfi the
elastic range as follows:
1. Plane sections before bending remain plane after
bending.
2. Stress is proportional to strain.
3. Masonry elements combine to form a homogenous
member.
707.1.5 Embedded anchor bolts.
707.1.5.1 General. Allowable loads for plate anchor bolts,
headed anchor bolts and bent bar anchor bolts shall be
determined in accordance with this section.
707.1.5.2 Tension. Allowable loads in tension shall be the
lesser value selected from Table 707-1 and 707-2 or shall
be determined from the lesser of formula (707-1) or
Formula (707-2).
B, 0.5Ap ~ (707-1)

When one half allowable masonry stresses are used for For SI : B, = 0.042Ap~
design in Seismic Zones 4, the value ofj'm shall be limited
to 10 MPa for concrete masonry and 18 MPa for clay
masonry for Section 705.3.2, Item 3, and Section 705.3.3,
Item 5, unless the value of I'm is verified during B, = 0.2A,fy (707-2)
construction by the testing requirements of Section 705.3 .2,
Item 2. A letter of certification is not required. The area Ap shall be the lesser of Formula (707-3) or
Formula (707-4) and where the projected areas of adjacent
707.1.3 Minimum dimensions for masonry structures anchor bolts everlap, Ap of each anchor bolt shall be
located in Seismic Zones 2 and 4. Elements of masonry reduced by one half of the overlapping area.
structures located in Seismic Zones 2 and 4 shall be in
accordance with this section. (707-3)

707.1.3.1 Bearing waUs. The nominal thickness of (707-4)

reinforced masonry bearing walls shall not be less than
152mm except that nominal 102 mm load-bearing
reinforced hollow-clay unit masonry walls may be used,
provided net area unit strength exceeds 55 MPa, units are 707.1.5.3 Shear. Allowable loads in shear shall be the
laid in running bond, bar sizes do not exceed 12.7 mm with value selected from Table 707-3 or shall be determined
no more than two bars or one splice in a cel~ and joints are from the lesser of Formula (707-5) or Formula (707-6).
flush cut, concave or a protruding V section.
Bv = 350 4 ~ fmAb (707-5)
707.1.3.2 Columns. The least nominal dimension of a
reinforced masonry column shall be 305 mm except that,
for working stress design, if the allowable stresses are
reduced by one halt: the minimum nominal dimension shall
For SI: Bv 1070 .J ~ fm Ab
be 203 mm.

707.1.4 Design assumptions. The working stress design Bv = 0.12 A,fy (707-6)
procedure is based on working stresses and linear stress-

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 WORKING STRESS DESIGN OF MASONRY
Where the anchor bolt edge distance he in the direction of
load is less than 12 bolt diameters, the value of Bv in
Formula (707~5) shall be reduced by linear interpolation to
zero at an lbe distance of 38 mm. Where adjacent anchors
are spaced closer than 8db, the allowable shear of the
adjacent anchors determined by Formula (707~5) shall be
reduced by linear interpolation to 0.75 times the allowable
shear value at a center~to-center spacing of four bolt
diameters.
707.1.5.4 Combined shear and tension. Anchor bolts
subjected to combined shear and tension shall be designed
in accordance with:
~ 1.0 (707-7)
B provided to transfer the calculated stress,
"
707.1.5 Compression in walls and columns.
707.1.6.1 Walls, axial loads. Stresses due to compressive
forces applied at the centroid of wall may be computed,
assuming uniform distribution over the effective area, by
fa = P/A e (707-8)
707.1.6.2 Columns, axial loads. Stresses due to
compressive forces applied at the centroid of columns may
be computed by Formula (707-8) assuming uniform
distribution over the effective area.
707.1.6.3 Columns, bending or combined bending and
axial loads. Stresses in columns due to combined bending
and axial loads shall satisfy the requirements of Section
707.2.7 wherefaffa is replaced by P;Pa. Columns subjected
to bending shall meet all applicable requirements for
flexural design.
707.1.7 Shear waDs, design loads. When calculating shear
or diagonal tension stresses, shear walls which resist
seismic forces in Seismic Zone 4 shall be designed to resist
1.5 times the forces required by Section 208.5.
707.1.8 Design, composite construction.
707.1.8.1 General. The requirements of this section govern
multiwythe masonry in which at least one wythe has
strength or composition characteristics different from the
other wythe or wythes and is adequately bonded to act as a
single structural element
The following assumptions shall apply to the design of
composite masonry :
1, Analysis shall be based on elastic transformed
section of the net area.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
7-19
2. The maximum computed stress in any portion of
composite nlasonry shall not exceed the allowable
stress for the material of that portion.
707.1.8.2 Determination of moduli of elasticity. The
modulus of elasticity of each type of masonry in composite
construction shall be measured by tests if the modular ratio
of the respective types of masonry exceeds 2 to 1 as
determined by Section 706,2.12,
707.1.8.3 Structural continuity.
707.1.8.3.1 Bonding of wythes. All wythes of composite
masonry elements shall be tied together as specified in
Section 706,1.5.2 as a minimum requirement. Additional
ties or 'the combination of grout and metal ties shall be
707.1.8.3.2 Material properties. The effect of
dimensional changes of the various materials and different
boundary conditions of various wythes shall be included in
the design,
707.1.8.4 Design procedure, transformed sections. In
the design of transformed sections, one material is chosen
as the reference material, and the other materials are
transformed to an equivalent area of the reference material
by multiplying the areas of the other materials by the
respective ratios of the moduli of elasticity of the other
materials to that of the reference materiaL Thickness of the
transformed area and its distance perpendiCUlar to a given
bending axis remain unchanged, Effective height or length
of the element remains unchanged.
707.1.9 Reuse of masonry units. The allowable working
stresses for reused masonry units shall not exceed 50
percent of those pennitted for new masonry units of the
same properties,
707.2 DESIGN OF REINFORCED MASONRY.
707.2.1 SCOPE.
The requirements of this section are in addition to the
requirements of Sections 706 and 707,1, and govern
masonry in which reinforcement is used to resist forces.
Walls with openings used to resist lateral loads whose pier
and beam elements are within the dimensional limits of
Section 708,2,6,1.2 may be designed in accordance with
Section 708.2.6. Walls used to resist lateral loads not
meeting the dimensional limits of Section 708,2.6.1.2 may
be designed as walls in accordance with this section or
Section 708.2.5,
7-20 MASONRY
707.2.2 REINFORCEMENT.
707.2.2.1 Maximum reinforcement size. The maximum
size of reinforcement shall be 32 mm. Maximum
reinforcement area in cells shall be 6 percent of the cell area
without splices and 12 percent of the cell area with splices.
707.2.2.2 Cover. All reinforcing bars, except joint
reinforcement, shall be completely embedded in mortar or
grout and have a minimum cover, including the masonry
unit, of at least 19 mm, 38 mm of cover when the masonry'
is exposed to weather and 50 mm of cover when the
masonry is exposed to soil.
707.2.2.3 Development length. The required development
length ld for deformed bars or deformed wire shall be
calculated by :
ld = 0.29 db.ls for bars in tension (707-9)
ld 0.22 db.ls for bars in compression (707-10)
Development length for smooth bars shall be twice the
length determined by Formula (707-9).
707.2.2.4 Reinforcement bond stress. Bond stress u in
reinforcing,bars shall not exceed the following:
Plain Bars I 413 kPa
Deformed Bars I 1378 kPa
Deformed Bars without I EXCEPTION:
S'pecial Inspection 689 kPa
707.2.2.5 Hooks.
1. The term "standard hook" shall mean one of the
following:
1.1 A 180-degree tum plus extension of at least 4
bar diameters, but not less than 63mm at free
end of bar.
1.2 A 90-degree tum plus extension of at least 12
bar diameters at free end of bar.
1.3 For stirrup and tie anchorage only, either a 90
degree or a US-degree tum, plus an extension of
at least six bar diameters, but not less than 63
mm at the free end ofthe bar.
2. Inside diameter of bend of the bars, other than for
stirrups and ties, shall not be less than that set forth
in Table 707-4
Inside diameter of bend for 16 mm or smaller stirrups
and ties shall not be less than four bar diameter.
Inside diameter of bend for 16mm or larger stirrups
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
and ties shall not be less than that set forth in Table
707-4.
4. Hooks shall not be permitted in the tension portion of
any beam, except at the ends of simple or cantilever
beams or at the freely supported end of continuous or
restrained beams.
5. Hooks shall not be assumed to carry a load which
would produce a tensile stress in the bar greater than
52MPa.
6. Hooks shall not be considered effective in adding to
the compressive resistance of bars.
7. Any mechanical device capable of developing the
strength of the bar without damage to the masonry
may be used in lieu of a hook. Data must be
presented to show the adequacy of such devices.
707.2.2.6 Splices. The amount of lap of lapped splices
shall be sufficient to transfer the allowable stress of the
reinforcement as specified in Sections 706.3.4, 707.2.2.3
and 707.212. In no case shall the length of the lapped
splice be less than 30 bar diameters for compression or 40
bar diameters for tension.
Welded or mechanical connections shall develop 125
percent of the specified yield strength of the bar in tension.
For compression bars in columns that are not part of the
seismic-resisting system and are not subject tof/exlIre, only
the compressive strength need be developed
When adjacent splices in grouted masonry are separated by
76 mm or less, the required lap length shall be increased 30
percent.
EX(''EPTION:
Where lap splices are .\1aggered at least 2-1 bars diameters,
no increase in lap length is required
See Section 707.2.12 for lap splice increases.
707.2.3 Design assumptions. The following assumptions
are in addition to those stated in Section 707.].4:
L Masonry carries no tensile stress.
2. Reinforcement is completely surrounded by and
bonded to masonry material so that they work
together as a homogenous material within the range
of allowable working stresses.
 WORKING STRESS DESIGN OF MASONRY

707.2.4 Nonrectangular flexural elements. Flexural 707.2.8 Allowable shear stress in flexural members.
7-21
l I

elements of nonrectangular cross section shall be designed Where no shear reinforcement is provided, the allowable
in accordance with the assumptions given in Sectiol!S shear stress F .. in flexural members is :
707.1.4 and 707.2.3.

707.2.5 Allowable axial compressive stress and force.

'
Fv = 0.083 w.-: 345 kPa maximum (707-17)

For members other than reinforced masonry columns, the

allowable axial compressive stress Fa shall be determined EXCEPTION:
as follows.
For a distance of 1116 the clear span beyond the point of
inflection, the maximum stress shall be 140 kPa.
(707-11)

Where shear reinforcement designed to take entire shear

for h'l r:5. 99 force is provided, the allowable shear stress, F" in flexural
members is:
70r J2
Fa := 0.25) 111 ( h' (707-12) Fv = 3.0 ~ 150 psi maximum

for h 'Ir> 99 For SI: Fv= O.2SW;:: 1.0 MPamaximum

For reinforced masonry columns, the allowable axial

compressive force P a shall be determined as follows: 707.2.9 Allowable shear stress in shear walls. Where
inplane flexural reinforcement is provided and masonry is
used to resist all shear, the allowable shear stress Fv in shear
Pa [0.25}mAe + 0.65As Fscl wall is:

for h'/r:5. 99 (707-13) MJ

Vd "'-~0-4S
I}m 'l ;;J
M"")maximum

(707-19)

For SI: Fv 1112 W. ' 240 kPa maximum (707-20)

for h'/r> 99 (707-14) Where shear reinforcement designed to take all the shear is
provided, the allowable shear stress F.." in shear walls is:

707.2.6 Allowable flexural compressive stress. The

allowable flexural compressive stress Fh is : ForA1/Vd < 1,

Fb =: 0.33/'m , 13.8 MPa maximum (707-15)

707.2.7 Combined compressive stresses, unity formula.

Elements subjected to combined axial and flexural stresses
F.~ 1!24G - ~J [120 -45 :J maximum
(707-21)
shall be designed in accordance with accepted principles of
mechanics or in accordance with Formula (707-16) : MlVd;? 1, FV7 0.12#,"520 kPa maximum
" " (707-22)
fa Jb
(707-16)
707.2.10 Allowable bearing stress. When a member
bears on the full area of a masonry element, the allowable
bearing stress F br is :

Fbr = 0.26}m (707-23)

National structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

722 MASONRY

When a member bears on one third or less of a masonry Fa, the lap length of splices shall be increased not less than
element, the allowable bearing stress Fbr is: 50 percent of the minimum required length. Other
equivalent means of stress transfer to accomplish the same
Fbr = 0.38 Pm (70'/-24) 59 percent increase may be used.

Formula (707-24) applies only when the least dimension
between the edges of the loaded and unloaded areas is a
minimum of one fourth of the parallel side dimension of the
loaded area. The allowable bearing stress on a reasonably
concentric area greater than one third but less than the full
area shall be interpolated between the values of Formulas
(707-23) and (707-24).
707.2.11 AUowable stresses in reinforcement. The
allowable stresses in reinforcement shall be as follows'
707.2.13 Reinforcement for columns. Columns shall be
provided with reinforcement as specified in this section.
707.2.13.1 Vertical reinforcement. The area of vertical
reinforcement shall not be less than 0.005 Ae and not more
than 0.04 Ae. At least four 10 mm bars shall be provided.
The minimum clear distance between parallel bars in
columns shall be two and one halftimes the bar diameter.
707.2.14 Compression in walls and columns.

707.2.14.1 General. Stresses due to compressive forces in

1. Tensile stress.
walls and columns shall be calculated in accordance with
Section 707.2.5.
1.1 Deformed bars,
707.2.14.2 Walls, bending or combined bending and
F, = 0.5.h ' 165 MPa maximum
(707-25) axial loads. Stresses in walls due to combined bending and
Wire reinforcement, axial loads shall satisfy the requirements of Section 707,2,7
1.2
where ,fa is given by Formula (707-8). Walls subjected to
Fs = 0.5fy , 207 MPa maximum bending with or without axial loads shall meet all
(707-26) applicable requirements for flexural design. The design of
Ties, anchors and smooth bars, walls with an h '/t ratio larger than 30 shalJ be based on
1.3
forces and moments determined from an analysis of the
p, = O.4/;, , 138 MPa maximum structure. Such analysis shall consider the influence of
(707-27) axial loads and variable moment of inertia on member
stiffness and fixed-end moments, effect of deflections on
moments and forces and the effects of duration of loads.
2. Compressive stress.
707.2.15 Flexural design, rectangular flexural elements.
2.1 Deformed bars in columns, Rectangular elements shall be designed in accordance with
the following formulas or other methods based on the
assumptions given in Sections 707.1.4, 707.2.3 and this
Fsc = OA/;. ,165 MPa maximum
section.
(707-28)
2.2 Deformed bars in flexural members,
1. Compressive stress in the masonry :

~ [j~J
f~ = 0.5 h . 165 MPa maximum
(707-29) Ji ; (707-31)
2.3 Deformed bars in shear walls which are confined by
lateral ties throughout the distance where 2. Tensile stress in the longitudinal reinforcement:
compression reinforcement is required and where
such lateral ties are not less than 6.4 mm in diameter M
and spaced not farther apart than 16 bar diameters or
AJd (707-32)
48 tie diameters,

Fsc 0.4.(" . 165 MPa maximum 3. Design coefficients:

(707-30)

707.2.12 Lap splice increases. In regions of moment k J(n p/ +2np -np (707-33)
where the design tensile stresses in the reinforcement are
greater than 80 percent of the allowable steel tensile stress or

Association of Structural Engineers-of the-PhiJippines

 .,

WORKING STRESS DESIGN OF MASONRY 7-23

1 forces and are in addition to the requirements of Sections

k 706 and 707.1.
1 +
is
707.3.2 ADowable axial compressive stress. The
nfi (70;-34) allowable axial compressive stress Fa is :

~ - [~II for h ~ 99
k
j 1 F = 0.25 f'm '/r (707-39)
3 (707-35) a ~ 140d.J

707.2.16 Bond of flexural reinforcement. In flexural

members in which tensile reinforcement is parallel to the
70r]2for h'lr> 99
compressive face, the bond stress shall be computed by the
F = 0.25f'm
a [ -
h'
(707-40)

formula:
707.3.3 ADowable flexural compressive stress. The
v allowable flexural compressive stress Fb is :
u
(707-36)
Fb = 0.33f'm, 13.8 MPa maximum (707-41)
707.2.17 Shear in flexural members and sbear walls.
The shear stress in flexural members and shear walls shall
be computed by :
707.3.4 Combined compressive stresses, unity formula.
Elements subjected to combined axial and flexural stresses
shall be designed in accordance with accepted principles of
(707-37) mechanics or in accordance with the Formula (707-42) :

For members of T or I section, b' shall be substituted for b.

Where Iv as computed by Formula (707-37) exceeds the (707-42)

allowable shear stress in masonry, F", web reinforcement

shall be provided and designed to carry the total shear
force. Both vertical and horizontal shear stresses shall be
considered.
The area required for shear reinforcement placed
perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement shall be
computed by :
sV
(707-38)
Where web reinforcement is required, it shall be so spaced
that every 45-degree line extending from a point at d/2 of
the beam to the longitudinal tension bars shall be crossed by
at least one line of web reinforcement.
707.3.5 ADowable tensile stress. Resultant tensile stress
due to combined bending and axial load shall not exceed
the allowable flexural tensile stress, Ft.
The allowable tensile stress for walls in flexure without
tensile reinforcement using portland cement and hydrated
lime, or using mortar cement Type M or S mortar, shall not
exceed the values in Table 707-5.
Values in Table 707-5 for tension normal to head joints are
for running bond; no tension is allowed across head joints
in stack bond masonry. These values shall not be used for
horizontal flexural members.
707.3.6 Allowable shear stress in flexural members.
The allowable shear stress F" in flexural members is :

707.3 DESIGN OF UNREINFORCED

MASONRY. Fv = 1.0 F 50 psi maximum (707-43)

707.3.1 General. The requirements of this section govern For SI : F l , = 0.083.JF: ,345 kPa maximum
masonry in which reinforcement is not used to resist design

National Structural Code of the Philippines, VoIIane:'

7-24 MASONRY

EXCEPTION: 707.3.12 Shear in flexural members and shear walls.

Shear calculations for flexural members and shear walls
th
For a distance of 1116 the clear span beyond the point qf shall be based on Formula (707 -48).
inflection, the maximum stress shall be 138 kPa.
(707-48)
707.3.7 Allowable shear stress in shear walls. The
allowable shear stress Fv in shear walls is as follows: 707.3.13 Corbels. The slope of corbelling (angle
measured from the horizontal to the face of the corbelled
I. Clay units, Fv
(707-44)
= 0.3 F- ' 80 psi maximum surface) or unreinforced masonry shaH not be less than 60
degrees.

For SI: Fv 0.025 F 551 kPa maximum The maximum horizontal projection of corbelling from
the plane of the wall shaH be such that allowable stresses
2. Concrete units with Type M or S mortar, Fv =234 are not exceeded.
kPa maximum.
707.3.14 Stack bond. Masonry units laid in stack bond
shall have longitudinal reinforcement of at least 0.00027
3. Concrete units with Type N mortar, F" 158 kPa times the vertical cross-sectional area of the wall placed
maximum. horizontally in the bed joints or in bond beams spaced
4. The allowable shear stress in unreinforced vertically not more than 1219 mm apart.
masonry may be increased by 0.2 imd.

707.3.8 Allowable bearing stress. When a member bears

on the full area of a masonry element, the allowable bearing
Fbr shall be:
stress

Fbr = 0.26j'm (707-45)

When a member bears on one-third or less of a masonry

element, the allowable bearing stress Fbr shall be .

(707-46)

Formula (707-46) applies only when the least dimension

between the edges of the loaded and unloaded areas is a
minimum of one fourth of the parallel side dimension of the
loaded area. The allowable bearing stress on a reasonably
concentric area greater than one third but less than the full
area shall be interpolated between the values of Formulas
(707-45) and (707-46).,

707.3.9 Combined bending and axial loads, compressive

stresses. Compressive stresses due to combined bending
and axial loads shall satisfy the requirements of Section
707.3.4.

707.3.10 Compression in walls and columns. Stresses

due to compressive forces in walls and columns shall be
calculated in accordance with Section 707.2.5.

707.3.11 Flexural design. Stresses due to flexure shall not

exceed the values given in Sections 707.1.2, 707.3.3 and
707.3.5, where:

(707-47)

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 STRENGTH DESIGN OF MASONRY
7-25

SECTION 708 - STRENGTH DESIGN . 708.1.4.3 Wall design for in-plane loads.
OF MASONRY 708.1.4.3.1 Axial load. Axial load and axial load with
flexure: <I> = 0.65.
708.1 GeneraL
For walls with symmetrical reinforcement in which};. does
708.1.1 General Provisions. The design of hollow-unit not exceed 413 MPa, the value of <I> may be increased
clay and concrete masonry structures using strength design linearly to 0.85 as the value of <I> Pn decreases from 0.10 fill
shall comply with the provisions of Section 706 and this Ae or 0.25 Pb to zero.
section.
For solid grouted walls, the value of Ph may be calculated
EXCEPTION:
by Formula (708-2)

Two-wythe solid-unit masonry may be used under Sections

(708-2)
708.2.1 and 708.2.4.
Where:
708.1.2 Quality assurance provisions. Special inspection
during construction shall be provided as set forth in Section (708-3)
1701.5, Item 7 ofUBC.
708.1.4.3.2 Shear. Shear: <I> = 0.60.
708.1.3 Required strength. The required strength shall be
determined in accordance with the factored load The value of <I> may be 0.80 for any shear wall when its
combinati::ms of Section 203.3. nominal shear strength exceeds the shear corresponding to
development of its nominal flexural streng.rh tor the
. 708.1.4 Design strength. Design strength is the nominal factored-load combination.
strength, multiplied by the strength-reduction factor, <1>, as
specified in this section. Masonry members shall be 708.1.4.4 Moment-resisting wall frames.
proportioned such that the design strength exceeds the
required strength. 708.1.4.4.1 Flexure with or without axial load. The
value of <I> shall be as determined from formula (708-4);
708.1.4.1 Beams, piers and columns.
however, the value of 1j> shall not be less than 0.65 nor
greater than 0.85.
708.1.4.1.1 Flexure. Flexure with or without axial load,
the value of <I> shall be determined from Formula (708-1):

Pu
PU
0.85 -2 [ Anf'm
J (708-4)

(708-1)
708.1.4.4.2 Shear. Shear: <I> = 0.80.
and 0.60 s;; 1j> s;; 0.80 708.1.4.5 Anchor. Anchor bolts: <I> = 0.80.

708.1.4.1.2 Shear. Shear: <I> 0.60 708.1.4.6 Reinforcement.

708.1.4.2 Wall design for out-of-plane loads. 708.1.4.6.1 Development. Development: <I> 0.80.

708.1.4.2.1 Walls with factored axial load ofO.04Fm or 708.1.4.6.2 Splices. Splices: <I> = 0.80.
less. Flexure: <I> = 0.80.
708.1.5 Anchor bolts.
708.1.4.2.2 Walls with factored axial load greater than
0.04 F".. Axial load and axial load with flexure: <I> 0.80. 708.1.5.1 Required strength. The required strength of
Shear: <I> = 0.60. embedded anchor bolts shall be determined from factored
loads as specified in Section 708.1.3.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

726 MASONRY
708.1.5.2 Nominal anchor bolt strength. The nominal
strength of anchor bolts times the strength-reduction factor
shall equal or exceed the required strength.
The nominal tensile capacity of anchor bolts shall be
determined from the lesser of Formula (708-5) or (708-6).
(708-5)
Bm =OAAify (708-6)
The area Ap shall be the lesser of Formula (708-7) or
(708-8) and where the projected areas of adjacent anchor
bolts overlap, the value of Ap of each anchor bolt shall be
reduced by one half of the overlapping area.
(708-7)
(708-8)
The nominal shear capacity of anchor bolts shall be
determined from the lesser of Formula (708-9) or (708-10).
Bsn 2750 J} m Ab (708-9)
Bm 0.25A,fy (708-10)
Where the anchor bolt edge distance, [be, in the direction of
load is less than 12 bolt diameters, the value of Brn in
formula (808-9) shall be reduced by linear interpolation to
zero at an he distance of 38 mm. Where adjacent anchor
bolts are spaced closer than 8db , the nominal shear strength
of the adjacent anchors determined by Formula (708-9)
shall be reduced by linear interpolation to 0.75 times the
nominal shear strength at a center-to-center spacing of four
bolt diameters.
Anchor bolts subjected to combined shear and tension shall
be designed in accordance with Formula (708-11).
btu bSll
- + ~ 1.0
Tensile strength of masonry walls shall be neglected in
tPBtn tPBsn (708-11)
flexural calculation of strength, except when computing
708.1.5.3 Anchor bolt placement. Anchor bolts shall be
placed so as t~ meet the edge distance, embedment depth
and spacing requirements of Sections 706.2 .14.2,
706.2.14.3 and 706.2.14.4.
Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines
708.2 REINFORCED MASONRY.
708.2.1 General.
708.2.1.1 Scope. The requirements of this section are in
addition to the requirements of Sections 706 and 708.1 and
govern masonry in which reinforcement is used to resist
forces.
708.2.1.2 Design assnmptions. The following assumptions
apply:
Masonry carries no tensile stress greater than the modulus
ofrupture.
Reinforcement is completely surrounded by and bonded to
masonry material so that they work together as a
homogeneous material.
Nominal strength of singly reinforced masonry wall cross
sections for combined flexure and axial load shall be based
on applicable conditions of equilibrium and compatibility
of strains. Strain in reinforcement and masonry walls shall
be assumed to be directly proportional to the distance from
the neutral axis.
Maximum usable strain,
compression fiber shall:
e",." at the extreme masonry
1. be 0.003 for the design of beams, piers, columns and
walls.
2. not exceed 0.003 for moment-resisting wall frames,
unless lateral reinforcement as defined in Section
708.2.6.2.6 is utilized.
Strain in reinforcement and masonry shall be assumed to be
directly proportional to the distance from the neutral axis.
Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strengthh for
grade of reinforcement used shall be taken as Es times steel
strain. For strains greater than that corresponding to h,
stress in reinforcement shall be considered independent of
strain and equal to/;,.
'requirements for deUection.
Relationship between masonry compressive stress and
masonry strain may be assumed to be rectangular as defined
by the following:
Masonry stress of 0.85 1'm shall be assumed uniformly
distributed over an equivalent compression zone bounded
by edges of the cross section and a straight line located
..~
 STRENGTH DESIGN OF MASONRY
parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a = 0.8Sc from the
fiber of maximum compressive strain. Distance c from
fiber of maximum strain to the neutral llxis shall he
measured in a direction perpendicular to that axis.
708.2.2 Reinforcement requirements aDd details.
708.2.2.1 Maximum reinforcement. The maximum size
of reinforcement shall be 28 mm. The diameter of a bar
shall not exceed one fourth the least dimension of a cell.
No more than two bars shall be placed in a cell of a wall or
a wall frame.
708.2.2.2 Placement. The placement of reinforcement
shall comply with the following:
In columns and piers, the clear distance between vertical
reinforcing bars shall not be less than one and one-half
times the nominal bar diameter, nor less than 38mm.
708.2.2.3 Cover. All reinforcing bars shall be completely
embedded in mortar or grout and shall have a cover of not
less than 38 mm nor less than 2.S db.
708.2.2.4 Standard books. A standard hook shall be one
of the following:
1. A 180-degree tum plus an extension of at least four
bar diameters, but not less than 63mm at the free end
of the bar.
2. A 13S-degree tum plus an extension of at least six
bar diameters at the free end of the bar.
3. A 90-degree tum plus an extension of at least 12 bar
diameters at the free end of the bar.
708.2.2.5 Minimum bend diameter for reinforcing bars.
Diameter of bend measured on the inside of a bar other than
for stirrups and ties in sizes 10 mm through 16 m~ shall not
be less than the values in Table 707-4
Inside diameter of bends for stirrups and ties shall not be
less than 4db for 16 mm bars and smaller For bars larger
than No.5, diameter of bend shall be in accordance with
Tahle 707-4
708.2.2.6 Development. The calculated tension or
compression reinforcement shall be developed 10
accordance with the follmving provisions:
The embedment length of reinforcement shall be
determined by Formula (708-] 2).
(708-12)
National structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
7-27 1
,,
Where:
ForSI:
1.8d/h
(708-13)
K shall not exceed 3db
The minimum embedment length of reinforcement shall be
305 mm.
708.2.2.7 Splices. Reinforcement splices shall comply
with one of the following:
1. The minimum length oflap for bars shall be 305 mm
or the length determined by Formula (708-14).
(708-14)
Bars spliced by non-contact lap splices shall be spaced
transversely a distance not greater than one fifth the
required length oflap or more than 203mm.
2. A welded splice shall have the bars butted and
welded to develop in tension 125 percent ofthe yield
strength of the bar,};..
3. Mechanical splices shall have the bars connected to
develop in tension or compression, as required, at
least 125 percent ofthe yield strength of the bar,Y;.
708.2.3 Design of beams. piers and columns.
708.2.3.1 General. The requirements of this section are
for the design of masonry beams, piers and columns.
The value off'", shall not be less than lO.3 MPa. For
computational purposes, the value of 1'111 shall not exceed
21.6MPa.
708.2.3.2 Design assumptions.
Member design forces shall be based on an analysis which
considers the relative stiffuess of structural members. The
calculation of lateral stiffness shall include the contribution
of all beams, piers and columns.
The effects of cracking on member stiffness shall be
considered.
The drift ratio of piers and columns shaiI satisfy the limits
specitied in Chapter 2.
728 MASONRY
708.2.3.3 Balanced reinforcement ratio for compression
limit state. Calculation of the balanced reinforcement
ratio, Pb, shall be based on the following assumptions:
1. The distribution of strain across the section shall be
assumed to vary linearly from the maximum usable
strain, emit, at the extreme compression fiber of the
element, to a yield strain of fiE. at the extreme
tension fiber of the element.
2. Compression forces shall be in equilibrium with the
sum of tension forces in the reinforcement and the
maximum axial load associated with a loading
combination 1.0D + 1.0L + (1.4E or 1.3W).
3. The reinforcement shall be assumed to be uniformly
distributed over the depth of the element and the
balanced reinforcement ratio shall be calculated as
the area of this reinforcement divided by the net area
of the element.
4. All longitudinal reinforcement shaH be included in
calculating the balanced reinforcement ratio except
that the contribution of compression reinforcement to
resistance of compressive loads shall not be
considered.
708.2.3.4 Required strength. Except as required by
Sections 708.2.3.6 through 708.2.3.12, the required
strength shall be determined in accordance with Section
708.1.3.
708.2.3.5 Design strength. Design strength provided by
beam, pier or column cross sections in terms of axial force,
shear and moment shall be computed as the nominal
strength multiplied by the applicable strength-reduction
factor, 4>, specified in Section 708.1.4.
708.2.3.6 Nominal strength.
708.2.3.6.1 Nominal axial and flexural strength. The
nominal axial strength, Pn , and the nominal flexural
strength, M", of a cross section shall be determined in
accordance with the design assumptions of
Section 708.2.1.2 and 108.2.3 .2.
The maximum nominal axial compressive strength shall be
determined in accordance with Formula (708-15).
(708-15)
708.2.3.6.2 Nominal shear strength. The nominal shear
strength shall be
(708-16)
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
Where :
ForSI:
and
(708-18)
L The nominal shear strength shall not exceed the value
given in Table 708-1.
2. The value of Vm shall be assumed to be zero within
any region subjected to net tension factored loads.
3. The value of v,,, shall be assumed to be 172 kPa where
M" is greater than 0.7 Mn. The required moment, M",
for seismic design for comparison with the 07 Mn
value of this section shall be based on an R", of 3.
708.2.3.7 Reinforcement.
1. Where transverse reinforcement is required, the
maximum spacing shall not exceed one half the
depth of the member nor 1219 mm.
2. Flexural reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed
throughout the depth of the element.
3. Flexural elements subjected to load reversals shall be
symmetrically reinforced.
4. The nominal moment strength at any section along a
member shall not be less than one fourth of the
maximum moment strength.
5. The flexural reinforcement ratio, P, shall not exceed
0.5 Ph.
6. Lap splices shall comply with the provisions of
Section 708.2.2.7.
7. Welded splices and mechanical splices which
develop at least 125 percent of the specified yield
strength . of a bar may be used for splicing the
reinforcement. Not more than two longitudinal bars
shall be spliced at a section. The distance between
splices of adjacent bars shall be at least 762 mm
along the longitudinal axis.
8. Specified yield strength of reinforcement shall not
exceed 413 MPa. The actual yield strength based on
mill tests shall not exceed 1.3 times the specified
yield strength.

STRENGTH DESIGN OF MASONRY
708.2.3.8 Seismic design provisions. The lateral seismic
load resistance in any line or story level shall be provided
by shear walls or wall frames, or a combination of shear
walls and wall frames. Shear walls and wall frames shall
provide at least 80 percent of the lateral stiffness in any line
or story level.
EXCEPTION:
Where seismic loads are determined ba'Oed on Rw not
greater than three and where all joints satisfy the
provisions of Section 708.2.6.2.9, the piers may be used to
provide seismic load resistance.
708.2.3.9 Dimensional limits. Dimensions shall be in
accordance with the following :
1. Beams.
1.1 The nominal width of a beam shall not be less than
153 mm.
1.2 The clear distance between locations of lateral
bracing of the compression side of the beam shall not
exceed 32 times the least width of the compression
area.
1.3 The nominal depth of a beam shall not be less than
203 mm.
2. Piers.
2.1 The nominal width of a pier shall not be less than
153 mm and shall not exceed 406 mm.
2.2 The distance between lateral supports of a pier shall
not exceed 30 times the nominal width of the piers
except as provided for in Section 708.2.3.9, Item 2.3.
2.3 When the distance between lateral supports of a pier
exceeds 30 times the nominal width of the pier, the
provisions of Section 708.2.4 shall be used for
design.
2.4 The nominal length of a pier shall not be less than
three times the nominal width of the pier. The
nominal length of a pier shall not be greater than six
times the nominal width of the pier. The clear height
of a pier shall not exceed five times the nominal
length of the pier.
EXCEPTION:
The length of a pier may be equal to the width of the pier
when the axial force at the location ofmaximum moment is
less than 0.04 j'mAg
National Structural Code of
1
7-29
3. Columns.
3. I The nominal width of a column shall not be less than
305 mm.
3.2 The distance between lateral supports of a column
shall not exceed 30 times the nominal width of the
column.
3.3 The nominal leni,rth of a column shall not be less
than 305 mm and not greater than three times the
nominal width of the column.
708.2.3.10 Beams.
708.2.3.10.1 Scope. Members designed primarily to resist
flexure shall comply with the requirements of this section
The factored axial compressive force on a beam shall not
exceed 0.05 Aej'",.
708.2.3.10.2 Longitudinal reinforcement.
1. The variation in the longitudinal reinforcing bars shall
not be greater than one bar size. Not more than two
bar sizes shall be used in a beam.
2. The nominal flexural strength of a beam shall not be
less than 1.3 times the nominal cracking moment
strength of the beam. The modulus ofrupture,j,., for
this calculation shall be assumed to be 1.6 MPa.
708.2.3.10.3 Transverse reinforcement.
Transverse reinforcement shall be provided where V,
exceeds Vm Required shear, Vu, shall include the effects of
the drift. The value of Vu shall be based on LiM, When
transverse shear reinforcement is required, the following
provisions shall apply:
1. Shear reinforcement shall be a single bar with 180
degree hook at each end.
2. Shear reinforcement shall be hooked around the
longitudinal reinforcement.
3. The min. transverse shear reinforcement ratio shall
be 0.0007.
4. The first transverse bar shall not be more than one
fourth of the beam depth from the end of the beam.
708.2.3.10.4 Construction. Beams shall be so!id grouted.
708.2.3.11 Piers.
708.2.3.11.1 Scope. Piers proportioned to resist flexure
and shear in conjunction with axial load shall comply with
the Philippines, Volume 1
7-30 MASONRY
the requirements of this section. The factored axial
compression on the piers shall not exceed 0.3 A,f'm.
708.2.3.11.2 Longitudinal reinforcement. A pier
subjected to in-plane stress reversals shall be longitudinally
reinforced symmetrically on both sides of the neutral axis
of the pier.
L One bar shall be provided in the end cells.
2. The minimum longitudinal reinforcement ratio shall
be 0.0007.
708.2.3.11.3 Transverse reinforcement. Transverse
reinforcement shall be provided where V;, exceeds Vm.
Required shear, Vu , shall include the effects of drift. The
value of Vu shall be based on 41. When transverse shear
reinforcement is required, the following provisions shall
apply:
1. Shear reinforcement shall be hooked around the
extreme longitudinal bars with a 180-degree hook.
Alternatively, at wall intersections, transverse
reinforcement with a 90-degree standard hook
around a vertical bar in the intersecting wall shall be
permitted.
2. The minimum transverse reinforcement ratio shall be
0.0015.
708.2.3.12 Columns.
708.2.3.12.1 Scope. Columns shall comply with the
requirements of this section.
708.2.3.12.2 Longitudinal reinforcement. Longitudinal
reinforcement shall be a minimum of four bars, one in each
corner of the column.
1. Maximum reinforcement area shall be 0.03 A".
2. Minimum reinforcement area shall be 0.005 A".
708.2.3.12.3 Lateral ties.
1. Lateral ties shall be provided In accordance with
Section 706.3.6.
2. Minimum lateral reinforcement area shall be 0.0018
Ag .
708.2.3.12.4 Construction. Columns shall be solid
grouted.
708.2.4 WaD design for out-of-plane loads.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
708.2.4.1 ~neral. The requirements of this section ar<:
for the design of walls for out-of-plane loads.
708.2.4.2 Maximum reinforcement. The reinforcement
ratio shall not exceed 0.5 Pb.
708.2.4.3 Moment and deflection calculations. All
moment and deflection calculations in Section 708.2.4 are
based on simple support conditions top and bottom. Other
support and fixity conditions, moments and deflections
shall be calculated using established principles of
mechanics.
708.2.4.4 Walls with axial load of 0.04 f'm or less. The
procedures set forth in this section, which consider the
slenderness of walls by representing effects of axial forces
and deflection in calculation of moments, shall be used
when the vertical load stress at the location of maximum
moment does not exceed 0.04/,,,, as computed by Formula
(708-19). The value off'", shall not exceed 41.3 MPa.
----:::; 0.04}11I
(708-19)
Walls shall have a minimum thickness of 153 mm.
Required moment and axial force shall be determined at the
midheight of the wall and shall be used for design The
factored moment, M", at the midheight of the wall shall be
determined by Formula (708-20).
h1
11'1/ e
Al,,= - - + P"r - + PIlLl/l
8 2
(708-20)
Where:
Au = deflection at midheight of wall due to factored loads
(708-21)
The design strength for out-of-plane wall loading shall be
determined by Formula (708-22).
(708-22)
Where:
M" Asefy (d - 02) (708-23)
AS<! . (Al;, p,J /'/;" effective area of steel (708-24)
 7-31
STRENGTH DESIGN OF MASONRY

a = (Pu -rAsfy) O.85/'1II b,depthofstressblock

J,. = 0.3~1.6 MFa maximum (708-31)
due to factored loads (708-25)
2. For partially grouted hollow-unit masomy,
708.2.4.5 Wan with axial load greater than 0.04fm' The
procedures set forth in this section shall be used for the
design of masonry walls when the vertical load stresses at
J,. = 0.21 F 861 kPa maximum (708~32)

the location of maximum moment exceed 0.04 1'm but are

less than 0.2 1'm and the slenderness ratio h 'It does not 3. For two-wythe brick masomy,
exceed 30.'

Design strength provided by the wall cross section in terms

of axial force, shear and moment shall be computed as the
nominal strenbrth multiplied by the applicable strength
reduction factor, 1\>, specified in Section 708.1.4. Walls
shall be proportioned such that the design strength exceeds
the required strength.
The nominal shear strength shall be determined by Formula
(808-26).
fr = 0.166 ~, 861 kPa maximum (708-33)
708.2.5 Wall design ror in-plane loads.
708.2.5.1 General. The requirements of this section are
for the design of walls for in-plane loads.
The value of1'm shall not be less than 10.3 MPa nor greater
than 27.6 MPa.

V.,=0.166A mv w:: (708-26)

708.2.5.2 Reinforcement Reinforcement shall be in
accordance with the following :

1. Minimum reinforcement shall be provided in

708.2.4.6 Deflection design. The midheight accordance with Section 706.1.12.4, Item 2.3, for all
deflection, .6.., under service lateral and vertical loads seismic areas using this method of analysis.
(without load factors) shall be limited by the relation: 2. When the shear wall failure mode is in flexure, the
nominal flexural strength ofthe shear wall shall be at
As = 0.007 h (708-27) least 1.8 times the cracking moment strength of a
fully grouted wall or 3.0 times the cracking moment
P.6. effects shall be included in deflection calculation. The strength of a partially grouted wall from Formula
midheight deflection shall be computed with the following (708-30). ~
formula: 3. The amount of vertical reinforcement shall not be
less than one half the horizontal reinforcement. ,
4. Spacing of horizontal reinforcement within thi'
for Mser ::;: Mer region defined in Section 708.2.5.5, Item 3, shall not
(708-28) exceed three times the nominal wall thickness nor
61Omm.

5 Mer h 2 5(Mser Mcr)h2 708.2.5.3 Design strength. Design strength provided by

As= +---- the shear wall cross section in terms of axial force, shear
and moment shall be computed as the nominal strength
48 Em 19 48EJer
multiplied by the applicable strength-reduction factor, 1\>,
specified in Section 708.1.4.3.
for Mer < Mser <: U, (708-29)
708.2.5.4 Axial strength. The nominal axial strength of
the shear wall supporting axial loads only shall be
The cracking moment strength of the wall shall be
calculated by Formula (708-34).
determined from the formula:

(708-34)
(708-30)
Axial design strength pr.!?vided by the shear wall cross
The modulus of rupture,J,., shall be as follows:
section shall satisfy FormiJia (708-35).
For fully grouted hollow-unit masonry,

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

7-32 MASONRY
Pu s 0.80 ell Po (708-35)
708.2.5.5 Shear strength. Shear strength shall be as
follows:
1. The nominal shear strength shall be determined using
either Item 2 or 3 below. Maximum nominal shear
strength values are determined from Table 708-1.
2. The nominal shear strength of the shear wall shall be
determined from Formula (708-36), except as
provided in Item 3 below
(708-36)
Where:
Vm 0.083 C d"lmv W. (708-37)
and
n08-38)
3. For a shear wall whose nominal shear strength
exceeds the shear corresponding to development of its
nominal flexural strength, two shear regions exist.
For all cross sections within the region defined by the base
of the shear wall and a plane at a distance L", above the base
of the shear wall, the nominal shear strength shall be
determined from Formula (708-39).
v" Amv p,fy (708-39)
The required shear strength for this region shall be
calculated at a distance Lj2 above the base of the shear
wall, but not to exceed one half story height.
For the other region, the nominal shear strength of the shear
wall shall be determined from Formula (708-36).
708.2.5.6 Boundary members. Boundary
members shall be as follows:
1. Boundary members shall be provided at the
boundaries of shear walls when the compressive
strains in the wall exceed 0.0015. The strain shall be
determined using factored forces and R", equal to 1.5.
2. The minimum length of the boundary member shall
be three times the thickness of the wall, but shall
include all areas where the compressive strain per
Section 2108.2.6.2.7 is greater than 0.0015.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
3. Lateral reinforcement shall be provided for the
boundary elements. The lateral reinforcement shall
be a minimum of No. 3 bars at a maximum of
203mm spacing within the grouted core or equivalent
confinement which can develop an ultimate
compressive masonry strain of at least 0.006.
708.2.6 Design of moment-resisting wall frames.
708.2.6.1 General requirements.
708.2.6.1.1 Scope. The requirements of this section are for
the design of fully grouted moment-resisting waIl frames
constructed of reinforced open-end hollow-unit concrete or
hollow-unit clay masonry.
708.2.6.1.2 Dimensional limits. Dimensions shall be in
accordance with the following:
Beams. Clear span for the beam shall not be less than two
times its depth.
The nominal depth of the beam shall not be less than two
units or 406mm, whichever is greater. The nominal beam
depth to nominal beam width ratio shall not exceed 6.
The nominal width of the beam shall be the greater of
203mm or 1/26 ofthe clear span between pier faces.
Piers. The nominal depth of piers shall not exceed
2438mm. Nominal depth shall not be less than two full
units or 813mm, whichever is greater.
The nominal width of piers shall not be less than the
nominal width of the beam, nor less than 203mm or 1114 of
the clear height between beam faces, whichever is greater.
The clear height-to-depth ratio of pier shall not exceed 5.
708.2.6.1.3 Analysis. Member design forces shall be the
based on an analysis which considers the relative stiffness
of pier and beam member, including the stiffening influence
ofjoints.
The calculation of beam moment capacity for the
determination of pier design shall include any contribution
offloor slab reinforcement.
The out-of-plane drift ratio of all piers shall satisfY the drift
ratio limits specified in Section 2-47.
708.2.6.2 Design procedure.
708.2.6.2.1 Required strength. Except as required by the
Sections 708.2.6.7 and 708.2.6.2.8, the required strength
shall be determined in accordance with Section 708.1.3
 STRENGTH DESIGN DF MASONRY
708.2.6.2.2 Design strength. Design strength provided by
frame member cross sections in terms of axial force, shear
and moment shall be computed as the nominal strength
multiplied by the applicable strength-reduction factor. 4> ,
specified in Section 708.1.4.4
Members shall be proportioned such that the design
strength exceeds the required strength.
708.2.6.2.3 Design assumption for nominal strength. The
nominal strength of member cross sections shall be based
on assumptions prescribed in Section 70S.2.I.2.
The value ofI'm shall not be less than 10.3 MFa or greater
than 27.6 MFa.
708.2.6.2.4 Reinforcement. The nominal moment
strength at any section along a member shall not be less
than one fourth of the higher moment strength provided at
the two ends of the member.
Lap splices shall be as defined in Section 70S.2.2.7. The
center of the lap splice shall be the center of the member
clear length.
Welded splices and mechanical connection conforming to
Section 412.14.3. Item 1 through 4 of UBC, may be used
for splicing the reinforcement at any section provided not
more than alternate longitudinal bars are spliced at section,
and the distance between splices of alternate bars is at least
6IOmm along the longitudinal axis.
Reinforcement shall not have a specified yield strength
greater than 413 MFa. The actual yield strength based on
mill tests shall not exceed the specified yield strength times
1.3.
708.2.6.2.5 Flexural members (beam). Requirements of
this section apply to beams proportioned primarily to resist
flexure as follows.
The axial compressive force on beams due to factored loads
shall not exceed 0.10 Anl'm.
1. Longitudinal reinforcement. At any section of a
beam, each masonry unit through the beam depth
shall contain longitudinal reinforcement.
The variation in the longitudinal reinforcement area
between units at any section shall not be greater than
50 percent, except multiple No.4 bars shall not be
greater than 100 percent of the minimum area of
longitudinal reinforcement contained by anyone
unit, except where splices occur.
National structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
7-33
Minimum reinforcement ratio calculated over the
gross cross section shall be 0.002.
Maximum reinforcement ratio calculated over the
gross cross section shall be 0.15 f'm / /y
2. Transverse reinforcement. Transverse
reinforcement shall be hooked around top and
bottom longitudinal bars with a standard ISO-degree
hook, as defined in Section 708.2.2.4, and shall be
single pieces.
Within an end region extending one beam depth
from pier faces and at any region at which beam
flexural yielding may occur during seismic or wind
loading, maximum spacing of transverse
reinforcement shall not exceed one fourth the
nominal depth of the beam.
The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement
shall not exceed one half the nominal depth of the
beam.
Minimum reinforcement ratio shall be 0.0015
The first transverse bar shall not be more than 102
rom from the face ofthe pier.
708.2.6.2.6 Members subjected to axial force and
flexure.
The requirements set forth in this subsection apply to piers
proportioned to resist flexure in conjunction with axial
loads.
1. Longitudinal reinforcement. A minimum of four
longitudinal bars shall be provided at all sections of
every pier.
Flexural reinforcement shall be distributed across the
member depth. Variation in reinforcement area
between reinforced cells shall not exceed 50 percent.
Minimum reinforcement ratio calculated over the
gross cross section shall be 0.002
Maximum reinforcement ratio calculated over the
gross cross section shall be 0.15 f'/1/ / fr
Maximum bar diameter shall be one eight nominal
width of the pier.
2. Transverse reinforcement. Transverse
reinforcement shall be hooked around the extreme
longitudinal bars with standard 180-degree hook as
defined in Section 70S.2.2.4.
7-34 MASONRY
Within an end region extending one pier depth from
the end of the beam, and at any region at which
flexural yielding may 'occur during seismic or wind
loading, the maximum spacing of transverse
reinforcement shall not exceed one fourth the
nominal depth ofthe pier.
The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement
shall not exceed one half the nominal depth of the
pier.
The minimum transverse reinforcement ratio shall be
0.0015.
Lateral reinforcement. Lateral reinforcement shall
be provided to confine the grouted core when
compressive strains due to a.xial and bending forces
exceed 0.0015. corresponding to factored forces with
Rw equal to 1.5. The unconfined portion of the cross
section with strain exceeding 0.0015 shall be
neglected in computing the nominal strent"rth of the
section.
The total cross-sectional area of rectangular tie
feinforcement for the confined core shall not be less than:
(708-40)
Alternatively, equivalent confinement which can develop
an ultimate compressive strain of at least 0.006 may be
substituted for rectangular tie reinforcement.
708.2.6.2. i Pier design forces. Pier nominal moment
strength shall not be less than 1.6 times the pier moment
corresponding to the development of the beam plastic
hinges, except at the foundation leve1.
Pier axial load based on the development of beam plastic
bing.:s in accordance with the paragraph above and
illcluding tactored dead and live loads shall not exceed
0.15 A,J'/II'
The drift ratio 0f piers shall sati:;fy the limits specified in
Chapter 2.
The effects of cracking on member stiffness shall be
considered.
The base plastic hinge of the pier must form immediately
adjacent to the level of lateral support provided at the base
,)f toundation.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
708.1.6.2.8 Shear design.
1. General. Beam and pier nominal shear strength shall
not be less than 1.4 times the shears corresponding to
the development of the flexural yielding.
It shall be assumed in the calculation of member shear force
that moments of opposite sign act at the joint faces and that
the member is loaded with the tributary gravity load along
its span.
2. Vertical member shear strength. The nominal
shear strength shall be determined from Formula
(708-41).
(708-41)
Where:
(708-42)
and
(708-43)
The value of f:" shall be zero within an end region
extending one pier depth from beam laces and at any region
where pier flexural yielding may occur during seismic
loading, and at piers subjected to net tension factored loads.
The nominal pier shear strength, l'~, shall not exceed the
value determined from Table 708-1.
3 Beam shear strength. The nominal shear strength
shall be determined from Formula (708-44).
V~1l 0.01 Amv (808-44)
The value of JI:" shall be zero within an end region
extending one beam depth from pier faces and to any region
at which beam flexure yielding may occur during seismic
loading.
The nominal beam shear strength, Vn , shall be determined
from Formula (708-45).
1:, :s; 0.33 Amv V. (708-45)
708.2.6.2.9 Juints.
I. General Requirements. Where reinforcing bars
extend through a joint, the joint dimensions shall be
proportioned such that
 STRENGTH DESIGN OF MASONRY &
EMPIRICAL DESIGN OF MASONRY
(708-46)
SECTION 709. EMPIRICAL DESIGN
and
(708-47)
The grout strength shall not exceed 34,4 MPa for the
purposes of Formula (708-46) and (708-47).
Joint shear farces shall be calculated on the assumption that
the stress in all flexural tension reinforcement of the beams
at that pier faces is 1.4.1;,.
Strength of joint shall be governed by the appropriate
strength reduction factors specified in Section 708.1.4.4.
Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminating in a pier shall
be extended to the far face of the pier and anchored by a
standard 90 or 180 degree hook., as defined in Section
708.2.2.4, bent back to the beam.
Pier longitudinal reinforcement terminating in a beam shall
be extended to the far face of the beam and anchored by a
standard 90 or 180 degree hook., as defined in Section
708.2.2.4, bent back to the beam.
2. Transverse reinforcement. Special horizontal joint
shear reinforcement crossing a potential comer to
comer diagonal joint shear crack., and anchored by
standard hooks, as defined in Section 708.2.2.4,
around the extreme pier reinforcing bars shall be
provided such that
0.5 Yfh I h (708-48)
Vertical shear forces may be considered to be carried by a
combination of masonry shear resisting mechanisms and
truss mechanism involving intermediate pier reinforcing
bars.
3, Shear strength. The nominal horizontal shear strength
ofthe joint shall not exceed:
0.58 fm
2.4 MPa, whichever is less.
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
7-35
OF MASONRY
709.1 HEIGHT.
Building relying on masonry walls for lateral load
resistance shall not exceed 10.668 m in height.
709.2 LATERAL STABILITY.
Where the structure depends on masonry walls for lateral
stability, shear walls shall be provided parallel to the
direction ofthe lateral forces resisted.
Minimum nominal thickness on masonry shear walls shall
be203b mm.
In each direction in which shear walls are required for
lateral stability, the minimum cumulative length of shear
walls provided shall be 0.4 times the dimension of the
building. The cumulative length of shear walls shall not
include openings,
The maximum spacing of shear walls shall not exceed the
ratio listed in Table 709-1.
709.3 COMPRESSIVE STRESSES.
709.3.1 General. Compressive stresses in masonry due to
vertical dead loads plus live loads, excluding wind q{
seismic loads, shall be determined in accordance with
Section 709.4.3. Dead and live loads shall be in accordance
with this code with permitted live load reductions.
709.3.2 AUowable stresses. The compressive stresses in
masonry shall not exceed the values set forth
in Table 709-2. The allowable stresses given in Table
709-2 for the weakest combination of the units and mortar
used in any load wythe shall be used for all loaded wythes
of muItiwythe walls.
709.3.3 Stress calculations. Stresses shall be calculated
based on specified rather than nominal dimensions.
Calculated compressive stresses shall be determined by
dividing the design load by the gross cross-sectional area of
the member. The area of openings, chases or recesses in
walls shall not be included in the gross cross-sectional area
ofthe wall.
709.3.4 Anchor bolts. Bolt values shall not exceed those
set forth in Table 709-3.
7-36 MASONRY
709.4 LATERAL SUPPORT.
Masonry walls shall be laterally supported in either the
horizontal or vertical direction not exceeding the intervals
set forth in Table 709-4.
Lateral support shall be provided by cross walls, pilasters,
buttresses or structural framing members horizontally or by
floors, roof or structural framing members vertically.
Except for parapet walls, the ratio of height to nominal
thickness for cantilever walls shall not exceed 6 for solid
masonry or 4 for hollow masonry.
In computing the ratio for cavity walls, the value of
thickness shall be the sums of the nominal thickness of the
inner and outer wythes of the masonry. In walls composed
of different classes of units and mortars, the ratio of height
or length to thickness shall not exceed that allowed for the
weakest of the combinations of units and mortar of which
the member is composed.
709.5 MINIMUM TmCKNESS
709.5.1 General. The nominal thickness of masonry
bearing walls in buildings more than one story in height
shall not be less than 200 mm. Solid masonry walls in one
storey buildings may be of 152 mm nominal 'thickness
when not over 2745 mm in height, provided that when
gable construction is used, an additional 1830 mm is
permitted to the peak ofthe gable.
EXCEPTION:
The thickness of unreinforced grouted brick masonry walls
may be 50mm less than required by this section, but in no
case less than J50 mm.
709.5.2 Variation in tbickness. Where a change in
thickness due to minimum thickness occurs between floor
levels, the greater thickness shall be carried up to the higher
floor level.
709.5.3 Decrease in thickness. Where walls of masonry
of hollow units or masonry-bonded hollow walls are
decrease in thickness, a course or courses of solid masonry
shall be constructed between the walls below and the
thinner wall above, or special units or construction shall be
used to transmit the loads from face shells or wythes to the
walls below.
709.5.4 Parapets. Parapet walls shall be at least 200 mm
in thickness and their height shall not exceed three times
their thickness. The parapet wall shall not be thinner than
the wall below.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines
709.5.5 Foundation walls. Mortar used in masonry
foundation walls shall be either Type M or S.
Where the height of unbalanced fill (height of finished
grade above basement floor or inside grade) and the height
of the wall between lateral support does not exceed 2438
mm, and when the equivalent fluid weight of unbalanced
fill does not exceed 480 kg/m2, the minimum thickness of
foundation walls shall be as set forth in Table 709-5.
Maximum depths of unbalanced fill permitted in Table
709-5 may be increased with the approval of the building
official when local soil conditions warrant such an increase.
Where the height of unbalanced fill, height between lateral
supports or equivalent fluid weight of unbalanced fill
exceeds that set forth above, foundation walls shall be
designed in accordance with Chapter 3.
709.6 BOND.
709.6.1 General. The facing and backing of multiwythe
masonry walls shall be bonded in accordance with this
section.
709.6.2 Masonry headers. Where the facing and backing
of solid masonry construction are bonded by masonry
headers, not less than 4 percent of the wall surface of each
face shall be composed of headers extending not less than
76 mm into the backing. The distance between adjacent
full-length headers shall not exceed 610 mm either
vertically or horizontally. In walls in which a single header
does not extend through the wall, headers from opposite
sides shall overlap at least 76 mm, or headers from opposite
sides shall be covered with another header course
overlapping the header below at least 76 mm.
Where two or more hollow units are used to make up the
thickness of the wall, the stretcher courses shall be bonded
at vertical intervals not exceeding 864 mm by lapping at
least 76 mm over the unit below, or by lapping at vertical
intervals not exceeding 432 mm with units which are at
least 50 percent greater in thickness than the units below.
709.6.3 Wall ties. Where the facing and backing of
masonry walls are bonded with 4.8 mm diameter wall ties
or metal ties of equivalent stiffness embedded in the
horizontal mortar joints, there shall be at least one metal tie
for each 0.42 m2, of wall area. Ties in alternate courses
shall be staggered, the maximum vertical distance between
ties shall not exceed 610 mm, and the maximum horizontal
distance shall not exceed 914 mm. Rods bent to rectangular
shape shall be used with hollow-masonry units laid with the
cells vertical. In other walls, the ends of ties shall be bent
to 90-degree angles to provide hooks not less than 50 mm
long. Additional ties shall be provided at all openings,
 EMPIRICAL DESIGN OF MASONRY
spaced not more than 914 mm apart around the perimeter
and within 305 mm of the opening.
The facing and backing of masonry walls may be bonded
with prefabricated joint reinforcement. There shall be at
least one cross wire serving as a tie for each 0.25 m2 of wall
area. The vertical spacing of the joint reinforcement shall
not exceed 406 mm. Cross wires of prefabricated joint
reinforcement shall be at least No. 9 gage wire. The
longitudinal wire shall be embedded in mortar.
709.6.4 Longitudinal bond. In each wythe of masonry,
head joints in successive courses shall be offset at least one
fourth of the unit length or the walls shall be reinforced
longitudinally as required in Section 706.1.12.3, Item 4.
709.7 ANCHORAGE.
709.7.1 Intersecting walls. Masonry walls depending on
one another for lateral support shall be anchored or bonded
at locations where they meet or intersect by one of the
following methods:
1. Fifty percent of the units at the intersection shall be
laid in an overlapping pattern, with alternating units
having a bearing of not less than 76 mm on the unit
below.
2. Walls shall be anchored by steel connectors having a
minimum section of 6.4 mm by 38 mm with ends
bent up at least 51 mm, or with cross pins to form
anchorage. Such anchors shall be at least 610 mm
long and the maximum spacing shall be 1219 mm
vertically.
3. Walls shall be anchored by joint reinforcement
spaced at a maximum distance of 203 mm vertically.
Longitudinal rods of such reinforcement shall be at
least NO.9 gage and shall extend at least 762 mm in
each direction at the intersection.
4. Interior nonbearing walls may be anchored at their
intersection, at vertical spacing of not more than 406
mm with joint reinforcement or 6.4 mm mesh
galvanized hardware cloth.
5. Other metal ties, joint reinforcement or anchors may
be used, provided they are spaced to provide
equivalCJlt area of anchorage to that required by this
section.
709.7.2 Floor and roof anchorage. Floor and roof
diaphragms providing lateral support to masonry walls shall
be connected to the masonry walls by one of the following
methods:
National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1
7-37
1. Wood floor joists bearing on masonry walls shall be
anchored to the -\!tall by approved metal strap anchors
1
I
at intervals not exceeding 1829 mm. Joists parallel to
the wall shall be anchored with metal straps spaced
not more than 1829 mm on center extending over
and under and secured to at least three joists.
Blocking shall be provided between joists at each
strap anchor.
2. Steel floor joists shall be anchored to masonry walls
with No.3 bars, or their equivalent, spaced not more
than 1829 mm on center. Where joists are parallel to
the wall, anchors shall be located at joists cross
bridging.
3. Roof structures shall be anchored to masonry walls
with 12.7 mm bolts at 1829 mm on center or their
equivalent. Bolts shall extend and be embedded at
least 381 mm into the masonry, or be hooked or
welded to not less than 129 mm2 of bond beam
reinforcement placed not less than 152 mm from the
top of the wall.
709.7.3 Walls adjoining structural framing. Where
walls are dependent on the structural frame for lateral
support, they shall be anchored to the structural members
with metal anchors or keyed to the structural members.
Metal anchors shall consist of 12.7 mm bolts spaced at a
maximum of 1219 mm on center and embedded at least 102
mm into the masonry, or their equivalent area.
709.8 UNBURNED CLAY MASONRY.
709.8.1 General. Masonry of stabilized clay unburned
units shall not be used in any building more than one story
in height. The unsupported height of every wall of
unburned clay units shall not be more than 10 times the
thickness of such walls. Bearing walls shall in no case be
less than 406 mm in thickness. All footing walls which
support masonry of unburned clay units shall extend to an
elevation not less than 152 mm aQove the adjacent ground
at all points.
709.8.2 Bolts. Bolt values shall not exceed those set forth
in Table 709-6.
709.9 STONE MASONRY.
709.9.1 General. Stone masonry is that form of
construction made with natural or cast stone in which the
units are laid and set in mortar with all joints filled.
709.9.2 Construction. In ashlar masonry, bond stones
uniformly distributed shall be provided to the extent of not
less than 10 percent of the area of exposed facets. Rubble
stone masonrv 610 mm Or less in thickness shall have bond
7-38 MASONRY

stones with a maximum spacing of 914 mm vertically and 710.5 SIZE OF PANELS.

914 mm horizontally and, if the masonry is of greater Glass block panels for exterior walls shall not exceed

thickness than 610 mm, shall have one bond stone for each 13.4m2 of unsupported wall surface or 4572 mm in any

0.56 m2 of wall surface on both sides. dimension. For interior walls, glass block panels shall not

exceed 23.2 m2 of unsupported area or 7620 mm in any

709.9.3 Minimum thickness. The thickness of stone dimension.

masonry bearing walls shall not be less than 406 mm.

710.6 EXPANSION JOINTS.

Glass block shall be provided with expansion joints along

the sides and top, and these joints shall have sufficient

thickness to accommodate displacements of the supporting

structure, but not less than 9.5 mm. Expansion joints shall

SECTION 710 - GLASS MASONRY be entirely free of mortar and shall be filled with resilient

material.

710.1 GENERAL. 710.7 REUSE OF UNITS.

Masonry of glass blocks may be used in non-load-bearing Glass block units shall not be reused after being removed

exterior or interior walls and in openings which might from an existing panel.

otherwise be filled with windows, either isolated or in

continuous bands, provided the glass block panels have a
minimum thickness of 76 mm at the mortar joint and the
mortared surfaces of the blocks are treated for mortar
bonding. Glass block may be solid or hollow and may
I;ontain inserts.

710.2 MORTAR JOINTS.

Glass block shall be laid in Type S or N mortar. Both
vertical and horizontal mortar joints shall be at least 6 mm
and not more than 9.5 mm thick and shall be completely
filled. All mortar contact surfaces shall be treated to ensure
adhesion between mortar and glass.

710.3 LATERAL SUPPORT.

Glass panels shall be laterally supported along each end of
the paneL

Lateral support shall be provided by panel anchors spaced

not more than 406 mm on center or by channels. The
lateral support shall be capable of resisting the horizontal
design forces determined in Chapter 2 or a minimum of
2920 Newtons per linear meter of wall, whichever is
greater. The connection shall accommodate movement
requirements of Set.:tion 710.6.

710.4 REINFORCEMENT.
Glass block panels shall have joint reinforcement spaced
not more than 406 mm on center and located in the mortar
bed joint extending the entire length of the panel. A
lapping oflongitudinal wires for a minimum of 152 mm is
required for joint reinforcement splices. Joint
reinforcement shall also be placed in the bed joint
immediately below and above openings in the panel. Joint
reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 385 and A 641.
Joint reinforcement in exterior panels shall be hot-dip
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 385 and A 641.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 7-39

TABLE 703-1- MORTAR PROPORTIONS FOR UNIT MASONRY

PROPORTIONSBYVOLUME(CEMENTnnOUSMA~~ AGGREGATE
MEASURED
Portland Cement Masonry Cement Mortar Cement Jlydrated Lime or IN A DAMP, LOOSE
MORTAR TYPE or Blended Cement M S N M S N Lime PuttY. CONDITION
Cement -Lime M I - - - - - - y.
S I - - - - - - over Y. to It,
N I - - - - - - over It, to I Y.
0 1 - - - - - - over 1 Y. to 2 V.
Mortr.r cement M I - - - - - I Not less than 2 Y. and not
M
- v.,- - - - I - - more than 3 times the smn
S - - - - - I of the separate volmnes of
S - - - - - 1 - cementitious materials.
N - - - - - - I
Masonry cement M I - - I - - -
M - 1 - - - - -
S It, - - I - - -
S - - I - - - -
N - - - 1 - - -
I 0 - - - I - - -
Masonry cement confomung to the reqmrements ofUBe Standard 21-11.
2 Mortar
cement confonning to the requirements ofUBe Standard 21-14.

TABLE 703-2 - GROUT PROPORTIONS BY VOLUME 1

..-.....,
PARTS BY VOLUME OF PARTS BY VOLUME OF AGGREGATE MEASURED IN A DAMP,
I TYPE PORTLAND CEMENT HYDRATED LIME OR LOOSE CONDITION I
OR BLENDED CEMENT LIME PUTTY Fine I Coarse
Fine 1 oto 110 2 Y. to 3 times the smn of the volmnes
gr<>ut
Coarse I oto lito
ofthe cementitious materials 1
2 y. to 3 times the smn of the volmnes 11 to 2 times the sum of the volumes
grout
.. of the cementitious materials of the cementitious materials
. -.-J
Grout shall attam a nnmmum CompressIve strength at 28 days of 13.8 MPa. The building official may requrre a compresslve field strength test ot grout ~
made in accordance with DEC Standard 21-18.

TABLE 704-1~ GROUTING LIMITATIONS

, MINIMUM DIMENSIONS OF THE TOfAL CLEAR
AREAS WITHIN GROUT SPACES AND CELLSlJ
GROUT TYPE GROUT POUR MAXIMUM HEIGHT (feet}l X 15.4 formm
x 304.8 for mm Multiwythe Masonry HaUow-unit Masonry
Fine I % I It,x2
Fine 5 lit, I It, x 2
Fine 8 IY., 1\1, x2
Fine 12 1\1, l'hx3
Fine 24 2 3x3
Coarse I I \1, I \1,x3

~
Coarse 5 2 2 \1,x3
Coarse 8 2 3x3
Coarse 12 2\1, 3x3
Coarse 24 I 3 3x4
I
See also Sectton 2104.6.
2 The actual grout space or grout cell dimensions must be larger than the smn of the following items (I) The required minimmn dimensions of total clear
areas in Table 704-1; (2) The width of any mortar projections within the space; and (3) The horizontal projections of the diameters of the horizontal
reinforcing bars within a cross section of the grout spaoe or cell.
) The minimmn dimensions ofthe total clear areas shall be made up of one or more open areas with at least one area being 19 rom or greater in width.

National Structural Code of the Philippines,' Volume 1

 7-40

TABLE 705-1 - SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY,fm (psi) BASED ON

SPECIFYING THE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY UNITS
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CLAY I SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY f'm
MASONRY UNITS 1,2 Type M or S Mortar 3 Type N Mortar'
(psi) I (psi) (psi)
x 6.89 for kPa
14,000 or more I 5,300 4,400
12,000 4,700 3,800
10,000 4,000 3,300
8,000 3,350 2,700
6,000 2,700 2,200
4,000 2,000 1,600
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF SPECIFIED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY, rift
CONCRETE MASONRYUNITS1.4 Type M or S Mortar~ I Type N Mortarl
(psi) (psi) I (psi)
x 6.89 for kPa i
4,800 or more 3,000 2,800

3750
2,500 2,350

2,800
2,000 1,850

1,900
1,500 1,350
1250 1,000 950
. .
COIhpreSSlve strength of sohd clay masonry UnIts IS based on gross area. Compressrve strength of hollow clay masonry UnIts IS based on IIllIll1llUnI net area .
YaIues may be interpolated. When hollow clay masonry units are grouted, the grout shall confOlm to the proportion in Table 703-2.
1 Assumed assemblage. The specified compressive strength of masonry /' m is based on gross area strength when uSmg solid units or solid grouted masonry
and net area strength when using ungrouted hollow units.
3 Mortar for unit masonry, proportion specification, as specified in Table 703-1. These values apply to portland cement - lime mortars without added
air - entraining materials.
4y,lues may be interpolated. In grouted concrete masonry, the compressive strength of grout shall be equal to or greater than the compressive strength ofthe
concrete masonry units.

TABLE 707-1- ALLOWABLE TENSION, B" FOR EMBEDDED ANCHOR

BOLTS FOR CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY, pounds1,2,3

EMBEDMENT LENGTH, lin or EDGE DISTANCE, 1M (inches)

I'm'
(psi) 2 3 4 5 6 8 10
:
x25.4formm
X 6.89 for kPa x 4.45 forN
i 1,500 240 550 970 1,520 2,190 3,890 6,080
1,800 270 600 1,070 1,670 ' 2,400 4,260 6,660
2,000 280 630 1,120 1,760 : 2,520 4,500 7,020
2,500 310 710 1260 1,960 ! 2,830 5030 7850
3,000 340 770 1,380 ! 2,150 3,100 5,510 8,600
4,000 400 890 1,590 i 2,480 3580 6,360 9,930
5,000 440 1,000 1,780 2,780 4,000 7,110 11,100
6000 480 1,090 1950 3040 4,380 7,790' 12,200
-
The allowable tension values m Table 707 1 are based on compresslVl;l strength of masonry assemblages. Where Yield strength ofanchor bolt steel governs,
the allowable tension in pounds is given in Table 707-2.
l Yalues are for bolts of at least A 307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Section 706.2.4.1
lYalues shown are for work with or without special inspection.,

Association of structural Engineers of the Philippines

 7-41

TABLE 707-2 - ALLOW ABLE TENSION, B" FOR EMBEDDED ANCHOR

BOLTS FOR CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY, pounds 1,2

ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER (inchesl

x25.4formm
% I % I ~ I % I % I 'Va I 1 I 1%
x 4.45 CorN I

350 I 790 I 1410 l 2210 I 3180 I 4330 I 5650 I 7160

I Values are for bolts of at least A 307 quality. Bolts sball be those specdied In Sechon 706.2.14.1
2 Values shown are for work with or without special inspection.

TABLE 707-3- ALLOWABLE SHEAR, B", FOR EMBEDDED ANCHOR

BOLTS FOR CLAY AND CONCRETE MASONRY, pounds 1,2

I
ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETER (inches)
I'm x 25.4 for mm
I (psi) I % Yz % % 'Va 1 1%
1,500 480 850 1,330 1,780 1,920 I 2,050 2,170
1,800 480 850 1,330 1,860 2,101 I 2,150 2280
2,000 480 850 1,330 1,900 2,060 2,200 2,340
2,500 480 850 1330 1,900 2,180 2,330 2,470
I 3,000 480 I 850 1,330 1,900 2,280 2440 2,590
4,000 I 480 850 1,330 1900 2,450 2,620 2,780
5000 480 ! 850 1330 1900 2,590 2,770 2,940
6000 480 850 1330 1,900 2600 2,900 3,080
I
Values are for bolts ofat least A 307 quality. Bolts sball be those specified In Sectl011706.2.14.1.
2 Values shown are for work with or without special inspection.

TABLE 707-4- MINIMUM DIAMETERS OF BEND

BAR SIZE MINIMUM DIAMETER

10 mm through 25 mm 6 bar diameters
28 mm tbrou~ 36 mm 8 bar diameters

TABLE 707-5- ALLOWABLE FLEXURAL TENSION (psi)

MORTAR TYPE
Cement -lime and Mortar Cement Masonry Cement
Mol'S I N Mol'S N
UNIT TYPE x 6.89 for kPa

Normal to bed Joints

Solid
40 30 24 15

.
Hollow
Normal to head joints
Solid
25

80
I 19

60
15

48
9

30
Ul!~
I

50 I 38 i 30 I 18

NationiJl Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

7-42

TABLE 708-1- MAXIMUM NOMINAL SHEAR STRENGTH VALUES 1,2

MlVd
:::;0.25 !

I
2':1.00

A1 is the maximum bending moment that occurs simultaneously WIth the shear load Vat the section under consideration. InteIpolation
may be by straight line for AflVd values between 0.25 and 1.00.
2 Vn is in pounds (N), and j'm is in pounds per square inches (1cPa).

TABLE 708-2- NOMINAL SHEAR STRENGTH COEFFICIENT

:::;0.25 2.4
> l.00 1.2
Ai is the maximum bending moment that occurs simultaneously with the shear load Vat the section under consideration. InteIpolation

!
may be by straight line tOr AJ.Td ''alues between 0.25 and 1.00.

TABLE 709-1- SHEAR WALL SPACING REQUIREMENTS FOR EMPIRICAL DESIGN OF MASONRY

MAXIMUM RATIO
Shear Wall Spaciog to
I FLOOR OR ROOF CONSTRUCTION Shear Wall Leogth
Cast-in-place concrete 5:1
Precast Concrete 4:1
i Metal deck with concrete fill 3:1
Metal deck with no fill 2:1
I Wood Diaphragm 2:1

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 7-43

TABLE 709-2- ALLOWABLE COMPRESSIVE STRESSES FOR EMPIRICAL DESIGN OF MASONRY

ALLOWABLE COMPRESSIVE STRESSES} GROSS CROSS

I

t__
SECTIONAL AREA (psi)
CONSTRUCTION: COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF UNIT, GROSS AREA x 6.89 for kPa
X 6.89 for kPa T~ M or S Morta:::..r__ ~'N Mortar----J
Solid masonry of brick and other solid units of clay or shale; , I
Sand-lime or concrete brick: I I
8,000 plus, psi 350 300 I
4,500 psi 225 ' 200
2,500 psi 160 140
1------'2-1,5=--::00 psi _ _----=-11:.;,,5_ _ _ _- t - _ _ 100 ,
, Grouted masonry, of clay or shale; sand-lime or concrete: I,

4,500 plus, psi 275 200,

2,500 psi 215 140
1,500 psi 175 100
I Solid masonry of solid concrete m=nry units ---
3,000 plus, psi 225 200

2,000 psi
160 140

1200 pSI.
115_ _ _---i_ _ _---=-1O-=-0'---_ _--i
Masonry of hollow load-bearing units:
2,000 plus, psi 140 120 I
1,500 psi 115 100 .
1,000 psi 75 70 I
700 psi
Hollow walls (cavity or masonry bonded)k solid units:

60
-------+-------~~
2,500 plus, psi
160 140 I
,------1_,500 psi 115 100 I
Hotlow units 75 70 I
Stone ashlar masonry: I
Granite 720 640
Limestone or marble 450 400
Sandstone or cast stone 360 320
Rubble stone masonry
Coarse, rough or random
I 120 100

Unburned clay masonry .. I 30

I Linear mterpollltton may be used for detemllrung allowable stresses for masonry umts havmg. compressive strengths which are intermediate behveen those
given in the table. '
2 Where floor and floor loads are carned upon v\iythe, the gross cross-sectional area is that of the wythe under load. If both wythes are loaded, the gross
cross-sectional area is that of the wall minus the the area of the cavity between the wythes.

TABLE 709-3- ALLOWABLE SHEAR ON BOLTS FOR EMPIRICALLY

DESIGNED MASONRY EXCEPT UNBURNED CLAY UNITS

I
DIAMETER BOLT EMBEDMENT SSOLID MASONRY I
GROUTED MASONRY
'" (inches) (inches) (shear: in pounds) I {shear in pounds} I,
x 25.4 for mm x 4.45 for N
Yz 4 350 550
% 4 500 I 750
I
,..----'
% 5 750 i 1,100 I
I
, % 6 1,000 I 1,500
I 7 1,250 I 1,8501 i
1%
I 8 1,500 2,250": I
.. i . .
I An addittonal2 fiches of embedment shall be proHded for anchor bolts located m the top of colurrms tor bUlldmgs located m Selsnnc Zones 2 and 4 .
2 Permitted only with not less than 2,500 pounds per square inch (l7.24l\..1Pa) units.

National Structural Code of the PhiHppines, Volume 1

 7-44

TABLE 709-4- WALL LATERAL SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS

FOR EMPIRICAL DESIGN OF MASONRY

CONSTRUCTION MAXIMUM lit or hit

Bearing walls
Solid or solid grouted 20
All other 18
Nonbearing walls
Exterior 18
Interior 36

TABLE 709-5 - THICKNESS OF FOUNDATION WALLS FOR EMPIRICAL DESIGN OF MASONRY

NONUNALTEUCKNESS MAXIMUM DEPTH OF UNBALANCED FILL

(inches) (feet)
FOUNDATION WALL CONSTRUCTION x25.4formm x 30t8 for mm
Masonry of hollow units, ungrouted 8 4
10 5 !
12 6
Masonry of solid units 8 5
10 6
12 ! 7 I
Masonry of h.ollow or solid units, fuUy grouted 8 7
10 8 I
12 8 I
!
Masonry of hollow units reinforced vertically with. 8 7
NO.4 bars and grout at 24" O.c. Bars located
Not less than 4Y2 from pressure side of wall. I
I

TABLE 709-6 -ALLOWABLE SHEAR ON BOLTS FOR MASONRY OF UNBURNED CLAY UNITS

DIAMETER OF BOLTS EMBEDMENTS SHEAR

(iocbes) (iocbes) (pooods)
I x 25.4 for mm
Y2 - -
% 12 200
% 15 300
Va 18 400
1 21 500
Pis 24 600

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 7-45

TABLE 710-1- RADIUS OF GYRATION1 FOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNlTS2

NOMINAL WIDTH OF WALL (inches)

I GROUT SPACING x. 25.4 for mm
~ (inches)
a. 25.4 for mm 4 6 8 10 12
C=.. Solid Grouted 1.04 I 1.62 2.19 2.77 3.34
I 16 1.16 1.79 2.43 3.04 3.6~---j
!
24 1.21 1.87 2.53 3.17 3.82
: 32 1.24 1.91 2.59 3.25 3.91
i 40 1.26 1.94 I 2.63 3.30 3.97
i
48 1.27 1.96 2.66 3.33 4.02
i 56 1.28 1.98 2.68 3.36 4.05 ------4
i 64 ~.--
1.29 1.99 2.70 3.38 i
4.08
I
72 1.30 2.00 2.71 3.40 4.LO
I No .Imlut . ,
1.32 2.08 2.84 3.55 4.29
1 For smgle-v'y1:he masonry or for an mdlVldual wythe of a CRVlty walL

r=..J J/Ae
2 The radius of gyration shall be based on the specified dimensions of the masonry units or shall be in accordance with the values shown which are based on
the minimum dimensions ofhollow concrete masonry unit face shells and webs in accordance with UBC Standard 21-4 for two cell units.

TABLE 710-2- RADIDS OF GYRATION1 FOR CLAY MASONRY UNIT LENGTH, 16 INCHES2

NOMINAL WIDTH OF WALL (inches)~_ _ _ _ _ ---j

GROUT SPACING
(inches)
X 25.4for mm =:::::J
I x25.4formm 4 6 S ! 10 I 12
Solid Grouted 1.06 1.64 2.23 2.81 3.39 I

16 1.16 1.78 2.42 3.03 I 3.65

! I
I",. 24 1.20 1.85 2.51 3.13 3.77 i

i 32 1.23 1.88 2.56 3.19 3.85 i

40 1.25 1.91 2.59 3.23 3.90

I
48 1.26 1.93 2.61 3.26 3.93
56 1.27 1.94 2.63 3.28 3.95
1.27 1.95 2.64 I 3.30 3.97
64
72 1.28 1.95 2.65 3.31 3.99
r-
l'
Nowout , . 1.32 2.02 2.75 i 3.42 4.13 I
For single-wythe masonry or for an mdiVldual wythe of a CRVlty wall.

r=..J11Ae

2 The radius of gyration shall be based on the specified dimensions of the masonry units or shall be in accordance with the values shown which are based on
the minimum dimensions ofhollow clay concrete masonry face shells and webs in accordance with UBC Standard 21-1 for two cell units.

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

 7-46

l
TABLE 710-3- RADIUS OF GYRATION FOR CLAY MASONRY UNIT LENGTH, 12 INCHES2

NOMINAL WIDTH OF WALL (inches)

GROUT SPACING x 25.4 (ormm
(inches)
x 25.4 (ormm 4 6 8 10 12
Solid Grouted 1.06 1.65 2.24 2.82 3.41
12 1.15 1.77 2.40 3.00 3.61
18 1.19 1.82 2.47 3.08 3.71
24 1.21 1.85 2.51 3.12 3.76
30 1.23 1.87 2.53 3.15 3.80
36 1.24 1.88 2.55 3.17 3.82
42 1.24 1.89 2.56 3. ]9 3.84
48 1.25 1.90 2.57 3.20 3.85
54 1.25 1.90 2.58 3.21 3.86
60 1.26 1.91 2.59 3.21 3.87

66 1.26 1.91 2.59 3.22 3.88

72 1.26 1.91 2.59 3.22 3.88
I No grout 1.29 1.95 2.65 3.28 3.95
IFors'mgle-W)1.hemasomy or for an individual e of a eavi . wall.

2 Theradius of gyration shall be based on the specified dimensions of the masomy units or shall be in accordance with the values shoVlu VI hich are based on
the minimum dimensions of hollow clay concrete masomy lace shells and webs in accordance with UBC Standard 21-\ for two cell units.

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines

 CONVERSION FACTORS

TOODvert to mUittDl,y b~
LENGTH
1 mile (U.S. statue) Ian 1.609.344
1 yd rn 0.9144
1ft m 0.3048
nnn 304.8
lin mm 25.4
AREA
1 mile' (U.S. statue) km' 2.589998
1 acre (U.S. survey) ha 0.4046873
m2 4046.873
1 yd 2 m2 0.8361274
1 ft2 m2 0.092 903 04
1 in
2 mm2 645.16
VOLUME, MODULUS OF SECfION
!' 1 acre ft m' 1233.489
3 3 0.7645549
1 yd
m
100 board ft
m3 0.2359737
1 ft3
m3 0.02831685
L(dm~ 28.3168
1 in3 mm3 16387.06
mL(cm~ 16.3871
1 barrel (42 U.S. gallons) rn) 0.1589873
(FLUID) CAPACITY
1 gal (U.S. liquid) LU 3.785412
1 qt (lJ. S. liquid) mL 946.3529
1 pt lUS. liquid) mL 473.1765
1 fl oz (U.S) mL
, 29.5735
1 gal (U. S. liquid) m- 0.003785412
1 gallon (UK) approx. 1.2 gal (U.S.) U 1 liter approx. 0.001 cubic meter
SECOND MOMENT OF AREA
1 in4 mrn4 4162314
m4 4162314 x 10'7
PLANE ANGLE
1 (degree) rad 0.01745329
mrad 17.453.29
l' (minute) urad 290.8882
I" (second) urad 4.848137
VELOCITY, SPEED
1 ftls mls 0.3048
1 milelh kmIh
mls
1.609344
0.44704

VOLUME RATE OF FLOW
1 ft'/s m'/s 0.02831685
1 ft 3/min Lis 0.471 9474
1 gal/min Lis 0.0630902
1 gal/min m3/rnin 0.0038
1 gallh mUs l.051 50
1 million gal/d Lis 43.8126
I acre ftls m 3/s 1233.49
TEMPERATURE INTERVAL
1"F CorK 0.555556
j/90C = 5/9K
EQUIVALENT TEMPERATURE (t",-.=T.,...273.15)
toF toe toF=9/j 1oc+32
(ContinlWti)

National Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume 1

~
-_._-----_._------_....-.:
 CONVERSION FACTORS-(Continued)

To convert to muJtiplybv
MASS
1 ton (short..) metric ton 0.907185
kg 907.1847
Hb kg 0.4535924
loz 28.34952
"1 long ton (2,240 lb) ~ 1016.047
MASS PER UNIT AREA
I Ib/ft' kglm2 4.882428
2 2
10Z/Yd 'i/m 33.90575
1 ozlft2 f4m2 305.1517
DENSITY (MASS PER UNIT VOLUME)
1 Ib/ft'. kglm3 16.01846
Ilblyd3 kglm3 0.5932764
1 tonlvd' t/m3 1.186553 I
FORCE
1 tonf (ton-force) kN 8.89644
1 kip (1,000 Ibf) kN 4.44822
1 Ibf(pound-force) N 4.44822
MOMENT OF FORCE, TORQUE
I1bfft N'm 1.355818
1 Ibfin Nm 0.1129848
1 {onMl: kNm 2.711 64
I kip-ft kNm 1.35582
FORCE PER UNIT LENGTH
I lbflft NIm 14.5939
! Ibffm NIm 175.1268
I tonflft kNlm 29.1878
PRESSURE, STRESS, MODULUS OF ELASTICITY (FORCE PER UNIT AREA) (1 Pa = 1 N/m~)
1 tonflin' MFa 13.7895
1 t011flft2 kPa 95.7605
I kiplin2 MFa 6.894757
IIbffm2 kPa 6.894757
IlbflW Pa 47.8803
Atmosphere kPa 101.3250
1 inch mercury kPa 3.37685
I foot (water column at 32"F) kPa 2.98898
! WORK. ENERGY, HEAT (lJ = INm = lW "8)
1 kWh (550 ftlbf/s) MJ 3.6
1 Btu (Tnt.Table) kJ 1.055056
J 1055.056
1 ftlbf J 1.355818
i COEFFICIENT OF HEAT TRANSFER
I Btu/(W.h."F) W/(m'K) 5.678263
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
1 Btu/efth"F) . W/(mK) 1.730735
ILLUMINANCE
I ImIftz (footcandle) Ix (lm() 10.763.91
LUMINANCE
I cdlft' cdinr' 10.7639
1 foot lambert cdlm2 3.426259
1 lambert kcdlm2 3.183099

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines